California

Welcome to The California Workshop Manual at Ferrari
Publication Date: 31/12/2018
Disclaimer: Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this Workshop Manual, the
manufacturer（Ferrari) shall not in any circumstances be held responsible for any inaccuracy or the consequences
thereof. The manufacturer(Ferrari) reserves the right to vary specifications without notice in accordance with its
policy of continual product improvement.
Download workshop Manual as PDF

01.01 Consultation
Consulting the manual
The manual is divided into sections, with each section identified by a different letter.
Each section is divided into chapters, identified by the letter indicating the relative section followed by a
sequential number.
Each chapter is, in turn, divided into paragraphs, identified by the letter indicating the relative section, the
chapter number and a sequential number, separated from the former by a point.
This format is used for all references to chapters or paragraphs in other sections.
The chapter or paragraph containing the notes relative to a certain topic may be identified by consulting the
table of contents at the beginning of each section.
To illustrate the topic more clearly, the text is supplemented by illustrations in which the elements described
are highlighted and/or identified with numerical references.
01.02 Updates
Updates
The manual will be updated periodically to reflect modifications made to the vehicle and the production of
new versions.
ALWAYS read the Technical Notes as they may introduce more recently updated regulations and methods
than those in this manual.
01.03 Symbols
The safety symbols illustrated below are used to draw the attention of the operator to injury hazards, to
indicate operations which may entail a risk of damage to the vehicle, or to provide useful information for a
specific operation.
IMPORTANT
Failure to observe the instructions in this note may be dangerous and result in serious injury to the operator
and/or to persons in the vicinity.
IMPORTANT
Failure to observe the instructions in this note may result in irreparable damage to the vehicle and/or its
parts.
ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
This symbol indicates recommendations for environmental safety.
NOTE
Indicates a note of a generic nature providing the operator with useful information concerning the operation
being performed.
REFERENCE
Refers to the paragraph or chapter in which the relative operation is described.
01.04 Glossary
N2
Nitrogen
CO
Carbon Monoxide
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
NOx
Nitrogen Oxide
HC
Hydrocarbons
Standard
Indicates reference value
Service limit
Indicates the limit value beyond which a part or coupling must be serviced to bring it back within the
prescribed tolerance range
Right hand and/or left hand
The terms right hand and/or left hand indicate the right hand and/or left-hand side of the vehicle with respect
to the front of the vehicle
ABS
Anti Blockier System

ABS prevents wheel lock-up under braking to maintain directional control over the vehicle.
A.C.
Air conditioning
ASR
Antriebs Schlupf Regelung

Wheelspin control under acceleration.
AVH
Automatic Vehicle Holding
Supplementary function of the electric parking brake (EPB):releases the brake shoes and brake pads at
different times. The result is optimised brake release behaviour, assisting the driver.
CAN
Controller Area Network

Communication line between ECUs.
CST
Control Stability Traction

Stability and traction control
DCT
Dual Clutch Transmission

Dual clutch transmission. Each of the two clutches is associated to a different part of the gearbox, with one
part engaging even gears and the other engaging odd gears.
E-DIFF
Electronic Differential
Electronically controlled differential integrated with the EF1-Trac traction control system.
EBD
Electronic Brake Force Distribution

Electronic brake force distribution system.
ECU
Electronic Control Unit

Electronic control unit
EF1-TRAC
Traction control integrated with Hy-Kers system.

Excess torque produced by the engine is used by the Hy-Kers system to charge the high voltage battery. The
system is self-adaptive and calculates the maximum grip available by constantly monitoring the relative
speeds of the wheels.
EPB
Electric Parking Brake

Electric parking brake, with an electric motor actuating the rear brake shoes controlled by an electronic
control unit.
ESC
Electronic Stability Control

The ESC function is implemented by the two systems: VDC and EF1-Trac
F1-Trac
Traction control system based on race technology.
The system is self-adaptive and calculates the maximum grip available by constantly monitoring the relative
speeds of the wheels.F1-Trac correlates real data against a vehicle dynamics model stored in the control
system and optimises the behaviour of the vehicle by controlling engine torque delivery.
FPB
Ferrari Brake Prefill

A system that eliminates the gap between the brake pads and discs by applying slight pressure to the brake
system as soon as the accelerator pedal is released when imminent braking is expected. The result is
improved brake response.
HV
High Voltage
High voltage electrical system.
HVB
High Voltage Battery

480 Volt high voltage battery situated under the passenger compartment, which accumulates the energy
necessary to power the Hy-Kers hybrid system.
HPU
Hybrid Power Unit

Power unit of the Hy-Kers hybrid system, consisting of a DC-DC inverter and converter.
LC
Launch Control
Performance start strategy.
LV
Low Voltage
Low voltage electrical system.
PTU
Power Transfer Unit

Transmission power unit.
RHT
Retractable Hard Top

Retractable hard top.
TPMS
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

System monitoring the pressure and temperature of the vehicle's tyres. An ECU receives data transmitted by
special sensors installed on the interior of the wheel rims near the valves. Tyre pressure and temperature
information and the relative messages are displayed on the instrument panel.
VDC
Vehicle Dynamic Control

Vehicle dynamics control using the brake system and engine torque.
4WD
4 Wheel Drive
4 wheel drive system.
02.01 Manual user
Manual user
This publication was produced by the FERRARI Technical Service Department as an informative support tool
to assist the operator in performing work on FERRARI cars.
This manual is intended for expert operators with sufficient knowledge and skill to carry out all maintenance
and repair operations for FERRARI cars correctly and safely.
Carrying out the aforementioned operations without the necessary knowledge and skills will cause damage to
the vehicle and may expose the operator and the user of the vehicle to danger.
02.02 Operating procedures
Operating procedures
The operator must observe the instructions and warnings given in the manual precisely and must not
implement inappropriate methods or tools, as this may constitute a risk to personal safety and
compromise the reliability of the vehicle.
In addition to the guided diagnostic system, that can be implemented using the FERRARI DEIS tester, each
section of the manual contains diagnostic procedures to identify malfunctions of the different components
in the vehicle.
Evaluating the impressions of the user is of vital importance, formulating appropriate questions to clearly
identify the symptoms of the problem.
Once the cause has been identified, plan the job by consulting the relative informative notes concerning the
tools necessary, the reference data for servicing and disassembly and reassembly procedures given in
the manual.
Following the methods described in this manual precisely for each job ensures the safety of the user and the
quality of the vehicle.
02.03 Using tools and spare parts
Using tools and original spare parts
FERRARI supplies workshops authorised to repair its vehicles with specific tools to ensure that repair work is
carried out correctly and safely.
Carrying out any work without using specific FERRARI tools, or using alternative tools, may cause damage to
relative component and/or system, voiding the warranty.
Always use original FERRARI spare parts, consulting the relative spare parts catalogue.
In addition to voiding the warranty, using non original components may damage the vehicle and expose the
user to danger.
02.04 Warranty
FERRARI guarantees its vehicles for 3 years from the date of delivery.
The warranty may be extended if required. For details, see the specific documents "Power brochure"
and "Power warranty handbook". For more information, contact the Ferrari Technical Service Department.
Carrying out any work without using specific FERRARI tools, or using alternative tools, may cause damage to
relative component and/or system, voiding the warranty. Always use original FERRARI spare parts,
consulting the relative spare parts catalogue. In addition to voiding the warranty, using non original
components may damage the vehicle and expose the user to danger.
During this period, the appropriate form must be filled out and the S.T. Schedule, which indicates the time
specified by FERRARI for the operation, must be consulted for any work on the vehicle.
02.05 Tightening torques
For the fastening of main vehicle components, Ferrari has defined three tolerance classes relative to the
rated torque value: The tolerance class is shown in the summary paragraphs concerning tightening
torques, at the beginning of each section and/or at the beginning of each paragraph.
Class
A ±5 %
B ±10 %
C ±20 %
03.01 Personal protection
When performing regular maintenance or repairs on the vehicle, the operator must take all precautions
necessary to prevent injury and wear the appropriate personal protective equipment.
The personal protective equipment used must comply with applicable safety legislation and must be in
excellent condition.
Footwear
Wear safety footwear at all times.
Gloves
Wear safety gloves when working with or near sharp or hot objects and when handling liquids that are
harmful to the skin.
Eyewear
Wear safety eyewear when working underneath the vehicle and when handling liquids that are harmful for the
eyes.
Ear plugs
Use safety ear plugs when working with the engine running.
03.02 Hazards
Exhaust system and engine

Danger Precautions
As the vehicle is used, the components of the Always wear insulating gloves when handling these
exhaust system and the engine itself reach very components, or wait as long as necessary for the
high temperatures and remain hot long after the components to cool.
engine is switched off.
Electric cooling fans

Danger Precautions
After the vehicle is stopped with a warm engine, the Use particular caution when working near these
electric cooling system fans may activate without components.
warning.
Petrol
Danger Precautions
The petrol contained in the fuel tank and the entire Smoking, sparks and naked flame must not be
fuel system is highly flammable and, in certain allowed in the work area or the immediate vicinity.
conditions, potentially explosive. Keep out of reach of children!
Always work in a well ventilated area.
Never dispose of petrol into the environment!
Used oil
Danger Precautions
Prolonged skin contact with used oil may cause Keep out of reach of children!
severe skin disease. To prevent risks, always wear protective gloves
and/or wash any areas that have come into
contact with used oil thoroughly with soap and
water.
Never dispose of used oil into the environment!
Hydraulic fluid
Danger Precautions
The fluid contained in the brake, clutch and power In the event of contact, wash the affected area with
steering systems is corrosive to plastic, rubber plenty of running water.
and paintwork and is extremely harmful in the To prevent risks, always wear protective eyewear
event of contact with the eyes and skin. and gloves.
Keep out of reach of children!
Never dispose of used hydraulic fluid into the
environment!
Coolant
Danger Precautions
The cooling circuit contains fluid at high temperature Keep out of reach of children!
and pressure: contact with hot coolant may cause Never dispose of coolant into the environment!
severe burns. Coolant may cause irritation in the
event of skin contact and is poisonous if
swallowed.
03.03 Dangerous emissions
Exhaust gas
Danger Precautions
The engine must be kept running for certain Never run the engine in a closed space; preferably
maintenance procedures. Exhaust gases contain work outdoors or use exhaust extraction systems.
carbon monoxide, a highly toxic gas which may
even cause death in the event of prolonged
inhalation.
The emissions control devices installed were Never puncture the exhaust silencers or remove any
necessary in order for the vehicle to obtain type of their internal elements. Never use the vehicle
approval allowing the vehicle to be driven legally with any of these devices removed.
on public roads in compliance with emissions and
noise legislation. Removing or tampering with
these devices is prohibited by law.
Each of these devices bears a marking or label Never replace any of the original devices with
indicating the type approval number obtained. devices without type approval. These devices
must also be kept in proper working order,
carrying out all the procedures indicated in the
maintenance schedule.
Battery
Danger Precautions
As the battery is charged, gases are released which Always charge the battery in a well ventilated area.
are potentially explosive in the event of contact
with sparks or naked flame.
The battery also contains sulphuric acid as an Always wear appropriate protective garments and a
electrolyte, which may cause irritation in the event face mask when handling electrolyte.
of skin contact.
04.01 Label location
Label location
A - Assembly number label

B - Punched chassis number
C - Punched engine type and number
D - Chassis number
E - Gearbox type and number plate
F - Tyre pressure monitoring system identifier label
G - Antifreeze label
H - Expansion tank opening instructions label
I - Fuel label
K - VIN label (Vehicle Identification Number)
L - Paintwork label
M - Emissions control data label
N - 'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' label
O - Airbag maintenance label
P - Airbag warning label
R - Label with instructions for placing luggage in luggage compartment
S - Labels with instructions for placing luggage in luggage compartment
T - Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic clutch system fluid type label
U - Engine oil level check label
V - Radiator with antifreeze label
W - Stop&Start system warning labels (optional)
X - Mercury warning label
Y - Safety standard compliance label
Z - Tyre type and pressure label
04.02 Assembly number
Assembly number
A - Assembly number label

04.03 Chassis number
Chassis number
B - Punched chassis number

04.04 Engine type and number
Engine type and number
C - Punched engine type and number

04.05 Chassis number
Chassis number
D - Chassis number
04.06 Gearbox type and number
Gearbox type and number
E - Gearbox type and number plate

04.07 Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification
K - VIN label (Vehicle Identification Number)

04.08 Tyres
Tyres
F - Tyre pressure monitoring system identifier label

Z - Tyre type and pressure label
04.09 Antifreeze and expansion tank opening instructions
Antifreeze and expansion tank opening instructions
G - Antifreeze label
H - Expansion tank opening instructions label
04.10 Fuel
Fuel
I - Fuel label
04.11 Paintwork
Paintwork
L - Paintwork label
04.12 Emissions control
Emissions control
M - Emissions control data label

04.13 Airbag
Airbag
N - 'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' label

04.14 Airbag
Airbag
O - Airbag maintenance label

04.15 Airbag
Airbag
P - Airbag warning label

04.16 Luggage placement in luggage compartment
Luggage placement in luggage compartment
R - Label with instructions for placing luggage in luggage compartment

04.17 Luggage placement in luggage compartment
Luggage placement in luggage compartment
S - Labels with instructions for placing luggage in luggage compartment

04.18 Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic clutch system fluid
Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic clutch system fluid
T - Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic clutch system fluid type label
04.19 Engine oil level check and radiator with antifreeze
Engine oil level check and radiator with antifreeze
U - Engine oil level check label

V - Radiator with antifreeze label
04.20 Safety standard compliance and mercury warning label
Safety standard compliance and mercury warning label
X - Mercury warning label

Y - Safety standard compliance label
04.21 Stop&Start system warning label (optional)
Stop&Start system warning label (optional)
W - Stop&Start system warning labels (optional)

05.01 Performance and consumption
Performance
0 to 62 mph Top speed

DCT gearbox 3.9 sec > 193 mph
Mechanical gearbox 4.2 sec > 193 mph
Consumption (for vehicles with DCT gearbox)
Urban cycle 13 mpg

Extraurban cycle 19 mpg
Combined cycle 15 mpg
05.02 Dimensions and weight
Dimensions and weights
Wheelbase 105.12 in.

Max. length 179.6 in.
Max. width 75.15 in.
Max. height 52.04 in.
Front overhang 37.4 in.
Rear overhang 37 in.
Front track 64.17 in.
Rear track 63.18 in.
Kerb weight (DCT) 3925 lb.
Kerb weight -
(mechanical
gearbox)
A1.01 Fluid properties
Cooling circuit (1)

Protective fluid with antifreeze action for monoethylene glycol-based cooling systems. 50 %
Water 50 %
Windscreen washer/headlight washer system

Mixture of water and denatured isopropyl alcohol 50 %
Glass cleaner 2 phial
Fluids and lubricants table
Model
- Fluids and lubricants table [Download]

Scheduled maintenance
Model
- Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI [Download]
- Scheduled maintenance plan - Annual [Download]
- Scheduled maintenance plan - 20,000 km (12,500 miles) [Download]

A3.01 Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication
system filters
Checking engine oil level (APPLICABLE UP TO ENGINE No.153878)
When checking the engine oil level, the vehicle must be on a level surface and the engine must be
warm.
Start the engine.

Wait for the engine oil temperature to reach 80 to 90 °C.
IMPORTANT! Only check the engine oil level with the ENGINE OFF.
Switch off the engine.

Open the engine compartment lid.
Remove the dipstick (A).
Undo and remove the cap (B).
Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to return to the sump.

Clean the dipstick (A).
Insert the dipstick (A) fully.
Check that the engine oil level is between the
MIN and MAX limits indicated on the dipstick
(A).
The gap between the MIN and MAX limits
corresponds to approximately 1.5 litres of
oil.
If the level is too low, identify the cause of

excessive oil consumption before
proceeding.
Top up the engine oil using only new oil of

the type specified in the fluids and
lubricants table.
If the engine oil level is near or below the MIN

limit, top the system up to between the MIN
and MAX limits with new engine oil of the
specified type.
Fit and tighten the cap (B) securely.
After topping up the engine oil, the TFT display may continue to display the relative icon
with the specific message "Check engine oil level" for a prolonged period of time. This
is completely normal.
Checking engine oil level (APPLICABLE FROM ENGINE No. 153879)
When checking the engine oil level, the vehicle must be on a level surface and the engine must be
warm.
Start the engine.
Wait for the engine oil temperature to reach 90 °C.
Leave the engine running at idle speed (720 rpm) for 2 minutes.
IMPORTANT! Only check the engine oil level with the ENGINE OFF.

Wait 5 minutes to allow the engine oil to return to the sump.
Clean the dipstick (A).

Insert the dipstick (A) fully.
Check that the engine oil level is between the
MIN and MAX limits indicated on the dipstick
(A).
The gap between the MIN and MAX limits
corresponds to approximately 1.5 litres of
oil.

excessive oil consumption before
proceeding.
Top up the engine oil using only new oil of

the type specified in the fluids and
lubricants table.
If the engine oil level is near or below the MIN

limit, top the system up to between the MIN
and MAX limits with new engine oil of the
specified type.
After topping up the engine oil, the TFT display may continue to display the relative icon
with the specific message "Check engine oil level" for a prolonged period of time. This
is completely normal.
Draining the engine lubrication system
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the
environment.
Remove the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).

Undo the cap (A).
Wait for the engine oil to drain completely.
Replacing the engine oil filter
Tightening torque Nm Class

Oil filter gaiter Screw 10 Nm B
Engine oil filter Oil filter cartridge 30 Nm B
The oil filter must be replaced at every oil change.
The engine oil filter is located on the right-hand side of the engine.

Drain the engine lubrication system ( A3.01).
Fit the tool (95971560) on the filter (A) using the

wrench (USAG D156).
Turning counterclockwise (as indicated by the
arrow), unscrew the engine oil filter (A).
Remove the filter between the front removable
subframe and the oil sump.
To prevent any oil from the cartridge-pump
coupling leaking onto the heated components
of the exhaust system, there is a gaiter (1)
which can contain any leaks and channel
them downwards.
For replacement, undo the three screws (2) and
remove. Fit the new gaiter (1), installing in the
relative seat with the drain hole facing
downwards, and fasten by tightening the
three screws (2).
Check that the gaiter is correctly coupled with
the lower crankcase shell.

Screw 10 Nm B
Before refitting the new filter, clean the mating

surface on the lower crankcase shell.
Use filter cartridges recommended by Ferrari
only and check that the rubber seal of the
filter cartridge fits perfectly into the seat, with
the round part visible, and that there are no
cuts and/or cracks.
Lubricate the rubber seal of the filter cartridge
with a film of engine oil.
Fit the new oil filter cartridge, (A) rotating it
clockwise using the tool (95971560) and the
torque wrench (USAG D156).

Oil filter cartridge 30 Nm B
Fill the engine lubrication system ( A3.01).

Refit the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Filling the engine lubrication system (Applicable UP TO Engine No.153878)

Oil draining cap Magnetic cap M22x1.5 60 Nm B
Clean the plug (A) thoroughly with a suitable
degreaser that does not leave residue.
Tighten the plug (A), replacing the relative seal.

Magnetic cap M22x1.5 60 Nm B

Fill the engine lubrication system using only
new oil of the type specified in the fluids
and lubricants table.
Gradually add new oil of the specified type via

the filler neck.
Due to inevitable pooling within the lubrication
system, the actual quantity of oil added may
vary from vehicle to vehicle.
Fully tighten the engine oil filler cap (B).

Check the engine oil level ( A3.01).
Check that there are no leaks from the drain plug and engine oil filter.
Filling the engine lubrication system (Applicable FROM Engine No. 153879)



Gradually add approximately 9.5 litres of new

engine oil of the specified type.
After draining the oil from the relative drain plug

orifice for approximately 20 minutes and
replacing the filter, when the system is filled
with approximately the aforementioned
quantity, the oil level will still be only halfway
up the dipstick (due to residual oil remaining
in the sump). After an initial oil level check,
adding 0.4-0.5 litres will bring the level
correctly to the MAX marking.

A3.02 Inspecting oil level and replacing Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
Check level of Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat
exchanger)

Gear oil drain/filler plug - GL differential Plug 25 Nm B
The following procedures must be carried out exactly as described to ensure that the hydraulics are
proper lubricated and function correctly.
To check the gear oil level correctly, carry out the following procedures precisely as described.
Remove the rear flat undertray diffuser ( E3.12).

Ensure that the vehicle is NOT on a gradient.
Start the engine and run at idle speed.
Select reverse R and hold the brake pedal.
Check that the clutch system ATF fluid temperature DOES NOT exceed 40 °C.
Check that the engine coolant temperature is between 40 and 50 °C.
CAUTION
HOT OIL may be released: use adequate
protection.
Undo the threaded plug (1) located on the rear

surface of the transmission, and check the
level: the fluid must reach the edge of the
hole from which the plug was removed, on
the limit of overflowing.
excessive oil consumption.
If topping up is necessary, proceed as follows.

Using the pump (AV 8174) element 01 (with the
short spout), aspirate the specified oil from a
newly opened container.
Using the pump (AV 8174) element 01 and a
container for collecting excess oil, top up via
the level pipe until excess oil overflows from
the orifice of the cap remove previously.
Let the oil fluid completely until the flow stops.
Replace and tighten the threaded plug (1).

Plug 25 Nm B
Refit the rear flat undertray diffuser ( E3.12).
Check level of Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil (ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat
exchanger)


Select reverse R and hold the brake pedal.
Check that the clutch system ATF fluid temperature DOES NOT exceed 40 °C.
With the introduction of the new system of
gearbox oil with single oil heat exchanger it
becomes necessary to adapt the pump
(AV 8174) element 01 (with short spout) in
order to perform the operation, proceeding as
follows.
Fit a piece of flexible hose (3), of suitable
diameter and measuring 350 mm in length,
on the spout (2), and fasten with the indicated
screw collar Part No. 13000190 (Diam.10-
16x7 mm).
CAUTION
protection.
Undo the threaded plug (1) located on the rear

surface of the transmission, and check the
level: the fluid must reach the edge of the
hole from which the plug was removed, on
the limit of overflowing.

If topping up is necessary, proceed as follows.

short spout), adapted as previously
described, aspirate the specified oil from a
container for collecting the excess oil, top up
from the same hole by means of the piece of
rubber hose (3), until the oil overflows from
the removed cap hole.

Plug 25 Nm B
Draining the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
The gear oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Remove the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Place a container under the plugs indicated in

the figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plugs (1) and (2) at the bottom of the
gearbox housing.
ALWAYS dispose of liquids correctly in
accordance with applicable legislation.
Collect all liquids drained from the vehicle
systems in appropriate airtight containers,
then close the containers.
Drain the oil completely.
ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat

exchanger
Remove the gear oil pipe mounting bracket (3),

undoing the screws indicated.
Remove the pipe retainer clamp (4) from the
bodyshell.
Detach the gear oil pipe unions (5).
exchanger
To disconnect the gear oil pipes, turn the safety

ring nut (14) to align the notch on the ring nut
with the pin (13).
Push the safety ring nut (14) towards the pin (13)
to release the pipes.
Allow the liquid remaining in the gear oil pipes to

drain completely.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil
heat exchanger)

ATF and GL oil pipe mounting bracket Screw 20 Nm B
Clean the unions to be connected thoroughly

with a suitable degreaser that does not leave
residue.
Connect the gear oil pipe unions. Follow the
instructions given below to ensure proper
connection:
ensure that the notch on the safety ring nut (14)
is aligned with the pin (13);
connect the male union and turn the safety ring
nut (14) so that it is no longer aligned with the
pin (13);
ALWAYS ensure that the pipe union is effectively
connected.
Connect the unions (5) for the gear oil pipes and
fasten the clamp (4) to the bodyshell.
Fasten the mounting bracket (3) for the gear oil
pipes, by tightening the screws indicated with
relevant washers.

Screw 20 Nm B
Replace the plugs (1) and (2), fitting and

tightening the new components.

Plug 25 Nm B

container for collecting excess oil, fill with 4.9
litres (2.9 litres + approx. 2 litres for external
cooling circuit) of oil via the level check/filler
hole.
Fill with half of the quantity indicated, wait a few
minutes for the fluid to settle, then gradually
finish filling, until oil overflows from the
check/filler hole.
The quantity of oil required may vary slightly
relevant to the amount indicated for filling
the tank when empty; this is due to
unavoidable pooling within the system. Fill
gradually.
Check the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level ( A3.02).
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs and from the delivery and return unions disconnected
during the draining procedure.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil (ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat
exchanger)


follows.
16x7 mm).
Tighten the plugs (1) and (2).

Plug 25 Nm B

litres via the level check/filler hole, with the
piece of hose (3).
check/filler hole.
relative to the amount indicated for filling the
tank when empty; this is due to unavoidable
pooling within the system. Fill gradually.
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs.
Checking the gear oil level with mechanical gearbox

Fastening oil level inspection cap for mechanical Plug 49 Nm B
gearbox
The following instructions must be carried out precisely to ensure correct lubrication of the gears.
Remove the shield (1) fastening the EPB cable

(2), undoing the indicated screws.
Remove the mounting bracket (3), undoing the
indicated screws.
CONDITIONS FOR CHECKING LEVEL CORRECTLY:
1) The vehicle must be on the vehicle lift with the engine running at idle speed and the wheels free to
rotate.
2) Select 6th gear with the engine at 1000 rpm.
3) Maintain these conditions 2 for 2 to 3 minutes.
4) Turn engine off.
The oil level MUST be checked within 10
minutes of switching off the engine.
5) Undo the threaded plug (A) on the left hand

side of the gearbox, and check the level: the
level must reach the edge of the hole from
which the plug was removed, on the limit
of overflowing.
If the level is too low, identify the cause of excessive oil consumption.
If topping up is necessary (no fluid flowed out of hole when plug was removed), proceed as follows.
Use a pump to aspirate the specified oil from a new container.
Using the pump and a container for collecting excess oil, top up via the level pipe until excess oil overflows
from the orifice of the cap removed previously.
The level is correct when fluid stops flowing out of the hole.
Tighten the threaded plug (A).

Plug 49 Nm B
Fit and fasten the mounting bracket (3),
tightening the indicated screws.
Fit the shield (1) and fasten the EPB cable (2) by
tightening the indicated screws.
Refit the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Draining the gear oil system for mechanical gearbox
Place a container under the plug indicated in the

figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plug (1) located at the bottom of the
gearbox housing.

bodyshell.
Disconnect the gear oil pipe unions (5).
with the pin (13).

drain completely.
If necessary, blow compressed air into the
pipes to speed up and facilitate drainage.
Place a container under the oil filter (6).

Undo the screw fastening the oil filter (6).
Remove the O-ring on the filter and clean the oil
filter (6), immersing in degreasing solution.
Take care not to damage the mesh.
Dry the oil filter (6) with compressed air.
Filling gear oil system with mechanical gearbox

Fastening mechanical gearbox oil filter Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening magnetic oil drain plug for mechanical Plug 49 Nm B
gearbox
Fastening plug for mechanical gearbox speed Screw 5 Nm C
sensor seat
Clean the seat of the filter on the gearbox to
remove any contaminants.
Fit a new O-ring on the oil filter (6), lubricating
with the specified gearbox oil.
Fit the oil filter (6) in its seat, after lubricating the
seat with the specified oil.
Tighten the fastener screws.

Screw 5 Nm C

residue.
connection:
pin (13);
connected.
Connect the unions (5) for the gearbox oil pipes

and fasten the clamp (4) to the bodyshell.
relative washers.

Screw 20 Nm B
Clean the plug (1) thoroughly with a suitable
degreaser that does not leave residue and
replace the seal.
Tighten the plug (1).

Plug 49 Nm B
Remove the plug (7) for the gearbox speed

sensor seat, located at the top left of the
gearbox housing, undoing the indicated screw
and retrieving the relative seal.
Use a pump to aspirate the specified oil from a
new container.
Using the pump, fill with a total of 4.6 litres
(gearbox + external cooling circuit) via the
speed sensor orifice.
Refit the plug (7) for the gearbox speed sensor
seat, replacing the relative seal and tightening
the indicated screw.

Screw 5 Nm C
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plug, the filter and the delivery and return unions
disconnected during the draining procedure.

A3.03 Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level
Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level

ATF clutch oil drain/filler plug Plug 25 Nm B
To check the hydraulic clutch system fluid level correctly, carry out the following procedures precisely
as described.

Select neutral N.
Alternatively, select reverse R.
Wait for the ATF fluid temperature to reach approximately 60 °C.

Ensure that the ATF fluid temperature does NOT exceed 80 °C at any point during the operation.
CAUTION
protection.
Undo the threaded plug (1), located on the left on

the bottom of the differential housing.
This hole is connected to a level pipe.
When the threaded plug is unscrewed, fluid

pooling within the level pipe may drain out.
Check the fluid level with the level pipe (2): the
fluid must reach the upper edge of the pipe,
on the limit of overflowing.
If the level is too low, identify the possible

causes for excessive consumption before
refilling.
If the level is too low (oil not overflowing), top up

as follows.
long spout), aspirate the specified oil from a
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 02
and a container for collecting excess oil, top
up via the level pipe until excess oil overflows.

Plug 25 Nm B

A3.04 Checking the windscreen and headlight washer fluid level
Checking the windscreen and headlight washer fluid level
The filler neck (1 )for the window and headlight

washer fluid tank is accessible by lifting the
engine compartment lid.
Refill the tank until fluid is visible from the filler
neck.
Low fluid level is detected by the sensor fitted on the tank and is indicated by the relevant
instrument panel warning light.
In the event of windscreen washer or headlight washer system malfunction, check the pumps on the tank.
A3.05 Checking brake system fluid level
Checking brake fluid reservoir level
The brake fluid tank is located on the left-hand

side of the engine compartment, underneath
the windscreen bulkhead.
On versions with mechanical gearbox, the
brake fluid tank is shared with the clutch
system.
Remove the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).

Remove the left hand cosmetic underwindscreen shield.
Hydraulic brake fluid is corrosive.

Contact with brake fluid may cause severe
injury or damage to painted parts of the
vehicle.
In the event of skin contact with fluid, wash
the respective part of the body
immediately with plenty of water.
In the event of contact between the fluid and
painted parts of the vehicle, wash and dry
the respective areas immediately.
Check that the fluid in the tank is always near the

MAX level.
A low fluid level may be an indication of
If the level is low, remove the cap (1) and top up.
Top up to the MAX level with the recommended
fluid, taken from a sealed container.
The circuit is filled with synthetic fluid. Using
mineral fluid may cause irreparable damage
to the rubber seals in the system.
Close the cap tightly (1).
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).

Refit the left hand cosmetic underwindscreen shield.
A3.06 Checking the power steering system fluid level
Checking the power steering system fluid level
FROM Assembly No. 98002, a different power steering fluid is prescribed.

The power steering fluid specified FROM Assembly No. 98002 must be used following installation of
the components of the RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279663.
Before topping up or filling the power steering system, always check which type of fluid should be
used, as mixing the two different types of power steering fluid will damage the power steering
system itself.
The power steering fluid level must be checked with the system warm, after driving for at least 15 Km.
If checked cold, the level may appear to be excessively low even with the correct amount of fluid in the
system.
At the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE, check the level of liquid in the power steering
system.
Undo the cap (A).
Use the dipstick on the cap (A) to check that the

power steering fluid level is between the MIN
and MAX levels.
There are MIN and MAX levels indicated on
both sides of the dipstick. Use the levels on
the side indicating the temperature 90°C.
If the level is near the MIN level, top up with

power steering fluid to reach the MAX level.
Levels approaching the MIN limit may be
indicative of excessive power steering fluid
consumption.
Screw the cap (A) back on tightly.
A3.07 Checking coolant level and topping up
Checking the cooling system fluid level
CAUTION
The fluid in the engine coolant system may be very hot.
Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns.
ALWAYS WAIT FOR THE SYSTEM TO COOL BEFORE STARTING ANY WORK.

Remove the right hand lateral cosmetic shield.
Check that the coolant in the tank is always near

the MAX level.
A new coolant has been introduced FROM

Assembly No. 87849. Carefully check
which type of coolant has been used in
the vehicle before topping up or filling the
system. Do not mix different types of
coolant as this may alter their properties.
If not, unscrew the cap (A) and top up to the

correct level with the specified fluid.
Fully tighten the filler cap (A) onto the expansion
tank.
Draining the cooling system
CAUTION
After loosening or removal, the Caillau Visa hose clamps must be replaced with Mikalor worm drive
hose clamps, following the instructions given in Technical Information 2054 of December 2012.
Remove the front flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Working from under the vehicle, on the right-

hand side of the radiator, loosen the clamps
(1) fastening the delivery and return pipes (2).
Detach the pipes (2) from the radiator.
Pour the fluid drained from the system into a
container and seal it. DO NOT DISPOSE
OF USED FLUID IN THE
ENVIRONMENT.
Let the coolant drain completely.
Filling the cooling system
CAUTION
Check that all the connection sleeve clamps are tight.
Static filling (engine off) (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT Single oil heat exchanger)

Cap - front cover M12x1.25x12 plug 30 Nm B
Water-oil pipes - gear oil heat exchanger Pipe union 50 Nm A

Remove the front wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Remove the rear right hand element.
01) Detach the bleed pipe (1), on the right-hand
side of the radiator, removing the indicated
clamp and keeping the pipe at the height of
the header tank union.
The photo aside was taken with the secondary
air pump removed to illustrate the procedure
more clearly.
02) Undo the union (2) on the delivery pipe (3)

leading to the heat exchanger, retrieving the
relative seals.
03) Unscrew the indicated right hand cylinder

head bleed plug, located on the front cover.
04) Unscrew the indicated left hand cylinder
05) Unscrew the filler cap (4) on the expansion

tank.
06) Gradually introduce coolant via the

expansion tank filler orifice, until fluid escapes
from the open bleed orifice on the radiator.
07) Reconnect the radiator bleed pipe (1),

fastening with the indicated clamp.
from the bleed orifices on the cylinder heads.
09) Tighten the right hand bleed plug indicated,
after replacing the relative seal.

M12x1.25x12 plug 30 Nm B
10) Tighten the left hand bleed plug indicated,



from the delivery pipe (3) leading to the heat
exchanger.
12) Fasten the delivery pipe (3) leading to the
heat exchanger by tightening the union (2),
after replacing the relative seals.

Pipe union 50 Nm A
13) Complete filling up to the MAX level
indicated on the expansion tank.
Dynamic filling (engine on) (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT Single oil heat exchanger)
14) Start the engine and run at idle speed for approximately 1 minute.
15) Bring the engine speed to 2000 rpm for approximately 15 seconds, then allow the engine to return to
idle speed.
16) If necessary, top up to the MIN level indicated on the expansion tank.
17) Warm the engine up by running at 2000 rpm until the thermostat valve opens/cooling fans activate
(water temperature approx. 90°C), then allow the engine to return to idle speed.
18) Top up if necessary.
19) Open the heater circuit (TGK valve_1 open and idle speed pump running) by setting the maximum
temperature for one "zone" only of the air conditioning system.
20) Bring the engine speed to 2000 rpm for approximately 1 minute, then run at idle speed for 30
seconds.
21) Invert the temperature settings for the two air conditioning system "zones" (TGK valve_2 open and
TGK valve_1 closed).
seconds.
23) Close the heater circuit and top up if necessary.
24) Repeat the procedure twice from step 19 to step 23.
25) Open the heater circuit, setting the maximum temperature for both "zones" of the air conditioning
system (TGK valve_1 and TGK valve_2 open); bring the engine speed to 2000 rpm for approximately 1
minute, then run at idle speed for 30 seconds.
26) Bring the engine speed to 2000 rpm, close the heater circuit (TGK valve_1 and TGK valve_2 closed
and idle speed pump not running), then let the engine return to idle speed after 1 minute.
27) Switch off the engine and allow it to cool (water temperature 40-45°C) for approximately 1h 30 min.
Check the cooling system fluid level ( A3.07).
28) Tighten the filler cap (4) completely onto the
expansion tank.
Refit the front wheelhouses ( E3.05).

A3.08 Replacing the active carbon filter
Removing the active carbon filter
Replace the active carbon filter at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. The filter is
located behind the right hand rear wheel bay.
Remove the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).

Remove the right one.
Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).
Remove the active carbon filter cover (1), by

undoing the screws (2).
Remove the fuel filler flap emergency release

cable (3) from the relative cable grommet.
Remove the clamp (4) and detach the pipe (5)
from the OBD pump filter.
Undo the screw (6) fastening the active carbon
filter mounting bracket.
Undo the screw (7) fastening the pipe connecting
the filter to the chassis.
Open the clamp (8) and release the pipe (6)

connecting to the OBD pump filter.
Working via the aperture in the wheel bay,

disconnect the quick coupling (15) from the
active carbon filter (A).
Detach the pipe (9) connecting the filter to the
diagnostic pump, removing the clamp (18).
A double-lock safety clip is fitted on the pipe (14)

connecting the filter to the fuel vapour
separator (16).
To disconnect the "double-lock" quick-coupling,
using due caution and by pressing on both
sides, push the safety clip out of its seat until
you hear the "unclick".
The difference between the safety clip "clicked"
and "unclicked" position is only a few
millimetres.
Then press on both sides of the quick-coupling

and remove the pipe.
Working from the wheel bay, undo the screw (10)

fastening the active carbon filter mounting
bracket.
Remove the active carbon filter, complete with bracket and filter for the OBD pump, from its seat, easing
out toward the rear of the vehicle.
Disconnect the remaining pipes (17) connected
to the carbon filter.
A "double-lock" safety clip is fitted on the lower
pipe connected to the active carbon filter.
To disconnect the "double-lock" quick connector,
millimetres.

and remove the lower pipe (17).
Undo the screw (11), release the retainer bracket

(12), detach the active carbon filter (A) and
replace.
Refitting the active carbon filter

Active carbon filter locking bracket - chassis Screw 5 Nm B
fastener bracket
Fastening active carbon filter mounting bracket to Screw 24 Nm B
chassis
Cover - carbon filter Screw 6 Nm B
Check the state of the protective foam rubber
pads (13) applied to the active carbon filter
mounting bracket; replace if necessary.
Fit the active carbon filter (A) on the relative

mounting bracket as originally installed and
fasten with the retainer bracket (12),
tightening the screw (11).

Screw 5 Nm B
Connect the pipes (17) to the active carbon filter

as originally fitted.
After connecting the quick connector fuel pipe
correctly, with due caution and pressing on
both sides of the double-lock clip, push the
clip into its seat until it clicks audibly into
place and the pipe is secured correctly.
The difference between the safety
clip "unclicked" and "clicked" position is only
a few millimetres.
Apply the new adhesive foam rubber (14) onto
the active carbon filter, as shown in the photo
aside.
Fit the active carbon filter, complete with bracket
and filter for the OBD pump, into its seat, via
the aperture at the rear of the vehicle.
Fasten the front of the active carbon filter by


Screw 24 Nm B
Connect the pipe (14) to the fuel vapour

separator (16).
A double-lock safety clip is fitted on the pipe.
a few millimetres.
Connect the pipe (9) connecting the filter to the
diagnostic pump and fasten the clamp (18).

connect the quick coupling (15) to the active
carbon filter (A).
Fasten the rear of the active carbon filter by


Screw 24 Nm B
Connect the pipe (5) to the OBD pump filter and

tighten the clamp (4).
Fit the fuel filler flap emergency release cable (3)
into the relative cable grommet.
Hand tighten the screw (7) fastening the pipe
connecting the filter to the chassis.
Fasten the pipe (6) to the OBD pump filter as

originally mounted, closing the clamp (8).
Fit the active carbon filter cover (1) and fasten by

tightening the screws (2).
The two lower screws also fasten the heat
shield mounting bracket onto the silencer.

Screw 6 Nm B
Refit the rear bumper ( E3.04).

Refit the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
A3.09 Replacing the oxygen sensor
Replacing the front left oxygen sensor

Oxygen sensor - catalytic converter Oxygen sensor 50 Nm B
Do not clean or apply grease on the oxygen sensor thread.

Do not use solvents or thread locking products as they may impede correct sensor operation.
The oxygen sensor thread is pre-lubricated by the manufacturer with a specific product.
Whenever a sensor is replaced, the self-acquired parameters must be deleted from the ECU memory.
Located at the front of the left catalytic converter.
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).

Remove the left one.
Detach the connector (1).

Detach the cable from the clamp (2).
Undo the front oxygen sensor (A) from the
catalytic converter and replace.
Fit the front oxygen sensor (A) onto the catalytic
converter and tighten it.

Oxygen sensor 50 Nm B
Attach the cable using the clamp (2).

Connect the connector (1).

Connect the battery ( F2.01).
Replacing the rear left oxygen sensor

Located at the rear of the left catalytic converter.


Cut the plastic clamp indicated.

Undo the rear oxygen sensor (B) from the
Fit the rear oxygen sensor (B) onto the catalytic

Attach the cable to the clamp (3).

Fit a new plastic clamp in the position indicated.

Replacing the front right oxygen sensor


Located at the front of the right catalytic converter.


Undo the front oxygen sensor (C) from the
Fit the front oxygen sensor (C) onto the catalytic

Attach the cable using the clamp (2).


Replacing the rear right oxygen sensor


Located at the rear of the right catalytic converter.



Undo the rear oxygen sensor (D) from the
Fit the rear oxygen sensor (D) onto the catalytic



A3.10 Replacing the engine air filters
Replacing the engine air filters
To ensure maximum engine performance it is essential that the air filters are in perfect condition.
NEVER wash or clean a removed air filter and reuse. Always replace with a new component.
Replace the air filter cartridges at the intervals indicated in the Maintenance Schedule.
There are two, located in the engine compartment behind the front bumper.
The instructions above are for the left hand filter. Use the same procedure for the right hand filter.

Remove the front cosmetic shield and the left hand lateral cosmetic shield.
Remove the clamp (1) fastening the air box

cover (2) to the bellow.
Undo the six screws indicated and remove the
air box cover (2).
The following components must ONLY be

replaced in the event of evident damage.
Remove the grille (3).

Remove the filter (4).
NEVER wash or clean a removed air filter
and reuse. Always replace with a new
component.
Remove and replace the air filter cartridge (A).

When installing the new air filter cartridge (A),
lightly lubricate the mating surfaces with the
air box.

Fit the filter (4) in its seat as originally installed.

Fit the grille (3) in its seat as originally installed.
Fit the air box cover (2) and fasten by hand

tightening the six screws indicated.
Refit and tighten the clamp (1) fastening the air
box cover (2) to the bellow.

A3.11 Replacing the air conditioning and heating system filter
Replacing the air conditioning and heating system filter
A dirty filter impedes the flow of external air into the vehicle, compromising the functions of the air
conditioning and heating system.
The air conditioning and heating system filter must be changed regularly.
The air conditioning and heating system filter is located inside the passenger compartment, on the right-hand
side of the heater/evaporator. It is accessible from beneath the passenger side of the dashboard.
Replace the air conditioning and heating system air filter at the intervals indicated in the MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE.
Remove the passenger side underdashboard trim panel ( E4.02).
Move the bracket (1) in the direction indicated by

the arrow.
Remove the filter cover (2).

Remove and replace the filter (A).
Fit the new A/C system filter (A).
Install the filter in the correct direction, using
the arrow indicating the direction of air flow
(AIR-FLOW) as reference.
Fit the cover (2).
Move the bracket (1) in the direction indicated by

the arrow.
Refit the passenger side underdashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

A3.12 Checking tension and replacing auxiliary utilities belts
Checking the water pump drive belt tension
Check the belt tension when the engine is cool.

Start the engine and run at idle speed for a few seconds.
Place the frequency probe of the tension meter

(95978151) at the mid point of the lower
section of the belt, but without touching the
belt itself.
Tap the belt with a suitable tool near the tension
probe and check that the value read by the
meter is between 115 and 177 Hz.
Replace the belt if the frequency measured is
lower than the specified value.
Checking the tension of the A.C. compressor - power steering pump - alternator drive belt

Fastening belt tensioner to crankcase Screw 25 Nm B
Check the belt tension when the engine is cool.

Start the engine and run at idle speed for a few seconds.
(Place )the frequency probe of the tension meter
1 (95978151) at the mid point of the lower
section of the belt, but without touching the
belt itself.
Tap the belt with a suitable tool near the tension
probe (1) and check that the value displayed
by the meter is 155 ± 10 Hz.
If the tension value measured is lower than the
specified value, replace the belt as
described below.
If the belt has been replaced recently, replace
the belt tensioner as described below.
Replacing the belt
Remove the A.C. compressor - power steering pump - alternator drive belt ( A3.12).
Replace the belt.
Refit the A.C. compressor - power steering pump - alternator drive belt ( A3.12).
Fit the new belt.
Check the tension again as described previously.

If the tension value measured is still lower than the specified value, replace the belt tensioner as
described below.
Replacing the belt tensioner
Undo the screw (2) and remove the complete

belt tensioner (3).
When fitting the new belt tensioner, ensure that
the locator pin (4) is correctly inserted in the
relative seat on the front engine cover.
Fit the belt tensioner (3) and fasten by tightening

the screw (2).

Screw 25 Nm B
Check the belt tension again as described previously.
Removing the water pump drive belt
The water pump drive belt MAY BE INSTALLED ONCE ONLY.
The engine ancillary drive belt must be replaced at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.

Undo the nuts (2), removing the power steering
system pipe mounting brackets (1) from the
steering box, moving the pipes out of the way
so that they do not hinder the subsequent
operations.
Turn the crankshaft with the specific wrench,

then, using a thin, sharp tool applied on the
water pump side, prise the water pump drive
belt (A) out of the relevant recess.
Refitting the water pump drive belt

Fastening power steering system pipe mounting Nut 9 Nm B
brackets - bushings on steering box
The water pump drive belt MAY BE INSTALLED ONCE ONLY.
In order not to damage the belt, do not fold it with sharp corners and do not let it come into contact
with oil or fuel.
Fit the water pump drive belt (A) over the torsion
damper.
Turn the crankshaft, as during removal, and use
a sharp tool to fit the NEW water pump drive
belt (A) onto the pump.
Ensure that the belt sits correctly in the relevant
groove.
Check the water pump drive belt tension ( A3.12).
Fit the power steering system pipe mounting

brackets (1) in the relative seats on the
steering box bushings and fasten by
tightening the nuts (2).

Nut 9 Nm B
Removing the A.C. compressor - power steering pump - alternator drive belt
The engine ancillary drive belt must be replaced at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Remove the water pump drive belt ( A3.12).

Work from underneath the vehicle.
With a fixed wrench applied onto the tensioner
roller fastener screw (1), turn the mobile
tensioner counterclockwise to loosen the belt
(B) and enable its removal, first from the
pulley on the A.C. compressor, then from the
other pulleys.
To illustrate the operation more clearly, the
photo aside shows the engine removed from
the vehicle.
Remove the worn belt (B).
Refitting the A.C. compressor - power steering pump - alternator drive belt
In order not to damage the belt, do not fold it with sharp corners and do not let it come into contact
with oil or fuel.
With a fixed wrench applied onto the tensioner

roller fastener screw (1), as during removal,
turn the mobile tensioner counterclockwise
and fit the new belt (B), using only the hands.
Ensure that the belt sits correctly on the
relevant pulleys.

photo aside shows the engine removed from
the vehicle.
Check the tension of the A.C. compressor - power steering pump - alternator drive belt ( A3.12).
Refit the water pump drive belt ( A3.12).
A3.13 Checking and replacing spark plugs
Removing the spark plugs

Remove the ignition coils ( F3.17).
Using a universal articulated wrench, undo and

remove the spark plugs (2).
Refitting the spark plugs

Fastening spark plug NGK spark plug 11 Nm A
Before refitting the spark plugs, check that they are in good condition and replace if necessary.
Check that the spark plug electrode gap is between 0.6 and 0.7 mm. Oil the threaded part of the spark plug
with very little oil.
When refitting the original spark plugs, clean

them with compressed air to remove any dirt.
Fit the spark plug (2) in its seat on the engine
head.
Use an articulated wrench to hand tighten the
spark plugs until the gasket sits up against
the support seat.
Loosen slightly.
Use a torque wrench to tighten the spark plugs.

NGK spark plug 11 Nm A
Refit the ignition coils ( F3.17).

A3.14 Checking Blow-by system pipes and connections
Checking Blow-by system pipes and connections
Check the state of the pipes (1) and the tightness

of the relative clamps near the vapour
separator and the intake manifold.
Check the connections. Replace the relative pipe
and/or clamp if any leakage or sweating is
noted.
Check the state of the pipes (2) and the tightness

of the relative unions on both cylinder heads.
Replace the pipe if any leakage or sweating is
noted.

A3.15 Checking cooling system pipes and connections
Checking cooling system pipes and connections

Check that the pipes and pipe unions on the water pump, the radiator and the expansion tank are
undamaged.
Replace any worn pipe unions or loose clamps.
A3.16 Checking injection and ignition system pipes and connections
Checking injection and ignition system pipes and connections
Remove the lateral flat undertray sections ( E3.12).
Check the state of the connection pipes between the fuel tank and the high pressure pump, and of the fuel
rail on the intake manifold.
In the event of leakage, replace the pipe and check the system.
Remove the rear elements from both wheel bays.
Check the state of the cables and connectors for the Motronic ECUs and the coils. If the outer casing or
the connector locks are damaged, replace the cable.
In the event of malfunction, check the spark plugs. Replace the spark plugs at the intervals indicated in the
maintenance schedule.
A3.17 Checking exhaust system connections
Checking exhaust system connections

Check the state of the system components, the connections between the manifolds and the catalytic
converters, the connections between the catalytic converters and the central silencer and the
connections between the central silencer and the rear silencers, then check all fastener elements.
A3.18 Checking exhaust emissions
Exhaust gas analysis
TEST DRIVE (details of procedure):

Preferably test drive the vehicle after it has been left unused overnight. The difference between the engine
temperature and ambient temperature on starting must be between 3°C and 37.5°C, and the fuel level
must be between 15% and 85%.
Self-adaptive parameters must be reset (simply cancel errors to reset).
TEST DRIVE procedure:
With the engine cold, start the engine and leave to idle for 4 minutes without accelerating.
Drive the vehicle normally for approximately 6 Km at constant speed, in 3rd or 4th gear with an engine
speed between 2,000 and 2,500 rpm, and without accelerating suddenly or changing gear too
frequently.
Accelerate gradually to 6,000 rpm, then slow to an engine speed of 2,000 rpm. Repeat eight times.
Stop the vehicle, leave the engine idling for 5 minutes, then switch off the engine.
Wait at least 15 minutes.
Start the engine and drive the vehicle normally for at least 20 minutes with accelerating suddenly or
changing gear too frequently.
EXHAUST GAS ANALYSIS (details of procedure)

Connect the DEIS tester to the diagnostic socket ( F2.10).
Perform the cycle "170 NCM Exhaust gas test" with the DEIS Diagnostic Tester.
Perform test at the outlet ports of the cylinder

head in the following conditions: engine
temperature above 90°C, engine at idle
speed and A/C system ON.
Check CO, HC, CO2 and O2 levels by
connecting the tester to the unions on the
connector pipes for the exhaust manifold,
after removing the two nuts (1).
After completing the procedure, tighten the two
nuts (1).
A3.19 Checking service brakes for wear
Checking service brakes for wear
At the intervals indicated in the Maintenance Schedule, check the state of wear of the brake pads and
discs.
Remove the wheels ( D2.01).
Remove all.
The front brake pads are fitted with a wear indicator connected to the brake failure warning light on the
instrument panel. Should this warning light illuminate, check the thickness of the pads and the state of
the braking surfaces on the discs.
In the event of excessive wear, even of just one pad, replace all the pads on the axle.
Checking and inspecting the brake discs
The brake discs must be perfectly clean, free of any oil, grease or rust, and must not be excessively scored.
In the event of poor braking performance not attributable to the state of the brake pads and callipers, carry
out a series of dimensional checks on the discs.
Using a dial gauge, measure the planarity with the disc fitted on the wheel hub.
Using a micrometer, measure the parallelism between the contact surfaces and the pads at different points
on the braking surface.
Using the special tool, check the roughness of the pad contact surface.
The rear discs differ from the front discs in that they have two additional holes to enable access to the
brake shoe adjustment pin without removing the disc.
They also have a large friction surface on the inner side for the parking brake.
Checking CCM brake disc wear
This operation includes:

visually inspecting for alterations in the brake disc friction surface;
checking the minimum brake disc thickness (maximum permitted wear 0.5 mm);
checking the brake disc edges for damage (damage caused by improper use).
The brake discs must be replaced if:

there are significant alterations in the friction surface;
the brake discs are worn beyond the minimum required thickness (material abraded).
Normally, both forms of brake disc wear occur simultaneously. Only rarely, following prolonged stress on
the race track with large temperature variations on the friction surface, surface alteration may become
so pronounced as to necessitate earlier replacement of the brake discs.
Always replace the CCM brake discs on both sides of the same axle.
Front and rear CCM disc wear is calculated by the instrument panel operating software, which uses an
algorithm to determine when to switch on the relative indicator to warn the driver.
The bedding-in procedure must always be performed after replacing the brake discs or the brake pads.
Disc replacement is necessary when the wear limit is reached, as indicated by the relative warning on the
TFT display, or if visual inspection reveals any surface damage.
Visual inspection of the disc friction surface
The alterations in the friction surface are caused by the material oxidising as a result of extremely high
thermal stress. The high temperatures reached by the brake discs, especially in race track conditions,
cause the material to oxidise progressively.
Surface alteration is detrimental to braking comfort, reduces brake disc resistance and increases pad
wear, requiring the replacement of components earlier than scheduled.
Understanding the signs of brake disc wear and consequent operations necessary:
The figure aside shows the friction surface after

normal brake usage in road conditions; disc
replacement is not necessary in this case.

a long journey, with only one intense brake
application; here too, disc replacement is not
necessary.
an appropriate mileage or following maximum
stress in track conditions; disc replacement is
necessary in this case.

an appropriate mileage or following maximum
stress in track conditions; disc replacement is
necessary in this case.
Checking minimum disc thickness

The minimum thickness of cross-drilled discs must always be measured at the base of the inner or outer
friction surface track. Use a suitable micrometrical screw or a brake disc template.
Maximum permissible wear is 0.5 mm
Checking disc edges for damage

Regardless of the overall state of wear, the
disc must be replaced if it shows signs of
damage around the edge.
Any unauthorised mechanical work on the

holes in the surface of the disc may
damage the brake disc itself.
If necessary, clean the holes in the disc
brake and the friction surface of the rotor
with a pressure cleaner.
Do not perform any mechanical work on the
holes in the disc.
CAUTION
When using pressure cleaners to clean discs, use
adequate face protection.
When assessing damage to the disc edges,

apply the following criteria:
maximum permissible width/depth 2 mm;
maximum permissible length (10 mm);
no more than 3 damaged areas are permissible.
Check CCM brake pad wear
After particularly intense use on the track, check the appearance of the pads as well as checking
normally for wear. If there is a distinct white discolouration on the edges of the pads, which extends
almost as far as the metal backing plate, the pads must be replaced to ensure that the brake
system continues to perform correctly.
CCM brake disc wear
As the discs wear, their mass reduces. This is due to two simultaneous effects - a thermal effect, which burns
the carbon fibres, and a mechanical abrasion effect between the disc and pad.
The instrument panel operating software uses an algorithm to calculate, in relation to effective vehicle usage
(e.g.: deceleration caused by braking), separate wear indices for the front P(a) and rear P(p) carbon brake
discs, expressed as a percentage (%) of wear.
These indices are periodically compared against a threshold value (100%). Upon reaching this threshold, an
amber warning signal (possible danger of disc failure) is shown on the TFT display, warning the user that
disc replacement is necessary.
The user is warned of this condition by the appearance of the message: “CCM brake discs worn” on the
display, together with the specific amber symbol. At the end of the display cycle, or when the MODE
button is pressed (with “Escape” function), the symbol is reduced to icon form.
An RLI for “Number of brake disc replacements” is also generated, identifying the number of times that the
discs have been replaced.
Once the brake discs have been replaced, the wear index may be reset on the instrument panel.
The wear index indicated on the instrument panel may only be reset when the discs are replaced,
once the wear index exceeds 100%.
To maintain a record of the latest brake wear index reset, three values are stored in the statistics memory for
the front and rear brakes, which are updated upon reset (with the possibility of storing the last seven
resets):
Number of brake disc changes counter: --------- (dimensionless number)
Kilometres at first disc brake change: --------- Km
Wear percentage at first disc brake change: --------- %
At each service, submit the following data (printing out the parameters from the instrument panel):
vehicle serial number;
vehicle mileage (“Odometer” parameter);
“Disc Wear Index” value.
There are essentially 5 different scenarios possible:

1 - Replacing all carbon discs due to vehicle usage;
2 - Replacing one carbon disc (or two discs on same axle) due to failure;
3 - Replacing a working instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument possible);
4 - Replacing of a malfunctioning instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument not possible);
5 - Replacing the carbon discs before reaching wear threshold (“Disc Wear Index” parameter < 100%).
1 - Replacing the carbon discs due to vehicle usage

In this situation, the amber warning signal on the TFT display is lit.
Use the diagnostic instrument to verify from the instrument panel that the disc wear index has exceeded
100%.
Replace the carbon discs.
Reset the carbon disc wear index on the instrument panel with the diagnostic instrument.
2 - Replacing one carbon disc (or two discs on same axle) due to failure
In this situation, only one disc (or two discs on the same axle) are replaced, without modifying the
parameters on the instrument panel.
In other terms, the “Disc Wear Index” parameter is left at the value for the discs not being replaced
(partially worn).
3 - Replacing a working instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument possible)

Order a replacement instrument panel following the instructions given in TI 2009 issued May 2012.
4 - Replacing a malfunctioning instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument not possible)
Order a replacement instrument panel following the instructions given in TI 2009 issued May 2012, specifying:
the serial number of the vehicle;
estimated vehicle mileage.
SAT will verify the estimated vehicle mileage.

Using a table correlating vehicle usage time with increase in disc wear % compiled by the engineering
division, SAT will determine the % disc wear value to be entered in the new instrument panel in relation to
the mileage recorded at the last service.
Upon approval from SAT (which will verify the data supplied by the dealership), the Spare Parts Department
will confirm the order and supply a spare instrument panel (with the estimated values from the replaced
unit).
5 - Replacing the carbon discs before reaching wear threshold (“Disc Wear Index” parameter < 100%)
This is a non-standard procedure and may only be performed by authorised personnel. Contact the Ferrari
SAT service.
Bedding-in CCM brake pads
The following procedure is applicable for both CCM1 and CCM2 brake systems and must be performed
EACH TIME the CCM brake pads and/or CCM brake discs are replaced.
For vehicles intended for ROAD use
Brake 16 times from 80 Km/h to 30 Km/h with constant pressure on the brake pedal and without
activating the ABS system.
Allow the brake system to cool by driving at 80 Km/h for approximately 120 seconds.
Allow the brake system to cool by driving at 80 Km/h for 180 seconds.
Allow the brake system to cool completely before using the vehicle again after the bedding-in
procedure to ensure maximum braking efficacy.
As soon as you notice an increase in brake pedal travel, stop the car and wait for the brake system to cool
completely.
For vehicles intended for TRACK use
completely.
A3.20 Checking service brake/parking brake function
Checking service/parking brake operation and control play
Check the brake pedal travel and STOP light switch function.
Road test the vehicle to check braking performance.
Check electric parking brake operation and the state of the parking brake cables.
A3.21 Checking suspension components
Checking suspension components
Road test the vehicle to check shock absorber performance and to check for suspension noise.
Remove all.
Check tightness of suspension components.

Check that all protective gaiters are in good order and that the ball joints on the stub axle and on the rear
hub holder have sufficient play.
Check that the silentblock bushings at the arm and shock absorber mounting points on the chassis have
sufficient play.
Check that the arms are not deformed and exhibit no signs of failure.
Check the state of the upper rebound stop bushes on the shock absorbers.
Check front and rear stabiliser bar alignment and the state of the rubber mounts and tie rod ball joints.
Vehicle Setup Parameter Check Form
Model
- Vehicle Setup Parameter Check Form [Download]

A3.23 Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts
Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts
With the seat adjustment controls, check that the electrical seats move through their entire adjustment
travel without impediment.
Check that the seat guides are securely fastened to the floor mounts.
Lubricate the guide connections and sliding surfaces with waterproof lithium grease.
Check that the seat belt anchor screws are properly tightened.
A3.24 Checking and recharging battery
Checking battery state of charge
Use a digital multimeter to measure the battery state of charge.
Clean the battery poles and clamps adequately.

Connect the terminals of the digital multimeter to the battery poles.
Read the battery voltage value from the display of the digital multimeter.
If the battery voltage measured is greater than 12.70 V, the state of charge is 100%.
If the battery voltage measured is between 12.45 V and 12.70 V, the state of charge is 75% to 100%.
If the battery voltage measured is between 12.36 V and 12.45 V, the state of charge is 50% to 75%.
If the battery voltage measured is less than 12.36 V, the state of charge is 0% to 50%.
Recharge the battery ( A3.24).

Perform only if the battery voltage measured is less than 12.5 V.
Recharging the battery
Three charging methods are possible for "AGM" (gas recombination) batteries: FAST, SLOW and DEEP
charging.
FAST charging is used for a partially or completely discharged battery
SLOW charging is used for a partially or completely discharged battery
DEEP charging is used for batteries that have discharged as a result of prolonged inactivity (over 2 weeks).
Clean the battery poles and clamps adequately.

Connect a stabilised battery charger to the battery.
FAST charging
While the battery is charging, check that the internal battery temperature never exceeds 45°C.
If the temperature exceeds 45°C, interrupt charging and wait a few hours before completing.
At the end of the recharge cycle, battery voltage must be at least 14.4 V - 14.8 V.
If this voltage is NOT reached (even if the battery was charged at constant current), this indicates a
general deterioration in the state of the battery. In this case, replacing the battery is recommended
even if the vehicle will start.
Charge at a constant voltage of 14.4 V to 14.8 V, at ambient temperature and with limited initial charge
current.
For L3 12V 70Ah 760A EN batteries, the maximum initial charge current must be between 18 A and 30
A.
Charge cycle duration: min. 4 hours, max. 6 hours.

SLOW charging
Charge at a constant voltage of 14.4 V to 14.8 V, at ambient temperature and with limited initial charge
current.
For L3 12V 70Ah 760A EN batteries, the maximum initial charge current must be between 7 A and 14 A.
DEEP charging
Prolonged periods with the battery not in use (more than 2 weeks with the battery connected) may
cause faults at the next recharge cycle.
If the battery is charged in these high internal resistance conditions, the voltage may quickly reach the
value of 14.4 - 14.8 V specified previously, but the current in the battery may drop rapidly and the
battery may fail to maintain charge for the correct period.
If the battery voltage is below 9 - 10 V, charge without voltage limiting.

The maximum initial charge current must be between 1 A and 2 A.
Battery conditioner
Ferrari vehicles are equipped with a battery conditioner representing the state of the art in battery care.
Using the battery conditioner contributes to prolonging battery life.
The device is stored in a pocket in the car cover bag, which is located in the luggage compartment.
A quick connector socket is installed in a protected and concealed location in the vehicle for connecting the
device.
The previous image shows the location of the socket for connecting the battery conditioner: located on the
right-hand side of the luggage compartment, under the cover hatch (A).
CAUTION
Ensure that all lids and doors are closed correctly.
Place the battery conditioner in an easily visible location, away from heat sources and out of the reach of
children.
If the vehicle is not to be used for periods longer than a week, the battery conditioner should be connected to
the vehicle to keep the battery in perfect working order.
Instructions for use: active mode and passive mode
Connect the battery conditioner first to the vehicle socket and then to the mains socket: this activates
the “Active” mode, and the battery conditioner may safely be left connected to the vehicle for months.
Place the battery conditioner outside the vehicle, taking care not to pinch the connector cable and/or damage
the seals when closing the engine compartment lid.
CAUTION
Ensure that all lids and doors are closed correctly.
Place the battery conditioner in an easily visible location, away from heat sources and out of the reach of
children.
Battery conditioning may be interrupted at any time by simply disconnecting the power cable from the mains
socket.
Always disconnect the mains socket before disconnecting the battery conditioner from the vehicle socket.
Engine start is inhibited as long as the battery conditioner is connected to the vehicle socket (even if
the battery conditioner is disconnected from mains power).
1 - Error warning light

2 - Active mode indicator light: mode indicator
3 - Battery conditioning function indicator light: battery conditioning in process
Indicator light (1) lights continuously: to indicate a malfunction of the vehicle electrical system or battery.
Indicator light (2) lights continuously: battery conditioner in “Active” mode. In this mode, the battery is charged
to the optimum level from a lower level.
Indicator light (3) lights continuously: battery is completely charged and battery conditioner is in “Passive”
mode. In this mode, the device maintains battery charge at an optimum level.
Indicator lights (2) and (3) flashing in alternation:
if the lights flash several times a second, the battery is probably sulphatated;
if the alternating flashing continues for more than 60 minutes, the battery must be replaced;
if the lights flash at intervals of a few minutes, the self-discharge percentage of the battery is high and
battery replacement may be necessary.
If no lights are lit, one of the following cases may be possible:

the battery conditioner cables may be disconnected;
the battery may be incorrectly connected to the vehicle electrical system;
the battery may be defective;
the battery voltage may be insufficient or there may be no power at the mains socket.
After checking the battery conditioner connections (to the mains and to the vehicle socket) and checking for
mains voltage, if lights (2) and (3) indicating the “Active” or “Passive” mode do not illuminate within a few
seconds of connecting the battery conditioner, contact the Ferrari Technical Service Department to have the
vehicle electrical system checked.
Recharging cycle
A - Desulphating
B - Ground
C - Absorption
D - Impulse
Precautions and warnings
Ensure that the cables are not pinched and do not come into contact with hot surfaces or sharp edges.
Never cover the battery conditioner.
Ensure that the mains socket is not exposed to water.
Never recharge a frozen battery.
Never recharge a damaged battery.
Connections to mains electricity must comply with national law concerning high voltages.
Always check the battery conditioner cables before use: there must be no cracks in the cables or the outer
insulation.
Never use a battery conditioner with damaged cables.
Store and use the battery conditioner out of the reach of children; never let children play with the battery
conditioner.
Overheating protection
The battery conditioner is equipped with protection against overheating.

Output power is reduced in the event of increased ambient temperature.
Maintenance
The battery conditioner is maintenance-free.
Do not disassemble the battery conditioner.
The battery conditioner casing may be cleaned with a moistened soft cloth or with neutral detergent.
Always disconnect the battery conditioner from the mains before cleaning.
A3.25 Checking alternator absorption and recharging function
Checking alternator absorption and recharging function

Remove the left hand lateral cosmetic shield.
Remove the battery connection cover.

Disconnect the alternator positive cable (1) from
the battery and connect a suitably calibrated
digital multimeter such as (Beckman T11 OB)
between the cable and the battery.
To measure the voltage and maximum current
generated by the alternator, preferably use a
digital multimeter and a HALL effect
amperometric clamp meter.
Fit the amperometric clamp meter on the cable
connected to the alternator.
Start the engine and run at 3,000 - 4,000 rpm.
Switch on all available current devices one by
one and measure the generated current on
the multimeter. Replace the alternator if the
current read is more than 5A less than the
prescribed value.
A3.26 Checking the state of the chassis and box elements
Checking the state of the chassis and box elements
The vehicle chassis elements, box sections

and outer components are made of
aluminium: all repairs and/or
replacements of chassis parts or
bodywork components must be
performed by skilled personnel using
suitable tooling and equipment.
Check that the chassis structures, box elements

and outer skins are in perfect condition.
Repair if any deformation or failure is noted.
Check tightness of chassis fittings.
A3.27 Checking wheels and tyres
Checking wheels and tyres
CAUTION
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions and
at high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Remove the wheels from the vehicle, then check the state of the wheel rims and tyres.
Check that the tyre pressure matches the value specified
Check the location and fastening of the balancer weights on the inside of the wheel rims.
In case of excessive tyre wear, check the wheel alignment data and perform static and dynamic wheel
balancing
A3.28 Inspecting the air conditioning and heating system
Inspecting the air conditioning and heating system

Remove the rear section of the right hand wheel bay.

Remove the left hand air filter then undo the four
screws indicated and remove the cover (1), in
order to inspect the unions on the condenser.
Check the unions on the pipes leading to the condenser, the dehydrator filter, the evaporator and
compressor for gas leakage.
Check that there is no gas leakage from the system hoses.
Check that there is no refrigerant leakage from the recirculation pump, the evaporator or the oil-water
pump.
A3.29 Inspecting the brake system
Inspecting the brake system

Remove all.

Check the connection pipes leading to the callipers and to the unions on the rigid lines.
Check that there is no leakage near the brake master cylinder unions or on the electrohydraulic unit.
Check that the unions are properly tightened.
Check that the instrument panel warning lights function correctly.
If any leakage is found, replace the defective unions or pipes.
Fill and bleed the brake system ( D3.10).
A3.30 Tightening bolts, unions and clamps
Tightening bolts, unions and clamps
At the intervals given in the Maintenance Schedule, check the tightness of the major mechanical fittings.
Refer to the tightening torque tables given at the beginning of each section.
Also check that all hydraulic hose fittings and clamps are correctly tightened.
Replace only with the clamp types specified.
A3.31 Checking and lubricating hinges and adjusters
Checking and lubricating hinges and adjusters
Check that the hinges of the doors, of the engine compartment lid and of luggage compartment are
correctly secured, exhibit no free play and operate quietly.
Check that the door locks and the locking mechanisms of the engine compartment lid and luggage
compartment function correctly.
Check the state of the engine compartment lid and fuel filler flap release cables.
Check that the gas struts of the engine compartment and luggage compartment lids function correctly.
Lubricate all friction surfaces with lithium based waterproof grease.
A3.32 Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara
Treating interior leather upholstery
Proper and regular treatment (at least once a year) will preserve the natural qualities and softness of
Ferrari leather trim.
For this precise purpose, a range of specific leather care products (Cleaner and Cream), developed and
tested by Ferrari, is also available. These products may be ordered through the Ferrari Spare Parts
Department, either individually or as part of the "Care Kit", which includes a complete set of car
cleaning products.
For the instructions on how to use the products contained in the "Care Kit", see the "User's Manual,
Carrozzeria Scaglietti Programme" and the instructions included with the Kit.
Never use acidic detergents, turpentine, liquid stain removers, petrol, solvents or domestic cleaning
products to clean leather as these will damage the natural material.
Treating interior trim in Alcantara
Alcantara® is the registered trade mark of a new generation material produced exclusively by Alcantara
S.p.A.
Both elegant and practical, Alcantara® combines softness, sophistication, rich colours and outstanding
resilience with remarkably easy maintenance.
The material is ideally suited to innovative and exclusive applications in interior decor, automotive interiors,
fashion clothing and fashion accessories.
Regular care
Avoid rubbing with too much force and do not use equipment with vapour.
Regular cleaning is recommended to maintain the beauty of Alcantara® over time.
Daily cleaning
Simply dust Alcantara® with a soft brush or dry cloth, or clean with a vacuum cleaner.
Weekly cleaning
Avoid the use of rags/blotting paper because they could leave ink on the material.
After dusting Alcantara®, wipe with a slightly moistened white cotton cloth.
Yearly cleaning
With removable upholstery, machine wash using the following procedure (general guidelines for washing).
With non-removable upholstery, use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.
If no specific products are available, dust the material thoroughly.
Be very careful not to wet Alcantara® in depth.
Moisten a soft cloth or sponge with water, squeeze out thoroughly and wipe all surfaces in Alcantara®.
Wipe again with a cloth moistened with clean water and leave to dry completely (overnight).
Once dry, brush delicately with a soft bristled brush to restore the nap.
General guidelines for washing
If removable upholstery needs to be cleaned

completely due to large stains, observe the
washing instructions given aside precisely:
In case of dry-cleaning do not use trichloroethylene and avoid direct contact with equipment that uses
steam.
Alcantara® must not be treated with chlorine-based bleaches.
Never use a centrifuge.
With removable upholstery, Alcantara® may be safely machine washed at approximately 30°C, using a
neutral detergent.
If Velcro is applied to the upholstery hems, protect the Velcro with counter-velcro before washing to
prevent damage to the upholstery.
After washing, allow the upholstery to air-dry and brush gently with a soft-bristled brush.
The bottom of the iron must be at a temperature lower than 110°C.
If necessary, Alcantara® may be ironed, placing a white cloth between the iron and the material.
Spray extraction cleaning machines may only be used at low temperatures.
For non-removable upholstery, follow the procedure give for yearly cleaning.
General guidelines for stain removal
With localised stains, if no specific products for cleaning Alcantara® are available, immediately wipe off
(within 30 minutes) and minimise the stain, working from the edge of the stain toward the middle to
stop it from spreading.
Before wiping off the stain, remove the spilt substance from the upholstery: use a spoon or plastic spatula
for dense substances (yoghurt, jam etc.), use unprinted absorbent paper or a sponge with liquids.
Do not pour the product being used for cleaning directly on Alcantara®.
Avoid rubbing to keep the stain from spreading or penetrating in depth.
Use a moistened and thoroughly squeezed white cloth or sponge to remove stains.
When using a sponge, rinse in clean water and squeeze thoroughly between applications.
Water-soluble stains
Preferably use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.

If no specific products are available, use water, lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol (spirits), depending on
the case.
Fruit juice, jam, jelly, ketchup: use lukewarm water; rinse by patting with clean water.
Blood, egg: use cold water; do not use hot water as it coagulates proteins; rinse by patting with clean
water.
Liqueur, wine, beer, cola and tea: use lukewarm water; if a coloured stain remains, use lemon juice then
rinse well.
Copying pencil, cocoa, chocolate, custard or chocolate confectionary, ice cream, mustard: use lukewarm
water; rinse by patting with clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce, sweet coffee: use lemon juice, then wipe with lukewarm water; rinse by
patting with clean water.
Non-water-soluble stains
Preferably use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.

If no specific products are available, use water, lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol (spirits), depending on
the case.
Lipstick, foundation, mascara, eye shadow, perfume, shoe polish, oil and grease in general, grass stains
and marker pen (including indelible markers): pat with ethyl alcohol then pat with water and rinse.
With difficult to remove grass and marker pen stains, especially if light in colour, clean as soon as
possible before the stain dries excessively.
Chewing gum and wax: fill a plastic bag with ice; when the substance has hardened, break it off in pieces,
then treat with ethyl alcohol.
Stubborn stains
Repeat the treatments described several times.

Often, even non-water-soluble stains require treatment with water after initial cleaning.
A3.33 Checking radiators for fouling
Checking radiators for fouling
Detritus from the road may enter the vehicle front air intake and foul the radiators; over time, this may
compromise the functionality of the cooling systems so that they are no longer capable of providing
sufficient cooling.
It is therefore VITAL that the radiator cores are checked for fouling at each scheduled service and cleaned, if
necessary, using the following procedure.
Check the radiator cores for fouling.

In the event of fouling, clean with a pressurised water jet or equivalent method.
Check for any dirt accumulated between the water radiator and the AC condenser.
Remove the front bumper ONLY in the event of very heavy fouling.
ONLY in the event of very stubborn dirt, which may be possible with particularly high mileage vehicles,
remove the radiator assembly and remove the dirt by blowing air from the rear of the radiators.
A3.34 Lubricating windscreen cross member seal and Front and Rear RHT Roof
shell seals
Lubricating windscreen cross member seal and Front and Rear RHT Roof shell seals
Lubricate the windscreen cross member seal and Front and Rear RHT Roof shell seals as the intervals
specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
CAUTION
If the RHT open or close cycle is not completed,
the hydraulic system remains pressurised for
up to 5 minutes after the control button is
released. After this period, the system emits a
warning sound to warn the driver and any
persons in the vicinity that the system is no
longer pressurised and that components of the
RHT system may drop without warning.
Electrically bring the RHT into the intermediate

position, with the Rear Roof shell over the
Front Roof shell and with the Tonneau Cover
completely opened.
Apply DuPont Lubricants Krytox® 205 GPL

Standard Grade Grease grease on the
surface of the Rear Roof shell seal (A) in
contact with the Tonneau Cover.

surface of the Front Roof shell seal (B) in
contact with the Rear Roof shell.
Bring the RHT electrically into the Spider position, completing the opening cycle.

surface of the windscreen cross member seal
(C) in contact with the Front Roof shell.
A3.35 Cleaning and maintaining matt paints (if applicable)
Cleaning and maintaining matt paints (optional)
NEVER polish the paintwork with any product.
DO NOT lean on the vehicle, especially if wearing garments with buttons, belts, rings, necklaces etc.,
as you may cause irreparable damage to the bodywork.
For information on the correct products to be used, contact the Ferrari Service Network.
Proper care by the owner is essential for keeping vehicles with matt paintwork (optional) in pristine condition.
The following is a list of the most important precautions necessary:
Wash the vehicle exclusively with Steam cleaner, and rinse with demineralised water only.
The vehicle must only be dried with an automatic blower or with compressed air. The vehicle may ONLY
be hand dried using a clean Yellow 3M microfibre cloth (Ferrari p/n 571.400.022) moistened with
demineralised water and using Glass cleaning solution in areas with remaining limescale residue.
Keep the cloth in a specific clean container.
To remove grease stains, use a clean Yellow 3M microfibre cloth (Ferrari p/n 571.400.022) moistened
in R107/S solvent (heptane). Use a new cloth only, or a cloth that has never been used with
demineralised water or Glass cleaning solution.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the bodywork is still hot.
Never apply adhesive stickers to the bodywork.
Cracks or exposed areas of underlying bodywork caused by stones, scratches, parking damage etc. must
be repaired immediately by the Ferrari Service Network.
A3.36 Replacing the transparent film on Tonneau Cover
Replacing the transparent film on Tonneau Cover
This procedure is necessary only in the event of evident wear or damage (the following photo shows
wear on the LH side of the Tonneau Cover as an example) noted exclusively during normal
scheduled maintenance.
The following procedure is for replacing the adhesive transparent film (shown in following figure) applied to
protect the Tonneau Cover paintwork in the contact area with the Rear Roof shell seal.
The image aside shows evident wear on the left-

hand side of the Tonneau Cover as an
example.
The image aside shows the film package and the

film, which must be laid out flat for application.
Specific tools and materials needed for the
procedure:
This film must be applied with a semi-soft rubber

or silicone spatula with no sharp corners,
measuring no larger than the dimensions
given in the image aside. Purchase this
spatula locally.
The white arrows indicate the rounded sides.
New microfibre cloths.

ISOPROPYL alcohol.
Water based detergent.
DO NOT warm the film before removal.

The film must be replaced with the vehicle bodywork at the normal ambient temperature inside the
workshop.
If the bodywork is excessively warm, adhesive will be transferred from the film to the Tonneau Cover
paintwork.
With the vehicle in "Cabrio" configuration, clean the Tonneau Cover thoroughly with a new microfibre cloth
and water based detergent.
Open the luggage compartment lid.

To ensure that the film detaches evenly, lift the
film by hand along the entire outer edge.
Working with due caution and starting from one

edge, detach the film slowly, ensuring that no
glue residue is left on the paintwork.
Clean the Tonneau Cover thoroughly, using
ISOPROPYL alcohol only, to remove any
glue residue.
Remove any glue residue, using only new

microfibre cloths.
As you progressively remove the backing from

the film, spray water based detergent onto the
entire adhesive side of the film.
Check again that there is no dust or lint on the
Tonneau Cover, then apply the film.
Slide the film into place by hand to ensure that

the edges are also correctly aligned.
Align the film correctly along the entire rear edge

of the Tonneau Cover.
Using suitable paper scissors, trim any excess
film from the front RH and LH edges indicated.
The definitive application of the film must be
carried out exclusively with the specific
spatula, using lateral movements (see
photo aside) to prevent stretching the film.
Then, as described above, working with due

caution and performing lateral movements
with the spatula, ensure that the film adheres
completely to the paintwork, pressing onto the
film with the necessary force to expel the
detergent without leaving any air bubbles,
adhering the film definitively onto the
Tonneau Cover.
If the film does not adhere correctly, rinse the
relative part of the film with water only, then
adhere again.
After application, check that there are no air

bubbles and leave the film for at least 1
hour to allow the adhesive to set.
Leave the adhesive to set for an hour, then wash

the Tonneau Cover with water only and dry
with a clean microfibre cloth.
A3.37 Service counter reset
Service counter reset
Connect the DEIS tester to the diagnostic socket.
Switch on the DEIS tester.

Click the DEIS button.
Select "NQS - Instrument panel".
Click "Diagnostics"
Select "SET SERVICE"
A3.38 Cylinder compression test
Cylinder compression test

Perform the cycle "160 NCM Compression mode management" with the DEIS diagnostic tester after
disabling engine firing.
Remove the spark plugs ( A3.13).

Remove all.
Screw the instrument into the spark plug seat, then press the engine start button to rotate the crankshaft
by a number of turns while reading the pressure within the combustion chamber.
Repeat the procedure for each cylinder.
Refit the spark plugs ( A3.13).

Perform the cycle "160 NCM Compression mode management" with the DEIS diagnostic tester, re-
enabling engine firing.
B1.01 Technical specifications
Engine specifications
The engine is a naturally aspirated V8 with a 180° crank.

Variable valve timing with continuous high pressure timing adjuster mechanism on all camshafts.
Timing chains (one per cylinder bank) control with hydraulic chain tensioners.
Four overhead composite camshafts (two per cylinder bank) and four valves per cylinder with self-
adjusting hydraulic tappets.
Wet sump and oil-water heat exchanger incorporated in crankcase, between the two cylinder banks.
The following components are mounted on the engine: air conditioner compressor, power steering pump
and alternator (all driven by the crankshaft via a single belt) and the water pump (driven via a separate
belt).
The engine is cooled by a circuit containing an antifreeze mixture.
Main engine specifications
Type F136IB
Number of cylinders 90° V8
Cylinder bore 37 in.
Piston stroke 304 in.
Total displacement 4297 cm³
Compression ratio 12.2: 1
Max. engine speed 8000 rpm
Max. power 338 kW
Max. power 460 hp
Corresponding rpm 7750 rpm
Max. torque 485 Nm
Main engine specifications (FROM MY '13)
Type F136IH
Number of cylinders 90° V8
Cylinder bore 37 in.
Piston stroke 304 in.
Total displacement 4297 cm³
Compression ratio 12.2: 1
Max. engine speed 8000 rpm
Max. power 338 kW
Max. power 490 hp
Max. torque 505 Nm
B1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Tool (AM 107064)

mounting for crankcase on AV 2621 trolley.
Trolley 95977565 (AS 107565)

removing the engine / gearbox / subframe
assembly.
Tool 95977566 (AS 107566)

for removing the oil sump.
Wrench USAGD156 (95971560)

for tightening oil filter.
Tensiometer (95978151)
Seem DIAPAZ.
Trolley 95972621 (AV 2621)

for overhauling engine-gearbox assemblies
Sheet 95973608 (AV 3608)

for protecting intake orifices in heads.
Torque wrench 95978172 (AV 8172)
(Replaces torque wrench USAG 815F)
Wrench 95978175 (AV 8175)

tightening fuel pump filter retainer ring.
Wrench 95978176 (AV 8176)

tightening fuel level sensor.
Exhaust tailpipe extensions 95978177 (AV 8177)
for connection to exhaust fume extractor.
Pins 95978350 (AV 8350)

aligning engine mounting bushes with front
removable subframe.
Pins 95978351 (AV 8351)

alignment for installation of front/rear removable
subframes.
B1.03 Tightening torques

Fastening ancillary belt pulley to front cover Screw 49 Nm B
Fastening idler pulley to front cover Screw 25 Nm B
Cap - front cover M20x11 tapered plug 22 Nm B
Cap - front cover M14x1.5x13 tapered 23 Nm B
plug
Cap - front cover M14x1.5x13 tapered 23 Nm B
plug
Fastening spark plug NGK spark plug 11 Nm A
Fastening engine mounting bush to front Screw 50 Nm B
removable subframe
Fastening engine strut to engine bushing Screw 103 Nm A
Nut 103 Nm A
Fastening ground braid to engine Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening heat shield to transmission shaft Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening passenger compartment air intake tray Nut / Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening water pipe to pressure Screw collar 4 Nm B
switch/thermostat and water pump
Fastening lower crankcase shell to crankcase Nut (pretightening) 10 Nm A
Products to use: SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 Nut (applying angle of +15 0
61.5-15 Nm
145°± 1°)
Nut (applying angle of +19.5 0
57-19.5 Nm
115°± 1°)
Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening lower crankcase shell to crankcase External nut 15 Nm A
Products to use: MOLYKOTE 1000 pretightening
Set angle of: 105° ± 1° Tightening torque of 37.5 ÷ 76.5 Nm A
external nut at 105°±
1°
Fastening outer seam of lower crankcase shell to Screw 10 Nm A
crankcase
Fastening piston cooling jets Screw 3 Nm B
Products to use: Loctite 242
Fastening threaded plug of flywheel side oil duct M22x1.5 plug 60 Nm A
to crankcase
Oil and water duct threaded plugs M22x1.5 plug in brass 30 Nm B
Fastening oil sump to lower crankcase shell Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening heat exchanger to crankcase Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening front cover to crankcase and cylinder Screws 10 Nm B
heads
Fastening threaded plug to front cover M18x1.5 plug 40 Nm B
Fastening water vent pipe from heat exchanger to Nut 10 Nm B
expansion tank to heat exchanger
Fastening mounting bracket for water pipe from Screw 10 Nm B
heat exchanger to expansion tank
Fastening oil vapour separator to left hand Screw 10 Nm B
cylinder head cover
Fastening engine mounting struts Screw 45 Nm A
Fastening heads to crankcase Nut (pretightening) 60 Nm A
Products to use: MOLYKOTE BR2 Nut (with 90° angle) +15 0
85-15 Nm
Fastening camshaft caps and cam tower caps Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm A
Screw (with 30° angle) +1 0
10-2 Nm
Fastening tapered threaded plug to intake side M6x1 plug 5 Nm B
water circuit orifices and oil circuit orifices
Products to use: AREXONS 242
Fastening tapered threaded cap for metal core M18x1.5 plug in brass 28 Nm B
mounting orifices
Fastening tapered threaded cap for oil circuit M10x1.25 plug 7 Nm B
orifices
Fastening the cylinder head covers Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm B
Screw 11 Nm B
Fastening pump cap to cylinder head Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
Set angle of: 30° screw
Tightening torque of +2 B
10-2 Nm
screw at 30°
Fastening timing adjusters on camshafts Screw (pretightening) 50 Nm A
Products to use: SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 Screw (with 70° angle) 100 ÷ 140 Nm 0
Fastening pipe unions fastening water circuit Filler neck 40 Nm B
pipes to cylinder heads
Fastening threaded plug on rear of left hand M18x1.5 plug 40 Nm B
cylinder head
Fastening connecting rods Screw (1st pre- +1.5 0
20-1.5 Nm
Products to use: SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 tightening stage)
Screw (2nd pre- +1.5 0
30-1.5 Nm
tightening stage)
Screw (applying angle +15 0
70-15 Nm
of 58°±1°)
Fastening torsion damper to crankshaft Screw 450 Nm A
Fastening shoulder to drive gear mounting Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening gear mounting pin Pin 6 Nm B
Fastening fixed shoe on drive gear Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening mobile shoe on drive gear Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening mobile timing chain shoe Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening tensioner bushing to left hand cylinder Screw 10 Nm B
head
Fastening fixed timing chain drive shoe Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening camshaft drive chain tensioner Tensioner 40 Nm B
Fastening oil pump to lower crankcase shell Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening oil pump pickup tube to lower Screw 10 Nm B
crankcase shell
Fastening ground connection to cylinder heads Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening oil dipstick tube to cylinder head Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening oil sump shield to lower crankcase shell Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening for coolant delivery pipe to block Screw 8 Nm B
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK
Fastening ground cable onto cylinder head cover Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening engine oil dipstick Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening the seal flange Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
Fastening the flexible water delivery hose Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
Fastening the rigid water delivery pipe Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
Fastening the OBD pump filter to the active Screw 2 Nm B
carbon filter mounting bracket
chassis
Fastening diagnostic pump to relative mounting Screw 2 Nm B
bracket
Diagnostic pump mounting bracket - chassis Nut 9 Nm B
Evaporative emissions control system pipe Nut 9 Nm B
retainer clamps - chassis
fastener bracket
Fuel tank filler neck flange Nut 9 Nm B
Shield - chassis Screw 9 Nm B
Inspection hatch cover - tank closure Nut 3.5 Nm B
Pipes - external lateral trim panel Nut 9 Nm A
Retainers - chassis Screw 20 Nm A
Retainers - chassis Screw 20 Nm A
Fastening fuel vapour separator Nut 9 Nm B
Intake manifold - cylinder heads Screw 10 Nm B
Bracket - secondary air pump Nut 8 Nm B
Packard connector clip Nut 8 Nm B
Secondary air pump - chassis Screw 9 Nm B
Secondary air valve - exhaust manifold connector Screw 8 Nm B
pipe
Engine oil filter Oil filter cartridge 30 Nm B
Oil filter gaiter Screw 10 Nm B
Oil filter union Union 60 Nm B
Fastening engine sump Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening engine oil-water heat exchanger onto Screw 10 Nm B
crankcase
Fastening oil heat exchanger to bracket Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening brackets to coolant radiator Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening cooling system mounting brackets to Screw 20 Nm B
radiator
Fastening cowl to coolant radiator Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening electric fan to cowl Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening cooling system bracket to cowl Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening cooling system to chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening coolant system mounting bracket to Screw 24 Nm B
clutch oil radiator
Fastening cooling system pipe couplings to Nut 9 Nm B
chassis
Fastening water pump to front cover Screw 11 Nm B
Fastening pressure switch/thermostat Screw 11 Nm B
Fastening temperature sensor Sensor 16 Nm B
Fastening condenser to radiator Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening condenser to radiator Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening power steering radiator to brackets Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening engine cooling system mounting Screw 24 Nm B
brackets
Fastening bracket to cowl Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening bracket to cowl Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening expansion tank to relevant mounting Screw 8 Nm B
bracket
Fastening bottom side of duct to water radiator Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening left-hand side of duct to water radiator Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening duct to water radiator Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening engine subframe cross member Screw 30 Nm B
mounting rib
Fastening engine compartment lid lock Nut 8 Nm C
Fastening upper reinforcement cross member Screw 20 Nm B
front screws
upper screw
Fastening lower reinforcement cross member Screw 20 Nm B
screw
Fastening ATF return pipe bracket to water Screw 24 Nm B
radiator
Fastening ATF return pipe bracket to water Nut 24 Nm B
radiator
Fastening engine cooling system mounting Nut 24 Nm A
brackets
Fastening water pipe block under front right hand Screw 8 Nm B
wheelhouse for single oil heat exchanger
Fastening water vent pipe onto engine oil-water Union 10 Nm B
heat exchanger
Fastening water return pipe from single oil heat Screw collar 4 Nm B
exchanger fastening
Exhaust manifold - cylinder head Nut 25 Nm B
Exhaust extension - silencer Spherical clamp 35 Nm B
Exhaust extension - centre silencer Torx clamp 54.2 Nm B
Fastening silencer connector cross member Screw 25 Nm B
Nut 25 Nm B
Mounting bracket - exhaust extensions Nut 22 Nm B
Catalytic converter - exhaust manifold Nut 25 Nm B
Nut (pretightening) 15 Nm 0
Catalytic converter clamp - mounting bracket Nut 25 Nm B
Mounting bracket - silencer Nut 25 Nm B
Centre silencer - catalytic converter Torx clamp 54.2 Nm B
Damper - central silencer Nut 25 Nm B
Fastening catalytic converter mounting bracket to Nut 25 Nm B
transmission housing with three bushings
Bushing - catalytic converter mounting bracket Nut 25 Nm B
Silencer mounting bushing - bracket Nut 10 Nm B
B2.01 Removing the complete engine
Removing the complete engine
CAUTION
During the following operations, the VEHICLE MUST ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-TIPPING SAFETY
RETAINERS INSTALLED.
The engine must be removed from the vehicle complete with the relative mounting subframe, the
transmission housing and the catalytic converters.
The engine assembly is removed by lowering out from underneath the vehicle using the specific lift trolley
(AS 107565).

Lift the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
Drain the cooling system ( A3.07).
Drain the power steering system ( D5.07).
Discharge the air conditioning system ( F5.11).
Remove the motorised throttle body ( F3.10).
Remove both.
Remove the centre silencer ( B7.04).
Undo the nuts (2).

Remove the power steering system pipe
mounting brackets (1) from the steering box,
moving the pipes out of the way so that they
do not hinder the subsequent operations.
Loosen the screw collar (3).
Disconnect the pipe (4) from the power steering
fluid tank.
Undo the screw (5).

Disconnect the unions for the pipes (6) from the
compressor.

Disconnect the pipe (8) from the water pump.
Loosen the collar (9).
Disconnect the pipe (10) from the water pump.
Disconnect the delivery pipe (12) from the
pressure switch/thermostat.
Remove the battery connection cover.

Undo the nut (14).
Disconnect the positive cable (13).
Undo the screw (15) fastening the steering

column to the steering box and separate the
components.
Move the steering out of the way, facing
upwards, so that it does not hinder the
subsequent procedure to lower the
complete engine.
Disconnect the pipe (17) from the secondary air
pump.
NEW solution
Detach the quick release connector indicated.

Disconnect the pipe (17) from the secondary air
pump.
Remove the indicated collar.

Disconnect hose union (18) from the evaporative
emissions control system solenoid valve.
Disconnect the hose union (19) from the pipe
(20).
Remove the collar (21).
Disconnect the pipe (22) from the expansion tank.

exchanger
Release the indicated clips.

Disconnect the coolant pipe (24).
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat

exchanger UP TO Assembly No. 91552
Undo the indicated screw and retrieve the

retainer fork (23).
Disconnect the coolant pipe (24) from the block
(44).
ONLY for vehicles WITH Single Oil Heat
Exchanger FROM Assembly No. 91553 UP TO
Assembly No. 103178 (consult the Spare
Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles not
affected by modification)
Detach the quick release connector indicated

and disconnect the coolant pipe (24) from the
rigid pipe (44).

Exchanger FROM Assembly No. 103179
(consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify
vehicles not affected by modification)
Loosen the screw collar indicated.

Disconnect the coolant pipe (24) from the rigid
pipe (44).
Remove the collar (25).

Disconnect the pipe (26).
Note the position of the pipes (38), to prevent
accidentally swapping them during refitting.
Disconnect the pipes (38).
Release and open the indicated clip.
Undo the indicated fasteners.

Remove the passenger compartment air duct
(27) from the engine compartment.
CAUTION
Fuel is highly flammable.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind
that the line may be pressurised. Proceed
therefore with caution and keep away any type
of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto
the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent
residual fuel from leaking.
Detach the "double lock" quick release connector

(28).
Disconnect the low pressure fuel pipe (29).
Disconnect the water pipe (31) leading to the
recirculation pump from the pipe (30).
Remove the clamps indicated fastening the right
hand injection cable (32) at the top.
Disconnect the connector (33) from the front

oxygen sensor.
Disconnect the connector (34) from the rear
oxygen sensor.
Remove the indicated cable tie.
Detach the safety fasteners (35).

Disconnect the connectors (36) from the RH
Motronic ECU (37).
Disconnect the ground cable (39) from the
chassis by undoing the relative fastener
screw indicated.
Release the right hand injection cable (32),

removing the indicated clamps.
Disconnect the connectors (40).

Pull the right hand injection cable (32) upwards
out of its seat and place on top of the intake
manifold so that it does not hinder the
following operations.
Disconnect the front engine-chassis ground
cable (76) from the engine by undoing the
screw (75).

exchanger
Remove the mounting bracket (43) for the

hydraulic clutch system oil pipes, by undoing
the screws (44).
Remove the clamps (45) and (46), by undoing
the screws (47).
Remove the pipes from the mounting bracket
(48) and detach the delivery and return
unions (49).

exchanger
To disconnect the clutch hydraulic system oil

pipes, turn the safety ring nut (50) to align the
notch on the ring nut with the pin (51).
Allow the liquid remaining in the clutch hydraulic

system oil pipes to drain completely.
Remove the clamps indicated fastening the left
hand injection cable (42) at the top.

exchanger
Undo the screw (52) on the clamp retaining the

hydraulic clutch system oil pipes (53).

exchanger
Detach the hydraulic clutch system oil delivery

and return unions (54).
To detach the unions, follow the same procedure
given above for the rear unions.
Lift the hydraulic clutch system oil pipes to allow
access to the fasteners for the left hand
injection cable (42).
Remove the clamps indicated fastening the left
hand injection cable (42).

Disconnect the connectors (88) from the LH
Motronic ECU (89).
Disconnect the connector (55) from the front

oxygen sensor.
Disconnect the connector (56) from the rear
oxygen sensor.
Detach the oxygen sensor cables by undoing the
indicated screws.
Disconnect the ground cable (57) by undoing the
respective screw indicated.
Disconnect the connectors (58) of the injection
cable (42).
Detach the injection cable (42) from the chassis
by releasing the indicated clips.
Pull the left hand injection cable (42) upwards
out of its seat and place on top of the intake
manifold so that it does not hinder the
Undo the screws indicated.

Move the heat shield (59) to the rear to allow
access to the transmission housing fasteners
on the transmission shaft.
Undo the six screws (60) fastening the

transmission shaft (61) to the gearbox.
Remove all the screws (60) and retrieve the
three shims (62).
Use a suitable tool to separate the transmission
shaft flange from the transmission housing.
FROM Assembly No. 85739 UP TO Assembly No.
103178 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to
identify vehicles not affected by modification)
Undo the indicated screws fastening the

reinforcement tube (90) to the front
removable subframe (69).
Install the tool (AS 107566) on the top end of a

long ram hydraulic jack.
Using the long ram hydraulic jack, move the tool
(AS 107566)under the oil sump and lift to
bring it into contact.
Undo the indicated screws so that the lifting tool
can subsequently be placed under the
removable front engine mounting subframe
(69).
The screws are not all the same length. Note
the position of each screw before removing.
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare

Install the tool (AS 107566) on the top end of a

long ram hydraulic jack.
Using the long ram hydraulic jack, move the tool
(AS 107566)under the oil sump and lift to
bring it into contact.
Undo the indicated screws so that the lifting tool
can subsequently be placed under the
removable front engine mounting subframe
(69).
The trolley (AS 107565) is necessary for the
removal of the engine complete with
removable subframe.
The trolley consists of a swivelling platform (63)
with two handles (64) for locking axial
position, six alignment pins (65) with relative
swivelling and extensible mounts, a pedal
(66) for lifting the platform, and a handle
(67) for lowering the platform.
CAUTION
During the following operations, the VEHICLE
MUST ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-
TIPPING SAFETY RETAINERS INSTALLED.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, position the support trolley for
the removable subframe with particular care.
Remove the hydraulic jack from under the engine

oil sump ENSURING that the front removable
subframe does not move.
Place the trolley (AS 107565) underneath the
front removable subframe with the trolley
operating handle facing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Raise the trolley lift platform (AS 107565) with
the relative pedal to position the alignment
pins approximately 20 mm from the front
removable subframe.
Align the trolley alignment pins (AS 107565) with
the respective holes on the front removable
subframe.
Lock the trolley platform (AS 107565) with the
relative handles.
CAUTION
Always ensure that the pins of the support trolley
are inserted correctly in the respective holes on
the removable subframe.
Using a suitable wrench, raise each alignment

pin (70) of the trolley (AS 107565), and insert
fully into the respective hole on the front
removable subframe.
Undo the front screws (71).

Undo the two rear screw pairs (72).

Undo the centre screws (73).
Undo the two central screw pairs (74).
Check that the front removable subframe will not
be hindered by pipes and/or cables during
lowering.
Slowly lower the trolley lift platform (AS 107565)
with the relative lowering handle to bring the
front removable subframe into the correct
position for removing the engine.


Check that the front removable subframe will not

be hindered by pipes and/or cables during
lowering.
with the relative lowering handle to bring the
front removable subframe into the correct
position for removing the engine.
A mobile hydraulic jack or bridge crane with a minimum load capacity of 300 Kg, and two 2.5 m long safety
belts are necessary to detach the engine assembly from the respective removable subframe.
Position the lift hook over the engine.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, the straps must be located securely on the engine assembly, taking care not to crush any
cables or pipes.
Harness the engine assembly securely.

Attach the ends of the belts to the lift hook.
Raise the lift hook to place the lift belts under slight tension.
Undo the screws (77) fastening the bracket onto

the transmission housing bushing.
Undo the nut (78) fastening the front removable
subframe to the transmission housing
bushing.

Undo the screws (77).

Remove the bracket (85).
Undo the nut (78) fastening the front removable
subframe to the transmission housing
bushing.
On both sides, remove the heat shield (79),
detaching the indicated clips.
On both sides, remove the rubber lined bracket
(80), undoing the indicated nut.
UP TO Assembly No. 95407, on both sides,
undo the screw (81).
FROM Assembly No. 95408, on both sides,
undo the nut (81).

On both sides, remove the heat shield (79),

undoing the indicated screws.
On both sides, remove the rubber lined bracket
(80), undoing the indicated nut.
On both sides, undo the nut (81).
Lift the engine assembly slowly, separating from the respective removable subframe, and set down
carefully in a safe place.
Replacing the rubber engine bushings

Nut 103 Nm A

Remove the rear sections of the front wheelhouses.
Remove the front removable subframe ( E2.02).

Right hand bush
UP TO Assembly No. 103178, remove the bush

heat shield (1), detaching the two clips.
Remove the bracket (2), undoing the relative
fastener nut indicated.
Remove the retainer bracket from the bush.
UP TO Assembly No. 95407, undo the screw
(3) fastening the engine mounting strut to the
respective bush.
FROM Assembly No. 95408, undo the nut (3)
fastening the engine mounting strut to the
respective bush.
Remove and replace the engine mounting bush.
Fit the new bush, aligning correctly with the
respective engine mounting strut.
UP TO Assembly No. 95407, tighten the screw
respective bush.

Screw 103 Nm A
FROM Assembly No. 95408, tighten the nut (3)

respective bush.

Nut 103 Nm A
Fit the retainer bracket on the bush.

Fit the bracket (2) and tighten the relative
UP TO Assembly No. 103178, fit the bush heat
shield (1) and fasten with the two clips.
Left hand bush
UP TO Assembly No. 103178, remove the bush

heat shield (1), detaching the two clips.
Remove the bracket (2), undoing the relative
UP TO Assembly No. 95407, undo the screw
respective bush.
FROM Assembly No. 95408, undo the nut (3)
respective bush.
Remove and replace the engine mounting bush.
Fit the new bush, aligning correctly with the
respective engine mounting strut.
UP TO Assembly No. 95407, tighten the screw
respective bush.

Screw 103 Nm A
FROM Assembly No. 95408, tighten the nut (3)

respective bush.

Nut 103 Nm A

Fit the bracket (2) and tighten the relative
UP TO Assembly No. 103178, fit the bush heat
shield (1) and fasten with the two clips.
Refit the front removable subframe ( E2.02).

Refit the front element in both wheel bays.
Preparing engine for transport
Whenever an engine must be shipped to Ferrari, it must be delivered in the exact configuration described as
follows.
Therefore, before shipping the engine to the factory:

Remove the dumper flywheel and store for
subsequent reassembly.
Remove the starter motor and the relative heat

shield and store for subsequent reassembly.
The motorised throttle bodies and air flow meters

must be installed on the intake manifold with
the respective intake orifices plugged.
The intake manifold must be adequately
protected.
The injection wiring harness must be gathered
and fastened together with cable ties and
secured to the engine.
Plug the water inlet/outlet orifices.
Cap the inlets and outlets of the AC system

unions.
Cap the inlets and outlets of the power steering
system pipes.
Remove the fuel delivery pipe leading to the GDI
pumps and store for subsequent reassembly.
The unions and pipes on the cylinder head

covers and on the intake manifold must be
plugged.
The brake servo vacuum pipe must be installed

on the engine and plugged.
Plug the ports of the exhaust manifolds.
Remove the connector pipes and the secondary

air valves, capping the respective orifices,
and store for subsequent reassembly.
Remove the soundproofing covers on the GDI

pumps and store for subsequent reassembly.
Remove the water pipe leading from the RH
cylinder head and store for subsequent
reassembly, and cap the orifices on the head.
B2.02 Refitting the complete engine
Installing the RETROFIT KIT FOR ENGINES WITH DUAL HEAT EXCHANGER, Part No. 270157

Fastening the seal flange Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
The kit consists of the following components:
2 x TCEI M6x18 screws Part No. 231617;

Toroid O-ring Part No. 264447;
Water drain seal flange Part No. 265562.
Fit the toroid O-ring in the relative seat on the

seal flange (A).
Fit the seal flange (A).
Tighten the screws indicated.

Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
Undo the plug (B) from the new engine.

Unscrew and retrieve the union (C) from the old
engine.
Tighten the union (C) onto the new engine to a
depth of 7 (+0 / -2) mm.
Connect the pipe (D) to the union (C).
Tighten the hose clamp (1).
Installing the RETROFIT KIT FOR ENGINES WITH SINGLE HEAT EXCHANGER, Part No. 270156

Fastening the flexible water delivery hose Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
Fastening rubber lined clip Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening the rigid water delivery pipe Screw (Part No. 231617) 8 Nm B
The kit consists of the following components:
5 x TCEI M6x18 screws with washer Part No. 231617;

2 x M6 riveting nuts Part No. 248153;
Toroid O-ring Part No. 264447;
Rigid water delivery pipe Part No. 266247;
Flexible water delivery hose to engine compartment Part No. 266394.
Fit the toroid O-ring in the relative seat on the

pipe (A).
Fit the pipe (A).
Tighten the indicated screws supplied in the kit.

During the removal of the old engine, the pipe
(B) must be disconnected from the pipe (C),
by undoing the indicated screw.
Loosen the hose clamp (1).

Open the rubber lined clip (2) by undoing the
indicated screw.
Disconnect and remove the old pipe (C).
Fit and connect the new pipe (D).

Close the rubber lined clip (2) by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 8 Nm B
Align the lower hole on the pipe bracket (D) with
the respective hole on the chassis.
Holding the pipe bracket (D) in the correct
installation position, mark the positions on the
chassis of the upper holes indicated.
Loosen the hose clamp (1).

Open the rubber lined clip (2) by undoing the
indicated screw.
Disconnect and remove the pipe (D).
Use a suitable drill with a helical bit Ø 9 mm (0/+

0.1), drill holes in the positions marked
corresponding to the upper holes on the rigid
pipe bracket.
Use a suitable tool to insert and fasten the
indicated riveting nuts in the holes.
Fit and connect the pipe (D).
Close the rubber lined clip (2) by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the indicated screws supplied in the kit.

During installation of the new engine, the pipe
(A) must be connected to the pipe (D).

Refitting the complete engine

Nut 103 Nm A
Fastening front removable subframe to Nut 103 Nm B
transmission housing bushing
Fastening transmission housing bushing retainer Screw 40 Nm B
bracket to front removable subframe Screw 25 Nm B
removable subframe
Fastening front removable subframe Screw (pretightening) 20 Nm B
Screw 60 Nm B
Fastening front removable subframe to front Screw 110 Nm A
suspension mounting casting
Fastening front removable subframe to rear side Screw 34 Nm B
member
transmission tunnel casting
Fastening front removable subframe to Screw 110 Nm A
transmission tunnel side member endpiece
Fastening front removable subframe to side Screw 110 Nm A
member head casting
Fastening reinforcement tube - front removable Screw 24 Nm B
subframe
Articulated shaft - transmission housing shaft Screw with control angle 60 Nm A
of 90°
Fastening heat shield to transmission shaft Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening ground braid to engine Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening for coolant delivery pipe to block Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening cardan transmission hub - steering box Special screw 30 Nm B
shaft
Fastening water pipe to pressure Screw collar 4 Nm B
switch/thermostat and water pump
A.C. unions - compressor Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening pipe from pump - power steering tank Screw collar 4 Nm B
Check the condition of the engine mounting bushes and replace if necessary.
On both sides, loosen the screws (82) fastening

the engine mounting bushes to the front
removable subframe.
On both sides, loosen the screws (82) fastening

the engine mounting bushes to the front
removable subframe.
Provisionally fasten the retainer bracket to the

gearbox mounting bush (85), hand-tightening
one of the two screws (77).
CAUTION
To ensure safety, the straps must be located securely on the engine assembly, taking care not to crush any
cables or pipes.
Using a hydraulic jack or bridge crane with lift belts, place the engine assembly on the front removable
subframe, aligning the engine mounting struts precisely with the respective bushes and the
transmission housing bushing with the respective hole.
UP TO Assembly No. 95407, on both sides,
tighten the screws (81) fastening the engine
mounting strut to the engine mounting bush.

Screw 103 Nm A
FROM Assembly No. 95408, on both sides,

tighten the nuts (81) fastening the engine
mounting strut to the engine mounting bush.

Nut 103 Nm A
Lift the engine slightly to separate the engine

mounting bushes from the front removable
subframe and eliminate any strain in the
bushes, then lower the engine again.
On both sides, fit the rubber lined retainer
bracket for the oxygen sensor cables (80),
and tighten the indicated nut.
On both sides, fit the heat shield (79) around the
engine mounting bushes and fasten the
indicated clips.

On both sides, tighten the nuts (81) fastening the

engine mounting strut to the engine mounting
bush.

Nut 103 Nm A
Lift the engine slightly to separate the engine

mounting bushes from the front removable
subframe and eliminate any strain in the
bushes, then lower the engine again.
On both sides, fit the rubber lined retainer
bracket for the oxygen sensor cables (80),
and tighten the indicated nut.
On both sides, fit the heat shield (79), and
tighten the indicated screws.
Turn the bracket (85) installed previously,
bringing it over the transmission housing
bushing bracket (86) and aligning with the
hole on the front removable subframe.
Tighten the nut (78).

Nut 103 Nm B
Tighten the screws (77).

Screw 40 Nm B


Nut 103 Nm B
Fit the bracket (85).


Screw 25 Nm B
Definitively tighten the relative screws (82).

Screw 50 Nm B
Definitively tighten the relative screws (82).

Screw 50 Nm B
Tighten the pins (AV 8351) into the M12 holes

for fastening the subframe to the vehicle
chassis.

chassis.
Move the lift trolley (AS 107565), complete with

front removable subframe, under the front of
the vehicle, with the trolley operating handle
facing toward the front of the vehicle.
Check that the complete engine will not be
hindered by any cables or wiring harnesses
during the lifting procedure.
Raise the trolley lift platform (AS 107565) with
the relative pedal to bring the front removable
subframe into contact with the vehicle chassis.
Undo the alignment pins.

Pre-tighten all the screws fastening the front
removable subframe

Screw (pretightening) 20 Nm B
Tighten the front screws (71).

Screw 110 Nm A
Tighten the centre screw pairs (74).

Screw 34 Nm B
Tighten the centre screws (73).

Screw 110 Nm A
Tighten the two rear screw pairs (72).

Screw 110 Nm A
Partially tighten then fully tighten all the indicated

screws fastening the front removable
subframe (69) in the following sequence.
The screws are not all the same length. Before
applying the screws, refer to the notes made
during removal to ascertain which screws
correspond to which positions.

Screw 60 Nm B
CAUTION
Check that all screws are correctly fastened before
removing the trolley supporting the removable
subframe.

with the relative lowering handle.
Place a hydraulic jack fitted with the tool
(AS 107566) under the engine oil sump.
Tighten the centre screws indicated.

Screw 110 Nm A
Tighten the front screws indicated.

Screw 110 Nm A
Tighten the rear screws indicated.

Screw 110 Nm A
The front removable subframe (69) is now

completely fastened and the hydraulic jack
may be removed.
CAUTION
Check that all screws are correctly fastened before
removing the trolley supporting the removable
subframe.

with the relative lowering handle.
(AS 107566) under the engine oil sump.
Partially tighten then fully tighten all the indicated
screws fastening the front removable
subframe (69) in the following sequence.

Screw 60 Nm B
FROM Assembly No. 85739 UP TO Assembly No.

103178 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to
Apply and tighten the two screws indicated

fastening the reinforcement tube (90) to the
front removable subframe (69).

Screw 24 Nm B
Fit the transmission shaft, performing the tests
and checks described as follows.
On the rear of the transmission shaft is a white
marking indicating the point of maximum
imbalance. This mark must be positioned at
approximately 180° relevant to the marking
on the transmission housing (point of
maximum flywheel imbalance).
The positions of the markings shown in the
photo aside are indicative only.
Fit the three shims (62) then snug and

subsequently fully tighten the six screws (60)
fastening the transmission shaft (61) to the
transmission housing shaft.
Proceed in a crossed pattern when both
snugging and tightening the screws to
torque.
Tighten the screws to the definitive torque with

a control angle of 90°.

Screw with control angle of 90° 60 Nm A
Move the heat shield (59) forwards.


Screw 8 Nm C
Fit and secure the left hand injection cable (42),
fastening the indicated clips.
Connect the connectors (58).
Connect the connector (55) of the front oxygen

sensor.
Connect the connector (56) of the rear oxygen
sensor.
Secure the oxygen sensor connector cables by
tightening the fastener screws for the
indicated brackets
Connect the ground cable (57) by tightening the
respective screw.
Connect the connectors (88) to the left hand

Motronic ECU (89).
Fasten the safety fasteners (87).
indicated brackets.

exchanger
Observe the procedure described as follows to

connect the clutch hydraulic system oil pipe
unions correctly:
pin (51);
connected.

exchanger
Connect the hydraulic clutch system oil delivery

exchanger
Fasten the hydraulic clutch system oil pipes (53),

by tightening the screw (52) on the retainer
clamp.

indicated brackets.

exchanger

and return unions (49), following the same
procedure given above for the front unions,
and fasten to the mounting bracket (48).
Fit and fasten the clamps (45) and (46), by hand
Fit the mounting bracket (43) for the hydraulic
clutch system oil pipes, tightening the screws
(44).

Screw 20 Nm B
Connect the ground cable (76), tightening the
screw (75).

Screw 25 Nm B
Fit the right hand injection cable (32).

Secure the right hand injection cable (32),

indicated brackets.
respective fastener screw.
Connect the connectors (36) to the right hand

Motronic ECU (37).
Connect the connector (33) of the front oxygen

sensor.
Connect the connector (34) of the rear oxygen
sensor.
Secure the cable of the connector (33) with the
indicated clamp.
Fit and secure the right hand injection cable (32),
indicated brackets.
Connect the water pipe (31) to the pipe (30).
Install the engine compartment air duct (27) in its

seat in the engine compartment from above
and fasten by hand tightening the fasteners
indicated.

Nut / Screw 7.5 Nm B
CAUTION
Connect the low pressure fuel pipe (29),

fastening the "double-lock" quick release
connector (28).
Connect the pipes (38) to the solenoid valve and
to the accumulator tank using the markings
made during removal as reference.
Fasten the pipes (38) with the indicated bracket.
Connect the vacuum pipe (26) to the block on

the intake manifold.
Fit and tighten the collar (25).

exchanger
Connect the water pipe (24) to the front engine

cover.
Attach the indicated clips.
exchanger UP TO Assembly No. 91552
Apply AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 - MEDIUM

STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on the thread of
the specified screw.
Replace the O-ring then connect the engine
coolant delivery pipe (24) to the block (44).
Fasten the pipe (24), fitting the retainer fork (23)
and tightening the indicated screw.

Screw 8 Nm B

Exchanger FROM Assembly No. 91553 UP TO
Connect the engine coolant delivery pipe (24) to

the rigid pipe (44), fastening the indicated
quick release connector.

Connect the coolant pipe (24) to the rigid pipe

(44).
Tighten the indicated screw collar.
Connect the pipe (22) to the expansion tank,
fitting and tightening a new collar (21).
Connect the hose union (19) to the pipe (20).

Connect the hose union (18) to the evaporative
emissions control system solenoid valve,
fitting and tightening the collar indicated.
Connect the pipe (17) to the secondary air pump.

NEW solution
Connect the pipe (17) to the secondary air pump,

fastening the indicated quick release
connector.
Connect the steering column to the steering box.

Tighten the screw (15).

Special screw 30 Nm B
Connect the positive cable (13) for connecting to

the alternator to the battery terminals, hand
tightening the nut (14).
Fit the battery connection cover.
Connect the delivery pipe (12) to the pressure
switch/thermostat.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Connect the pipe (10) to the front of the water

pump.
Tighten the screw collar (9).

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Connect the pipe (8) to the rear of the water

pump.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Connect the pipes (6) to the compressor,

replacing the respective seals.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the pipe (4) to the power steering fluid
reservoir.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fit the mounting brackets for the power steering

system pipes (1) in the relative seats on the
steering box bushes.
Tighten the nuts (2).

Nut 9 Nm B

Refit both.
Refit the centre silencer ( B7.04).

Refit the motorised throttle body ( F3.10).
Refit both.

Charge the air conditioning system. ( F5.11).
Fill the power steering system ( D5.07).
Fill the cooling system ( A3.07).
ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat exchanger. Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell
DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
Perform the operation only if oil leaked during pipe disconnection.

Lower the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
B2.03 Engine overhaul - Disassembly
Preparations for engine overhaul
The following procedures must be performed in a suitable, clean area, wearing professional
disposable nitrile powder free gloves.
Frequently check the condition of the gloves used and replace if torn of excessively soiled.
After removing each component, note the positions of screws, brackets, braids, sheaths and clamps to
facilitate subsequent reassembly and ensure that all components are refitted correctly.
When removing each component, collect all fasteners and washers in a suitable container to keep the
work area tidy and prevent the possibility of mistakes during reassembly.
During reassembly, replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings for the removed components.
Remove the complete engine ( B2.01).

Remove the transmission housing ( C4.03).
Remove the flywheel ( C4.04).
Install the support tool (AM 107064) on the

trolley (AV 2621).
Using appropriate lifting equipment, place the
engine on the support tool (AM 107064) and
fasten onto the tool.
Removing the cylinder head covers
The following procedure is for removing the left cylinder head cover. Where applicable, differences in the
procedure for the right hand cylinder head cover are given.
Some of the following photos show the engine on the workbench to illustrate the operation more clearly.

Remove the internal engine compartment cross brace ( E2.04).
Remove the GDI injection pumps ( F3.19).
Remove the timing sensors ( F3.02).
Remove the ignition coils ( F3.17).
Replace the secondary air valve ( F3.15).
Remove it.
Left hand side only _ Only for vehicles WITHOUT
SINGLE OIL HEAT EXCHANGER
Release the AC pipe (1), removing the indicated

clamps.
Move the AC pipe (1) aside so that it does not
hinder the subsequent operations.
Right hand side only
Disconnect the connector (9).
Release the engine oil dipstick (10) by undoing

Move the engine oil dipstick (10) as far outward
as possible, taking care not to bend it.
The engine oil dipstick (10) is still connected to
the lower crankcase shell.
Left hand side only
Undo the indicated screw fastening the pipe (15).

Release the pipe (5) by undoing the indicated
screw.
Move the pipe (5) as far outward as possible,
taking care not to bend it.
The pipe (5) remains fastened to the exhaust
manifold.
Left-hand side
Release the ground cable (8) by undoing the

indicated screw.
Disconnect the connector (13) and detach from
the relative bracket.
Move the injection cable (7) away from the
cylinder head cover, detaching in the
positions indicated by the red arrows.
Right-hand side
Release the ground cable (8) by undoing the

indicated screw.
Move the injection cable (7) away from the
cylinder head cover, detaching in the
positions indicated by the red arrows.
Left-hand side
Undo all the screws indicated.

Retrieve the clamp (14) complete with cable.
Take care not to damage or scratch the
cylinder head cover.
Remove the cylinder head cover (12) from its

relative seat.
Right-hand side

Remove the cylinder head cover (11) from its

relative seat.
Removing the front engine cover

Remove the intake manifold ( B4.04).
Remove the cylinder head covers ( B2.03).
Remove the compressor ( F5.03).
Remove the power steering pump ( D5.03).
Disconnect the pipe (1), removing the indicated

collar.
Disconnect the pipe (1), removing the indicated

collar.

Release and open the indicated clips.
Remove the secondary air system pipe assembly
(4).
Loosen the screws (5).
Undo the indicated screw.

Remove the belt tensioner (A).

Remove the torsion damper (B).
Remove the bracket (C), undoing the respective
screw indicated.
Remove the bracket (D), undoing the respective
screws indicated.

Remove the cover (E).
Note the respective positions of the indicated

screws.
The screws indicated are not all of the same
length.
Detach and remove the front cover.
Removing the sump

Adequately support the weight of the sump (A).
Note that there may be engine oil residue in
the sump.

Remove the sump (A).
Retrieve the gasket (2) and replace.
Removing the timing chains
Remove the front engine cover ( B2.03).
Check that the mobile shoes function correctly and replace if necessary.
Install a dial gauge complete with adapter in the

spark plug orifice of cylinder 1.
Bring cylinder 1 to TDC during the power
stroke.
Remove the dial gauge complete with adapter.
Left hand cylinder bank, UP TO engine No.
166072

Remove the fixed shoe (A).
Left hand cylinder bank
Immobilise the camshafts with the reaction tool.

Undo the tensioner (B).
Remove the mobile shoe (C), undoing the
Remove the intake variable valve timing adjuster
(D), undoing the respective screw indicated
and retrieving the respective diamond-coated
washer.
(E), complete with chain (F), undoing the
respective screw indicated and retrieving the
respective diamond-coated washer.
Remove the fixed shoe (G), undoing the
respective screws indicated.
Right hand cylinder bank, UP TO engine No.

166072

Remove the fixed shoe (A).
Right hand cylinder bank

Undo the tensioner (B).
Remove the mobile shoe (C), undoing the
(D), undoing the respective screw indicated
and retrieving the respective diamond-coated
washer.
(E), complete with chain (F), undoing the
respective screw indicated and retrieving the
respective diamond-coated washer.
Remove the fixed shoe (G), undoing the
Remove the shoulder bush (H), undoing the

Remove the mobile shoe (I), undoing the
Remove the fixed shoe (L), undoing the
Remove the fixed shoe (M), undoing the

Remove the fixed shoe (N), undoing the
Remove the indicated Seeger ring from the
engine oil pump drive gear.
Ease off and remove the engine oil pump drive

gear (O), complete with chain (P).
Simultaneously, ease off and remove the gear

(Q) from the drive gear spindle, and remove
the gear (R) from the crankshaft, complete
with chain (S).
Check the condition of the shoes, chains and gear wheels, replacing any components with evident signs of
wear.
Removing the camshafts
Remove the timing chains ( B2.03).

Remove the GDI injection pumps ( F3.19).
Replace the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves ( F3.16).
Remove the variable timing adjuster solenoid valves

Remove the cap (A).

Remove the cam tower caps (B).

Remove the cap (C).
Remove the camshafts from the cylinder heads.
Removing the cylinder heads

Remove the right hand exhaust manifold ( B7.02).
Remove the left hand exhaust manifold ( B7.02).
Remove the GDI injection rail pipes ( F3.19).
Remove the alternator ( F2.04).
Remove the spark plugs ( A3.13).
Remove the camshafts ( B2.03).
Right hand cylinder head, UP TO engine No.

156350
Right hand cylinder head, FROM Engine No.

156351
Left hand head

Remove the tappets (A).
Undo the indicated nuts, retrieving the respective

washers.
Remove the cylinder head, easing the head off
the respective stud bolts.
Remove the gasket (B).
Removing the lower crankcase shell
Remove the starter motor ( F2.05).

Remove the timing chains ( B2.03).
Remove the sump ( B2.03).
Remove the engine oil pump ( B5.02).
Remove the indicated Seeger ring.
Pull out and remove the engine oil dipstick
extension (A).

Remove the gaiter (B).
Unscrew and remove the engine oil filter (C).
On both sides of the engine, remove the struts

(D), undoing the indicated screws.
Retrieve the brackets (E).

Undo the indicated nuts, retrieving the respective
washers.
Easing carefully off the stud bolts, remove the
lower crankcase shell (F), complete with the
half bearings and bearing shims for the
crankshaft.
FROM Engine No. 153879
Remove the four blow-by valves (G), undoing the

Removing the crankshaft
Remove the lower crankcase shell ( B2.03).
Turn the crankshaft as necessary to allow

access to all the screws indicated.
Remove all the connecting rod caps (A).
Remove the crankshaft (B).
Remove the half bearings (1) from the

connecting rod caps.
Remove the half bearings (2) from the

connecting rods.
Remove the bearing shims (3) from the
crankcase.
Remove the half bearings (4) from the crankcase.
Remove the bearing shims (5) from the lower

crankcase shell.
Remove the half bearings (6) from the lower
crankcase shell.
Removing and disassembling piston-connecting rod assemblies
Remove the crankshaft ( B2.03).

Remove the cylinder heads ( B2.03).
Number the pistons (A) and the respective

positions, starting from the timing side of the
right hand cylinder bank and proceeding in
clockwise order.
Using a suitable rubber tool and taking extreme
care not to hit the piston cooling jet nozzles,
push the pistons (A), complete with
connecting rods, towards the top ends of the
cylinder sleeves.
Remove the pistons (A), complete with
connecting rods, from the cylinder sleeves.
Match the connecting rod caps (B) with the

respective connecting rod shanks (C) and
fasten by hand-tightening the indicated
screws.
To match the components correctly, refer to the
alphanumeric code stamped on the
connecting rod caps (B) and shanks (C)
themselves.
Detach and remove the indicated ring.
Push out and remove the piston pin (D).
Separate the piston (A) from the connecting rod
shank (C).
Remove the piston rings (E) from the respective
seats on the piston (A).
Remove the oil scraper ring (F) from the
respective seat on the piston (A).
B2.04 Engine overhaul - Inspections
Main characteristics of cylinder sleeves
Min. coaxiality 0.03 mm

Nominal diameter 94 mm±0.008
(DN)
Max. ovalisation at D3 0.015 mm
Visual inspection of piston wear
The following procedures must be performed in a suitable, clean area, wearing professional disposable nitrile powder free gloves.
Remove the pistons complete with connecting rods ( B2.03).
Clean the pistons thoroughly, taking care not to damage them.

Visually inspect the outer surface of the pistons, checking that there are no signs of scoring or abnormal wear.
If any signs of scoring or abnormal wear are found, replace the pistons.
Checking dimensions of the crankshaft and selecting half bearings
The following procedures must be performed in a suitable, clean area, wearing professional disposable nitrile powder free gloves.
Remove the crankshaft ( B2.03).
Visually inspect the outer surface of the crankshaft, checking that there are no signs of scoring or abnormal wear.
Measure the main journals and the
crankpins with a micrometer.
The dimensions measured must
comply with the specified
values.
Using the dimensions measured,

refer to the following tables to
select the correct crankshaft
half bearings and connecting
rod half bearings.
Main journal half bearing selection
table
CLASS A CLASS B
crankca crankca
se se
(66.675 (66.682
to to
66.681) 66.688)
CLASS A BLUE YELLOW
cranksh
aft
(62.986
to
62.992)
CLASS B YELLOW GREEN
cranksh
aft
(62.979
to
62.985)
Table for selecting Lead Free main

journal half-bearings (FROM
Engine No. 172991)
CLASS A CLASS B
crankca crankca
se se
(66.675 (66.682
to to
66.681) 66.688)
CLASS A BLUE YELLOW
cranksh
aft
(62.986
to
62.992)
CLASS B YELLOW GREEN
cranksh
aft
(62.979
to
62.985)
Crankpin half bearing selection

table
CLASS X CLASS Y
connecti connecti
ng rod ng rod
(47.129 (47.136
to to
47.135) 47.142)
CLASS X RED BLUE
cranksh
aft
(43.630
to
43.637)
CLASS Y BLUE BLACK
cranksh
aft
(43.621
to
43.629)
Table for selecting Lead Free
crankpin half-bearings (FROM
Engine No. 172991)
CLASS X CLASS Y
connecti connecti
ng rod ng rod
(47.129 (47.136
to to
47.135) 47.142)
CLASS X RED BLUE
cranksh
aft
(43.630
to
43.637)
CLASS Y BLUE BLACK
cranksh
aft
(43.621
to
43.629)
B2.05 Engine overhaul - Rebuild
Reassembling and refitting the piston-connecting rod assemblies
Check piston wear visually ( B2.04).
Fit the oil scraper ring (F) in the respective seat

on the piston (A).
Orienting correctly, fit the piston rings (E) in the
respective seats on the piston (A).
The upper ring must be fitted with the inner
groove facing upwards.
The lower ring must be fitted with the outer

groove facing downwards.
Fit the rings (E) with the respective gaps on

opposite sides of the piston from one another,
and not facing towards either the exhaust or
intake sides of the piston.
Assemble the piston (A) onto the shank (C) of
the respective connecting rod.
The alphanumeric code stamped on the
connecting rod shank (C) must face towards
the exhaust side of the cylinder.
Fit and install the piston pin (D).

Fit and fasten the indicated ring.
Remove the connecting rod caps (B) from the

respective shanks (C), undoing the indicated
screws.
Apply SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 to the
piston rings, taking care not to turn the rings
out of position.

inner surfaces of the cylinder sleeves.
Before installing the cylinder sleeves, check that

the pistons are oriented with the intake side
facing upwards and the exhaust side facing
downwards, as illustrated.
Using a specific piston installation tool, fit the
pistons (A), complete with connecting rods, in
the respective cylinder sleeves.
Refit the crankshaft ( B2.05).

Refit the cylinder heads ( B2.05).
Refitting the crankshaft

Fastening connecting rods Screw (1st pre- +1.5 0
20-1.5 Nm
Products to use: SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 tightening stage)
Screw (2nd pre- +1.5 0
30-1.5 Nm
tightening stage)
Screw (applying angle of +15 0
70-15 Nm
58°±1°)
Check the dimensions of the crankshaft ( B2.04).
Thoroughly clean the seats of the half bearings and of the bearing shims for the crankshaft.
Fit the half bearings (6) in the respective seats

on the lower crankcase shell.
Lubricate the half bearings (6) with engine oil
SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40.
Apply MOLYKOTE BR2 grease to surface of the
bearing shim (5) in contact with the lower
crankcase shell.
Fit the bearing shims (5) in the respective seats
on the lower crankcase shell.

on the crankcase.
Apply MOLYKOTE BR2 grease to the surface of

the bearing shim (3) in contact with the
crankcase.
Fit the bearing shims (3) in the respective seats
on the crankcase.
on the connecting rods.

on the connecting rod caps.
Fit the crankshaft (B), taking the utmost caution

not to alter the positions of the half bearings
and bearing shims installed previously.
Replace all connecting rod fastener screws
that have been subjected to operating
temperature.
After fitting, the new connecting rod fastener
screws may be removed and refitted
once only.
A connecting rod must be replaced if, after
two consecutive tightening sequences,
the control torque and/or extension
values are no longer within specified
tolerances.
A connecting rod must be replaced if the
maximum control torque value exceeds
100 Nm
The same connecting rod may be installed
up to 10 times provided that all the
tightening torque values remain within
specified tolerances.
Check the condition and cleanliness of the

mating surfaces between the connecting rod
shanks and the big end caps
Lubricate the areas of the crankshaft
corresponding to the connecting rod caps (A)
with engine oil SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-
40.
Match the connecting rod caps (A) with the
respective connecting stems and fasten by
hand-tightening the indicated screws.
To match the components correctly, refer to the
alphanumeric code stamped on the
connecting rod caps and stems themselves.
Definitively tighten the indicated screws.

Screw (1st pre-tightening +1.5 0
20-1.5 Nm
stage)
Screw (2nd pre-tightening +1.5 0
30-1.5 Nm
stage)
Screw (applying angle of 58° +15 0
70-15 Nm
±1°)
Using suitable feeler gauges, check that the endfloat of the connecting rods is between 0.200 and 0.339
mm.
Refit the lower crankcase shell ( B2.05).
Refitting the lower crankcase shell

Fastening lower crankcase shell baffles Screw 3 Nm B
Fastening lower crankcase shell to crankcase Nut (pretightening) 10 Nm A
Products to use: SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 Nut (applying angle of +15 0
61.5-15 Nm
145°± 1°)
Nut (applying angle of +19.5 0
57-19.5 Nm
115°± 1°)
Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening engine mounting struts Screw 45 Nm A
Fastening oil filter gaiter Screw 10 Nm B
Using compressed air and a cloth moistened with heptane, thoroughly clean the mating surfaces between
the crankcase and the lower crankcase shell.
Using compressed air and a cloth moistened with heptane, thoroughly clean the fastener nuts and the
respective washers for the lower crankcase shell.
Replace the gaskets (1) and the gasket (2).

The crankcase and lower crankcase shell
must be mated within 10 minutes of
applying the CAF 4 paste.
Apply CAF 4 paste to the crankcase, as

indicated by the dotted guidelines, to create
an uninterrupted bead of sealant of uniform
diameter
Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the indicated

screws.
Fit and fasten the four blow-by valves (C),
tightening the respective screws indicated.

Screw 3 Nm B
The nuts fastening the lower crankcase shell
must be tightened within 2 minutes of
mating the crankcase with the lower
crankcase shell.
Installing the stud bolts carefully, fit the lower

crankcase shell (F), complete with the half
bearings and bearing shims for the crankshaft.
Fit the washers, with the knurled side in contact
with the lower crankcase shell.
threads of the stud bolts and to the upper
surfaces of the washers.
Pretighten the indicated nuts.

Nut (pretightening) 10 Nm A
Tighten the inner nuts indicated in the sequence

given.

Nut (applying angle of 145°± +15 0
61.5-15 Nm
1°)
Tighten the outer nuts indicated in the sequence

given.

Nut (applying angle of 115°± +19.5 0
57-19.5 Nm
1°)

Screw 10 Nm B

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the brackets (E).


Screw 10 Nm B
Using a dial gauge, check that the endfloat of the crankshaft is between 0.12 and 0.24 mm.
On both sides of the engine, fit the struts (D) and
tighten the indicated screws.

Screw 45 Nm A
Replace the engine oil filter (C), tightening the

new component correctly.
Fit the gaiter (B).

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and insert the engine oil dipstick extension

(A).
Refit the indicated Seeger ring.
Refit the engine oil pump ( B5.02).

Refit the sump ( B2.05).
Refit the timing chains ( B2.05).
Refit the starter motor ( F2.05).
Refitting the cylinder heads

Fastening heads to crankcase Nut (pretightening) 60 Nm A
Products to use: MOLYKOTE BR2 Nut (with 90° angle) +15 0
85-15 Nm
Replace the gasket (B), fitting the new

component correctly.
Apply CAF 4 in the indicated points on the top

and bottom sides of the gasket.
Fit the cylinder head on the respective stud bolts.

Fit the washers, with the knurled side in contact
with the cylinder head.
Apply MOLYKOTE BR2 grease to the upper
surfaces of the washers and to the stud bolt
threads.
Hand-tighten the indicated nuts.
Pre-tighten the indicated nuts in the sequence
given

Definitively tighten the indicated nuts in the

sequence given.

Nut (with 90° angle) +15 0
85-15 Nm

tappets (A) and fit the tappets.
Left hand head
Tighten the indicated screws, fitting the

respective brackets.
Right hand cylinder head, UP TO engine No.
156350
Tighten the indicated screw, fitting the respective

bracket.
Right hand cylinder head, FROM Engine No.

156351

bracket.
Refit the camshafts ( B2.05).

Refit the spark plugs ( A3.13).
Refit the alternator ( F2.04).
Refit the GDI injection rail pipes ( F3.19).
Refit the left hand exhaust manifold ( B7.02).
Refit the right hand exhaust manifold ( B7.02).
Refit the intake manifold ( B4.04).
Refitting the camshafts

Fastening camshaft caps and cam tower caps Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm A
10-2 Nm
Replace the seal rings (1) on the shafts.
Check the stamped code on each shaft before

installing in the cylinder head.
Fit the shafts in the respective seats in the

cylinder head.
Apply SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 oil to the
indicated shaft collars.
Fit the cap (C).
Hand-tighten the indicated screws.
Checking the stamped number, fit the caps (B) in

the respective positions.
Replace the gasket (2).

Fit the cap (A).
Pretighten the indicated screws in the sequence

given.

Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm A
Definitively tighten the indicated screws in the

sequence given.

10-2 Nm
Replace the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves ( F3.16).

Refit the variable timing adjuster solenoid valves
Refit the GDI injection pumps ( F3.19).

Refit the timing chains ( B2.05).
Refitting the timing chains

Fastening timing chain shoes Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening shoulder bushing for idler gear Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening camshaft drive chain tensioner Tensioner 40 Nm B
Check that the three bearings (T) are installed in
the correct position.
Simultaneously, fit the gear (Q) on the drive gear

spindle, and fit the gear (R) on the crankshaft,
complete with chain (S).
Fit the engine oil pump drive gear (O), complete

with chain (P).
Fit the indicated Seeger ring on the engine oil
pump drive gear.
Fit and fasten the fixed shoe (N), tightening the


Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the fixed shoe (M), tightening the


Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the fixed shoe (L), tightening the

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the mobile shoe (I), tightening the


Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the shoulder bush (H) tightening

the respective screw indicated.

Screw 25 Nm B
Install a dial gauge complete with adapter in the

spark plug orifice of cylinder 1.
Bring cylinder 1 to TDC during the power
stroke.
Remove the dial gauge complete with adapter.

Fit and fasten the fixed shoe (G), tightening the

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the intake variable valve timing

adjuster (E), complete with chain (F), fitting
the respective diamond-coated washer and
hand-tightening the respective screw
indicated.
Fit and fasten the exhaust variable valve timing
adjuster (D), fitting the respective diamond-
coated washer and hand-tightening the
Fit and fasten the mobile shoe (C), tightening the

Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the tensioner (B).

Tensioner 40 Nm B
Right hand cylinder bank, UP TO engine No.

166072
Fit the fixed shoe (A).


Screw 10 Nm B

Fit and fasten the fixed shoe (G), tightening the

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the intake variable valve timing

adjuster (E), complete with chain (F), fitting
the respective diamond-coated washer and
hand-tightening the respective screw
indicated.
Fit and fasten the exhaust variable valve timing
adjuster (D), fitting the respective diamond-
coated washer and hand-tightening the
Fit and fasten the mobile shoe (C), tightening the

Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the tensioner (B).

Tensioner 40 Nm B
Left hand cylinder bank, UP TO engine No.

166072
Fit the fixed shoe (A).


Screw 10 Nm B
Adjust the timing ( B2.05).

Refit the front engine cover ( B2.05).
Timing adjustment

Fastening timing adjusters on camshafts Screw (pretightening) 50 Nm A
Products to use: SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40 Screw (with 70° angle) 100 ÷ 140 Nm 0

Remove the front engine cover ( B2.03).
Loosen the screws fastening the variable valve

timing adjusters.
Align the reference markings indicated on the
camshafts with the reference markings
indicated on the front caps.
Hand-tighten the screws fastening the variable
valve timing adjusters.
Install a dial gauge (A) complete with adapter in
the spark plug orifice of cylinder 1.
While reading the dial gauge (A), turn the
crankshaft to bring cylinder 1 to TDC in the
power stroke.
Install a dial gauge (B), complete with mount, on
one of the intake valves of cylinder 1, keeping
the probe of the dial gauge as perpendicular
as possible with the upper surface of the
bucket tappet.
Rotate the crankshaft while reading the dial
gauge (B) to measure the valve lift, then reset
the dial gauge (B) at TDC.
In this state, the bucket tappets can rotate
freely in their seats.
While reading the dial gauge (B), turn the

crankshaft clockwise by 360° to reach the
valve overlap phase before the camshaft
starts opening the valves.
Check that the dial gauge (B) reads zero.
crankshaft to TDC of cylinder 1.
Check that both dial gauges (A) and (B) read
zero.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise until dial gauge
(A) reads a value of 4.58 mm (equivalent to
25° after TDC).
Check that the dial gauge (B) reads a value of
0.70 mm ± 0.08 mm.
Rotate the intake camshaft with a wrench to
achieve the correct values indicated.
Immobilise the intake camshaft using a reaction

tool.
Apply engine oil SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40
to the intake variable valve timing adjuster
(C), on the surface in contact with the
respective fastener screw indicated.
Pre-tighten the indicated screw.

Tighten the indicated screw.

Screw (with 70° angle) 100 ÷ 140 0
Nm
crankshaft to bring cylinder 1 to TDC in the
power stroke.
Install a dial gauge (B), complete with mount, on
one of the exhaust valves of cylinder 1,
keeping the probe of the dial gauge as
perpendicular as possible with the upper
surface of the bucket tappet.
Turn the crankshaft anticlockwise while reading
the dial gauge (A), moving the piston by 5
mm.
crankshaft clockwise to move the piston by
3.24 mm to 1.68 mm (equivalent to 15°
before TDC).
Reset the dial gauge (B) at the exhaust valve lift
value.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise while reading
the dial gauge (B) until the exhaust valve is
completely closed.
Check that the dial gauge (B) reads a value of
0.60 mm ± 0.08 mm.
Rotate the exhaust camshaft with a wrench to
achieve the correct value indicated.
Immobilise the exhaust camshaft using a

reaction tool.
Apply engine oil SHELL Helix Ultra SAE 5W-40
to the exhaust variable valve timing adjuster
(D), on the surface in contact with the
respective fastener screw indicated.
Pre-tighten the indicated screw.


Screw (with 70° angle) 100 ÷ 140 0
Nm
Check that the reference markings indicated on
the camshafts are aligned with the reference
markings indicated on the front caps.
Repeat the timing adjustment procedure described above for the other cylinder bank.
Turn the crankshaft by a few revolutions and measure the timing values again.
Remove the dial gauges.
Refit the front engine cover ( B2.05).

Refit the complete engine ( B2.02).
Refitting the sump

Fastening engine sump Screw 10 Nm B
Clean the gasket seat on the crankcase

thoroughly.
Fit a new gasket (1), aligning on the respective
holes.
Thoroughly clean the sump mating surface.
Fit the sump (A) in its relative seat.
Hand tighten the screws indicated.
Check that the gasket is positioned correctly.

Screw 10 Nm B

Refitting the front engine cover

Fastening engine covers Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening torsion damper to crankshaft Screw 450 Nm A
Fastening tensioner mounting bush Screw 10 Nm B


Remove the tensioner (F), complete with mount.
Fit the tensioner (F), complete with mount.

Clean the bush seat thoroughly.

Clean the bush seat thoroughly.
Remove the seals (8) and replace.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces between

the crankcase and the front cover.
Apply paste CAF 4 in the positions indicated.
Fit new seals (8) .
Carefully fit and fasten the front cover.
Tighten the indicated screws in the respective

positions.

Fit the cover (E).

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the bracket (D), tightening the respective

screws indicated.
Fit the bracket (C), tightening the respective
screw indicated.
Definitively tighten the front cover fastener

screws in the sequence indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and install the torsion damper (B) fully into its
seat.
Immobilise the crankshaft.
Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of the indicated
screw.
washer.

Screw 450 Nm A
Fit the tensioner (A).


Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the screws (5) and (6) in a cross pattern.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the secondary air system pipe assembly (4).
Close and fasten the indicated clips.
Connect the pipe (2).

Connect the pipe (1) fitting and tightening the
new collar as indicated.

Connect the pipe (1) fitting and tightening the
new collar as indicated.
Refit the power steering pump ( D5.03).

Refit the compressor ( F5.03).
Refit the cylinder head covers ( B2.05).
Refit the complete engine ( B2.02).
Refitting the cylinder head covers

Fastening the cylinder head covers Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm B
Screw 11 Nm B
Fastening ground cable onto cylinder head cover Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening engine oil dipstick Screw 10 Nm B
Some of the following photos show the engine on the workbench to illustrate the operation more clearly.
Replace the cylinder head cover gasket (15).

Ensure that the new gasket (15) is seated
correctly on the cylinder head cover.
Replace the indicated gaskets.
Brush soapy water onto the indicated gasket to

facilitate installation on the solenoid valves.
Remove any residual sealant paste from the
mating surface with the cylinder head.
Apply CAF 4 in the positions indicated in the
photo aside.
Left-hand side

Fit the cylinder head cover (12) in its relative seat.

Fit the clamp( 14) complete with cable.
Apply and hand tighten all screws indicated.
Left-hand side
Pre-tighten the indicated screws in the sequence

given in the photo aside.

Tighten the screws indicated in the sequence

given in the photo aside

Screw 11 Nm B
Right-hand side

Fit the cylinder head cover (11) in its relative seat.

Apply and hand tighten all screws indicated.
Right-hand side
Pre-tighten the indicated screws in the sequence



given in the photo aside

Screw 11 Nm B
Left-hand side
Fasten the injection cable (7) to the cylinder

head cover, securing in the positions
indicated by the red arrows.
Connect the connector (13) and fasten to the
relative bracket.
Fasten the ground cable (8) by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 10 Nm B
Right-hand side
Fasten the injection cable (7) to the cylinder

head cover, securing in the positions
indicated by the red arrows.
Fasten the ground cable (8) by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 10 Nm B
Left hand side only
Fasten the pipe (15) by tightening the indicated

screw.
Fasten the pipe (5) by tightening the indicated

screw.
Fasten the engine oil dipstick (10) by tightening


Screw 10 Nm B
Left hand side only _ Only for vehicles WITHOUT

SINGLE OIL HEAT EXCHANGER
Secure the AC pipe (1), fastening the indicated

clamps.
Replace the secondary air valve ( F3.15).

Refit.
Refit the ignition coils ( F3.17).

Refit the timing sensors ( F3.02).
Refit the GDI injection pumps ( F3.19).
Refit the internal engine compartment cross brace ( E2.04).
B3.01 Engine fuel system layout
Fuel system layout
A - Fuel tank
B - Fuel pump
C - High pressure pumps
D - Fuel rail
E - Low pressure pipes
F - High pressure pipes
G - Fuel level sensors
H - Fuel pump filter
B3.02 Fuel tank
Removing the fuel tank
CAUTION
FUEL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
TO PREVENT FIRE RISKS AND FUEL LEAKAGE, WORK ONLY ON A COLD ENGINE WITH AN EMPTY
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after the
operations described.
Drain the fuel system ( B3.07).

Remove the rear seats ( E4.01).
For vehicles in "2+2 seat" configuration.
Remove the luggage bench ( E4.01).

For vehicles in "2 seat" configuration.
Remove the luggage compartment trim panels ( E4.07).

Remove the front right hand trim panel only.
Remove the DCT gearbox ( C2.02).

Do not separate the DCT gearbox from the respective mounting subframe.
Undo the indicated nuts and screw.

Remove the inspection cover (A).
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the
relevant part of the engine with rags so that any
leaking fuel will be absorbed and will not come
into contact with the engine or any other unit. In
case of contact with fuel, dry the affected area
immediately.
Disconnect the pipe (1), detaching the indicated

union.
Cover the end of the pipe to prevent foreign
objects from entering.

union.

union.
Prise off the covers (4).

CAUTION
the operator.
CAUTION
immediately.

Disconnect the earth cable (6) by undoing the
indicated screw.
Disconnect the union (7), detaching the indicated
union.

Remove the indicated ring nuts.

Remove the heat shield (B).
Support the weight of the tank adequately

Remove bracket (C).
Remove bracket (C).

Remove the bracket (D).

Remove the fuel tank (E).
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles not affected by
modification)
Undo the indicated nuts and screw.

Remove the inspection cover (A).
CAUTION
immediately.

union.

union.

union.
Prise off the covers (4).

CAUTION
the operator.
CAUTION
immediately.

Disconnect the earth cable (6) by undoing the
indicated screw.
Disconnect the union (7), detaching the indicated
union.

Undo the indicated nut.

Remove the bracket (B).

Remove the bracket (B).
Remove the indicated ring nuts.
Remove the heat shield (C).
Support the weight of the tank adequately


Remove the bracket (E).

Remove the fuel tank (F).
Refitting the fuel tank

Lower bracket on fuel tank - chassis Screw 20 Nm A
Heat shield - fuel tank Screw 9 Nm B
Inspection hatch cover - tank closure Nut 3.5 Nm B
CAUTION
Check the condition of the tank and the relative

components.
Check the state of the vibration damper pads
and replace if necessary.
Check that the lateral damper pads (10) are
coated with a layer of grease TUTELA MR3,
and apply new grease if necessary.
Arrange the cables and pipes correctly to prevent them from being crushed.
Fit the fuel tank (E), supporting its weight

adequately and taking care not to bend the
vibration damper pads.
Fit the bracket (D).

Position bracket (C).

Position bracket (C).
Tighten the screws fastening the fuel tank mounting brackets.

Screw 20 Nm A
Fit the heat shield (B).

Fasten the indicated retainer ring nuts.

Screw 9 Nm B

Connect the pipe (7), fastening the indicated
union.
indicated screw.
Fit and fasten the covers (4).

union.
union.
union.
Fit the inspection cover (A).
Tighten the indicated nuts and screw.

Nut 3.5 Nm B
modification)
Check the condition of the tank and the relative

components.
Check the state of the vibration damper pads
and replace if necessary.
Check that the lateral damper pads (10) are
coated with a layer of grease TUTELA MR3,
and apply new grease if necessary.
Arrange the cables and pipes correctly to prevent them from being crushed.
Fit the fuel tank (F), supporting its weight

adequately and taking care not to bend the
vibration damper pads.
Fit the bracket (E).


Tighten the screws fastening the fuel tank mounting brackets.

Screw 20 Nm A
Fit the heat shield (C).

Fasten the indicated retainer ring nuts.
Fit the bracket (B).
Hand tighten the indicated screw.
Fit the bracket (B).


Screw 9 Nm B
Tighten the indicated nut.


union.
indicated screw.
Fit and fasten the covers (4).

union.
union.
union.
Fit the inspection cover (A).

Tighten the indicated nuts and screw.

Nut 3.5 Nm B
Refit the DCT gearbox ( C2.03).

Refit the luggage compartment trim panels ( E4.07).
Refit the front right hand trim panel only.
Refit the rear seats ( E4.01).

Refit the luggage bench ( E4.01).


Perform the "NCM Short trip sequence: leak detection monitoring" cycle.
B3.03 Active carbon filter
Removing the active carbon filter
Replace the active carbon filter at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. The filter is
located behind the right hand rear wheel bay.


Remove the fuel filler flap emergency release

cable (3) from the relative cable grommet.
Remove the clamp (4) and detach the pipe (5)
from the OBD pump filter.
Undo the screw (6) fastening the active carbon
filter mounting bracket.
Undo the screw (7) fastening the pipe connecting
the filter to the chassis.
Open the clamp (8) and release the pipe (6)

connecting to the OBD pump filter.

disconnect the quick coupling (15) from the
active carbon filter (A).
Detach the pipe (9) connecting the filter to the
diagnostic pump, removing the clamp (18).
A double-lock safety clip is fitted on the pipe (14)

connecting the filter to the fuel vapour
separator (16).
To disconnect the "double-lock" quick-coupling,
millimetres.

Working from the wheel bay, undo the screw (10)

fastening the active carbon filter mounting
bracket.
Remove the active carbon filter, complete with bracket and filter for the OBD pump, from its seat, easing
Disconnect the remaining pipes (17) connected
to the carbon filter.
millimetres.

and remove the lower pipe (17).
Undo the screw (11), release the retainer bracket

(12), detach the active carbon filter (A) and
replace.
Refitting the active carbon filter

fastener bracket
chassis
Check the state of the protective foam rubber
pads (13) applied to the active carbon filter
mounting bracket; replace if necessary.
Fit the active carbon filter (A) on the relative

mounting bracket as originally installed and
fasten with the retainer bracket (12),

Screw 5 Nm B
Connect the pipes (17) to the active carbon filter

as originally fitted.
a few millimetres.
Apply the new adhesive foam rubber (14) onto
the active carbon filter, as shown in the photo
aside.
Fit the active carbon filter, complete with bracket
and filter for the OBD pump, into its seat, via
the aperture at the rear of the vehicle.
Fasten the front of the active carbon filter by


Screw 24 Nm B
Connect the pipe (14) to the fuel vapour

separator (16).
A double-lock safety clip is fitted on the pipe.
a few millimetres.
Connect the pipe (9) connecting the filter to the
diagnostic pump and fasten the clamp (18).

connect the quick coupling (15) to the active
carbon filter (A).
Fasten the rear of the active carbon filter by


Screw 24 Nm B
Connect the pipe (5) to the OBD pump filter and

tighten the clamp (4).
Fit the fuel filler flap emergency release cable (3)
into the relative cable grommet.
Hand tighten the screw (7) fastening the pipe
connecting the filter to the chassis.
Fasten the pipe (6) to the OBD pump filter as

originally mounted, closing the clamp (8).
Fit the active carbon filter cover (1) and fasten by

The two lower screws also fasten the heat
shield mounting bracket onto the silencer.

Screw 6 Nm B

B3.04 Fuel pump assembly
Removing the fuel pump filter
CAUTION
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Located under the right hand rear seat cushion.


Prise out the cable grommet (1).

Prise out the plug (2).
Disconnect the ground cable (4), undoing the
indicated screw and retrieving the lock
washer.
CAUTION
the operator.

union.
Use a suitable tool to prise off and remove the

safety clip (10) from the fastener ring.
Fit the tool (AV 8175) on the fastener ring (6).

Using the tool (AV 8175), turn the fastener ring
(6) anticlockwise to bring the lock pin into the
indicated position.
Remove tool (AV 8175).
Remove the fastener ring (6).
CAUTION
the operator.
Remove the fuel pump filter (A).

Disconnect the pipes (7) and (8), detaching the
respective unions.
modification)


indicated nut.
CAUTION
the operator.

union.
Note the orientation of the fastener ring (6).
Remove the fastener ring (6), undoing the
indicated screws.
CAUTION
the operator.

Disconnect the pipes (7) and (8), detaching the
respective unions.
Refitting the fuel pump filter

Fastening the fuel pump filter Screw 5 Nm B
ALWAYS REPLACE the fastener ring and the O-ring whenever the fuel pump filter is removed.
Clean all removed components thoroughly and dry with compressed air.
ALWAYS replace the O-ring (11), cleaning the

respective seat thoroughly.
Connect the pipes (7) and (8), fastening the
respective unions.
Install the new fuel pump filter (A).
Check that the indicated tab on the fuel pump

filter (A) is fitted correctly in its respective
seat.
Fit a NEW fastener ring (6).

Fit the tool (AV 8175) on the fastener ring (6).
Using the tool (AV 8175), turn the fastener ring
(6) clockwise to bring the lock pin into the
indicated position.
Ensure that the fastener ring (6) is securely
fastened.
Remove tool (AV 8175).
Fit the safety clip (10) into its seat on the fuel
pump filter ring nut, ensuring that it is
securely fastened.
Connect the pipe (5), fastening the respective

union.
Connect the ground cable (4), fitting the seal
washer and tightening the indicated screw.
Fit the cap (2).

Fit the cap (1).
modification)
ALWAYS REPLACE the O-ring whenever the fuel pump filter is removed.
Clean all removed components thoroughly and dry with compressed air.
ALWAYS replace the O-ring (11), cleaning the

Connect the pipes (7) and (8), fastening the
respective unions.
Install the new fuel pump filter (A).
Check that the indicated tab on the fuel pump

filter (A) is fitted correctly in its respective
seat.
Check that the mating surfaces of the fastener
ring (6) are clean.
Orienting correctly, fit the fastener ring (6) and
tighten the indicated fastener screws.

Screw 5 Nm B

union.
indicated nut.
Fit the cap (2).

Fit the cap (1).



Fill the fuel tank.
Replacing the fuel pump
CAUTION
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Located inside the fuel tank, on the right-hand side under the fuel pump filter.

Remove the fuel pump filter ( B3.04).
Press the lock device (1) fastening the fuel pump

onto the fuel tank floor.
This releases the lower rod from the pump
mounting lip (2).
Remove the fuel pump (A) from the fuel tank
floor, taking care not to bend or twist the
pump pipes.
CAUTION
the operator.
After removing the fuel pump (A) from the

relative housing, detach the pipes from the
three unions (3).
Remove the fuel pump (A) from the passenger
compartment and replace.
Select a new fuel pump (A) and connect the
pipes to the three unions (3).
Fit the fuel pump (A) in the relative seat on the
fuel tank floor, taking care not to bend or twist
the pump pipes, and matching the groove on
the pump with the protrusion indicated in the
metal pump housing (2).
Fit the lock mechanism (1) in the relative seat

indicated on the fuel pump (A).
Press the lock device (1) to attach the lower rod
to the pump housing (2).
Refit the fuel pump filter ( B3.04).

B3.05 Fuel level sensor
Replacing the fuel level sensors

Fastening the fuel level sensors Screw 5 Nm B
CAUTION
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Whenever the fuel level sensor is removed, ALWAYS REPLACE WITH A NEW SENSOR, fitting a new
O-ring.
There are two sensors, located on the left and at the centre under the rear seats.
The following procedure is for removing the left hand fuel level sensor. The procedure for the central sensor
is the same.



Prise off and remove the safety clip (4).
Fit the tool (AV 8176) on the fuel level sensor (A).
Using the tool (AV 8176), turn the fuel level
sensor (A) counterclockwise to bring the
retainer clips into the indicated position.
Whenever the fuel level sensor is removed,

ALWAYS REPLACE WITH A NEW
SENSOR, fitting a new O-ring.
Remove the fuel level sensor (A) and replace.

ALWAYS replace the O-ring (5).
Install the new fuel level sensor (A) carefully.
Fit the tool (AV 8176) on the fuel level sensor (A).
Using the tool (AV 8176), turn the fuel level
sensor (A) clockwise to bring the retainer
clips into the indicated position.
Fit the safety clip (4), ensuring that it is securely

fastened.
Fit the cap (2).

Fit the cable grommet (1).
modification)

Remove the fastener ring (4), undoing the
indicated screws.
Note the orientation of the fuel level sensor (A).
Remove the fuel level sensor (A) and replace.
ALWAYS replace the O-ring, cleaning the
Orienting correctly, install the new fuel level
sensor (A).
Check that the mating surfaces of the fastener
ring (4) are clean.
Fit the fastener ring (4) and tighten the indicated
screws.

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the cap (2).

Fit the cable grommet (1).



Fill the fuel tank.
B3.06 Fuel vapour separator
Replacing the fuel vapour separator

Fastening fuel vapour separator Nut 9 Nm B
Located in the upper section of the rear right wheel bay, in front of the diagnostic pump.
Detach the two quick-coupling pipes (1), undo

the nut (2) and then remove the fuel vapour
separator (A) from the wheel bay.
A "double-lock" safety clip is fitted on the pipe
leading from the carbon filter.
millimetres.

Fit the fuel vapour separator (A) into its seat and
fasten it by tightening the nut (2) then connect
the two quick-coupling pipes (1).

Nut 9 Nm B
A "double-lock" safety clip is fitted on the pipe

leading from the carbon filter.
a few millimetres.

Perform the "Fuel tank tightness test" cycle.
B3.07 Draining the engine fuel system
Draining the fuel system
CAUTION
This procedure requires the use of an aspirator pump compliant with EEC standards.
Connect a suitable pipe at least 2 metres in length, with a maximum diameter of 10 mm, to the aspirator
pump.
CAUTION
Collect the fuel in a suitable container.
Insert the pipe via the filler neck into the right hand fuel tank compartment, then aspirate all the fuel
contained.
Start and run the engine for no longer than 5 minutes, so that the pump transfers the fuel contained in the
left hand compartment into the right hand compartment; then aspirate again.
Check the fuel level from the instrument panel and, if necessary, repeat the above procedure to aspirate
as much fuel as possible.
B4.01 Engine air intake system layout
A - Air filter boxes

B - Air flow meters
C - Air flow meters
D - Throttle bodies
E - Intake manifold
B4.02 Engine air duct
Removing the engine air duct
The duct is located behind the front bumper and feeds air to the radiator assembly.

Remove the lateral cosmetic shields and the front cosmetic shield.

Remove the front bumper ( E3.03).
Remove the secondary air pump ( F3.15).

air box cover (2).
Repeat the procedure for the other air box
cover.
Remove the air filter cartridge (A).

Repeat the procedure for the other air filter.
Cut the clamps indicated fastening the headlight
washer pipes (G) to the lower reinforcement
cross member (A).
Remove the lower reinforcement cross member

(A), by undoing the screws indicated.
On the left-hand side, undo the front screws (3)

and the upper screw (4) fastening the upper
reinforcement cross member (B) to the
vehicle chassis.
On the right-hand side, undo the front screws (3)
engine subframe.
Detach the engine compartment lid lock

connector (6) and detach the clip fastening
the connector to the lock mounting cross
member (D).
Detach the clips indicated fastening the engine

compartment lid release cable (C) leading
from the passenger compartment to the lock
mounting cross member (D).
Detach the clips indicated fastening the engine
compartment lid emergency release cable
(12) leading from the passenger compartment
to the lock mounting cross member (D).
Also detach the clip indicated with the red arrow
fastening the engine compartment lid release
cable.
Undo the nuts (7) fastening the engine

compartment lid lock (E) to the relative
Move the lock, still connected to the relative
cables, out of the way, so that it does not
hinder the following operations.
On the left-hand side, undo the screws (8)

fastening the lock mounting cross member
(D) to the engine subframe.
Repeat the procedure on the opposite side.
On the left-hand side, undo the screw (9)
fastening the cross member mounting rib to
the engine subframe.
On the right-hand side, undo the upper screw

(10) fastening the rib to the lock mounting
cross member (D).
On the left-hand side, undo the upper screw (10)

fastening the rib to the lock mounting cross
member (D).
Remove the lock mounting cross member (D)
from the engine compartment.
Remove the complete impact beam (13) on the
right-hand side, undoing the four screws
indicated.
Remove and retrieve the complete impact beam

(13), undoing the four screws indicated on the
left-hand side.
Undo the screws (11) fastening the air duct (F) to

the water radiator.
Undo the centre screw (11) fastening the air duct
to the water radiator.
On the left-hand side, undo the two screws (11)

fastening the air duct (F) to the water radiator.
On the bottom side, undo the two screws (11)

Detach the air duct (F) from the radiator
assembly.
Refitting the engine air duct

Fastening bottom side of duct to water radiator Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening left-hand side of duct to water radiator Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening duct to water radiator Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening impact beam Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening engine subframe cross member Screw 30 Nm B
mounting rib
Fastening front lid lock mounting cross member - Screw 24 Nm B
chassis
Fastening engine compartment lid lock Nut 8 Nm C
front screws
upper screw
Fastening lower reinforcement cross member Screw 20 Nm B
screw
Fit the air duct (F) on the radiator assembly.

On the bottom side, tighten the two screws (11)

Screw 4 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the two screws (11)


Screw 4 Nm B
Tighten the centre screw (11) fastening the air
duct to the water radiator.

Screw 4 Nm B
Tighten the screws (11) fastening the air duct (F)

to the water radiator.

Screw 4 Nm B
Fit and fasten the complete impact beam (13) on

the right-hand side, tightening the four screws
indicated.

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fit and fasten the complete impact beam (13)
tightening the four screws indicated on the
left-hand side.

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fit the lock mounting cross member (D) in the

engine compartment.
On the left-hand side, hand tighten the upper
screw (10) fastening the rib to the lock
On the right-hand side, hand tighten the upper

screw (10) fastening the rib to the lock
On the left-hand side, hand tighten the screw (9)
fastening the cross member mounting rib to
the engine subframe.

Screw 30 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the screws (8)

fastening the lock mounting cross member
(D) to the engine subframe.

Screw 24 Nm B
Tighten the nuts (7) fastening the engine

compartment lid lock (E) to the relative

Nut 8 Nm C
Fasten the engine compartment lid emergency
release cable (12) leading from the
passenger compartment to the lock mounting
cross member (D) with the indicated clips.
Also fix the clip indicated with the red arrow
fastening the engine compartment lid release
cable.
Fasten the engine compartment lid emergency

release cable (C) leading from the passenger
compartment to the lock mounting cross
member (D) with the indicated clips.
Connect the engine compartment lid lock

connector (6) and fix the clip fastening the
connector to the lock mounting cross member
(D).
On the left-hand side, tighten the front screws (3)
engine subframe.

Screw 20 Nm B
Screw 24 Nm B
On the right-hand side, tighten the front screws

(3) and the upper screw (4) fastening the
upper reinforcement cross member (B) to the
vehicle chassis.

Screw 20 Nm B
Screw 24 Nm B
Fit the lower reinforcement cross member (A)

and tighten the screws indicated.

Screw 20 Nm B
Fit the new clamps fastening the headlight
washer pipes (G) to the lower reinforcement
cross member (A) in the positions indicated.
Fit the air filter cartridge (A).

Repeat the procedure for the other air filter.
Fit the air box cover (2) and hand tighten the six
screws indicated.
Fix the clamp (1) fastening the air box cover (2)
to the bellow.
Repeat the procedure for the other air box
cover.
Refit the secondary air pump ( F3.15).

Refit the front bumper ( E3.03).
Refit the front flat undertray section ( E3.12).
B4.03 Engine air filters
Replacing the engine air filters
To ensure maximum engine performance it is essential that the air filters are in perfect condition.
NEVER wash or clean a removed air filter and reuse. Always replace with a new component.
Replace the air filter cartridges at the intervals indicated in the Maintenance Schedule.
There are two, located in the engine compartment behind the front bumper.
The instructions above are for the left hand filter. Use the same procedure for the right hand filter.

Remove the front cosmetic shield and the left hand lateral cosmetic shield.

air box cover (2).

Remove the grille (3).

Remove the filter (4).
NEVER wash or clean a removed air filter
and reuse. Always replace with a new
component.
Remove and replace the air filter cartridge (A).

When installing the new air filter cartridge (A),
lightly lubricate the mating surfaces with the
air box.

Fit the filter (4) in its seat as originally installed.

Fit the grille (3) in its seat as originally installed.
Fit the air box cover (2) and fasten by hand

Refit and tighten the clamp (1) fastening the air
box cover (2) to the bellow.

B4.04 Engine intake manifold
Removing the intake manifold

Remove the air flow meters (1), complete with

relative bellows, removing the clamps (2).
Remove the motorised throttle body ( F3.10).
Cover the air inlet orifices on the intake manifold,

as shown in the photo, to keep foreign objects
out.
Detach the union (1) from the intake manifold.
Remove the clamp (2) and release the vacuum
pipe (5) from the block.
Open the four clamps indicated fastening the

pipe (3) and detach the union (4) from the left
hand cylinder head cover.
Detach the union (4) from the right hand cylinder

head cover and retrieve the pipe (3) from the
engine compartment.
Plug the two unions on the cylinder head covers,
as shown in the photo, to keep foreign objects
out.
Detach the unions (17) of the Blow-by pipe (18)

from the front of the intake manifold.
Detach the pipe (19) from the relative union on

the front of the intake manifold.
Before lifting the intake manifold, check that
all the nuts and washers removed have
been retrieved so that they cannot fall
into the intake ducts.
On the left hand bank, undo the eight screws

with washers fastening the intake manifold
(A) to the cylinder head.
Note that the photo was taken with all
components not involved in the procedure
removed to illustrate the operation more
clearly.
Before lifting the intake manifold, check that

all the nuts and washers removed have
been retrieved so that they cannot fall
into the intake ducts.
On the right hand bank, undo the eight screws

with washers fastening the intake manifold
(A) to the cylinder head.
clearly.
With the assistance of another person, lift the

intake manifold (A) from the cylinder heads,
as shown in the figure.
Open the two clamps (6) on the rear of the intake
manifold and release the low pressure fuel
line (7).
Remove the intake manifold completely from the engine compartment.
Remove the two gaskets (8) from the cylinder

heads.
Cover the intake duct orifices to prevent foreign bodies from entering.
Seal the air inlet ports on the cylinder heads by fitting tool (AV 3608) to keep foreign objects out of the
ducts.
Refitting the intake manifold

Intake manifold - cylinder heads Screw 10 Nm B
Remove tool (AV 3608) from the cylinder heads.

Clean the mating surfaces on the intake manifold
and the cylinder heads thoroughly, and install
the two new gaskets (8).
Fasten the low pressure fuel line (7) onto the

rear of the previously removed intake
manifold, closing the plastic clip (6).
Take particular care when fitting the intake

manifold. Locating the manifold
incorrectly may deform and compromise
the tightness of the gaskets, causing
the "Engine diagnostic system (EOBD)"
warning light to illuminate.
Fit the intake manifold in its relative seat on the

locator bushings, taking care not to crush any
cables or pipes.
Fasten the intake manifold (A) on the left hand
cylinder bank, by tightening the eight screws
with relative washers.
clearly.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fasten the intake manifold (A) on the right hand
cylinder bank, by tightening the eight screws
with relative washers.
clearly.

Screw 10 Nm B
Connect the pipe (19) to the relative union on the

front of the intake manifold.
Connect the unions (17) of the Blow-by pipe (18)

on the front of the intake manifold.
Remove the protective cover installed during
removal.
Fit the pipe (3) and connect the union (4) onto
the right hand cylinder head cover.
Connect the union (4) onto the left hand cylinder

head cover and fasten the pipe (3), closing
the four clamps indicated.
Connect the union (1) to the intake manifold.

Fit the vacuum pipe (5) to the block, fastening
with a new clamp (2).
Remove the covers installed during removal from the air inlet orifices on the intake manifold.
Refit the motorised throttle body ( F3.10).

Fit the air flow meters (1), complete with bellows,
in their seats and fasten with clamps (2).

B5.01 Engine lubrication system layout
Engine lubrication system layout
A - Engine oil sump

B - Engine oil pump
C - Engine oil filter
D - Water/engine oil heat exchanger
B5.02 Engine oil pump
Removing the engine oil pump
The following photos show the engine removed from the vehicle to illustrate the procedure more clearly.
UP TO Engine No. 153878
Remove the oil sump shield (1) by undoing the

indicated screws.
Remove the oil sump shield (1) by undoing the

indicated screws.
Undo the indicated screws and detach the fuel

pump (A), complete with drive shaft (2),
pulling towards the rear of the vehicle.
Undo the indicated screws and detach the fuel

pump (A), complete with drive shaft (2),
pulling towards the rear of the vehicle.
Refitting the engine oil pump

Fastening oil pump to lower crankcase shell Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening oil pump pickup tube to lower Screw 10 Nm B
crankcase shell
Fastening oil sump shield to lower crankcase shell Screw 10 Nm B
Replace the O-ring (3) on the lower crankcase

shell, lubricating the new ring before
installation.
Ensure that the Seeger ring (4) is installed
correctly on the timing end of the drive shaft
(2).
Fit the oil pump (A) on the lower crankcase shell,

installing the drive shaft in the relative seat on
the drive gear.
Tighten the screws indicated in black fastening

the oil pump body (A).

Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the screws indicated in red fastening the

oil pick-up pipe.

Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the screws, indicated by the black

arrows, fastening the oil pump body (A).

Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the screws, indicated by the red arrows,

fastening the oil pick-up pipe.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the oil sump shield (1), tightening

the indicated screws.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the oil sump shield (1), tightening


Screw 10 Nm B

B5.03 Water-engine oil heat exchanger
Removing the engine oil-water heat exchanger
There may be residual engine oil inside the heat exchanger.

Clean/dry any pooling oil/water.
Take particular care not to contaminate the two systems.
The following photos show the engine removed from the vehicle to illustrate the procedure more clearly.
However, the following procedure is also possible with the engine still installed in the vehicle.

Remove the complete fuel rail mounting.
Remove the alternator ( F2.04).

Remove the clamp, undoing the indicated screw.
Move the injection cable away from over the heat
exchanger so that it does not hinder the
subsequent operations.
Release the engine services cable (4) from the

heat exchanger by opening the indicated
clamps.
Move the engine services cable (4) out of the
way so that it does not hinder the subsequent
operations.
Remove the water vent pipe (8), undoing the
indicated union.
Open the clamps indicated.

Remove the connectors (5) from the mounting
bracket.
Mark the positions of the connectors on the
bracket.
Move the knock sensor cables out of the way so

that they do not hinder the subsequent
operations.

Mark the position of the screws, as they are not
all of the same length.
Retrieve the bracket (7).

There may be residual engine oil inside the
heat exchanger.
Clean/dry any pooling oil/water.
Take particular care not to contaminate the
two systems.
Lift the oil-water heat exchanger (A) out of the

relative housing.
Retrieve and replace the gasket (6).
Refitting the engine oil-water heat exchanger

Fastening engine oil-water heat exchanger onto Screw 10 Nm B
crankcase
Fastening water vent pipe onto engine oil-water Union 10 Nm B
heat exchanger
Thoroughly clean the mating faces on the

crankcase in contact with the gasket (6).
Fit a new gasket (6).
Thoroughly clean the mating surface of the oil-
water heat exchanger (A) in contact with the
gasket.
Fit the oil-water heat exchanger (A) in the
relative housing.
Fit and snug the indicated screws, using the
marks made during removal as reference as
the screws are not all of equal length.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fasten the connectors (5) onto the mounting

bracket, using the marks made during
removal as reference.
Lay out and fasten the knock sensor cables,
closing the indicated clamps.
Fit and fasten the water vent pipe (8), tightening

the indicated union.

Union 10 Nm B
Lay the engine services cable (4) as originally
fitted on the heat exchanger.
Fasten the engine services cable (4) to the heat
exchanger by closing the indicated clamps.
Place the injection cables on top of the heat

exchanger as originally fitted.
Fit and fasten the clamp, tightening the indicated
screw.
Refit the alternator ( F2.04).

Fill to the correct level.
B5.04 Blow-by system
Blow-by system
A - Oil vapour separator

B - Pipe leading from separator to intake manifold
C - Breather pipe connecting cylinder heads
B5.05 Draining and filling the engine lubrication system
Draining the engine lubrication system
environment.
Undo the cap (A).

Wait for the engine oil to drain completely.
Filling the engine lubrication system (Applicable UP TO Engine No.153878)



Gradually add new oil of the specified type via

the filler neck.
Fully tighten the engine oil filler cap (B).

Filling the engine lubrication system (Applicable FROM Engine No. 153879)



Gradually add approximately 9.5 litres of new

engine oil of the specified type.
After draining the oil from the relative drain plug

orifice for approximately 20 minutes and
replacing the filter, when the system is filled
with approximately the aforementioned
quantity, the oil level will still be only halfway
up the dipstick (due to residual oil remaining
in the sump). After an initial oil level check,
adding 0.4-0.5 litres will bring the level
correctly to the MAX marking.

Taking engine oil samples
The bottle contains a vacuum (-950 mbar

depression).
DO NOT remove the outer cap or turn the
valve before use.
The following sampling procedure must be
performed with the engine warm: run the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
To take an engine oil sample, use the "Vacuum

bottle with tube" KIT, Part No. 070001988,
consisting of:
Bottle (A);
Outer cap (B);
Tube (C).
Remove the outer cap from the bottle.
Remove the engine oil dipstick
Insert one end of the pipe in the engine oil
dipstick tube to immerse it in oil being
sampled.
Insert approximately the same length of tube as
the length of the engine oil dipstick.
Connect the bottle to the end of the tube.

Turn the valve by 90°.
Once the bottle is filled, close the valve by
turning back 90°.
Disconnect the bottle from the tune and refit the
outer cap.
Insert the engine oil dipstick fully.
Print out the specific label (annexed with
Technical Information) on adhesive paper,
compile the label with the information
requested and apply to the bottle.
B6.01 Engine cooling system layout
Cooling system layout
A - Expansion tank (Nourice)

B - Water radiator
C - Pressure switch/thermostat
D - Water pump
E - Recirculation pump
F - TGK valves
B6.02 Engine coolant tank
Removing the expansion tank
The expansion tank is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment, next to the battery.


Empty the tank, aspirating coolant via the filler neck.
Disconnect the pipes (1) from the expansion tank

(A), removing the respective collars.
Undo the screw (2) fastening the expansion tank
(A), retrieving the washer (3).

Release the expansion tank breather pipe (5)
from the clip (6) and the rubber-lined bracket
(7).
Remove the expansion tank, complete with breather pipe, from the engine compartment.
Refitting the expansion tank

Fastening screw collar Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening expansion tank to relevant mounting Screw 8 Nm B
bracket
Fit the expansion tank, complete with breather pipe, in the engine compartment.


Screw 4 Nm B
Fitting the respective washer (3), tighten the
screw (2) fastening the expansion tank (A).

Screw 8 Nm B
Connect the pipes (1), tightening the respective

collars.
Fasten the breather pipe (5) with the clip (6) and
the rubber-lined bracket (7).

B6.03 Engine coolant pump
Removing the water pump
The pump is located on the right hand side of the engine block and is driven by the belt.

Pour the fluid drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT DISPOSE OF USED
FLUID IN THE ENVIRONMENT.
Place a container under the water pump to collect any coolant spillage during the subsequent operations.
Working from under the engine, undo the six

screws (1) fastening the water pump (A) to
the front cover.
Remove the water pump (A) from its seat.
Refitting the water pump

Fastening water pump to front cover Screw 11 Nm B
Replace the gasket (2) before refitting the pump.
Fit the water pump (A) in its seat on the engine.
Fasten the water pump (A), by tightening the six

screws (1).

Screw 11 Nm B

B6.04 Engine coolant pressure switch/thermostat
Removing the pressure switch/thermostat
The switch is located at the front of the engine.

Remove the battery ( F2.01).
Loosen the clamp (1) and detach the delivery

pipe from the pressure switch/thermostat (A).
From above, undo the three screws (2) and
remove the pressure switch/thermostat (A),
easing out from the battery seat.
Refitting the pressure switch/thermostat

Fastening pressure switch/thermostat Screw 11 Nm B
When refitting, replace the gasket between the
cover and the pressure switch/thermostat (A)
after applying a film of grease SEGO on the
new gasket.
Fit the pressure switch/thermostat (A) on the
cover and tighten the three screws (2).

Screw 11 Nm B
Fit the delivery pipe and fasten with the clamp (1).
Refit the battery ( F2.01).

B6.05 Engine coolant radiator
Removing the water radiator
The water radiator is located on the radiator assembly, behind the front bumper.

Remove the engine air duct ( B4.02).
Detach the connector for the temperature sensor

(1) on the water radiator.
Detach the ABS/ASR ECU connector (2), lifting

the safety lever (3), to facilitate access to the
pipe fastener clamps.
Open the plastic clamps (4) on the power
steering system pipes.
ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat exchanger

exchanger

the screws (7).
Remove the clamps (8) and (12), by undoing the
screws (9).
unions (11).

exchanger


Detach the radiator assembly connector (14), by

undoing the nut (15), and detach the earth
cable (16).
Undo the screws (20) fastening the A.C. pipes

(21) to the condenser.
Undo the nut (22) retaining the A.C. pipes (21)

and move the pipes up so that they will not
exchanger. Undo the unions (23) for the
clutch hydraulic system oil pipes on the
relevant radiator.
Liquid remaining in the system may leak: use
absorbent paper and other appropriate
means to protect the surrounding
components.

exchanger. Remove the clamps (24) retaining
the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes.
Undo the screw (17) on the clamp retaining the
power steering fluid rigid pipes (19).
Undo the nuts (18) fastening the rigid pipes to
the power steering fluid radiator.
Detach the rigid pipes (19) from the power
steering fluid radiator, and move the pipes up
so that they will not hinder the subsequent
operations.
components.
Detach the pipe (25) from the water radiator,

removing the relevant clamp.
Undo the screw (26) fastening the top of the

radiator assembly.
Hold up the radiator assembly adequately.
On the right-hand side, undo the screw (27)

fastening the radiator assembly to the engine
compartment chassis.

compartment chassis.
Remove the radiator assembly from the engine subframe.
Detach the cowl, with the relevant electric fans,

from the radiator assembly, by undoing the
eight screws indicated.
Remove the power steering fluid radiator ( D5.05).

Remove the condenser ( F5.04).
Remove the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator ( C3.02).
Refitting the water radiator

Fastening cooling system to chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening steering box pipe - power steering fluid Nut 9 Nm B
radiator
ATF oil delivery/return pipes - radiator Union 40 Nm B
Fastening AC pipes Screw 9 Nm B
Refit the condenser ( F5.04).
Refit the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator ( C3.02).
Refit the power steering fluid radiator ( D5.05).
Fasten the cowl, with the relative electric fans, to

the radiator assembly and tighten the eight
screws indicated.

Screw 5 Nm B
Supporting its weight appropriately, fit the radiator assembly in its seat on the engine subframe.
On the left-hand side, tighten the screw (28)
subframe.

Screw 24 Nm B
On the right-hand side, tighten the screw (27)

subframe.

Screw 24 Nm B
Tighten the screw (26) fastening the top of the

radiator assembly.

Screw 24 Nm B
Connect the pipe (25) onto the water radiator
and fasten with a new clamp.
Fit the rigid pipes (19) in their respective seats

on the power steering fluid radiator, after
replacing the relative seals.
Tighten the nuts (18) fastening the rigid pipes
(19 )to the power steering fluid radiator.

Nut 9 Nm B
Fasten the rigid power steering fluid pipes (19)

and hand tighten the screw (17) on the
retainer clamp.
Fit the A.C. pipes (21) in their respective seats

on the condenser, after replacing the relative
seals.
Fit the A.C. pipes (21) into the respective clamps
and fasten with the nut (22).
exchanger. Tighten the unions (23) for the
clutch hydraulic system oil pipes on the
relative radiator, then apply and fasten the
relative clamps (24).

Union 40 Nm B
After replacing the relative seals, tighten the
screws (20) fastening the AC pipes (21) to the
condenser.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the radiator assembly connector (14)

and hand tighten the nut (15), fastening the
ground cable (16).

exchanger
Connect the clutch hydraulic oil system pipe

unions. Follow the instructions given below to
ensure proper connection:
pin (13);
connected.
exchanger
Connect the delivery and return unions (11) and

fasten to the mounting bracket (10).
Fasten the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes, by
fitting the clamps (8) and (12) and tightening
the screws (9).
Fasten the mounting bracket for the clutch
hydraulic system oil pipes (6), tightening the
screws (7).
Fasten the power steering system pipes, closing

the plastic clamps (4).
Connect the ABS/ASR ECU connector (2),

pushing down the safety lever (3).
Connect the connector for the temperature
sensor (1) on the water radiator.

ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat exchanger. Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell
DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
Refit the engine air duct ( B4.02).
B6.06 Radiator cooler electric fans
Replacing the electric fans

The fans are located behind the radiator assembly and fitted on the duct.



Remove the electric fan assembly and replace.
Fit the new electric fan assembly.

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 24 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

B6.07 Draining and filling the engine cooling system
Draining the cooling system
CAUTION
Working from under the vehicle, on the right-

hand side of the radiator, loosen the clamps
(1) fastening the delivery and return pipes (2).
Detach the pipes (2) from the radiator.
ENVIRONMENT.
Let the coolant drain completely.
Filling the cooling system
CAUTION
Check that all the connection sleeve clamps are tight.
Static filling (engine off) (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT Single oil heat exchanger)


Remove the rear right hand element.

more clearly.
02) Undo the union (2) on the delivery pipe (3)

leading to the heat exchanger, retrieving the
relative seals.


tank.





from the delivery pipe (3) leading to the heat
exchanger.
12) Fasten the delivery pipe (3) leading to the
heat exchanger by tightening the union (2),
after replacing the relative seals.

Pipe union 50 Nm A

Dynamic filling (engine on) (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT Single oil heat exchanger)
idle speed.
seconds.
seconds.

expansion tank.

Static filling (engine off) (ONLY for vehicles WITH Single oil heat exchanger)

Fastening water return pipe from single oil heat Screw collar 4 Nm B
exchanger fastening


more clearly.
02) Remove the indicated clamp on the return

pipe (2) from the single oil heat exchanger
and disconnect it.


tank.
Use Shell GLYCOSHELL LONGLIFE (at
50% dilution) as prescribed.





11) Gradually pour coolant through the

expansion tank filler neck and allow for the
single oil heat exchanger circuit to fill in until
some fluid comes out of the return rigid pipe
from single oil heat exchanger.
12) Fasten the return pipe (2) from the single oil
heat exchanger on the rigid pipe and tighten
the indicated clamp.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Dynamic filling (engine on) (ONLY for vehicles WITH Single oil heat exchanger)
idle speed.
seconds.
seconds.
27) Bring the engine speed to 3000 rpm for approximately 120 seconds, with the expansion tank cap
open, and continue topping up to keep the fluid at the MAX level.
expansion tank.

B7.01 Exhaust system layout
A - Exhaust manifolds
B - Catalytic converters
C - Centre silencer
D - Exhaust extensions
E - Silencers
Checking exhaust system alignment
The following procedure is necessary whenever any work on the components of the exhaust system is performed.

Remove the rear elements of the rear wheelhouses.
Checking alignment along "X" axis
Measure the protrusion of the indicated pins of the exhaust

extensions between the surface of the vibration damper (1)
and the base of the head of the pin.
The protrusion of the pins indicated must be ≥ 24 mm.
Check that a 3 mm shim can be inserted between the surface of
the vibration damper (1) and the base of the head of the rear
pin of the silencer.
Perform the procedure on both sides of the vehicle.
Check that a 3 mm shim can be inserted between the surface of

the vibration damper (1) and the base of the head of the
lateral pin of the silencer.
Perform the procedure on both sides of the vehicle.
Checking alignment along "Z" axis
On both sides of the exhaust system, measure the distance

between the central silencer (A) and the cross member of the
front removable subframe below the silencer
The difference between the two measurements must not
exceed 6 mm.
The
example
in the
photo
illustrate
s how
to
visually
identify
an Z
axis
alignme
nt error
(NOT
OK)
between
the two
catalytic
converte
rs, with
a
vertical
differenc
e
exceedi
ng 6
mm.
If the measurements comply within the values indicated
Check the tension of the exhaust system vibration dampers ( B7.01).
If one or more of the measurements do not comply with the values indicated
Adjust the exhaust system ( B7.01).
Checking tension of exhaust system vibration dampers

Remove the rear elements of the rear wheelhouses.
Measure the lower slot on the exhaust system mounting vibration

dampers (1).
The slot must measure ≥ 4 mm.
If the measurements comply within the values indicated

Refit the rear sections of the rear wheelhouses.

Adjust the tension of exhaust system vibration dampers ( B7.01).
Adjusting the exhaust system

Nut 25 Nm B
Check the alignment of the exhaust system ( B7.01).

Perform only in the event of Z axis misalignment.

Perform only if is necessary to replace the exhaust system fastener clamps.
Apply Copper based grease for high temperatures uniformly

on the entire straight section of the exhaust system mounting
pins.
Never reuse exhaust system clamps that have been subjected to operating temperature. Always replace with new
components.
New clamps may only be removed and refitted for adjustment purposes during initial installation.

Replace all clamps that have been loosened, and hand-tighten the respective screws and nuts.
Check that the front edges of the central silencer (A) are aligned
with the markings indicated on the catalytic converters (B).
Only in the event of misalignment of the catalytic converters

along the "Z" axis
Loosen the indicated nuts fastening the catalytic converters (B).

along the "Z" axis
Loosen the indicated nut on both clamps (2).

UP TO Assembly No. 103178 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue
to identify vehicles not affected by modification)
Fit two shims in the indicated positions so that the exhaust

extensions (C) are 31 mm from the removable rear subframe.
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue

Fit two shims in the indicated positions so that the exhaust

extensions (C) are 37 mm from the removable rear subframe.
Fit the two exhaust extensions (C) at the same distance from the
subframe and hold in position.

Fit the cross member (D) and hand-tighten the indicated screws.
Fit the cross member (D) and hand-tighten the indicated nuts.

along the "Z" axis
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the catalytic converters (B).

Nut 25 Nm B

along the "Z" axis
Tighten the indicated nut on both clamps (2).

Nut 25 Nm B

Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the central silencer to the

catalytic converter (B).

Torx clamp 54.2 Nm B


Ensure that the retainer keys on the central silencer (A) are
inserted correctly in the relative seats on the exhaust
extensions (C).
Tighten the nuts indicated.


Tighten the indicated screws fastening the cross cross member

(D).

Screw 25 Nm B

Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the cross member (D).

Nut 25 Nm B
On both exhaust silencers, tighten the spherical clamp by
tightening the indicated screw.

Spherical clamp 35 Nm B
If the measurements comply with the values indicated

Fit both vibration dampers (3) on the central silencer and tighten
the indicated nuts.

Nut 25 Nm B
Check the tension of the exhaust system vibration

dampers ( B7.01).

the indicated nuts.

Nut 25 Nm B

dampers ( B7.01).
In the event of misalignment of the catalytic converters along the "Z" axis, open an ROL, requesting authorisation to
replace the catalytic converter.
In the event of misalignment along the "X" axis, proceed as described below.
Loosen the indicated fastener nuts between the catalytic

converters (B) and the central compensator.

Loosen the indicated fastener nuts between the catalytic

converters (B) and the central compensator.
In relation to the measurements, move the exhaust system forwards or backwards as described as follows.
Using a crowbar (4), move the exhaust system of the cylinder

bank forwards until the lateral and rear exhaust silencer
mounting pins protrude by ≥ 3 mm.
Moving the exhaust system forwards increases the protrusion of
the exhaust extension mounting pins and decreases the
protrusion of the exhaust silencer mounting pins.
Using a crowbar (4), move the exhaust system of the cylinder

bank backwards until the lateral and rear exhaust silencer
mounting pins protrude by ≥ 3 mm.
Moving the exhaust system back reduces the protrusion of the
exhaust extension mounting pins and increases the
protrusion of the exhaust silencer mounting pins.





If the protrusion of the lateral and rear exhaust silencer mounting

pins is correct, but the protrusion of the exhaust extension
mounting pins is <24 mm, loosen the indicated screws.
Fit one or more shims (6) between the bracket (5) and the rear
removable subframe to obtain a protrusion of the exhaust
extension mounting pins of ≥24 mm.

to identify vehicles not affected by modification), if the
measurements comply with the values indicated
the indicated nuts.

Nut 25 Nm B

dampers ( B7.01).
to identify vehicles not affected by modification), if the
measurements comply with the values indicated
the indicated nuts.

Nut 25 Nm B

dampers ( B7.01).
Adjusting tension of exhaust system vibration dampers

Mounting bracket - silencer Nut 25 Nm B
Fastening heat shields to rear removable subframe Screw 8 Nm B
Check the tension of the exhaust system vibration dampers ( B7.01).
Lateral silencer vibration dampers
Support the weight of the silencer (A).

Loosen the indicated nuts.
Lift the mounting bracket (B) to relieve the tension on the damper
and allow adjustment to the distance indicated.

Nut 25 Nm B
Rear silencer vibration dampers
Support the weight of the silencer (A).

Loosen the indicated nuts.
Lift the mounting bracket (B) to relieve the tension on the damper
and allow adjustment to the distance indicated.

Nut 25 Nm B
Exhaust extension vibration dampers

Loosen the indicated screws.
Lift the mounting bracket (C) to relieve the tension on the
dampers and allow adjustment to the distance indicated.

Screw 8 Nm B


B7.02 Exhaust manifolds
Removing the right hand exhaust manifold


Remove the catalytic converters ( B7.03).
Remove the right hand catalytic converter.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the right hand

secondary air valve (1) to the cylinder head
cover.
Undo the clamp (3) fastening the secondary air

pipe.
Undo the two screws (4) fastening the secondary
air pipe flange to the exhaust manifold.
Move the secondary air pipe away from the
exhaust manifold so that it does not hinder
the subsequent operations.
Undo the eight nuts (5) fastening the right hand

exhaust manifold (A) to the cylinder heads.
Remove the right hand exhaust manifold (A)
from under the vehicle.
Retrieve the gasket (8).
Refitting the right hand exhaust manifold

Check that the gasket mating surfaces on the

head and manifold are completely flat. If
necessary, remove any encrustation or
gasket residue.
The gasket must be replaced each time it is
removed.
Fit the new gasket (8) on the stud bolts.

Lubricate the stud bolts with copper based
grease COPASLIP for high temperatures.
Replace the eight nuts (5) fastening the right

hand exhaust manifold (A).
Fit the right hand exhaust manifold (A) and
fasten by hand-tightening the eight nuts (5).
Tighten the eight nuts in the sequence indicated

in the figure aside.

Nut 25 Nm B
Replace the seal on the secondary air pipe
flange and fit on the right hand exhaust
manifold.
Hand tighten the two screws (4).
Fit the secondary air valve (1) in its seat and

fasten by hand tightening the two screws (2).
Fix the secondary air pipe to the right hand

cylinder head cover with the clamp and
fastener screw (3).
Refit the catalytic converters ( B7.03).

Removing the left hand exhaust manifold

Remove the left hand catalytic converter.

Undo the screw (1) fastening the steering column

(2) to the steering box, and move out of the
way so that it does not hinder the subsequent
operations.
Undo the two screws (4) fastening the left hand

secondary air valve (3) to the cylinder head
cover.
Undo the clamp (5) fastening the secondary air

pipe.
air pipe flange to the exhaust manifold.
Move the secondary air pipe away from the
exhaust manifold so that it does not hinder
the subsequent operations.
Undo the eight nuts (7) fastening the left hand

exhaust manifold (B) to the cylinder heads.
Remove the left hand exhaust manifold (B) from
under the vehicle.
Retrieve the gasket (8).
Refitting the left hand exhaust manifold

Check that the gasket mating surfaces on the

head and manifold are completely flat. If
necessary, remove any encrustation or
gasket residue.
The gasket must be replaced each time it is
removed.
Fit the new gasket (8) on the stud bolts.

Lubricate the stud bolts with copper based
grease COPASLIP for high temperatures.
Replace the eight nuts (7) fastening the left hand

exhaust manifold (B).
Fit the left hand exhaust manifold (B) and fasten
by hand-tightening the eight nuts (7).
Tighten the eight nuts in the sequence indicated

in the figure aside.

Nut 25 Nm B
Replace the seal on the secondary air pipe
flange and fit on the left hand exhaust
manifold.
Fit the secondary air valve (3) in its seat and

fasten by hand tightening the two screws (4).
Fix the secondary air pipe to the left hand

cylinder head cover with the clamp and
fastener screw (5).

B7.03 Catalytic converters
Removing the catalytic converters
The following procedure refers to the removal of the left hand catalytic converter; the procedure for removing
the right hand catalytic converter is the same.

Removal from the vehicle is not necessary: move as far away as possible from the catalytic converters.
Unscrew the oxygen sensor (1) from the catalytic

converter.
Undo the two nuts (2) fastening the catalytic

converter (B) to the exhaust manifold.
Undo the nut (3) fastening the clamp to the
catalytic converter.
Remove the catalytic converter from its seat and

unscrew the rear oxygen sensor (4).
Retrieve the metal gasket (5).
Refitting the catalytic converters

Replace the metal gasket (5).

The metal gasket (5) must be replaced each
time it is removed.
Fit the new metal gasket (5).
Tighten the rear oxygen sensor (4) onto the


Fit the catalytic converter (B) in the relative seat,
then replace and fasten the clamp by
tightening the nut (3).

Nut 25 Nm B
Pre-tighten the nuts (2).


Nut 25 Nm B
Undo the nuts (2).

Re-tighten the nuts (2) fastening the catalytic
converter (B) to the exhaust manifold.

Nut 25 Nm B
Tighten the front oxygen sensor (1) onto the


B7.04 Centre silencer
Removing the centre silencer
Never reuse exhaust system clamps and gaskets that have been subjected to operating temperature.
Always replace with new components.
Only new exhaust system clamps and gaskets may be removed and refitted for adjustment purposes
during initial installation.

Apply AREXONS SVITOL TECHNIK SILIKON SPRAY to the joints between the components of the
exhaust system to be removed, leaving the product to act for a few minutes.

Remove the connector cross member (Z).
For vehicles with single oil heat exchanger

Undo the nuts indicated.

Always replace the spherical exhaust system

clamps with new components after
loosening.
On both sides of the vehicle, loosen the spherical

clamp (3), undoing the indicated screw.
On both sides of the vehicle, separate the
exhaust extension (D) from the silencer (E).
Undo the screws indicated and move the two

front heat shields (65) and (66) upwards, so
that they do not obstruct the exhaust
extensions as they are moved backwards.
Loosen the two Torx clamps (4) fastening the
centre silencer (C) to the exhaust extensions
(D).
Loosen the nuts indicated fastening the bushings

(1) to the mounting bracket.
Pulling toward the rear of the vehicle, remove the
exhaust extensions (D), complete with
bushings (1), from the mounting bracket.
Undo the two screws (2) and the nut (10), then
remove the bracket, retrieving the spacer.
Move the exhaust extensions (D) as far toward
the rear of vehicle as possible to permit
removal from the centre silencer.
UP TO Assembly No. 103178 (consult the Spare

Undo the nuts (5) fastening the damper (7) to the

centre silencer.
Remove the damper (7).
Loosen the Torx clamp (6).

Undo the nuts (5) fastening the damper (7) to the

centre silencer.
Remove the damper (7).

Detach the centre silencer from the catalytic converters, pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle and tilting
downwards; then remove from the vehicle.
Refitting the centre silencer

Exhaust extension mounting bracket - chassis Screw 25 Nm B
Exhaust extension mounting bushings - mounting Nut 10 Nm B
bracket
Fastening heat shields to rear removable Screw 8 Nm B
subframe
Nut 25 Nm B
Apply an even layer (8) approximately 15 mm

wide of HOLTS FIREGUM sealant paste
onto the mating surfaces of both of the rear
pipes of the central silencer with the exhaust
extensions.
Fill the notches (9) in both connecting endpieces
of the exhaust extensions with HOLTS
FIREGUM sealant paste.

onto both of the rear pipes of the catalytic
converters, on the mating surfaces with the
central silencer.
Fill the notches (12) in both connecting
endpieces of the central silencer with HOLTS
FIREGUM sealant paste.
Fit new Torx clamps on the front of the exhaust extensions and the front of the central silencer.
Working from under the vehicle, fit the centre silencer in the relative seat, fitting onto the catalytic
converters.
Fit the exhaust extension mounting bracket and

the respective spacer in the relative seat on
the chassis and fasten by tightening the two
screws (2) and the nut (10).

Screw 25 Nm B
Move the exhaust extensions (D) toward the

front of the vehicle, connecting to the exhaust
silencer and fitting the bushings (1) in the
relevant guides for the pins on the mounting
bracket.
Tighten the nuts indicated fastening the bushings

Nut 10 Nm B
Ensure that the two welds indicated on the

centre silencer (C) are inserted correctly in
the seats on the exhaust extensions (D).
Never reuse exhaust system clamps and
gaskets that have been subjected to
operating temperature. Always replace
with new components.
Only new exhaust system clamps and
gaskets may be removed and refitted for
adjustment purposes during initial
installation.
Align the exhaust extensions (D) correctly with

the silencers (E) and install a new spherical
clamp (3).

Tighten the Torx clamp (6).

Fit the damper (7) on the centre silencer and

fasten by tightening the nuts (5).

Nut 25 Nm B



Fit the damper (7) on the centre silencer and

fasten by tightening the nuts (5).

Nut 25 Nm B


Ensure that the central silencer is correctly

inserted in the catalytic converters as far as
the marking on the catalytic converters
themselves (43 mm).
Tighten the Torx clamps (4) fastening the centre
silencer (C) to the exhaust extensions (D).

Tighten the spherical clamp (3) fastening the
exhaust extension (D) to the silencer (E).

Fasten the front heat shields (65) and (66), by

tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 8 Nm B
Fit the connector cross member (Z).


Screw 25 Nm B


Screw 25 Nm B



Nut 25 Nm B

B7.05 Exhaust extensions
Removing the exhaust extensions
Located between the central silencer and the exhaust tailpipes (silencers).
Remove the two exhaust extensions (A) from the

rear removable subframe.
Refitting the exhaust extensions
Fit the exhaust extensions (A) in their seats on

the rear removable subframe.

B7.06 Silencers
Removing the silencer
FROM Assembly No. 87136, new silencers were introduced to replace the previous units, with specific
rubber pipes for the bypass valves.
ONLY for vehicles UP TO Assembly No. 87135, even if it is necessary to replace one silencer only,
both silencers must be replaced, together with the relative pipes for the bypass valves, with the
NEW components.
As the rubber pipes for the bypass valves are not interchangeable, both the pipes for silencers UP TO
Assembly No. 87135 and the pipes for silencers FROM Assembly No. 87136 will be orderable as
spare parts.
For vehicles UP TO Assembly No. 87135, it is not necessary to replace the pair of silencers when
replacing the rubber pipes for the bypass valves only.
The following process is for removing the right exhaust silencer.
The process for removing the left exhaust silencer is identical.

Remove the rear element only.

Loosen the clamp (1) by undoing the indicated
screw.

Loosen the clamp (1) by undoing the indicated
screw.
Mark the position of the rear bracket (A) on the

silencer (B).
Support the weight of the silencer (B) adequately.
Undo the indicated nuts, retrieving the plate (3).
Mark the position of the front bracket (C) on the

silencer (B).
Support the weight of the silencer (B) adequately.
Undo the indicated nuts, retrieving the plate (3).
Remove the silencer via the wheel bay.
Refitting the silencer

Fastening silencer bracket Nut 25 Nm B
Nut 25 Nm B
FROM Assembly No. 87136, new silencers were introduced to replace the previous units, with specific
rubber pipes for the bypass valves.
ONLY for vehicles UP TO Assembly No. 87135, even if it is necessary to replace one silencer only,
both silencers must be replaced, together with the relative pipes for the bypass valves, with the
NEW components.
As the rubber pipes for the bypass valves are not interchangeable, both the pipes for silencers UP TO
Assembly No. 87135 and the pipes for silencers FROM Assembly No. 87136 will be orderable as
spare parts.
For vehicles UP TO Assembly No. 87135, it is not necessary to replace the pair of silencers when
replacing the rubber pipes for the bypass valves only.
The following process is for refitting the right exhaust silencer.
The process for fitting the left exhaust silencer is identical.
Fit the silencer, inserting via the wheel bay.
Support the weight of the silencer (B).

Fit the front bracket (C), aligning the reference
markings.
Fit the plate (3).

Nut 25 Nm B
Connect pipe (4).

Support the weight of the silencer (B).
Fit the rear bracket (A), aligning the reference
markings.
Fit the plate (2).

Nut 25 Nm B

installation.
Replace and fasten the spherical clamp (1),



Screw 25 Nm B

installation.
Replace and fasten the spherical clamp (1),



Nut 25 Nm B
On both sides of the vehicle, check that the

cosmetic tailpipes are aligned correctly with
the pipes on the silencers.
In case of misalignment, adjust the silencer via
the respective fasteners.

C1.01 Technical specifications
DCT gearbox
7 forward gears + reverse, electrohydraulic dual clutch system, controlled automatically or in semi-automatic
mode from the steering wheel shift paddles.
DCT gearbox gear ratios
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th R

Transmission 3.397 2.185 1.626 1.286 1.028 0.839 0.719 2.791
gear ratios
Bevel gear 4.444
pair/differential
ratio
Mechanical gearbox
6 forward speeds + reverse, mechanical system controlled manually from gear lever on centre tunnel console.
Mechanical gearbox gear ratios
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th R

Transmission 3.308 2.158 1.609 1.276 1.029 0.784 2.857
gear ratios
Bevel gear 4.444
pair/differential
ratio
C1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Hook 95977564 (AS 107564)

for lifting the gearbox.
Trolley 95977565 (AS 107565)

removing the engine / gearbox / subframe
assembly.

Pump 95978174 (AV 8174)
topping up gearbox and clutch oil.
Pins 95978351 (AV 8351)

alignment for installation of front/rear removable
subframes.
C1.03 Tightening torques

Starter motor - transmission housing Screw 25 Nm A
Nut fastening transmission housing - engine Nut (pretightening) 20 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Bushing - transmission housing Screw 49 Nm B
of 90°
Articulated shaft - gearbox Screw with control angle 60 Nm A
of 90°
Front struts Screw 30 Nm A
Fastening front bushings to gearbox Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 70 Nm B
Bushing mounting - chassis Screw 25 Nm A
ATF pipe fork - gearbox 20 Nm A
Fastening axle shaft shield Screw 9 Nm C
Park Lock release mechanism Screw 30 Nm B
Products to use: SEGO
Rear struts Screw 25 Nm A
Fastening bushings to rear struts Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 70 Nm B
Rear gearbox mounting - chassis Pin 200 Nm A
GL oil fork - gearbox Screw 20 Nm A
Bushing - chassis Nut 103 Nm A
Hydraulic clutch system oil radiator - coolant Screw 5 Nm B
radiator
Coolant system mounting bracket - gear oil Screw 24 Nm B
radiator
Oil delivery and return pipes Nut 9 Nm B
Front rubber pipe grommet Screw 9 Nm B
subframe
Ground braid - rear removable subframe Screw 18 Nm B
GL and ATF oil pipe retainer fork Screw 20 Nm A
Retainer clamps - GL and ATF oil pipes Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening axle shaft to differential flange Screw 78 Nm A
DCT cable - gearbox Screw 9 Nm B
Heat shield bracket - axle shaft shield bracket Screw 6 Nm B
EPB cable bracket - rear removable subframe Screw 9 Nm B
ATF and GL oil pipe retainer bracket - relevant Nut 8 Nm B
mounting bracket
Clamps - ATF pipes on water radiator Nut 9 Nm B
Gear oil heat exchanger mounting bracket - Screw 20 Nm B
chassis
Gear oil heat exchanger mounting bracket - Nut 9 Nm B
relevant mounting bracket
bracket
Park Lock release cable mounting brackets - Screw 8 Nm C
gearbox
Park Lock release cover - centre console Screw 7.4 Nm C
Park Lock release cables - mounting brackets on Nut 8 Nm C
gearbox and chassis
Park Lock release slider - gearbox/chassis side Nut 1 Nm B
bracket
Front mounting strut - gearbox Screw 30 Nm A
Rear mounting strut - gearbox Screw 25 Nm A
Fastening single oil heat exchanger water Nut / Screw 8 Nm B
delivery and return pipe to gearbox Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening coolant pipe retainer bracket to the Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening coolant pipe mounting bracket Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening coolant pipes leading to single oil heat Screw collar 4 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening coolant pipe clamps and ties Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening single oil heat exchanger mounting Nut 25 Nm B
subframe Screw 25 Nm B
Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening single oil heat exchanger mounting Screw 40 Nm B
Fastening single oil heat exchanger to mounting Nut 9 Nm B
subframe
Fastening coolant pipes to single oil heat Screw collar 4 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening clutch hydraulic system pipes to single Screw 8 Nm B
oil heat exchanger
Fastening gear oil pipes to single oil heat Screw 8 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening mechanical gearbox oil filter Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening plug for mechanical gearbox speed Screw 5 Nm C
sensor seat
Fastening axle shaft heat shield Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening gearbox strut heat shield Screw 9 Nm B
C2.01 Gear oil system layout
Layout for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat exchanger
A - DCT gearbox (gear oil tank and gear oil pump)

B - Gear oil pipes
C - Water/gear oil heat exchanger
Layout for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger

A - DCT gearbox (gear oil tank and gear oil pump)
B - Gear oil pipes
C - Water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger
C2.02 Removing the complete DCT gearbox
Removing the DCT gearbox
CAUTION
During the following operations, the VEHICLE MUST ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-TIPPING SAFETY
RETAINERS INSTALLED.
The gearbox is removed by lowering the removable gearbox mounting subframe out from underneath the
vehicle using the specific trolley (AS 107565).
The DCT gearbox must then be separated from the relative removable mounting subframe.
Disable the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function ( D3.07).

modification). Replace the EPB ECU ( F2.11).
It is not necessary to replace the aforementioned ECU. Simply disconnect the EPB ECU Bowden
cable and prise out the respective cable grommet.
Lift the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).

Remove the rear wheels.

Remove the rear brake callipers ( D3.05).
Remove both, leaving connected to the system.

Remove both rear elements.
Apply AREXONS SVITOL TECHNIK SILIKON SPRAY to the joints between the components of the
exhaust system to be removed, leaving the product to act for a few minutes.



loosening.
On both sides of the vehicle, loosen the spherical

clamp (3), undoing the indicated screw.
On both sides of the vehicle, separate the
exhaust extension (D) from the silencer (E).

exchanger
Remove the bracket (6), undoing the screws (7)

and retrieving the respective bushes.
Remove the clamps and the rubber lined bracket
(8), undoing the respective screws.
Disconnect the unions (11).

exchanger

Push the safety ring (14) towards the pin (13) to
release the pipes.

exchanger
Remove the brackets (15) from the bracket (6),

undoing the indicated fasteners.
Move the hydraulic clutch system oil pipes out of
the way so that they do not hinder the

exchanger
Remove the mounting bracket (16) for the gear

oil pipes (18), undoing the screws (17).
Remove the two pipe retainer brackets (19) from
the mounting bracket (16), by undoing the
fasteners indicated.

exchanger
Remove the clamp (20) from the bodyshell.

Disconnect the unions (21).
exchanger

with the pin (13).
Push the safety ring (14) towards the pin (13) to
release the pipes.

drain completely.

exchanger
Remove the brackets (7) by undoing the

indicated screws.
Detach the pipes (6).

exchanger
Remove the bracket (8), undoing the indicated

screws.
Remove the upper bracket (9) from the bracket
(8), undoing the screw indicated by the red
arrow.
Place a container under the collars (11) for
collecting the coolant.
ENVIRONMENT.
Loosen the collars (11) and wait for all the

coolant contained in the pipes (10) to drain
completely.
Plug the pipes (10).

screws.
Detach the pipes (6).
Place a container under the screw collars (11) for
collecting the coolant.
ENVIRONMENT.
Loosen the screw collars (11).

Disconnect the hose unions (10) from the pipes
(6) and wait for all the liquid contained in the
pipes to drain completely.
Plug the hose unions (10).

Lift the front heat shields (65) and (66) out of the
way so that they do not hinder the
Loosen the two Torx clamps (4) fastening the

centre silencer (C) to the exhaust extensions
(D).
Loosen the nuts indicated fastening the bushings
Pulling toward the rear of the vehicle, remove the
exhaust extensions (D), complete with
bushings (1), from the mounting bracket.
Undo the two screws (2) and the nut (10), then
remove the bracket.
Move the exhaust extensions (D) as far toward
the rear of vehicle as possible to permit
removal from the centre silencer.
UP TO Assembly No. 85744
Working from under the vehicle, remove the

retainer clips (22) from the emergency
gearbox lock releaser.
Remove the Bowden cables (23) from the
relevant blocks.
Remove the Seeger rings (24) and remove the
cables, leading towards the passenger
compartment, from the retainer bracket (25).

Use a suitable screwdriver to prise the clip (92)

off the EPB linkage bracket.
Detach the end (27) of the right hand EPB

Bowden cable from the EPB linkage bracket
(28).
Take care not to damage the EPB linkage
bracket (28).
Detach the end (29) of the left hand EPB

Bowden cable from the EPB equaliser (30).
Detach the EPB Bowden cable sheaths from the
mounting bracket (26) for the EPB equaliser
(30), pressing the indicated fastener clips.
Move the EPB equaliser (30 )to the left and
remove from the relative mounting bracket
(26).
Undo the two screws indicated (36) fastening the

heat shield (34 )protecting the EPB Bowden
cable (35).
Remove the heat shield (34 )protecting the EPB
Bowden cable (35) from its seat.
Undo the two screws indicated (36) fastening the
EPB Bowden cable (35) to the heat shields
on the gearbox.
Remove the EPB Bowden cable (35 )from the
heat shields on the gearbox.
Undo the nut (32) and detach the rear stabiliser

bar (33) from the left hand suspension.
Repeat the procedure on the right hand rear
suspension.


Disconnect the ground cable (39), undoing the

nut (40).
Remove the indicated cable ties.
Disconnect and detach the ABS sensor
connector (41).
Disconnect the vehicle motion sensor connector
(42).
Undo the fastener nut on the clamp on the
parking brake cable (43).
Perform all the operations described previously
on both sides of the vehicle.
Undo the screws (46) fastening the brake calliper
(45) to the hub carrier.
Perform the procedure on both sides of the
vehicle.
Leaving the brake calliper (45) connected to the

system, set it down taking care not to tauten
the cables and oil pipes.
vehicle.

Move the heat shield (Y) forwards to allow
access to the screws fastening the driveshaft
to the gearbox.

transmission shaft (49) to the gearbox (50),
recovering the three shims (48).
Make two reference markings (X) and (Y) on the
chassis and subframe to facilitate correct
reassembly of the rear removable subframe.
vehicle.
Undo the screws (51) fastening the rear

removable subframe (A).


The trolley (AS 107565) is necessary for the
removal of the rear removable subframe
complete with gearbox.
The trolley consists of a turntable platform (53),
which can be locked in position with the two
handles (54); of six locator pins (52), with
relative swivelling and removable mounts; of
a pedal (55) for lifting the platform, and a
handle (56) for lowering the platform.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, position the support trolley for
the removable subframe with particular care.
Place the rear removable subframe support

trolley (AS 107565) in position, with the
control handle facing backwards; lift the
platform so that the locator pins are
approximately 20 mm below the respective
holes in the chassis, as shown in the photo.
Lock the turntable platform with the relative
handles.
CAUTION
Always ensure that the pins of the support trolley
are inserted correctly in the respective holes on
the removable subframe.
Using a wrench, raise the locator pins (52) to

bring them into contact with the relative holes
on the rear removable subframe.
removable subframe.
vehicle.


removable subframe.
vehicle.


Ensure that there are no cables or pipes hindering the rear removable subframe as it is lowered.
Operate the lowering handle of the trolley to lower the rear removable subframe by approximately 30 mm.
Undo the screw (60) fastening the gearbox cable

holder bracket (61).
Undo the screw (62) fastening the ground braid

(63).
Undo the screw (62) fastening the ground braid

(63).
Operate the lowering handle of the trolley to lower the rear removable subframe by approximately 100 mm.

Undo the screw (60) fastening the rubber lined

bracket (61) holding the gearbox cable.
Undo the indicated screw fastening the EPB
parking brake Bowden cable (35).

Remove the EPB parking brake Bowden cable

(35) from the rear removable subframe.
Operate the lowering handle of the trolley to lower the rear removable subframe completely.
Remove the two front heat shields located above the exhaust extensions.
Remove the two lower heat shields (67) and (68)

on the rear removable gearbox subframe, by

exchanger
Clean the area surrounding the GL pipe

fastening points thoroughly with a suitable
Place absorbent paper under the unions to
collect any oil spillage.
Undo the screw (70) fastening the fork (71)
retaining the GL pipes.
Remove the clamp indicated retaining the GL
pipes (69).
exchanger
Remove the clamps indicated retaining the GL

pipes (69).
Detach the GL pipes (69) from the gearbox,
removing the O-rings from the relevant unions.
Plug the oil inlet and outlet orifices immediately.

exchanger
Clean the area surrounding the ATF pipe

Place absorbent paper under the unions to
collect any oil spillage.
Undo the screw (73) fastening the fork (74)
retaining the ATF pipes.
Remove the nut indicated on the clamp retaining
the ATF pipes (72).
Detach the ATF pipes (72) from the gearbox,
removing the O-rings from the relevant unions.
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger
Remove the water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger ( C2.05).
Remove the single oil heat exchanger mounting subframe ( C2.05).

exchanger

Undo the screw (70) and remove the fork (71).
Place absorbent paper under the unions to catch
any oil spillage.
Disconnect and remove the GL pipes (69) from
the gearbox.
exchanger

Undo the screw (73) and remove the fork (74).
Place absorbent paper under the unions to catch
any oil spillage.
Disconnect the ATF pipes (72) from the gearbox.

exchanger
Detach and remove the ATF pipes (72) from the

gearbox, undoing the indicated nuts.
Retrieve the shim (18).

exchanger
Detach and remove the coolant delivery pipe

(12), undoing the indicated nuts.
exchanger
Detach the coolant return pipe (14), undoing the

indicated nuts.

exchanger
Detach and remove the coolant return pipe (14),

undoing the indicated fasteners.

Detach the coolant delivery pipe (12), undoing

Detach the coolant delivery pipe (12) and the

coolant return pipe (14), undoing the
indicated nuts.

Detach and remove the coolant delivery pipe

(12) and the coolant return pipe (14), undoing
Undo the screw (89) fastening the gearbox-rear

removable subframe ground braid (90).
Undo the six screws (75) fastening the axle shaft
to the differential flange, recovering the three
spacers (76).
vehicle.
Undo the nut (79) and remove the pin (80)

fastening the toe-in adjustment tie-rod from
the hub carrier, recovering the relevant
washers.
Support the weight of the rear suspension
adequately and undo the nut (81), removing
the relevant pin and recovering the washers.
Tilt the wheel module outward to detach the axle
shaft from the differential flange.
Perform the operations described previously on
both sides of the vehicle.
Remove the Bowden cables (82) from the

mounting bracket, removing the Seeger rings
indicated (red arrows).
Undo the screws (84) fastening the gearbox lock
releaser.
Release the Bowden cables (82), removing the
clamps indicated.
Remove the gearbox lock releaser (83),
complete with Bowden cables, from the
relevant gearbox lock release pin.
Undo the two nuts (91) from the front bushings,
recovering the relevant washers and retainer
washers.
Undo the two nuts (85) from the rear bushings,

recovering the relevant washers and stop
caps.
Undo and remove the two pins (88), by
recovering the shims (86) and the washers
(87).
Working from underneath, undo the eight screws

indicated fastening the gearbox to the rear
removable subframe.
Tighten the eye bolts in the relative holes on the
gearbox and fit tool (AS 107564).
Connect to a mobile hydraulic jack, lift the
gearbox from the rear removable subframe
and set down in a safe place.
Removing heat shields and DCT gearbox struts
With the gearbox on the workbench and supported correctly, remove the heat shields and the relevant
mounting struts as follows.
Heat shield on right hand axle shaft
Undo the three screws indicated and remove the

heat shield (3) from the right hand axle shaft.
Heat shield on left hand axle shaft

Undo the three screws indicated and remove the
heat shield (4) from the left hand axle shaft.
Front left hand strut
Undo the four screws indicated and remove the

front left hand strut (A).
Front right hand strut

front right hand strut (B).
Rear left hand strut
Undo the four screws indicated, recover the

bracket (1) and remove the rear left hand
strut (C).
Rear right hand strut and relevant heat shield
Remove the heat shield (2), undoing the three

screws indicated (red arrows).
Undo the three screws indicated (black arrows)
and remove the rear right hand strut (D).
C2.03 Refitting the complete DCT gearbox
Refitting the heat shields and the DCT gearbox struts

Fastening gearbox strut heat shield Screw 9 Nm B
Rear mounting strut - gearbox Screw 25 Nm A
Front mounting strut - gearbox Screw 30 Nm A
Fastening axle shaft heat shield Screw 9 Nm B
With the gearbox on the workbench and supported correctly, refit the heat shields and the relevant
mounting struts as follows.
Rear right hand strut and relevant heat shield
Fit the heat shield (2) in the relative seat on the

strut and tighten the two rear screws (red
arrows).

Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the rear right hand strut (D) in the relative

seat, apply AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on
the entire thread of the four screws indicated
(black and red arrows), then tighten the
screws in the sequence shown in the photo
aside.

Screw 25 Nm A
Tighten the two rear screws indicated (red

arrows) snugged previously.
Rear left hand strut

Fit the rear left hand strut (C) in the relative seat,
install the bracket (1) and, after applying
AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 - MEDIUM
STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on the entire
thread of the screws indicated, tighten the
aside.

Screw 25 Nm A
Front right hand strut
Fit the front right hand strut (B) and, after

applying AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on
the entire thread of the screws indicated,
tighten the screws in the sequence shown in
the photo aside.

Screw 30 Nm A
Front left hand strut
Fit the front left hand strut (A) and, after applying
AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 - MEDIUM
STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on the entire
thread of the screws indicated, tighten the
aside.

Screw 30 Nm A
Heat shield on left hand axle shaft

left hand axle shaft and fasten by tightening
the three screws indicated.

Screw 9 Nm B
Heat shield on right hand axle shaft

right hand axle shaft and fasten by tightening

Screw 9 Nm B
Refitting the DCT gearbox

Rear gearbox mounting - chassis Pin 200 Nm A
Front struts Screw 30 Nm A
Fastening bushings to rear struts Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 70 Nm B
Fastening front bushings to gearbox Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 70 Nm B
Park Lock release mechanism Screw 30 Nm B
Products to use: SEGO
Park Lock release cables - mounting brackets on Nut 8 Nm C
gearbox and chassis
Ground braid - rear removable subframe Screw 18 Nm B
GL and ATF oil pipe retainer fork Screw 20 Nm A
Retainer clamps - GL and ATF oil pipes Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening single oil heat exchanger water Nut / Screw 8 Nm B
delivery and return pipe to gearbox Screw 20 Nm B
DCT cable - gearbox Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening rear removable subframe (FROM Screw (pretightening) 20 Nm B
Assembly No. 103179, see Spare Parts Screw 60 Nm B
Catalogue)
Screw 110 Nm B
Fastening rear removable subframe to extruded Screw 65 Nm A
rear diagonal joint
Fastening rear removable subframe to rear Screw 110 Nm A
transmission tunnel casting (on bush)
of 90°
Rear brake calliper - hub carrier Screw 100 Nm A
Fastening shock absorber to chassis Screw (pretightening) 10 Nm A
Screw 30 Nm A
Fastening shock absorbers to chassis (FROM Screw (pretightening) 20 Nm A
Assembly No. 103179) Screw 110 Nm A
Fastening rear stabiliser bar - spherical tie-rod Nut 50 Nm B
Heat shield bracket - axle shaft shield bracket Screw 6 Nm B
bracket
subframe
ATF and GL oil pipe retainer bracket - relevant Nut 8 Nm B
mounting bracket
Fastening coolant pipes leading to single oil heat Screw collar 4 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening coolant pipe retainer bracket to the Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening coolant pipe mounting bracket Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening coolant pipe clamps and ties Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening engine cooling system hose unions Screw collar 4 Nm B
Nut 25 Nm B
The rear removable subframe must be correctly located on the pins of the lift trolley (AS 107565), as
during the removal procedure.
Tighten the eye bolts in the relative holes on the

gearbox and fit tool (AS 107564).
Connect to a mobile hydraulic jack and lift the
gearbox, locating in the relevant seat on the
Apply AREXONS SYSTEM TG248 - ADHESIVE

GREASE on the entire threads of the pins
(88) and to the respective seats.
Fit the pins (88) on the rear gearbox mounting
bushings, installing the washers (87) and
shims (86), without tightening.
Working from underneath, apply and hand
tighten the eight screws indicated fastening
the gearbox to the rear removable subframe.
Tighten the pins (88) fastening the rear bushings

to the rear removable subframe.

Pin 200 Nm A
Working from underneath, tighten the eight

screws indicated fastening the gearbox to the

Screw 30 Nm A
Apply and pre-tighten the nuts (85) onto the rear
gearbox mounting fastener pins, installing the
relative retainer washers and washers.

Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Apply and pre-tighten the nuts (91) fastening the

front bushings to the gearbox, installing the
relative washers and retainer washers.

Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B

Nut 70 Nm B

Nut 70 Nm B
Apply grease between the bracket on the

gearbox pin and the fastener bracket.
Fit the gearbox lock releaser (83), complete with

Bowden cables, on the relevant gearbox lock
release pin.
Apply grease SEGO to the ends of the screw
threads (84).
Tighten the screws (84) fastening the gearbox
lock releaser (83).

Screw 30 Nm B
Fasten the Bowden cables (82) as originally

installed, by tightening the clamps/nuts
indicated.

Nut 8 Nm C
Fasten the Bowden cables (82) onto the

mounting bracket, fitting the Seeger rings
indicated (red arrows).
Lift the wheel module, fitting the axle shaft onto

the differential flange.
adequately; fit the relevant pin complete with
washers and tighten the nut (81).
Fit the pin (80) with relevant washers and tighten
the nut (79) fastening the toe-in adjustment
tie-rod to the hub carrier.
Repeat the three previous operations for the
left hand rear suspension.
Tighten the six screws (75) fastening the axle
shaft to the differential flange, after fitting the
three shims (76).
Repeat the three previous operations for the
left hand rear suspension.

Screw 78 Nm A
Tighten the screw (89) fastening the gearbox-

rear removable subframe ground braid (90).

Screw 18 Nm B

exchanger

Place absorbent paper under the plugs to collect
any oil spillage.
Remove the plugs installed previously.
Remove the ATF delivery and return pipes and,
after replacing and lubricating the O-rings,
insert them in suitable seats.
Fit the ATF pipe retainer fork (74) and fasten
onto the unions by tightening the screw (73).

Screw 20 Nm A
Fasten the ATF pipes (72) onto the gearbox as

originally installed, fitting and fastening the
clamp with the nut indicated.
exchanger

Place absorbent paper under the plugs to collect
any oil spillage.
Remove the GL delivery and return pipes and,
after replacing and lubricating the O-rings,
insert them in suitable seats.
Fit the GL pipe retainer fork (71) and fasten onto
the unions by tightening the screw (70).

Screw 20 Nm A
Fasten the GL pipes (69) to the gearbox as

originally installed, fitting the clamp indicated.

exchanger
Fasten the GL delivery and return pipes (69) to

the gearbox as originally installed, by
tightening the nuts on the indicated retainer
clamps.

Nut 9 Nm B

exchanger
Fit the coolant return pipe (14) in the relevant

seat on the gearbox.
Fasten the coolant return pipe (14) and tighten
the fasteners indicated on the clamps.

Nut / Screw 8 Nm B
exchanger
Fasten the coolant return pipe (14) tightening the

nuts indicated on the clamps, after fitting the
shim (15), as shown in the photo.

Nut / Screw 8 Nm B

exchanger
Fit the coolant delivery pipe (12) in the relevant

seat on the gearbox.
Fasten the coolant delivery pipe (12) by
tightening the nuts indicated on the clamps,
after fitting the shim (13), as shown in the
photo.

Nut / Screw 8 Nm B

Fit and fasten the coolant delivery pipe (12) and

the coolant return pipe (14), tightening the
indicated screws.

Nut / Screw 8 Nm B
Fasten the coolant delivery pipe (12) and the

coolant return pipe (14), tightening the
indicated nuts.

Nut / Screw 8 Nm B

Fasten the coolant delivery pipe (12), tightening


Screw 20 Nm B

exchanger

Place absorbent paper under the plugs to catch
any oil spillage.
Replace the O-rings of the ATF delivery and
return pipes (72), lubricating the new
components before installation.
Fit and connect the ATF delivery and return
pipes (72).
Fit the fork (74) and tighten the screw (73).

Screw 20 Nm A
exchanger
Fit the shim (18).

Fasten the ATF pipes (72) to the gearbox,
tightening the indicated nuts.

Nut / Screw 8 Nm B

exchanger
Clean the area surrounding the GL fluid pipe

Place absorbent paper under the plugs to catch
any oil spillage.
Replace the O-rings of the GL fluid delivery and
return pipes (69), lubricating the new
components before installation.
Fit and connect the GL fluid delivery and return
pipes (69).
Fit the GL pipe retainer fork (71) and tighten the
screw (70).

Screw 20 Nm A
Refit the single oil heat exchanger mounting subframe ( C2.05).

Refit the water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger ( C2.05).
Fit and fasten the two lower heat shields (67)
and (68) onto the rear removable gearbox
subframe, by tightening the screws indicated.

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the two front heat shields on the exhaust extensions as originally installed.

onto the mating surfaces of both of the rear
pipes of the central silencer with the exhaust
extensions.
Fill the notches (94) in both connecting
endpieces of the exhaust extensions with
HOLTS FIREGUM sealant paste.
Fit new Torx clamps on the front of the exhaust extensions.

chassis.
Place the trolley (AS 107565), complete with rear removable subframe, under the vehicle and with the
trolley operating handle facing towards the rear of the vehicle.
Operate the lift pedal to lift the rear removable subframe to approximately 300 mm from the vehicle
chassis.

Fit the EPB parking brake cable (35) through the

relative hole, as originally installed.
Ensure that there are no cables or pipes hindering the rear removable subframe as it is raised.
Operate the lift pedal to lift the rear removable

subframe sufficiently to permit connection of
the connectors (64).
Connect the connectors (64), ensuring that they
are correctly and securely fastened.

the ground braid (63).
Connect the ground braid (63), tightening the
screw (62).

Screw 18 Nm B

the ground braid (63).
Connect the ground braid (63), tightening the
screw (62).

Screw 18 Nm B
Fasten the gearbox connector mounting bracket

(61) to the gearbox mounting, by tightening
the screw (60).

Screw 9 Nm B

Tighten the screw (60) fastening the rubber lined

bracket (61) holding the gearbox cable.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the EPB
parking brake Bowden cable (35).
subframe completely, aligning the references
(X) and (Y).
Fit the transmission shaft flange onto the
respective gearbox flange.
Undo the alignment pins.

Hand-tighten all the fastener screws for the rear removable subframe.
Pre-tighten all the screws fastening the rear removable subframe.

Definitively tighten the inner screws (59).

Screw 65 Nm A
Definitively tighten the upper rear screw (57).
vehicle.

Screw 110 Nm A
Tighten the front screws (58).

Screw 65 Nm A
Definitively tighten the outer central screws (59).

Screw 65 Nm A
Definitively tighten the upper rear screw (57).

vehicle.

Screw 110 Nm A
Tighten the screws (65) definitively, tightening

the front screw first and then the rear screw.
vehicle.

Screw 60 Nm B


vehicle.

Screw 60 Nm B


the front screw first and then the rear screws.
vehicle.

Screw 60 Nm B

vehicle.

Screw 110 Nm B
CAUTION
Check that all screws are correctly fastened before removing the trolley supporting the removable subframe.
Operate the lowering handle to lower the trolley slowly.
Tighten the screws (51) fastening the rear


Screw 100 Nm A

Tighten the screws (51) fastening the rear


Screw 60 Nm B
Check that the one or two machined conical
recesses on the gearbox flange are
approximately 180° from the white dot on the
rear of the transmission shaft.
If there are two machined conical recesses on
the gearbox flange, use the centre point
between the two recesses as a reference
point.
If there are no conical machined recesses, the

gearbox is perfectly balanced and no
referencing relevant to the transmission
shaft is necessary.
Fit the three shims (48) then snug and

fastening the transmission shaft (49) to the
gearbox (50).
torque.


Fit the heat shield (Y) in the relative seat and

fasten by hand tightening the screws
indicated.
Fit the brake calliper (45) in its seat on the hub
carrier and fasten by tightening the screws
(46).
Repeat the procedure for the right hand brake
calliper.

Screw 100 Nm A
Working on the left hand rear suspension, fasten

the clamp on the parking brake cable (43), by
hand tightening the relevant nut.
Connect the vehicle motion sensor connector
(42).
Connect the ABS sensor connector (41) and
fasten the connector to the bracket on the
centre chassis.
Fit new plastic clamps in the positions indicated.
Fasten the ground cable (39) onto the
suspension bracket, by hand tightening the
nut (40).
Repeat all the previous procedures for the right
hand rear suspension.

Screw 30 Nm A
Connect the connector (37) onto the shock

absorber.
Pre-tighten then definitively tighten the screws

(38).

Screw 110 Nm A

Perform the operations on both sides of the
vehicle.
Fit the spherical suspension tie-rod on the rear

stabiliser bar (33) and tighten the nut (32).
vehicle.

Nut 50 Nm B
Fit the EPB Bowden cable (35) on the relevant
heat shield on the gearbox.
Tighten the two screws indicated (36) fastening
the EPB Bowden cable (35) to the heat shield
on the gearbox.

Screw 6 Nm B
Fit the heat shield (34 )protecting the EPB

Bowden cable (35) in the relevant seat.
Tighten the screws indicated (36) fastening the
heat shield (34 )protecting the EPB Bowden
cable (35).

Screw 6 Nm B

Fit the EPB equaliser (30) in the relevant

mounting bracket (26) and move towards the
right.
Attach the EPB Bowden cable sheaths to the
mounting bracket (26) for the EPB equaliser
(30), pressing the indicated fastener clips.
Attach the end (29) of the left hand EPB Bowden
cable onto the EPB equaliser (30).
Attach the end (27) of the right hand EPB
Bowden cable to the EPB linkage bracket
(28).
Take care not to damage the EPB linkage
bracket (28).
Fit the clip (92) on the EPB linkage bracket as

originally installed.
Fit the emergency gearbox lock releaser cables,

leading towards the passenger compartment,
onto the retainer bracket (25), and fasten the
cables by fitting the Seeger rings (24).
Fit the Bowden cables (23) on the relevant
blocks.
Fasten the Bowden cables (23) by fitting the
retainer clips (22).
Fit the exhaust extension mounting bracket in the

relevant seat on the chassis and fasten by
tightening the two screws (2) and the nut (10).

Screw 25 Nm B
Move the exhaust extensions (D) toward the

front of the vehicle, connecting to the exhaust
silencer and fitting the bushings (1) in the
relevant guides for the pins on the mounting
bracket.
Tighten the nuts indicated fastening the bushings

Nut 10 Nm B
Fit the exhaust extensions (D) correctly onto the
centre silencer (C), matching up the welds
indicated and aligning at the rear with the
silencers.
Tighten the Torx clamps (4) fastening the centre
silencer (C) to the exhaust extensions (D).

Fasten the front heat shields (65) and (66), by


Screw 8 Nm B

exchanger

connection:
pin (13);
connected.
exchanger
Connect the unions (21) for the gear oil fastening

the pipe retainer clamp (20) to the bodyshell.

exchanger
Fasten the two pipe retainer brackets (19) to the

mounting bracket (16), by tightening the

Nut 8 Nm B

pipes (18), tightening the screws (17).

Screw 20 Nm B

exchanger
Fasten the two pipe retainer brackets (15) to the

mounting bracket (6), by tightening the

Nut 8 Nm B
exchanger

pin (13);
connected.

exchanger
Connect the oil delivery and return unions (11)

for the hydraulic clutch system, following the
procedure described previously.
Fit the mounting bracket (6) for the hydraulic
clutch system oil pipes and, after ensuring
that the pads are fitted correctly, tighten the
screws (7) with relevant washers.

Screw 20 Nm B
Fit and fasten the retainer clamps and tie (8) to

the bodyshell as originally installed.

exchanger
Using the photo aside as reference, check that

the EPB electric parking brake cables are
located correctly relevant to the hydraulic
clutch system oil pipe mounting bracket.
exchanger
Remove the caps previously placed on the

coolant pipe ends.
Connect the coolant pipes (10), tightening the
collars (11).

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fasten the pipe retainer bracket (9) to the

mounting bracket (8) by tightening the screw
indicated by the red arrow.

Screw 9 Nm B
Fasten the mounting bracket (8) for the coolant

pipes (10), tightening the indicated screws.

Screw 20 Nm B

exchanger
Fasten the coolant system pipes (6) leading to

the single oil heat exchanger, by tightening
the indicated screws on the clamp and the
brackets (7).

Screw 8 Nm B
exchanger
Using the photo aside as reference, check that

the EPB electric parking brake cable is
located correctly relevant to the coolant pipe
mounting bracket.

Remove the caps previously placed on the

coolant pipe ends.
Fit the pipes (6).
Connect the hose unions (10) to the pipes (6).
ENVIRONMENT.
Tighten the screw collars (11).

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fit the bracket (7) and tighten the indicated

screws.

Screw 8 Nm B
Align the exhaust extension (D) with the silencer
(E).
installation.
Fit and tighten a new spherical clamp (3).



Screw 25 Nm B


Screw 25 Nm B


Nut 25 Nm B

Refit the rear brake calliper ( D3.05).

Refit both.
Refit the wheels ( D2.01).

Refit the rear wheels.
modification). Replace the EPB ECU ( F2.11).
It is not necessary to replace the aforementioned ECU. Simply connect the EPB ECU Bowden cable
and fit the respective cable grommet.

Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger. Fill the cooling system ( A3.07).
Lower the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
Calibrate the EPB electric parking brake ( D3.07).
This procedure must only be performed if, at Key-ON, the NPB parking brake node identifies a fault,
indicated on the instrument panel and on the TFT display by the specific warning lamps, and with
error C155A on the NPB (EPB calibration error) and error C1313 on the NFR (parking brake
error).
C2.04 DCT gearbox water/gear oil heat exchanger (for vehicles WITHOUT single
oil heat exchanger)
Removing the gear oil heat exchanger
The following system was installed UP TO Assembly No. 90608, and has been replaced by the new single oil
heat exchanger system.
Located behind the front right wheelhouse.



Remove the pipe retainer clamps (4).

with the pin (13).

drain completely.
Cover the right Motronic ECU, the cables, wiring

harnesses and connectors adequately with
absorbent paper.
Clean the unions on the heat exchanger and the
surrounding area thoroughly with a suitable
Remove the clamps (1) to release the right
injection cable. Move out of the way so that it
does not hinder the removal of the heat
exchanger.
Note the positions of the water and gear oil pipes
on the heat exchanger to ensure that they are
refitted correctly.
Undo the screw indicated on the water pipe
retainer clamp.
Take care not to contaminate the two
systems.
Undo the pipe unions (6) for the water pipes from
the gear oil heat exchanger, starting from the
bottom union.
Clean and dry any residual liquid and plug the
orifices on both the heat exchanger and the
pipes.
Undo the pipe unions (7) for the gear oil pipes
from the gear oil heat exchanger, starting
from the bottom union.
Clean and dry any residual liquid and plug the
orifices on both the heat exchanger and the
pipes.
Remove the clamp (8) supporting the oil return

pipe.
Move the oil and water pipes as far away as
possible from the gear oil heat exchanger (A)
and undo the four nuts indicated fastening the
heat exchanger to the relative mounting
bracket.
Ease the gear oil heat exchanger (A) out of its
seat and remove from the front right wheel
bay.
Refitting the gear oil heat exchanger

Gear oil heat exchanger mounting bracket - Nut 9 Nm B
Clean the pipe unions, pipes and inlets on the heat exchanger thoroughly with a suitable degreaser that
does not leave residue.
Working from the front right wheel bay, fit the
gear oil heat exchanger (A) in the relative
mounting bracket and fasten by tightening the
four nuts indicated.

Nut 9 Nm B
Fasten the front gear oil pipe to the mounting

bracket, fitting the clamp (8).
Fasten the right injection cable to the chassis
and to the mounting bracket, fastening the
two clamps (1).
Take care not to contaminate the two
systems.
Remove the plugs from the oil pipes and the

respective orifices on the heat exchanger;
keeping the pipes in their original positions as
noted during removal, fit the oil pipes and
fasten with the pipe unions (7), after replacing
the four seals.

Pipe union 50 Nm A
Remove the plugs from the water pipes and the

respective orifices on the heat exchanger;
keeping the pipes in their original positions as
noted during removal, fit the water pipes and
fasten with the pipe unions (6), after replacing
the four seals.

Pipe union 50 Nm A
Attach the water pipes to the clamp, fastening

the assembly with the screw indicated.
Clean thoroughly to remove all residual liquid and remove the absorbent paper used to protect the ECU,
cables, wiring harnesses and connectors.
residue.
connection:
pin (13);
connected.
Connect the gear oil pipe unions (5), fitting the

pipes on the clamp (4).

relative washers.

Screw 20 Nm B

C2.05 DCT gearbox water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat
exchanger (for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger)
Removing the water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger
CAUTION
ALWAYS PERFORM THE OPERATIONS WITH COLD ENGINE AND EXHAUSTS.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90609, a single oil heat exchanger solution has been introduced to cool both the gear
system oil and the hydraulic clutch system oil.
Clean the coolant delivery pipe inlet area (1) with

a suitable degreaser that does not leave
residue.
Place a container under the indicated clamp.
Remove the coolant delivery pipe (1) from the
single oil heat exchanger (A) and loosen the
indicated clamp.
ENVIRONMENT.
Detach the coolant delivery pipe (1) and allow

the liquid in the pipe to drain.
Clean and dry any fluid residue.
Place suitable plugs on the inlets.

Take care not to contaminate the systems.
Clean the unions on the single oil heat

exchanger and the surrounding areas with a
suitable degreaser that does not leave
residue.
Place a container under the clamp indicated by
the red arrow.
Detach the coolant return pipe (2) from the single
oil heat exchanger (A) by loosening the clamp
indicated by the red arrow.
ENVIRONMENT.
Detach the coolant return pipe (2) and allow the

liquid in the pipe to drain.

Place a container under the unions of the clutch
hydraulic system pipes (3) on the single oil
heat exchanger.
Remove the clutch hydraulic system pipes (3)
from the single oil heat exchanger (A), by
undoing the indicated screws and retrieving
the retainer forks (5).
Detach the clutch hydraulic system pipes (3) and

allow the liquid remaining in the pipes to drain.

Place a container under the gear oil pipe unions
(4) on the single oil heat exchanger.
Remove the gear oil pipes (4) from the single oil
heat exchanger (A), by undoing the indicated
screws and retrieving the retainer forks (5).
Detach the gear oil pipes (4) and allow the liquid
remaining in the pipes to drain.

Undo the indicated single oil heat exchanger
fastening nuts (A) to the relevant mounting
subframe.
Move the pipes to one side as much as possible
and pull backwards the single oil heat
exchanger (A) from the stud bolts.
Refitting the water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger

Fastening single oil heat exchanger to mounting Nut 9 Nm B
subframe
Fastening clutch hydraulic system pipes to single Screw 8 Nm B
oil heat exchanger
Fastening gear oil pipes to single oil heat Screw 8 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening coolant pipes to single oil heat Screw collar 4 Nm B
exchanger
Move the pipes as much as possible to one side

and fit the single oil heat exchanger (A) on
the mounting subframe, locating it on the stud
bolts.
Tighten the indicated single oil heat exchanger
fastening nuts (A) to the relative mounting
subframe.

Nut 9 Nm B
Remove the plugs placed previously.
Insert the gear oil pipes (4) in the relative seats
on the single oil heat exchanger, after
replacing and lubricating the relative O-rings.
the screws indicated.
Fasten the gear oil pipes (4) by fitting the retainer
forks (5) and tightening the indicated screws.

Screw 8 Nm B

Insert the clutch hydraulic system pipes (3) in the
relative seats on the single oil heat
exchanger, after replacing and lubricating the
relative O-rings.
Fasten the clutch hydraulic system pipes (3) by
fitting the retainer forks (5) and tightening the
indicated screws.

Screw 8 Nm B

Fit the coolant return pipe (2) on the single oil
heat exchanger (A) and fasten by tightening
the clamp indicated by the red arrow.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fit the coolant delivery pipe (1) on the single oil
heat exchanger (A) and fasten by tightening
the indicated clamp.

Screw collar 4 Nm B

Removing the single oil heat exchanger mounting subframe
Remove the water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger ( C2.05).
Undo the screws and nuts indicated.

Remove the single oil heat exchanger mounting
subframe (A).
FROM Assembly No. 94889

Remove the single oil heat exchanger mounting
subframe (A).
Refitting the single oil heat exchanger mounting subframe

Fastening single oil heat exchanger mounting Nut 25 Nm B
subframe Screw 25 Nm B
Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening single oil heat exchanger mounting Screw 40 Nm B
Fit the single oil heat exchanger mounting

subframe (A).
Tighten the screws and nuts indicated by the
black arrows.

Nut 25 Nm B
Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the screw indicated by the red arrow.

Screw 8 Nm B
Fit the single oil heat exchanger mounting

subframe (A).

Screw 40 Nm B
Refit the water/gear oil/clutch hydraulic system oil single oil heat exchanger ( C2.05).
C2.06 Draining and filling with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
Draining the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
Place a container under the plugs indicated in

the figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plugs (1) and (2) at the bottom of the
gearbox housing.

exchanger

bodyshell.
exchanger

with the pin (13).

drain completely.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil (ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil
heat exchanger)


residue.
connection:
pin (13);
connected.
Connect the unions (5) for the gear oil pipes and
fasten the clamp (4) to the bodyshell.
relevant washers.

Screw 20 Nm B
Replace the plugs (1) and (2), fitting and

tightening the new components.

Plug 25 Nm B

litres (2.9 litres + approx. 2 litres for external
cooling circuit) of oil via the level check/filler
hole.
check/filler hole.
gradually.
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs and from the delivery and return unions disconnected
during the draining procedure.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil (ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat
exchanger)


follows.
16x7 mm).
Tighten the plugs (1) and (2).

Plug 25 Nm B

litres via the level check/filler hole, with the
piece of hose (3).
check/filler hole.
relative to the amount indicated for filling the
tank when empty; this is due to unavoidable
pooling within the system. Fill gradually.
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs.
C3.01 DCT gearbox clutch hydraulic oil system layout
Layout for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat exchanger
A - DCT gearbox (clutch oil tank and clutch oil pump)

B - Clutch oil pipes
C - Clutch oil radiator
Layout for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger

A - DCT gearbox (clutch oil tank and clutch oil pump)
B - Clutch oil pipes
C - Clutch oil radiator
C3.02 DCT gearbox clutch hydraulic oil system radiator (for vehicles WITHOUT
single oil heat exchanger)
Removing the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator
The following system was installed UP TO Assembly No. 90608, and has been replaced by the new single oil
heat exchanger system.
Fit the A.C. condenser on the left of the radiator assembly.


the screws (7).
Remove the clamps (8) and (12), by undoing the
screws (9).
unions (11).


Remove the clamps (1) retaining the clutch
hydraulic system oil pipes.
Undo the unions (2) for the clutch hydraulic
system oil pipes on the relative radiator (A).
components.
Undo the upper screw (3) fastening the clutch

hydraulic system oil radiator (A) to the
radiator assembly.
Undo the lower nuts (4) fastening the clutch

radiator assembly.
Remove the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator
(A).
Refitting the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator

Hydraulic clutch system oil radiator - coolant Nut 24 Nm B
radiator
Hydraulic clutch system oil radiator - coolant Screw 5 Nm B
radiator
Clamps - ATF pipes on water radiator Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator (A) in
its seat on the radiator assembly.
Tighten the lower nuts (4) fastening the clutch
radiator assembly.

Nut 24 Nm B
Tighten the upper screw (3) fastening the clutch

radiator assembly.

Screw 5 Nm B
Tighten the unions (2) for the clutch hydraulic

system oil pipes on the relative radiator (A).

Union 40 Nm B
Fasten the hydraulic clutch system oil pipes,

fitting the retainer clamps (1) with the relative
fastener nuts.

Nut 9 Nm B
pin (13);
connected.
Connect the delivery and return unions (11) and

fasten to the mounting bracket (10).
Fasten the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes, by
fitting the clamps (8) and (12) and tightening
the screws (9).
Fasten the mounting bracket for the clutch
hydraulic system oil pipes (6), tightening the
screws (7).
C3.03 Draining clutch hydraulic system and filling with Shell DCT F-3 fluid
Draining Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil
Place a container under the plug indicated in the

figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plug (1) located at the bottom of the
gearbox housing.

exchanger
Remove the mounting bracket (3) for the clutch

hydraulic system oil pipes, undoing the
screws indicated.
Remove the clamps and the clamp (4) from the
bodyshell, then detach the delivery and return
unions (5) from the hydraulic clutch system oil
pipes.

exchanger


Filling with Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil


exchanger

residue.
pin (13);
connected.

exchanger

Fasten the mounting bracket (3) for the hydraulic
clutch system oil pipes in the relevant seat,
after ensuring that the bushings are installed
correctly, by tightening the screws indicated
with washers.

Screw 20 Nm B
Fasten the hydraulic clutch system oil delivery

and return pipes to the bodyshell with the
clamps and the tie (4).
Replace the plug (1), fitting and tightening the
new component.

Plug 25 Nm B
Undo the threaded plug (7), located on the left on

the bottom of the differential housing.
There is a small pipe above the threaded plug
for filling and checking the level of the
system.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 02

(with the long spout), aspirate the specified oil
from a newly opened container.
litres (for vehicles WITHOUT single oil
heat exchanger) or 7.75 litres (for vehicles
WITH single oil heat exchanger) via level
pipe.
minutes for the oil to settle, then gradually
finish filling, until oil overflows from the level
pipe (8).
gradually.
ONLY for vehicles WITHOUT single oil heat exchanger. Check that there is no leakage from the drain plug
and from the delivery and return unions disconnected during the draining procedure.
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger. Check that there is no leakage from the drain plug.
C4.01 Axle shafts
Removing the axle shaft
The following procedure is for the removal of the right hand axle shaft.
The procedure for removing the left hand axle shaft is identical.
Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox. Disable the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function ( D3.07).
Only for vehicles with mechanical gearbox. Disengage the electric parking brake (EPB).
Use a punch and mallet to remove the caulking

(1) from the ring nut (2).
Undo the ring nut (2) fastening the axle shaft (A)
to the hub carrier bearing.

(A) to the differential flange, recovering the
three shims (4).
Undo the nut (5), removing the relevant pin
fastening the toe-in tie-rod (B) to the hub
carrier (C).
adequately and undo the nut (6), removing
the relevant pin fastening the upper arm (D)
to the hub carrier (C).
Use a suitable screwdriver to prise the clip (7) off

the EPB linkage bracket.
(9).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and
remove the right hand EPB Bowden cable
sheath (9) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Left hand axle shaft
Move the EPB equaliser (7) to the left.

Detach the end (8) of the left hand EPB Bowden
cable (9) from the EPB equaliser (7).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and
remove the left hand EPB Bowden cable
sheath (9) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Tilt the hub carrier outward to detach the axle shaft from the differential flange.
If necessary, cut the cable retainer clamps to slacken any tension preventing the hub carrier from tilting.
Use a suitable punch and mallet to extract the axle shaft from the hub carrier bearing, then remove the
axle shaft from the vehicle.
Refitting the axle shaft

Fastening upper arm - rear hub carrier Nut 90 Nm A
Fastening toe-in tie-rod - rear hub carrier Nut 80 Nm A
Fastening axle shaft to hub carrier Nut 275 Nm A
When refitting the same axle shaft, remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH
STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND.
Remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND from
the hub carrier bearing.
Check that the surface of the differential flange is

completely clean.
Apply three even and regularly spaced circular

beads of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH
Fit the axle shaft in the hub carrier bearing.

Tilt the hub carrier inward to bring the axle shaft and the differential flange together.
Fit new cable retainer clamps if the previous clamps were cut.
adequately, pretighten the nut (6) with a
tightening angle of 80°, and then fully tighten,
fitting the relative pin fastening the upper arm
(D) to the hub carrier (C).

Nut 90 Nm A
Pretighten the nut (5) with a tightening angle of

70°, then fully tighten, fitting the relative pin
fastening the toe-in tie-rod (B) to the hub
carrier (C).

Nut 80 Nm A
Tighten the six screws (3) fastening the axle

shaft (A) to the differential flange, fitting the
three shims (4).

Screw 78 Nm A
Tighten the ring nut (2) fastening the axle shaft

(A) to the hub carrier bearing.

Nut 275 Nm A
Use a punch and mallet to caulk (1) the ring nut

(2).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit
the right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (9)
into the relative mounting bracket.
Attach the end (8) of the right hand EPB Bowden
cable (9) to the EPB linkage bracket.
Refit the clip (7) in the relative seat on the EPB
linkage bracket.
Left hand axle shaft
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit

the left hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (9)
into the relative mounting bracket.
cable (9) to the EPB equaliser (7).
Move the EPB equaliser (7) to the right.

error).
C4.02 Transmission shaft
Removing the transmission shaft
It connects the transmission housing with the gearbox.
Unscrew the heat shield (1), by undoing the

screws (2).
Ease the heat shield (1) off the transmission

shaft, shifting toward the front; bend slightly if
necessary.

transmission shaft (A) to the gearbox.
Remove all the screws and retrieve the three
shims (4).
transmission shaft (A) to the gearbox.
Remove all the screws and retrieve the three
shims (6).
Use a sharp tool to separate the transmission

shaft flange from the transmission housing,
then ease the transmission shaft out (A)
toward the front.
Refitting the transmission shaft

of 90°
of 90°
Check that the flange surfaces on the
transmission housing and gearbox are clean.
When fitting the transmission shaft, the arrow on

the shaft must point forward.
On the rear of the transmission shaft is a white
marking indicating the point of maximum
imbalance. This marking must be kept
approximately 180° from the one or two
conical recesses on the gearbox flange (point
of max. gearbox imbalance) and from the
marking made on the transmission housing
(point of max. flywheel imbalance), as shown
in the previous photo.
If there are two machined conical recesses on
the gearbox flange, use the centre point
between the two recesses as a reference
point.
If there are no conical machined recesses, the

gearbox is perfectly balanced and no
referencing relative to the transmission shaft
is necessary.
The positions of the markings shown in the

photo aside are indicative only.
Then fit transmission shaft (A) in the relative

seat, inserting from front to back.
Fit the three shims (6), then snug and
fastening the transmission shaft (A) to the
transmission housing shaft.
torque.


Fit the three shims (4), then snug and

fastening the transmission shaft (A) to the
gearbox.
torque.


Fit the heat shield (1) in the relative mounting

and fasten by tightening the screws (2).

C4.03 Transmission housing
Removing the transmission housing
UP TO Engine No. 167394, in the event of transmission housing replacement, follow the indications given in
Technical Information No. 1916 of May 2011.

Remove the transmission shaft ( C4.02).
Leaving the oxygen sensors fastened to the catalytic converters, disconnect the relative connectors
only.
Undo the screws (1) fastening the starter motor

to the transmission housing (A)
Take particular care not to bend the pipes

and/or strain the cables excessively when
tilting the engine assembly.
Install the tool (AS 107566) on a hydraulic jack

and bring into contact with the oil sump.
Tighten the screw (10) of tool (AS 107566) to tilt
the engine assembly and allow access to the
upper transmission housing fastener nuts.
Undo the indicated nuts fastening the
transmission housing (A) to the engine.
When removing the transmission housing

from the engine, do NOT apply leverage
in the sump.
With a suitable tool (11), apply leverage to the

tool (AS 107566) to separate the
transmission housing from the engine,
detaching from the respective stud bolts.
Refitting the transmission housing

Nut fastening transmission housing - engine Nut (pretightening) 20 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
UP TO Engine No. 167394, in the event of transmission housing replacement, follow the indications given in
Technical Information No. 1916 of May 2011.
Make a yellow marking on the crankcase
indicating the precise position of the white
maximum imbalance marking on the flywheel.
Thoroughly clean and degrease the transmission

housing shaft.
Apply a layer of ROLOIL Copper Grease -
copper based grease for high
temperatures over the last 2 cm of the
transmission housing shaft to completely fill
the splining grooves and cover the bevelled
end.
Take particular care not to bend the pipes
and/or strain the cables excessively when
tilting the engine assembly.
Support the transmission housing (A) at the end

of the relative shaft to allow some degree of
rotation when inserting the shaft into the
splined hub of the flywheel.
Fit the transmission housing (A), mating the
splining of the relative shaft with the splined
hub of the flywheel, and push completely onto
the crankcase, aligning the respective stud
bolts.
FROM Engine No. 181233, particular care is
necessary during this procedure as there
are two O-rings on the flywheel, each of
which exerting axial resistance during
insertion. After passing the first O-ring (first
point of axial resistance), the axial
resistance encountered remains constant
while the transmission housing is being
pressed into its seat until the second O-ring
is reached (second point of axial
resistance). At this point, apply additional
force to pass the second O-ring (second
point of axial resistance).
Taking particular care not to disengage the

splined shaft of the housing from the splined
hub of the flywheel, separate the housing by
approximately 2 cm and insert again until
completely seated in the crankcase.
Check that the housing (A) is seated completely
on the crankcase, then tighten the indicated
nuts.
Pre-tighten the indicated nuts in the sequence
given.

Tighten the indicated nuts in the sequence given.

Nut 60 Nm A
Make a yellow marking on the transmission shaft
flange indicating the precise position of the
yellow marking made previously on the
crankcase.
The position of the marking shown in the photo
aside is indicative only.
Undo the screw (10) of the tool (AS 107566) to

position the engine assembly correctly.
Tighten the screws (9) fastening the starter

motor to the transmission housing (A)

Screw 25 Nm A
Refit the transmission shaft ( C4.02).

C4.04 Flywheel
Removing the flywheel
Remove the transmission housing ( C4.03).

Undo the indicated screws in a cross pattern.

Note that while the starter motor has been
removed in the photo aside, its removal is
not necessary.
Remove the flywheel (A).
Refitting the flywheel

Fastening flywheel to crankshaft Pretightening torque for 45 Nm A
screw
Screw 91 Nm A
Remove the O-rings (1) and replace.

Clean and degrease the flywheel splining
thoroughly.
Carefully fit the new O-rings (1) in the respective
seats on the flywheel splining.
Apply a sufficient layer of ROLOIL Copper

Grease - copper based grease for high
temperatures on the splining and on the O-
rings to fill the teeth grooves completely.
Fit the flywheel (A).

Pre-tighten the four screws indicated by numbers
circled in red, in the sequence: (1-2-3-4).

Pretightening torque for screw 45 Nm A
Definitively tighten the screws in the sequence:

(5-6-7-8-1-2-3-4).

Screw 91 Nm A
Refit the transmission housing ( C4.03).

D1.01 Technical specifications
Wheels
Front
Wheel rim size
Light alloy 8 " J x 19 "

Light alloy 8 " J x 19 " optional
Spare wheel 4.5 " J x 20 "
Tyre size
245/40 ZR19 Pirelli P Zero

245/40 ZR19 Bridgestone optional
245/40 ZR19 Michelin optional
245/35 ZR20 Pirelli P Zero optional
245/40 ZR19 Bridgestone RE 050 optional Run Flat
Winter 245/40 ZR19 Pirelli Winter Sottozero optional
Spare wheel 145/60 R20 Vredestein
Rear
Wheel rim size
Light alloy 10 " J x 19 "

Spare wheel 4.5 " J x 20 "
Tyre size
285/40 ZR19 Pirelli P Zero

285/40 ZR19 Michelin optional
285/35 ZR20 Pirelli P Zero optional
285/40 ZR19 Bridgestone RE 050 optional Run Flat
Winter 285/40 ZR19 Pirelli Winter Sottozero optional
Spare wheel 145/60 R20 Vredestein
Inflation pressure (cold)
Front Rear
Pirelli P Zero 35 psi 32 psi
Bridgestone ZR 19 35 psi 32 psi
Michelin Pilot 35 psi 32 psi
Front Rear
Bridgestone ZR 20 32 psi 32 psi
Bridgestone RE 050 35 psi 32 psi
(Run Flat)
Pirelli Winter 35 psi 32 psi
Sottozero
Vredestein (Spare 61 psi 61 psi
wheel)
Brake system
CCM discs
Front: 390 mm x 34 mm
Rear: 360 mm x 32 mm
Callipers
Front: 6 pistons
Rear: 4 pistons
Electronic control systems
ABS (Anti Blockier System): system preventing wheel lock-up under braking.
EBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution): a system optimising brake force distribution between the wheels.
VDC (Vehicle Dynamic Control): a system which uses the brakes to control vehicle dynamics.
Suspension
Arms
Front: double wishbones

Rear: Multilink
Shock absorbers
Fixed setting
Adjustable damping control (MagneRide)
Electronic control systems
SCM (Magnetorheological Control System): a system (MagneRide) using magnetorheological fluid to vary the
damping rate of the suspension.
D1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Support 95973206 (AV 3206)

for complete hub.

D1.03 Tightening torques

Wheel sensors for checking tyre pressure Sensor 4 Nm B
Valve fastening for tubeless cover Valve 4 Nm B
Wheels Pretightening of stud bolt 25 ÷ 45 Nm 0
Stud bolt 100 Nm A
Fastening cylindrical bushing to EPB ECU Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening EPB ECU Nut 9 Nm B
Ring nut 7 Nm B
Fastening clamps to pipes in wheel bay Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening cable to primary EPB cable bracket Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening actuator cable to axle shaft heat shield Screw 4 Nm B
bracket
Fastening axle shaft heat shield bracket to Screw 9 Nm B
gearbox differential housing
Fastening actuator cable to EPB cable heat shield Screw 4 Nm B
EPB cable heat shield - axle shaft heat shield Screw 4 Nm B
bracket
Pedal board - firewall Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening brake servo - pedal board Nut 20 Nm B
Hole blanking plate Nut 20 Nm B
Brake pedal - pedal board mounting Dowel 34 Nm B
Threaded dowel - pedal board mounting Nut 30 Nm B
Drilled plate - brake pedal Screw 8 Nm B
Brake fluid tank - master brake cylinder Special screw 2 Nm B
Fastening brake pipe union or connection M10 union 16 Nm B
Brake pipe union or connection M12 Union 16 Nm B
ABS/ASR ECU bracket - cross member Nut 24 Nm B
ABS/ASR ECU bracket - casting Screw 24 Nm B
Power steering fluid tank - ABS/ASR ECU bracket Nut 24 Nm B
ABS/ASR ECU - mounting bracket Screw 18 Nm B
Clips on door sill Screw 8 Nm B
Clips on floor cross member Screw 8 Nm B
Purge valve mounting bracket - chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Plate - lower external cross brace Screw 5 Nm B
Plate - lower internal engine compartment cross Screw 5 Nm B
brace
Block - bracket Nut 15 Nm B
Yaw sensor - centre console Screw 6 Nm B
Hose - rear brake calliper Union 21.5 Nm A
Fastening EPB Bowden cable - rear hub carrier Screw 8 Nm B
Brake fluid pipes - master brake cylinder Union 16 Nm B
Bleed union - brake calliper Union 17 ÷ 20 Nm 0
Brake disc - bearing Screw 15.5 Nm B
Brake disc - bearing Pin 15.5 Nm B
Front brake calliper - stub axle Screw 100 Nm A
Rigid brake fluid pipe union - front calliper Union 15.5 Nm B
Centre pin - front brake pads Screw 27 ÷ 33 Nm 0
Fastening brake pedal endstop Nut 12 Nm B
Fastening the lower front arm to the hub carrier Nut (pretightening) 90 Nm A
Nut 63 Nm A
Fastening the upper front arm to the hub carrier Nut (pretightening) 52 Nm A
Nut 52 Nm A
Fastening spherical tie-rod - lower arm Spherical tie-rod 50 Nm B
Fastening ball stud for movement sensor - front Ball stud 5 Nm B
suspension upper arm
Fastening shock absorber to lower arm Nut 80 Nm A
Fastening ball stud for motion sensor - rear Ball joint 5 Nm B
suspension lower arm
Fastening bushing and shock absorber retainer Nut 40 Nm A
washer
Fastening shock absorber stop cap Ring nut 65 Nm B
Screw 30 Nm A
Fastening upper arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 25 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening toe-in tie-rod to chassis Nut (pretightening) 25 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening lower arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 25 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening brake pad sensor ground cable Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening front stabiliser bar - spherical tie-rod Nut 50 Nm B
Fastening rear stabiliser bar to chassis Nut 30 Nm A
Fastening steering box spherical tie-rod to hub Nut (pretightening) 40 Nm A
carrier Nut 40 Nm A
Fastening TPMS antenna - chassis Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening trigger - chassis Nut 4 Nm C
Fastening ball joint - steering box Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening tyre inflation valve Nut 4 Nm A
Fastening tyre pressure sensor Screw 4 Nm A
Fastening lower rear arm to rear hub carrier Nut 205 Nm A
Fastening motion sensor mounting bracket - Screw 5 Nm B
chassis
Fastening rear anti-rotation link Screw 85 Nm A
Fastening pipe and cable mounting bracket to Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
hub carrier
Fastening brake disc shield bracket Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fastening connector to shock absorber strut Nut 40 Nm A
Fastening steering wheel hub - upper steering Nut 50 Nm B
column shaft
shaft
Fastening steering column gaiter plate - firewall Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening column - steering column Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening steering lock Shear head screw 7 Nm B
Fastening F1 control bracket - steering column Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening union connecting pump pipe - steering Threaded union 35 Nm B
box
Fastening union connecting steering box - power Pipe union 35 Nm B
steering fluid radiator
radiator
Fastening bracket - pipe support strip Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening radiator pipe - power steering fluid tank Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening pipe union - pump side threaded union Pipe union 35 Nm B
Fastening pump pipe - steering box Union 35 Nm B
Fastening clamps on pump pipe - steering box Nut 8 Nm B
Fastening rear mounting - engine crankcase Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening front mounting - crankcase and Screw 25 Nm B
cylinder head
Fastening heat shield - power steering pump Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening power steering pump - rear mounting Screw 22 Nm A
Fastening cover - power steering pump pulley Screw 22 Nm A
Fastening pulley - body of power steering pump Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening metallic clamps - steering box Nut 8 Nm B
Fastening power steering fluid tank - bracket Nut 24 Nm B
Fastening power steering radiator pipe - power Screw collar 4 Nm B
steering tank
Fastening ABS ECU Flanged screw 18 Nm B
Fastening pipes - ECU Union 16 Nm B
Fastening steering box to chassis Screw (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Screw 60 Nm A
Steering column gaiter - firewall Nut 9 Nm B
Steering wheel - steering column Nut 50 Nm B
Fastening lower steering column - dashboard Screw 25 Nm B
cross member
Fastening front steering column - dashboard Screw 8 Nm B
cross member
Fastening pipe - power steering pump Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fastening mounting bracket for rigid pipe leading Screw 4 Nm B
from pump to steering box - engine
D2.01 Complete wheel
Removing the wheels
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0 (Key-
OFF).
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the
specific icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the
on/off button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the
vehicle in the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
Use tools very carefully in order to prevent damaging the painted surfaces of the wheel rim.
Tyres that have been fitted for over 3 years must be checked to verify they are still suitable for use.
CAUTION
Loosen the five stud bolts (1).

Lift the vehicle.
Remove the complete wheel.
Checking complete wheels
CAUTION
Check the state of wear of the tyre and the state of the wheel rim.
When replacing a tyre or rim, the wheel must be statically and dynamically balanced.
Check that the mating surfaces on the rim and brake disc are perfectly clean.
Replace any stud bolts with damage to the thread or cone.
Clean the stud bolts thoroughly before refitting.
Never lubricate the mating surfaces between the stud bolt and rim and between the rim and the brake disc.
Do not clean the wheel cones with solvents or aggressive products as they may remove the anti-seizing
coating.
Refitting the wheels

Wheels Pretightening of stud bolt 25 ÷ 45 Nm 0
Stud bolt 100 Nm A
CAUTION
OFF).
Use tools very carefully in order to prevent damaging the painted surfaces of the wheel rim.
Tyres that have been fitted for over 3 years must be checked to verify they are still suitable for use.
CAUTION
Fit the complete wheel, inserting the locator pin

into its seat on the wheel rim.
Hand tighten the stud bolt opposite the pin first,
then the others. Pretighten the stud bolts in a
crossed pattern.

Pretightening of stud bolt 25 ÷ 45 Nm 0
Lower the vehicle and tighten the stud bolts

definitively (1).

Stud bolt 100 Nm A
D2.02 Tyres and rims
Checking the state of the tyres
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load
conditions and at high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Check the state of the tyres during the scheduled maintenance.
CAUTION
Pressure increases with increasing tyre temperature. Never reduce the tyre pressure if measured when the
tyres are hot.
Tyre overheating due to underinflation may seriously compromise handling and tyre integrity.
Do not inflate the tyres to a pressure other than the specified value, as this would render the tyre pressure
monitoring system useless.
After replacing one or more tyres, always calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system by pressing the
button on the passenger compartment dome light panel.
Check the inflation pressure: pressure must be measured with cold tyres and must match the values
specified.
CAUTION
Always inspect any tyre damage very carefully to assess severity: damage may greatly reduce tyre life and
cause accidents.
Check the tyres to ensure that there are no signs of damage such as abrasion, cuts, cracks, bubbles etc.
Violent knocks against kerbs, holes or other obstacles and driving on poor road surfaces for extended
periods may cause tyre damage. This damage may not always be visible. Any foreign objects
penetrating the tyre in these conditions may cause structural damage that is only identifiable after
removing the tyre from the wheel.
CAUTION
If the same tyres have been fitted on the vehicle for over 3 years, check frequently and carefully for signs of
deterioration.
Do not monitor the pressure of a damaged tyre.
Tyres will deteriorate even if the vehicle is used rarely or kept stationary. Cracks in the rubber on the tread
and sidewalls, at times accompanied by blisters, are an indication of tyre deterioration.
CAUTION
Never fit a tyre with tread depth under the specified limit, even if only in a single localised area.
Check the tread depth: the minimum permissible value is 1.7 mm. This depth is identified by the tyre wear
indicators.
Check the wear over the entire tread; in the event of uneven tread wear, perform static and dynamic wheel
balancing.
Note that once Run Flat tyres have been fitted, the instrument panel must be reprogrammed when
refitting conventional tyres to prevent a warning message from being shown on the TFT display.
Replace any tyres that have been punctured and/or been inflated with the tyre inflation bottle included with
vehicle toolkit. For safety reasons, we do not recommend attempting to repair punctured tyres.
Tyre grades
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety requirements, in addition to these grades.
DOT rating
Tread wear Traction Temperature

Pirelli P Zero 220 (Front) – 160 AA A
(Rear)
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are “AA”, “A”, “B” and “C”. Those grades represent the
tyre's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked "C" has poor traction performance.
The traction rating given to a tyre is based on straight line braking tests and does not take other
factors such as acceleration, steering angle, aquaplaning or traction peaks into account.
Temperature
The temperature grades are "A" (the highest), "B", and "C", representing the tyre's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade "C" corresponds to
a minimum level of resistance to which all tyres for cars carrying passengers must comply, according to
what is established by the Federal Standard no. 109 on vehicle safety (Federal Motor Safety Standard).
Grades “B” and “A”, measured for tyres on a laboratory test wheel, indicate higher performance levels
than those required by law.
The temperature rating is with reference to a correctly inflated, correctly loaded tyre. Excessive speed,
insufficient inflation, overloading or combinations thereof may cause heat production and possible
tyre failure.
Preparation for tyre removal

The tyre pressure monitoring sensor is installed on the wheel rims, near the inflation valve.
Removing the tyre without using the correct tools and taking the necessary precautions may damage
the sensor.
To avoid this problem, we are showing the entire procedure for removal and refitting of the tyres from the
wheel rim, using a CORGHI tool, model Artiglio A2019 RC (shown in the photo) or Artiglio A2020 TI,
recommended by Ferrari.
To prevent damage to the wheel rim, all parts of the tool that may come into contact with the rim are rubber
coated.
Only use rubberised tools.

Wear gloves and protective eyewear.
Removing the tyre
Ensure that tyres are not kept in stock for more than 4 years. Tyres may be kept in stock for a
maximum of 4 years, provided that they are kept out of direct sunlight, protected from the weather
and humidity and stored in low oxygen conditions. If necessary, the Ferrari Service Network will
verify whether old tyres are suitable for use. In all cases, tyres mounted on a vehicle for over 3
years must be inspected by an authorised Ferrari Service Centre.
When removing and refitting tyres, DO NOT use tyre levers which could damage the rim and
compromise its protective layer. Use levers coated in protective material.
The photos shown here were taken using a rim from the 575M Maranello.
To more clearly identify the correct mounting positions for the tools relative to the wheel, the vertical column
of the tyre demounting machine is used as the starting point (12 o'clock).
Undo the core of the valve (A) to completely

deflate the tyre.
Place the wheel on the machine table and break

the bead on both the inner and outer sides.
Lubricate the bead (1) with the lubricant spray
provided.
Place the wheel on the self-centring clamp and
use the bead breaker to ensure that the
wheel is gripped correctly by the clamps (2)
on the table.
If the machine is not equipped with a bead
breaker, clamp the wheel from the inside.
Clamp the wheel.
Observe the correct positions for bead

breaking shown as follows.
Position the inflation valve (A) at 12 o'clock.

Position the bead breaker disc (3).
Push the bead into the rim channel using the
bead breaker disc while simultaneously
turning the tyre counterclockwise, until the
inflation valve (A) is at 3 o'clock.
Lubricate the bead while turning.
To facilitate tyre removal, if necessary, insert a
bead breaker lever at 180° relative to the
sensor.
If the bead is not completely broken, repeat this
stage in a clockwise direction, moving the
inflation valve from 3 o'clock to 12 o'clock.
Perform this stage repeatedly, clockwise and
anticlockwise, until the bead is completely
broken.
Fit tool (4): after clamping, the tool automatically

moves upwards and outwards.
Mount the lever (5) on tool (4), using the bead
breaker disc to facilitate the operation if
necessary.
Remove the bead breaker disc.
Position the tyre bead on the tool (4) using the
lever (5).
Remove the lever.
Ensure that the entire edge of the bead is

outside the rim and completely visible. If this
is not the case, the bead may be damaged.
If the bead does not slide easily into the
groove, lubricate the contact area.
Turn the wheel clockwise.

Fit the lever (5) on the tool (4).
Lift the tyre.
Take care not to damage the sensor when
inserting the tyre lever (5).
Position the lower bead of the tyre on the tool

(4), using the lever (5).
Remove the rim from the machine and put carefully in a safe place.
If the tyre is not to be refitted immediately, refit the valve core and cap.
Remove the tyre pressure sensors ( D2.03).

Proceed as follows if removal is necessary.
Checking wheel rims

When carrying out regular maintenance or replacing tyres, check the state of the wheel rims.
Visually inspect the external and internal wheel rim surfaces; if cracks or deep gouges are noted, replace
the wheel.
In the case of scratching, minor dents or superficial scuffs, repaint the affected area or, if necessary, the
entire rim. Use the standard procedure for repainting an alloy wheel, applying a coat of silver based
paint then, once the coat had dried to a matte finish, applying a layer of clear coat. Dry the wheel in the
oven to polymerise the layers of paint applied.
Cover the valve mounting and the hub badge when repainting, as the additional thickness of the paint
may impede correct assembly and compromise the effectiveness of the corrosion treatment applied.
Take particular care around the mating surface with the brake disc; this area is only coated with a single
layer of cataphoresis film.
This treatment has a limited lifespan as the film is gradually eroded by fretting between the surfaces. This
area cannot be repainted and a rim with a deteriorated film must be replaced.
Before refitting, always check that the mating surfaces between the wheel and the brake disc are perfectly
clean.
Using inappropriate tools for removing and refitting the tyre may damage the wheel rim and
compromise the protective layer.
Balance the wheel without the tyre but with the pressure sensor and valve installed: if, after removing the
balancer weights, the values for static balance exceed 36 (including vertical bouncing and wobble), the
rim must be replaced.
Refitting the tyre
Ensure that tyres are not kept in stock for more than 4 years. Tyres may be kept in stock for a
maximum of 4 years, provided that they are kept out of direct sunlight, protected from the weather
and humidity and stored in low oxygen conditions. If necessary, the Ferrari Service Network will
verify whether old tyres are suitable for use. In all cases, tyres mounted on a vehicle for over 3
years must be inspected by an authorised Ferrari Service Centre.
When removing and refitting tyres, DO NOT use tyre levers which could damage the rim and
compromise its protective layer. Use levers coated in protective material.
Refit the tyre pressure sensors ( D2.03).

Proceed as follows if the component has already been removed.
After installing the pressure sensor (A), mount

the clean rim on the self-centring clamp,
ensuring that the wheel is gripped correctly by
the clamps (2) on the table.
Lubricate the wheel.
Pick up the tyre and ensure that the direction of
rotation is correct.
Lubricate both beads.
Fit the inflation valve (A) at 6 o'clock.

Place the tyre on the rim and tip the tool arm (4)
forwards.
Fit the lower bead under the right hand part of
the tool (4).
Mount the bead on the rim, applying constant
pressure.
Turn the wheel, bringing the inflation valve (A) to
12 o'clock.
The bead breaker disc must never reach the

valve-sensor assembly position.
Fit the inflation valve (A) at 4-5 o'clock.

Place the tyre on the rim, matching the lighter
parts of the rim, marked with an embossed
letter "G", with the yellow dots on the tyre.
Insert the lever (5) at 2-3 o'clock, using the bead
breaker disc (3) to push the bead in.
If available, use tyre pliers instead of the lever
(5), with the appropriate adapter fitted.
If necessary, insert a second set of tyre pliers,

with the correct adapter fitted.
Turn the wheel clockwise until the upper bead is

completely mounted.
If used, remove the tyre lever with the bead
breaker disc.
Release the wheel from the clamps (2) on the
table.
Refit the core of the valve (A).
To ensure that the bead is mounted correctly,

inflate the tyre immediately, while the beads
are still lubricated.
The tyre must be inflated to activate the tyre
pressure monitoring system sensor. Inflate
the tyre to a pressure greater than 0.6 bar
and keep inflated at this pressure for a
few minutes.
If the maximum permissible inflation pressure of

(3.2 bar / 44 psi) is not sufficient to seat the
beads, lubricate again.
Balance the wheels ( D2.02).
Wheel balancing
Only use self-adhesive counterweights. In addition to damaging the wheel rim, other types of
counterweights can interfere with parts of the suspension or detach while driving.
Do not touch the adhesive surface of the counterweight before applying to the rim and never reuse
counterweights or use weights with no protective paper, as these may detach while driving.
After replacing a tyre, wheel rim, or both, the wheel must be statically and dynamically balanced using a
balancing machine and suitable counterweights.
Manufacturers identify the heaviest part of the wheel rim and the tyre with a reference mark. When mounting
the tyre onto the rim, always set these reference marks opposite each other to minimise the amount of
counterweights necessary for balancing.
The counterweights must be applied in position

(A) on the inner edge of the wheel rim, in
position (B), or in both positions if necessary.
Thoroughly clean the wheel rim surface onto
which the counterweight will be applied with
heptane.
Remove the protective backing and affix the
counterweight onto the wheel rim, pressing
evenly to ensure that it adheres perfectly.
D2.03 Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional)
TPMS system layout
A - Sensors
B - Trigger
C - Digital antenna
D - Electronic control unit
Sensors
Fastened to the rims, inside the tyres.

The sensors measure the temperature and pressure within the tyre.
The sensors transmit data to the digital antenna as an RF signal (433.92 MHz / 315 MHz).
Trigger
Fastened to the vehicle in the wheel bays.

The triggers request transmission of the data measured from the sensors to the digital antenna.
They transmit an LF signal to the sensors (125 KHz).
Digital antenna
Fastened to the vehicle floor, on the driver side.

The antenna receives data from the sensors, decodes the data and transmits them to the electronic control
unit.
The antenna transmits data via cable to the electronic control unit as a digital signal.
Electronic control unit
Fastened in the passenger side, on the driver side, under the inspection hatch cover.
The electronic control unit processes the data received from the digital antenna and conveys them to the
instrument panel.
It transmits data to the instrument panel via cable.
It communicates with the digital antenna and the triggers through digital signals transmitted via cable.
TPMS function
The TPMS system activates at key-on.

The sensors measure the pressure and temperature and transmit the data measured to the digital antenna.
The data received are decoded and transmitted to the electronic control unit.
The electronic control unit processes the data received and transmits the processed information to the
instrument panel.
The TPMS system deactivates at key-off.
Visualisation on TFT display
TYRES screen: The driver may access the informative screen displaying the pressure and temperature
values for each tyre by pressing DISP.
- Insufficient pressure of one or more tyres

With any currently active screen, when the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control
unit indicating that the pressure of one or more tyres is below the warning threshold, but the system
cannot recognise which wheel is generating the failure signal, the TFT display displays the specific
message “Check tyre pressure” in area B2 of the screen, without the vehicle symbol.
unit indicating that the pressure of one or more tyres is below the warning threshold, the TFT display
displays the specific message “Check tyre pressure” in area B2 of the screen together with the vehicle
symbol in area B1 indicating tyre pressures.
The background of the box indicating the pressure and relative unit of measurement for the faulty tyre turns
amber.
unit indicating that the pressure of more than one tyre is below the warning threshold, the TFT display
displays the specific message “Check tyre pressure” in area B2 of the screen together with the vehicle
symbol in area B1 indicating tyre pressures.
amber.
The display cycle is 20 seconds, after which time the specific screen disappears.
At key-off, no information is displayed but the function continues to monitor tyre pressure while the vehicle is
parked.
If the fault persists at the subsequent key-on, the specific screen is shown again on the display.
TYRES screen: the driver may recall the screen by pressing the DISP button, enabling the driver to identify
the tyres with insufficient pressure at any time. When the system cannot recognise which wheel is
generating the failure signal, as the respective values cannot be displayed by the TYRES screen, the
screen is not recallable by the driver.
- TPMS not calibrated

When the TPMS system has not been calibrated or a tyre has been replaced, the TFT display displays the
specific message "TPMS not calibrated" together with the message "Execute calibration".
The vehicle symbol is not displayed. Therefore, if the fault occurs while the TYRES screen is active, the
default screen is shown automatically.
Simultaneously, the specific indicator light starts flashing and continues to flash for a maximum period of 90
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until the system is
calibrated.
The system may be calibrated via the specific option in the menu, in key-on state with the engine off.
Upon selection of the menu option and subsequent successful calibration, the TFT display displays the
specific message "Calibration activated" for 5 seconds.
In “Calibration activated” state, the TYRES screen is recallable, but the pressure and temperature values are
replaced by dashes.
- TPMS failure
In the event of a fault in the circuit and/or wiring harness leading to the ECU, or in the event of a TPMS ECU
fault, or in the event of no signal reception from one or more sensors due to fault, breakage or flat battery,
the TFT display displays the specific message "TPMS failure".
The vehicle symbol is not displayed. Therefore, if the fault occurs while the TYRES screen is active, the
default screen is shown automatically.
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until normal
operating conditions are restored.
The TYRES screen is not recallable by the driver.
- Punctured tyre
When the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit indicating that the pressure of
one or more normal tyres is below the alarm threshold, but the system cannot recognise which wheel is
generating the failure signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre pressure” together
with the message "Do not proceed" in area B2 of the screen, without the vehicle symbol.
If the vehicle is driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi) in “punctured tyre” state, the specific screen is displayed.
one or more normal tyres is below the alarm threshold, the TFT display displays the specific
message “Low tyre pressure” together with the message "Do not proceed" in area B2 of the screen,
with the vehicle symbol in area B1 indicating tyre pressures.
If the vehicle is driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi) in “punctured tyre” state, the specific screen is displayed.
amber.
one or more RUN FLAT tyres is below the alarm threshold, but the system cannot recognise which wheel
is generating the failure signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre pressure”
together with the message "Max speed 50 mph" in area B2 of the screen, without the vehicle symbol.
The system warns the driver and displays the specific screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 Km/h (50 mph)
while in “punctured tyre” state.
one or more RUN FLAT tyres is below the alarm threshold, the TFT display displays the specific
message “Low tyre pressure” together with the message "Max speed 50 mph" in area B2 of the screen,
with the vehicle symbol in area B1 indicating tyre pressures.
The system warns the driver and displays the specific screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 Km/h (50 mph)
while in “punctured tyre” state.
The instrument panel also calculates (but does not display) the remaining range in Km (or mi) and repeats
the warning after 50 Km (31 mi).
In the event of a puncture to another tyre, the instrument calculates (but does not display) the updated
remaining range in Km (mi), in relation to the distance driven since the previous puncture event.
After the display cycle for the screen is complete, the screen disappears, but the relative indicator light
remains lit continuously.
Pressing the “Escape” function key during the display of faults with priority 0 (standard type tyre puncture) or
priority 1/ 2 (RUN FLAT tyre puncture, with speed limit not exceeded and with tyres still in usable
condition) cancels the screen while leaving the relative warning light lit.
TYRES screen: the screen may be recalled by pressing the DISP button, enabling the driver to identify
punctured tyres at any time. When the system cannot recognise which wheel is generating the failure
signal, as the respective values cannot be displayed by the TYRES screen, the screen is not recallable by
the driver.
- TPMS temporarily inactive
In the event of antenna reception disturbance caused by an RF source transmitting in the same frequency
range as the sensors, or in the event of sensor overheat, or during calibration, or if the ECU does not
recognise the sensor identifiers, the TFT display displays the specific message "TPMS temporarily
inactive".
operating conditions are restored
Subsequently (or if the “Escape” function key is pressed during the display cycle), the screen disappears but
the warning light remains lit.
- "TPMS inactive"
The fault is indicated with the specific message "TPMS temporarily inactive" only. The vehicle symbol is not
displayed.
When the system has been disabled via the diagnostic tester, the TFT display displays the specific
message "TPMS inactive".
operating conditions are restored
Subsequently (or if the “Escape” function key is pressed during the display cycle), the screen disappears but
the warning light remains lit.
Tyre pressure sensor
The sensors are mounted to the wheel rim and secured by the inflation valve.
The sensor must be correctly fixed to the valve for the system to function.
ALWAYS replace with new components when REMOVING the TPMS sensor, complete with valve,
from the rim.
Replace the entire sensor-valve assembly even if only one of the components is damaged.
Detaching the tyre from the rim without due caution may cause irreparable damage to the sensor.
Removing the tyre pressure sensors
from the rim.
The sealant liquid contained in puncture repair aerosols may damage the sensor. Always replace the
sensor if a tyre has been repaired with a puncture repair aerosol.
Remove the tyre ( D2.02).

To prevent the inflation valve from turning, insert
the rod (1), included in the kit, in the hole on
the sensor side.
Undo the nut (2) from the inflation valve,

retrieving the insulator washer (3).
Remove the sensor (6) with valve (4) from the
wheel rim and replace.
Refitting the tyre pressure sensors

Fastening tyre inflation valve Nut 4 Nm A
Fastening tyre pressure sensor Screw 4 Nm A
When replacing the tyre pressure sensors, carry out the new ECU sensor acquisition procedure with
the DEIS tester.
Always finish all the components in the batch opened previously before starting a new sensor batch,
as the sensors are equipped with a battery with a limited lifespan.
Once the sensor has been activated, the internal battery has a lifespan of approximately 10 years.
from the rim.
The sealant liquid contained in puncture repair aerosols may damage the sensor. Always replace the
sensor if a tyre has been repaired with a puncture repair aerosol.
The sensor must not be treated with
detergents, solvents or other harsh
products.
Do not clean with compressed air or
pressurised liquids (e.g. pulivapor).
Take particular care not to tear the surface
of the filter interface (A) on the inner side
of the sensor. Always replace the sensor
if the interface surface is dirty or torn.
Store all the components of the sensor-valve
assembly in a clean, dry place.
Select a new TPMS valve-sensor assembly.
Clean the sensor mating area on the wheel rim.

Check that the sensor frequency matches the system frequency: 433 MHz for the STANDARD version,
white label on sensor; 315 MHz for the JAPAN version, blue label on sensor.
Fit the self-locking screw (5) in the hole on the

sensor and tighten the valve (4) by two or
three turns.
Fit the valve (4) with sensor (6) already

assembled, in the hole on the wheel rim.
Ensure that the insulating washer is fitted
onto the outside of the rim and is
perpendicular to the valve.
Fit the insulating washer (3) and tighten the nut

(2) fully.
Use a rod to ensure that the hole on the
valve is kept outside the rim.
Fit the rod (1) in the radial hole of the valve and
tighten the nut (2).
ALWAYS use a torque wrench, using only
certified and calibrated tools to ensure that
the correct tightening torque is achieved.

Nut 4 Nm A
Remove the rod (1).
For the sensor to function correctly, there

must be contact between the rim and the
mounting points of the sensor itself. The
system may not function correctly if the
sensor is not installed exactly as
instructed.
Push the sensor gently onto the rim to ensure

contact between the rim and the mating
surface of the sensor itself.
Tighten the self-locking screw (5).
ALWAYS use a torque wrench, using only
certified and calibrated tools to ensure that
the correct tightening torque is achieved.

Screw 4 Nm A
Refit the tyre ( D2.02).
Activating the tyre pressure sensor
Always finish all the components in the batch opened previously before starting a new sensor batch,
as the sensors are equipped with a battery with a limited lifespan.
Once the sensor has been activated, the internal battery has a lifespan of approximately 10 years.
During manufacture, the tyre pressure sensor is put into a dormant state to preserve battery life during
storage.
The sensor is activated when it detects a given pressure. To activate, proceed as follows.
Refit the tyre pressure sensors ( D2.03).
Refit the tyre ( D2.02).
Inflate the tyre to a pressure greater than 0.6 bar (8.7 psi) and keep inflated at this pressure for a few
minutes. This causes the sensor to activate.
Inflate the tyre to the specified pressure.
Replacing the antenna

Fastening TPMS antenna - chassis Screw 4 Nm B
Located at the bottom left of the vehicle underside, covered by the left lateral flat undertray.

Detach the connector (1) and undo the three

screws indicated; then remove and replace
the antenna (A).
Fit the antenna (A) in its seat with the connector
turned backwards, and fasten by tightening

Screw 4 Nm B
Refit the lateral flat undertray sections ( E3.12).

Replacing the front trigger

There are two, located behind the rear section of the front wheelhouses, next to the Motronic ECUs.

Detach the connector (1) and undo the two nuts

indicated then remove and replace the trigger
(A).
Fit the trigger (A) in its seat, with the connector
facing downwards, and fasten by tightening
the two nuts indicated.

Nut 4 Nm C

Replacing the rear trigger

There are two, located in front of the front section of the rear wheelhouses.

Detach the connector (1) and undo the two nuts

indicated then remove and replace the trigger
(A).
Fit the trigger (A) in its seat, with the connector
facing downwards, and fasten by tightening
the two nuts indicated.

Nut 4 Nm C

D3.01 System layout
Braking system layout
A - Brake fluid tank

B - Master brake cylinder
C - Servo brake
D - ABS/ASR electrohydraulic unit
E - Front brake fluid pipes
F - Rear brake fluid pipes
G - Brake callipers
H - Brake pads
I - Brake discs
D3.02 Brake fluid tank
Removing the brake fluid tank

Contact with brake fluid may cause severe injury or damage to painted parts of the vehicle.
In the event of skin contact with fluid, wash the respective part of the body immediately with plenty of
water.
In the event of contact between the fluid and painted parts of the vehicle, wash and dry the respective
areas immediately.
Located under the left underwindscreen shield.

environment.
Empty the brake fluid tank, aspirating the fluid.
Detach the connector (1) located at the top of the

brake fluid tank (A).
Undo the screw (2) fastening the brake fluid tank
(A) to the master brake cylinder.
vehicle.
Remove the brake fluid tank (A) and plug the

inlets on the brake master cylinder to prevent
foreign bodies from entering.
Refitting the brake fluid tank

Brake fluid tank - master brake cylinder Special screw 2 Nm B
Apply thread lock compound to the thread of the
screw (2).
vehicle.
Fit the brake fluid tank (A) in its seat on the

master brake cylinder and fasten by

Connect the connector (1) on the tank.

D3.03 Brake discs
Removing the brake discs

DO NOT disconnect the calliper fluid pipe and take particular care not to damage the pipe when
handling the calliper.
Remove the front brake calliper ( D3.05).
Undo the wheel locator pin (2).

Undo the fastener screw (3).
Remove the disc, easing it off the wheel bearing.
Refitting the brake discs

Brake disc - bearing Screw 15.5 Nm B
Brake disc - bearing Pin 15.5 Nm B
Check that the disc is in proper working condition and inspect the disc contact surface, even if new.
If any dirt, stains or greasy/oily patches are noted on the disc surface, clean thoroughly with a regular
solvent, degreaser and/or soap and water.
Fit the disc on the wheel bearing.
To centre the disc on the wheel bearing, hand
tighten the wheel fastener stud bolts into their
seats.
Apply and tighten the fastener screws (3).

Screw 15.5 Nm B
Apply and tighten the wheel locator pin (2).

Pin 15.5 Nm B
Remove the stud bolts fitted previously for

alignment.
Refit the front brake calliper ( D3.05).

Carry out this operation only if the oil pipe unions have been disconnected.

Only in the case of replacing the discs. Bed-in the CCM brake pads ( A3.19).
Cleaning CCM brake discs
Always use standard dust and dirt protection measures, such as safety eyewear, face masks and an
extractor system, when performing any cleaning work on the discs.
Wear plastic gloves when handling discs.
Remove the brake discs ( D3.03).
Remove dirt from the brake hat and the braking surface of the rotor with a clean cloth and acetone (C3 H6
O) or alcohol (DO NOT wash).
DO NOT use a drill to remove stubborn
material from the holes.
DO NOT countersink the holes.
DO NOT grind the discs.
DO NOT widen the holes with a drill.
Remove any material from the cross-drilled

ventilation holes in the disc with a metal pin or
a screwdriver no larger than 5 mm in
diameter.
Blow compressed air into the ventilation holes.
If evident signs of moisture are found on the discs, place the discs in an oven at a constant temperature of
120 to 150°C for 2 hours.
D3.04 Brake pads
Removing the front brake pads

Remove the front wheels.
Disconnect connector (1) of brake pad wear

sensor, and detach it from the relevant
mounting bracket.
Detach brake pad wear sensor cable from cable
grommet (2).
Remove the indicated clamps.
Remove the pin (3), tapping with a suitable

punch and mallet.
Remove the spring (4).
punch and mallet.
Undo the screw (6).
Remove the pin (7).
Remove the brake pads (A).
Refitting the front brake pads

Centre pin - front brake pads Screw 27 ÷ 33 Nm 0
Further separate the calliper pistons with the tool (FACOM DF.6).
Install the brake pads (A).
Install the pin (7).

Screw 27 ÷ 33 Nm 0
Install the pin (5), tapping with a suitable punch

and mallet.
Fit the spring (4).
and mallet.
Slide connector (1) of brake pad wear sensor

under ABS sensor cable, connect it, and
attach it to the relative mounting bracket.
Connect brake pad wear sensor cable to the
cable grommet (2).
Tighten new cable ties in the positions indicated.

Only in the case of replacing the pads. Bed-in the CCM brake pads ( A3.19).
Removing the rear brake pads

Disconnect the connector (1) for the brake pad
wear sensor.
Remove the clamp (2).
Open the clamp (3) to release the pad wear
sensor cable.

punch and mallet.
Remove the spring (5).
punch and mallet.
Remove the brake pads (A).
Refitting the rear brake pads
Further separate the calliper pistons with the tool (FACOM DF.6).
Fit the pads (A).

and mallet.
Fit the spring (5).
and mallet.
Close the clamp (3) to fasten the pad wear
sensor cable.
Fit a new clamp (2).
Connect the connector (1) for the brake pad
wear sensor.

Only in the case of replacing the pads. Bed-in the CCM brake pads ( A3.19).
Bedding-in CCM brake pads
The following procedure is applicable for both CCM1 and CCM2 brake systems and must be performed
EACH TIME the CCM brake pads and/or CCM brake discs are replaced.
For vehicles intended for ROAD use
completely.
For vehicles intended for TRACK use
completely.
D3.05 Brake callipers
Removing the front brake calliper

water.
areas immediately.

Remove the front brake pads ( D3.04).
Undo the union (1) for the rigid pipe on the

calliper.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the front
brake calliper (A).
Remove the front brake calliper (A) from the front
suspension.
Refitting the front brake calliper

Front brake calliper - stub axle Screw 100 Nm A
Rigid brake fluid pipe union - front calliper Union 15.5 Nm B
Check that the calliper mating surfaces with the
stub axle are clean, fit the brake calliper (A)
to the disc and tighten the two screws (2).

Screw 100 Nm A
Fit the rigid pipe on the brake calliper, tightening

the union (1).

Union 15.5 Nm B
Refit the front brake pads ( D3.04).

Removing the rear brake calliper

water.
areas immediately.

Remove the rear brake pads ( D3.04).
Undo the union (1) for the flexible hose on the

calliper.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the calliper
(A).
Remove the calliper from the rear suspension.
Refitting the rear brake calliper

Hose - rear brake calliper Union 21.5 Nm A
Check that the calliper mating surfaces with the

stub axle are clean, fit the calliper (A) to the
disc and tighten the two screws (2).

Screw 100 Nm A
Fit the flexible hose onto the calliper and tighten

the union (1).

Union 21.5 Nm A
Refit the rear brake pads ( D3.04).

D3.06 ABS electrohydraulic unit
Removing the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit
The unit is located in the engine compartment, to the left of the battery, and consists of a hydraulic
component and an ECU.

Remove the cover (8) from the ABS/ASR

electrohydraulic unit, pressing the two clips
indicated.
Open all the pipe clamps indicated and release

the pipes from the relative clips.
Open the pipe clamp indicated and release the
pipes from the relative clips.

vehicle.
Undo the unions (1) leading from the master

brake cylinder and the calliper delivery unions
(2), and plug immediately to prevent brake
fluid spillage.
Lift the brake fluid pipes as much as possible,
taking care not to bend or twist the pipes.
Clean any spilt fluid immediately.

Disconnect the connector (3), lifting the safety
clip (4).
Undo screw (5), from above, and screws (6),

from below, fastening the electrohydraulic
ABS/ASR unit (A) to the relative mounting
bracket.
photo shown here was taken from the front
left hand wheel bay, with the wheelhouse
cover removed.
Move the electrohydraulic unit laterally towards

the compartment revealed by the removal of
the battery, and remove from the engine
compartment.
Refitting the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit

Check the state of the three mounting bushings

(7) for the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit and
replace if necessary.
Fit the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit (A) in the

relative seat on the mounting bracket, via the
compartment revealed by the removal of the
battery.
Tighten screws (6) from underneath, and screw
(5) from above.

Screw 18 Nm B
Connect the connector (3) on the ECU, pushing
down the safety clip (4).
vehicle.
Tighten the calliper delivery unions (2) and the

unions (1) leading from the master brake
cylinder.

M10 union 16 Nm B
M12 Union 16 Nm B
Fit the rigid brake pipes in the relative clips as

originally installed and close the pipe clamp
indicated.

originally installed and close the pipe clamps
indicated.
Fit and fasten the cover (8) on the ABS/ASR
indicated.

Always perform a complete operating cycle after replacing the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit.
Removing the front wheel ABS sensor


Disconnect ground cable from the indicated clip.
Detach brake pad wear sensor cable from cable
grommet (1).
Detach cable grommet (1) of ABS sensor cable
from the relevant mounting bracket.
Release and disconnect connector (2).
Remove the indicated cable grommets for the
ABS sensor cable (A) from the mounting
bracket.
Undo the screw (3) and remove the front wheel

ABS sensor (A) from the suspension.
Refitting the front wheel ABS sensor
Check that the ABS sensor and the tone wheel on the hub carrier are clean.
Fit the front wheel ABS sensor (A) in the relative

seat on the hub carrier and fasten by
Fit the indicated cable grommets for the ABS
sensor cable (A) onto the mounting bracket.
Slide connector (2) of ABS sensor cable above

brake pad wear sensor and connect it.
Attach cable grommet (1) of ABS sensor cable to
the relevant mounting bracket.
Connect brake pad wear sensor cable to the
cable grommet (1).
Check that the indicated clip is located 50 - 60
mm away from the cable grommet (1).
Connect ground cable to the indicated clip.

Removing the rear wheel ABS sensor

Cut the three new clamps indicated fastening the

ABS sensor cable (A) to the ground cable
and to the brake pad wear sensor cable.
Remove the cable grommets (2) for the ABS
sensor cable (A) from the mounting brackets
on the chassis, then detach the relative
connector (1).
ABS sensor cable (A) from the mounting
bracket.
Undo the screw (3) and remove the rear wheel

ABS sensor (A) from the suspension.
Refitting the rear wheel ABS sensor
Check that the ABS sensor and the tone wheel on the hub carrier are clean.
Fit the front wheel ABS sensor (A) in the relative

seat on the hub carrier and fasten by
sensor cable (A) onto the mounting brackets.
Connect the connector (1) for the ABS sensor

cable (A) and fit the cable grommets (2) in the
mounting bracket on the chassis.
Fit the three new clamps in the positions
indicated fastening the ABS sensor cable (A)
to the ground cable and to the brake pad
wear sensor cable.

D3.07 EPB electric parking brake
the parking brake is engaged and released with the specific control on the dashboard, to the left of the steering wheel;
the brake is actuated by an electric motor;
the brake engages automatically when the engine is switched off (Autohold function);
it may be used as an emergency brake with the vehicle in motion. In this case, the system applies the brakes to all four wheels
for as long as the button is kept pressed, dialoguing with the ESP stability control system, which prevents wheel lockup;
ensures optimised brake release dynamics for hill starts with the Automatic Vehicle Holding (AVH) function: when certain
conditions are met, the system keeps the vehicle braked by releasing the brake shoes and callipers at different times, allowing
the driver enough time to move the foot from the brake to the accelerator without the vehicle rolling backwards.
EPB parking brake system layout
A - EPB ECU
B - Equaliser bracket
C - Left hand EPB Bowden cable
D - Right hand EPB Bowden cable
E - Eyebolt on EPB Bowden cable
F - Parking brake lever
G - Parking brake shoes
H - Soundproofing
Disabling the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function
The Autohold function is available only on vehicles with DCT gearbox.
The EPB electric parking brake is engaged automatically at each Key-off, as the Autohold function is always enabled by default.
The following procedure disables the Autohold function to impede automatic engagement of the EPB electric parking brake at Key-
off: no maintenance is possible on the components of the EPB system while the EPB electric parking brake is engaged, as a
result, this procedure is necessary before carrying out any work involving the components of the EPB electric parking brake.
The Autohold function will resume normal operation at the next Key-on, and the EPB electric parking brake will therefore be
automatically engaged at the next Key-off.
Open the driver side door.
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Turn the ignition key to II (Key-on).
Pull the EPB electric parking brake control lever (A).
Wait until the respective indicator light on the instrument panel

extinguishes.
Press the AUTO PARK button (B).
Wait for the specific message "PARK OFF" to appear on the TFT
display.
Turn the ignition key to 0 (Key-off).

Emergency EPB electric parking brake release procedure
CAUTION
The vehicle may move with no warning when the electric parking brake is mechanically released!
The vehicle is only held in position by the Park Lock, if engaged.
If the electric parking brake cannot be released due to a flat battery or an electrical system failure, carry out the following emergency
procedure.

Remove the removable tool kit cover.
Select and remove the articulated wrench (A), Part No. 228062 from
the tool kit.
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to

Lift the plate (A).

Select and remove the articulated wrench (B), Part No. 228062 from
the tool kit.
Insert the articulated wrench (A) in the relative hole on the right of the
tool kit.
Turn the articulated wrench (A) clockwise to completely release the grip
of the parking brake shoes on the rear discs.
The wrench must be turned approximately 50 times to completely
release the parking brake; the brake will begin to release after
approximately 20 turns.
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to
Insert the articulated wrench (B) in the relative hole on the left of the
tool kit.
Turn the articulated wrench (B) clockwise to completely release the grip
of the parking brake shoes on the rear discs.
The wrench must be turned approximately 50 times to completely
release the parking brake; the brake will begin to release after
approximately 20 turns.

At the next Key-ON, the parking brake will function normally, but the
EPB node will register a fault, indicated by the specific warning
lamps on the instrument panel, and by the specific warning lamp
and the message "Parking Brake system revision" together with
the message "Go to dealer" on the TFT display. The errors stored
are C155A on the NPB node (EPB calibration error) and C1313
on the NFR node (parking brake error, indicating that it is
necessary to perform the relative calibration procedure.

Refit the removable tool kit cover.
Replacing the EPB electric parking brake Bowden cables

The following procedure is for replacing the right hand EPB Bowden cable.
With the exception of the specific steps indicated, the procedure for refitting the left hand EPB Bowden cable is the same.
Use a suitable screwdriver to prise the clip (1) off the EPB linkage
bracket.
Detach the end (2) of the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) from the
EPB linkage bracket (A)
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and remove the right hand
EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Left hand EPB Bowden cable
Move the EPB equaliser (C) to the left.

Detach the end (3) of the left hand EPB Bowden cable (D) from the
EPB equaliser (C).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and remove the left hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (D) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Undo the nut (4) fastening the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B)
retainer bracket (E).
Detach the cable grommet (5) from the bracket on the right hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (B).
Undo the nut (6) fastening the ground cable onto the bracket on the
right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (B).
Undo the screw (7) fastening the right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath
(B) onto the rear right hand hub carrier.
Detach the eyebolt (8) on the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) from
the fork (9) inside the hub carrier.
Remove the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) from the respective seat
and replace.
Fit the new right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) in the respective sheath.
Attach the eyebolt (8) on the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) to the
fork (9) inside the hub carrier.
Tighten the screw (7) fastening the right hand EPB Bowden cable
sheath (B) onto the rear right hand hub carrier.

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (6) fastening the ground cable onto the bracket on the

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (5) to the bracket on the right hand EPB
Tighten the nut (4) fastening the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B)
retainer bracket (E).
Left hand EPB Bowden cable
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit the left hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (D) into the relevant mounting bracket.
Attach the end (3) of the left hand EPB Bowden cable (D) onto the EPB
equaliser (C).
Move the EPB equaliser (C) to the right.
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit the right hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (B) into the relative mounting bracket.
Attach the end (2) of the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) onto the
EPB linkage bracket (A).
Refit the clip (1) onto the EPB linkage bracket.

This procedure must only be performed if, at Key-ON, the NPB parking brake node identifies a fault, indicated on the
instrument panel and on the TFT display by the specific warning lamps, and with error C155A on the NPB (EPB
calibration error) and error C1313 on the NFR (parking brake error).
Removing the EPB electric parking brake shoes
The following procedure is for removing the rear right hand wheel brake shoes.
With the exception of the specific steps indicated, the procedure for removing the rear left hand wheel brake shoes is the same.
Remove the rear ones.

Remove the rear ones.
Use a suitable screwdriver to prise the clip (1) off the EPB linkage
bracket.
Detach the end (2) of the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) from the
EPB linkage bracket (A)
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and remove the right hand
EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Rear left hand wheel brake shoes
Move the EPB equaliser (C) to the left.

Detach the end (3) of the left hand EPB Bowden cable (D) from the
EPB equaliser (C).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and remove the left hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (D) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Detach the cable grommet (4) from the bracket on the right hand EPB
Undo the nut (5) fastening the ground cable onto the bracket on the
Undo the indicated screw fastening the right hand EPB Bowden cable
Detach the eyebolt (6) on the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) from
the fork (7) inside the hub carrier.
Release the spring (8) and recover the adjuster pin (9).
Do not disassemble the adjuster pin or alter its setting to ensure that
the shoes are refitted in their original positions.
Remove the upper spring (10) by pushing towards the brake shoes and
then turning.
Remove the lower spring (11) by pushing towards the brake shoes and
then turning.
Release the spring (12) and remove the brake shoes (E), taking care
not to shift the linkage pins (13).
Refitting the EPB electric parking brake shoes

Fit the linkage (13) correctly and install the brake shoes (E) in the
respective seats, with the spring (12) already attached to one of the
shoes.
Using suitable pliers, attach the spring (12) to the other shoe (E).
Fit the lower spring (11) in the respective seat, pushing towards the
brake shoes and then turning the spring.
Fit the upper spring (10) in the respective seat, pushing towards the
brake shoes and then turning the spring.
Fit the adjuster pin (9) in its seat.
Attach the spring (8) to both brake shoes.
Check that there is a sufficient gap between the outer surfaces of the
shoes to install the brake disc without scuffing.
If the gap is insufficient, to adjust the gap between the outer surfaces of
the shoes and allow installation of the brake disc without friction,
turn the toothed sleeve on the adjuster pin (9) using a suitable
screwdriver.
Attach the eyebolt (6) on the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) to the
fork (7) inside the hub carrier.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the right hand EPB Bowden cable

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (5) fastening the earth cable onto the bracket on the

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (4) to the bracket on the right hand EPB
Left hand parking brake cable
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit the left hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (D) into the relative mounting bracket.
Attach the end (3) of the left hand EPB Bowden cable (D) onto the EPB
equaliser (C).
Move the EPB equaliser (C) to the right.
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit the right hand EPB
Bowden cable sheath (B) into the relative mounting bracket.
Attach the end (2) of the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) onto the
EPB linkage bracket (A).
Refit the clip (1) in the relative seat on the EPB linkage bracket (A).
Refit the brake discs ( D3.03).

Calibrating the EPB electric parking brake
If at Key-ON, the NPB parking brake mode identifies a fault, indicated

on the instrument panel and on the TFT display by the specific
warning lamps, and with error C155A on the NPB (EPB calibration
error) and error C1313 on the NFR (parking brake error), using the
DEIS tester, calibrate the EPB system and cancel any errors in the
fault memory as described as follows.
With the DEIS

tester, select
the "NPB
Parking
Brake" node,
select the
cycles screen,
then select
the
cycle "NPB
COMPLETE
CYCLE".
Complete all
the steps of
the cycle.
If the cycle is
concluded
successfully,
the EPB
electric
parking brake
has been
calibrated
correctly. If
the errors in
the ECU can
be cancelled,
the fault has
been rectified
successfully.
Perform the following additional procedure ONLY if the previous cycle was not completed successfully and the errors in
the ECU cannot be cancelled:
Deactivate the Park Lock electronically (CAR WASH mode) ( E5.15).

Open the luggage compartment.
Perform out the emergency procedure for releasing the EPB electric parking brake ( D3.07).
Rotate the rear CCM brake disc to align one of the two holes (A) with
the toothed ring (B) for adjusting the Bowden cable.
Insert a suitably sized screwdriver (C) through the hole in the rear disc.
Using the screwdriver, turned the toothed ring anticlockwise (D) to
tighten the parking brake shows on the inner part of the disc and
lock the disc.
The disc must not turn when forcefully attempting to rotate the disc
manually.
After locking the disc, release slightly by turning the toothed ring
clockwise (E) by four clicks.
If the calibration cycle does not complete successfully after performing
this procedure, repeat the procedure, but releasing the disc by only
three clicks.
Repeat the same lock-release procedure for the disc on the opposite rear wheel.
Turn the ignition switch to II (Key-ON).

Select the "NPB

Parking
Brake" node,
select the
cycles screen,
then select
the cycle "10
NPB
COMPLETE
CYCLE".
During this
cycle , keep
the ignition
switch
turned to II
(KEY ON)
with the
engine off,
then press
F12 "Continu
e".
If the calibration
is successful,
a green
symbol is
displayed.
Press
F2 "Abort"
(DO NOT
press
F12 "Continu
e").
Cancel the errors in the NPB and NFR ECUs.

Perform functional test of the EPB electric parking brake, operating the relative controls on the dashboard and checking that the
respective indications on the instrument panel and TFT display are shown correctly.

D3.08 Brake servo - Pump
Removing the brake servo

Remove the brake fluid tank ( D3.02).

Remove the windscreen wiper linkage ( E3.09).
Remove the driver side underdashboard trim panel ( E4.02).
Open the three fastener clips indicated.
Some brake fluid may leak when detaching

the unions from the master brake
cylinder; ensure that the oil does not
come into contact with surrounding parts.

vehicle.
Undo the two unions (1) on the master brake

cylinder.
Move the pipes as far away as possible from the
master brake cylinder, taking care not to bend
or twist them, so that they do not impede the
subsequent procedures.
Detach the vacuum pipe (2) from the brake servo
(A).
Detach the brake servo linkage from the pedal by
releasing the clips (3).
Working from under the dashboard on the driver

side, undo the four nuts indicated fastening
the brake servo to the pedal board (4).
Note that the photo aside was taken with the
dashboard removed to illustrate the
operation more clearly.
Remove the brake servo (A) from the engine

compartment complete with pump, retrieving
the two firewall gaskets (5) and the shim (6).
Refitting the brake servo

Brake fluid pipes - master brake cylinder Union 16 Nm B
Assess the condition of the firewall gaskets (5);

Place the brake servo (A), complete with pump,
in the engine compartment, install the two
firewall gaskets correctly (5), with the relative
shim (6), and fit in the relative seat on the
pedal board.
Working from under the dashboard on the driver

side, tighten the four nuts indicated fastening
the brake servo to the pedal board (4).
Note that the photo aside was taken with the
dashboard removed to illustrate the

Nut 20 Nm B
Depress the brake pedal fully to engage the pedal itself with the brake servo linkage.
Release the brake pedal and ensure that it is effectively attached to the linkage.
Fit the two unions (1) in the relative seats on the
master brake cylinder and tighten.

Union 16 Nm B
Connect the vacuum pipe (2) to the brake servo

(A).
Fasten the rigid brake fluid pipes by closing the

three fastener clips indicated.
Refit the driver side underdashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

Refit the windscreen wiper linkage ( E3.09).
Refit the brake fluid tank ( D3.02).
Refit the left hand cosmetic underwindscreen shield.
D3.09 Pedal board
Removing the pedal board

Remove the dashboard ( E4.02).
Disconnect the connector (1) from the brake

pedal stop light switch (C).
Detach the servo brake linkage from the pedal by

releasing the clips (2).
Remove the retainer clip (3), remove the pin (4)
then remove the brake pedal (B).
Remove the six fasteners indicated (four nuts
fastening the pedal board to the servo brake
and two screws fastening the pedal board to
the firewall) and remove the pedal board (A)
from the passenger compartment.
Refitting the pedal board

Pedal board - firewall Screw 20 Nm B
Fit the pedal board in the relative seat in the
passenger compartment and fasten by
tightening the six fasteners indicated (four
nuts fastening the pedal board to the servo
brake and two screws fastening the pedal
board to the firewall) in the sequence
indicated in the photo aside.

Screw 20 Nm B
Nut 20 Nm B
Fit the brake pedal (B) in the relative seat on the

pedal board and fasten by fitting the pin (4).
Fasten the pin (4) by fitting the retainer clip (3).
Depress the brake pedal fully to engage the pedal itself with the servo brake linkage.
Release the brake pedal and ensure that it is effectively attached to the linkage.
Connect the connector (1) to the brake pedal

stop light switch (C).
Adjust the brake pedal position ( D3.09).

Refit the dashboard ( E4.02).
Adjusting the brake pedal position

Fastening brake pedal endstop Nut 12 Nm B
The brake pedal (A) is pivoted on the pedal
board mounting by a pin (B), fastened at each
end by the clips (C).
The brake servo linkage is connected to the
brake pedal via a snap fit coupling within the
retainers (E).
With the brake pedal (A) in the rest position, the
switch (F) is ON; pressing the brake pedal (A)
deactivates the switch and activates the stop
lights.
Adjust the pedal travel limit as follows.

Ensure that the adjuster dowel (G) is unscrewed
so that it does not touch the stop (H) on the
pedal board mounting.
Ensure that the end stop (H) is perfectly aligned
with the adjuster dowel (G), so that
depressing the pedal brings the dowel into
contact with the centre of the stop.
Depress the brake pedal completely and hold in
this position.
Fit the stop light switch (F) in the relative seat on
the mounting and turn to fasten.
Release the pedal so that it presses against the

switch finger (F).
Tighten the adjuster dowel (G), with a spacer (M)
measuring 0.5 mm between the dowel and
the end stop.
Ensuring that the feeler gauge can move freely
without straining, tighten the checknut (N)
while preventing the adjuster dowel from
turning.

Nut 12 Nm B
D3.10 Filling and bleeding the brake system
Filling and bleeding the brake system

Bleed union - brake calliper Union 17 ÷ 20 Nm 0

Fill the tank, considering that during bleeding, the

fluid level in the tank must never drop below
the MIN level indicated on the tank.
Always use fresh fluid of the recommended
type and in the quantity indicated, taken
from sealed containers.
The circuit is filled with synthetic fluid. Using

mineral fluid may cause irreparable damage
to the rubber seals in the system.
"Electronic" brake system bleeding must be performed with the DEIS diagnostic tester, running the
specific function and following the procedure described.
Bleed one calliper at a time.

Fit a transparent plastic pipe on each calliper
bleed union (A).
Immerse the end of the pipe in a container filled
with brake fluid.
Control the pulse sequence with the tester and
depress the brake pedal to pressurise the
circuit, until all the air has been bled and the
circuit is filled.
Tighten the bleed unions (A) and fit the
protective cap.

Union 17 ÷ 20 Nm 0
Fill the tank with fluid up to the MAX level.

After the procedure, there must be no sponginess in the pedal and the braking action must be progressive,
starting immediately after a short free play.
CCM Brake Disc Wear Form
Model
All Models
- CCM Brake Disc Wear Form [Download]

D4.01 Complete suspension
Removing the entire front suspension
The following procedure is for the removal of the right hand front suspension.
The procedure for removing the left hand front suspension is the same.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse and the front flat
undertray section removed. However, removal of these components is not necessary.
For magnetorheological shock absorbers only (optional). Remove the engine compartment cosmetic
shields ( E3.13).
Remove lateral cosmetic shields.

Undo the nut (1) fastening the steering box tie-

rod (A) to the hub carrier.
FROM Assembly No. 98482, there is a recess
on the ball stud to facilitate loosening the
nut (1).
Undo the nut (2) fastening the stabiliser bar (B)

to the spherical tie-rod.
For magnetorheological shock absorbers only
(optional)
Disconnect the connector (3) from the shock

absorber.
Detach and disconnect the connector (4) for the

ABS sensor.
brake pad wear sensor.
Detach the cable grommet (6) from the relevant
mounting bracket.
Disconnect ground cable from the indicated clip.
Disconnect the ground cable by undoing the nut

(7).
Undo the brake fluid hose union (10).
Remove the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for
the brake fluid hose onto the relative
mounting bracket.
Remove the union (12) for the brake fluid hose


indicated nut.

Remove the indicated cable ties.

Detach the cable from the indicated clip.

ABS sensor.
mounting bracket.
Remove the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for
the brake fluid hose onto the relative
mounting bracket.
Remove the union (12) for the brake fluid hose
Using a delible yellow marker pen or paint, make

reference markings on the threaded rods and
relative nuts and the eyebolts of the Flanblocs
fastening the lower arm.
DO NOT use lubricants or electric/pneumatic

drivers.
Partially loosen the nuts fastening the lower arm

(C), retrieving the relative shims (8), in the
following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).
Check that the yellow reference markings are
correctly aligned: the marking on the threaded
rods and the marking on the Flanbloc
eyebolts must be aligned.
Only the nut must turn, the threaded rod must
remain in its original position.
If the markings on the threaded rods and

eyebolts are not correctly aligned after
loosening the arm fastener nuts (even if only
on one threaded rod), a ROL (Red On Line)
must be opened, attaching adequate
photographic documentation, and contact the
Ferrari Help Desk.
eyebolts are correctly aligned after loosening
the arm fastener nuts, completely undo and
remove the arm fastener nuts in the order
given for the previous operation.
Check again that the yellow reference markings

are correctly aligned: the markings on the
threaded rods and the markings on the
Flanbloc eyebolts must be aligned.
Support the weight of the suspension adequately.

drivers.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the shock

absorber (D) to the chassis.

drivers.


fastening the upper arm.
Detach the tie-rod (9) for the NRRPS motion

sensor from the upper arm (E).
Magnetorheological shock absorbers (optional)
only.

drivers.
Partially loosen the indicated nuts fastening the

upper arm (E) in the following order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
Move the shock absorber aside to facilitate the
operation.
on one threaded rod), a ROL (Red On Line)
must be opened, attaching adequate
Ferrari Help Desk.
remove the arm fastener nuts in the order
operation.

Remove the complete suspension assembly from its seat, retrieving the washers from the upper arm stud
bolts.
Refitting the entire front suspension

Nut 60 Nm A
Screw 30 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
carrier Nut 40 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting of right hand front suspension.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front suspension is the same.
Fit the washers onto the upper arm stud bolts, then fit the complete suspension in the relative seat,
supporting its weight adequately.
Clean the mating surfaces with a degreasing

product (heptane).
drivers.
ALWAYS replace the suspension arm

fastener nuts, complete with relative
washers, each time they are removed.
Replacement is NOT necessary if the nuts
are loosened only.
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the upper

arm (E) in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).
operation.

Nut 60 Nm A
Attach the tie-rod (9) for the NRRPS motion

sensor to the upper arm (E).
only.
correctly aligned: the markings on the
Remove the yellow reference markings made

during removal.
Using an indelible red marker pen or paint, make
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the shock

Tighten in a crossed pattern.

Screw 30 Nm A


Screw 110 Nm A
Fit the shims (8) in the relative seats, pushing

down completely onto the threaded rods and
ensuring that they are perfectly perpendicular
to the horizontal axis of the Flanblocs.
product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the lower

arm (C) in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A

during removal.
Connect the ground cable, tightening the

indicated nut (7).

Nut 6 Nm B
Fit the union (12) for the brake fluid hose onto
Refit the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for the
brake fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Tighten the brake fluid hose union (10).

M10 union 16 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (6) onto the relative
mounting bracket.
Slide connector (5) of brake pad wear sensor
under ABS sensor cable, connect it, and
attach it to the relative mounting bracket.
Connect connector (4) of ABS sensor, and attach
it to the relative mounting bracket.
Check that the indicated clip is positioned at 50 -
60 mm from cable grommet (6).
Connect ground cable to the indicated clip.

Fit the union (12) for the brake fluid hose onto
Refit the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for the
brake fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.

M10 union 16 Nm B
Connect and fasten the connector (4) for the

ABS sensor.
mounting bracket.

Secure the cable to the indicated clip.

Fit and tighten new cable ties as indicated.

indicated nut.

Nut 6 Nm B
Connect and fasten the connector (5) for the


(optional)
Connect the connector (3) to the shock absorber.
Tighten the nut (2) fastening the stabiliser bar (B).

Nut 50 Nm B
Connect the right steering box tie-rod (A) to the
stub axle.
Fit the relative washer and tighten the nut (1)
fastening the steering box tie rod (A) to the
stub axle.
Pretighten the nut (1).
on the ball stud to facilitate tightening the
nut (1).

Loosen the nut (1) and tighten again.

Nut 40 Nm A

For magnetorheological shock absorbers only (optional). Refit the engine compartment cosmetic
shields ( E3.13).
Check the vehicle set-up ( D4.07).
Removing the complete rear suspension
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension.
The process for removing the left hand rear suspension is identical.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse removed, although
removing this component is not necessary.
sensor from the lower arm.
wear sensor.
Disconnect the connector (3) for the ABS sensor.
mounting bracket.
Cut the cable tie (5) for retaining cables.

bracket on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).
Undo the nut (7) fastening the ground cable onto
the bracket on the EPB Bowden cable sheath
(8).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the EPB
Bowden cable sheath (8) onto the hub carrier.
Detach the eyebolt on the EPB Bowden cable from the relevant fork inside the hub carrier.
Remove and retrieve the clip (9) fastening the

union for the brake fluid hose (11) onto the
relevant mounting bracket.
Extract the brake fluid hose (11) from the

sensor from the lower arm.
wear sensor.
Disconnect the connector (3) for the ABS sensor.
mounting bracket.
Cut the cable tie (5) for retaining cables.
Remove and retrieve the clip (9) fastening the
union for the brake fluid hose (11) onto the
Extract the brake fluid hose (11) from the

(A) to the differential flange and retrieve the
three spacers (13).

absorber (B).
only.
Support the weight of the complete suspension

adequately.
absorber (B) to the chassis.

absorber (B).
only.
Support the weight of the complete suspension

adequately.

reference markings on the threaded bolts and
relative nuts and the eyebolts fastening the
toe-in tie-rod.

drivers.

toe-in tie-rod (C) to the chassis.
Undo the nut indicated fastening the stabiliser
bar (D) to the spherical tie-rod.
rods and the marking on the eyebolts must be
aligned.

loosening the toe-in tie rod fastener nuts
(even if only on one threaded rod), a ROL
(Red On Line) must be opened, attaching
adequate photographic documentation, and
contact the Ferrari Help Desk.
the toe-in tie-rod fastener nuts, completely
undo and remove the toe-in tie-rod fastener
nuts in the order given for the previous
operation.


drivers.

upper arm (E) to the chassis.
Flanbloc eyebolts are not correctly aligned
after loosening the arm fastener nuts (even if
only on one threaded rod), a ROL (Red On
Line) must be opened, attaching adequate
Ferrari Help Desk.
Flanbloc eyebolts are correctly aligned after
loosening the arm fastener nuts, completely
undo and remove the arm fastener nuts in the
order given for the previous operation.


sensor from the lower arm (F).
only.

drivers.

lower arm (F) to the chassis, retrieving the
shims (16), in the following order: (a), (b), (c),
(d).
UP TO Assembly No. 98014, fork type spacers
(16) are used.
FROM Assembly No. 98015, plate type spacers

(16) are used.


Flanbloc eyebolts are not correctly aligned
after loosening the arm fastener nuts (even if
only on one threaded rod), a ROL (Red On
Line) must be opened, attaching adequate
Ferrari Help Desk.
Flanbloc eyebolts are correctly aligned after
loosening the arm fastener nuts, completely
undo and remove the arm fastener nuts in the

Remove the complete rear suspension assembly from the vehicle, retrieving the washers from the upper
arm stud bolts.
Refitting the entire rear suspension

Nut 60 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening toe-in tie-rod to chassis Nut (pretightening) 25 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Screw 30 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension.
The process for refitting the left hand rear suspension is identical.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse removed, although
removing this component is not necessary.
Fit the washers onto the upper arm stud bolts, then fit the complete rear suspension in the relative seat,
supporting its weight adequately.
down completely onto the threaded rods and
(16) are used.

(16) are used.

product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.

arm (F) to the chassis in the following order:
(a), (b), (c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A

sensor onto the lower arm (F).
only.

during removal.

product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the upper

arm (E) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

during removal.
Tighten the nut indicated fastening the stabiliser

bar (D) to the spherical tie-rod.

Nut 50 Nm B

product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the toe-in tie-

rod (C) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

during removal.
the relevant nuts and eyebolts fastening the
lower arm.


Screw 30 Nm A
Connect the connector (14) to the shock

absorber (B).
only.


Screw 110 Nm A
Connect the connector (14) to the shock

absorber (B).
only.
Refit the three spacers (13) and tighten the six

screws (12) fastening the axle shaft (A) to the
differential flange.

Screw 78 Nm A
Insert the brake fluid hose (11) into the relevant

mounting bracket.

M12 Union 16 Nm B
Refit the clip (9) fastening the union for the brake
fluid hose (11) onto the relevant mounting
bracket.
Attach the eyebolt on the EPB Bowden cable to the relevant fork inside the hub carrier.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the EPB
Bowden cable sheath (8).

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (7) fastening the ground cable

onto the bracket on the EPB Bowden cable
sheath (8).

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (6) to the relative

bracket on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).
Fit a new cable tie (5) for retaining cables.

mounting bracket.
wear sensor.
Connect the connector (3) for the ABS sensor.
sensor onto the lower arm.
Insert the brake fluid hose (11) into the relevant

mounting bracket.

M12 Union 16 Nm B
Refit the clip (9) fastening the union for the brake
fluid hose (11) onto the relevant mounting
bracket.
Fit a new cable tie (5) for retaining cables.
mounting bracket.
wear sensor.
Connect the connector (3) for the ABS sensor.
sensor onto the lower arm.

error).
D4.02 Suspension arms
Removing the front suspension upper arm
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc and ball joint.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand front suspension upper arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand front suspension upper arm is the same.
shields ( E3.13).
For magnetorheological shock absorbers only (optional). Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).

(optional)

absorber.

absorber (A) to the chassis.


reference markings on the stud bolts and
Detach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor

(2) from the upper arm (B).
only.

drivers.

upper arm (B) in the following order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
operation.
correctly aligned: the marking on the stud
bolts and the marking on the Flanbloc
If the markings on the stud bolts and eyebolts
are not correctly aligned after loosening the
arm fastener nuts (even if only on one stud
bolt), a ROL (Red On Line) must be opened,
attaching adequate photographic
documentation, and contact the Ferrari Help
Desk.
are correctly aligned after loosening the arm
fastener nuts, completely undo and remove
the arm fastener nuts in the order given for
the previous operation.
operation.

stud bolts and the markings on the Flanbloc
Undo the nut (3) fastening the upper arm (B) to

the hub carrier, retrieving the relative washer.
Remove the upper arm (B) of the front
suspension from its relative seat, retrieving
the washers from the respective stud bolts.
Refitting the front suspension upper arm

Nut 52 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Screw 30 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand front suspension upper arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front suspension upper arm is the same.
Clean any traces of grease from the ball stud.
Fit the washers on the relative stub bolts and fit

the upper front suspension arm (B) in its
relative seat.
Apply the nut (3), after installing the relative
washer, and pretighten.

Loosen the nut (3) and then tighten.

Nut 52 Nm A
product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the nuts indicated fastening the upper

arm (B) in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).
operation.

Nut 60 Nm A
Attach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor

(2) to the upper arm (B).
only.

correctly aligned: the markings on the stud
bolts and the markings on the Flanbloc
during removal.


Screw 30 Nm A

Tighten the screws indicated fastening the shock


Screw 110 Nm A
(optional)
Connect the connector (1) to the shock absorber.

For magnetorheological shock absorbers only (optional). Connect the battery ( F2.01).
shields ( E3.13).
Refit the lateral cosmetic shields.
Removing the front suspension lower arm
The following procedure is for removing the lower front right hand suspension arm.
The procedure for removing the lower front right hand suspension arm is the same.
Support the weight of the front suspension adequately.
Undo the spherical tie-rod pin (1)

Undo the nut (2) and remove the pin (3),
retrieving the relevant washer.
Undo the nut (4) fastening the lower arm (A) to
the hub carrier, retrieving the relevant washer.

drivers.
Partially loosen the nuts fastening the lower arm

(A), retrieving the relative shims (5), in the
following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

Only the nut must turn, the stud bolt must

Desk.
Remove the lower front suspension arm from its relevant seat.
Refitting the front suspension lower arm

Nut 63 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Support the weight of the front suspension adequately.

Clean the ball joint pin and the relevant seat on the arm to remove any grease residue.
Fit the lower front suspension arm (A) in its
relevant seat.
Apply the nut (4), after fitting the relevant
washer, and pretighten.


Nut 63 Nm A
Fit the pin (3) fastening the shock absorber to the

lower arm and, after fitting the relevant
washer, tighten the nut (2).

Nut 80 Nm A
Fasten the spherical tie-rod to the lower arm (A),

tightening the pin (1).

Spherical tie-rod 50 Nm B
down completely onto the stud bolts and
product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.

arm (A) in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A


during removal.
Removing the rear suspension upper arm
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension upper arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear suspension upper arm is the same.

Holding the pin (1) still, undo the nut (2) and
retrieve the relevant washers.
Remove the pin (1) from the relevant seat.
drivers.
Partially loosen the two nuts indicated fastening

the upper arm (A) to the chassis.
If the markings on the stud bolts and Flanbloc
on one stud bolt), a ROL (Red On Line) must
be opened, attaching adequate photographic
Desk.
remove the two arm fastener nuts in the order
operation.

Remove upper arm of rear suspension from the relative seat, retrieving the two washers from the relative
stud bolts.
Refitting the rear suspension upper arm

Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension upper arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear suspension upper arm is the same.
Position the two washers onto the relative stud
bolts and the upper arm (A) of rear
suspension into the relative seat.
Fit the pin (1) in the relevant seat.
Holding the pin (1) still, fit the relevant washers
and pretighten then tighten the nut (2).

Nut 90 Nm A

drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the

upper arm (E) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

during removal.

Removing the rear suspension lower arm
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension lower arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear suspension lower arm is the same.

Support the weight of the rear suspension adequately.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (C) from the

front of the lower arm.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (D) from the
rear of the lower arm.
Holding the pin (5) fastening the shock absorber

to the lower arm still, undo the nut (6) and
retrieve the relevant washer.

sensor from the lower arm (A).
only.
Whenever the nut and/or the screw fastening

the lower rear suspension arm is or are
removed, ALWAYS REPLACE BOTH the
nut and the screw with new parts when
reassembling.
Undo the nut (2) and remove the screw (3),

retrieving the relevant washer.
Undo the tie-rod ball stud (4) on the lower arm.

drivers.
Partially loosen the four nuts indicated fastening

the lower arm (A) to the chassis, retrieving
the four shims (7), in the following order: (a),
(b), (c), (d).
(7) are used.

(7) are used.

Only the nut must turn, the stud bolt must

on one stud bolt), a ROL (Red On Line) must
be opened, attaching adequate photographic
Desk.
remove the four arm fastener nuts in the
Remove the lower rear suspension arm from its relevant seat.
Refitting the rear suspension lower arm

Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension lower arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear suspension lower arm is the same.
Support the weight of the rear suspension adequately.

Fit the rear suspension lower arm (A) in its
relevant seat.
Tighten the tie-rod ball stud (4) on the lower rear
arm.

Fit the four shims (7) in the relative seats,

pushing down completely onto the stud bolts
and ensuring that they are perfectly
perpendicular to the horizontal axis of the
flanblocs.
(7) are used.

(7) are used.

product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the

lower arm (A) to the chassis in the following
tightening order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A

during removal.

reassembling.
Align the lower arm with the link and the hub
carrier then fit the new screw (3) in the
relative holes.
Fit the relative washer and tighten the new nut
(2) fastening the screw (3).

Nut 205 Nm A

sensor onto the lower arm (A).
only.
Holding the pin (5) still, fit the relevant washer
and tighten the nut (6) fastening the shock
absorber to the lower arm.

Nut 80 Nm A
Press the rubber plug (D) by hand into its

relevant seat at the rear of the lower arm.
Press the rubber plug (C) by hand into its

relevant seat at the front of the lower arm.

D4.03 Hub carriers
Removing the front suspension stub axle
The front stub axle or hub carrier is supplied as a spare part complete with wheel bearing.
Remove the front brake calliper ( D3.05).

Remove the front one.

ABS sensor cable (1) from the mounting
bracket.
Open the clip (2) and release the rigid brake fluid
pipe.
Remove the retainer clip (3) and unscrew the
union (4) from the hose.
Undo the nut (6) fastening the earth cable (5).
Remove the front wheel ABS sensor ( D3.06).
Undo the nut (8), retrieving the washer, and

detach the steering box tie-rod (9) from the
stub axle.
nut (8).
Undo the nut (10) fastening the upper front arm
(11) to the stub axle, retrieving the relative
washer.
Detach the upper front arm (11) from the stub
axle.
Undo the nut (12) fastening the lower front arm

(13) to the stub axle, retrieving the relative
washer.
Detach the lower front arm (13) from the stub
axle.
Remove the stub axle from the suspension and place safely on the workbench.
Remove the mounting bracket (14) for the pipes

and cables, undoing the two screws (15).
Remove the brake disc shield (16), undoing the
two screws (17).
Remove the stub axle (A).
Refitting the front suspension stub axle

Fastening pipe and cable mounting bracket to Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
hub carrier
Nut 63 Nm A
Nut 52 Nm A
carrier Nut 40 Nm A
Fasten the brake disc shield (16) onto the stub

axle (A), tightening the two screws (17).

Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fasten the mounting bracket (14) for the pipes

and cables, tightening the two screws (15).

Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Clean the ball joint pin and the relative seat on
the arm (13) to remove any grease residue.
Fit the stub axle on the arms.
Apply the nut (12) fastening the lower arm (13) to
the stub axle, after installing the relative
washer, and pre-tighten.


Nut 63 Nm A
Clean the ball joint pin and the relative seat on

the arm to remove any grease residue.
Apply the nut (10) fastening the lower arm (11) to
the stub axle, after installing the relative
washer, and pre-tighten.


Nut 52 Nm A
Connect the right steering box tie-rod (9 B) to the
stub axle.
Fit the relative washer and tighten the nut (8)
fastening the steering box tie rod (9) to the
stub axle.
nut (9).

Loosen the nut (8) and tighten again.

Nut 40 Nm A
Refit the front wheel ABS sensor ( D3.06).

sensor cable (1) onto the mounting bracket.
Fasten the rigid brake fluid pipe and close the
clip (2).
Tighten the union (4) on the hose and fit the
retainer clip (3).

M10 union 16 Nm B
Tighten the nut (6) fastening the earth cable (5).

Nut 6 Nm B

Refit the front one.
Refit the front brake calliper ( D3.05).
Removing the rear suspension hub carrier
The rear hub carrier is supplied as a Spare part complete with wheel bearing.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear hub carrier.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear hub carrier is the same.

Remove the rear brake disc.
Remove the EPB electric parking brake shoes ( D3.07).

Remove the rear wheel ABS sensor ( D3.06).

reassembling.
Preventing the screw (1) fastening the lower arm

(A) to the hub carrier from turning, undo the
nut (2).
Remove the screw (1) from the relative seat and
retrieve the relative washers.
Preventing the screw (3) fastening the toe-in tie-

rod (B) to the hub carrier from turning, undo
the nut (4).
Undo the screw (9) fastening the link (F) to the
hub carrier (E).
Remove the link (F) from the hub carrier (E) and
retrieve the compensator ring (10).
Preventing the screw (5) fastening the upper arm

(C) to the hub carrier from turning, undo the
nut (6).
Undo the three screws indicated fastening the

brake disc shield (D) to the hub carrier (E).
Remove the brake disc shield (D) from the hub
carrier (E).
Use a suitable punch and mallet to remove the
caulking (7) from the ring nut (8).
Undo the ring nut (8).
Remove the hub carrier (E), detaching from the
axle shaft.
Refitting the rear suspension hub carrier

Fastening rear anti-rotation link Screw 85 Nm A
The rear hub carrier is supplied as a Spare part complete with wheel bearing.
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear hub carrier.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear hub carrier is the same.
When refitting the same hub carrier, remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH
Remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND from
the axle shaft.
Apply three even and regularly spaced circular

beads of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH

Fit the hub carrier (E), fitting the axle shaft into
the relative seat on the wheel bearing.

Nut 275 Nm A
Use a suitable punch and mallet to caulk (7) the

ring nut (8).
Fit the brake disc shield (D) on the hub carrier
(E).
Tighten the three screws indicated fastening the
brake disc shield (D) to the hub carrier (E).

Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fit the screw (5) in the relative seat after

installing the relative washer.
Fit the relative washer and, preventing the screw
(5) fastening the upper arm (C) to the hub
carrier from turning, tighten the nut (6).

Nut 80 Nm A
Fit the link (F) and the compensator ring (10) in

the relative seat on the hub carrier (E).
Apply an even layer of grease Z2 PROTECTION
to the inner surface of the compensator ring
(10) in contact with the screw head (9).
Fasten the link (F) to the hub carrier (E), fitting
and tightening the screw (9).

Screw 85 Nm A
Fit the screw (3) in the relative seat after
(3) fastening the toe-in tie-rod (B) to the hub
carrier from turning, tighten the nut (4).

Nut 80 Nm A

reassembling.
Fit the new screw (1) in the relative seat after

(1) fastening the lower arm (A) to the hub
carrier from turning, tighten the new nut (2).

Nut 205 Nm A
Refit the rear wheel ABS sensor ( D3.06).

Refit the EPB electric parking brake shoes ( D3.07).
D4.04 Shock absorbers
The vehicle may be equipped with fixed setting shock absorbers (2) or variable setting magnetorheological
shock absorbers (1) (optional), already present on the 599 GTB Fiorano.
The end of travel of the compression stroke is damped by a rubber bushing fitted coaxially with the stem; the
end of travel of the rebound stroke is damped by a rubber bushing installed inside the shock absorber.
A - Retainer washer
B - Bushing for shock absorber
C - Upper spring spacer
D - Spring mounting ring nut
E - Shock absorber
F - Spring
G - Lower spacer
Removing the front shock absorbers
The following procedure is for removing the right hand front shock absorber.
The procedure for removing the left hand front shock absorber is the same.
shields ( E3.13).
For magnetorheological shock absorbers only (optional). Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).

(optional)



Detach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor

(2) from the upper arm (B).
only.

drivers.

upper arm (B) in the following order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
operation.

Desk.
operation.

retrieve the relative washer.
Support the weight of the shock absorber (A)
and remove the pin (3) from the relative seat.
Remove upper arm (B) from the relative stud

bolts, retrieving the washers, and turn it
slightly towards the front of the vehicle.
Remove the shock absorber (A) from the relative
seat.
Refitting the front shock absorbers

Nut 60 Nm A
Screw 30 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand front shock absorber.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front shock absorber is the same.
Fit the shock absorber (A) in the relative seat.

Fit the washers and the upper arm (B) onto the
relative stud bolts, turning the arm towards
the rear of the vehicle.

and fit the pin (3) into the relevant seat.
to the lower arm still, fit the relevant washer
and tighten the nut (4).

Nut 80 Nm A
product (heptane).
drivers.

are loosened only.
Tighten the nuts indicated fastening the upper

arm (B) in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).
operation.

Nut 60 Nm A

sensor to the upper arm (B).
only.

during removal.


Screw 30 Nm A



Screw 110 Nm A
(optional)
For magnetorheological shock absorbers only (optional). Connect the battery ( F2.01).
shields ( E3.13).

Removing the rear shock absorbers
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear shock absorber.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear shock absorber is identical.

Magnetorheological shock absorbers (optional) only.

only.


only.

Detach and remove the rubber plug (C) from the

front of the lower arm.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (D) from the

rear of the lower arm.
retrieve the relevant washer.
and remove the pin (5) from the relevant seat.
Remove the rear shock absorber from the relevant seat.
Refitting the rear shock absorbers

Screw 30 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear shock absorber.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear shock absorber is identical.
Fit the rear shock absorber in the relevant seat.

Holding the pin (5) still, fit the relevant washer
and tighten the nut (6) fastening the shock
absorber to the lower arm.

Nut 80 Nm A
Press the rubber plug (D) by hand into its
relevant seat at the rear of the lower arm.
Press the rubber plug (C) by hand into its

relevant seat at the front of the lower arm.


Screw 30 Nm A

only.


Screw 110 Nm A

only.

Magnetorheological shock absorbers (optional) only.

Replacing the shock absorber elements

Fastening bushing and shock absorber retainer Nut 40 Nm A
washer
Fastening connector to shock absorber strut Nut 40 Nm A
The following procedure describes how to disassemble the front and rear shock absorbers, in order to
replace individual components if necessary.
Remove the front shock absorbers ( D4.04).

To replace a component of the front shock absorber.
Remove the rear shock absorbers ( D4.04).

To replace a component of the rear shock absorber.
Disassembling the single-damping shock absorber

Immobilise the shock absorber.
CAUTION
The following procedure for removing the nut must
be observed precisely in order to compress and
remove the spring safely.
Partially loosen the nut (1) by just enough to

decompress the spring.
Compress the spring (A) with a suitable press.
Undo the nut (1) completely, retrieving the
relative washer (2).
Slowly release the spring (A).
Remove the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
Remove the bushing (3), removing the relative
retainer snap ring.
Remove the upper spring shim (C).
Remove the spring (A).
Remove the plug (D).
Remove the lower spring shim (E).
Disassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber (optional)
Undo the nut complete with connector (1).

Immobilise the shock absorber.
CAUTION
The following procedure for removing the nut must
be observed precisely in order to compress and
remove the spring safely.
Partially loosen the nut (2) by just enough to

decompress the spring.
Undo the nut (2) completely, retrieving the
relative washer (3).
Remove the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
Remove the bushing (4).
Remove the upper spring shim (C).
Remove the spring (A).
Remove the plug (D).
Remove the lower spring shim (E).
Reassembling the single-damping shock absorber

Apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to the surface of
the lower shim (E) in contact with the spring
(A).
Fit the lower shim (E) on the shock absorber.
Fit the plug (D).
Fit the spring (A).
the upper shim (D) in contact with the spring
(A).
Fit the upper shim (C) on the shock absorber.
Fit the bushing (3), refitting the relative retainer
snap ring.
Fit the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
CAUTION
Do not release the spring until the nut is tightened
onto the shock absorber strut.
Apply thread lock AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -

MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK to the
thread of the strut and, installing the relative
washer (2), tighten the nut (1).

Nut 40 Nm A
Reassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber (optional)

the lower shim (E) in contact with the spring
(A).
Fit the lower shim (E) on the shock absorber.
Fit the plug (D).
Fit the spring (A).
the upper shim (D) in contact with the spring
(A).
Fit the upper shim (C) on the shock absorber.
Fit the bushing (4).
Fit the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
CAUTION
Do not release the spring until the nut is tightened
onto the shock absorber strut.
Apply thread lock AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -

MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK to the
thread of the strut and, installing the relative
washer (3), tighten the nut (2).

Nut 40 Nm A
Tighten the nut complete with connector (1).

Nut 40 Nm A
Adjust the shock absorber length ( D4.04).

Refit the rear shock absorbers ( D4.04).
Refit the front shock absorbers ( D4.04).
Adjusting the shock absorber length

Fastening shock absorber stop cap Ring nut 65 Nm B
Loosen the ring nut (A) using a standard pin
wrench.
Tighten or loosen the spring retainer cap (B) to
obtain the length (L).
The length (L) from the spring retainer to the
lower fulcrum axis must be adjusted in
relation to the type of spring fitted and the
type of shock absorber on which the spring
is installed. Two different spring sizes are
available with different control load
tolerances. These are identifiable by a
coloured marking stamped on a coil turn.
FROM Assembly No. 103179, consult the

Spare Parts Catalogue to identify
vehicles not affected by modification.
Length of front fixed setting shock absorbers
Yellow 292.4 mm
White 289.6 mm
Fixed setting front shock absorber length, FROM

Yellow 281.9 mm
White 279.1 mm
Length of rear fixed setting shock absorbers
Yellow 260.4 mm
White 258.6 mm
Fixed setting rear shock absorber length, FROM

Yellow 252.7 mm
White 250.9 mm
Length of front variable setting shock absorbers
Yellow 282 mm
White 279 mm
Variable setting front shock absorber length,
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the
Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles not
Yellow 288 mm
White 285 mm
Variable setting front shock absorber length,

affected by modification), for vehicles with
Special Handling pack
Yellow 292.5 mm
White 290.5 mm
Length of rear variable setting shock absorbers
Yellow 264.9 mm
White 263.1 mm
Variable setting rear shock absorber length,

Yellow 247.6 mm
White 245.8 mm
Variable setting rear shock absorber length,

affected by modification), for vehicles with
Special Handling pack
Yellow 252.6 mm
White 251 mm
Fasten the spring retainer cap and tighten the

ring nut (A).

Ring nut 65 Nm B
D4.05 Stabiliser bars - Tie-rods
Removing the front stabiliser bar

UP TO Assembly No. 103178 (consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles not affected by
modification)
Remove the steering box ( D5.04).
Loosen the nut (1) fastening the stabiliser bar (A)

to the tie-rod.

to the tie-rod.
Lift the front stabiliser bar (A), complete with
bushings (3), from its seat on the engine
subframe and remove.
Note the respective positions and orientation of the bushes and the bar, then remove the bushes from the
stabiliser bar.
modification)

to the tie-rod.

to the tie-rod.
Remove the bracket (B) from the respective
rubber bush (C).
Remove the bracket (D) retaining the bush (C).

Remove the bracket (B) from bush (C).
Remove the bracket (D) retaining the bush (C).
Remove the stabiliser bar complete with bushes.

Note the respective positions and orientation of the bushes and the bar, then remove the bushes from the
stabiliser bar.
Refitting the front stabiliser bar

Fastening the front stabiliser bar Screw 30 Nm B
modification)
Apply a uniform layer of grease DuPont
Lubricants Krytox® 205 GPL Standard
Grade Grease on the surfaces of shoulder
bushings in contact with the rubber bushes.
Apply 1 ml of grease MOLYKOTE PG21

uniformly over the entire inner surfaces of the
rubber bushes.
FROM Assembly No. 94496, apply 1 ml of
grease DuPont Lubricants Krytox® 205
GPL Standard Grade Grease uniformly over
the inner surfaces of the rubber bushes.
Pressing into place by hand, fit the rubber

bushes (3) on the stabiliser bar in the same
position and orientation noted during
disassembly.
Using a cloth moistened with heptane,
thoroughly clean and degrease the outer
surface of the rubber bush and the inner
surface of the bracket on the chassis.
Fit the stabiliser bar (A) complete with rubber
bushes as originally mounted in its seat in the
engine subframe, passing through the hole in
the casting.
Refit the steering box ( D5.04).

On the left hand front suspension, tighten the nut
(2) fastening the stabiliser bar (A) to the tie-
rod.

Nut 50 Nm B
On the right hand front suspension, tighten the

nut (3) fastening the stabiliser bar (A) to the
tie-rod.

Nut 50 Nm B
modification)

Apply 1 ml of grease DuPont Lubricants
Krytox® 205 GPL Standard Grade Grease
uniformly on the inner surfaces of the rubber
bushes.
Pressing into place by hand, fit the rubber bushes on the stabiliser bar in the same position and orientation
noted during disassembly.
Fit the stabiliser bar complete with rubber bushes.
Turning with the arrow pointing towards the

interior of the vehicle, fit the bracket (D)
retaining the bush (C).
surface of the rubber bush (C) and the inner
surface of the bracket (B).
Fit the bracket (B) on the respective bush (C).

Screw 30 Nm B
Remove any excess grease from the rubber

bush (C) and bracket (B).
Turning with the arrow pointing towards the
interior of the vehicle, fit the bracket (D)
retaining the bush (C).
surface of the rubber bush (C) and the inner
surface of the bracket (B).
Fit the bracket (B) on the respective bush (C).

Screw 30 Nm B
Remove any excess grease from the rubber

bush (C) and bracket (B).
Tighten the nut (2) fastening the stabiliser bar (A)

to the tie-rod.

Nut 50 Nm B
Tighten the nut (3) fastening the stabiliser bar (A)

to the tie-rod.

Nut 50 Nm B

Refit the front wheels.
Removing the rear stabiliser bar
Located behind the gearbox.

Remove both rear ones.

Remove both rear elements.
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger. Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger. Remove the silencer ( B7.06).
Remove both silencers.

exchanger
Remove the cross piece (1) connecting the

silencers, by undoing the screws indicated.
loosening.
Loosen the spherical clamps (2) and move the

exhaust extensions (7) as far away as
possible from the silencers (6).
Undo the nut (3) fastening the rear stabiliser bar

(A) to the tie-rod of the left hand suspension.
Repeat the procedure on the left hand
suspension.
Undo the nuts (4) fastening the bushing bracket
(5) to the rear stabiliser bar (A).
suspension.
Note the respective orientation and positions of the rubber bushes and bar.
Remove the rear stabiliser bar from the vehicle, easing it out through the gap between the exhaust
extensions and the silencers.
Note the respective orientation and positions of the rubber bushes and bar.
Remove the rear stabiliser bar from the vehicle, pulling it backwards over the single oil heat exchanger to
the rear side.
Note the respective orientation and positions of the rubber bushes and bar, then remove the rubber
bushes from the stabiliser bar.
Refitting the rear stabiliser bar

Fastening rear stabiliser bar to chassis Nut 30 Nm A
Nut 25 Nm B
Apply 1 ml of grease MOLYKOTE PG21 evenly

to the entire inner surface of the bushings in
contact with the stabiliser bar.
FROM Assembly No. 94496, spread 1 ml of
grease DuPont Lubricants Krytox® 205
GPL Standard Grade Grease evenly over
the entire inner surfaces of the bushings in
contact with the stabiliser bar.
Pressing into place by hand, fit the rubber bushes on the stabiliser bar in the same position and orientation
noted during disassembly.

surface of the rubber bushes and the inner
surface of the bush bracket (5).
Fit the rear stabiliser bar (A) in its relative seat
on the rear subframe, ensuring that the
reference dot is on the left-hand side.
Fasten the stabiliser bar by tightening the nuts
(4) fastening the bushing bracket (5) to the
rear stabiliser bar (A).
suspension.

Nut 30 Nm A
Tighten the nut (3) fastening the rear stabiliser
bar (A) to the left hand suspension tie-rod.
suspension.

Nut 50 Nm B

exchanger

loosening.
Align the two exhaust extensions (7) with the

silencers (6), fitting new spherical clamps (2).
Tighten the spherical clamps (2).

Fasten the cross member connecting the

silencers (1), tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 25 Nm B
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger. Refit the rear bumper ( E3.04).
ONLY for vehicles WITH single oil heat exchanger. Refit the silencer ( B7.06).
Refit both silencers.

Refit both rear elements.

Refit both rear ones.

Replacing front stabiliser bar tie-rods

Undo the nut (1).

Undo the pin (2).
Remove the spherical tie-rod (A) and replace it.
Fit the new spherical tie-rod (A).
Tighten the pin (2).


Nut 50 Nm B

Undo the nut (1).

Undo the pin (2).
Fit the new spherical tie-rod (A).


Nut 50 Nm B
Replacing rear stabiliser bar tie-rods

Undo the nut (1).

Undo the pin (2).
Fit the new tie-rod (A).


Nut 50 Nm B
D4.06 Shock absorber set-up adjustment system (optional)
General
The vehicle may be requested with the SCM (magnetorheological suspension control) electronically
controlled shock absorber damping system.
The semi-active (reactive/adaptive) system responds in real time to the road and driving conditions using
input signals generated by the NRRPS motion sensors which read the movements of the chassis and
wheels.
Damping at each wheel is adjusted by a magnetorheological fluid which changes in density in relation to a
magnetic field applied to the suspension.
The magnetorheological (MR) fluid is an oil containing a suspension of spherical ferromagnetic particles
measuring a few microns in diameter. Using an electric current to apply a magnetic field to the oil, the
viscosity of the oil may be varied.
This phenomenon makes it possible to create "virtual valves"; by varying the magnetic field applied to the MR
fluid flowing in a duct, its pressure and flow rate characteristics may be adjusted in real time without the
use of any external mechanical moving parts or actuators.
This makes the following possible:

Higher control frequencies and faster response times for the system;
Greater efficiency in all road conditions with superlative body control, keeping the vehicle glued to the
road in all conditions;
Improved comfort with less disturbance, variations and shocks transmitted from the road.
System layout
The system consists of:

4 NRRPS (Non-Contacting Ratiometer Rotational Position Sensor) sensors installed on the suspension of
each wheel, in which the fixed part of the potentiometer is mounted on the chassis (sprung mass) while
the rotating part of the potentiometer moves together with the suspension. The sensors transmit a
linear signal to the NCS ECU proportional to the angle of movement;
NCS ECU, installed under the hatch cover in the passenger side footrest mat which, in relation to the
signals received from the four NRRPS sensors, the data provided by the ECUs connected to the NCS
and the Manettino setting, controls the damping function of the shock absorbers;
4 magnetorheological shock absorbers, with one for each wheel suspension, controlled by the NCS
ECU in relation to the signals received by the latter.
Replacing the front NRRPS motion sensors

chassis
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand front motion sensor.
The procedure for replacing the left hand front motion sensor is identical.

Remove the right hand front wheel.

Detach the tie-rod (2) from the upper arm.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the
mounting bracket for the right hand front
motion sensor (A).
Remove the right hand front NRRPS motion
sensor (A), complete with relative mounting
bracket, and replace.
Fit the new right hand front NRRPS motion
sensor (A) in its seat, complete with relative
mounting bracket.
Tighten the two screws indicated fastening the
mounting bracket for the right hand front
NRRPS motion sensor (A).

Screw 5 Nm B

Replacing the rear NRRPS motion sensors

chassis
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand rear NRRPS motion sensor.
The procedure for replacing the left hand rear NRRPS motion sensor is identical.
Remove the right hand rear wheel.

Detach the tie-rod (2) from the lower arm.
mounting bracket for the right hand rear
Remove the right hand rear NRRPS motion
sensor (A), complete with relative mounting
bracket, and replace.
Fit the new right hand rear NRRPS motion
sensor (A) in its seat, complete with relative
mounting bracket.
mounting bracket for the right hand rear

Screw 5 Nm B

D4.07 Vehicle set-up
Checking vehicle set-up
Check tightness of wheel fasteners.

Check that the tyre pressure is correct.
Check that the steering box functions correctly.
Check that the suspension components function correctly.
Place the vehicle on a wheel alignment lift, filled with all fluids as necessary and with the electric
parking brake engaged.
For this procedure, the fuel tank must be full and all fluids must be filled to the correct levels.
Check that the vehicle setup parameters comply with the specifications given in the "Vehicle Setup
Parameter Check Form".
The vehicle parameters specified in the "Vehicle Setup Parameter Check Form" are given in chapter
A3.22.
If the vehicle setup parameters measures for the vehicle do not comply with the specifications of
the "Vehicle Setup Parameter Check Form", adjust the vehicle setup accordingly.
Adjusting the vehicle suspension/wheel alignment
The vehicle parameters specified for each version in the "Vehicle Setup Parameter Check Form" are given in
chapter A3.22.
Height check
With the vehicle arranged as specified above, the correct height of the vehicle measured between the ground
and the front section of the chassis, measured in relation to the point (A) (internal surface of the hole),
must correspond to the specified set-up values.
With the vehicle arranged as specified above, the correct height of the vehicle measured between the ground
and the rear section of the chassis, measured in relation to the point (B) (internal surface of the hole),
must correspond to the specified set-up values.
Front suspension
- Wheel camber -
Check that the lower suspension arms are in the correct position.
After checking, if the camber angle is not within the prescribed values, loosen the nuts (1) and fit new
shims (2) to obtain a camber angle between the prescribed values, proceeding as described in
chapter D4.02.
- Toe-in -
After checking, if the toe-in is not within the prescribed values, proceed as follows:
ensure that the steering box is in the straight ahead position and that the steering wheel is perfectly
horizontal. To assess this condition, use a mounting fitted with a spirit level. In this position, the two
lateral tie-rods must be equal in length. If they are not equal, adjust them;
loosen the nuts (3) and turn the lateral tie-rods (4), adjusting both tie-rods by the same amount, to obtain a
toe-in value within the prescribed values;
tighten the nuts (3) to a torque of 60 Nm, class A.
Rear suspension
- Wheel camber -
Check that the lower suspension arms are in the correct position.
After checking, if the camber angle is not within the prescribed values, loosen the nuts (5) and fit new
spacers (6) to obtain a camber angle within the prescribed values, proceeding as described in
chapter D4.02.
UP TO Assembly No. 98014, fork type spacers (7) are used.
FROM Assembly No. 98015, plate type spacers (7) are used.
- Toe-in -
After checking, if the toe-in is not within the prescribed values, proceed as follows:
loosen the nuts (7) and turn the tie-rods (8), adjusting both tie-rods by the same amount, to obtain a toe-in
value within the prescribed values;
tighten the nuts (7) to a torque of 60 Nm, class A.
D5.01 System layout
Steering system layout
A - Power steering fluid tank

B - Power steering fluid pump
C - Steering box
D - Power steering fluid radiator
E - Steering column
F - Steering wheel
D5.02 Power steering tank
Removing the power steering tank
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also damage the
vehicle bodywork.
environment.
For vehicles UP TO Assembly No. 98001, in the event of replacing the power steering fluid reservoir and the
pipe leading from the power steering fluid reservoir to the power steering pump, the components of
RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279663 must be installed.
The power steering fluid specified FROM Assembly No. 98002 must be used following installation of the
components of the RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279663.

Empty the tank, aspirating and collecting the fluid with a suitable syringe.
UP TO Assembly No. 85542 and FROM

Assembly No.97978, disconnect the breather
pipe (1) from the cap.
FROM Assembly No. 85543 TO Assembly
No.97977, connect the breather pipe (1) to
the cap.
Undo the fastener nuts indicated and lift the

power steering tank (A).
Disconnect the two pipes (2) from the power
steering fluid reservoir (A) and remove the
relative collars.
Remove the power steering tank (A).
Refitting the power steering tank

Fastening power steering radiator pipe - power Screw collar 4 Nm B
steering tank
Fastening power steering fluid tank - bracket Nut 24 Nm B
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also damage the
vehicle bodywork.
For vehicles UP TO Assembly No. 98001, in the event of replacing the power steering fluid reservoir and the
pipe leading from the power steering fluid reservoir to the power steering pump, the components of
RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279663 must be installed.
The power steering fluid specified FROM Assembly No. 98002 must be used following installation of the
components of the RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279663.
Connect the two pipes (2) to the power steering

fluid reservoir (A) and fasten by fitting and
tightening new collars.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fit the power steering tank (A) onto its mounting

bracket.
Tighten the nuts fastening the power steering
tank (A).

Nut 24 Nm B
UP TO Assembly No. 85542 and FROM

Assembly No.97978, connect the breather
pipe (1) to the cap.
FROM Assembly No. 85543 TO Assembly
No.97977, connect the breather pipe (1) to
the cap.

D5.03 Power steering pump
Removing the power steering pump
The majority of cases of NOISY power steering pump operation are caused by contaminated fluid in
the system; therefore, attempt to rectify the failure before replacing the power steering pump,
replacing the power steering fluid tank ALWAYS. Fit the new tank correctly, ensuring that the tank
cap and breather are exactly as specified in the respective vehicle layout to prevent infiltration,
which will contaminate the power steering fluid. Then fill the power steering system with fluid and
bleed and perform another pump function test. Only replace the power steering pump if the
problem persists. (Ref: Technical Information No. 1695 _ December 2008)
Located on the left-hand side of the engine, above the compressor.

Remove the AC compressor, leaving it attached to the system and without disconnecting the pipe
unions.
Disconnect the steering column (23) from the

steering box (22), by undoing the screw (24)
fastening the universal joint (25).
Move the steering column (23) out of the way,
so that it does not hinder the following
operations.
UP TO ENGINE Serial Nr. 149486
Completely remove the screw (1), loosened

during the previous A.C. compressor removal
procedure, fastening the heat shield (3) to the
mounting (2).
FROM ENGINE Serial Nr. 149487
The power steering pump heat shield has been

replaced by a heat resistant covering wound
directly around the pump itself and fastened
with clips.

Working from above, undo the screw (4)

fastening the mounting bracket for the rigid
pipe leading from power steering pump to the
steering box.
Undo the screws (5) fastening the power steering

pump (A) to the engine.
Remove the power steering pump (A) from the
engine to afford access to the pipes fastened
to the pump itself.
Mark the position of the pipe.
After marking the position of the pipe to facilitate
correct refitting, undo the pipe union (7) and
detach the pipe (8), retrieving the relative
seals.
Loosen the clamp (9) and remove the pipe (10).
Remove the power steering pump (A) from the
engine compartment.
Refitting the power steering pump

Fastening pipe - power steering pump Screw collar 4 Nm B
box
Fastening front mounting - crankcase and Screw 25 Nm B
cylinder head
Fastening rear mounting - engine crankcase Screw 25 Nm B
Compressor - crankcase and lower crankcase Screw 25 Nm B
shell
shaft
Fastening mounting bracket for rigid pipe leading Screw 4 Nm B
from pump to steering box - engine
IMPORTANT follow the sequence given for assembling the power steering pump assembly and AC
compressor and for tightening the relevant fastener screws precisely.
Connect the pipe (10) onto the relative union on
the power steering pump assembly (A) and
fasten by tightening the clamp (9).

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fit the pipe (8), positioning correctly using the

markings made during removal as reference,
replace the seals and tighten the pipe union
(7).

Threaded union 35 Nm B
Fit the power steering pump assembly (A), with

the relative mountings, in its seat on the
engine.
Fit the screws (11), (12) and (13) fastening the
power steering pump assembly (A), and
screw down until flush but without tightening.
Fit the A.C. compressor (B) into the relative seat

on the engine and, after fitting the arch
bracket (17), fit the screws (14), (15) and (16)
and screw down until flush but without
tightening.
Fit the arch bracket (17) underneath the power
steering pump heat shield mounting bracket.

Fasten the power steering pump assembly (A),
by tightening the screws in the following
sequence: (11) - (12).

Screw 25 Nm B
Fasten the power steering pump assembly (A),

by tightening the rear screw (13).

Screw 25 Nm B
Fasten the A.C. compressor (B), by tightening

the screws in the following sequence: (14) -
(15) - (16).

Screw 25 Nm B
Apply and tighten the screw (1) by tightening the

power steering pump heat shield (3) to the
engine.

Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the screw (19) fastening the arch bracket

to the heat shield.

Screw 10 Nm B
FROM ENGINE Serial Nr. 149487
The power steering pump heat shield has been

replaced by a heat resistant covering wound
directly around the pump itself and fastened
with clips.
Connect the steering column (23) to the steering
box (22), by tightening the screw (24)
fastening the universal joint (25).

Fit the mounting bracket for the rigid pipe leading

from the power steering pump to the steering
box and fasten by tightening the screw (4).

Screw 4 Nm B
Fit the rigid pipe on the power steering pump

onto the relative mounting bracket.
Refit the front stabiliser bar ( D4.05).
D5.04 Steering box
Removing the steering box


If applicable, remove the brake air deflector (F)

from the steering box tie-rod (G), detaching
the fastener clip (5).
vehicle.
Loosen the nut (1) fastening the tie-rod (B).

vehicle.

nut (1).
Disconnect the tie-rod (B) from the stub axle (C).

vehicle.
Loosen the screw (3) fastening the joint (E).
Disconnect the steering column (D) from the
steering box (A).
Unscrew the pipe union (5).

Disconnect the pipe (6), retrieving the relative
seals.
Undo the indicated nuts fastening the steering

box (A) to the chassis.




Remove the steering box, easing out through the opening in the casting for the front suspension mounting
on the left side.
Refitting the steering box

Fastening steering box to chassis Screw (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Screw 60 Nm A
shaft
Fastening union connecting steering box - power Pipe union 35 Nm B
steering fluid radiator
carrier Nut 40 Nm A
Fit the steering box, inserting it through the opening in the casting for the front suspension mounting on the
left side.
Fit the plate (4).

Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the steering


Fit the plate (4).


Pre-tighten then definitively tighten the nuts fastening the steering box in an X pattern.

Screw 60 Nm A
Connect the steering column (D) to the steering

box (A), by tightening the screw (3) fastening
the universal joint (E).

After replacing the seals, fit the pipe (6) leading
from the radiator to the steering box in its
relative seat and tighten the pipe union (5).

Pipe union 35 Nm B
Connect the tie-rod (B) to the stub axle (C).

vehicle.

nut (1).

Loosen the nut (1) then tighten again.

vehicle.

Nut 40 Nm A
If applicable, fit the right hand brake air deflector
(F) onto the steering box tie-rod (G), fastening
the fastener clip (5).
vehicle.

Refit the front ones.

D5.05 Oil radiator
Removing the power steering fluid radiator
Fit onto the radiator assembly, behind the front bumper.

Remove the rigid power steering fluid pipes (2)

from the retainer clip (1).
Undo the nuts (3) fastening the rigid pipes to the

power steering fluid radiator (A).
components.
Detach the rigid pipes (2) from the power

steering fluid radiator, moving as far up as
necessary.
Undo the screws (4) and remove the power
steering fluid radiator (A) through the air duct
opening.
Refitting the power steering fluid radiator

Fastening power steering radiator to brackets Screw 9 Nm B
radiator
When refitting the same power steering fluid radiator, clean the radiator core thoroughly with compressed
air before reinstalling.
Replace the seals on the rigid pipes (2) before

connecting to the radiator.
Fit the power steering fluid radiator (A) on the
relative mounting brackets and fasten by

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the rigid pipes (2) to the power steering

fluid radiator (A) and fasten by tightening the
nuts (3).

Nut 9 Nm B
Fasten the rigid pipes (2) onto the relative

retainer clip (1) as originally mounted.

D5.06 Steering column
Removing the steering column
Take particular care not to damage the structure, the plastic fasteners and the leather trim

Remove the steering wheel ( E5.09).
Remove the steering column switch ( E5.10).
Remove the binnacle ( E4.02).
Replace the ignition switch ( E5.08).
Perform removal ONLY if the steering column is being replaced.
Separate the steering column (A) from the

steering box (B), by undoing the screw (1)
fastening the universal joint (C).
Undo the two upper screws fastening the

steering column (A) to the dashboard.
Note that it is not necessary to remove the
lower left dashboard trim panel as shown in
the photo.
On the left side, undo the two lower fastener
screws on the steering column (A).
On the right side, undo the two lower fastener

Disconnect the connectors (2) and (3).

Remove the two clips (6) fastening the foam

rubber.
From the passenger compartment, ease out the
steering column (A) in order to remove the
foam rubber (6).
Undo the two screws (7) fastening the gaiter.
From the passenger compartment, remove the
steering column (A) from the vehicle.
Refitting the steering column

Steering column gaiter - firewall Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening lower steering column - dashboard Screw 25 Nm B
cross member
Fastening front steering column - dashboard Screw 8 Nm B
cross member
shaft
From the passenger compartment, fit the

steering column (A) in order to fit the gaiter
(7).
Tighten the two nuts fastening the gaiter (7).

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the foam rubber (6).
Fit the two clips (6) fastening the foam rubber.
From the passenger compartment, fit the
steering column (A) in its seat by moving it
forwards.

Connect the connectors (2) and (3).
On the right side, tighten the two lower screws

fastening the steering column (A).

Screw 25 Nm B
On the left side, tighten the two lower fastener


Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the two upper screws fastening the
steering column (A) to the dashboard.
Note that it is not necessary to remove the
lower left dashboard trim panel as shown in
the photo.

Screw 8 Nm B
Connect the steering column (A) to the steering

box (B), by tightening the screw (1) fastening
the universal joint (C).


Replace the ignition switch ( E5.08).
Perform refitting ONLY if the steering column has been replaced.
Refit the binnacle ( E4.02).

Refit the steering column switch ( E5.10).
Refit the steering wheel ( E5.09).
D5.07 Emptying and filling the system
Draining the power steering system
Undo the nuts (2), removing the power steering

system pipe mounting brackets (3) from the
steering box, moving the pipes out of the way
so that they do not hinder the subsequent
operations.
Working from under the vehicle, undo the

hexagonal union (1) on the steering box.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a

container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of
used oil in the environment.
Open the power steering tank cap and drain the

fluid completely.
Filling the power steering system

box
FROM Assembly No. 98002, a different power steering fluid is prescribed.

The power steering fluid specified FROM Assembly No. 98002 must be used following installation of
the components of the RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279663.
Before topping up or filling the power steering system, always check which type of fluid should be
used, as mixing the two different types of power steering fluid will damage the power steering
system itself.
The power steering system is self-bleeding.
Replace the relative seals and tighten the union

(1).

Threaded union 35 Nm B
Remove the power steering tank ( D5.02).

Clean the interior of the power steering fluid reservoir thoroughly using a small quantity of new power
steering fluid of the specified type.
Allow the power steering fluid used to clean the power steering fluid reservoir to drain completely into a
suitable container.
Use a suitable syringe to aspirate any residue of the power steering fluid used for cleaning from the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Connect a suitable additional pipe to the power
steering fluid reservoir return pipe.
Place the other end of the pipe into a container
for collecting the power steering fluid.
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system
is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also
damage the vehicle bodywork.
Adequately protect the areas surrounding the

power steering tank pipes.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the
steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Steer fully to the left and right a few times until

power steering fluid starts to flow from the
tank return pipe.
Connect a suitable funnel to the power steering
fluid reservoir delivery pipe.
Place an 80 micron mesh filter in the funnel.
Pour new power steering fluid into the funnel
while simultaneously steering to the left and
right a few times until at least 3 litres of
power steering fluid has been collected from
the power steering fluid reservoir return pipe.
Do not let the funnel empty during this
procedure.
Disconnect and remove the funnel from the

power steering fluid reservoir delivery pipe.
Disconnect and remove the additional pipe from
the power steering fluid reservoir return pipe.
Refit the power steering tank ( D5.02).
Undo the cap (A).

DO NOT apply any more turning force to the
steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Fill the power steering fluid reservoir to the MAX

limit on the cap dipstick (A) while
simultaneously steering fully to the right and
left repeatedly until the power steering fluid
level stabilises and the fluid contains no
bubbles.
Start and stop the engine twice repeatedly.

Check that the fluid level is stable and that the
fluid is not emulsified with air.
If the power steering fluid level drops, top the
power steering fluid reservoir up to the MAX
limit on the cap dipstick (A) while
simultaneously steering fully to the right and
left repeatedly until the power steering fluid
level stabilises and the fluid contains no
bubbles.
Lift the vehicle with a vehicle lift so that the wheels are not in contact with the ground.
Start the engine and run at idle speed for 1 minute.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Check the power steering system fluid level ( A3.06).

Simultaneously, steer fully 10 times.
Lower the vehicle to bring the wheels into contact with the ground.
Wait for the engine coolant temperature to reach 90°C.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the steering wheel once full lock is reached.

Simultaneously, steer fully 10 times.
Repeat this procedure another three times.

E1.01 Tightening torques

Fastening internal engine compartment cross Screw 34 Nm B
brace - chassis
Fastening rear removable subframe to extruded Screw 65 Nm A
rear diagonal joint
transmission tunnel casting (on bush)
Fastening rear removable casting - rear Screw 60 Nm B
suspension arm mounting casting (rear)
Fastening rear removable casting - rear Screw 60 Nm B
suspension arm mounting casting (internal)
member head casting
member
Fastening lower fastener between power window Nut 9.5 Nm B
unit guides - door
Fastening door window Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening tool kit in luggage compartment Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening tool kit in luggage compartment Screw 8 Nm A
Fastening aerodynamic flap Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening aerodynamic flap Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening badge and Cavallino Rampante on Nut 2.5 Nm C
bumper
Fastening badge and Cavallino Rampante on Nut 2.5 Nm C
bumper
Fastening striker plate - engine compartment lid Screw 13 Nm B
Screw 60 Nm B
Fastening hinges - luggage compartment lid Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening hinges - Tonneau Cover Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening lower and upper air intakes - engine Screw 4 Nm B
compartment lid
Fastening windscreen washer/headlight washer Screw / Nut 7.5 Nm B
fluid tank
Fastening flat undertray Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening glove compartment Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening steering column trim panel Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening underwindscreen cosmetic shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Fastening wheelhouse Screw 2.5 Nm C
Fastening front seats - bodyshell Screw 42 Nm B
Fastening passenger side footrest Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening lateral fastener for rear bumper Screw 7 Nm B
Fastening rear bumper Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening lateral mounting brackets for rear Nut 4.5 Nm B
bumper
Fastening front bumper Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening ECU mounting bracket Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening DCT ECU mounting bracket Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening upper lateral trim panel Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening lower lateral trim panel Screw 2 Nm C
Fastening centre trim panel Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening rear seat backrests Screw 12 Nm B
Fastening tool kit Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening tool kit Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening sill protector trim panel Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening upper centre rollbar mounting Screw 4 Nm C
Fastening windscreen cross member trim panel Screw 2 Nm B
Fastening retractable hard top striker plate fixing Screw 2 Nm B
plates
Fastening sun visors Screw 3 Nm B
Fastening door panel Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening door - hinges Screw 18 Nm B
Fastening door tie-rod Screw 30 Nm B
Fastening dashboard/centre console connector Screw 8.5 Nm B
bracket
Fastening luggage compartment lid lock Screw 20 Nm A
Fastening luggage compartment lid striker plate Screw 20 Nm B
Quarterlight preload adjustment Nut 9 Nm B
Quarterlight/door window alignment adjustment Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening quarterlight assembly - bodyshell / Screw 9.5 Nm B
adjusting distance between quarterlight and
door window
Fastening emergency luggage compartment lid Screw 2 Nm C
release mechanism
Fastening engine compartment lid lock Nut 9 Nm B
Quarterlight rotation adjustment Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fastening front seat belt guide bracket Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening the dashboard trim panels Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fastening the upper dashboard trim panel Screw 6 Nm B
Fastening passenger side airbag mounting Screw 8.5 Nm B
bracket - dashboard subframe
Fastening lower central dashboard trim panel Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening lateral fastener between dashboard Screw 40 Nm B
and lateral mounting brackets Screw (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Fastening upper fastener between dashboard Screw 8.5 Nm B
and bodyshell
Fastening lower dashboard mounting brackets - Screw 8.5 Nm B
dashboard subframe
Fastening lower dashboard mounting brackets - Nut 8.5 Nm B
centre console
bodyshell
Fastening dashboard - centre console link bracket Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening impact beam Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening front lid lock mounting cross member - Screw 24 Nm B
chassis
Fastening rear seats - bodyshell Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 7 Nm B
Fastening quarterlight window scraper seal Screw 2.5 Nm C
Fastening power window unit motor - door Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fastening upper fastener between power window Screw 9.5 Nm B
unit guides - door
Fastening external window scraper seal - door Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening door latch Nut 5.5 Nm B
Fastening internal body of external door handle Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening external body of external door handle Screw 3.5 Nm B
Fastening door lock Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening door striker plate Screw (pretightening) 18.4 Nm B
Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening windscreen seal Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening rear bench - bodyshell Screw 5 Nm B
subframe
Fastening quarterlight glass - lift mechanism Screw 6.5 Nm B
Fastening accelerator pedal guard Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening the fuel filler neck recess Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening AC unit to centre insulation Nut 10 Nm B
Fastening rear removable subframe (FROM Screw (pretightening) 20 Nm B
Assembly No. 103179, see Spare Parts Screw 60 Nm B
Catalogue)
Screw 110 Nm B
Fastening engine cooling system hose unions Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fastening the rear seats Nut 7 Nm B
Front Roof shell - roof kinematics M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
Rear Roof shell - roof kinematics M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
Filler cap - oil tank Plug 2 Nm B
Hydraulic pump - left hand Tonneau Cover M6x22 screws 9 Nm B
kinematics
Roof ECU - mounting bracket M10x20 screws 5 Nm B
Tonneau Cover - Tonneau Cover kinematics M8x50 screw 24 Nm A
Front Roof shell striker plates - windscreen cross M8x25 screw 20 Nm B
member
Rear fastener between Tonneau Cover M8x50 screw 20 Nm A
kinematics and bodyshell
Front fastener between Tonneau Cover M10x75 screw 43 Nm B
Tonneau Cover - Tonneau Cover kinematics M8x25 screw 24 Nm B
Fastening striker plates on luggage compartment M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
lid
Motorised luggage compartment lid striker plate - M8x20 screw 20 Nm B
bodyshell
Luggage compartment lid lock - luggage M8x20 screw 20 Nm B
compartment lid
Rear storage lock receivers M6x20 screw 9 Nm B
Roof kinematics assembly - bodyshell M10x65 screw 43 Nm B
Roof kinematics assembly - bodyshell M10x75 screw 43 Nm B
Headliner - Front Roof shell M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
Fastening flap kinematics to passenger Screw 2.6 Nm B
compartment upper lateral trim panels
Hydraulic pipe clamp forks - pump Screw 7 Nm A
Complete RHT assembly - bodyshell Pretightening torque, 10 Nm 0
M10x75 screw
M10x75 screw 43 Nm A
Tonneau Cover receivers - mounting bracket M6x16 Screw 9 Nm A
Rear Roof shell striker plates - Tonneau Cover M6x25 Screw 8 Nm B
Front storage lock receivers Screw 9 Nm B
Plate - Rear Roof shell skid Nut 8 Nm B
Eccentric nut - Rear Roof shell skid Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening the front roof shell kinematics latching Screw 4 Nm B
system
Fastening deflectors Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening cabin light Screw 4 Nm C
Fastening external rear view mirror - door Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening fuel filler flap actuator Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fastening woofer loudspeakers Screw 4 Nm C
Fastening rear twiddler loudspeakers Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening instrument panel - binnacle Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fastening centre console control panel - centre Screw 5 Nm B
console trim panel
Fastening engine compartment lid release handle Screw 2.6 Nm C
Fastening rear seat belt guide Screw 4 Nm C
Fastening radio antenna amplifier Screw 7 Nm C
Fastening radio antenna amplifier Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening the backrest lock Screw 12 Nm B
E1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Hook 95977567 (AS 107567)

installing the RHT.
Bar 95977568 (AS 107568)

support for RHT kinematics L=1100.
Tool 95977569 (AS 107569)

support for hydraulic pump.
Bar 95977570 (AS 107570)
support for RHT kinematics L=806.
Trolley 95977571 (AS 107571)

support for complete RHT.

Riveter Battery Tool 95978173 (AV 8173)
(see repair manual for aluminium bodyshell).
Rod 95978178 (AV 8178)

for RHT kinematics.
Separator tool 95978179 (AV 8179)

adjusting the Rear Roof shell striker plates
Template 95978180 (AV 8180)
locating Rear Roof shell striker plates
Feeler gauge 95978181 (AV 8181)

checking Rear Roof shell striker plates
Template 95978182 (AV 8182)

checking Rear Roof shell striker plates
Safety retainers 95978183 (AV 8183)
vehicle anti-tipping retention.
Fastening brackets for safety retainers 95978184

(AV 8184)
raised vehicle anti-tipping retention for runway
type car lifts.
Pins 95978350 (AV 8350)

aligning engine mounting bushes with front
removable subframe.
Template kit (A7082600 - A7082600/TIN - A456)

(see repair manual for aluminium bodyshell).
E2.01 General
Features of the chassis
For the first time in a Ferrari, a "Space-frame" architecture has been adopted for the aluminium chassis,
meaning less weight, for improved performance and safety, and greater torsional stiffness, for superior
dynamic qualities.
Using a modular chassis also introduces the following advantages:
greater service efficiency and shorter service times;
easier maintenance from a Client perspective;
reduced replacement times for damaged parts;
reduced running costs.
Chassis component overview
A - Complete front subchassis

B - Front removable subframe
C - Internal engine compartment cross brace (boomerang)
D - Rear removable subframe
modification)
Chassis component overview
A - Complete front subchassis

B - Front removable subframe
C - Internal engine compartment cross brace (boomerang)
D - Rear removable subframe
E2.02 Front removable subframe
Removing the front removable subframe

When installing the strap for lifting the

engine, take care not to crush or bend
any of the cables and pipes of the
different systems.
Harness the engine with a suitable safety strap

(1), passing the strap between the engine
struts and the exhaust manifold - catalytic
connector connection.
Fit the ends of the safety strap (1) on the intake
manifold, taking care not to crush any cables
or pipes.
Place the commercially available lift bar (OMCN

art. 275 A) on the engine compartment
subframe, orienting the bracket (2) correctly.
Adjust the height of the bracket (2) so that the lift
bar (OMCN art. 275 A) is above the intake
manifold.
Use a shim (3) to compensate for any
differences in level under the bracket (2).
Lock the ends and extensible parts with the
handles (4).
Repeat the aforementioned procedure on the

opposite end of the tool.
Protect the windscreen area adequately with a
cover (5).
Connect the ends of the safety strap (1) to the
hook on the lift bar (OMCN art. 275 A).
When tautening the strap, take care not to
bend or crush any cables or pipes.
Turn the handle (6) connected to the lifting hook

and tauten the safety strap (1).

(AS 107566) in contact with the engine oil
sump.
modification)
Undo the screw (18).


Remove the reinforcement tube (20) from the
front removable subframe (A).
Support the weight of the front removable subframe adequately.

Undo the nut (10).
Undo the screws (11) fastening the engine
bushes to the front removable subframe (A).

After loosening the final screws fastening the
front removable subframe, ensure that
the engine does not move and is held
securely in place by the safety strap and
the hydraulic jack.

Turn the bracket (19) to separate it from the hook

(20) on the transmission housing bushing.
Remove the front removable subframe.

UP TO Assembly No. 95408, retrieve the engine bush plates from the front removable subframe.
modification)

Support the weight of the front removable subframe adequately.
Remove the front removable subframe.

Retrieve the engine bush spacers from the front removable subframe.
Refitting the front removable subframe

member head casting
member
removable subframe
subframe
Screw 60 Nm B
Tighten the pins (AV 8350) into the M10

threaded holes on the engine mounting
bushes.
modification)
UP TO Assembly No. 95408, fit the engine bush plates in the respective seats on the front removable
subframe.
Fit the front removable subframe, supporting its weight adequately.
Fit the bracket (19) on the hook (20) on the

transmission housing bushing.
Tighten some of the screws indicated.
Undo the alignment pins (AV 8350).


Screw 40 Nm B

Screw 110 Nm A

Screw 110 Nm A

Screw 34 Nm B

Screw 110 Nm A

Screw 110 Nm A

Screw 50 Nm B

Nut 103 Nm B

Screw 110 Nm A
Fit the reinforcement tube (20) on the front

Fit and tighten the indicated screws.

Screw 24 Nm B
Hand tighten the screw (18).
modification)
Fit the engine mounting bush spacers in the respective seats on the front removable subframe.
Fit the front removable subframe, supporting its weight adequately.
Tighten some of the screws indicated.

Undo the alignment pins (AV 8350).

Pre-tighten the indicated screws.

Tighten the indicated screws in the sequence

given.

Screw 60 Nm B

Nut 103 Nm B

Tighten the respective screws indicated.

Screw 25 Nm B

Screw 50 Nm B
After tightening all the fasteners of the front

removable subframe, remove the hydraulic
jack complete with tool (AS 107566).
Turn the handle (6) connected to the cross
member lifting hook (OMCN art. 275 A)
counterclockwise, and slacken the safety
strap (1).
Detach the ends of the safety strap (1) from the
hook on the lift bar.
Remove the lift bar (OMCN art. 275 A).
Remove the safety strap (1).
Remove the cover (5).

E2.03 Rear removable subframe
Removing the rear removable subframe

Remove the complete rear suspension ( D4.01).
Remove both.
Remove the exhaust extensions ( B7.05).
Remove the rear removable subframe from the lift trolley (AS 107565).
Refitting the rear removable subframe
Place the rear removable subframe on the lift trolley (AS 107565), supporting the weight of the subframe
as during removal.
Refit the exhaust extensions ( B7.05).

Refit the entire rear suspension ( D4.01).
Refit both.

E2.04 Internal engine compartment cross brace
Removing the internal engine compartment cross brace

Remove the lateral underwindscreen cosmetic shields.

Open the clips (1) and detach the pipes from the
relative supports.
Open the clips (2) and detach the pipes from the
relative supports.
Undo the screws (3) fastening the diagonal brace
(A).

(A).

(A).
Detach the indicated clip fastening the pipe (6).
Protect the windscreen.

Remove the diagonal brace (A), taking care not
to bend or damage the rigid brake fluid pipes.
Refitting the internal engine compartment cross brace

Fastening internal engine compartment cross Screw 34 Nm B
brace - chassis
Fit the diagonal brace (A) in the relative seat,
taking care not to bend or damage the rigid
fluid pipes.
Connect the indicated clip fastening the pipe (6).
Fasten the diagonal brace (A), tightening the

screws (5).

Screw 34 Nm B
Loosen the screws (5) by half a turn and tighten

again.

Screw 34 Nm B
Tighten the screws (4) fastening the diagonal
brace (A).

Screw 34 Nm B

again.

Screw 34 Nm B
Tighten the screws (3) fastening the diagonal

brace (A).

Screw 34 Nm B

again.

Screw 34 Nm B
Fasten the brake fluid pipes in the relative

supports and close the clips (2).
Fasten the brake fluid pipes in the relative

supports and close the clips (1).

E3.01 Engine compartment lid
Removing the engine compartment lid
If the engine compartment lid is to be reused,

mark the positions of the hinges on the lid
itself to facilitate adjustment upon reassembly.
Detach the windscreen washer pipe (1) from the
engine compartment lid (A), releasing the two
retainer clips (2).
Prise out the pipe grommet (3), pull the
windscreen washer pipe (1) out from the
engine compartment lid up to the joint, then
detach it from the joint.
Ensure that the weight of the engine
compartment lid is fully sustained, then undo
the screws (4) fastening the lid to the hinges
(5) on both sides.
Remove the complete engine compartment lid
(A) and set down in a safe place.
Check for shims between the engine
compartment lid and the hinges: retrieve
any shims and keep for subsequent
reassembly.
Refitting the engine compartment lid
Fit the complete engine compartment lid (A),

after refitting any shims removed during
disassembly, fitting the screws in the holes in
the hinges (5).
When refitting the same lid, use the markings
made during removal as reference to
facilitate lid adjustment.
From both sides, hand tighten the screws (4)

fastening the engine compartment lid (A) to
the hinges (5).
Connect the windscreen washer pipe (1) to the
relevant system connector and fit in the
relevant seat on the engine compartment lid.
Refit the pipe grommet (3) as originally installed
and fasten the windscreen washer pipe (1) to
the two retainer clips (2) on the engine
compartment lid (A).
Check that the windscreen washer pipe (1) can
move freely and is not excessively taut when
the engine compartment lid ( A) is opened
completely.
Check that the lid closes properly and that it is
equidistant on all sides of the vehicle
bodyshell and perfectly flush in height at the
front, at point (6).
If the height is incorrect, adjust the swivel

spacers (7) at the front of the engine
compartment lid, turning them to adjust the
height to the correct position.
Check the height once again with the lid closed.
Finally, check that the release mechanism (8)

works properly by opening and closing the lid
a few times.
If the lid rubs or jams during opening or closing,
check lid height and alignment.
E3.02 Luggage compartment lid
Removing the luggage compartment lid
Before removing any fastener clamps and/or clips in the electronic system and/or hydraulic system,
note the number and position of the components to ensure that they are refitted correctly during
reassembly.

Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel and the rear right hand trim panel only.
Close the luggage compartment lid.
CAUTION
Move the RHT into the intermediate position,

with the Rear Roof shell over the Front Roof
shell.
OLD SOLUTION
Detach and remove the gutter (13) from the right

hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
NEW SOLUTION
Undo the screws indicated by the black arrows.

Remove the clip indicated by the red arrow.
Detach the cables from the clip (17).
Remove the tape (16).
On the right-hand side of the luggage

compartment, disconnect the connectors (3)
and (4) and undo the screw (1) fastening the
ground cable (2).
Remove the cable retainer clamp (5).

Gather together all the cables and move them
out of the way so that they are not cut or
bent during the removal of the components.
Detach the two hooks (15) (one per side)
fastening the luggage compartment lid to the
Tonneau Cover kinematics then open the
luggage compartment lid completely.
CAUTION
Danger of accident! At least two operators are required to manually move the components of the RHT roof,
working slowly and in a coordinated fashion.
When handling the tonneau cover manually, the tonneau cover fastener latches may damage the
blocks fastened to the kinematics of the tonneau cover.
The blocks fastened to the kinematics of the tonneau cover protect the flaps. As a result, damage to
the blocks will also result in damage to the flaps.
Before handling the tonneau cover manually, check that the latches fastening the tonneau cover are
correctly released.
Manually close the Tonneau Cover completely.

Work with due caution, taking particular care not to damage the wiring harnesses disconnected
previously.
On the left-hand side of the luggage

compartment lid, disconnect the light
connector (6).
Adequately support the weight of luggage
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two
operators.
Remove the clamp (7) fastening the cable

grommet.
Prise the cable grommet (8) out of the luggage
compartment lid and pull out the light
connector disconnected previously.
Mark the position of the hinge on the luggage
compartment lid to facilitate subsequent
reassembly
Undo the two screws (9) fastening the hinge to
the luggage compartment lid.

compartment lid.
operators.
Remove the clamp (10) fastening the cable

grommet.
Prise the cable grommet (11) out of the luggage
compartment lid and pull out the antenna and
ground cable connectors.
Mark the position of the hinge on the luggage
compartment lid to facilitate subsequent
reassembly
Undo the two screws (12) fastening the hinge to
the luggage compartment lid.
In the event of removing the Tonneau Cover
If the object of the operation is to remove the

Tonneau Cover, it is advisable to remove the
luggage compartment lid complete with
hinges. Leave the hinges fastened to the lid,
but remove them from the Tonneau Cover,
marking their respective positions beforehand
to facilitate subsequent reassembly; then
undo the two screws (14) for each hinge.
Adequately support the weight of luggage compartment lid.

This operation requires at least two operators.
Remove the luggage compartment lid from the vehicle.
Refitting the luggage compartment lid

Fastening hinges - luggage compartment lid Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening hinges - Tonneau Cover Screw 20 Nm B
reassembly.
If the Tonneau Cover has been removed
Fit the luggage compartment lid, complete with

hinges, on the Tonneau Cover and fix
temporarily with the four fastener screws (14)
(two per hinge).
Locate the cables in the luggage compartment
so that they cannot be crushed or damaged
by moving components.
Adequately support the weight of luggage compartment lid.

This operation requires at least two operators.
Fit the luggage compartment lid on the relative hinges, using the markings made during removal as
reference, and fix temporarily with the four fastener screws.
Locate the cables in the luggage compartment so that they cannot be crushed or damaged by moving
components.

compartment lid.
operators.
Feed the antenna cables and the ground cable

through the cable grommet (11) and pull
through as far as the luggage compartment.
Fasten the cable grommet (11) onto the luggage
compartment lid with the clamp (10).
Hand tighten, applying the shims removed during
disassembly, the two screws (12) fastening
the hinge to the luggage compartment lid.
When refitting the same luggage compartment
lid, use the original shims.
When fitting a new luggage compartment lid,

reuse the original shims as an initial
guideline.
compartment lid.
operators.
Fit the connector with cable into the hole on the

luggage compartment lid.
Fasten the cable grommet (8) onto the luggage
compartment lid with the clamp (7).
Tighten, applying the shims removed during
disassembly, the two screws (9) fastening the
hinge to the luggage compartment lid.
When refitting the same luggage compartment
lid, use the original shims.
When fitting a new luggage compartment lid,

reuse the original shims as an initial
guideline.

compartment lid, connect the light connector
(6).
CAUTION
correctly released.
Manually open the Tonneau Cover completely.

compartment, connect the connectors (3) and
(4) and hand tighten the screw (1) fastening
the ground cable (2).
Fasten the cables with a new retainer clamp (5).
OLD SOLUTION
Fasten the cables leading from the luggage

compartment lid to the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics as originally installed, fitting
the gutter (13).
Check that the cables are routed correctly and
that they do not interfere with the
movements of kinematics or components.
NEW SOLUTION
Tighten the screws indicated by the black arrows.

Fit the clip indicated by the red arrow.
Fasten the cables to the clip (17).
Fit the strip (16) as originally fitted.
Detach the two hooks (15) (one per side)

fastening the luggage compartment lid to the
Tonneau Cover kinematics then lock the
luggage compartment lid in its original
position.
Check that the wiring harnesses are routed correctly so that they will not be damaged or sheared by
moving the RHT kinematics.
With the engine running, press the relative button and close the RHT.
Check that the luggage compartment lid closes correctly and remains closed even when trying to force the
lid open.
Check alignment with the bodywork; the lid must

be equidistant from the bodywork along the
entire perimeter. If the lid is incorrectly
aligned, loosen the hinge fasteners and
centre the lid correctly by adding or removing
shims underneath the hinges.
If the Tonneau Cover has been removed, also
align the hinges fastened to the Tonneau
Cover itself if necessary.
With the lid closed, also check the height relative
to the bodywork. If necessary, adjust the
height with the shims (13).
Once adjustment is complete, tighten the screws

(9).

Screw 20 Nm B

Screw 20 Nm B
If the Tonneau Cover has been removed

(14).

Screw 20 Nm B
Check that the sill protector striker area is clear

of any foreign objects preventing the flap from
moving correctly
If necessary, move the RHT electrically into the

Coupé configuration.
Insert the ignition key in the driver side door lock;
turn the key counterclockwise and hold in this
position to start the Coupé to Spider RHT roof
cycle.
When the cycle has almost ended - specifically,
when the luggage compartment lid is
approximately 50 ± 10 mm from completely
closed - return the key to the vertical position,
interrupting the RHT roof cycle.
Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key
counterclockwise again to complete the
luggage compartment lid closing cycle.
While the aforementioned operation is in
progress, check that the luggage
compartment lid closes correctly without
requiring manual assistance.
Turn the ignition key clockwise and hold in this
position to start the Spider to Coupé RHT roof
cycle.
Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key clockwise
again to complete the luggage compartment
lid closing cycle.
If the luggage compartment lid does not close correctly, proceed as follows.
Remove the sill protector.
Loosen the two screws indicated.

Adjust the striker (B) along the Z axis, then
tighten the two screws indicated.

Screw 20 Nm B
Repeat the luggage compartment lid closing test described previously.

Refit the luggage compartment lid trim panel, the rear right hand trim panel and the sill protector trim.
E3.03 Front bumper
Removing the front bumper

Remove the front element only of both front wheelhouses.
Undo the two lower screws indicated fastening

the front bumper (A).
On the right side, undo the three lateral screws

indicated fastening the front bumper (A).
On the left side, undo the three lateral screws
indicated fastening the front bumper (A).
Remove the upper seal (1).
Undo the seven upper screws indicated

fastening the bumper (A) and remove the
bumper from the vehicle.
The vibration damper (2) on the vehicle chassis
may now be replaced; the element is secured
by two metal brackets.
The vibration damper (3) glued to the front

bumper may also be replaced.
Refitting the front bumper

Fastening front bumper Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fit the bumper (A) on the vehicle, fitting the two
lateral air intakes.
Hand tighten the upper centre screw fastening
the front bumper (A).
On both sides of the vehicle, hand tighten the
lateral centre screw fastening the front
bumper (A).
Check on both sides that the panel gap between
the front bumper (A) and the front fender (B)
is 1 mm (-0/+1).
Also check the panel alignment of the front
bumper (A) relative to the engine
compartment lid (C).
In the event of incorrect panel alignment
between the front bumper (A) and the front
fender (B) and/or with the engine
compartment lid (C), loosen the screws
tightened previously and adjust the front
bumper (A) to obtain the correct panel
alignment.
Tighten the seven upper screws indicated

fastening the front bumper (A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Refit the front seal (1).

If necessary, replace the double sided adhesive
strip fixing the seal (1) to the bumper.
On the left side, tighten the three lateral screws

Screw 7.5 Nm B
On the right side, tighten the three lateral screws


Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the two lower screws fastening the front

bumper (A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B

E3.04 Rear bumper
Removing the rear bumper

Remove the rear section only of both rear wheelhouses.

Remove the right and left hand trim panels, the removable trim and the toolkit only.
Remove the rear light cluster from the bumper ( F2.07).

Remove both.
On the left-hand side, undo the two upper screws

indicated fastening the rear bumper (A).
On the right-hand side, undo the two upper

screws indicated fastening the rear bumper
(A).
Remove the three plugs indicated from their
respective holes.
Undo the three lower screws indicated fastening

the rear bumper (A).
Remove the cover (1) from the rear bumper (A),
prising out with an appropriate tool.
Undo the four centre screws indicated fastening

the rear bumper (A).
On the left-hand side, undo the lateral screw (2)
fastening the rear bumper (A).
On the right-hand side, undo the lateral screw (2)

Remove the rear bumper from the vehicle.
For vehicles with parking camera

Disconnect and free the cable (3).
Disconnect the parking sensor connectors and remove the rear bumper.
Refitting the rear bumper

Fastening lateral mounting brackets for rear Nut 4.5 Nm B
bumper
Fastening lateral fastener for rear bumper Screw 7 Nm B
Fastening rear bumper Screw 7.5 Nm B
Connect the parking sensor connectors.
For vehicles with parking camera
Connect and fasten the cable (3).

Fit the rear bumper, pressing on both sides to fasten to the respective lateral mounting brackets fixed to
the bodyshell.
If the rear bumper (A) has been replaced, check,

on both sides of the vehicle, that the panel
gap between the rear bumper (A) and the
rear fender (B) is 1 mm (-0/+1).
If the panel alignment between the rear bumper
(A) and the rear fender (B) is incorrect,
remove the rear bumper from the vehicle,
pulling from both sides, and carry out the
following procedure.
On both sides, loosen the three nuts indicated
fastening the respective lateral mounting
brackets (C) for the rear bumper and adjust to
obtain the correct panel alignment.
On both sides, tighten the three nuts indicated
fastening the respective lateral mounting
brackets (C) for the rear bumper.

Nut 4.5 Nm B
the bodyshell.
If the rear bumper (A) has been replaced, check,

on both sides of the vehicle, that the holes on
the bumper fixing plate (D) are correctly
aligned with the holes on the tailpipes on the
silencers (E).
If the alignment between the cosmetic tailpipes
(D) and the pipes on the silencers (E) is
incorrect, adjust the silencers from the
respective fasteners.
the bodyshell.
On the right-hand side, tighten the lateral screw

(2) fastening the rear bumper (A).

Screw 7 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the lateral screw
(2) fastening the rear bumper (A).

Screw 7 Nm B
Tighten the four centre screws indicated


Screw 7.5 Nm B
Refit the cover (1), pressing onto the rear

bumper (A).
Tighten the three lower screws indicated

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Refit the three plugs indicated, pressing into the
respective holes.
On the right-hand side, tighten the two upper

(A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the two upper

(A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Refit the rear light cluster onto the bumper ( F2.07).

Refit the removable trim panel, the toolkit and the right and left hand trim panels.

E3.05 Wheelhouse
Removing the front wheelhouses
These consist of two elements which may be removed independently of one another.
Where they overlap, the two elements are both fastened by the same screw.
Front element
Remove the five fasteners (1): undo the three

screws and prise out the two plastic inserts.
Remove the front element (A).
Rear element
Remove the six fasteners (2): undo the three

screws and prise out the three plastic inserts.
Remove the rear element (B).
Refitting the front wheelhouses

In the interference zone, the front element must be located above the rear element and the two elements are
fastened with a single screw.
Rear element
Fit the rear element (B) inserting the

underwindscreen shield water drain pipe into
the relative hole.
Fit it below the front element if it was removed
alone.
Fasten the rear element (B) with the six

fasteners (2): tighten three screws and insert
three plastic inserts.

Screw 2.5 Nm C
Front element
Fit the front element (A).

Fasten the front element (A) with the five
two plastic inserts.

Screw 2.5 Nm C
Removing the rear wheelhouses
These consist of two elements: to remove the front element, the rear element must first be removed.

Rear element
Remove the ten fasteners (1): undo nine screws

and prise out the plastic insert.
Remove the rear element (A).
Front element
Remove the seven fasteners (2): undo the three

screws and prise out the four plastic inserts.
Remove the front element (B).
Refitting the rear wheelhouses

Front element
Fit the front element (B).

Fasten the front element (B) with the seven
four plastic inserts.

Screw 2.5 Nm C
Rear element
Fit the rear element (A).

Fasten the rear element (A) with the ten
fasteners (1): tighten nine screws and insert a
plastic insert.

Screw 2.5 Nm C

E3.06 Windscreen
Removing the windscreen seal
Detach the left hand part of the windscreen seal

(A) from the relative seat on the left hand
windscreen pillar.
Detach the right hand part of the windscreen seal

(A) from the relative seat on the right hand
windscreen pillar.
Remove the roof trim panels ( E4.04).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the

windscreen seal (A) to the left hand
windscreen pillar.
windscreen seal (A) to the right hand
windscreen pillar.
Detach and remove the upper part of the windscreen seal from the relative seat on the windscreen cross
member.
Refitting the windscreen seal

Fastening windscreen seal Screw 8 Nm B
Fit and insert the upper part of the windscreen seal in the relative seat on the windscreen cross member.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the

windscreen seal (A) to the right hand
windscreen pillar.

Screw 8 Nm B
windscreen seal (A) to the left hand
windscreen pillar.

Screw 8 Nm B
Refit the roof trim panels ( E4.04).
Fit the right hand part of the windscreen seal (A)

in the relative seat on the right hand
windscreen pillar.
Fit the left hand part of the windscreen seal (A)

in the relative seat on the left hand
windscreen pillar.
Diagnosing windscreen damage

In the event of scratches or other windscreen damage, refer to the above diagram to define the zone in which
the damage is located.
Visibility zone A (blue line)
Visibility zone B (green line)
Note that the measurements in the previous image are with reference to the 458 Italia and 458 Spider.
Replacing the windscreen
Protect all painted bodywork parts and the cabin to prevent damage when using cutting equipment
and when installing the new windscreen.


Remove the windscreen seal ( E3.06).
Remove the interior rear view mirror ( E5.11).
Remove the rain/twilight sensor ( F2.12).
Cover the dashboard, centre console, mats and front seats with protective material.
The following tools are required to remove the
windscreen glass:
One (Excalibur pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519
short blade) (A).
For cutting the sealant in the more easily
accessible locations and for removing
excess sealant on the bodyshell.
One (Excalibur 6 pneumatic cutter with Equaliser

Pat. 4955124 long blade) (B).
For cutting the sealant in deeper, less
accessible locations.
A thin metal plate (0.5 mm thick) (C).

To facilitate cutting and protect the bodywork
from the cutter blade.
A face mask (D).

To protect the operator's airways from airborne
fragments of material.
Safety eyewear is also recommended to protect

the eyes from flying splinters.
Before cutting, always place the metal in

front of the pneumatic cutter blade, with
the edge of the plate resting against the
bodywork to protect the bodywork against
the blade.
Ensure that there are no obstructions for the

metal plate, as it must be moved together
with the pneumatic cutter while cutting.
To cut the sealant along the right and left-hand

sides, place the metal plate (C) between the
bodyshell and the glass panel seal.
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the windscreen from inside
the passenger compartment.
Using suction cup handles, remove the windscreen from its seat.
This operation must be carried out with the assistance of another operator.
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork,
around the perimeter of the windscreen seat.
Take care not to damage the bodywork;
Remove residual sealant with the (Excalibur

pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519 short blade)
(A).
If present, remove the sealant applied between

the external windscreen pillar trim panels and
the windscreen, then degrease with heptane
to remove all adhesive or dust residue.
Clean the windscreen mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with heptane to
remove all traces of adhesive or dust.
If necessary, replace the two locator tabs (1),

refitting as originally installed using the
following procedure.
Fasten the locator tab (1) to the bodyshell,
pressing the relative pin downwards, then fit
the adjustable spacer (2).
Set the glass panel carefully on a stable surface so that it is not scratched or damaged.
Degrease the perimeter of the glass with DOW BETACLEAN 3300 P/N 81636500 and leave to dry.
Apply DOW BETAPRIME 5500 Green cap to

the entire perimeter of the glass between the
two dotted lines in the figure and leave the
product to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
The inner dotted line at the top and side of the
glass overlaps the solid screen-printed area
by approximately 10 mm.
Apply adhesive primer in a uniform,

uninterrupted bead.
Using an extrusion gun fitted with a triangular

section nozzle, apply a continuous bead (3) of
DOW BETASEAL 1812, starting from the mid
point of the bottom side.
The end of the bead must overlap the
beginning by approximately 20-30 mm.
The fitting of the windscreen on the bodyshell must take place with no possibility of delay within 5
minutes from the application of the adhesive tape.
Hold the windscreen parallel to the mating surface and fit onto the bodyshell.
Press around the entire perimeter of the windscreen.
Apply a few strips of adhesive fabric tape SYROM 90, starting from the windscreen and fixing to the pillar
and roof.
Wait at least 3 hours, remove the adhesive tape and remove any sealant residue from the perimeter of the
windscreen with heptane.
Refit the rain/twilight sensor ( F2.12).

Refit the interior rear view mirror ( E5.11).
Apply sealant on windscreen pillars ( E3.06).
Refit the windscreen seal ( E3.06).
Applying sealant on windscreen pillars
To resolve the problem of water infiltration via the joint between the external windscreen pillar trim panels and
the windscreen, it has been decided to apply sealant in the area involved as follows.
Remove the windscreen seal ( E3.06).
The arrow in the photo aside indicates the point

where water infiltrates between the cover and
the bodyshell. The photo also indicates the
area where sealant must be applied.
Using an extrusion gun, seal the following points

evenly using biSil:
water infiltration point (green arrow);
the part of the slot in the external windscreen
pillar trim panel left uncovered by the screw
(red arrow);
over the screw head (black arrow);
under the extruded lip in the windscreen (yellow
arrow), starting from the red dotted line.
Once the sealant has been applied, the area
must look as shown in the photo aside.
Wait at least 4 hours before refitting the removed components.
Refit the windscreen seal ( E3.06).

E3.07 Quarterlights
Removing the complete quarterlight
The following procedure is for removing the left hand quarterlight.
The procedure for removing the right hand quarterlight is identical.
Move the RHT roof into the Spider position.

Remove the foam rubber complete with

mounting bracket (1), undoing the two screws
indicated, then remove the bracket from the
quarterlight assembly (red arrow).
Remove the three screws indicated fastening the

front seat belt guide bracket (3).
Lift up the length of foam rubber involved (4) if it
rides up over the quarterlight mounting
bracket.
Remove the filler foam rubber (5) and then the
rubber cap (6) on the recess for the
quarterlight preload adjuster dowel.
Keep the quarterlight preload adjuster dowel (8)

immobilised and loosen the fastener nut (7).
Unscrew the rubber support (9), lift the internal

window scraper seal (12), undo the screw
(10) and lift the complete quarterlight (A) from
the bodyshell.
Detach the connector (11) and remove the
complete quarterlight (A) from the vehicle.
Refitting the complete quarterlight

door window
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand quarterlight.
The procedure for refitting the right hand quarterlight is identical.
Check the state of the foam rubber (13); replace

if necessary, refitting in the original position.
Place the complete quarterlight (A) in the
passenger compartment and connect the
connector (11).
Fit the complete quarterlight (A) in the relative

seat and prepare for adjustment by moving as
far back as possible.
Tighten the two screws (10), fitting the rubber
support (9) and internal window scraper seal
(12) as originally installed.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Keep the quarterlight preload adjuster dowel (8)

immobilised and tighten the fastener nut (7).

Nut 9 Nm B
Check and adjust the quarterlight ( E3.07).

Checking and adjusting the quarterlight

door window
Quarterlight rotation adjustment Nut 9.5 Nm B
Quarterlight/door window alignment adjustment Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening front seat belt guide bracket Screw 24 Nm B
Remove the passenger compartment trim panels ( E4.04).

Only when adjusting the quarterlight, remove the upper and lower lateral trim panels.
Carry out the following preliminary operations

before adjusting the quarterlight.
mounting bracket (21), undoing the two
screws indicated, then remove the bracket
from the quarterlight assembly (red arrow).
After removing the bracket, refit and tighten the
screw (22).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Remove the three screws indicated fastening the

front seat belt guide bracket (20).
Lift up the length of foam rubber (19) involved if it
rides up over the quarterlight assembly.
Should it be necessary to adjust the quarterlight,
remove the filler foam rubber (15) and then
the rubber cap (16) on the recess for the
quarterlight preload adjuster dowel.
To adjust correctly, the internal window scraper

seal (14) for the quarterlight must be removed.
IT IS IMPORTANT however that all adjustment
checks are carried out with the seal (14)
installed. If it is not in place, the value read
may be false.
During any adjustment to the quarterlight, the

outer nut (1) fastening the quarterlight preload
adjustment dowel (2), located on the
bodyshell behind the lower lateral trim panel,
must be completely loosened.
Should it be necessary to adjust the quarterlight,
loosen the nut (1) while holding the adjuster
dowel (2) still to prevent it from turning. The
nut will be tightened again only once the
adjustment procedure is complete.
Press the power window button and check that the quarterlight rolls without resistance and stops in the
correct position.
Press the relative button to lower the quarterlight
to approximately 10 mm from its upper travel
limit on the Rear Roof shell seal. Once in this
position, check that the quarterlight preload is
correct.
Check that the step between the Rear Roof shell
pillar and the quarterlight is 8.5 ± 1 mm.
If the value measured is incorrect, adjust as

follows.
Adjust the quarterlight preload by turning the
adjustment dowel with outer checknut located
on the bodyshell, behind the lower lateral trim
panel.
Holding the nut (1) still to prevent it from turning,
turn the adjuster dowel (2) to reach the
correct position.
Tightening the adjuster dowel decreases
quarterlight preload, loosening increases
quarterlight preload.
With the quarterlight completely raised, check,

from outside the vehicle, that the distance
between the quarterlight and the door window
is 12 ± 2 mm.
follows.
Manually move the quarterlight assembly into the
correct position.
Once adjustment is complete, tighten the two
screws (3).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Check the distance between the quarterlight and

the door window again. To obtain a uniform
gap along the entire contact length between
the components, turn the dowel/checknut for
adjusting the quarterlight rotation in X.
Loosen the nut (9) by a few thread turns and,
keeping the nut immobilised, turn the adjuster
dowel (10) to reach the correct position.
Tightening the adjuster dowel rotates the
quarterlight forwards, loosening rotates the
quarterlight backwards.
Note that one turn of the adjuster dowel (10)

corresponds to 1 mm in X.
Once adjustment is complete, keep the adjuster

dowel (10) immobilised and tighten the nut (9).

Nut 9.5 Nm B
With the quarterlight completely raised, check,

from outside the vehicle, that the parallelism
at the points indicated between the
quarterlight and the door window is 0 ± 1 mm.
follows.
Loosen the screw (4) by a few thread turns.
Holding the adjuster dowel (10) still to prevent it
from turning, loosen the nut (9) by a few
thread turns.
Manually move the quarterlight into the correct
position.
Once adjustment is complete, tighten the screw
(4) and, holding the adjuster dowel (10) still to
prevent it from turning, tighten the nut (9).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Nut 9.5 Nm B
Apply two strips of white adhesive tape in the

positions indicated in the photo aside.
With the quarterlight raised to its travel limit,
mark the strips of tape with a marker pen as
shown in the photo.
Use the relative button to lower the quarterlight
and check that it intrudes into the Rear Roof
seal, at both reference points (6), by 4 mm.
Check that the quarterlight intrudes into and
forms a seal with the Rear Roof shell seal
evenly and with no resistance at the front or
the rear.
If the values measured are incorrect or if the

quarterlight encounters any resistance, adjust
as follows.
Adjust the intrusion of the quarterlight into the
seal with the relative travel limit adjuster
screws (11) located in the space between the
quarterlight and the bodyshell.
Tightening the adjuster screw decreases the
amount by which the quarterlight intrudes
into the seal, loosening the screw increases
intrusion.
Note that one turn of the front or rear adjuster

screw corresponds to approximately 1 mm
in the height "Z" and 0.5 mm in "X".
Bring the RHT into Spider configuration and raise
the door window and relative quarterlight.
Check that the adjacent corners of the door
window and the quarterlight are aligned
correctly as shown in the photo aside when in
Spider configuration.
If the windows are not correctly aligned, proceed

as follows:
Remove the door panel ( E3.08).
Lift the internal window scraper seal (17) and
adjust the door window height in Spider
configuration with the travel limiter screw (18)
located in the door gap.
Tighten the travel limiter screw to reduce the
window height, undo the screw to increase
the height.
Note that one turn of the adjuster screw

equates to 1 mm in height along the "Z"
axis.
Fit the internal window scraper seal (17) onto the

respective rib on the door and check
alignment again.
With the RHT in Coupé configuration, open and close the quarterlight completely a few times, checking
that it rolls without resistance and seals correctly, then check the adjustment values again.
Once adjustment is complete, keep the adjuster

dowel (2) immobilised and tighten the nut (1).

Nut 9 Nm B
If removed previously, refit the rubber cap (16) in
the recess for the quarterlight preload
adjuster dowel and the filler foam rubber (15),
after shaping by hand as required, as
originally fitted.
If removed previously, refit the foam rubber (19),

gluing into place as originally fitted.
Fit the front seat belt guide bracket (20) in the
relative seat and fasten by tightening the
three screws indicated.

Screw 24 Nm B

Fit the foam rubber complete with mounting
bracket (21) in the relative seat on the
quarterlight assembly bracket (red arrow) and
fasten by tightening the two screws indicated.
Before fastening the mounting bracket, ensure
that the front seat belt has been threaded
through the slot in the bracket itself.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Refit the door panel ( E3.08).

Operation necessary if the component has been removed.
Refit the passenger compartment trim panels ( E4.04).

Operation necessary if the components have been removed.
Refit the lower and upper lateral elements.

Replacing the quarterlight glass

Fastening quarterlight glass - lift mechanism Screw 6.5 Nm B
Remove the complete quarterlight ( E3.07).
Set the complete quarterlight down in a safe place.

Mark the position of the glass being replaced to ensure that the new component is correctly adjusted.

quarterlight glass (A).
Remove the three washers (1).

Remove the three bushings (2); cut the sealant if
necessary.
Remove the sealant, remove the quarterlight
glass (A) and replace.
Remove the three bushings (3);

Remove all traces of sealant from the
quarterlight mechanism fastenings.
Fit the three bushings (3) in the relative seats.
Fit the quarterlight glass (A) on the mechanism,

using the markings made during removal as
reference.
Apply DOW BETASEAL 1712 to the gaps
between the glass and the relative fastener
on the lift mechanism as shown in the photo
aside.
Fit the three bushings (2) in the relative holes on
the quarterlight glass (A).
Fit the three washers (1).

STRENGTH THREAD LOCK to the threads
of the fastener screws.
Keeping the washers and bushings correctly
aligned, snug the three indicated screws
fastening the quarterlight glass (A), following
the procedure indicated in the photo aside.
Tighten the three screws indicated in the
sequence given in the photo aside.

Screw 6.5 Nm B
Refit the complete quarterlight ( E3.07).
Replacing the quarterlight window scraper seal

Fastening quarterlight window scraper seal Screw 2.5 Nm C
The following procedure is for replacing the left hand quarterlight window scraper seal.
The procedure for replacing the right hand quarterlight window scraper seal is identical.
Remove the complete quarterlight ( E3.07).
Undo the four screws indicated fastening the

window scraper seal (A).
Detach the front section of the window scraper

seal (A).
Detach the rear section of the window scraper
seal (A).
Remove the window scraper seal (A) from the
relative seat and replace.
Fit the new window scraper seal (A) in the
relative seat, fitting onto the rear lip and
fastening the rubber peg into the relative
square hole in the bodyshell.
Press along the whole length of the seal to seat

correctly on the lip.
Tighten the four screws indicated fastening the
window scraper seal (A).

Screw 2.5 Nm C
Refit the complete quarterlight ( E3.07).
Fit the front part of the window scraper seal (A),

fastening by fitting the two rubber pegs into
the respective square hole in the bodyshell
and applying a strip of double sided adhesive
tape or a small quantity of 3M.
E3.08 Doors
Removing the complete door
The following procedure is for removing the left hand door.
The procedure for removing the right hand door is identical.

Undo the screw (2) fastening the tie-rod.
Undo the two screws (3) fastening the door to
the hinges.
Remove the complete door (A).
Refitting the complete door

Fastening door - hinges Screw 18 Nm B
Fastening door tie-rod Screw 30 Nm B
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand door.
The procedure for refitting the right hand door is identical.

Fit the complete door (A) on the hinges.
Tighten the two screws (3) fastening the door to
the hinges.

Screw 18 Nm B
Tighten the screw (2) fastening the tie-rod.

Screw 30 Nm B

Check and adjust door closure ( E3.08).
Checking and adjusting door closure

Fastening door striker plate Screw (pretightening) 18.4 Nm B
Screw 23 Nm B
The door striker plate must be checked and adjusted with the door window completely raised.
Visually check that the door is flush with the rear

fender.
If the door does not close flush with the fender,
adjust the door striker plate as follows.
Open the door.
Loosen the two screws indicated fastening the
striker plate (A) to the bodyshell.
Adjust the striker plate (A) into the correct
position.
Check that the door opens and closes without
sticking.
Tighten the two screws fastening the door striker
plate (A) to 80% of the rated tightening torque.

Screw (pretightening) 18.4 Nm B
Close the door.

Visually check that the door is flush with the rear
fender.
If the door does not close flush with the fender,
repeat the door striker plate adjustment as
described previously.
Tighten the two screws fastening the door striker

plate (A) to 100% of the rated tightening
torque.

Screw 23 Nm B
Removing the door panel
The following procedure is for removing the right door panel. With the exception of the variations described,
the procedure for removing the left hand door panel is the same.
Using a suitable tool, prise out the centre door

panel trim (A) from its seat.
Using a suitable tool, prise out and remove the
loudspeaker grille (B) from its seat.
Turn the air vent ring nut (C) counterclockwise
and remove from its seat.
Undo the thirteen screws indicated fastening the

door panel (D).
Remove the door panel (D) from the door, pulling
first towards the interior of the vehicle and
then upwards.
Disconnect the connector (1) from the tweeter.

Disconnect the two connectors (2) from the door
node.
Disconnect the connector (3) from the side

airbag.
Disconnect the connector (4) from the puddle

light unit.
For the left hand panel only
Disconnect the connector (5) from the external

mirror control.
Detach the cable (6) from the internal door

release handle, then release from the
indicated retainers.
Remove the door panel from the vehicle.
Refitting the door panel

Fastening door panel Screw 8 Nm B
The following procedure is for refitting the right door panel.
With the exception of the variations described, the procedure for refitting the left hand door panel is the same.
Place the door panel in the vehicle.

Fit the cable (6) in the indicated retainers.
Attach the cable (6) to the internal door release
handle.
For the left hand panel only
Connect the connector (5) to the external mirror

control.
Connect the connector (4) to the puddle light unit.

Connect the connector (3) to the side airbag.
Connect the two connectors (2) to the door node.
Connect the connector (1) to the tweeter.

Fit the door panel (D) on the door, attaching the
upper part and pressing towards the door.
Tighten the thirteen screws indicated fastening
the door panel (D).

Screw 8 Nm B
Fit the air vent ring nut (C) in the relative seat
and turn clockwise.
Fit the loudspeaker grille (B) in the relative seat
and press until correctly fastened.
Fit the centre door panel trim (A) in the
respective seat and press until correctly
fastened.
Replacing the internal door handle
Undo the two upper screws indicated fastening

the internal handle to the relative mounting
bracket (A).
Remove the internal handle (B) from the relative
seat, separating the upper part from the door
panel and the lower part from the door
release lever (C).
Remove the door release lever (C) from the
relative seat, pulling upward.
Remove the plate (D) from the relative seat.

door release handle mounting bracket (A) to
the door panel.
Remove the door release handle mounting
bracket (A) from the relative seat and replace.
Fit the new door release handle mounting
bracket (A) in the relative seat.
door release handle mounting bracket (A) to
the door panel.
Fit the plate (D) in the relative seat.
Fit the door release lever (C) in the relative seat,

pressing downward.
Check that the lever (C) is parallel with the door
panel and moves without impediment.
Fit the internal handle (B) in the relative seat,
fitting the upper part on the door panel and
the lower part on the door release lever (C).
Tighten the two upper screws indicated fastening

the internal handle to the relative mounting
bracket (A).
Removing the internal door window scraper seal
The following procedure is for removing the internal scraper seal for the right hand door window.
The procedure for removing the internal scraper seal for the left hand door window is the same.
DO NOT disconnect the door panel connectors.
Detach the lower part of the internal door window

scraper seal (A), removing the relative
fastener pegs from the door subframe.
Undo the upper screw (1) fastening the internal

door window scraper seal (A).
Detach the upper part of the internal door

window scraper seal (A) and remove
completely from the relative seat on the door
subframe.
Refitting the internal door window scraper seal
The following procedure is for refitting the internal scraper seal for the right hand door window.
The procedure for refitting the internal scraper seal for the left hand door window is the same.
Fit the internal window scraper seal (A) in the

relative seat on the door subframe and insert
the upper part.
Tighten the upper screw (1) fastening the internal

door window scraper seal (A).
Fit the lower part of the internal door window

scraper seal (A), fitting the relative fastener
pegs in the door subframe.
Removing the door window
Lift the door window completely with the relative control.

Remove the waterproof membranes (A) from the
respective seats.
Undo the screw (1) fastening the door window to

the rear power window mechanism guide.
Undo the screw (2) fastening the door window to

the front power window mechanism guide.
Carefully remove the door window from the relative seat, removing via the upper slit in the door subframe.
Set the door window (B) down on a soft surface.
Remove the pad (C) from the door window (B).
Refitting the door window

Fit the pad (C) in the relative seat on the door

window (B).
Carefully insert the door window in the upper slit in the door subframe, placing on the relative mounting
shoes.

Connect the connectors only.

Tighten the screw (2) fastening the door window
to the front guide.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the door window

to the rear guide.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Check and adjust the door window ( E3.08).
Affix new waterproof membranes (A) onto the

respective seats.
Checking and adjusting the door window

unit guides - door
Distance from quarterlight glass
With the door closed, press the power window button and check that the window rolls smoothly and stops
in the correct position.
Check that the gap between the rear edge of the

Front Roof shell and the rear edge of the door
window is 65 ± 2 mm.
If the distance measured is within the range
specified, check intrusion as described as
follows.
If the distance is not within the range specified,
adjust as follows.

Remove both waterproof liner sheets (1).

Press the relative button to lower the power
window and allow access to the relative
fasteners.
Slightly loosen the two screws (2) fastening the
door window to the mounting brackets.
Manually correct the position of the door window.
screws (2).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
System activation
Apply four strips of white adhesive tape to the

door window in the points indicated in the
image aside.
With the door closed and the window raised
completely, mark the strips of adhesive tape
with a marker pen in all the positions
indicated in the image aside.
Open the door and check that the marking (5)
shows that the door window intrudes into the
windscreen pillar seal by 2 mm.
Check that the marking (3) and the marking (4)
show that the door window intrudes into the
Front Roof shell seal by 4 mm.
With the door open and the door window raised
completely, check the marking (12) to
determine by how much the window rises to
reach the Spider configuration relative to the
Bear this parameter in mind when adjusting by
how much the window intrudes into the
Front Roof shell seal, as the adjacent
corners of the door window and the
quarterlight must be aligned when in Spider
configuration.
If the distances measured are not within the

specified range, adjust preload as follows.
If the gaps measured are not within the specified
range, adjust as follows.

Remove both waterproof liner sheets (1).
Press the relative button to lower the power

window and allow access to the relative
fasteners.
Loosen the two screws (2) fastening the door
window to the relative mounting brackets.
Manually correct the position of the door window.
(2).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Preload
With the door partially closed and the window

completely raised and in contact with the
upper seal, check that the gap between the
rear edge of the door (near the handle) and
the fender is between 8 and 11 mm.
If the distance measured is within the range
specified, refit any components removed in
order to make the aforementioned
adjustments as follows.
If the distance measured is not within the range
specified, adjust as follows.
Working from underneath the door, remove the
two plugs (7).
Working from underneath the door, loosen the

two lower nuts (8) fastening the power
window unit guides.
Adjust the power window unit guides to bring
them into the correct position (keeping as
close as possible to the upper 11 mm margin).
lower nuts (8) fastening the power window
unit guides.

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Working from underneath the door, refit the two

plugs (7).
If removed previously, refit both waterproof
membranes (1).

If removed previously.
Replacing the external door window scraper seal

Fastening external window scraper seal - door Screw 4 Nm B
The following procedure is for replacing the external scraper seal for the left hand door window.
The procedure for replacing the external scraper seal for the right hand door window is the same.
Remove the door window ( E3.08).

Remove the internal door window scraper seal ( E3.08).
Remove the upper part only.
Undo the seven screws indicated fastening the

external door window scraper seal (A) to the
door subframe.
Carefully detach and remove the external
window scraper seal (A) from the relative
seat, starting from the rear end.
Replace the external window scraper seal (A).
Fit and insert the external window scraper seal
(A) in the relative seat, starting from the front
end.
Check that the profile of the external window
scraper seal (A) is straight.
Tighten the seven screws indicated fastening the

external window scraper seal (A) to the door
subframe.

Screw 4 Nm B
Refit the internal door window scraper seal ( E3.08).

Refit the door window ( E3.08).
Replacing the power window unit

Fastening power window unit motor - door Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fastening upper fastener between power window Screw 9.5 Nm B
unit guides - door
unit guides - door
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand power window unit.
The procedure for replacing the left hand power window unit is the same.
Remove the door window ( E3.08).

Detach and remove the strip of protective foam
(1) from the door subframe.
Undo the two lower nuts indicated fastening the

front guide (A) and the rear guide (B).
Undo the two upper screws indicated fastening
the front guide (A) and the rear guide (B).
Detach the clip (2) from the door subframe.
Disconnect the connector (3) from the power

window motor (C).
Undo the three nuts indicated fastening the
power window motor (C) to the door subframe.
Disconnect the connector (4) from the power
window unit microswitch.
The connector (4) is fastened to the interior of
the door frame.
Carefully remove the power window unit from the relative seat, removing first the rear guide and then the
motor and the front guide from the relative recess.
Replace the power window unit, installing the

new power window unit as shown in the
image aside.
Take particular care not to damage the Bowden cable sheath.
Carefully fit the new power window unit in the relative seat, fitting first the front guide and then the motor
and the rear guide in the relative recess.
Connect the connector (4) to the power window

unit microswitch.
The connector (4) is fastened to the interior of
the door frame.
Tighten the three nuts indicated fastening the
power window motor (C) to the door subframe.

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Connect the connector (3) to the power window

motor (C).
Attach the clip (2) to the door subframe.

Tighten the two upper screws indicated fastening
the rear guide (B) and the front guide (A).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Tighten the two lower nuts indicated fastening

the rear guide (B) and the front guide (A).

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fit and affix, pressing manually, a new strip of

protective foam (1) to the door subframe.
Apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to the lower (5)
and upper pulleys of the rear power window
unit guide (B).
Apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to the lower (6)

and upper pulleys of the front power window
unit guide (A).
Refit the door window ( E3.08).
Removing the external body of the external door handle
Pull the external body (A) of the external door

handle outwards.
Pull the seal (B) for the external body (A) of the
external door handle out of the relative seat.
Undo the screw (1) fastening the external body
(A) of the external door handle to the inner
body.
Remove the external body (A) of the external
door handle from the relative seat.
Refitting the external body of the external door handle

Fastening external body of external door handle Screw 3.5 Nm B
Fit the external body (A) of the external door

handle in the relative seat.
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the external body
(A) of the external door handle to the inner
body.

Screw 3.5 Nm B
Push the seal (B) for the external body (A) of the
external door handle into the relative seat.
Replacing the internal body of the external door handle

Fastening internal body of external door handle Nut 5 Nm B

Remove the external body of the external door handle ( E3.08).
Detach the clip (2) from the internal body (A) of
the external door handle.
Undo the four nuts indicated fastening the
internal body (A) of the external door handle.
Remove the internal body (A) of the external
door handle from the respective seat on the
door subframe, retrieving the relative shim (3).
Detach the Bowden cable (B) from the internal
body (A) of the external door handle.
Replace the internal body (A) of the external
door handle.
Attach the Bowden cable (B) to the new internal
body (A) of the external door handle.
Fit the new internal body (A) of the external door
handle in the respective seat on the door
subframe, installing the relative shim.
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the
internal body (A) of the external door handle.

Nut 5 Nm B
Attach the clip (2) to the internal body (A) of the

external door handle.
Refit the external body of the external door handle ( E3.08).
Check that the distance between the external

body (C) of the external door handle and the
external surface of the door subframe is 3 ±
0.5 mm.
If the distance is incorrect, loosen the four nuts
fastening the internal body of the external
door handle and add or remove an
appropriate shim to achieve the correct
distance.

Replacing the door lock

Fastening door lock Screw 9.5 Nm B

Disconnect the connector (1) from the door lock

(A).
On driver side door lock only
Detach the pin (2) from the door lock (A).

Detach the Bowden cable (B) from the door lock
(A).
NEW SOLUTION
Cut the indicated cable ties retaining the Bowden

cable (3) and the electric cable of the power
window motor (4).

door lock (A) to the door subframe.
Remove the door lock (A) from the relative seat
in the door subframe and replace.
Fit the new door lock (A) in the relative seat in
the door subframe.
door lock (A) to the door subframe.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
NEW SOLUTION
Fit new cable ties as indicated to fasten the

Bowden cable (3) and the electric cable of the
power window motor (4).
Ensure that the Bowden cable (3) is taut.
Attach the Bowden cable (B) to the door lock (A).

If necessary, apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to
the Bowden cable spring (B).
On driver side door lock only
Attach the pin (2) to the door lock (A).

Connect the connector (1) to the door lock (A).

Replacing the door latch

Fastening door latch Nut 5.5 Nm B
Our Spare Parts Service Dept. supplies a complete lock kit, therefore, when replacing the door lock
control block, all the locks on the vehicle must be replaced.
Only the driver side door has a door latch.


Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the latch
(A) to the door subframe.
Remove the latch (A) from the relative seat on
the door subframe, detaching the pin (2) from
the door lock (B), and replace.
Fit the new latch (A) in the relative seat on the
door subframe, attaching the pin (2) to the
door lock (B).
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the latch
(A) to the door subframe.

Nut 5.5 Nm B
Connect the connector (1) to the latch.

E3.09 Windscreen wiper
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the lever (1) fastening the windscreen wiper

blade.
Remove the wiper blade (A), pressing in the
direction indicated to release it from the
windscreen wiper arm (B).
Lift the windscreen wiper arm (B) slightly to
facilitate removal of the windscreen wiper
blade.
Replace the windscreen wiper blade (A).
Fit the new windscreen wiper blade (A) onto the

windscreen wiper arm (B), pressing in the
direction indicated.
Lift the windscreen wiper arm (B) slightly to
facilitate installation of the windscreen wiper
blade.
Lower the lever (1) fastening the windscreen

wiper blade (A).
Removing the windscreen wiper arms
Note the position of the wiper blade on the

windscreen to facilitate subsequent
reinstallation of the arm on the motor linkage.
Remove the caps (1).
Undo the nuts (2) fastening the windscreen wiper
arms to the linkage.
Remove the arms (A).
Refitting the windscreen wiper arms

Fastening windscreen wiper arms Nut 35 Nm B
Refit the arms (A) on the drive spindles, keeping

the wiper blades in their original positions
relative to the windscreen.
Replace the indicated nuts (2) fastening the arms
to the linkage.

Nut 35 Nm B
Fit the caps (1).
Removing the windscreen wiper linkage
The linkage is located on the left-hand side of the engine compartment, under the left hand underwindscreen
shield.


windscreen wiper linkage to the chassis.
Remove the windscreen wiper linkage (A),
complete with motor.
Refitting the windscreen wiper linkage

Fastening windscreen wiper linkage Screw 8 Nm B
Position the windscreen wiper linkage (A),
complete with motor, into its seat.
linkage to the chassis.

Screw 8 Nm B

E3.10 Windscreen washer and headlight washer
Windscreen washer system layout
A - Windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank

B - Windscreen washer pump
C - Windscreen washer pipes
D - Windscreen washer spray nozzles
E - Check valve
The windscreen washer system consists of a fluid tank (A), which is shared with the headlight washer
system, an electric pump (B) and two spray nozzles (D).
The windscreen washer fluid tank (A) is located behind the rear section of the front left wheelhouse and is
fixed to the chassis.
The electric pump (B) is mounted on the tank (A).
The electric pump (B) and the spray nozzles (D) are linked by the pipes (C).
The nozzles (D) are located on the outer surface of the engine compartment lid.
The washer system pipes (C) are fitted with a check valve (E), located in the engine compartment lid gap.
The headlight washer fluid is topped up via a filler neck, which is accessible from the engine compartment.
Headlight washer system layout

A - Windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank
B - Headlight washer pump
C - Headlight washer pipes
D - Headlight washer spray nozzles
The headlight washer system consists of a fluid tank (A), which is shared with the windscreen washer
system, an electric pump (B), a timer and two telescopic spray nozzles (D).
The headlight washer fluid tank (A) is located behind the rear section of the front left wheelhouse and is fixed
to the chassis.
The electric pump (B) is mounted on the tank (A).
The electric pump (B) and the spray nozzles (D) are linked by the pipes (C).
The spray nozzles (D) are integrated into the headlight units and are concealed by a protective cover when
not in use.
To wash the headlights correctly, pull the relative steering column stalk twice in succession, with the low
beams switched on.
The circuit exploits the pressure created by the pump in the circuit to raise the spray nozzles (D) and optimise
jet orientation.
The washer circuit is controlled by a timer.
At the end of the wash cycle, the electric pump (B) is switched off and the spray nozzles (D) drop back under
their own weight.
Periodically check that the spray nozzles (D) are clean.
The headlight washer fluid is topped up via a filler neck, which is accessible from the engine compartment.
As the pump is not self priming, the fluid pickup duct must be immersed at all times to ensure correct
function.
Diagnosing windscreen washer fluid leakage

In the event of fluid leakage from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir, before starting any work, check the
marking on the bottom of the windscreen washer fluid reservoir itself with the following procedure:
From the wheelhouse, after removing the rear

element of the wheel bay, take a photograph
of the marking on the bottom of the
windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Attach the photograph to the claim.
Claims with no photograph of marking on the

windscreen washer fluid reservoir will be
rejected.
Removing the windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank
Located behind the front left wheel bay.

Disconnect the connectors indicated on the

electric pumps.
Disconnect the quick-coupling connector (1) from
the headlight washer pump.
Disconnect the pipe (2) from the windscreen
washer pump.
Undo the five fasteners (screws and nuts)
indicated fastening the windscreen
washer/headlight washer pump (A) to the
chassis.
Detach the filler neck (B) from the tank.
Remove the windscreen washer/headlight

washer pump from the wheel bay,
disconnecting the connector (3) from the fluid
level sensor, then remove the filler neck.
Refitting the windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank

Fastening windscreen washer/headlight washer Screw / Nut 7.5 Nm B
fluid tank
Working from the front left wheel bay, fit the
windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid
tank and the filler neck in the relative seat,
connecting the connector (3) to the fluid level
sensor.
Connect the filler neck (B) to the tank (A).

Tighten the five fasteners indicated (screws/nuts)
fastening the windscreen washer/headlight
washer fluid tank (A).

Screw / Nut 7.5 Nm B
Connect the pipe (2) to the windscreen washer

pump.
Connect the quick coupling connector (1) to the
headlight washer pump.
Connect the connectors indicated to the
respective electric pumps.

Replacing the windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid sensor
Located on the windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank.
Remove the windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank ( E3.10).

Remove the windscreen washer/headlight
washer fluid sensor (A), complete with seal,
from the relative seat and replace.
Fit the new windscreen washer/headlight washer
fluid sensor (A), complete with new seal, in
the relative seat, pressing until it clicks
audibly into place.
Refit the windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank ( E3.10).
Replacing the windscreen washer pump
Remove the windscreen washer pump (A) from

the relative seat and replace.
Fit the new windscreen washer pump (A) in the
relative seat, pushing until it snaps audibly
into place.
Replacing the headlight washer pump

Remove the headlight washer pump (A) from the
Fit the new headlight washer pump (A) in the
relative seat, pushing until it snaps audibly
into place.

E3.11 Door perimeter trim panels
Removing the kickplate
The following procedure is for removing the left hand kickplate.
The procedure for removing the right hand kickplate is identical.
Detach the door bay perimeter seal strip (A).

Using a suitable tool, detach and remove the
kickplate (B).
Refitting the kickplate
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand kickplate.
The procedure for refitting the right hand kickplate is identical.
If necessary, remove the strips (1) of double

sided adhesive tape applied to the inner
surface of the kickplate (B).
Ensure that the inner surface of the kickplate (B)
is clean. If necessary, clean with a
degreasing product.
Apply new strips (1) of double sided adhesive
tape to the inner surface of the kickplate (B),
in the same positions as before.
Ensure that the surface of the seat for the
kickplate (B) is clean. If necessary, clean with
a degreasing product.
Fit the kickplate (B) correctly in the relative seat,
pressing over the entire outer surface to fix
evenly.
Refit the door bay perimeter seal strip (A).
Removing the door sill trim panel
The following procedure is for removing the right hand door sill trim panel.
The procedure for removing the left hand door sill trim panel is identical.
Remove the kickplate ( E3.11).

Remove the rear element.

Remove the left hand element.
Undo the three front screws indicated fastening

the door sill trim panel (A).
Undo the four upper screws indicated fastening
Undo the rear screw fastening the door sill trim

panel (A).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the rear

element of the flat undertray (B) and the door
sill trim panel (A) to the bodyshell.
Note that the wheelhouse and relative wheel
are shown in the image aside. These
components must be removed.
Undo the two lower screws indicated fastening
Remove the door sill trim panel (A) from the
relative seat.
Refitting the door sill trim panel

Fastening front and rear door sill trim panel Screw 2.6 Nm B
fasteners
Fastening upper door sill trim panel fastener Screw 7.5 Nm B
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand door sill trim panel.
The procedure for refitting the left hand door sill trim panel is identical.
Fit the door sill trim panel (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the two lower screws indicated fastening
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the rear
element of the flat undertray (B) and the door
sill trim panel (A) to the bodyshell.
Note that the wheelhouse and relative wheel
are shown in the image aside. These
components must be removed.

Screw 8 Nm C
Tighten the rear screw fastening the door sill trim

panel (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the four upper screws indicated

fastening the door sill trim panel (A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the three front screws indicated
fastening the door sill trim panel (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Refit the lateral flat undertray sections ( E3.12).

Refit the kickplate ( E3.11).
Removing the door seal
The following procedure is for removing the left hand door seal.
The procedure for removing the right hand door seal is identical.
Detach the lower end of the windscreen seal (A).

Detach the front end of the door seal (B).
Detach the front end of the quarterlight window
scraper seal (C).
Detach the rear end of the door seal (B).
Very carefully, completely detach and remove
the door seal (B) from the relative seat.
Refitting the door seal
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand door seal.
The procedure for refitting the right hand door seal is identical.
Fit the rear end of the door seal (B).

Fit the front end of the quarterlight window
scraper seal (C).
Moving forwards, fit the door seal (B) onto the
relative mounting lip.
Fit the front end of the door seal (B).

Fit the lower end of the windscreen seal (A).
Manually press the entire surface of the door
seal (B) to seat correctly.
Check that the door seal (B) is fastened correctly
and flush with the adjacent parts.
E3.12 Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting
Lifting the vehicle
CAUTION
OFF).
CAUTION
Failure to observe the operations below may pose a serious risk to the persons working or standing in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
Fit the two front bushings (A) in the position

indicated.
Fit the two rear bushings (B) in the position

indicated.
Lift the vehicle.

Lifting the vehicle with anti-tipping safety retainers
CAUTION
OFF).
CAUTION
Failure to observe the operations below may pose a serious risk to the persons working or standing in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
The following procedure is for fitting the vehicle anti-tipping safety retainers (AV 8183) to the two post vehicle
lift and fitting the anti-tipping safety retainer fastener brackets (AV 8184) to the runway type car lift, and
subsequently lifting the vehicle.
The anti-tipping safety retainers must always be used when removing the engine or gearbox.
When removing the engine, the anti-tipping safety retainers must be attached to the front fastener slots.
When removing the gearbox, the anti-tipping safety retainers must be attached to the rear fastener slots.
Two post vehicle lift
Remove the pads (A) from the relative arms on

the car lift.
Hold the anti-tipping safety retainers (AV 8183).

Fit the spacers (1) for preventing the vehicle lift
arms from coming into contact with the sill
trim panel during manoeuvring in the holes
previously used for the rubber blocks.
The spacers (1) are supplied in different sizes.
Fit the sleeves (2) on the shims (1).

Fit the washers (3) on the sleeves (2).
Fit the eccentric pins (4) on the sleeves (2),
inserting in the relative holes.
Fit the ring nuts (5) under the vehicle lift arms
over the centres of the holes previously used
for the rubber blocks, tightening to the
bushings (2).
Preventing the ring nuts from turning (5), hand
tighten the sleeves (2).
Tighten the bushings (6) to the eccentric pins (4).
Tighten the positioning levers (7) into the relative
holes on the bushings (6), which must be
aligned with the groove on the eccentric pins
(4).
Holding the positioning levers to prevent them

from turning (7), tighten the nuts (8).
Partially tighten the screws (9) fastening the
positioning levers (7) onto the bushings (6).
Holding the sleeves (2) to prevent them from
turning, rotate and unscrew the ring nuts (5),
together with the positioning levers (7), until
the head of the eccentric pins (4) protrudes in
the correct position for attaching to the
vehicle.
Note that the rear right hand fastener slot is
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, the front right hand fastener slot is
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, the rear left hand fastener slot is
vehicle and the front left hand fastener slot
is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle.

Turn the positioning levers (7) until the eccentric
pin head (4) retracts into the correct position
to allow the insertion of the anti-tipping safety
retainers into the relative fastener slots.
Completely tighten the screws (9) fastening the
positioning levers (7).
Lower the vehicle lift arms, without allowing the
screws (9) fastening the positioning levers (7)
to come into contact with the floor, as this
may damage the anti-tipping safety retainers.
Removing the gearbox
Detach and remove the plugs (B) from the rear

fastener slots.
Removing the engine
Detach and remove the plugs (C) from the front

fastener slots.
Move the car lift arms manually to align the anti-
tipping safety retainers with the relative
fastener slots on the car, to ensure correct
engagement when lifting.
If the arms of the vehicle lift come into contact
with the sill trim panels, add spacers as
described previously.
Working carefully and ensuring that the anti-

tipping safety retainers are correctly aligned
with the respective fastener slots, raise the
vehicle lift arms until the anti-tipping safety
retainers engage in the respective fastener
slots.
Lift the vehicle slightly off the ground and check
that it is stable.
Loosen the screws (9) fastening the positioning
levers (7).
Turn the positioning levers (7) by 180°.
Unscrew the positioning levers (7).
Lift the vehicle lift arms until the car is the
desired height from the ground.
Runway type vehicle lift
Fit the specific rubber pads (A) on the vehicle lift

points not used for fastening the anti-tipping
safety retainers
Raise the vehicle lift runways slightly to facilitate
installation of the anti-tipping safety retainer
mounting brackets (AV 8184).
Removing the engine
Detach and remove the plugs (C) from the front

fastener slots.
Detach and remove the plugs (B) from the rear

fastener slots.
Remove the runway safety extensions (D) from

the relative seats.
Fit the upper plates (1) of the brackets (AV 8184)
fastening the anti-tipping safety
retainers (AV 8183) onto the safety
extensions on the car lift runways.
The anti-tipping safety retainers must be as
close as possible to the vehicle lift runway
safety extensions, as shown in the image
aside.
Fit the lower plates (2) of the brackets fastening

the anti-tipping safety retainers on the safety
extensions under the car lift runways.
Tighten the four screws fastening the upper (1)
and lower plates (2) to the safety extensions
on the car lift runways.
Check that the brackets are correctly positioned
on the car lift runway safety extensions, so
that the anti-tipping safety retainers engage
correctly with the relative fastener slots on the
vehicle during lifting.

levers (6).
Holding the sleeves (4) to prevent them from
turning, rotate and unscrew the ring nuts (5),
together with the positioning levers (6), until
the head of the eccentric pins (7) protrudes in
the correct position for attaching to the
vehicle.
Note that the rear right hand fastener slot is
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, the front right hand fastener slot is
vehicle, the rear left hand fastener slot is
vehicle and the front left hand fastener slot
is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle.

Turn the positioning levers (6) until the eccentric
pin head (7) retracts into the correct position
to allow the insertion of the anti-tipping safety
retainers into the relative fastener slots.
Tighten the screws (3) fastening the positioning
levers (6).
Working carefully and ensuring that the anti-
tipping safety retainers are correctly aligned
with the respective fastener slots on the
vehicle, raise the vehicle lift runways until the
anti-tipping safety retainers engage in the
respective fastener slots.
Lift the vehicle slightly off the ground and check
that it is stable.
levers (6).
Unscrew the positioning levers (6).
Raise the vehicle lift runways until the car is the
Lowering the vehicle with anti-tipping safety retainers
The following procedure is for lowering the vehicle and subsequently removing the vehicle anti-tipping safety
retainers (AV 8183) from the two post vehicle lift and removing the anti-tipping safety retainer fastener
brackets (AV 8184), when using a runway type car lift.
Two post vehicle lift
Lower the vehicle lift arms until the car is the

levers (7).
Tighten the positioning levers (7).
levers (7).
Carefully lower the arms of the vehicle lift to
gently set the vehicle on the ground, ensuring
that the anti-tipping safety retainers withdraw
completely and without impediment from the
respective fastener slots on the vehicle.
Without allowing the screws (9) fastening the
positioning levers (7) to come into contact
with the floor, as this may damage the anti-
tipping safety retainers, lower the vehicle lift
arms completely.
Removing the engine
Fit and apply the plugs (C) in the front fastener

slots.
Fit and apply the plugs (B) in the rear fastener

slots.
Undo and remove the screws (9) fastening the

positioning levers (7) onto the bushings (6).
Holding the positioning levers to prevent them
from turning (7), undo the nuts (8).
Unscrew the positioning levers (7) from the
bushings (6).
Undo the bushings (6) from the eccentric pins (4).
Remove the eccentric pins (4) from the relative
seats.
Preventing the ring nuts from turning (5),
manually unscrew the sleeves (2) and
remove both components, together with
relative shims, from the car lift arms.
Refit the pads (A) on the relative arms on the car
lift.
Runway type vehicle lift
Lower the vehicle lift runways until the car is the

levers (6).
Tighten the positioning levers (6).
levers (6).
Carefully lower the runways of the vehicle lift to
gently set the vehicle on the ground, ensuring
that the anti-tipping safety retainers withdraw
completely and without impediment from the
respective fastener slots on the vehicle.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the upper

plates (1) and lower plates (2) of the brackets
(AV 8184) fastening anti-tipping safety
retainers (AV 8183).
Remove the lower plates (2) fastening the anti-
tipping safety retainers from the safety
Remove the upper plates (1) fastening the anti-
tipping safety retainers from the safety
Fit the runway safety extensions (B) in the
relative seats.
Fit and apply the plugs (B) in the rear fastener

slots.
Removing the engine
Fit and apply the plugs (C) in the front fastener

slots.
Lower the vehicle lift runways completely.
Remove the rubber blocks (A).
Removing the central flat undertray section

Remove the central flat undertray section.


Remove the central flat undertray section.
Refitting the central flat undertray section

Fit the front flat undertray section, inserting the

oil drain pipe (1) in the respective hole.

Screw 8 Nm C

Fit the front flat undertray section, inserting the

oil drain pipe (1) in the respective hole.

Screw 8 Nm C
Removing the rear flat undertray section

Remove the rear flat undertray section, prising it
out of the two lateral sections.
Refitting the rear flat undertray section

Fit the rear section of the flat undertray, pushing

it under the lateral sections and inserting the
fuel filler tray drain pipe indicated into the
relative hole.
respective washers.

Screw 8 Nm C
Removing the front flat undertray section

Remove the front flat undertray section.
Refitting the front flat undertray section

Fit the front flat undertray diffuser, inserting the
coolant breather pipe and the power steering
fluid breather pipe in the respective wire
guide holes.

Screw 8 Nm C
Removing the rear flat undertray diffuser

Remove the rear flat undertray diffuser.
Refitting the rear flat undertray diffuser

Fit the rear flat undertray diffuser.


Screw 8 Nm C
Removing the lateral flat undertray sections
Undo the indicated screws, retrieving the

respective washers.
Remove the left hand lateral element of the front
flat undertray section.
respective washers.
Remove the right hand lateral element of the
front flat undertray section.
Refitting the lateral flat undertray sections

Fit the left hand lateral element of the flat

undertray section.
respective washers.

Screw 8 Nm C
Fit the right hand lateral element of the flat
undertray, inserting the pipe (1) in the relative
hole.
respective washers.

Screw 8 Nm C
E3.13 Engine compartment guards
Engine compartment cosmetic shields
A - Right hand lateral cosmetic shield

B - Left hand lateral cosmetic shield
C - Front cosmetic shield
D - Right hand underwindscreen cosmetic shield
E - Left hand underwindscreen cosmetic shield
Removing engine compartment cosmetic shields
CAUTION
OFF).
Lateral cosmetic shields

Undo the five screws indicated and remove the
left hand central cosmetic shield (B), after
detaching it from the seal (3).
Undo the five screws indicated and remove the

right hand central cosmetic shield (A), after
detaching it from the seal (2).
Front cosmetic shield
Undo the two front screws on the cosmetic

shields on the fenders to facilitate the removal
and subsequent reinstallation of the front
shield (C).
Undo the six screws indicated and detach the
front cosmetic shield (C) from the lateral seals
(1).
Underwindscreen cosmetic shields

Remove lateral cosmetic shields
Prise out the relative portion of the seal (1).

Undo the eight screws and the two inserts
fastening the right underwindscreen shield (F).
Detach the shield from the windscreen, pull out
toward the front of the vehicle and disconnect
the drainage pipe (2).
Remove the right underwindscreen shield (F)
from the engine compartment.
Remove the windscreen wiper arms ( E3.09).

Prise out the relative portion of the seal (1).
Undo the three screws and the two inserts
fastening the left underwindscreen shield (G).
Detach the shield from the windscreen, pull out
toward the front of the vehicle and disconnect
the drainage pipe (3).
Remove the left underwindscreen shield (G) from
the engine compartment.
Refitting engine compartment cosmetic shields

Fastening underwindscreen cosmetic shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Lateral cosmetic shields

Fit the left hand central cosmetic shield (B),
install the seal (3) then fasten the shield by
hand tightening the five screws indicated.
Fit the right hand central cosmetic shield (A),

install the seal (2) then fasten the shield by
hand tightening the five screws indicated.
Front cosmetic shield
Fit the front cosmetic shield (C) in its seat,

inserting in the contact area under the lateral
cosmetic shields.
Install the seals (1) in the front cosmetic shield
(C) as originally fitted.
Hand tighten the eight screws indicated to fasten
the front cosmetic shield (C).
Underwindscreen cosmetic shields

Lubricate the contact surfaces between the
windscreen and the left hand
underwindscreen shield (G) with soapy water.
Connect the water drainage pipe (3) to the left
hand underwindscreen shield (G), tightening
the relative screw collar.
Fit the left hand underwindscreen shield (G),
pressing manually along the windscreen to
snap into place.
Tighten the three screws and the two inserts
indicated.

Screw 4.5 Nm B
Refit the seal (1) as originally installed.

The protruding lower tab must face forwards.
Refit the windscreen wiper arms ( E3.09).
Lubricate the contact surfaces between the

windscreen and the right hand
underwindscreen shield (G) with soapy water.
Connect the water drainage pipe (2) to the right
hand underwindscreen shield (G), tightening
the relative screw collar.
Fit the right hand underwindscreen shield (F),
pressing manually along the windscreen to
snap into place.
Tighten the eight screws and the two inserts
indicated.

Screw 4.5 Nm B
Refit the seal (1) as originally installed.

The protruding lower tab must face forwards.

E3.14 Fuel filler neck and fuel filler flap
Removing the fuel filler neck
CAUTION
The filler neck is located in the rear right hand wheel bay.

Remove the clamp (1) and disconnect the pipe

(2) leading to the fuel tank.
Remove the clamp (3) and detach the
condensation drain pipe (4) from the filler
neck.
Undo the nuts (5) and remove the fuel filler neck
(A) from the wheel bay, retrieving the relevant
seal (7).
As can be seen from the photo, the front nut (5)
also fastens the earth cable (6).
Refitting the fuel filler neck

Fuel tank filler neck flange Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the fuel filler neck (A) in its seat in the right
hand wheel bay, after fitting the relative seal
between the neck and the seat (7).
Fit the ground cable (6) on the front stud bolt and
tighten the nuts (5) fastening the fuel filler
neck (A) to the bodyshell.

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the condensation drain tube (4) to the

filler neck and fasten the clamp (3).
Connect the pipe (2) leading to the fuel tank onto
the filler neck and tighten the clamp (1).

Perform the "Fuel tank tightness test" cycle.
Replacing the fuel filler neck recess

Fastening the fuel filler neck recess Screw 4 Nm B

Remove the rear right hand wheelhouse.

Undo and remove the cap (A).
Remove the actuator (B).
Detach the cable (2) from the actuator (B).

Detach and remove the recess (C), easing out
from the actuator side first.
Disconnect the fuel drain pipe.
Replace the recess (C).
Connect the fuel drain pipe.
Fit the new recess (C), inserting the filler flap
side first.
Press the recess (C) by hand until it audibly
snaps into place.

Screw 4 Nm B
Fasten the cable (2) to the actuator (B).
Fit the actuator (B).


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the cap (A).

Replacing the fuel filler flap
Located at the rear right-hand side of the outer bodywork.

Open the fuel filler flap (A) with the relative
button and undo the three screws indicated.
Replace the fuel filler flap (A) and fasten by
tightening the three screws indicated.
Close the fuel filler flap (A) and check that it is

flush with the bodywork.
E3.15 Tow hook
Tow hook
CAUTION
Always comply with road safety legislation when towing the vehicle.
Do not connect toe lines to suspension arms, suspension components or wheels. Connect only to the
specific tow hook, after fitting the toe hook in its relative mounting.
Remember that the power steering and brake servo do not function with the engine off.
When towing, avoid using anchor points other

than those provided by the tow hook in its
seat (A).
Remove the tow hook from the toolkit in the
luggage compartment.
Prise the plug out of the seat (A).
Tighten the hook completely into the seat (A).
Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox, unlock the Park Lock by carrying out, if possible, the CAR WASH
procedure or the Park Lock emergency release procedure.
Disengage the EPB electric parking brake, using the relevant lever if possible, or carrying out the
emergency electric parking brake release procedure.
Keep the ignition key turned to II to enable the lights to work and to prevent the steering wheel from
locking if turned, to keep the Park Lock deactivated (when using the CAR WASH procedure) and to
prevent electric parking brake activation (if the AUTO PARK function is enabled).
E4.01 Seats
Removing the front seats
To facilitate removal and refitting, preferably open the retractable hard top completely.
Move the seat all the way forwards.

Tip the backrest forwards.
Remove the two rear seat rail end caps (4),
pressing on the clip indicated.
Undo the two rear fastener screws on the seat

(A).
Move the seat all the way back.

Remove the two front seat rail end caps (3),
Undo the two front fastener screws on the seat
(A).
Lift the seat and disconnect the connectors (1)

and (2) of the controls.
On the driver side seat are two connectors,
while on the passenger side seat there is
only one.
Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Refitting the front seats

Fastening front seats - bodyshell Screw 42 Nm B
Fit the seat in the vehicle.
Connect the connectors (1) and (2) of the
controls and lower the seat.
On the driver side seat are two connectors,
while on the passenger side seat there is
only one.
Move the seat all the way back (A).

Tighten the two front fastener screws on the seat
(A).

Screw 42 Nm B
Fit and fasten the two front seat rail end caps (3),
Move the seat all the way forwards (A).
Tip the backrest (A) forwards.
Tighten the two rear fastener screws on the seat
(A).

Screw 42 Nm B
Fit and fasten the two rear seat rail end caps (4),
Removing the rear backrest
2+2 Version
Release the rear seat backrests (A) by pulling
the relative levers (1) in the luggage
compartment.
Push the rear seat backrests (A) forwards to fold.
Undo the six screws indicated fastening the rear

seat backrests (A).
Remove the rear seat backrests (A) from the
vehicle, pulling toward the front of the vehicle.
2 seat Version
Detach the rear bench backrest (A), pulling the

relative levers (1) in the luggage compartment.
Lower the rear bench backrest (A), pushing
forwards.
backrest (A).
Remove the rear bench backrest (A) from the
vehicle, pulling forwards.
Refitting the rear backrest

Fastening rear seat backrests Screw 12 Nm B
2+2 Version
Fit the rear seat backrests (A) in their respective

seats.
Tighten the six screws indicated fastening the
rear seat backrests (A).

Screw 12 Nm B
Lift the backrests and fasten to the relative latches.
2 seat Version
Fit the backrest (A) in the relative seat.
rear bench backrest (A).

Screw 12 Nm B
Lift the backrest and fasten to the relative latches.
Removing the rear seats
The rear seats are installed in the 2+2 Version only.
Remove the rear backrest ( E4.01).

Remove the lower lateral trim panels.
Prise out and remove the cover (A) for the

branch of the left hand rear seat belt from its
relative seat.
Undo the indicated nut fastening the branch (B)
of the left hand rear seat belt.
Remove the branch (B) of the left hand rear seat
belt from its relative seat.
Prise out and remove the cover (A) for the

branch of the right hand rear seat belt from its
relative seat.
Undo the indicated nut fastening the branch (B)

of the right hand rear seat belt.
Remove the branch (B) of the right hand rear
seat belt from its relative seat.
Undo the right hand lateral screw fastening the
rear seats (C).
Undo the left hand lateral screw fastening the

rear seats (C).

Remove the rear seat cushions, which are held

in place with Velcro.
If applicable, undo the nut indicated fastening the
rear seats (C).
Undo the two central screws indicated fastening
the rear seats (C).
Note that the photo shows the vehicle with the
luggage compartment trim panels removed.
However, removal of these components is
not necessary.

Press the lower parts of the rear seats (C) at the

points corresponding to the fasteners on the
bodyshell to detach from the respective
retainers.
Take particular care not to damage the trim
retainers on the bodyshell.

Remove the rear seat cushions, which are held

in place with Velcro.
Undo the indicated nuts on the rear seats (C).
Undo the indicated nuts on the rear seats (C).
Remove the rear seats from the passenger compartment.
Refitting the rear seats

Fastening rear seats - bodyshell Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 7 Nm B
Fastening the rear seats Nut 7 Nm B
Fastening seat belt branch Nut 40 Nm A
Fit the rear seats in the relative mounting seat.


bodyshell to fasten into the respective
retainers.
Tighten the two central screws indicated
fastening the rear seats (C).
not necessary.

Screw 7 Nm B

If applicable, tighten the nut indicated fastening

the rear seats (C).
Fit the rear seat cushions, which are held in
place with Velcro.

Tighten the indicated nuts on the rear seats (C).

Nut 7 Nm B
Tighten the indicated nuts on the rear seats (C).

Nut 7 Nm B
Fit the rear seat cushions, which are held in

place with Velcro.
Tighten the left hand lateral screw fastening the

rear seats (C).

Screw 5 Nm B
Tighten the right hand lateral screw fastening the

rear seats (C).

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the branch (B) of the right hand rear seat belt
in its relative seat.
Tighten the indicated nut fastening the branch
(B) of the right hand rear seat belt.

Nut 40 Nm A
Pressing manually, refit the cover (A) for the

branch of the right hand rear seat belt in its
relative seat.
Fit the branch (B) of the left hand rear seat belt
in its relative seat.
Tighten the indicated nut fastening the branch
(B) of the left hand rear seat belt.

Nut 40 Nm A
Pressing manually, refit the cover (A) for the
branch of the left hand rear seat belt in its
relative seat.

Refit the lower lateral trim panels.
Refit the rear backrest ( E4.01).
Removing the luggage bench
The luggage bench is installed in the 2 seat Version only.

Remove the lower lateral trim panels.
Undo the right hand lateral screw fastening the

bench (C).
Undo the left hand lateral screw fastening the
bench (C).
Undo the two centre screws indicated fastening

the bench (C).
not necessary.
Release the two luggage retainer straps (A).

Press the lower part of the bench (C) at the
bodyshell to detach from the respective
retainers.
Remove the bench from the relative seat, pulling out the luggage retainer straps.
Refitting the luggage bench

Fastening rear bench - bodyshell Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the bench (C) in the relative seat, inserting

the luggage retainer straps through the slots.
bodyshell to fasten into the respective
retainers.
Tighten the two centre screws indicated

fastening the bench (C).
not necessary.

Screw 5 Nm B
Tighten the left hand lateral screw fastening the

bench (C).

Screw 5 Nm B
Tighten the right hand lateral screw fastening the
bench (C).

Screw 5 Nm B
Fasten the two luggage retainer straps (A).

Refit the lower lateral trim panels.

E4.02 Dashboard
Removing the steering column trim panel
The panel is mounted on the steering column and consists of two elements (a lower element and an upper
element).

lower element (1) of the steering column trim
panel.
Detach the lower element (1) from the upper

element of the steering column trim panel and
disconnect the connector (2) for the steering
wheel adjustment button.
Remove the lower element (1) of the steering
column trim panel.
On the left hand side, undo the two fastener
screws for the upper element (3) of the
steering column trim panel.
On the right hand side, undo the two fastener

screws for the upper element (3) of the
steering column trim panel.
Remove the upper element (3) of the steering
column trim panel.
Refitting the steering column trim panel

Fastening steering column trim panel Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the upper element (3) of the steering column
trim panel and hand tighten the two fastener
screws indicated on the right hand side.
On the left hand side, apply and hand tighten the

two fastener screws for the upper element (3)
of the steering column trim panel.
Connect the connector (2) to the lower element

(1) of the steering column trim panel.
lower element (1) of the steering column trim
panel.

Screw 5 Nm B
Removing the driver side underdashboard trim panel
Undo the screw fastening the left-hand side of

the left hand under-dashboard trim panel (A).
Undo the screw fastening the right-hand side of

the left hand under-dashboard trim panel (A).
Disconnect the connector (1) from the left hand
footwell light
Remove the left hand underdashboard trim panel
(A) from the relative seat.
Refitting the driver side underdashboard trim panel

Fit the left hand underdashboard trim panel (A)

in the relative seat.
Connect the connector (1) to the left hand
footwell light.
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the right-
hand side of the left hand under-dashboard
trim panel (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the left-

hand side of the left hand under-dashboard
trim panel (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Removing the passenger side underdashboard trim panel
Undo the screw fastening the left-hand side of

the right hand under-dashboard trim panel (A).
Undo the screw fastening the right-hand side of
Disconnect the connector (1) from the right hand

footwell light.
Remove the right hand underdashboard trim
panel (A) from the relative seat.
Refitting the passenger side underdashboard trim panel

Fit the right hand underdashboard trim panel (A)
in the relative seat.
Connect the connector (1) to the right hand
footwell light.
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the right-

hand side of the right hand under-dashboard
trim panel (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the screw fastening the left-hand side of


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Removing the binnacle
The binnacle is mounted on the instrument panel.

Remove the steering column trim panel ( E4.02).
On the left-hand side, undo the screw indicated

fastening the instrument panel (B) to the
dashboard.
On the right-hand side, undo the screw indicated

dashboard.
Detach and remove the centre moulding (1) from

the binnacle (A).
binnacle (A) to dashboard.
Remove the binnacle (A), complete with

instrument panel (B), from the dashboard.
Disconnect the connectors (2) and (3) from the
instrument panel.
Refitting the binnacle

Connect the connectors (2) and (3) to the
instrument panel.
Fit the binnacle (A), complete with instrument
panel (B), in the respective seat on the
dashboard.

binnacle (A) to dashboard.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fit the central moulding (1) on the binnacle (A)

and fasten by pressing manually until it snaps
audibly into place.
On the right-hand side, tighten the screw
indicated fastening the instrument panel (B)
to the dashboard.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the screw indicated

dashboard.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Refit the steering column trim panel ( E4.02).

Removing the lower left hand dashboard trim panel
The panel is located on the left-hand side of the dashboard, at the bottom.

cover panel (A).
Remove the cover panel (A) from the dashboard.
Detach the two clips fastening the leather flap (1).

Fold the leather flap (1) down.
On the left-hand side, undo the upper screw (2)

fastening the lower left hand trim panel.
On the right-hand side, undo the upper screw (3)
Detach and remove the left hand lateral cover

(G) from the dashboard.
Undo the lateral screw (4) fastening the lower left

hand trim panel (B).
Undo the two lower screws fastening the lower
left hand trim panel (B).
Detach the upper part of the lower left hand trim

panel (B) and disconnect the connector (5)
from the parking brake control button panel.
Remove the lower left hand trim panel (B) from
the dashboard.
Refitting the lower left hand dashboard trim

Connect the connector (5) to the parking brake
control button panel.
Fit the lower left hand trim panel (B) in the
respective seat on the dashboard.
Tighten the two lower screws fastening the lower


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the lateral screw (4) fastening the lower


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fit the left hand lateral cover (G) in its respective
seat on the dashboard and fasten by pressing
manually until it snaps audibly into place.
On the right-hand side, tighten the upper screw

(3) fastening the lower left hand trim panel.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the upper screw (2)


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fasten the leather flap (1), attaching the two
indicated fastener clips.
Fit the cover panel (A) in its seat on the

dashboard, pushing upwards.
cover panel (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B

Diagnosing failed glove compartment door aperture
If the glove compartment door fails to open when the respective button is pressed, check that the relative
dashboard function is enabled with the following procedure before starting any work:
Access the “Car Setup” menu on the TFT

display, select “Glove Box Key” and take a
photo showing the function state.
Attach the photo showing the state of the function “Glove box Key" to the claim.
Claims with no photo confirming that the “Glove box Key” function is enabled will be rejected.
Removing the complete glove compartment in dashboard
The compartment is located on the right-hand side of the dashboard.
Open the hatch (A).

Undo the three central screws fastening the
compartment bin (B).
On the left-hand side, undo the two screws

fastening the compartment bin (B).
On the right-hand side, detach and remove the
lateral dashboard fastener (1).
Remove the lower right dashboard trim panel (2),

by undoing the two fastener screws.
On the right-hand side, undo the two screws

Detach the damper (3) from the door (A).
Undo the two central screws fastening the
Remove the glove compartment (B) from the
dashboard.
Disconnect the connector (4) from the glove

compartment light bulb mounting.
If necessary, prise the light bulb mounting out
of its seat to replace the glove compartment
light bulb.
Disconnect the connector (5) from the glove

compartment light switch.
If necessary, prise the glove compartment light
switch out of its seat to replace.
For vehicles with iPod connection
Detach and remove the cable grommet (C).

Remove the iPod cable from the glove
compartment.
Remove the complete glove compartment.
Refitting the complete glove compartment onto the dashboard

Fastening glove compartment Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the complete glove compartment.
For vehicles with iPod connection
Fit the iPod cable in the glove compartment.

Fit the cable grommet (C).
Connect the connector (5) to the glove
compartment light switch.
Connect the connector (4) to the glove

compartment light bulb mounting.
Fit the glove compartment into its seat on the

dashboard, centring the two reference holes
on the left side of the seat.
Tighten the two central screws fastening the

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Attach the damper (3) to the door (A).
On the right side, tighten the two screws

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the lower right dashboard trim panel (2) and

fasten by hand tightening the two screws.
On the right side, fit and fasten the lateral

dashboard fastener (1).
On the left side, tighten the two screws fastening
the compartment bin (B).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Tighten the three central screws fastening the


Screw 8.5 Nm B
Check that the hatch (A) is correctly fastened

and that it functions properly.
Removing the lower central dashboard trim panel
The panel is located at the centre of the dashboard, at the bottom.

Remove the lower left hand dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).
Remove the complete glove compartment in dashboard ( E4.02).
Prise out and remove the button (1),
disconnecting the relevant connector.
Undo the central screw (2) fastening the lower

central trim panel.
On the right-hand side, undo the lower lateral

screw (3) fastening the lower central trim
panel (D).
On the left-hand side, undo the lower lateral
panel (D).
On the left-hand side, undo the upper lateral

panel (D).
Disconnect the connector (6) for the passenger
compartment temperature sensor.
NOTE that the lower central trim panel must
only be removed longitudinally along the
same axis used in assembly as moving
the trim panel laterally may damage the
passenger compartment interior
temperature sensor.
Remove the lower central trim panel (D) from the

dashboard.
Refitting the lower central dashboard trim panel

Fastening lower central dashboard trim panel Screw 8.5 Nm B
Check the state of the passenger
compartment internal temperature sensor.
Connect the connector (6) for the passenger

compartment temperature sensor.
Fit the lower central trim panel (D) in the relative
seat on the dashboard.
On the left-hand side, tighten the upper lateral
panel (D).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the lower lateral

panel (D).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the right-hand side, tighten the lower screw

(3) fastening the lower central trim panel (D).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Tighten the central screw (2) fastening the lower
central trim panel.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Install and fix the button (1), connecting the

relevant connector.
Refit the complete glove compartment onto the dashboard ( E4.02).

Refit the lower left hand dashboard trim ( E4.02).
Removing the left hand dashboard trim panel
The trim panel is located on the left-hand side of the dashboard.

Undo the two screws indicated fastening the left
hand trim panel (E).
Detach the left hand trim panel (E) from the

dashboard.
Disconnect the connector (1) from the TFT
display control button panel.
Disconnect the connector (2) from the external

light switch.
Remove the left hand trim panel (E).
Refitting the left hand dashboard trim panel

Pick up the left hand trim panel (E).

Connect the connector (2) to the external light
switch.
Connect the connector (1) to the TFT display

Fit the left hand trim panel (E) in the relative seat
on the dashboard.

left hand trim panel (E).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Removing the right hand dashboard trim panel
The trim panel is located on the right-hand side of the dashboard.

Remove the lower central dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).
On the inner right-hand side, undo the lateral

screw (1) fastening the right hand trim panel
(F).
Undo the two lateral screws (2) fastening the

right hand trim panel (F).
Undo the three central screws (3) fastening the
Undo the lateral screw (4) fastening the right
hand trim panel (F).
Remove the right hand trim panel (F) from the
dashboard.
Refitting the right hand dashboard trim panel

Fit the right hand trim panel (F) in the relative

seat on the dashboard.
Tighten the lateral screw (4) fastening the right
hand trim panel (F).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the three central screws (3) fastening the


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the two lateral screws (2) fastening the

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the inner right-hand side, tighten the lateral

screw (1) fastening the right hand trim panel
(F).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Refit the lower central dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

Removing the dashboard

Remove the front seats ( E4.01).

Remove the console trim panel ( E4.03).
Remove the NIT ( E5.17).
Remove the steering column ( D5.06).
Remove covers and mats ( E4.05).
Remove only the passenger side footrest.
Undo the two indicated screws fastening the
engine compartment lid release lever (2) and
remove the lever, leaving it connected to the
cable.
Disconnect the connectors (3), (4), (5) and (6).

Undo the lower right hand screw (7) fastening
the dashboard.
Disconnect the connector (8) from the right-hand

side of the dashboard.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the lower
right hand mounting bracket for the
dashboard (A) to the bodyshell.
Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the lower
right hand mounting bracket (9) for the
dashboard (A) to the centre console and
remove the bracket.
lower right hand mounting bracket (9) for the
dashboard (A) to the dashboard subframe.
Disconnect the connector (10) from the airbag
ECU.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the lower

Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the lower
left hand mounting bracket (11) for the
dashboard (A) to the centre console and
remove the bracket.
lower left hand mounting bracket (11) for the

bracket (12) linking the dashboard to the
centre console.
Remove the bracket (12) linking the dashboard
to the centre console.
Undo the lower left hand screw (13) fastening the
dashboard (A).
Lift the passenger side mat to reveal the ADR

ECU and disconnect the two indicated
connectors for the GPS antenna and the
GSM antenna.

Disconnect the unions (15) and (16) for the A.C.
system pipes.
Open the clamps (17) and (18).
Move the pipe (20) away from the pipes (21).
Disconnect the cooling system pipes (21).
Open the indicated clamp.
Prise out and remove the two defroster grilles

(22) from the upper dashboard trim panel.
upper left hand part of the dashboard (A).

upper right hand part of the dashboard (A).

dashboard (A) to the right hand mounting
bracket.
dashboard (A) to the left hand mounting
bracket.
Firmly grip the dashboard (A) and remove from

the vehicle.
Refitting the dashboard

Fastening lateral fastener between dashboard Screw 40 Nm B
and lateral mounting brackets Screw (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Fastening upper fastener between dashboard Screw 8.5 Nm B
and bodyshell
Fastening AC unit to centre insulation Nut 10 Nm B
Fastening dashboard - centre console link bracket Screw 8.5 Nm B
dashboard subframe
Fastening lower dashboard mounting brackets - Nut 8.5 Nm B
centre console
bodyshell
Take particular care NOT TO crush the

electrical cables and wiring harnesses.
Firmly grip the dashboard (A) and install in the

vehicle.
Ensure that the heater pipes and the connector
block for the A.C. system pipes are correctly
inserted in the relative holes in the bulkhead
between the passenger compartment and
the engine compartment.
Pre-tighten the two screws indicated, fastening

the dashboard (A) to the left hand mounting
bracket, in a cross pattern.


dashboard (A) to the left hand mounting
bracket.

Screw 40 Nm B
Pre-tighten the two screws indicated, fastening
the dashboard (A) to the left hand mounting
bracket, in a cross pattern.


dashboard (A) to the right hand mounting
bracket.

Screw 40 Nm B

upper right hand part of the dashboard (A).

Screw 8.5 Nm B

upper left hand part of the dashboard (A).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the two defroster grilles (22) in their
respective seats and press until they snap
audibly into place.
Connect the cooling system pipes (21).

Move the pipe (20) toward the pipes (21).
Close the clamps (17) and (18).
Fit and tighten the indicated clamp.

Connect the unions (15) and (16) for the A.C.
system pipes.

Nut 10 Nm B
Lift the passenger side mat to reveal the ADR

ECU and connect the two indicated
connectors for the GPS antenna and the
GSM antenna.
Hand tighten the lower screw (13) fastening the

dashboard (A).
Fit the bracket (12) linking the dashboard to the
centre console in the respective seat.
bracket (12) linking the dashboard to the
centre console.

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the lower left hand mounting bracket (11) for

the dashboard (A) in its respective seat.

Screw 8.5 Nm B

dashboard (A) to the centre console.

Nut 8.5 Nm B
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the lower

left hand mounting bracket for the dashboard
(A) to the bodyshell.

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Connect the connector (10) to the airbag ECU.
Fit the lower right hand mounting bracket (9) for
the dashboard (A) in its respective seat and
tighten the two lower fastener nuts and the
two upper fastener screws.

Screw 8.5 Nm B

dashboard (A) to the centre console.

Nut 8.5 Nm B
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the lower


Screw 8.5 Nm B
Connect the connector (8) on the right-hand side

of the dashboard.
On the left-hand side, hand tighten the lower
screw (7) fastening the dashboard.
Connect the connectors (3), (4), (5) and (6).
Fit the engine compartment lid release lever (2)

in its respective seat and tighten the two
fastener screws indicated.

Screw 2.6 Nm C
Refit covers and mats ( E4.05).

Refit the steering column ( D5.06).
Refit the NIT ( E5.17).
Refit the console trim panel ( E4.03).
Refit the front seats ( E4.01).
Removing the upper dashboard trim panel

Remove the dashboard ( E4.02).
Undo the screw (1) fastening the rear right hand
part of the upper dashboard trim panel (A).
Undo the three screws (2) fastening the rear

centre part of the upper dashboard trim panel
(A).
Undo the screw (3) fastening the rear left hand

Undo the two screws (4) fastening the passenger
airbag mounting bracket to the dashboard
subframe.
Undo the screw (5) fastening the front right hand
Undo the two screws (6) fastening the front

(A).
On the right-hand side of the steering column,

undo the screw (7) fastening the upper
dashboard trim panel (A).
On the left-hand side of the steering column,
undo the screw (8) fastening the upper
Undo the screw (9) fastening the front left hand

Very carefully, detach the upper dashboard trim
panel (A) from the dashboard subframe.
Disconnect the two connectors (10) for the

passenger side airbag.
Remove the upper dashboard trim panel from
the vehicle.
Refitting the upper dashboard trim panel

Fastening the upper dashboard trim panel Screw 6 Nm B
Fastening passenger side airbag mounting Screw 8.5 Nm B
bracket - dashboard subframe
Place the upper dashboard trim panel in the

vehicle.
Connect the two connectors (10) for the
passenger side airbag.
Very carefully, connect the upper dashboard trim

panel (A) to the dashboard subframe.
Tighten the screw (9) fastening the front left hand

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the left-hand side of the steering column,
tighten the screw (8) fastening the upper

Screw 2.6 Nm B
On the right-hand side of the steering column,

tighten the screw (7) fastening the upper

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the two screws (6) fastening the front

(A).

Screw 6 Nm B
Tighten the screw (5) fastening the front right
hand part of the upper dashboard trim panel
(A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the two screws (4) fastening the

passenger airbag mounting bracket to the
dashboard subframe.

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Tighten the screw (3) fastening the rear left hand


Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the three screws (2) fastening the rear

(A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the rear right
hand part of the upper dashboard trim panel
(A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Refit the dashboard ( E4.02).

E4.03 Centre console
Removing the armrest
Located on the centre console trim panel.

internal armrest (B) trim (A).
Remove the internal armrest (B) trim (A).

armrest (B) to the respective mounting hinge
(C).
Remove the armrest (B) from its seat.
Refitting the armrest
Fit the armrest (B) in its seat.
armrest (B) to the respective mounting hinge
(C).
Fit the inner armrest (B) trim (A) in the respective

seat.
internal armrest (B) trim (A).
Removing the glove compartment on the centre console trim panel
Located on the centre console trim panel, under the armrest.

glove compartment (A).
Remove the glove compartment (A) from the
relative seat.
Refitting the glove compartment on the centre console trim panel

Fit the glove compartment (A) in the relative seat.
glove compartment (A).
Removing the centre console control panel
Located at the front of the centre console trim panel.

Remove the glove compartment on the centre console trim panel ( E4.03).
Remove the centre tunnel console mats.
Disconnect the connectors (1), (2) and (3).

control panel (A) to the centre console trim
panel.
Remove control panel (A) from the respective
seat on the centre console trim panel, easing
Refitting the centre console control panel

Fastening centre console control panel - centre Screw 5 Nm B
console trim panel
Fit the control panel (A) in the respective seat on

the centre console trim panel.
control panel (A).

Screw 5 Nm B
Connect the connectors (1), (2) and (3).

Refit the centre tunnel console mats.
Refit the glove compartment on the centre console trim panel ( E4.03).
Removing the console trim panel
The trim panel is located in the centre of the passenger compartment.

Remove the A.C. control panel ( F2.11).
Remove the centre console control panel ( E4.03).
Remove the armrest ( E4.03).
Move the seats back as far as possible.
Undo the two screws fastening the rear section

of the console trim panel (A).
Undo the two nuts fastening the central section
of the console trim panel (A).
On the right hand side of the console trim panel

(A), undo the front fastener screw (1).
On the left hand side of the console trim panel

(A), undo the front fastener screw (2).
Pulling upwards, detach the rear section of the console trim panel and remove, easing out toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Refitting the console trim panel
Fit the front of the console trim panel and insert the rear in the relevant seat.
On the left hand side of the console trim panel

(A), hand tighten the front fastener screw (2).
On the right hand side of the console trim panel

(A), hand tighten the front fastener screw (1).
Hand tighten the two nuts fastening the central

section of the console trim panel (A).
Hand tighten the two screws fastening the rear
section of the console trim panel (A).
Refit the armrest ( E4.03).

Refit the centre console control panel ( E4.03).
Refit the A.C. control panel ( F2.11).
E4.04 Passenger compartment and roof trim panels
A - Windscreen cross member trim panel

B - Right hand windscreen pillar trim panel
C - Left hand windscreen pillar trim panel
D - Passenger side sun visor
E - Driver side sun visor
F - Right hand upper lateral trim panel
G - Right hand flap
H - Centre trim panel
I - Upper right hand rollbar trim panel
L - Upper right hand rollbar trim panel
M - Upper centre rollbar mounting
N - Left hand flap
O - Left hand upper lateral trim panel
P - Left hand lower lateral trim panel
Q - Right hand lower lateral trim panel
Removing the roof trim panels
Sun visors
Driver side
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the sun

visor (A).
Remove the sun visor (A).
Passenger side
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the sun

visor (A).
Remove the sun visor (A).
Internal windscreen pillar trim panels
Left
Using a suitable tool, detach the top part of the

internal windscreen pillar trim panel (A) first
and then the lower part from the relative seat.
Remove the internal windscreen pillar trim panel
(A) from the vehicle.
Right
Using a suitable tool, detach the top part of the

internal windscreen pillar trim panel (A) first
and then the lower part from the relative seat.
Remove the internal windscreen pillar trim panel
(A) from the vehicle.
Windscreen cross member trim panel
Remove the cabin light ( E5.18).
Remove both sun visors.
Remove both internal windscreen pillar trim panels.

fastening the fixing plate (A).
Remove the fixing plate (A) from the relative seat.
Remove the fixing plate (A) from the relative seat.

fastening the windscreen cross member trim
panel (B).

panel (B).
Detach the windscreen cross member trim panel
(B) from the relative seat, pulling toward the
rear of the vehicle.
Remove the windscreen cross member trim
panel (B) from the vehicle.
Refitting the roof trim panels

Fastening windscreen cross member trim panel Screw 2 Nm B
Fastening retractable hard top striker plate fixing Screw 2 Nm B
plates
Fastening sun visors Screw 3 Nm B
Windscreen cross member trim panel
Place the windscreen cross member trim panel

(B) in the vehicle.
Fit the windscreen cross member trim panel (B)
in the relative seat, pressing toward the front
of the vehicle to attach the relative fastener
clips and ensuring that the seal fits flush with
the panel.
panel (B).

Screw 2 Nm B

panel (B).

Screw 2 Nm B
Fit the fixing plate (A) in the relative seat,

ensuring that the seal fits flush.

Screw 2 Nm B
Fit the fixing plate (A) in the relative seat.

Screw 2 Nm B
Refit both internal windscreen pillar trim panels.

Refit both sun visors.
Refit the cabin light ( E5.18).
Internal windscreen pillar trim panels
Left
Fit the internal windscreen pillar trim panel (A) in

the relative seat.
Attaching the lower part of the panel first and
then the upper part, press the internal
windscreen pillar trim panel (A) against the
windscreen pillar.
Check that the internal windscreen pillar trim
panel seal sits flush.
Right
Fit the internal windscreen pillar trim panel (A) in

the relative seat.
Attaching the lower part of the panel first and
then the upper part, press the internal
windscreen pillar trim panel (A) against the
windscreen pillar.
Check that the internal windscreen pillar trim
panel seal sits flush.
Sun visors
Driver side
Fit the sun visor (A) in the relative seat.

sun visor (A).

Screw 3 Nm B
Passenger side
Fit the sun visor (A) in the relative seat.

sun visor (A).

Screw 3 Nm B
Removing the passenger compartment trim panels
Upper lateral trim panels
The following procedure is for removing the upper right hand lateral trim panel. The procedure for
removing the upper left hand lateral trim panel is identical.

Remove the rear trim panel.
Remove the safety clip (14).
Detach the spring (1) for the flap control cable
(G) for the right hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Detach the clip (15) fastening the flap control
cable (G) for the right hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Arrange the flap control cable (G) so that is does
not obstruct the movement of the RHT during
the subsequent steps.

Electrically bring the RHT into the intermediate position, with the Rear Roof shell over the Front Roof shell
and with the Tonneau Cover completely opened.
Block the flap (H) in the open position, applying a

strip of adhesive tape (16).
Move the RHT roof electrically to bring the Front and Rear Roof shells into the luggage compartment
together, without closing the Tonneau Cover.

Undo the screw (3) fastening the front seat belt
(A).
2+2 Version ONLY.
2+2 Version ONLY.
Undo the screw (5) fastening the rear seat belt

(B).
Detach the seal (6) from the upper lateral trim
panel.
Undo the front fastener screw (7) for the upper
lateral trim panel.
Using a suitable tool, prise out the lower part of

the speaker protection grille (C) and remove
the grille.

guide (D).
Prise out the front seat belt guide (D) from the
upper lateral trim panel.
Undo the centre fastener screw (9) for the upper
lateral trim panel.
lower part of the front seat belt guide (D).
Remove the front seat belt (A) from the front seat
belt guide (D).
Carefully remove the strip of adhesive tape (16)

applied previously to block the flap (H) in the
open position.
Detach the seal (11) from the upper lateral trim

panel.
Undo the rear fastener screw (12) for the upper
lateral trim panel.
Undo the screw (13) fastening the rear seat belt
guide.
2+2 Version ONLY.
Prise out the rear seat belt guide (E) from the
lower part of the rear seat belt guide (E).
Remove the rear seat belt (B) from the rear seat
belt guide (E).
Pulling outwards, remove the lateral upper trim

panel from its seat, detaching the respective
mounting bracket from the rubber spacer (H).
Note the position of the upper lateral trim panel
mounting bracket relative to the respective
seat on the rubber spacer (H).
Remove the upper lateral trim panel (F) from its
seat, pulling the seat belts (A) and (B) out
through the respective holes in the upper
lateral trim panel (F).
The rear seat belt (B) is installed in the 2+2
version only.
Carefully remove the flap control cable (G) from

its seat.
Lateral lower passenger compartment trim panels
The following procedure is for removing the upper right hand lateral trim panel. The procedure for
removing the upper left hand lateral trim panel is identical.
Remove the upper lateral trim panel.

Remove the front rollbar trim panel.
Move the RHT roof electrically into the Spider position.

lower lateral trim panel (A).
Detach the seal (1).
Detach the lower lateral trim panel (A) from the
relative seat.
Disconnect the two loudspeaker connectors (2).

Remove the lower lateral trim panel (A) from the
vehicle.
Centre passenger compartment trim panel
Remove both upper lateral trim panels.

Remove the lower rollbar trim panel and both the front rollbar trim panels.

Detach both upper rollbar covers (A).
Undo the five indicated lower fastener screws for
the centre trim panel (B).
On the left-hand side, undo the two upper

fastener screws indicated for the centre trim
panel (B).
On the right-hand side, undo the two upper

panel (B).
Remove the centre trim panel (B) from the
vehicle.
Upper centre rollbar mounting
Remove the centre passenger compartment trim panel.

Move the RHT roof electrically into the Spider position, without closing the Tonneau Cover.
On the left-hand side, undo the lateral fastener

screws (4) for the upper centre rollbar
mounting (A).
On the right-hand side, undo the lateral fastener

mounting (A).
On the right-hand side, undo the centre fastener
screw (5) for the upper centre rollbar
mounting (A).
On the left-hand side, undo the centre fastener

mounting (A).
Remove the upper centre rollbar mounting from the relative seat.
Refitting the passenger compartment trim panels

Fastening upper centre rollbar mounting Screw 4 Nm C
Fastening centre trim panel Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening lower lateral trim panel Screw 2 Nm C
Fastening upper lateral trim panel Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening seat belt ring - bodyshell Screw 40 Nm A
Upper centre rollbar mounting

Move the RHT roof into the Spider position, keeping the Tonneau Cover open.
Fit the upper centre rollbar mounting in the relative seat.
On the left-hand side, tighten the centre fastener

mounting (A).

Screw 4 Nm C
On the right-hand side, tighten the centre

fastener screw (5) for the upper centre rollbar
mounting (A).

Screw 4 Nm C
On the right-hand side, tighten the lateral

fastener screws (4) for the upper centre
rollbar mounting (A).

Screw 4 Nm C
On the left-hand side, tighten the lateral fastener
mounting (A).

Screw 4 Nm C

Refit the centre passenger compartment trim panel.
Centre passenger compartment trim panel

Fit the centre trim panel (B) in the relative seat.
On the right-hand side, tighten the two upper
panel (B).

Screw 5 Nm B
On the left-hand side, tighten the two upper

panel (B).

Screw 5 Nm B
Tighten the five indicated lower fastener screws

for the centre trim panel (B).

Screw 5 Nm B
Refit both upper rollbar covers (A).

Refit the lower rollbar trim panel and both the front rollbar trim panels.
Refit both upper lateral trim panels.

Lateral lower passenger compartment trim panels
The following procedure is for refitting the lower left hand lateral trim panel. The procedure for refitting the
lower right hand lateral trim panel is identical.
Place the lateral lower trim panel (A) in the

vehicle.
Connect the two loudspeaker connectors (2).
Fit the lower lateral trim panel (A) in the relative

seat.
Refit the seal (1).
lower lateral trim panel (A).

Screw 2 Nm C

Refit the front rollbar trim panel.
Refit the upper lateral trim panel.
Upper lateral passenger compartment trim panels
The following procedure is for refitting the upper right hand lateral trim panel. The procedure for refitting
the upper left hand lateral trim panel is identical.
Move the RHT roof electrically to bring the Front and Rear Roof shells into the luggage compartment
together, without closing the Tonneau Cover.
Carefully fit the flap control cable (G) into the
respective seat.
Arrange the flap control cable (G) so that is does
not obstruct the movement of the RHT during
the subsequent steps.
Fit the upper lateral trim panel (F) in the

respective seat, feeding the seat belts (A)
and (B) through the respective holes in the
upper lateral trim panel (F).
The rear seat belt (B) is installed in the 2+2
version only.
Pushing outwards manually, fasten the upper

lateral trim panel, installing the relative
mounting bracket in its original position on the
rubber spacer (H).
2+2 Version ONLY.
Thread the rear seat belt (B) through the rear

seat belt guide (E).
Hand tighten the two screws indicated fastening
the lower part of the rear seat belt guide (E).
Fit the rear seat belt guide (E) into the relative
seat on the upper lateral trim panel.
Hand tighten the screw (13) fastening the rear

seat belt guide.
Tighten the rear fastener screw (12) for the

Screw 10 Nm B
Refit the seal (11) on the upper lateral trim panel,

ensuring that it fits flush with the panel.
Block the flap (H) in the open position, applying a
strip of adhesive tape (16).
Insert the front seat belt (A) through the front

seat belt guide (D).
the lower part of the front seat belt guide (D).
Tighten the centre fastener screw (9) for the


Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the front seat belt guide (D) into the relative
seat on the upper lateral trim panel.
Hand tighten the screw (8) fastening the front
seat belt guide (D).
Refit the loudspeaker protector grille (C).
Tighten the front fastener screw (7) for the upper

lateral trim panel.

Screw 10 Nm B
Refit the seal (6) on the upper lateral trim panel,

ensuring that it fits flush with the panel.
2+2 Version ONLY.
Hand tighten the screw (5) fastening the rear

seat belt (B).

Screw 40 Nm A
2+2 Version ONLY.
Refit the cover (4).
Hand tighten the screw (3) fastening the front

seat belt (A).

Screw 40 Nm A
Refit the cover (2).
Electrically bring the RHT into the intermediate position, with the Rear Roof shell over the Front Roof shell
and with the Tonneau Cover completely opened.
Carefully remove the strip of adhesive tape (16)
applied previously to block the flap (H) in the
open position.
Bring the RHT electrically into the Coupé position, completing the closing cycle.
Attach the clip (15) fastening the flap control

cable (G) for the right hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Attach the spring (1) for the flap control cable (G)
to the Rear Roof shell kinematics.
Refit the safety clip (14).

Refit the rear trim panel.
Replacing the flap kinematics

Fastening flap kinematics to passenger Screw 2.6 Nm B
compartment upper lateral trim panels

Remove the flap (A).

Remove the kinematics assembly (B) and
replace it.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Place the flap (A).


E4.05 Mats
A - Removable mat, passenger side

B - Removable driver side mat
C - Right hand service access
D - Right hand mat
E - Left hand mat
F - Left hand service access
Removing the covers and mats
Removable driver side mat
Slide the driver side seat back completely.

Prise out the two indicated buttons fastening the
removable driver side mat (A).
Remove the removable driver side mat (A).
Removable mat, passenger side
Slide the passenger side seat back completely.
Prise out the two indicated buttons fastening the

removable passenger side mat (A).
Remove the removable passenger side mat (A).
Driver side service access mat.
Remove the removable driver side mat.

Undo the three indicated buttons fastening the
right hand service access mat (A).
Pull the tab (1) and remove the right hand
service access mat (A).
Passenger side service access mat.
Remove the removable passenger side mat.
Undo the three indicated buttons fastening the

left hand service access mat (A).
Pull the tab (1) and remove the left hand service
access mat (A).
Driver side centre tunnel mat

Remove the driver side seat.
Detach the lower part of the left hand centre
console mat (A), pulling outwards.
Detach the upper part of the left hand centre
console mat (A) from the centre console trim
panel, pulling downwards.
Remove the left hand centre console mat (A)
from the vehicle.
Passenger side centre tunnel mat

Remove the passenger side seat.
Detach the lower part of the right hand centre

console mat (A), pulling outwards.
Detach the upper part of the right hand centre
console mat (A) from the centre console trim
panel, pulling downwards.
Remove the right hand centre console mat (A)
from the vehicle.
Passenger side footrest mat

passenger side footrest (A)
Remove the passenger side footrest (A).
For vehicles with Stop&Start system

passenger side footrest (A)
Remove the passenger side footrest (A).
Floor mat, passenger side
Remove the door seal ( E3.11).

Remove the removable passenger side mat.
Remove the passenger side service access mat.
Remove the passenger side centre tunnel mat.
Remove the passenger side footrest mat.
Detach and remove the cover (A).
Remove the passenger side floor mat, detaching
from the clip fastening it to the sill.
Floor mat, driver side
Remove the accelerator pedal ( F3.11).

Remove the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel ( E5.14).
Remove the door seal ( E3.11).
Remove the driver side service access mat.
Remove the driver side centre tunnel mat.

Remove the cover (A).
Remove the guard (B).
Detach and remove the cover (C).

Remove the driver side floor mat, detaching from
the clip fastening it to the sill.
Refitting the covers and mats

Fastening accelerator pedal guard Screw 9 Nm B
Floor mat, driver side

Fit the driver side floor mat, attaching to the clip
fastening it to the sill.
Fit and install the cover (C).
Fit the guard (B).


Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the guard (A).

Refit the driver side centre tunnel mat.
Refit the driver side service access mat.
Refit the removable driver side mat.
Refit the door seal ( E3.11).
Refit the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel ( E5.14).
Refit the accelerator pedal ( F3.11).
Floor mat, passenger side
Fit the passenger side floor mat, attaching to the

clip fastening it to the sill.
Fit and install the cover (A).
Refit the passenger side footrest mat.

Refit the passenger side centre tunnel mat.
Refit the passenger side service access mat.
Refit the removable passenger side mat.
Refit the door seal ( E3.11).
Passenger side footrest mat

Fit the passenger side footrest mat (A) in the
respective seat.
passenger side footrest (A).
Fit the passenger side footrest mat (A) in the

respective seat.
Driver side centre tunnel mat
Place the left hand centre console mat (A) in the

vehicle.
Fit the upper part of the left hand centre console
mat (A) under the centre console trim panel,
pushing upwards.
Fit the lower part of the left hand centre tunnel
mat (A), pressing inwards until it snaps
audibly into place.

Refit the driver side seat.
Passenger side centre tunnel mat
Place the right hand centre console mat (A) in

the vehicle.
Fit the upper part of the right hand centre
console mat (A) under the centre console trim
panel, pushing upwards.
Fit the lower part of the right hand centre console
mat (A), pressing inwards until it snaps
audibly into place.

Refit the passenger side seat.
Passenger side service access mat
Fit the right hand service access mat (A) in the

respective seat.
Tighten the three indicated buttons fastening the
right hand service access mat (A).
Refit the removable driver side mat.
Driver side service access mat

Fit the left hand service access mat (A) in the
respective seat.
Tighten the three indicated buttons fastening the
left hand service access mat (A).
Refit the removable passenger side mat.
Removable driver side mat
Fit the removable driver side mat (A) in its

respective seat.
Press the two indicated buttons fastening the
removable driver side mat (A) manually until
they audibly snap into place.
Removable mat, passenger side

Fit the removable passenger side mat (A) in its
respective seat.
Press the two indicated buttons fastening the
removable passenger side mat (A) manually
until they audibly snap into place.
E4.06 Soundproofing panels
A - Dashboard internal insulation

B - Centre console insulation
C - Right under dashboard insulation
D - Left under dashboard insulation
E - Passenger footrest insulation
F - Driver side footrest insulation (UP TO Assembly No.97447)
G - Engine compartment insulation
E4.07 Luggage compartment trim panels
Position of luggage compartment trim panels
A - Removable trim panel

B - Sill protector trim panel
C - Left hand inspection hatch
D - Right hand inspection hatch
E - Rear left hand trim panel
F - Rear right hand trim panel
G - Rear left hand backrest release cover
H - Rear right hand backrest release cover
I - Left hand main roof cylinder trim panel
L - Right hand main roof cylinder trim panel
M - Front left hand trim panel
N - Front right hand trim panel
O - Lower rollbar trim panel
P - Luggage compartment floor trim
Removing the luggage compartment trim panels
Luggage compartment lid trim panel

Remove the inner handle (A).

Prise out and remove the indicated buttons.

Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel
(B).
Tool kit
Lift and remove the removable trim (A) with the

relative loop.
Remove the bag (B).
Undo the screws and the nut indicated

Remove the tool kit (C) complete with
accessories.
Tool kit (FROM Assembly No. 103179, consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles not
Lift the removable trim (A) with the relative loop.

Remove the bag (B) and the tyre repair kit (C).

Remove the tool kit (D) complete with
accessories.
Sill protector trim panel
Remove the tool kit.

Remove the sill protector trim (A).
Lower rollbar trim panel

the relative levers (1).

Remove the rollbar trim (B).
Front rollbar trim panels

compartment.
Remove the lower rollbar trim panel.

Left

Remove the front left rollbar trim (B).
Right

Remove the front right rollbar trim (B).
Rear backrest release covers
Left

Remove the rear left hand backrest release
cover (A), detaching the rear left hand
backrest lock Bowden cable.
Right

Remove the rear right hand backrest release
cover (A), detaching the rear right hand
backrest lock Bowden cable.
Main roof cylinder trim panels
Left

cover.
Remove the left hand main roof cylinder trim
panel (A).
Right

cover.
Remove the right hand main roof cylinder trim
panel (A).
Main roof cylinder trim panels (FROM Assembly No. 103179, refer to Spare Parts Catalogue to identify
Left

cover.
Detach and remove the indicated button.
panel (A).
Right

cover.
panel (A).
Rear trim panels
Left

cover.
panel.
Detach the length of seal (B) in contact with the
left hand trim panel (A).
Remove the left hand rear trim panel (A).
Right

cover.
panel.
Detach the length of seal (B) in contact with the
rear right hand trim panel (A).
Remove the right hand rear trim panel (A),
disconnecting the light unit connector.
Front trim panels
Left

cover.
Remove the left hand front trim panel (A).
Right

cover.
Remove the right hand front trim panel (A).
Front trim panels (FROM Assembly No. 103179, consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles
not affected by modification)
Left

cover.
Remove the left hand front trim panel (A).
Right

cover.
Remove the right hand front trim panel (A).
Luggage compartment floor trim
Remove the front right and left hand trim panels.

Remove the rear right and left hand trim panels.
Remove the removable trim panel and the toolkit.
Remove the four load retainer eyes from the

luggage compartment floor trim (P), undoing
the respective screws.
Remove the luggage compartment floor trim (P).
Refitting the luggage compartment trim panels

Fastening sill protector trim panel Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening tool kit Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening tool kit Nut 6 Nm B
Luggage compartment floor trim
Fit the luggage compartment floor trim (P).

Fit the four luggage retainer eyes and tighten the
respective screws.
Refit the removable trim panel and the toolkit.

Refit the rear right and left hand trim panels.
Refit the front right and left hand trim panels.
Front trim panels
Left
Fit the left hand front trim panel (A).

Fasten the indicated buttons.
Refit the rear left hand backrest release cover.
Right
Fit the right hand front trim panel (A).

Refit the rear right hand backrest release cover.
Front trim panels (FROM Assembly No. 103179, consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles
not affected by modification)
Left
Fit the left hand front trim panel (A).

Right
Fit the right hand front trim panel (A).

Rear trim panels

Left
Fit the left hand rear trim panel (A).

Fit the length of seal (B) in contact with the left
hand trim panel (A).
Refit the left hand main roof cylinder trim panel.
Right
Fit the right hand rear trim panel (A).

Fit the length of seal (B) in contact with the right
hand trim panel (A).
Refit the right hand main roof cylinder trim panel.
Main roof cylinder trim panels
Left
Fit the left hand main roof cylinder trim panel (A).
Right
Fit the right hand main roof cylinder trim panel

(A).
Main roof cylinder trim panels (FROM Assembly No. 103179, refer to Spare Parts Catalogue to identify
Left
Fit the left hand main roof cylinder trim panel (A).
Fasten the indicated button.
Right
Fit the right hand main roof cylinder trim panel

(A).
Rear backrest release covers

Left
Fit the rear left hand backrest release cover (A),

fastening the rear left hand backrest lock
Bowden cable.
Right
Fit the rear right hand backrest release cover

(A), fastening the rear right hand backrest
lock Bowden cable.
Front rollbar trim panels

compartment.
Left
Fit the front left hand rollbar trim panel (B) in the
relative seat.
Right
Fit the front right hand rollbar trim panel (B) in

the relative seat.
Refit the lower rollbar trim panel.
Lower rollbar trim panel

compartment.
Fit the rollbar trim panel (B) in the relative seat.
Sill protector trim panel
Fit the sill protector trim panel (A) in the relative

seat.

Screw 10 Nm B
Refit the tool kit.
Tool kit
Fit the tool kit (C) complete with accessories.
Tighten the screws and the nut indicated.

Screw 8 Nm B
Nut 6 Nm B
Fit the bag (B).
Fit the removable trim (A).
Tool kit (FROM Assembly No. 103179, consult the Spare Parts Catalogue to identify vehicles not
Fit the tool kit (D) complete with accessories.
Stow the bag (B) and the tyre repair kit (C).
Fit the removable trim (A).
Luggage compartment lid trim panel

Fit the luggage compartment lid trim panel (B).

Fit the inner handle (A).

Removing the luggage compartment separator
Located in the luggage compartment.

UP TO Assembly No. 97816, remove the rear backrest release trim covers and the main roof cylinder
trim panels.
FROM Assembly No. 97817, remove the rear backrest release trim covers, the main roof cylinder trim
panels and the front trim panels.

Undo the screw (1).
Undo the screws (2), retrieving the respective
spacers.
Undo the screw (1).

Undo the screws (2), retrieving the respective
spacers.
Undo the nut (3) and retrieve the respective plate.

Undo the two nuts (4) and retrieve the respective
plate.
Undo the nut (3) and retrieve the respective plate.
Undo the two nuts (4) and retrieve the respective
plate.
Remove the luggage compartment partition, disconnecting the sensor connector.

Remove the luggage compartment partition, disconnecting the sensor connector.
Refitting the luggage compartment separator
Fit the luggage compartment partition, connecting the sensor connector.

Tighten the screws (2), fitting the respective
spacers.

Tighten the screws (2), fitting the respective
spacers.
Fit the respective plate and tighten the nut (3).

Fit the respective plate and tighten the two nuts
(4).
Fit the respective plate and tighten the nut (3).
Fit the respective plate and tighten the two nuts
(4).
Fit the luggage compartment partition, connecting the sensor connector.


UP TO Assembly No. 97816, refit the rear backrest release trim covers and the main roof cylinder trim
panels.
FROM Assembly No. 97817, refit the rear backrest release trim covers, the main roof cylinder trim
E5.01 Location of controls in vehicle
Instruments and controls on roof panel
A - Door lock - unlock

B - Disable anti-lift protection
C - Driver side light on / Central light on (for vehicles with Stop&Start system)
D - Central light on / Stop&Start system on - off (for vehicles with Stop&Start system)
E - Passenger side light on / Central light on (for vehicles with Stop&Start system)
F - Cabin light
G - Rear view mirror
H - Activating / deactivating electrochromic mirror
L - Enabling/disabling the front parking sensors (optional)
M - Passenger airbag disabled warning light
Instruments and controls on the dashboard

A - External light switch
B - TFT display controls
C - Parking brake controls
D - Engine compartment lid release lever
E - Instrument panel
F - NIT
G - Hazard warning light button
H - Cup holder
Instruments and controls on steering wheel

A - Horn button
B - Engine start button
C - Manettino
D - NIT controls
E - DCT gearbox gearshift paddles
F - Steering column stalks
G - Electrically adjustable steering wheel control
H - Ignition switch
Instruments and controls on centre console
A - A.C. control panel

B - DCT gearbox controls
C - Retractable hard top controls
D - Door window controls
E - Ashtray - Cigarette lighter
Instruments and controls on centre console (mechanical gearbox version)

A - A.C. control panel
B - Mechanical gearbox gearshift paddles
C - Retractable hard top controls
D - Door window controls
E - Ashtray
F - Cigarette lighter
E5.02 Instrument panel
A - Colour TFT display

B - Analogue electronic speedometer
C - Electronic analogue tachometer
D - DOT MATRIX display
E - Warning lights
Colour TFT display
It displays the following information:

Clock;
Date;
External temperature;
Engine coolant temperature / Engine oil temperature;
Audio;
Fuel level;
Total odometer / Trip odometer / "Range";
Selected driving mode;
Check / Check OK;
Faults and indications.
The main screens are accessible via the relative control buttons:
SPORT screen;
TYRES screen (tyre pressure and temperature);
TRIP A/B screen;
MENU screen.
Press the DISP (Display) button to access the main screens.

Once a screen is accessed, it remains constantly displayed on the display until the driver selects another.
The default screen is the last screen selected (set) by the driver.
The following are descriptions of the main screens available on the TFT display with example images.
Display areas
The visible area of the display is divided into the following areas:
A - Clock (A1), Selected driving mode (“Manettino” repetition) (A2), External temperature and "Warning:
danger of ice" icon (A3);
B - Area with main screen content (e.g. full sized virtual Engine coolant temperature/Engine oil
temperature gauges for Sport screen) / Parking sensor screen / indicator screen: Dimming
(Backlighting) and Twilight sensor sensitivity / Engine Start screen;
B1 - Area with reduced size main screen content (e.g. "medium" sized virtual Engine coolant
temperature/Engine oil temperature gauges for Sport screen) / reduced size parking sensor screen;
B2 - Fault event/warning display (message text + specific symbol if applicable);
C - Area with summary symbol for priority 0/1/2 faults (C1), Engine coolant temperature / Engine oil
temperature gauge (minimised) / PASS AIRBAG OFF / SMS (C2);
D - Audio Info / Check - Check OK indication / Active call Info;
E - Fuel level gauge (E1), Total or trip "Travel distance" odometer (TRIP A or B) / "Range" indication (E2);
F - Speedometer repetition.
Clock
Time is indicated in “hh:mm” format and is shown permanently in the relative display area A1.
The CLOCK may be displayed in “12h – AM / PM” (e.g. 05:45 PM) format or “24 h” (e.g. 15:45) format,
depending on the user preferences in the vehicle set-up menu (on NQS or NIT, if available).
Note that in “12 h” mode, the time is followed by the letters 'AM' or 'PM' and is set in the following order: 1
AM, 2 AM…12 PM, 1PM, 2PM…12AM. Upon key-off, the selected mode is memorised and maintained at
the next Key-on.
During normal function, the two dots between the hour and minute values do not flash.
Use the buttons in the relative Menu function to set the hours and minutes (on NIT, if set-up menu is
available).
After each battery reconnection or processor reset, the clock should display the network time setting (not
flashing), at the initial value of 00:00. If 12h mode was selected previously from the menu, the time
displayed will be 12:00 AM.
Setting the clock:
Enable the “Time Setting” subfunction from the “Date and Time” screen. A screen is displayed containing
the current time (hh:mm) and the two format options (12h / 24h). The selection box (with black
background) highlights the first parameter.
Press MODE to enter hour adjustment mode. The selected parameter starts to flash.
Press UP / DOWN to increase or decrease the flashing value for the active parameter;
Press MODE briefly to confirm the modification (the new value is saved) and exit adjustment mode for
selected parameter;
The selected parameter stops flashing and the selection box remains on the hour parameter. Press UP /
DOWN to move the selection box to the minute parameter, then use the same procedure to adjust the
value.
Press the BACK arrow to return to the previous MENU level. The BACK arrow is usually only displayed in
submenu functions.
Press and hold MODE to cancel the modification (the previous value is restored), exit the Menu function
and recall the default screen.
Date
The date is always displayed in screens with Trip A or Trip B selected.

The DATE is displayed as the weekday (e.g. Mon), date and month, without the year.
The Minutes, Hours, Day, Month, Year and time format (12h/24h) may be modified with the buttons via the
relative Menu function (on NIT, with set-up menu available).
In the event of battery reconnection, “- - - - - - - -” is shown in the date area of the display. This will continue
to be displayed until the correct date is set by the driver in the set-up menu (on NIT, with set-up menu
available).
Setting the date:
Enable the “Date Setting” subfunction (from the “Date and Time” screen). A screen is displayed containing
the current date (xx-yy-aaaa). The selection box (with black background) highlights the first parameter
(“xx”).
Press UP / DOWN to move the selection box to the following parameters:
“xx”;
“yy”;
“aaaa”.
The selected parameter starts flashing. Press UP / DOWN to increase or decrease the active parameter;
Press MODE briefly to confirm the modification (the new value is saved) and exit adjustment mode for
selected parameter;
The selected parameter stops flashing and the selection box remains on the parameter that has just been
modified. Press UP / DOWN to move the selection box to the other parameters and use the same
procedure to adjust the relative value.
Press the BACK arrow to return to the previous MENU level. The BACK arrow is usually only displayed in
submenu functions.
Press and hold MODE to cancel the modification (the previous value is restored), exit the Menu function
and recall the default screen.
After the time-out period for button inactivity, the system exits the Menu function and any modifications made
to the previously flashing parameter and not confirmed with the MODE button are cancelled.
All the parameters described above are cyclically settable. For example, when setting the date, the UP button
may simply be pressed to change from 31 to 1, without having to go back through the values with the
DOWN button.
Storing the "Service start date"
When the vehicle is delivered, the service start date must be stored, from which the counter begins for the
expiry date for the first "Scheduled Maintenance" service.
The parameter is entered using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
"Scheduled Maintenance" reset
At every scheduled service date, the 'maintenance complete' procedure must be performed using the relative
function on the DEIS diagnostic tester.
The instrument panel must store the following data:
service No. performed;
service date;
total mileage at service date.
This data must be readable via the DEIS diagnostic tester.

At each service, before resetting the "Scheduled Maintenance" parameter, the instrument panel verifies that
the date on the CAN network is later than the “start of vehicle life” date or that of the previous service. If
these conditions are not met, the panel will not accept the reset operation.
External temperature
The temperature is shown permanently in the relative display area A3.
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE is shown in full sized format with a resolution of 1 °C or 1 °F (depending on

preferences in set-up menu), with no decimals.
Temperature display in either Centigrade or Fahrenheit is selectable from the menu (on NIT, with the set-up
menu available).
The parameter may temporarily be obscured by specific messages (the area of the display occupied is
proportional to message length), such as “Warning: danger of ice” and “Speed limit exceeded”.
The unit of measurement for temperature (letter C or F only) is not displayed when both “Warning: danger of
ice” and “Speed limit exceeded” are displayed in reduced format.
Engine coolant temperature / Engine oil temperature
The virtual gauges may be displayed in three different sizes (full size, medium, minimised) and in different
areas of the display, independently of the active screen and of whether or not an event needs to be
displayed.
With the Sport screen active, the virtual gauges are normally displayed in full size in the areas B1 (engine
coolant temperature gauge) and B2 (engine oil temperature gauge).
In the event of event/fault indication, the virtual gauges are both displayed in medium size in area B1.
In all instances, there is an area of the display (C2) reserved for minimised virtual gauges display
In the event of the water or engine oil temperatures reaching the relative threshold values indicated (when
they approach or reach the danger zone on the scale), the relative minimised gauges are shown in area
C2 of the display.
If both gauges reach the relative limit threshold, they will be shown in rolling order (every 5 seconds) in the
same area of the display indicated.
Minimised virtual gauges are displayed without pointers or graduated scales, but only as black symbols on a
background colour differing as follows:
Minimised virtual gauges assume a YELLOW background in the following conditions:

oil temperature between 302°F and 311°F;
oil temperature less than or equal to 307°F (red background switch-off);
coolant temperature between 248°F and 257°F;
coolant temperature less than or equal to 252°F (red background switch-off);
Minimised virtual gauges assume a RED background in the following conditions:
oil temperature equal to or more than 311°F;
coolant temperature equal to or more than 257°F.
Note that even with the Sport screen mode selected, minimised gauges will still be shown in area C2 as
usual.
Audio
The “Audio repetition” function is permanently shown in area D of the display.
The information displayed is as follows:

RADIO (FM1, FM2, FM3, FM TS, LW, MW, KW and AM TS frequency, RDS message if available);
CD Audio/CD Charger/CD MP3 (track number);
FLASH CARD (track number);
XM (channel name, channel number);
SIRIUS (channel name, channel number);
DAB (channel name, channel number);
TV (channel number);
HDD (track number);
JUKEBOX (track number);
DVD (playback time in hh:mm);
UMUSIC (track number);
iPod (track number);
MEDIAPLAYER (track number);
Audio information display is disabled only in the following conditions:

during the Key-on check cycle (Check in progress / Check OK);
when "Active call" display is requested.
Fuel level
This parameter is displayed permanently in the dedicated area E1.
The FUEL LEVEL gauge consists of nine yellow bars that extinguish as the fuel level diminishes.
When the second bar extinguishes, the last remaining bar turns red; this bar will remain lit until the fuel tank is
empty.
Total odometer / Trip odometer / "Range"
This parameter is shown only on the TFT display and is shown permanently in the dedicated area E2.
The three least significant digits in the total odometer count may be modified by the tester up to two times if
the total odometer count is less than 500 Km. Once this threshold is exceeded, the total odometer count
may no longer be reset.
Resetting the total odometer count also resets the scheduled maintenance (service) interval counters (date /
mileage) and the parameters of the Trip computer (A/B).
The odometer may be programmed with the vehicle mileage at the time of instrument replacing.
Programming is only possible if the value in the memory is lower than the new total mileage value.
When the TOTAL ODOMETER parameter is selected, the message “mi” are shown on the display together
with the total mileage.
The unit of measurement for the total odometer cannot be changed via the MENU function.
The total odometer count is displayed in six figures.
The total odometer reads only up to 999999 mi; to prevent tampering, once this value has been reached, the
odometer freezes permanently.
Via the specific option in the set-up menu, the speedometer reading display may be disabled, enabling the
display of TOTAL ODOMETER information only.
When the TRIP ODOMETER A (TRIP information) parameter is selected, the message “km [A]” (“mi[A]”) is
shown on the display together with the Km (mi) travelled.
When the trip odometer B (TRIP information) parameter is selected, the message “km [B] ” (“mi[B]”) is
shown on the display together with the Km (mi) travelled.
The trip count is displayed with three digits plus one decimal (separated by a point).
The trip odometer counts from 0.0 to 999.9 mi. Once the latter value is reached, the count returns to 0.0 and
continues to increase by one decimal point every 100 m (1/10 mi).
Via the specific option in the set-up menu, speedometer reading display may be disabled, enabling the
display of TRIP A information only.
When the "RANGE" parameter is selected, the relative symbol is shown on the display together with the
remaining range in Km (or mi).
Via the specific option in the set-up menu, speedometer reading display may be disabled, enabling the
display of "RANGE" information only.
Resetting the trip odometer:

Reset the trip odometer with the TFT display control buttons.
In default screen conditions (MENU function not active), if TRIP B was disabled previously, pressing and
holding MODE directly resets the TRIP A count.
Conversely, if TRIP B was previously enabled, the value for either trip A or trip B starts to flash in area E2 of
the display, depending on which of the two was active in this area previously.
Press UP / DOWN to select between trip A and trip B, then press MODE to reset the selected trip value.
After pressing MODE, the parameter displayed previously in E2 is recalled (and updated, if following a reset).
With the trip A or trip B value flashing, to recall the parameter previously shown in area E2 without resetting
either of the TRIP values, do not press any buttons for 10 seconds.
Counter reset is not possible after key-off or with the key removed.
Selected driving mode
The driving mode selected via the Manettino is shown permanently in area A of the display, even in the event
of one or more faults.
The name of the SELECTED DRIVING MODE is shown on the display:

COMFORT;
SPORT;
CST OFF/ESC OFF (selectable only from “SPORT” mode).
Depending on the selected driving mode, the background of area A changes colour (green, white or red) to
reflect the relative colour of the printing on the Manettino itself.
If, with CST/ESC enabled, the Manettino is turned to “CST OFF/ESC OFF”, the ASR/CST - ESC system
warning light illuminates and the CST/ESC symbol is shown on the display together with the additional
message “CST off/ESC off” for 5 seconds, accompanied by an audible signal.
If, with CST/ESC disabled, the Manettino is turned to “CST OFF/ESC OFF” or into any position other
than “SPORT”, the CST/ESC indicator light on the instrument panel extinguishes immediately and the TFT
display displays the relative message indicating that the “ASR/CST - ESC” function has been enabled.
At each Key-on, the TFT display shows the last Manettino status memorised at the previous key-off.
Information (text only) relative to the active Manettino mode is not displayed during the entire duration of the
display cycle of the specific messages “Warning: danger of ice” and “Speed limit exceeded”. At the end of
the display cycle of the specific messages “Warning: danger of ice” and “Speed limit exceeded”, the text
relative to the active Manettino mode is displayed once again.
Check
At Key-on, the check cycle starts and, irrespective of the currently active screen, the message "Check"
appears immediately in area D, together with five "segment symbols" that light up in sequence counting
the five seconds of the test cycle.
If the following conditions have been met:
1) the initial check cycle period for the instrument panel warning lights has elapsed;
2) engine speed has exceeded and remained above 700 rpm for at least 3 seconds;
3) the check cycle has been completed successfully (no failures);
4) the Service information has been displayed for five seconds.
The message “Check OK” is displayed against a green background in area D.
If only conditions 1, 3 and 4 have been met (engine not started), the main screen memorised previously
(even following a Key-off/Key-on cycle) is displayed immediately (without the “Check OK” message).
The “Check OK” message will be displayed as soon as condition 2 is met, provided that the other conditions
persist.
After the initial check cycle period for the instrument panel warning lights, the instrument panel waits a further
1000 ms before indicating any failures (with the exception of the warnings: “Minimum engine oil”
and/or “Inertia switch triggered” and/or “Electronically controlled gearbox safety warnings” and/or “EPB
disengaged” and/or “Parking brake on”, which are displayed as soon as they are available) or until
the “Check OK” message to ensure that all warning light checks requested by the external ECUs have
been completed (within the warning light check display period).
During the diagnostic cycle (“Check in progress” screen displayed), should any of the following events
occur: “Low engine oil pressure” and/or “Inertia switch triggered” and/or “Electronically controlled gearbox
safety warnings” and/or “EPB disengaged” and/or “Parking brake on”, the relative event is displayed
immediately (without interrupting the “Check in progress” screen), whereas, in the event of all other faults
(priority 0, 1 or 2), the fault is displayed only after the "Check in progress" screen display period has
elapsed.
In these cases, the display logic for diagnostic cycle progress is overridden and, once the fault display cycle
is complete, the standard screen or the currently active screen is displayed.
Safety messages relative to the electronically controlled gearbox are as follows:
depress brake pedal;
depress brake pedal and engage gear;
depress brake pedal and press PS to engage gear;
set gearbox lever to neutral;
delayed ignition;
reduce gear changes;
manual method unavailable;
automatic method unavailable;
gearbox not in Parking position;
carwash mode activation;
only manual unlock gearbox allowed: See manual.
The warning message for EPB disengagement is “Depress brake pedal and deactivate EPB”.
SPORT screen
The SPORT screen is the default screen.
The virtual "Engine coolant temperature" and "Engine oil temperature" gauges are displayed in full size in the
SPORT screen.
If any event that needs to be displayed occurs while in SPORT screen mode, the virtual gauges are reduced
to medium size.
This excludes faults detected by the TPMS system, where the system has identified the relative tyre.
In the event of faults/events for which a summary symbol is displayed as the end of the display cycle, the
symbol will appear in the dedicated display area (area C1).
TYRES screen (tyre pressure and temperature)
In normal conditions, the driver may access the informative screen displaying the pressure and temperature
values for each tyre by pressing the Display button.
The TYRES screen includes a symbol of the vehicle with the pressure and temperature values for each tyre.
If any event that needs to be displayed occurs while in TYRES screen mode, the screen is displayed in
reduced size.
At the end of the display cycle, the information in the TYRES screen will be available in full size again, and, if
applicable, the relative summary symbol for the fault will be displayed in the specific area C1 until the fault
has been rectified.
TRIP A/B screen
Press the DISP button to access the TRIP A/B screen.

The currently active TRIP counter is shown on the display (“TRIP A” or “TRIP B”).
TRIP B may be disabled from the set-up menu: TRIP A is always enabled.
The TRIP A/B screen contains information concerning the following parameters:
Maximum speed during trip (Km/h - mph);
Average driving speed (Km/h - mph);
Travel distance (Km - mi);
Journey time (hh:mm);
Range (Km – mi).
Date (Day Month Year)
The TRIP information displayed is same whether the metric or "imperial" system is selected: only the unit of
measurement used differs.
In the absence of speed information or in the event of speed sensor or fuel level sensor failure, all TRIP
parameters will be displayed simply as dashes "----" together with the relative unit of measurement.
"Average speed"
Average speed since the last reset, calculated by dividing the distance travelled by the elapsed time.
The parameter is calculated only when the engine is running.
After each battery reconnect and after each reset, the display shows "------" for a distance of 500 metres
since reset, after which the calculated value is displayed.
At each Key-on, the value memorised at the previous Key-off is displayed.
The average speed parameter appears as "----" after resetting the parameter with the specific reset button or
after resetting any other of the TRIP parameters.
The parameter is displayed with a resolution of 1 Km/h (or mph).
Distance travelled
The count starts from zero after resetting.
The count advances at the same rate as the value on the total odometer
After each battery reconnect and after each reset, the value is shown as "0.0", after which the count begins.
Upon reaching the maximum trip distance displayable, the TRIP counter resets automatically to zero and all
TRIP information is reset, with the exception of the Range parameter.
The trip counter has a range from 0 to 999.9 Km (or mi) with a resolution of 0.1 Km (o mi).
Journey time
Indicates time elapsed since last reset.
After each battery reconnect and after each reset, the value is shown as "00:00", after which the count begins.
When the vehicle stops and the engine is switched off (key-off), the accumulated time counter is paused but
not reset. The count resumes when the vehicle is driven again (next key-on - engine running).
The elapsed trip time counter starts whenever the engine is started.
After Key-on, the parameter is displayed in hh:mm and with a range from 00:00 and 99:59, with a resolution
of 1 minute.
The two dots between the hh and mm values flash during normal operation (frequency 1 Hz – D.c. 50%).
Upon reaching the maximum value displayable (99:59), the elapsed time counter resets automatically to zero
and all TRIP information is reset, with the exception of the "Range" parameter.
Range:
Indicates the estimated remaining range (in Km or miles) with the current amount of fuel in the tank and
maintaining a similar driving style (same fuel consumption conditions).
The range is calculated using the following data:
current odometer count;
fuel level (as a percentage of a full tank);
instantaneous fuel consumption (in litres/hour);
fuel tank capacity (in litres).
The range is calculated on the basis of the reference average fuel consumption value and the litres of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The reference average consumption value used for range calculation is the average consumption over the
last 5 minutes of the journey.
After each battery reconnect, the display shows "------" for 30 seconds and for a distance of 500 metres, after
which the calculated value is displayed.
To prevent excessive fluctuation, the range value displayed is updated in increments proportional to the
difference between the value currently displayed and the calculated value.
If the difference between the calculated value and the value currently displayed exceeds 40 km, the range
value displayed is altered by a sixth of the difference.
If the difference between the calculated value and the value currently displayed is between 6 Km and 39 Km,
the range value displayed is altered by 3 Km.
If the difference between the calculated value and the value currently displayed is less than 6 Km, the range
value displayed is altered by 1 Km.
If the range drops below 50 Km, no more range information is visualised (although the range count
continues), and the message “Warning - Limited cruising range” is displayed for 20 seconds, followed by
the indication "----".
In the event of changes to the fuel level (refuelling or loss of fuel), the new range value is displayed
immediately. If the new range value is still less than the limit value after fuel has been added, no range
information is given and the display continues to read “----“.
In the event of vehicle stoppage with the engine running (e.g. traffic lights or queues), the last value prior to
the stoppage is displayed for 5 minutes, after which the indication “----“ is displayed (range calculation is
continued). Range display resumes normally once the vehicle starts moving with an updated value taking
the fuel consumed during the stoppage into account and considering the driving style used during the last
5 minutes prior to the stoppage.
The value is displayed with a resolution of 1 km (or mile) and a calculation precision of +/- 1 Km.
The maximum displayable value is 3000 Km (miles).
The minimum displayable value is 50 Km (miles), after which the value is replaced with dashes "--------".
If any event that needs to be displayed occurs while in TRIP A/B screen mode, the TRIP info will be shown in
reduced size.
At the end of the display cycle, the information in the TRIP screen will be available in full size again, and, if
applicable, the relative summary symbol for the fault will be displayed in the specific area C1 until the fault
has been rectified.
MENU screen
Access the MENU screen with the DISPLAY button.
The MENU screen may be displayed in a number of levels:

MENU screen display level one.
MENU screen display level two.
MENU screen display level three.
Not all available options are displayed simultaneously as the screen graphics can only display 5 rows at a
time.
The MODE button symbol is shown alongside the selected function to prompt the user to press the Mode
button to enable the parameter or another subfunction (if available), while two arrows are displayed
indicating that more options are viewable by scrolling up or down with the UP / DOWN buttons.
Scroll through selections with the UP/DOWN buttons and press the MODE button briefly to enable another
subfunction (if available) or enable the parameter relative to the function selected previously.
Press and hold the MODE button or press the BACK arrow (usually appearing in submenus) to return to the
previous menu level without enabling (or saving) the parameter.
After selecting (with the UP/DOWN buttons) and enabling (by pressing the MODE button briefly) the main
function desired, the individual subfunctions available or the parameters relative to the function selected
previously are shown in a new screen.
When the last level is selected (containing the selectable options), the BACK arrow disappears from the
previous submenu screen and only reappears after a parameter is enabled or after the time-out period for
the submenu itself.
Selecting a parameter only (in “reverse” mode) does not enable it.
Modifications made to any of the parameters selectable in the MENU function will be displayed immediately.
However, as mentioned previously, the MODE button must be pressed briefly to enable the parameter
(with the exception of the Dimming function).
For the dimming function, any modifications to the lighting level made using the UP/DOWN buttons are not
only updated immediately on the display but are also saved (this effect is also achievable by pressing the
MODE button); as a result, in the event of fault occurring during adjustment of the backlighting level, the
lighting level set with the UP/DOWN buttons will be shown on the display.
To return to the MENU screen, use any of the following three methods:
press and hold the MODE button until the main MENU screen is recalled;
press MODE briefly and press the BACK arrow (usually shown in submenus);
do not press the MODE button or the UP/DOWN buttons for at least 10 seconds: in this case any
parameters that have not been enabled will not be memorised.
The "Dimming" (Backlighting), "Twilight sensor sensitivity" and "Buzzer volume" functions are not adjustable
cyclically. When the top bar is reached in the relative bar graph, pressing the UP button again has no
effect and, analogously, when the bottom bar is reached, pressing the DOWN button again has no effect.
On versions with set-up menu available on NQS and absent on NIT:

with the vehicle in motion, only the function “Select speed limit thresholds” is accessible by pressing the
MODE button briefly. After accessing the function, set the desired threshold with the UP/DOWN
buttons, then press MODE to confirm;
all MENU functions are accessible when the vehicle is stationary.
On versions with set-up MENU available on NIT:

when the vehicle is in motion, the functions available from the dashboard will not be displayed;
the following functions can be displayed while the vehicle is stationary: "Dimming", "Select Trip
B", "Speedometer repetition", "Rpm on steer" and "Calibrate TPMS".
The units of measurement selectable (on NIT or NQS, depending on version) are as follows:
Temperature: °C or °F
Pressure: Bar or psi.
Distance: Km or miles
If any event occurs that needs to be displayed while in MENU screen mode, the event display mode depends
on the selected level:
At level one, the event is displayed in the relative area (B2), while the MENU screen moves to the right-hand
side of the display and contains only the main options.
From level two, the new event is displayed over the MENU screen.
In all levels, the MENU functions cannot be accessed when a new event is displayed, and are therefore
displayed with greyed-out backgrounds.
At the end of the display cycle for the new event, the MENU level active prior to the new event is restored.
Whenever the MENU function is enabled, the last function enabled will be displayed automatically
in “reverse” mode; this applies in all MENU levels.
Dimming (Backlighting) setting adjustment:

The driver may adjust the backlighting brightness of the TFT display via the relative MENU function.
If the MENU screen in not enabled, the driver may still adjust the backlighting by pressing the UP/DOWN
buttons directly.
The brightness of the warning lights are not adjustable (brightness always 100%).
At Key-on, the display, speedometer and tachometer (with the exception of the version with yellow or white
background, which is always off in daytime mode) and the respective pointers are set to 100% brightness
(daytime brightness) and only the TFT display brightness level is adjustable. The new setting is
memorised and maintained at subsequent key-ons in daytime conditions.
The dimming function may also be used with the vehicle in motion.
Pressing one of the UP/DOWN buttons once instantly recalls the specific screen. Pressing one of the buttons
again changes the setting. Backlighting brightness cannot be set to zero and changes to the setting are
effective immediately.
During adjustment, the specific message is displayed together with the bar graph (consisting of 8 bars
representing brightness levels), and the bars on the graph light up or extinguish one at a time as the
UP/DOWN buttons are pressed.
The screen is displayed over any currently active screen, which remains in the background.
The screen disappears automatically, revealing the previously active screen, if no input is received for 5
seconds or if the MODE button is pressed.
While failures are displayed, the backlighting brightness setting may not be adjusted (UP/ "MODE" buttons
disabled). If active, the Dimming screen is cancelled by the occurrence of a fault event.
With the trip odometer flashing (following a reset request), activating the function only displays the bar graph
showing the level memorised previously and adjustment is not possible, as the “UP” / “DOWN” buttons
are only usable for the trip counter function.
In all cases, brightness level is always adjustable (adjustment effective from the first time one of the
UP/DOWN buttons is pressed); the dimming screen is displayed over the currently active screen, which is
displayed in the background and continues with its respective display cycle.
Analogue electronic speedometer
The speedometer has a red needle against a white scale.

The speedometer needle indicates 0 (zero) Mph (positioning error ± 2 degrees).
The speedometer scale has an indication angle of 300° (TBC), increasing in a clockwise direction.
At speeds between 0 and 5 mph, the needle may remain on the zero bar. At higher speeds, the speed will be
indicated.
The speedometer needle displays speeds between 5 mph and 220 mph.
The speed values which should be displayed are: 0, 20, 40…every 20 mph…200, 220 (main values) and - 10
mph (secondary values: bars only).
In the event of failure, the needle should return to the beginning of the scale (rest position - key-off).
At key-off, the needle is on the end stop at the zero bar.
Electronic analogue tachometer
The electronic tachometer may have red, yellow and black graphics.
At Key-on, the tachometer needle indicates 0 rpm.
The scale indicates engine speed in rpm.
The numbers on the dial represent engine speed in rpm/1000.
Engine speed is indicated with main numbers at intervals of 1000 rpm and with secondary bars (with no
numerals) at intermediate intervals of 200 rpm.
The red section (danger) of the tachometer scale starts at 8000 rpm.
The top end of the analogue scale on the dial is 10000 rpm.
At key-off, the needle is on the end stop at the zero bar.
DOT MATRIX display
It displays the following information:

Engaged gear (DCT gearbox);
"Auto easy exit” gearbox mode (DCT gearbox);
"Performance Start" message (DCT gearbox);
AVH system enabled (DCT gearbox);
Vehicle speed display (mechanical gearbox);
"Shift Light Indicator" message.
Information concerning the gearbox is always displayed in all operating conditions.
Gear engaged depending on the "manual" or "automatic" mode (DCT gearbox)
When the DCT gearbox is in AUTOMATIC mode, the DOT MATRIX display reads “AUTO” along with the
letter indicating the relevant gear currently engaged: D (Drive), N (Neutral), R (Reverse).
At key-off, if the panel receives the Neutral value, the DOT MATRIX display will read N. If the panel receives
a gear engaged value for any gear other than Neutral, the display will show the gear engaged.
When gears are selected via the two shift paddles on the steering wheel with the DCT gearbox in MANUAL
mode (F1), the number corresponding to the currently engaged gear is shown on the DOT MATRIX
display, as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.
"Auto easy exit” gearbox mode (DCT gearbox)

At every Key-on, “Auto easy exit” gearbox mode is activated by the gearbox.
A small arrow symbol is shown continuously at the bottom left of the DOT MATRIX display.
“Parking” mode
When the gearbox Park Lock system is activated, the gearbox display shows the letter “P” at the centre.
Performance Start
When the system receives the signal indicating that performance start is available, the DOT MATRIX display
will show the message “PS” until key-off or until the function is enabled.
AVH system enabled
When the AVH is activated, the message “HOLD” is shown on the DOT MATRIX display.
Vehicle speed display (mechanical gearbox)

The vehicle speed is shown also on the DOT MATRIX display.
"Shift Light Indicator" message
On vehicles with DCT gearbox, the signalling occurs only in the "manual" mode with the display of a
small "arrow" on the upper left-hand side of the DOT MATRIX display which can be stationary or flashing
(3Hz d.c.50%) depending on the value of the signal received.
The arrow symbol appears to indicate the recommended time to upshift at the lowest speed possible
(sustainable by the vehicle in each gear) to reduce fuel consumption.
The relevant vehicle speeds for each upshift are as follows:
1st > 2nd: 12.5 Mph

2nd > 3rd: 17.5 Mph;
3rd > 4th: 22.5 Mph;
4th > 5th: 27.5 Mph;
5th > 6th: 32.5 Mph;
6th > 7th: 37.5 Mph.
On vehicles with mechanical gearbox, the signalling occurs with the display of a small "arrow" on the upper
right-hand side of the DOT MATRIX display which can be stationary or flashing (3Hz d.c.50%) depending
on the value of the signal received.
The arrow symbol appears to indicate the recommended time to upshift at the lowest speed possible
(sustainable by the vehicle in each gear) to reduce fuel consumption.
Replacing the instrument panel

Fastening instrument panel - binnacle Screw 2.6 Nm B
The trim panel is located on the left-hand side of the dashboard.

Remove the binnacle ( E4.02).

instrument panel (B) to the binnacle (A).
Remove the instrument panel (B) from the
binnacle (A) and replace.
Fit the new instrument panel (B) on the binnacle
(A).
instrument panel (B) to the binnacle (A).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Refit the binnacle ( E4.02).

Perform the respective cycle with the DEIS diagnostic tester.
E5.03 Warning lights
They are backlit by LED lights of appropriate colours illuminating the relative surface directly.
The warning lights are only displayed when active (symbol only illuminated).
The symbols are permanently visible with light coloured instrument backgrounds.
The lights are displayed at Key-on and in the following conditions with the vehicle in motion:
Engine diagnostic system (EOBD)
Engine diagnostic system (EOBD) failure.
Fuel
Low or reserve fuel level.
Fuel gauge failure.
Engine oil
Engine oil temperature too high.
Insufficient engine oil pressure.
Engine oil pressure sensor failure (flashing).
Coolant
Coolant temperature too high.
Dual Clutch gearbox
Dual Clutch gearbox failure.
Brake system
EBD system failure, together with ABS warning light.
Insufficient brake fluid level.
Excessive brake pad wear.
EPB electric parking brake failure, together with EPB electric parking brake warning light.
Parking brake system service required, together with brake system warning light.
EPB electric parking brake
EPB electric parking brake engaged (lit continuously or flashing).
EPB electric parking brake failure, together with brake system warning light (lit continuously or flashing).
ABS system
ABS system failure.

ASR/CST system - ESC system
ASR/CST system failure.
ASR/CST system disengaged.
ASR/CST system triggered (flashing).
Indicates ESC system failure.
Indicates intervention of ESC system (flashing)
Indicates ESC system deactivation.
TPMS system
One or more standard type tyres punctured.
Vehicle has been driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi), or at a speed exceeding 80 Km/h (50 mph), following
a puncture to one or more RUN FLAT tyres.
One or more RUN FLAT type tyres punctured.
TPMS system failure.
TPMS system temporarily not active.
TPMS system not active.
TPMS system not calibrated.
Alternator failure
Alternator failure and insufficient or excessive battery charge.
Logistic Mode ON (lit continuously or flashing).
External lights
Running lights or low beam lights on.
During key-off, parking lights on.
Left hand turn indicators on.
Right hand turn indicators on.
Hazard warning lights simultaneously on.
High beam lights on.
Rear fog lights on.
Adaptive Light Control

Adaptive Light Control failure (flashing).
Vehicle alarm system
Vehicle alarm system failure (lit continuously or flashing).
System not programmed (lit continuously or flashing).
System failure and system not programmed (lit continuously or flashing).
Airbag
Airbag system failure.
Seat belts
Driver side seat belt not buckled.
Cruise Control
Cruise Control enabled.

E5.04 Indications on the TFT display
The driver is notified of a fault by the instrument panel via the following events:
relevant fault warning light (if available) illuminated on instrument panel;
icon (if available) corresponding to fault displayed with relevant specific message (if available) on TFT
display.
The icon appears on the display simultaneously with the illumination of the warning light on the instrument
panel (if available).
All information contained in the display area reserved for messages is replaced by information concerning the
failure.
Faults are displayed according to the priority attributed to the faults themselves:
Priority 0 (very serious)
Priority 1 (serious)
Priority 2 (not serious)
In the event of multiple simultaneous faults, the faults are displayed in order, with priority 0 faults first, priority
1 faults next and priority 2 faults last.
The information relative to the faults are displayed for 5 seconds each, in "rolling" order. with the screens
displayed in rolling mode and in order of priority or occurrence of the relative fault event.
If, during the display cycle for a fault, another priority 1 or 2 fault occurs, this will replace the message
currently displayed only once the latter has been displayed for 2 seconds. The messages then continue to
be displayed in "rolling" order.
If, during the display cycle for a fault, a priority 0 fault occurs, this will replace the fault currently displayed
immediately, without waiting 2 seconds. The messages then continue to be displayed in "rolling" order.
During the display of multiple faults in rolling order, if any of the faults is interrupted by a new failure/check
event before its full display period has elapsed, the last event will be displayed nonetheless for 5 seconds,
even if a shorter period would suffice to complete its display cycle.
During the display of priority 0, 1 and 2 faults, the set-up MENU functions, which are normally accessible via
the specific buttons, are disabled.
During the display of priority 0, 1 and 2 faults, the display of other main screens normally accessible with the
specific DISP button is disabled.
The faults remain displayed for 20 seconds.
In the event of faults with no physical warning light on the instrument panel, at the end of the display cycle,
the relative symbol will be shown in icon form in area C1 of the display and will remain displayed until the
malfunction generating the fault has been rectified.
In the event of faults with a physical warning light on the instrument panel, at the end of the display cycle, the
relative symbol will not be shown in icon form in area C1 of the display.
Additionally, the screen displayed before the fault event will be shown again.
The fault is displayed for the period specified above at each key-on (until the malfunction generating the fault
has been rectified).
If the fault is rectified before the end of the display cycle, the message will continue to be displayed and the
relative warning light (if available) will remain lit for at least 2 seconds, to prevent undesirable "flashing"
effects.
The warning light (if available) extinguishes and the message disappears from the display simultaneously.
Fault display may be interrupted in two different ways:
by eliminating the malfunction generating the fault;
by pressing the MODE button to escape.
Schedule maintenance
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Service Stop within:" followed by the value
in “kilometres” (or “miles”) or “days” remaining until the next vehicle service interval.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area. In this case,
as there is no physical indicator light, the symbol is displayed in icon form in the specific area C1 until the
malfunction generating the fault has been rectified. Additionally, the screen displayed before the fault
event will be shown again.
Engine diagnostic system (EOBD)
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine control system failure" together with
the message "Go to dealer".
Limp Home
The TFT display displays the specific message "Warning limited performance of the engine" together with
the message "Restart the engine".
Fuel
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Inertia switch triggered".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Fuel level low" together with information
concerning the remaining "Range" in Km (or mi).
In low remaining range conditions, the remaining range information in Km (or mi) is replaced by the
message "Limited cruising range".
The relevant message display cycle is repeated every 8 Km (5 mi).
Engine oil
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Check engine oil level".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low engine oil pressure" together with the
message "Stop and turn off engine".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine oil Too Hot" together with the
message "Slow down".
Coolant
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine coolant Too Hot".
Catalytic converters
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temp. Excess." together with
the message "Engine performance limited".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temperature not plausible "
together with the message "Go to dealer slowly".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temperature high" together
with the message "Slow down".
DCT gearbox
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Transmission failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
Power steering
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Powersteering Malfunction".
Brake system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EBD system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer slowly".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Brake fluid level low" together with the
message "Go to dealer slowly".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Brake Pads Worn" together with the
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CCM disc brakes wear".
EPB electric parking brake
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EPB failure".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Parking Brake system revision" together with
the message "Go to dealer".
AVH system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "AVH system failure".
ABS system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ABS system failure" together with the
ASR/CST system - ESC system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST on".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST off".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST system failure" together with the
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ESC off".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ESC system failure" together with the
Suspension
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the specific message "Suspension control system failure".
TPMS system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the specific message "Check tyre pressure" in the event of low tyre pressure.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low tyre pressure" together with the
message "Do not proceed", in the event of puncture if the vehicle is fitted with normal tyres.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low tyre pressure" together with the
message "Max speed 50 mph", in the event of puncture if the vehicle is fitted with Run Flat tyres.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS temporarily inactive".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS inactive".
Priority 2
TPMS system not calibrated.
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS not calibrated" together with the
message "Execute calibration".
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Calibration activated".
Electronic system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Electrical system failure" together with the
Proxi configuration check
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "System not programmed".
Battery
Priority 0
While the vehicle is connected to an external battery charger, the specific icon is displayed on the TFT
display.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Alternator failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "LOGISTIC MODE ON".
External lights
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones corresponding to the faulty running lights (front RH or
LH - rear RH or LH) "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Lamp Failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones corresponding to the faulty turn indicators (front RH or
LH - rear RH or LH) "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Direction Indic. Failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Foglamp Failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Stop Lamp failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Numberplate Lamp Failure".
Adaptive Light Control

Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Adaptive Light Control failure".
Twilight sensor
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Twilight sensor failure".
Parking sensor system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Parking sensor failure" together with the
message "Warning! Possible obstacles".
Vehicle alarm system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer Malfunction".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer Malfunction Immobilizer not
programmed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer not programmed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Alarm system failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Break-in attempted".
Doors/luggage compartment lid/engine compartment lid open
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones representing the open doors, luggage compartment lid
and engine compartment lid "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Door open", "Doors
open", "Trunk open", "Bonnet open" or "Trunk and bonnet open".
Hard top
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Roof failure".
Airbag system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag system failure" together with the
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag test not performed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag warning light fault".
The TFT display displays the relative icon if the passenger side airbag is disabled.
The TFT display displays the relative icon if the passenger side airbag is enabled.
Seat belts
The TFT display displays the specific message "Fasten passenger seat belt".
Heated seats
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Front LH Seat Heater" / "Front RH Seat
Heater".
Cruise Control
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Cruise Control ON".
Speed limit
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Speed limit exceeded".
The number indicates the speed limit set by the driver.
Manettino
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Manettino failure".
Rain sensor
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Rain sensor failure".
Ice hazard
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Warning: danger of ice".
Windscreen washer fluid
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low windshield washer fluid level".
Telephone (on versions with NIT)
"Telephone repetitions" function for incoming, outgoing and active calls enabled.
"Telephone repetitions" function activated by reception of a new SMS.

E5.05 Switches and buttons
Horn button
Press the buttons (A) to sound the horn.
Engine start button
Do not keep the ENGINE START button pressed for prolonged periods.
Press the ENGINE START button (B) to start the engine.

Release the ENGINE START button (B) as soon as the engine has started.
Manettino
The driving mode selector (Manettino) (C) on the steering wheel allows the driver to make full use of the
potential of the vehicle quickly and intuitively.
There are three different driving modes available, ordered in relation to ascending grip levels (from low to
high grip) offering progressively less driver assistance (from high to none).
Turn the Manettino (C) to select one of the three driving modes listed as follows:
COMFORT mode. optimum setting for everyday driving. Maximum safety in all conditions and in poor grip
conditions in particular. Gear shifting is set to comfort mode, suspension damping (SCM with
magnetorheological shock absorbers only) is set to comfort and traction control is set to comfort.
SPORT mode. For high performance driving in good grip conditions. Gear shifting is set to comfort mode,
suspension damping (SCM with magnetorheologically controlled shock absorbers only) is set to Sport
and traction control is set to Sport.
CST OFF / ESC OFF mode (selectable only from “SPORT” mode). Total driver freedom, with no stability
control (selectable only from “SPORT” mode). Gear shifting is set to Sport mode, suspension damping
(SCM with magnetorheologically controlled shock absorbers only) is set to Sport and traction control is
set to Off (disabled).
Replacing the steering wheel control panel

Remove the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

Release the cable (2) from the indicated clips.
Grip the steering wheel control button backing
panel firmly at the sides.
Pull the steering wheel control button backing
panel to detach it from the steering wheel,
and replace.
Apply a suitable quantity of Silicone based

sealant in the indicated positions.
Fit the new steering wheel control button backing

panel.
Fasten the new steering wheel control button
backing panel, pressing firmly in the indicated
positions.
Remove any excess Silicone based sealant.
Fasten the cable (2) to the indicated clips.

Refit the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

External light switch
Located on the left hand dashboard trim panel.

Turn the external light selector clockwise or counterclockwise to select between the following external light
modes:
A - Parking lights
B - Automatic lights on/off with twilight sensor
C - Lights off
D - Running lights
E - Low beams
F - Rear fog light button
Replacing the external light switch

Remove the left hand dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).
Undo the three fastener screws indicated.

Remove the rear light switch (A) and replace.
Fit the new external light switch (A).
Hand tighten the three fastener screws indicated.
Refit the left hand dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

TFT display control buttons

Press the DISP button (A) to display the following screens (in order):
SPORT screen
TYRES screen (tyre pressure and temperature)
TRIP A/B screen
MENU screen
Pressing DISP (A) again from the final screen returns to the first screen listed.
Pressing the Display button with the ENGINE START screen on the display restores the main screen saved
previously (even after Key-off/Key-on).
The UP (B) and DOWN (C) buttons have the following functions:
selecting main Menu options or submenu options (with Menu screen active);
setting display brightness (with Menu screen not active);
setting twilight sensor sensitivity (following specific command).
Press and release the MODE button (D) within 2 seconds to:
toggle between total odometer count, TRIP A "Travel distance", TRIP B "Travel distance" (if enabled)
and "Range" (with Menu screen not active) in the E2 area of the display;
reset Trip A or Trip B count depending on flashing trip counter (with Menu screen not active and with
flashing odometer);
confirm selected function (with Menu screen active);
conform setting/modification made and return to previous screen (to the same option) when in a submenu
function accessed from the main menu (with Menu screen active);
save modifications made (with Menu screen active);
interrupt display of check cycle stages at key-on (skip current stage and proceed to the next);
interrupt (“Escape” function) failure/warning display cycle.
Press and hold the MODE button (D) for 2 seconds or more to:
return to the option in the previous menu level (with Menu screen active, when in submenu functions);
set Trip A counter to flashing mode in area E2 of the display, if the counter is active in the area reserved
for the total odometer, TRIP A or "Range" (with Menu screen not active);
set Trip B counter to flashing mode in area E2 of the display, if the TRIP B counter is active in the area
(with Menu screen not active).
Replacing the TFT display control button panel
Take particular care not to damage the

structure, the plastic fasteners and the
leather trim
Prise the control panel (A) from the left hand

dashboard trim panel with a suitable tool.
Remove the control panel (A) from the left hand
dashboard trim panel, disconnecting the
relevant connector, and replace.
Connect the relevant connector and install the
new control panel (A) in the left hand
dashboard trim panel, pushing in completely.
EPB electric parking brake control buttons
Located on the lower left hand dashboard trim panel.
CAUTION
The vehicle may move with no warning when the Park Lock is mechanically released!
The vehicle is held in position only by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
The lever (A) engages and releases the EPB electric parking brake (by operating the brake shoes) in the
following conditions:
engine off;
ignition key in position II (Key-on);
brake pedal depressed.
The lever (A) engages and releases the EPB electric parking brake (by operating the brake callipers) in the
following conditions:
seat belt buckled;
driver side door closed;
engine on;
vehicle stationary;
brake pedal depressed.
The lever (A) operates the emergency brake (by operating the callipers) when the vehicle is in motion.
On vehicles with the DCT gearbox, pressing the AUTO PARK (B) button, after disengaging the EPB electric
parking brake as described previously and with the ignition key turned to II (Key-on), enables and disables
the Autohold function that automatically engages the EPB electric parking brake when the ignition key is
turned to 0 (Key-off).
CAUTION
When the Autohold function is deactivated, when parking the vehicle, always remember to manually engage
the electric parking brake with the relative lever before switching off the engine.
On vehicles with mechanical gearbox, the Autohold function is not available, therefore before turning off the
engine the EPB electric parking brake must be engaged by means of the specific lever ( A).
Replacing the parking brake control panel
Located on the lower left hand dashboard trim panel.


leather trim

control panel (A) to the relevant mounting
bracket.
Remove the control panel (A) from the lower left
hand dashboard trim panel and replace.
Fit the new panel (A) on the lower left trim of the
dashboard.
Hand tighten the three screws indicated
fastening the control panel (A) to the relative
mounting bracket.

DCT gearbox control buttons
Located at the front of the control panel on the centre console. FROM Assembly No. 94156 the AUTO
button (C) is located on the driver side.
The position of the “PS” and “AUTO” buttons on the centre console control panel varies for different
markets. The function of the buttons remains the same.
Press the PS button (A) to activate the Performance Start function. The system ensures the fastest
acceleration possible for the vehicle. The system transmits the optimum amount of torque to the road
surface to prevent wheelspin under acceleration. The TFT display on the instrument panel indicates when
the Performance Start function is activated.
Use the following procedure to activate the Performance Start function:
vehicle stationary, brake pedal and accelerator depressed;
transmission in manual mode;
select first gear;
disable traction control by setting the Manettino to CST off;
press the PS button (A) on the panel on the centre console.
Press the R button (B) to engage reverse.

Press the AUTO button (C) to select automatic mode for the DCT gearbox.
Replacing the DCT gearbox control buttons
Located at the front of the button panel on the centre console.

panel (1) to the control panel.
Remove the panel (1) from the relative seat on
the control panel.
Undo the six screws indicated fastening the DCT

transmission control buttons (A) to the control
panel.
Remove the DCT transmission control buttons
(A) from the relative seats and replace.
Fit the new DCT transmission control buttons (A)
in the relative seats.
Tighten the six screws indicated fastening the
DCT transmission control buttons (A) to the
control panel.
Fit the panel (1) in the relative seat on the control

panel.
panel (1).

Cup holder
Opening the cup holder

Press the cup holder (A) in the point indicated
and release.
When released, the cup holder (A) opens
automatically.
Closing the cup holder
Pressing the cup holder (A) carefully at the point

indicated, push completely into its slot and
release.
When released, the cup holder (A) locks into
place automatically.
Replacing the cup holder
Located on the right-hand side of the lower centre dashboard trim panel.

Undo the five screws fastening the cup holder
(A) to the lower central dashboard trim panel.
Remove the cup holder (A) from the lower
central dashboard trim panel and replace.
Fit the new cup holder (A) in its seat on the lower
central dashboard trim panel.
Tighten the five screws fastening the cup holder
(A) to the lower central dashboard trim panel.

E5.06 Door controls
Door controls
When opening/closing the door, the window will automatically lower by approximately 2 centimetres (1) pre-
set threshold, to prevent contact with the door seal strip.
When the door is closed, the window automatically rises to the upper threshold (2).
Opening from the outside
Turn off the alarm and the central door locking system using the remote control, or turn the key in the lock to
turn off the central door locking system.
Opening the door with the handle (3), the window lowers by approximately 2 centimetres.
Locking and opening the doors from the inside

Press the "LOCK / UNLOCK" (A) button to lock and unlock both doors.
When the door is opened by pulling the handle (4) the window lowers to the "pre-set threshold". When the
door is closed, the window rises to the "upper threshold".
If the handle (4) is pulled without opening the door, the window lowers to the "pre-set threshold" and if the
door is not opened after 2 seconds, the window returns to the "upper threshold".
To open the door, release the handle and pull again.
Doors open indication and puddle lights
Both doors are equipped with a puddle light located underneath the internal panel, which lights the door is
opened and illuminates the area where the user will place his/her feet when getting out of the vehicle.
E5.07 Power windows
Power window and retractable hard top control buttons
Located at the rear of the button panel on the centre console.
Push button (A) down or up to lower or raise the driver side power window.
Push button (B) down or up to lower or raise the passenger side power window.
Press and hold button (C) for the entire duration of the cycle to open the retractable hard top or press twice in
succession to lower both quarterlights simultaneously.
Press and hold button (D) for the entire duration of the cycle to close the retractable hard top or press twice in
succession to raise both quarterlights simultaneously.
Replacing the power window and retractable hard top control buttons
Located at the rear of the button panel on the centre console.


panel (1) and remove from the control panel.
Undo the four screws indicated fastening the (A)
power window and retractable hard top
Remove the power window and retractable hard
top control buttons panel (A) and replace.
Fit the new power window and retractable hard
top control button panel (A).
Hand tighten the four screws indicated fastening
the (A) power window and retractable hard
top control button panel.
Fit the panel (1) on the control panel and fasten

by hand tightening the four screws indicated.

E5.08 Ignition switch
The ignition key has two positions:
Position 0 - Stop
Turn the key counterclockwise to position 0.

The engine switches off.
The key may be removed.
When the key is even partially extracted, the steering column is locked.
The hazard warning lights and parking lights may be switched on.
To facilitate releasing the steering lock, wiggle the steering wheel gently while turning the key.
Position II - Start
Turn the key clockwise to position II.

Irrespective of the currently active main screen, the message "Check" appears immediately in area D of the
TFT display, against a grey background and together with five "segment symbols" that are highlighted in
sequence counting the five seconds of the test cycle. .
Press (A) ENGINE START to start the engine.
If the following conditions have been met:

1) the initial check cycle period for the instrument panel warning lights has elapsed;
2) engine speed has exceeded and remained above 700 rpm for at least 3 seconds;
3) the check cycle has been completed successfully (no failures);
4) the Service information has been displayed for five seconds.
The message “Check OK” is displayed against a green background in area D.
If only conditions 1, 3 and 4 have been met (engine not started), the ENGINE START screen is displayed
immediately (without the “Check OK” message).
This screen will remain at the centre of the display until condition 2 has been met.
In the event of fault, the screen ENGINE START will move to the right of display, whereas if one of the main
screens is recalled (either via the Display button or due to activation of the Hard top or the Parking
sensors) the ENGINE START screen will disappear definitively.
When condition 2 is met, the message “Check OK” is displayed and the default screen saved previously is
recalled (even following a key-off / key-on).
Key lock
If the key is not removed from the ignition switch within 20 seconds of turning to position 0, the key lock
system automatically prevents the key from being removed from the ignition switch.
Should this occur, press button (A) simultaneously while removing the key from the ignition switch in order to
remove the key from the ignition switch.
Replacing the ignition switch
The ignition switch is supplied as a spare part together with the door locks.
The switch is located on the steering column, behind the steering column switch.

Remove the steering column switch ( E5.10).
Open the clamp (1) and move the cables

fastened by the clamp aside.
Cut a notch in the two screws (6).

Undo the two screws (6) and remove the ignition
switch (A) from the steering column.
Fit the new ignition switch (A) and hand tighten
two new break-off screws (6).
Refit the cables correctly in the clamp (1) as

originally installed and close the clamp.
Refit the steering column switch ( E5.10).

E5.09 Steering wheel
Removing the steering wheel

Remove the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

Undo the fastener nut, (3), retrieve the washer
and remove the steering wheel.
Fasten the clock spring connector (B) with a

clamp (4).
Refitting the steering wheel

Steering wheel - steering column Nut 50 Nm B
Remove the clamp (4) to release the clock spring

connector (B).
Fit the steering wheel in its seat, by tightening

the fastener nut (3) after having fitted the
relevant washer.

Nut 50 Nm B
Position the cover (1) and press down fully.
Refit the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

E5.10 Steering column switch
Steering wheel stalks - Turn indicators
The services controlled with the steering column stalks only function with the ignition key turned to "II".
The stalk (A) operates the high beams and the turn indicators.
The stalk (A) has three positions:

Turn indicators off
Stalk up: right hand indicators
Stalk down: left hand indicators
To signal a short lane change manoeuvre, involving only a small steering angle, push the stalk in the desired
direction without clicking into position, so that the stalk springs back when released.
When the turn indicators are on, the relative indicator light on the instrument panel flashes.
Steering column stalks - High beams
The stalk (A) on the left hand side of the steering wheel switches the high beams on and off.
Switching the high beams on
To switch on the high beams, with switch (B) turned to (1), push the left hand stalk (A) towards the
dashboard.
The relative indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates when the high beams are on.
Pull the stalk (A) towards the steering wheel to switch off the high beams and switch on the low beams.
Flashing
Pull the left hand stalk (A) towards the steering wheel to flash the high beams.
The high beams may also be flashed with the lights switched off and with the ignition key turned to "II".
The flashing function uses the high beams.
Steering column stalks - Windscreen washer/wipers and headlight washers
Pull the stalk (A) on the right-hand side of the steering wheel to operate the windscreen wipers and
windscreen washer.
Operating the windscreen wiper

The stalk (A) has five positions:
OFF - windscreen wiper off
AUTO - Automatic mode. The sensitivity of the rain sensor may be adjusted in this position (stalk at first
detent position)
1 - Continuous slow operation (stalk at second detent position)
2 - Continuous fast operation (stalk at third detent position)
Stalk pushed up - Fast temporary operation (automatic return)
Windscreen wiper function in automatic mode - Rain sensor
With the windscreen wipers in intermittent mode, the rain sensor automatically adjusts the windscreen wiper
sweep frequency in relation to the intensity of rain.
All the other functions controlled by the right hand stalk: windscreen wipers off, continuous slow and fast
operation and fast temporary operation of windscreen washer and headlight washer remain unchanged.
The rain sensor activates automatically when the right hand stalk (A) is set to AUTO. The adjustable
sensitivity range varies progressively from windscreen wiper off, when the windscreen is dry, to
windscreen wiper functioning continuously at the second speed setting in intense rain.
To adjust the sweep frequency in intermittent mode, with the stalk (A) set to AUTO, turn the thumbwheel (B).
Turn the thumbwheel counterclockwise to adjust the intermittent operation frequency progressively from
maximum (fast intermittent sweeps) to minimum (slow intermittent sweeps).
Rain sensor failure
In the event of rain sensor malfunction while the rain sensor is activated, intermittent windscreen wiper mode
is enabled at the sensitivity setting set by the user, irrespective of whether there is rain on the windscreen.
Operating the windscreen washer
Pull the stalk (A) toward the steering wheel (automatic return) to activate the windscreen washer.
The windscreen wiper functions automatically when the windscreen washer is activated. When the stalk is
released, the windscreen washer stops functioning while the windscreen wipers perform a few more
strokes.
A low windscreen washer fluid level is indicated by the relative warning light on the instrument panel.
Operating the headlight washer
The headlight washer activates automatically when the windscreen washer is operated as described
previously and with the external lights on.
The headlight washer uses the same tank as the windscreen washer. A low fluid level is indicated by the
relative warning light on the instrument panel.
Cruise control (optional)
It is an electronically controlled aid to driving which makes it possible to drive the vehicle at a constant speed,
with an operating range between 30 km/h - 200 Km/h, without having to keep the accelerator pedal
pressed.
We advice the use of the device on long, straight and dry stretches of roads, with few gear changes
(for ex. on highways).
Do not use the device in city driving.
- Activating device
Turn the ring knob (G) to position ON.
The connection is indicated by the warning light (H) on the instrument panel and the warning light (I) with
combined message on the TFT display.
The device is to be engaged only in 4th or 5th gear.
When driving downhill with the device engaged, it is possible that the speed of the vehicle increases
somewhat with respect to the speed in the memory.
- Storage of the speed of the vehicle
Proceed as follows.
turn the ring knob (G) on ON and, pressing the accelerator pedal, bring the vehicle to the desired speed;
turn the ring knob (L) upwards (+) for at least 3 seconds, then release it: the speed of the vehicle is stored
and it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
If necessary, it is possible to accelerate pressing the accelerator pedal: when the pedal is released, the
vehicle will return to the speed that had been stored previously.
- Increase of the stored speed
It may occur in two ways:

pressing the accelerator and then storing the new speed;
or
Turning the ring knob (L) upwards (+).
Every time the ring knob is acted upon, there is an increase in the speed of about 2 Km/h, instead, keeping
the knob turned upwards, the speed varies continuously.
- Reduction of the stored speed
It may occur in two ways:

disengaging the device and later storing the new speed;
or
turning the ring knob (L) downwards (-) till the new speed is reached, which will automatically remain in
storage.
Every time the ring knob is acted upon, there is a reduction in the speed of about 2 Km/h, instead, keeping
the knob turned downwards, the speed varies continuously.
- Deactivating the device
Turn the ring knob (G) on OFF or the ignition key to position 0. The device is also automatically disengaged
pressing the brake pedal.
While driving with the device connected, do not shift gear into neutral.
Removing the steering column switch
The switch is located on the steering column, behind the F1 gearbox shift paddles.

Remove the F1 shift paddles ( E5.12).
Undo the screw fastening the steering column
switch.
Remove the steering column switch (A) from the
steering column.
Disconnect the connectors (2), (3), (4) and (5)

and the connector for the cable (6).
Refitting the steering column switch
Connect the connectors (2), (3), (4) and (5) and

the connector for cable (6).
Fit the steering column switch (A) on the steering
column.
Hand tighten the screw fastening the steering
column switch.
Refit the F1 shift paddles ( E5.12).

E5.11 Rear view mirrors
Adjusting the interior rear view mirror
Do not adjust the rear view mirrors while the vehicle is in motion.
The internal rear view mirror is electrochromic and dims automatically to reduce glare. The speed at which
the mirror dims varies in relation to the brightness of the incident light.
Grip the internal rear view mirror (A) and move

manually into the desired position.
Press button (1) to enable or disable
electrochromic dimming mode.
The green LED indicated lights to indicate
when electrochromic dimming mode is
enabled. The green LED is off when
electrochromic dimming mode is disabled.
Removing the interior rear view mirror

Remove the cabin light ( E5.18).

Detach the internal rear view mirror (A) from the
respective mounting.
Disconnect the connector (2) from the
rain/twilight sensor.
Remove the internal rear view mirror (A) from the
vehicle.
Refitting the interior rear view mirror
Place the internal rear view mirror (A) in the

vehicle.
Connect the connector (2) to the rain/twilight
sensor.
Refit the internal rear view mirror (A) on the

respective mounting, pressing manually until
the mirror snaps audibly into place.
Refit the cabin light ( E5.18).

Adjusting the external rear view mirrors

Do not adjust the rear view mirrors while the vehicle is in motion.
When reverse is engaged, the driver may adjust the passenger side rear view mirror into a different position
than the one used in normal driving to facilitate parking manoeuvres. This position may be memorised by
pressing the driving position memory buttons (E5.16, "Driving positions").
If a personalised reverse position for the rear view mirror has not been memorised, when reverse gear is
engaged, the external rear view mirror will still move slightly downwards and inwards (relative to the
normal driving position).
To adjust the driver side external rear view

mirror, rotate knob (1) by 45° to the left and
push in the desired direction of adjustment to
set the mirror position required.
To adjust the passenger side external rear view
mirror, rotate knob (1) by 45° to the right and
push in the desired direction of adjustment to
set the mirror position required.
Rotate knob (1) by 180° to fold both external rear
view mirrors inwards.
Replacing the external rear view mirror adjustment control
Undo the three screws (1) fastening the

mounting bracket (A) for the external rear
view mirror adjustment control (B) to the door
panel.
Remove the mounting bracket (A) for the
external rear view mirror adjustment control
(B) from the door panel.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the external
rear view mirror adjustment control (B) to the
respective mounting bracket (A).
Remove the external rear view mirror adjustment
control (B) from the respective mounting
bracket (A) and replace.
Fit the new external rear view mirror adjustment
control (B) onto the respective mounting
bracket (A).
Tighten the two screws (2) fastening the external
rear view mirror adjustment control (B) to the
Fit the mounting bracket (A) for the external rear
view mirror adjustment control (B) in the
respective seat on the door panel.
Tighten the three screws (1) fastening the
mounting bracket (A) for the external rear
view mirror adjustment control (B) to the door
panel.
Replacing the external rear view mirror glass
Applying leverage in different positions, remove

the glass (A) from the rear view mirror
housing.
Detach the cable branches (1) from the mirror

glass heater elements (A) and replace the
glass.
Connect the heater element cable branches (1)
to the glass (A).
Manually press the glass (A) into place in the

rear view mirror housing.

Removing the external rear view mirror
The mirrors are mounted on the outer side of the doors.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand external rear view mirror; the procedure for the left
hand mirror is identical.

Cut the clamp (1) and remove the foam rubber

covering (2) around the connectors.
Remove the two retainer clips indicated securing

the external rear view mirror cable (B) to the
door frame.
Note that this photo was taken from above and
without the seals installed to illustrate the
Remove the three connectors (3) from their seats

and disconnect.
Note that there are four connectors in the left
hand external rear view mirror.
Support the weight of the external rear view
mirror and undo the three screws indicated
fastening the mirror to the door frame.
Remove the right hand external rear view mirror

(A) from the door, pulling out the relative
cable.
Refitting the external rear view mirror

Fastening external rear view mirror - door Screw 9.5 Nm B
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand external rear view mirror; the procedure for the left hand
mirror is identical.
Fit the external rear view mirror (A) in its seat on
the door, inserting the relative cable first.
Support the weight of the external rear view

mirror and tighten the three screws indicated
fastening the mirror to the door frame.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Connect the three connectors (3) and refit in their

seats.
Note that there are four connectors in the left
hand external rear view mirror.
Fasten the two retainer clips indicated securing
the external rear view mirror cable (B) to the
door frame.
Note that this photo was taken from above and
without the seals installed to illustrate the
Fit, replacing if necessary, the foam rubber

covering (2) in its original position around the
connectors and fit a new clamp (1).

Fitting the external rear view mirrors
The external rear view mirrors are supplied as spare parts as disassembled units ready for painting. After
painting, the mirrors must be assembled as follows.
The procedure given is for the driver side external rear view mirror; the driver side mirror differs from the
passenger side mirror in that it also includes the external temperature sensor.
The main components of the external rear view
mirror are listed aside:
(A) _ Frame
(B) _ Outer shell
(C) _ Mounting base
Fit the frame (A) on the relative mounting points

inside the outer shell (B).
For the driver side mirror ONLY: when fitting the

frame, ensure that the external temperature
sensor (1) is installed correctly in the relative
housing as shown in the figure.
Check that the wiring harness is not crushed
before fastening the frame to the outer
shell of the external rear view mirror.
Apply and tighten the three indicated screws

fastening the frame (A) to the outer shell (B).
Fit the mounting base (C) in the relative seat on

the frame, pulling the wiring through the
mounting itself.
Fold the rear view mirror inward electrically to gain access to the screws fastening the components.
Apply the large screw indicated and tighten to

fasten the frame to the mounting base (C).
Apply the small screw indicated and tighten to
fasten the frame to the outer shell (B).
Fit the seal (D) in the relative seat on the

mounting frame, pulling the wiring through the
seal itself and aligning with the holes on the
frame.
Ensure that the seal is installed correctly (D).
Fit and tighten the three indicated stud bolts

fastening the seal (D) to the frame.
Screw the short end of the stud bolts into the
frame.
E5.12 Gearshift paddles
Gearshift paddles (F1 gearbox)
The driver can select the gears by means of two shift paddles located behind the steering wheel.
Pull the left shift paddle DOWN to downshift.
Pull the right shift paddle UP to upshift.
Pull both shift paddles to put in neutral.
Removing the F1 shift paddles
Located on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.

Undo the lower screw (1) fastening the F1 shift

paddles.
Undo the two upper screws fastening the F1 shift
paddles.
Disconnect the connector (4) and remove the F1
shift paddles.
Refitting the F1 shift paddles

Fastening F1 shift paddles Screw 4 Nm B
Fit the F1 shift paddles onto the steering column,

ensuring the cables are routed correctly, and
connect the connector (4).
Tighten the two upper screws fastening the F1
shift paddles.

Screw 4 Nm B
Tighten the lower screw (1) fastening the F1 shift
paddles.

Screw 4 Nm B

Gearshift paddles (mechanical gearbox)
The driver can select the gears, with the clutch pedal pressed, by means of the gearshift paddle located on
the centre console, by turning it in the shown positions (R, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
To engage reverse gear (R) it is necessary to press the paddle down and then move it in the relevant position.
E5.13 Ashtray - Cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Accessing the ashtray
Lift the flap (1) to access the ashtray.
Closing the ashtray
Push the flap gently downwards to close.
Cigarette lighter
Using the cigarette lighter

Push the centre button in completely to switch on the cigarette lighter (2).
After a few seconds, once operating temperature is reached, the cigarette lighter automatically springs back
to its initial position.
Remove the cigarette lighter and use.
To replace, push gently into its socket.
Replacing the cigarette lighter
Located inside the ashtray.
Remove the cigarette lighter (A) from its seat

and replace.
Fit the new cigarette lighter ( A) in the relative
seat and secure by pressing manually into
place.

E5.14 Lid and fuel filler flap opening systems
Opening the engine compartment lid
Pull the release lever (1), located on the lower

left hand trim panel of the dashboard.
Push the lever (2), located at the position

indicated under the engine compartment lid,
to the left.
Lift the engine compartment lid until the gas

struts take up the weight.
Emergency engine compartment lid release (UP TO Assembly No. 86053)

If the engine compartment lid cannot be opened by pulling the relative lever, the lid may be opened using the
emergency release cable located under the dashboard on the passenger side, as described as follows.
FROM Assembly No. 86054, the dual Bowden cable with emergency release mechanism has been replaced
by a single Bowden cable located on the left hand side of the engine compartment. As a result,
emergency lid release is no longer possible.
Pull the engine compartment lid emergency

release cable (C) until the lock unlocks with
an audible click.
Closing the engine compartment lid
CAUTION
Always check that the engine compartment lid has
been correctly closed to prevent accidental
opening while driving.
Lower the lid to close and press down on the

lock area until it locks with an audible click.
Replacing the engine compartment lid lock

Fastening engine compartment lid lock Nut 9 Nm B
Located at the font of the engine compartment, under the front cosmetic shield.

Remove the cable tie (2).

engine compartment lid lock (A).
Detach the Bowden cable (3), remove the engine
compartment lid lock (A) from the relative
seat and replace.
Attach the Bowden cable (3) and fit the new
engine compartment lid lock (A) in the relative
seat.
engine compartment lid lock (A).

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit a new cable tie (2).

Close the engine compartment lid, checking that
it closes correctly and is flush with the
bumper.
If the engine compartment lid closes incorrectly
or is not flush with the surrounding bodywork,
adjust the engine compartment lid lock by
adjusting the three respective fastener screws.

Replacing the engine compartment lid striker plate

Fastening striker plate - engine compartment lid Screw 13 Nm B
Located on the inner side of the engine compartment lid, toward the front.

engine compartment lid striker plate (A).
Remove the engine compartment lid striker plate
(A) from the relative seat and replace.
Fit the new engine compartment lid striker plate
(A) in the relative seat.
engine compartment lid striker plate (A).

Screw 13 Nm B
Close the engine compartment lid, checking that
it closes correctly and is flush with the
bumper.
If the engine compartment lid closes incorrectly
or is not flush with the surrounding bodywork,
adjust the engine compartment lid striker
plate by adjusting the four respective fastener
screws.
Replacing the engine compartment lid release Bowden cable

The engine compartment lid release dual Bowden cable is located in the engine compartment, under the
cosmetic shields.
FROM Assembly No. 86054, the dual Bowden cable with emergency release mechanism has been replaced
by a single Bowden cable located on the left hand side of the engine compartment. As a result,
emergency lid release is no longer possible.

Replace the engine compartment lid lock ( E5.14).
Detach the Bowden cable only.
Detach the indicated clips fastening the Bowden

cable (A) on the left hand side of the engine
compartment.
Note that not all the fastener clips are shown in
the image aside.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 86053
Detach the indicated clips fastening the Bowden

cable (A) on the right hand side of the engine
compartment.
the image aside.

release handle (B).
Remove the release handle (B) from the relative
seat.
Detach the Bowden cable (A) from the release

handle (B).
Remove the adhesive fixing the cable grommet
(1).
Detach the cable grommet (1) from the relative
seat on the left hand side of the firewall.
Remove the Bowden cable (A) from the relative
seat on the left hand side of the firewall.
Undo the screw (2) fastening the wiring harness

(C)
Move the wiring harness aside (C) and undo the
five screws indicated fastening the tray (D).
Remove the tray (D) from the relative seat.
Remove the adhesive fixing the cable grommet

(3).
Detach the cable grommet (3) from the relative
seat on the right hand side of the firewall.
Remove the Bowden cable (A) from the relative
seat on the right hand side of the firewall.
Remove the dual Bowden cable (A) from the
engine compartment and replace.
Fit the new Bowden cable (A) in the relative seat
on the right hand side of the firewall.
Fit the cable grommet (3) in the relative seat on
the right hand side of the firewall, ensuring
that it sits flush with the surface.
Apply adhesive biSil to fix the cable grommet (3).
Fit the tray (D) in the relative seat.

Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the tray
(D).

Nut / Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fit the wiring (C) as originally mounted and

tighten the relative fastener screw (2).
Fit the Bowden cable (A) in the relative seat on

the left hand side of the firewall.
Fit the cable grommet (1) in the relative seat on
the left hand side of the firewall, ensuring that
it sits flush with the surface.
Apply adhesive biSil to fix the cable grommet (1).
Attach the Bowden cable (A) to the release

handle (B).
Fit the release handle (B) in the relative seat.
release handle (B).

Screw 2.6 Nm C
Attach the indicated clips fastening the Bowden

cable (A) on the right hand side of the engine
compartment.
the image aside.
Attach the indicated clips fastening the Bowden

cable (A) on the left hand side of the engine
compartment.
the image aside.
Replace the engine compartment lid lock ( E5.14).

Attach the Bowden cable and adjust the lock.

Opening the luggage compartment lid

Press the button (1) to the left of the driver seat.
The luggage compartment lid may also be

opened by pressing and holding the button
(2) on the remote control of the ignition key
for at least 2 seconds.
Lift the luggage compartment lid until the gas

struts take up the weight.
Safety release mechanism for children

To prevent the risk of children being accidentally
trapped in the luggage compartment, the
luggage compartment lid may be opened by
pulling the fluorescent (glow in the dark)
handle (3) located on the internal luggage
compartment trim.
Closing the luggage compartment lid
Lower the luggage compartment lid until it makes

contact with the lock, gripping the relative
handle recessed into the inner surface of the
lid itself.
Press down gently until the lock audibly engages.
Replacing the luggage compartment lid lock

Located on the inner side of the luggage compartment lid, under the luggage compartment lid trim panel.

Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
Detach the cable (2)
luggage compartment lid lock (A).
Remove the luggage compartment lid lock (A)
Fit the new luggage compartment lid lock (A) in
the relative seat.
Partially tighten the three screws indicated
fastening the luggage compartment lid lock
(A).
The lock must still be moveable by hand.

This causes the luggage compartment lid lock
(A) to align automatically with the striker
plate.


Screw 20 Nm A
Attach the cable (2).


Refit the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
Replacing the emergency luggage compartment lid release mechanism

Fastening emergency luggage compartment lid Screw 2 Nm C
release mechanism
Located on the inner side of the luggage compartment lid, under the luggage compartment lid trim panel.

Detach the cable (1) from the emergency release
mechanism (A).
emergency release mechanism (A).
Remove the emergency release mechanism (A)
Fit the new emergency release mechanism (A) in
the relative seat.
emergency release mechanism (A).

Screw 2 Nm C
Attach the cable (1) to the emergency release

mechanism (A).

Replacing the motorised luggage compartment lid striker plate

Located in the luggage compartment, under the sill protector.


DCT ECU mounting bracket (A).
Remove the bracket (A) complete with the DCT
ECU, moving it aside so that it does not
Mark the position of the luggage compartment lid
striker (B) relative to the bodyshell.
luggage compartment lid striker plate (B).
Remove the luggage compartment lid striker
plate (B) from the relative seat and replace.
Fit the new luggage compartment lid striker (B)
in the respective seat, aligning the reference
marks made previously.
Tighten the two screws indicated and connect
the connector (1).
If necessary, move the RHT electrically into the

Insert the ignition key in the driver side door lock;
turn the key counterclockwise and hold in this
position to start the Coupé to Spider RHT roof
cycle.
Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key
counterclockwise again to complete the
luggage compartment lid closing cycle.
Turn the ignition key clockwise and hold in this

position to start the Spider to Coupé RHT roof
cycle.
Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key clockwise
again to complete the luggage compartment
lid closing cycle.
If the luggage compartment lid does not close correctly, proceed as follows.
Loosen the two screws indicated.
Adjust the striker (B) along the Z axis, then
tighten the two screws indicated.

Screw 20 Nm B
Repeat the luggage compartment lid closing test described previously.
Fit the bracket (A), complete with DCT ECU, in

the relative seat.
DCT ECU mounting bracket (A).

Screw 9 Nm B

Refit the sill protector.
Adjusting the luggage compartment lid lock


Loosen the three screws indicated fastening the
This causes the luggage compartment lid lock
(A) to align automatically with the striker
plate.


Screw 20 Nm A

Opening the fuel filler flap
With the ignition key turned to "0", press the

button (1) located to the left of the driver seat.
Open the fuel filler flap (2).

Undo the cap (3), turning counterclockwise.
Hang the cap (3) on the relative hook (4).
Opening the fuel filler flap in an emergency
In the event of a fuel filler flap release button failure or a flat battery, the fuel filler flap may be opened
manually as follows.
Turn the fastener (5) and remove the right hand

cover (6).
Locate and pull the red emergency fuel filler flap
release cable indicated.
Closing the fuel filler flap
Tighten the cap completely (3).

Close the cover (2), ensuring that the emergency
cable (7) remains inside the fuel filler cap
recess.
Replacing the fuel filler flap actuator

Located in the fuel filler neck compartment.

Remove the rear right hand wheelhouse only.

protective cover (A).
Remove the cover (A).
Pull the red emergency fuel filler flap release

chord (1) out from the two cable grommets
indicated.

Unscrew and remove the fuel filler cap (3).
Undo the four screws indicated fastening the fuel
filler flap actuator (B).
Remove the fuel filler flap actuator (B) from its
seat and replace.
Fit the new fuel filler flap actuator (B) in the
relative seat.
fuel filler flap actuator (B).

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fit and tighten the fuel filler cap (3).
Feed the red emergency fuel filler flap release

chord (1) through the two cable grommets
indicated.
Check that the emergency release mechanism
works properly by pulling the red chord (1)
from the luggage compartment.
Fit the cover (A) in the relative seat.
protective cover (A).

Refit the rear right hand wheelhouse
Removing the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel
Located on the left hand side of the driver side mat.
Using an appropriate tool, prise out the luggage

compartment lid and fuel filler flap release
button panel (A) from the relative seat.
Remove the luggage compartment lid and fuel
filler flap release button panel (A) from the
vehicle.
Refitting the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel
Fit the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler

flap release button panel (A) in the vehicle.
Install the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler

flap release button panel (A) in the respective
seat, pressing down until the panel fastens
into place.

E5.15 Park Lock
The Park Lock is a DCT gearbox built-in safety locking device which prevents involuntary moving of the
vehicle when the multiplate clutches are open, that is when the engine is off and/or with no hydraulic
pressure in the DCT gearbox. As a matter of fact this device is activated automatically at every "Key-off".
Park Lock activated

Park Lock deactivated
The mechanism consists of a retainer wheel located on the output shaft, onto which a cable-controlled
ratchet engages. When the ratchet is over one of the teeth of the retainer wheel, the compression spring
is loaded; as soon as the vehicle begins to move, the ratchet drops between two teeth, the spring relaxes,
the carriage moves and the system locks.
When exiting parking mode, carriage returns to its starting position and the compression spring retracts the
ratchet from the gap between the retainer wheel teeth.
The vehicle is equipped with a manual system for releasing the Park Lock for use in the event of an
emergency (e.g. vehicle breakdown or when transporting the vehicle with the battery disconnected).
The system allows the Park Lock to be released from either the passenger compartment (UP TO Assembly
No. 85744) or the luggage compartment. The device uses 4 Bowden cables with INOX laminated sheath
and internal teflon sheath for heat protection, connected to a device mounted on the DCT gearbox, in
particular on the release pin. Two cables are mounted on the underbody, two are mounted on the DCT
gearbox/underchassis.
Deactivating Park Lock electronically (CAR WASH mode)
CAUTION
The vehicle may move with no warning when the Park Lock is released electronically (CAR WASH mode)!
At each Key-OFF, the Park Lock system engages automatically to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Provided that the vehicle electrical system is functioning correctly, the Park Lock system may be deactivated
electronically as described as follows.
In the case of a vehicle electrical system malfunction, the Park Lock system must be released with
the "Emergency mechanical release procedure for Park Lock".
Start the engine.

Select 1st gear.
Select neutral (N).
Turn the ignition switch to Key-ON within 3 seconds.
Check that the letter "N" is shown on the DCT
gearbox display.
The Park Lock system is now temporarily
DEACTIVATED and the vehicle is held in
position only by the electric parking brake, if
engaged.
The Park Lock system will only remain in the deactivated state as long as the ignition switch is turned to
ON.
The Park Lock system will be ACTIVATED again normally the next time the ignition switch is turned to
Key-OFF.
Mechanically deactivating the Park Lock
CAUTION
The vehicle may move with no warning when the Park Lock is mechanically released!
CAUTION
In the event of failure with the vehicle NOT ON A LEVEL SURFACE, deactivate the Park Lock from the
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT only.
In the event of failure with the vehicle ON A LEVEL SURFACE, deactivate the Park Lock from the
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT.
Should it not be possible to release the Park Lock electronically, the system may be released manually from
the luggage compartment. If the vehicle is NOT on a level surface, before releasing the system, place
suitable chocks behind or in front of the wheels as necessary to prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly.
UP TO Assembly No. 85744, DEACTIVATING FROM PASSENGER COMPARTMENT (with vehicle not on
a level surface)
Lift the armrest.
Prise out the rubber plug (1).
Select the wrench (A) Part No. 251415 for

releasing the DCT gearbox lock from the tool
kit tray.
Fit the wrench (A) Part No. 251415 into the seat
on the mechanism and DISENGAGE the
Park Lock by turning CLOCKWISE
completely.
If the electrical system is sufficiently functional,
turn the ignition switch to ON and check that
the letter "N" is shown on the DCT gearbox
display.
After moving the vehicle to a suitable location, ACTIVATE the Park Lock as follows.
If the Park Lock does not activate, the vehicle will function correctly but at the next key-off, the device will
not activate and the vehicle will only be held in position by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
Fit the hex head wrench (A) Part No. 251415 into
the seat on the mechanism and ENGAGE the
Park Lock by turning ANTICLOCKWISE
completely.

the letter "P" is shown on the DCT gearbox
display.
Fit and fasten the rubber plug (1).
Close the glove compartment
FROM Assembly No. 85745, RELEASING FROM LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT (only with vehicle on a
level surface, or with vehicle not on a level surface, but with suitable chocks placed in front of or
behind the wheels).
CAUTION
If the vehicle is NOT on a level surface, suitable chocks must be placed in front of or behind the wheels.
FROM Assembly No. 85745, the device for deactivating the Park Lock from the passenger compartment
has been eliminated; therefore, in the event of necessity, the Park Lock must be deactivated from the
luggage compartment. If the vehicle is NOT on a level surface, suitable chocks must be placed in front
of or behind the wheels before deactivating the Park Lock.
Detach and remove cover (2).

Prise out and remove the rubber plug (3).


kit tray.

affected by modification).

kit tray.
on the mechanism and DISENGAGE the
Park Lock by turning ANTICLOCKWISE
completely.

the letter "N" is shown on the gearbox display.
After moving the vehicle to a suitable location, ACTIVATE the Park Lock as follows.
If the Park Lock is not reengaged, the vehicle will function correctly but at the next Key-OFF the device
will not activate and the vehicle will only be held in position by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
on the mechanism and ENGAGE the Park
Lock by turning CLOCKWISE completely.
the letter "P" is shown on the DCT gearbox
display.
Fit and fasten the rubber plug (3).
Fit the cover (2).

E5.16 Seat controls
Seat adjustment controls
CAUTION
Never adjust the seat position while driving, as this may cause loss of control of the vehicle.
With 2+2 version seats and optional Full Electric seats only, the seats may only be adjusted for a limited time
(approx. 15 seconds) if the door is opened in key-off state. The seat alone may be adjusted again for a
brief period each time that one of the doors is opened or both of the doors are closed in key-off state.
Adjusting the backward/forward position, height and tilt angle of the seat cushion
Push the control (A) forwards or backwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
forward/backward position of the seat.
Push the control (A) downwards or upwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
height or tilt angle of the seat.
Adjusting seat backrest inclination
Turn the control (B) forwards or backwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
inclination of the seat backrest.
Lumbar support adjustment (optional Full Electric)
Push the control (C) forwards, backwards, upwards or downwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control
itself, to adjust the backrest lumbar support.
Pneumatic adjustment of the side of the seats (optional Full Electric)
Push the control (D) as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the width of the lateral backrest
and cushion sides.
Driving positions (optional Full Electric, driver seat only)
Use the three buttons (E) as described as follows to memorise or recall up to three different driving positions
(function only enabled in key-on state):
to memorise a driving position setting, adjust the seat, steering wheel and external rear view mirrors as
desired using the respective controls, then press and hold any one of the three buttons (E) (each button
corresponds to one memorisable position) for at least three seconds, until a double beep is emitted
confirming that the setting has been saved. Adding a new driving position setting to the memory
automatically replaces the setting assigned previously with the same button.
to recall a memorised driving position, press the relative button (E) and release within three seconds.
Driving position selection may not be recalled while the vehicle is in motion.
The movements begin once one of the buttons (E) is released.
After releasing one of the buttons (E), if the vehicle starts to move before the seat, steering wheel and
external rear view mirrors have reached their respective memory positions, they will continue moving until
the selected positions are reached.
If the memorised longitudinal position for the passenger seat is less than 50 mm from the rear travel limit, the
seat will stop at approximately 50 mm from the rear travel limit when the memorised seat position is
recalled. The seat may then be moved beyond this point using the forward/backward adjustment control.
Pressing any of the seat adjustment control buttons or memory buttons immediately arrests the automatic
function in progress (e.g. memory recall and driver or rear seat easy entry/exit function UP TO Assembly
No. 106216).
Heating (optional Full Electric)
Turn the dial (F) to switch on the heated seat function and set the temperature.
Turning the dial to "0" switches the seat heating function off.
Tipping the backrest
Lift the handle (G) to tip the backrest forwards.
Adjusting the headrests

To raise the headrest, simply lift manually into the desired position.
To lower the headrest, press and hold the release button (H), and push the headrest down into the desired
position.
CAUTION
Adjust the headrests according to your height, so that the centre of the headrest is level with the nape, not
the neck.
Easy Entry/Exit (2+2 version, UP TO Assembly No. 106216)
The driver seat easy entry/exit function facilitates entry into and egress from the vehicle for the driver. The
function automatically raises the steering when the door is opened in key-off state. At key-on with the door
closed, the steering wheel returns to the personalised driving position memorised by the driver.
To facilitate access to the rear seats and egress from the vehicle for rear passengers, the front seats
have “Rear seat easy entry" function (enabled only with the door open and with the vehicle at a standstill).
This function automatically lowers the front seat and slides it forwards as far as the front travel limit when
the backrest is tipped in key-off state with the door open. The seat automatically returns to its original
position when the backrest is raised.
E5.17 Infotainment system
Infotainment system components
A - NIT
B - Audiopilot microphone (2-DIN BOSE FULL system)
C - iPod adaptor
D - SDARS antenna
E - Antenna sheet
F - Radio antenna amplifier
G - Tweeters
H - Twiddlers
I - Twiddler loudspeaker
L - Woofers
NIT pre-diagnosis
Whenever a fault attributable to the NIT is found, please compile the following check list to provide the factory
with all the information necessary for diagnosis before starting any work:
1. Description of problem found;

2. NIT SW version (see following procedure for identifying software version number);
3. Frequency (is problem sporadic or continuous?)
4. Resolvability (is fault still present after performing “bus sleep” procedure?).
Diagnosing failed NIT software update
If, after updating the NIT software on the aforementioned vehicles, the audio system enters limited
functionality IFS emergency mode, this means that the software update procedure has failed. If this
occurs, the audio system may still be updated correctly by inserting the software update disc again and
repeating the software update procedure.
To check if the audio system is in IFS emergency mode, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the audio system on;
2. Press MENU H/K;
3. Select S/K system setup;
4. Press S/K HDD Management;
5. Select View available space on S/K HDD;
6. In IFS emergency mode, dotted lines are
shown instead of values for the parameters
Used, Available and Capacity, as shown in
the image aside.
Removing the NIT
Whenever an NIT or other component supplied by Becker is replaced, the replaced component must
be placed in the original packaging (use the packaging containing the new replacement unit) and
returned, to avoid the possibility of rejected warranty claims for faults which could otherwise be
suspected as being the result of impact damage.
Located at the centre of the dashboard.

Remove the right hand dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).
Undo the four screws indicated fastening the NIT

(A) to the mounting bracket.
Remove the NIT (A) from the mounting bracket.
Disconnect the seven rear connectors of the NIT
(A) and remove the NIT.
Refitting the NIT

Fastening NIT BOSE Screw 5 Nm B
Connect the seven rear connectors of the NIT
(A).
Fit the NIT (A) in the relative mounting bracket,
routing the cables correctly.
NIT (A) to the mounting bracket.

Screw 5 Nm B
Refit the right hand dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

Replacing the woofer loudspeakers

Fastening woofer loudspeakers Screw 4 Nm C
Located at the bottom of the doors, behind the door panel.


woofer loudspeaker (A).
Remove the woofer loudspeaker (A) from its seat
and replace.
Fit the new woofer loudspeaker (A) in the relative
seat.
woofer loudspeaker (A).

Screw 4 Nm C

Replacing the tweeter loudspeakers

Located on the inner side of the door panels


tweeter (1) from its seat and remove.
Fit and fasten the new tweeter (1) in the
respective seat, pressing manually until it
snaps audibly into place.

Replacing the rear twiddler loudspeakers

Fastening rear twiddler loudspeakers Screw 5 Nm B
Located on the lower lateral passenger compartment trim panels, behind the respective cover grilles.

cover grille (A) from its seat.
Remove the passenger compartment trim
panels ( E4.04).
Remove the upper lateral trim panel only when
replacing the twiddler loudspeaker (C).
FROM Assembly No. 96022, the speaker (C)

is not fitted.

twiddler loudspeaker (B).
Remove the twiddler loudspeaker (B) from its
seat, disconnecting the connector (1), and
replace.
Connect the connector (1) and fit the new
twiddler loudspeaker (B) in the respective
seat.
twiddler loudspeaker (B).

Screw 5 Nm B
Refit the passenger compartment trim

panels ( E4.04).
Refit the upper lateral trim panel (only when
replacing the twiddler (C)).
Fit the cover grille (A) in the respective seat,

pressing manually until it clicks audibly into
place.
Replacing the antenna sheet

The antenna sheet is located on the inner side of the luggage compartment lid, under the trim panel.

Undo the screw (1) fastening the amplifier (A)

and the earth cable to the luggage
compartment lid.
Remove the amplifier (A) from the relative seat
on the luggage compartment lid.
Disconnect the connector (2) from the amplifier

(A).
Detach the antenna sheet (B) from the relative
seat on the luggage compartment lid and
replace.
Fit the new antenna sheet (B) in the relative seat
on the luggage compartment lid, pressing
manually to affix
Connect the connector (2) to the amplifier (A).
Fit the amplifier (A) in the relative seat on the

Tighten the screw (1) fastening the amplifier (A)
compartment lid.

Screw 7 Nm C

Replacing the radio antenna amplifier

The radio antenna amplifier is located on the inner side of the luggage compartment lid, under the trim panel.

Undo the screw (1) fastening the amplifier (A)

compartment lid.
Remove the amplifier (A) from the relative seat
on the luggage compartment lid.

(A).
(A).
Remove the amplifier (A) from the luggage
compartment lid and replace.
Fit the new amplifier (A) on the luggage
compartment lid.
Fit the amplifier (A) in the relative seat on the
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the amplifier (A)
compartment lid.

Screw 7 Nm C

Replacing the iPod cable

Remove the complete glove compartment in dashboard ( E4.02).

Remove the iPod cable (A) and replace.
Fit the new iPod cable (A).
Leaving enough of the cable free to
subsequently fit the iPod connector in the
glove compartment and taking care not to
bend the cable too tightly, gather up the iPod
cable (A) and secure with a new cable tie (1).
Refit the complete glove compartment onto the dashboard ( E4.02).

Replacing the SDARS antenna

Fastening SDARS antenna Nut 8 Nm B
Fastening radio antenna amplifier Nut 6 Nm B

Remove the bracket (A) from the relative seat,
sliding downwards.
Disconnect the SDARS antenna connector.

Remove the SDARS antenna (B) from the
bracket, detaching the respective fastener
tabs.
Fit the new SDARS antenna (B) on the mounting
bracket and fix by pressing manually into
place to fasten the respective fastener tabs.
Connect the SDARS antenna connector.
Orient the respective shim correctly and tighten
the indicated nut.

Nut 8 Nm B
Fit the bracket (A) in the relative seat, sliding

upwards.

Nut 6 Nm B


E5.18 Internal lighting
Removing the cabin light
Using a suitable tool, prise off the trim (A) and

remove.

cabin light (B).
Using a suitable tool, prise out the cabin light (B)
from its seat.

Remove the protective cover and disconnect the
connector (2).
Remove the cabin light (B) from the vehicle.
Refitting the cabin light

Fastening cabin light Screw 4 Nm C
Place the cabin light (B) in the vehicle.

Connect the connector (2) and refit the
respective protective cover.
Fit the cabin light (B) in the relative seat,

pressing until it snaps audibly into place.
cabin light (B).

Screw 4 Nm C
Fit the cover (A) in its respective seat, pressing

until it snaps audibly into place.

E6.01 General
Components of the retractable hard top (RHT)
A - Front Roof shell

B - Rear Roof shell
C - Tonneau Cover
D - Rear screen
E - Front Roof shell seal
F - Rear Roof shell seal
G - Tonneau Cover seal
H - Headliner
I - Rear screen upper trim panel
L - Rear screen lower trim panel
M - Electronic Control Unit ECU
N - Hydraulic system pump
O - Main cylinders
P - Tonneau Cover cylinders
Q - Tonneau Cover kinematics
The retractable hard top (RHT) employs innovative mechanical solutions, boasts rapid opening and closing
times, is space efficient once stowed and is constructed from special materials.
The mechanism enables both the cover and the retractable hard top to move simultaneously, for an opening
or closing cycle in 14 seconds compared with approximately 20 seconds for a conventional system.
Space usage when the roof is stowed is optimised by stacking roof sections with the concave side facing up,
offering substantial luggage compartment space even with the roof down (240 litres, enough space for two
60x40x30 cm trolleys).
The use of aluminium panels and a cast aluminium structure has considerably reduced overall weight and
moving mass compared with conventional retractable hard top solutions.
The following are the stages in the opening cycle of the retractable hard top:
Precautions and guidelines for using the RHT retractable hard top.
CAUTION
KEEP hands, fingers and objects AWAY from the Front Roof shell, Rear Roof shell, Tonneau Cover,
luggage compartment lid, kinematics and all other connected parts.
CAUTION
While the RHT is in motion, KEEP hands, fingers and objects AWAY from the Front Roof shell, Rear Roof
shell, Tonneau Cover, luggage compartment lid, kinematics and all other connected parts.
CAUTION
The rear seats must be UNOCCUPIED and the front occupants must be seated correctly while the RHT is in
motion.
When the luggage compartment lid is moving, the operator must maintain a safety distance of at least
36 cm from the rear bumper (along the X axis).
No more than 10 consecutive complete RHT open and close cycles may be performed; roof operation
is electronically inhibited in the event of overheating.
The minimum headroom required for operating the RHT is 2 metres.

DO NOT operate the RHT at temperatures below -10° C. The system has a self-inhibiting function
preventing operation until the temperature has returned within the specified operating range.
DO NOT open the RHT in the event of strong winds.
DO NOT drive off before the roof is completely closed or completely open. Check for the warning light
and warning sound.
Remove any accessories such as luggage racks or ski racks from the RHT BEFORE operating the
RHT.
Maintain a minimum safety distance of 50 cm (along the X axis) from the luggage compartment lid.
DO NOT operate the RHT if the vehicle is not perfectly level (e.g. with one wheel on the kerb).
DO NOT place any objects on the luggage compartment separator.
DO NOT load the luggage compartment above the limit indicated by the luggage compartment
separator.
DO NOT place or rest any objects on the Tonneau Cover or the surrounding trim panels.
DO NOT place or rest any objects near the flaps in Spider configuration.
Only operate the RHT with the vehicle on a perfectly level surface.
DO NOT introduce objects into the kinematics or inside the headliner.
DO NOT place any objects or apply any load on the luggage compartment lid while the RHT is
opening or closing.
DO NOT let go of the RHT suddenly when moving manually.

The roof must be handled manually by at least two adult persons.
All movements must be correctly coordinated when moving the RHT manually.
CAUTION
KEEP the head AWAY from the kinematics during emergency operation of the RHT.
CAUTION
KEEP hands, fingers and objects AWAY from the moving components of the RHT.
At least two adult persons are required to move the RHT manually, working in a coordinated fashion
so as not to damage or bend the Tonneau Cover.
Visualisation on TFT display
Operation
The driver presses the relative control button to request the aperture and closure of the roof.
While the roof is moving, the TFT display displays the specific message "Roof opening / Roof closing"
together with the vehicle symbol depicting the roof partially open/closed (the same vehicle symbol is used
for three intermediate positions between roof completely open and roof completely closed).
The specific message "Roof closing" may also be displayed together with the message "Stop car for roof
closing".
If the roof is operated during the check cycle at Key-on and with no other display cycles active, the relative
screen is displayed immediately.
After the roof has completed the open or close cycle (completely open / completely closed), the TFT display
displays the specific message "Roof open / Roof closed" together with the respective vehicle symbol
depicting the roof completely open/closed for 5 seconds, even if the driver releases the button.
The display cycle is accompanied by a warning sound.
In the event of fault during the roof status screen display cycle, the TFT display displays the fault for a
complete cycle.
At the end of the fault display cycle, the TFT display displays the roof status screen (roof opening / roof
closing) updated to show the current roof position.
In general, in the event of any fault occurring while the roof is starting an opening or closing cycle, the TFT
display will display no screen relative to roof status other than "Roof open" or "Roof closed".
While the roof is moving, the MODE button is disabled (only toggling between trip counters or trip counter
reset are permitted), while the UP / DOWN buttons may be used to adjust the dimming setting.
Roof in standby
If the driver releases the control button with the roof incompletely open or closed, the TFT display displays
the specific message ""Complete roof cycle" together with the relative vehicle symbol depicting the roof
incompletely open/closed.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the RHT incompletely open or closed.
This screen is displayed until the roof open/close cycle is resumed by pressing the relative control buttons.
The display strategy is the same as with priority 0 events, but with the screen displayed permanently (no time-
out).
In the event of fault, the two screens are displayed in rolling order.
After a few minutes (determined by the NCP) in standby mode, the roof collapses and the TFT display
displays the specific message "Complete roof cycle" together with the vehicle symbol depicting the roof
incompletely open/closed.
This is accompanied by a warning sound, managed by the NCP.
This screen, managed by the NCP, is displayed until roof operation is resumed, by pressing the relative
control buttons, or until the roof collapses.
The display strategy is the same as with priority 0 events, but with the screen displayed permanently (no time-
out).
In the event of fault, the two screens are displayed in rolling order.
If the roof is incompletely open/closed, or the roof is collapsing and the vehicle speed exceeds the
predetermined limit, the TFT display displays the specific message "Complete roof cycle", together with
the message "Stop car for roof operation" (determined by the NCP) and the vehicle symbol depicting
the roof incompletely open/closed.
Operation inhibited
Roof operation is permitted only in the following conditions:

vehicle stationary;
luggage compartment lid closed;
battery voltage not less than 11 V;
luggage compartment separator closed;
system temperature not excessively high.
If the driver attempts to operate the roof with the vehicle in motion, or if the vehicle speed exceeds the
predetermined limit during operation, the TFT display displays the specific message "Roof operation
inhibited" together with the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
The specific message "Roof operation inhibited" may also be displayed together with the message "Stop
car for roof operation"
If the vehicle speed signal, transmitted over the CAN network, is absent, the roof may be closed only, and the
TFT display displays the specific message "Roof operation inhibited", together with the message "Car
speed not detectable" and the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
The closing cycle will only start if the driver attempts to close the roof again. The TFT display will now display
the specific message "Roof closing" with the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
The specific message "Roof closing" may also be displayed together with the message "Stop car for roof
closing".
If the driver attempts to operate the roof while the luggage compartment lid is open, the TFT display displays
the specific message "Roof operation inhibited", together with the message "Close trunk for roof
operation" and the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof with the luggage compartment
lid open.
This is accompanied by a warning sound.
This cycle is displayed for the full duration even if the luggage compartment lid is closed before completion.
If the battery voltage is below 11 Volts, roof operation is inhibited. If the driver attempts to operate the roof,
the TFT display displays the specific message "Roof operation inhibited", together with the
message "Low battery for roof operation" and the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the
roof.
If, with the vehicle stationary and the luggage compartment lid closed, the driver attempts to operate the roof
while the luggage compartment separator is open, the TFT display displays the specific message "Roof
operation inhibited", together with the message "Close luggage separator" and the vehicle symbol
depicting the current position of the roof with a red arrow indicating the cause of inhibition.
If the hydraulic system overheats as a result of repeated roof operation, the TFT display displays the specific
message "Roof operation inhibited" together with the message "System overheating" and the vehicle
symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
Operating the roof with an external temperature of 10°C or lower may damage the system. If the driver
attempts to operate the roof, the TFT display displays the specific message "Roof operation not
recommended" together with the message "External temp. too low" and the vehicle symbol depicting
the current position of the roof.
The open/close cycle commences only if the driver attempts to operate the roof again.
If the driver attempts to operate the roof while the external temperature signal, transmitted over the CAN
network, is absent, the TFT display displays the specific message "Roof operation not recommended"
together with the message "External temp. not detectable" and the vehicle symbol depicting the current
position of the roof.
The open/close cycle commences only if the driver attempts to operate the roof again.
If the driver attempts to operate the roof with the side windows not in the correct position, the TFT display
displays the specific message "Roof operation inhibited", together with the message "Windows failure"
and the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
The same message is displayed if, while the roof is opening/closing, the rear quarterlights are incompletely
lowered.
If the driver attempts to operate the roof with an obstacle detected by the parking sensors, the TFT display
displays the specific message "Roof operation inhibited", together with the message "Obstacle
detected" and the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
If the driver attempts to operate the roof while the parking sensors are unable to communicate with the RHT
system, the TFT display displays the specific message "Parking sensor failure", together with the
message "Warning! Possible obstacles" and the vehicle symbol depicting the current position of the roof.
The complete inhibited roof status display cycle is displayed fully at least once, even if the request from the
driver to operate the roof ceases (the driver releases the control button) within 5 seconds.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the main screen.
If any event occurs during the roof opening/closing display cycle after the button has been released, the cycle
is immediately interrupted.
While the roof is opening/closing, the MODE button is inhibited.

If the driver releases the roof control button before the completion of the display cycle (5 seconds), MODE
button function is immediately restored and the driver may press the button to interrupt the display cycle,
recalling the main screen on the TFT display.
While the roof is opening/closing, the driver may adjust the dimming setting by pressing the UP / DOWN
buttons.
Emergency RHT retractable hard top closing procedure
CAUTION
If it is not possible to move the retractable hard top electrically, it may be closed or moved manually. The
following procedure requires two operators.
Lower the door windows and quarterlights completely.

Open the luggage compartment lid, turning the key in the relative lock.
RHT open.
Open the luggage compartment lid completely.

compartment, turn the fastener (1) and
remove the cover (2).
Once the cover has been removed, identify the

indicated seat for the left hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics release key.
Fit a 10 mm hex-head wrench or the wrench
included in the vehicle toolkit, code 251415,
in the seat indicated above on the left hand
Tonneau Cover kinematics.
Turn the hex-head wrench clockwise to release
the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.

compartment, turn the fastener (3) and
remove the cover (4).
Once the cover has been removed, identify the

indicated seat for the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics release key.
in the seat indicated above on the right hand
Turn the hex-head wrench counterclockwise to
release the right hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Lower the luggage compartment lid.

The lid CANNOT be closed as the relative fastener hooks on the Tonneau Cover kinematics are closed.
Secure the left hand flap (5) in the open position.
Secure the right hand flap (6) in the open

position.
Prepare to move the Tonneau Cover manually,
placing the hands as shown in the photo.
CAUTION
Danger of accident! At least two operators are
required to manually move the components of
the RHT roof, working slowly and in a
coordinated fashion.
When handling the tonneau cover manually,

the tonneau cover fastener latches may
damage the blocks fastened to the
kinematics of the tonneau cover.
The blocks fastened to the kinematics of the
tonneau cover protect the flaps. As a
result, damage to the blocks will also
result in damage to the flaps.
Before handling the tonneau cover manually,
check that the latches fastening the
tonneau cover are correctly released.
Prepare to move the front and rear roof shells,

stowed in the luggage compartment, by
supporting their weight as shown in the photo.
CAUTION
Manually bring the front and rear roof shells

together into the intermediate position shown
in the photo aside, with the front roof shell in
its respective seat, in contact with the
windscreen cross member, and the rear roof
shell over the front roof shell.
CAUTION
When handling the tonneau cover manually,

the tonneau cover fastener latches may
damage the blocks fastened to the
kinematics of the tonneau cover.
The blocks fastened to the kinematics of the
tonneau cover protect the flaps. As a
result, damage to the blocks will also
result in damage to the flaps.
Before handling the tonneau cover manually,
check that the latches fastening the
tonneau cover are correctly released.
Open the luggage compartment lid completely.

in the seat indicated above on the left hand
lock the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.

in the seat indicated above on the right hand
Turn the hex-head wrench clockwise to lock the
right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
CAUTION
Supporting the weight of the rear roof shell as

shown in the photo aside, move it into the
respective seat.
Move the headliner slightly and identify the right
hand rear roof shell kinematics.

included in vehicle toolkit, code 251415, into
the right hand rear roof shell kinematics.
Turn the hex-head wrench clockwise to lock the
right hand rear roof shell kinematics.
Turn the wrench slowly and carefully to prevent
damage to the right hand rear roof shell
kinematics.
If either or both of the rear roof shell kinematics

FAIL to lock, repeat the procedure
described above as required.
Move the headliner slightly and identify the left

hand rear roof shell kinematics.
included in vehicle toolkit, code 251415, into
the left hand rear roof shell kinematics.
lock the left hand rear roof shell kinematics.
damage to the left hand rear roof shell
kinematics.
If either or both of the rear roof shell kinematics

FAIL to lock, repeat the procedure
described above as required.
E6.02 Complete retractable hard top
Removing the complete retractable hard top (RHT assembly)
CAUTION
reassembly.
The following procedure is for removing the complete RHT from the vehicle. The complete RHT consists of
the "RHT assembly" (the two panels, the roof kinematics and the entire hydraulic and electrical systems)
and the Tonneau Cover with relative kinematics.
To carry out the procedure correctly, a hoist, the specific lifting hook and the relative support arms for the roof
kinematics are necessary.
Note that the electrical system cables and the hydraulic RHT system pipes are covered in protective material.

Remove the luggage compartment lid ( E3.02).
Carry out the operation leaving the hinges fastened to the Tonneau Cover.
Remove the RHT hydraulic system pump ( E6.12).

Leave connected to the hydraulic system and set down safely in the centre of the luggage
compartment.
Replace the Tonneau Cover hydraulic cylinders ( E6.12).

Carry out the procedure for removal ONLY, leaving connected to the hydraulic system.
Remove the DCT gearbox ECU ( F2.11).
CAUTION
Manually bring the Rear Roof shell into the intermediate position, with the Rear Roof shell over the Front
Roof shell and with the Tonneau Cover completely opened.
compartment, disconnect the connector (1)
from the Tonneau Cover wiring harness.
Pull the cable leading to the Tonneau Cover from
behind the pump out toward the rear bumper.
CAUTION
correctly released.
Remove the ECU mounting bracket (4), by

undoing the two screws indicated, and set
down in the centre of the luggage
compartment.
Undo the two screws (5) fastening the right hand
Tonneau Cover kinematics (A) to the
bodyshell.
Undo the two screws (6) fastening the left hand
Tonneau Cover kinematics (B) to the
bodyshell.

Detach the clip (7) fastening the right hand flap
control cable (C) from the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Detach the spring (8) for the right hand flap
Cover kinematics.
Arrange the right hand flap control cable (C) so
that is does not obstruct the movement of the
RHT during the subsequent steps.

Detach the clip (7) fastening the left hand flap
Cover kinematics.
Detach the spring (8) for the left hand flap control
cable (C) from the right hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Arrange the left hand flap control cable (C) so
that is does not obstruct the movement of the
RHT during the subsequent steps.
CAUTION
correctly released.
Undo the front fastener screw (9) for the right

hand Tonneau Cover kinematics (A).
Undo the front fastener screw (10) for the left

hand Tonneau Cover kinematics (B).
With the assistance of another operator, lift the
Tonneau Cover (D), complete with
kinematics, out of the luggage compartment,
lifting from the front first, as shown in the
photo.
IMPORTANT! DO NOT tamper with the

compensator ring nuts.
NEVER tamper with the front compensator ring

nuts (25) fastening the Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Remove the DCT ECU mounting bracket (11), by

undoing the three screws indicated.
Disconnect the connector (12) on the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
Disconnect the connector (13) from the

motorised luggage compartment striker plate.
Move the clamped hydraulic pipes (14) for the
hydraulic cylinders out of their seats and
towards the centre of the luggage
compartment.
Place the hydraulic pump mounting bracket

(AS 107569) in the luggage compartment.
Fit the hydraulic pump (E) and the relative
cylinders of the Tonneau Cover (15) on the
bracket.
Arrange the hydraulic pipes appropriately,
avoiding kinks or excessively tight bends.
Block the right hand flap (F) in the open position,
applying a strip of adhesive tape (26).
Block the left hand flap (F) in the open position,

CAUTION
Manually move the Front and Rear Roof shells together into the luggage compartment.

Remove the protective foam rubber from the
connector (16) and disconnect the connector.
Undo the screw (17) fastening the pretensioner
(18) to the bodyshell.
Secure the pretensioner to the bodyshell to allow
access to the screw fastening the RHT
located below.
Repeat the procedure on the left-hand side.
Remove the pretensioner guard (27), undoing

the two screws indicated.
CAUTION
Manually bring the Front and Rear Roof shells together into the intermediate position, with the Front Roof
shell in its respective seat, in contact with the windscreen cross member, and the Rear Roof shell over
the Front Roof shell.
Disconnect the connector (19) on the roof ECU.

Working from the luggage compartment, fit the
rear mounting bar (AS 107570) for the Front
Roof shell kinematics and fasten on the right-
hand side by tightening the indicated screw
completely.
Fasten the rear mounting bar (AS 107570) for

the Front Roof shell kinematics on the left-
hand side by tightening the indicated screw
completely.
Fit the pump mounting bracket over the ribbing
on the rear roof mounting bar as shown in the
photo.
Working from the passenger compartment, fit the

front mounting bar (AS 107568) for the Front
Roof shell kinematics and fasten by tightening
the two screws indicated completely.
Remove the rollbar ( F4.05).

Disconnect the three connectors (20) from the
RHT wiring harness.
CAUTION
Fasten the RHT assembly lifting hook

(AS 107567) to the hydraulic hoist (OMCN
Art. GP05/DE).
Take care not to scratch or damage the rear
screen; protect adequately.
Position the lifting hook in the vehicle, as shown

in the photo, lining up with the holes on the
RHT assembly brackets.
Fasten the RHT assembly lifting hook, by
tightening the nuts and screws indicated
completely.
Note the position of all the screws fastening

the RHT components to facilitate correct
reassembly.
Undo the front right screw (21) on the RHT

assembly.
Undo the front left hand screw (22) fastening the
RHT assembly.
Undo the rear left hand screw (23) fastening the

RHT assembly.
Undo the right hand rear screw (24) on the RHT

assembly.
Ensure that there is nothing to impede the
operation of the RHT.
Using the hydraulic hoist (OMCN Art. GP05/DE),

lift the RHT assembly by a few centimetres
and ensure that the hydraulic pump mounting
bracket is engaged with the rear kinematics
mounting bar, as shown in the image.

Lift the RHT assembly completely and set down

on the trolley (AS 107571), on the relative
locator pins.
IMPORTANT! DO NOT tamper with the

compensator ring nuts.
NEVER tamper with the front compensator ring

nuts (25) fastening the RHT assembly.
The right hand ring nuts alone are shown in the
photo aside.
Retrieve the shims (26) from the rear fastener

points, noting the positions and quantities.
The compensator rings for the rear fasteners of
the RHT assembly have been replaced by
the shims (26).
Refitting the complete retractable hard top (RHT assembly)

Complete RHT assembly - bodyshell Pretightening torque, 10 Nm 0
M10x75 screw
Fastening front seat belt retractor - pretensioner Screw 40 Nm A
Fastening ECU mounting bracket Screw 24 Nm B
reassembly.
To carry out the following procedure correctly, a hoist and the specific lifting hook are necessary.

After fastening the new RHT assembly to the

lifting hook (AS 107567) using the relative
nuts and screws (as used to fasten the
removed RHT assembly) use the hydraulic
hoist (OMCN Art. GP05/DE) to align the
assembly onto the relative locator pins on the
bodyshell.
The locator pins on the bodyshell do not
allow any adjustment to the position of
the RHT.
The left-hand side of the RHT assembly must

align correctly with the indicated pin. There is
a hole on the RHT assembly. This is a fixed
mounting point.
On the right-hand side of the RHT assembly

there is a slot allowing a certain alignment
tolerance along the "X" axis.
Fit the shims (26) in the rear fastener points in

the positions and quantities noted during
removal.
The compensator rings for the rear fasteners of
the RHT assembly have been replaced by
the shims (26).
Apply the fastener screws for the RHT assembly, after fitting the relative washers, maintaining the original
position.
Follow the instructions for correctly refitting the screws retrieved during removing.
Pretighten the rear right hand screw (24)
fastening the RHT assembly.

Pretightening torque, M10x75 10 Nm 0
screw
Pretighten the rear left hand screw (23) fastening

the RHT assembly.

screw
Pretighten the front left hand screw (22)


screw
Pretighten the front right hand screw (21)

screw
Definitively tighten the four RHT fastener screws mentioned above.

Undo the indicated nuts and remove the relative

screws fastening the RHT assembly from the
lifting hook. (AS 107567)
Lift the lifting hook with the hydraulic hoist and
move away from the vehicle.
CAUTION
Refit the rollbar ( F4.05).

Working from the passenger compartment,
remove the front mounting bar (AS 107568)
for the Front Roof shell kinematics, by

compartment, undo the indicated screw
fastening the rear mounting bar (AS 107570)
for the Front Roof shell kinematics.

compartment, undo the indicated screw
fastening the rear mounting bar (AS 107570)
for the Front Roof shell kinematics, then
remove the bar from the luggage
compartment.
Connect the connector (19) onto the roof ECU.
CAUTION
Fit the pretensioner guard (27) in the relative

seat and fasten by tightening the two screws
indicated.
Fit the pretensioner (18) in the relative seat on

the bodyshell and fasten by tightening the
screw (17).

Screw 40 Nm A
Connect the connector (16) and reapply the

protective foam rubber onto the connector.
Repeat the procedure on the left-hand side.

Block the right hand flap (F) in the open position,
Block the left hand flap (F) in the open position,

CAUTION
With the assistance of another operator, fit the

Tonneau Cover complete with kinematics (D),
into the relative seat in the luggage
compartment, fitting the rear first and then the
front.
Fit the Tonneau Cover, complete with kinematics
(D), onto the relative locator pins on the
bodyshell.
Apply the fastener screws for the Tonneau Cover complete with kinematics, after fitting the relative
washers, maintaining the original position.
Follow the instructions for correctly refitting the screws retrieved during removing.
Tighten the front fastener screw (10) for the left

hand Tonneau Cover kinematics (B).

M10x75 screw 43 Nm B
Tighten the front fastener screw (9) for the right


CAUTION
correctly released.

Attach the clip (7) fastening the left hand flap
control cable (C) to the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Attach the spring (8) for the left hand flap control
cable (C) to the Rear Roof shell kinematics.
Attach the clip (7) fastening the right hand flap

control cable (C) to the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Attach the spring (8) for the right hand flap
control cable (C) to the Rear Roof shell
kinematics.
Apply and tighten the two screws (6) fastening

the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics (B)
to the bodyshell.

M8x50 screw 20 Nm A
Apply and tighten the two screws (5) fastening
the right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics (A)
to the bodyshell.

M8x50 screw 20 Nm A
Fit the hydraulic pump mounting bracket (4 )and


Screw 24 Nm B
Remove the hydraulic pump (E) and the

hydraulic cylinders of the Tonneau Cover (15)
from the mounting bracket (AS 107569).
Remove the hydraulic pump mounting bracket
(AS 107569) from the luggage compartment.
Fit the clamped hydraulic pipes (14) for the

hydraulic cylinders in their seats as originally
installed.
Connect the indicated connector to the motorised
luggage compartment striker plate (13).
Fit the DCT ECU mounting bracket (11), by

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the connector (12) on the right-hand

side of the luggage compartment.
Connect the three connectors (20).

Fit the cable leading from the Tonneau Cover
behind the pump and connect the connector
(1).

Carry out the refitting procedure ONLY.
The left hand Tonneau Cover hydraulic cylinder and the relative hydraulic pipes must be passed under
the electrical connections.
Refit the RHT hydraulic system pump ( E6.12).

Refit the DCT gearbox ECU ( F2.11).
Refit the luggage compartment lid ( E3.02).
Adjust the RHT ( E6.02).
Check and adjust the door window ( E3.08).
Check and adjust the quarterlight ( E3.07).
Adjusting the RHT

Rear storage lock receivers M6x20 screw 9 Nm B
Front storage lock receivers Screw 9 Nm B
CAUTION
If the RHT open or close cycle is not completed, the hydraulic system remains pressurised for up to 5
minutes after the control button is released. After this period, the system emits a warning sound to warn
the driver and any persons in the vicinity that the system is no longer pressurised and that components of
the RHT system may drop without warning.
CAUTION
The operations described as follows are for one side of the vehicle only and must therefore be
repeated on the opposite side of the vehicle.
After replacing the complete retractable hard top, ALWAYS carry out the adjustment procedure for the
relative receivers and striker plates.
To carry this procedure out correctly, the axis

must be oriented as indicated in the figure
aside.
Adjust the Rear Roof shell striker plates on the Tonneau Cover ( E6.11).
DO NOT refit the passenger compartment trim panels and luggage compartment trim panels.

completely opened.
CAUTION
Open the luggage compartment lid, pressing on

the two hooks (15) (one per side) fastening
the luggage compartment lid to the Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Loosen the screws (1) fastening the rear left
hand storage lock receiver (2).
Remove the left hand cap (D) of the front storage

lock receiver, pressing and pulling upwards.
Loosen the screw (8) and pull the front left hand
storage lock receiver (E) upwards to remove
completely.
Working on the inner side of the Tonneau Cover,
remove the rubber pad (3) from the left hand
bumper (A).
Undo and remove the dowel (4) fastening the left

hand bumper tang, retrieving the dowel.
Remove the left hand bumper tang (A)
completely.
The bumper is self adjusting: the next time that
the Tonneau Cover is closed into the Spider
position, the bumper tang retracts by just
enough to create the optimum gap with the
rear screen.
CAUTION
Close the luggage compartment lid, pressing on

Cover kinematics.
Apply and tighten the dowel (4) fastening the left
hand bumper tang (A).
Repeat the procedure for the right hand
bumper.
Push the rubber pad (3) completely onto the left

hand bumper (A) as originally installed.
Adjust the lateral position (along the "Y" axis) of

the left hand rear storage lock receiver (2), so
that the left hand kinematics of the Front Roof
shell is perfectly centred with the respective
receiver.
Tighten the screws (1) fastening the rear left
hand storage lock receiver (2).

M6x20 screw 9 Nm B
Check that the vertical gap (along the "Z" axis)
between the Tonneau Cover kinematics and
the Front Roof shell kinematics is 25 ± 2 mm.

completely opened.
CAUTION
Open the luggage compartment lid, pressing on

Cover kinematics.
Tighten the screw (8) fastening the front left hand
storage lock receiver.

Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the left hand cap (D) for the front left hand
storage lock receiver and fasten by pressing
down manually.

Refit the upper lateral passenger compartment trim panels.
E6.03 Internal trim panels
Removing the RHT headliner elements
The RHT headliner elements are very sensitive to dirt and damage.
CAUTION

completely opened.
Remove the rod (AV 8178) and use adhesive

tape (8) to mark the original position of the
two bumpers (M).
Loosen the four dowels indicated fastening the
two bumpers (M).
Move the two bumpers (M) towards the ends of
the rod (AV 8178).
Tighten the four dowels indicated fastening the
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION
Manually move the Rear Roof shell (1) toward

Lock the Rear Roof shell kinematics in the safety
position, fitting the special rod (AV 8178) as
shown in the image aside.
To remove the rear screen upper trim panel (A),

detach the eight fastener clips from the Rear
Roof shell using a sharp tool.
To remove the rear screen lower trim panel (B),

undo the three bushing screws indicated and
detach the five fastener clips from the Rear
Roof shell with a sharp tool.
Remove by easing toward the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Hold up the Rear Roof shell (1) and remove the

rod (AV 8178) fitted previously.
the front of the vehicle, bringing it over the
Front Roof shell.
Remove the rod (AV 8178).

two bumpers (M).
Move the two bumpers (M) towards the centre of
the rod (AV 8178), up to the markings (8)
made with adhesive tape.
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION
Manually move the Front and Rear Roof shells

together toward the rear of the vehicle.
Lock the Front Roof shell kinematics in the safety
Remove the right hand headliner flap tensioner

cable (C) from the Front Roof shell
kinematics, leaving the cable connected to
the headliner, undoing the upper screws
indicated, and detach the spring (3) from the
bracket.
At the top, remove the right hand headliner
tensioner cable (D) from the Front Roof shell
indicated.
At the bottom, remove the right hand headliner

tensioner cable (D) from the Front Roof shell
kinematics, undoing the two screws indicated.
Remove the left hand headliner flap tensioner
cable (E) from the Front Roof shell
indicated, and detach the spring (4) from the
bracket.
At the top, remove the left hand headliner
tensioner cable (F) from the Front Roof shell
indicated.
At the bottom, remove the left hand headliner

tensioner cable (F) from the roof kinematics,
undoing the two screws indicated.
CAUTION
Hold the Front Roof shell up together with the

Rear Roof shell and remove the rod
(AV 8178) fitted previously.
completely opened.
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION


Remove the right hand headliner tensioner cable
(G) from the roof kinematics and from the
Rear Roof shell, undoing the screws indicated.
Repeat the above procedure for the left hand

headliner tensioner cable (H), but detaching
the spring (5) from the strap instead of
undoing the indicated fastener screw on the
Rear Roof shell.
The indicated screw cannot be removed as it is
obstructed at the top left by the sensor, as
shown in the photo aside.
Remove the right hand headliner tensioner cable

(G) from the Front Roof shell, undoing the
indicated screw, and undo the screw (6)
fastening the strap of the headliner flap onto
the roof kinematics.
Repeat the procedure on the left side of the
RHT.
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.

two bumpers (M).
Move the two bumpers (M) towards the centre,
up to the markings (8) made with adhesive
tape.
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION

Undo the three indicated screws fastening the

headliner right hand flap (I) to the relative
mounting.
RHT.
On the right-hand side of the headliner (L), undo

the screw (7) fastening the headliner to the
Front Roof shell.
On the left-hand side of the headliner (L), undo
Front Roof shell.
Take particular care not to damage the RHT

headliner elements.
Using a sharp tool, remove the four indicated

clips fastening the headliner (L).
Using a sharp tool, detach the eight clips

fastening the headliner (L) to the Front Roof
shell.
There are four fastening clips on the front and
four on the rear.
Detach the headliner (L) from the inner shell of
the Front Roof shell with a lateral movement,
pressing inward first from one side then from
the other.
Remove the headliner (L) from the Front Roof

shell.
Refitting the RHT roof headliner elements

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION


Check the condition of the clips; replace if
necessary.
Fit the headliner (L) onto the Front Roof shell.
Press the clips manually to fasten the headliner
(L) to the Front Roof shell.
Attach the headliner (L) to the inner shell of the

Front Roof shell with a lateral movement,
pressing inward first from one side then from
the other.
Take particular care not to damage the RHT

headliner elements.
Refit the four indicated clips fastening the

headliner (L).
On the left-hand side of the headliner (L), tighten
Front Roof shell.

M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
On the right-hand side of the headliner (L),

tighten the screw (7) fastening the headliner
to the Front Roof shell.

M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
Screw the three indicated screws fastening the

headliner right hand flap (I) to the relative
mounting.
RHT.
CAUTION

completely opened.

two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION

Refit the right hand headliner tensioner cable (G)

onto the Front Roof shell, tightening the
indicated screw, and tighten the screw (6)
fastening the strap of the headliner flap onto
the roof kinematics.
RHT.
Refit the right hand headliner tensioner cable (G)

to the roof kinematics and to the Rear Roof
shell, tightening the screws indicated.
Repeat the above procedure for the left hand
headliner tensioner cable (H), but connecting
the spring (5) to the strap instead of
tightening the indicated fastener screw on the
Rear Roof shell.
The indicated screw cannot be removed as it is
covered at the top left by the sensor, as
shown in the photo aside.
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION


At the bottom, refit the left hand headliner

tensioner cable (F) to the roof kinematics,
tightening the two screws indicated.
At the top, refit the left hand headliner flap
tensioner cable (F), which is still connected to
the headliner, by tightening the upper screws
indicated.
At the top, refit the left hand headliner flap
tensioner cable (E), which is still connected to
indicated and attaching the spring (4) to the
bracket.
At the bottom, refit the right hand headliner

tensioner cable (D) to the roof kinematics,
At the top, refit the right hand headliner flap

tensioner cable (D), which is still connected to
indicated.
At the top, refit the right hand headliner flap
tensioner cable (C), which is still connected to
indicated and attaching the spring (3) to the
bracket.
CAUTION

completely opened.

two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION

Fasten the rear screen lower trim panel (B),

pressing manually onto the five clips
fastening the trim to the Rear Roof shell and
Start fixing from the front of the vehicle.
Refit the rear screen upper trim panel (A),

pressing manually onto the eight clips
fastening the trim to the Rear Roof shell.
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
With the engine running, press the relative button to operate the RHT, and check that the headliner flaps
move correctly and assume the correct positions during the RHT open and close cycles.
E6.04 Front panel
Removing the Front Roof shell
If the Rear Roof shell has already been removed, fit the specific Front Roof shell kinematics connector
tool to maintain the preload and alignment of the kinematics.
The following is the Front Roof shell removal procedure for the right-hand side of the vehicle; repeat the
procedure on the left-hand side of the vehicle.
Remove the RHT headliner elements ( E6.03).
The following operation is extremely important in order to preserve the correct adjustment and
alignment of the linkages of the Front Roof shell kinematics. When removing the Front Roof shell
fasteners, the relative kinematics must be in coupé configuration.
Move the RHT electrically into the Coupé position.
If the same component is to be subsequently

reinstalled, mark the positions of the
kinematics brackets for the Front Roof shell,
as shown in the photo.
Loosen the three screws (1) fastening the Front

Roof shell kinematics to the Front Roof shell
(A) on the right-hand side.
Remove the fork shims (2), noting the position
and quantity for each fastener screw.
Undo the screws (1) completely.
CAUTION
Slowly lift the Front Roof shell (A) off the relative
kinematics, retrieving any previously
inaccessible shims, marking their positions
and quantity, then remove the shell from the
vehicle.
As mentioned previously, retrieve the fork shims
(2) for Front Roof shell height adjustment (Z
Axis), to ensure that the shell is reinstalled in
its original position.
Refitting the Front Roof shell

The following is the Front Roof shell refitting procedure for the right-hand side of the vehicle; repeat the
Fit the Front Roof shell (A) in the relative seat on

the kinematics. If reinstalling the original Front
Roof shell, use the markings made during
removal as reference.
Hand tighten the three fastener screws (1), fitting
any shims necessary (2).
When refitting the same Front Roof shell, use
the original shims.
When fitting a new Front Roof shell, reuse the

original shims as an initial guideline.
Hand tighten the three fastener screws (1)

Check that the Front Roof shell is flush with the
windscreen: the gap must be 7.5 ± 1.5 mm
over the entire length.
If the above condition is not met, loosen the
Front Roof shell fastener screws and align
correctly.
Check that the Front Roof shell is flush with the

windscreen pillar: the gap must be 7.0 + 1.5/-
mm.
Front Roof shell fastener screws and align
correctly.
Check that the step between the Front Roof shell
and the windscreen pillar is between 0.0 and -
0.7 mm, with a variation of ± 1.0 mm in the
relative section.
Front Roof shell fastener screws and add or
remove fork shims.

and the windscreen at the centre is - 1.0 ± 1.0
mm. In section A, a variation of +1.0/- 1.5
mm is permissible.
Front Roof shell fastener screws and add or
remove fork shims.
Check that the Rear Roof shell is flush with the
Front Roof shell: the gap must be 6.0 + 2.0/-
1.0 mm.
If the above condition is not met, loosen the Rear
Roof shell fastener screws and align correctly.
Check the step between the Rear and Front Roof
shells: the step must be 0.0 + 1.0/- mm.
Roof shell fastener screws and add or
remove fork shims.
Check the step between the Front Roof shell and

the door window: the step must be 8.5 + 1.0/-
mm.
Front Roof shell fastener screws, align
correctly and, if necessary, add or remove
fork shims.
After adjusting the Front Roof shell (A) correctly,

tighten the three screws (1).

M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
After disassembly and subsequent reassembly, the water tightness test must be carried out.
Refit the RHT roof headliner elements ( E6.03).
E6.05 Rear panel
Removing the Rear Roof shell
If the Front Roof shell has already been removed, fit the specific Front Roof shell kinematics connector
tool to maintain the preload and alignment of the kinematics.
The following is the Rear Roof shell removal procedure for the right-hand side of the vehicle; repeat the

Remove only the upper and lower rear screen trim panels and the RH and LH tensioner cables of the
rear roof shell.

CAUTION

completely opened.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION
Manually move the Rear Roof shell (A) toward


If the same component is to be subsequently
reinstalled, mark the positions of the
kinematics brackets on the Rear Roof shell,
as shown in the photo.
Disconnect the rear screen defrost connector (1)
and remove the cable retainer clip indicated.
Loosen the centre screw (2).
Remove any shims, noting their quantities and
positions, and undo the screw (2) completely.
CAUTION
The following operation is extremely

important in order to preserve the correct
preload and alignment of the linkages of
the Front Roof shell kinematics. When
removing the Rear Roof shell fasteners,
the Front Roof shell kinematics must be
in Coupé configuration.
Support the weight of the Rear Roof shell (A),

slide out the rod (AV 8178) fitted previously,
and manually move the Rear Roof shell into
the Coupé position.
Remove any shims, noting their quantities and
positions, and undo the screws (3) completely.
Once the Rear Roof shell has been
removed, do NOT move the relative
kinematics, as this may alter their preload
and alignment.
Slowly remove the Rear Roof shell (A), retrieving

any shims that were previously inaccessible,
noting their quantities and positions.
Refitting the Rear Roof shell

Rear Roof shell - roof kinematics M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
The following is the Rear Roof shell refitting procedure for the right-hand side of the vehicle; repeat the
Fit the Rear Roof shell (A) in the relative seat on
the kinematics. If refitting the original
component, use the markings made during
disassembly as reference.
With shims installed on the outer screw (2), fit
the shims on the kinematics before fitting
the Rear Roof shell.
Hand tighten the two fastener screws (3), fitting

any shims necessary.
When refitting the same Rear Roof shell, use
the original shims.
When fitting a new Rear Roof shell, reuse the

original shims as an initial guideline.
Hand tighten the two fastener screws (3)
CAUTION

position, fitting the relative rod (AV 8178).
Hand tighten the fastener screws (2)
CAUTION
The following operation is extremely

important in order to preserve the correct
preload and alignment of the linkages of
the Front Roof shell kinematics. When
removing the Rear Roof shell fasteners,
the Front Roof shell kinematics must be
Hold up the Rear Roof shell (A) and remove the

Manually move the rear roof shell (A) toward the
rear of the vehicle, so that it is over the
tonneau cover.
Tonneau Cover: the gap must be 5.0 + 2.0/-
mm.
remove fork shims.
Raise the door windows and quarterlights
completely.
and the quarterlights is - 8.5 ± 1.0 mm.
Front Roof shell fastener screws, align
correctly and, if necessary, add or remove
fork shims.

Front Roof shell: the gap must be 6.0 + 2.0/-
1.0 mm.
Roof shell fastener screws and align correctly.
and the Front Roof shell is 0.0 ± 1.0 mm.
remove fork shims.

and the Tonneau Cover is between - 4.7 and -
8.0 mm with a variation in the Y axis of ± 2.0
mm in the relative section.
After adjusting the Rear Roof shell (A) correctly,
tighten the two screws (3).

M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
CAUTION

position, fitting the relative rod (AV 8178).
Tighten the fastener screw (2)

M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
Connect the rear screen defrost connector (1)

and fasten the relative wiring with the clip
indicated.
After refitting the Rear Roof shell, the water tightness test must be carried out.
Replacing the Rear Roof shell skid in the vehicle

Plate - Rear Roof shell skid Nut 8 Nm B
Eccentric nut - Rear Roof shell skid Screw 8 Nm B
The following procedure is for the replacement and subsequent adjustment of the left hand Rear Roof shell
skid.
The procedure for removing and adjusting the right hand Rear Roof shell skid is identical.
aside.
CAUTION

completely opened.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION
Manually move the Rear Roof shell (1) towards


On the inner left-hand side of the Rear Roof

shell, undo the screw (14) fastening the
eccentric nut (2).
Undo the nuts (3) fastening the plate (4).
Use a flat tip screwdriver to ease out the plate (4).

Remove the plastic bushings (7).
Remove the skid (5) and the metal bushings (6)

and replace.
Fit the NEW metal bushings (6) and the NEW
skid (5) on the relative pins.
Refit the two plastic bushings (7).
Take particular care to ensure that the metal
bushings are correctly centred.
Fit the plate (4) in its relative seat.
Fasten the plate (4) by tightening the nuts (3).

Nut 8 Nm B
Fit the eccentric nut (2) in its relative seat without
The skid should be able to move freely.
Align the skid (5) with the foot of the U-bolt (9).
Holding the eccentric nut still (2), tighten the

screw (14).

Screw 8 Nm B
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
Move the RHT roof electrically into the Coupé

position, WITHOUT closing the hooks and
ensure that there are no sounds of metallic
contact and that the rear screen (10) is higher
(along the "Z axis") than the Front Roof shell
(11) by max 6 mm.
Lift the flap of the headliner and check that the

bracket (12) is inserted by approximately 2
mm into the rubber endstop (13).
If the bracket is NOT in contact with the endstop
or inserted excessively, adjust as follows.
CAUTION

completely opened.
CAUTION


Loosen the screw (14) fastening the eccentric
nut (2).
Adjust the eccentric nut (2) to move the skid
along the "X axis" by max 2 mm.
Holding the eccentric nut still (2), tighten the
screw (14).

Screw 8 Nm B
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
Move the RHT electrically into the Coupé position, WITHOUT closing the hooks and ensuring that there
are no sounds of metallic contact.
Lift the headliner flap and check again that the

bracket (12) is inserted by approximately 2
mm into the rubber endstop (13).
If the components are still not within the
prescribed range, repeat the adjustment
procedure described above.
E6.06 Tonneau Cover
Checking that the Tonneau Cover opens correctly
If the Tonneau Cover-luggage compartment lid do not open smoothly while the RHT roof is opening and
closing, check the following in the vehicle.
Checking Tonneau Cover kinematics alignment
Check, on both sides of the vehicle, that the

Tonneau Cover kinematics are correctly
aligned in the positions indicated in the photo
aside.
Checking Tonneau Cover kinematics alignment

Tonneau Cover kinematics move without
impediment in the position indicated in the
photo aside.
Checking routing of Tonneau Cover actuator cables

cables are correctly routed in the positions
indicated in the photo aside; there must be no
interference between the cables and the
kinematics when the Tonneau Cover is
closed.
Checking routing of Tonneau Cover actuator cables

cables are correctly routed in the positions
indicated in the photo aside; there must be no
interference between the cables and the
kinematics when the Tonneau Cover is
closed.
Checking luggage compartment seal

section of seal indicated in the photo is fitted
correctly and is straight; there must not be
excessive friction against the Tonneau Cover
while the cover is opening.
Removing the Tonneau Cover
reassembly.

Leave the hinges fastened to the luggage compartment lid.

Remove the rear right and left hand trim panels only.
Fit a 10 mm wide hex-head wrench in the seat

indicated on both the left and right hand Rear
Roof shell kinematics.
On the right hand Rear Roof shell kinematics,
turn the hex-head wrench counterclockwise to
release the right hand Rear Roof shell
kinematics.
On the left hand Rear Roof shell kinematics, turn
the hex-head wrench clockwise to release the
left hand Rear Roof shell kinematics.
CAUTION
Manually move the Rear Roof shell to bring it over the Front Roof shell.

indicated on both of the Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
On the right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics,
turn the hex-head wrench counterclockwise to
release the right hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
On the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics, turn
the hex-head wrench clockwise to release the
left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
CAUTION
correctly released.
Remove the sensor (1) from the right hand

Tonneau Cover kinematics (A) by undoing
the relative fastener screw.
Remove the sensor (2) from the right hand Rear
Roof shell striker plate, fastened to the
Tonneau Cover (A), undoing the relative
fastener screw.
Detach the clips indicated fastening the electric
cable from the inner side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).

cable onto the right outer side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).
Mark the position of the relative right-hand side
kinematics on the Tonneau Cover (A), if the
same component is to be refitted
subsequently.
Undo the outer screw (3) fastening the Tonneau
Cover (A) to the relative right-hand side
kinematics.
Retrieve the relative shims and note the
positions and number of the shims used for
each fastener screw.
cable from the inner side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).

cable onto the left outer side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).
Mark the position of the relative left-hand side
subsequently.
Undo the outer screw (4) fastening the Tonneau
Cover (A) to the relative left-hand side
kinematics.
CAUTION
correctly released.
Proceeding very carefully and taking particular care not to damage the sensors and relative cables,
manually close the Tonneau Cover completely.
Mark the position of the relative left-hand side
subsequently.
Undo the inner screw (5) fastening the Tonneau
Cover (A) to the relative left-hand side
kinematics.
Mark the position of the relative right-hand side

subsequently.
Undo the inner screw (6) fastening the Tonneau
Cover (A) to the relative right-hand side
kinematics.
Remove the Tonneau Cover from its seat.
Refitting the Tonneau Cover

Tonneau Cover - Tonneau Cover kinematics M8x50 screw 24 Nm A
reassembly.
Fit the relative shims in the locations and quantities specified above.
When refitting the same Tonneau Cover, use the original shims.
When fitting a new Tonneau Cover, always use the original spacers as an initial guideline.
Install the Tonneau Cover in its seat.

Tighten the inner screw (6) fastening the
Tonneau Cover (A) to the relative right-hand
side kinematics.

M8x50 screw 24 Nm A
Tighten the inner screw (5) fastening the

Tonneau Cover (A) to the relative left-hand
side kinematics.

M8x50 screw 24 Nm A
CAUTION
correctly released.

Tighten the outer screw (4) fastening the
Tonneau Cover (A) to the relative left-hand
side kinematics.

M8x50 screw 24 Nm A
Attach the clips indicated fastening the electric

cable onto the left outer side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).

cable onto the inner side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).

cable onto the right outer side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).
Tighten the outer screw (3) fastening the
Tonneau Cover (A) to the relative right-hand
side kinematics.

M8x50 screw 24 Nm A
cable onto the inner side of the Tonneau
Cover (A).
Refit the sensor (2) on the right hand Rear Roof
shell striker plate, fastened to the Tonneau
Cover (A), tightening the relative fastener
screw.
Refit the sensor (1) on the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics (A) by tightening the
relative fastener screw.
CAUTION
correctly released.
Proceeding very carefully and taking particular care not to damage the sensors and relative cables,
manually close the Tonneau Cover completely.

indicated on both of the Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
On the right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics,
turn the hex-head wrench clockwise to lock
the right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
On the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics, turn
the hex-head wrench counterclockwise to
lock the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
CAUTION
Manually move the Rear Roof shell into its seat.

indicated on both the left and right hand Rear
Roof shell kinematics.
On the right hand Rear Roof shell kinematics,
turn the hex-head wrench clockwise to lock
the right hand Rear Roof shell kinematics.
damage to the right hand Rear Roof shell
kinematics.
On the left hand Rear Roof shell kinematics, turn

the hex-head wrench counterclockwise to
lock the left hand Rear Roof shell kinematics.
damage to the left hand Rear Roof shell
kinematics.
If the Rear Roof shell kinematics hooks fail to

engage with the Rear Roof shell striker
plates, loosen the screws fastening the
Tonneau Cover and adjust the cover, adding
or removing shims until the Rear Roof shell
kinematics hooks are able to engage with the
respective striker plates on the Tonneau
Cover.
Perform ONLY when fitting a new Tonneau Cover

Refit the rear trim panels.

E6.07 Rear screen
Replacing the rear screen
The rear screen is supplied as a spare part with primer already applied. The screen must be used
within 3 months of the date application of the primer. The primer must be reactivated if more than 3
months have elapsed since application.
The Rear Roof shell does not need to be removed from the vehicle in order to replace the rear screen.

Remove the Rear Roof shell seal ( E6.10).
Slide the seats forward completely and tip the backrests forward.
Cover all rear trim elements, the rear seats and the Tonneau Cover with protective material.
The following tools are required to remove the

rear screen glass:
One (Excalibur pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519
short blade) (A).
For cutting the sealant in the more easily
accessible locations and for removing
excess sealant on the Tonneau Cover.
One (Excalibur 6 pneumatic cutter with Equaliser

Pat. 4955124 long blade) (B).
For cutting the sealant in deeper, less
accessible locations.
A thin metal plate (0.5 mm thick) (C).

To facilitate cutting and protect the bodywork
from the cutter blade.
A face mask (D).

To protect the operator's airways from airborne
fragments of material.
Safety eyewear is also recommended to protect

the eyes from flying splinters.
Before cutting, always place the metal in

front of the pneumatic cutter blade, with
the edge of the plate resting against the
bodywork to protect the bodywork against
the blade.
Ensure that there are no obstructions for the

metal plate, as it must be moved together
with the pneumatic cutter while cutting.
To cut the sealant along the right and left-hand

sides, place the metal plate (C) between the
bodyshell and the glass panel seal.
Cut the sealant to a depth no greater than 25
mm.
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant

around the entire perimeter of the rear screen
from inside the passenger compartment.
Use suction cup handles (1) to remove the rear
screen (E) from its seat.
This operation must be carried out with the
assistance of another operator.
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork,

around the perimeter of the rear screen seat.
Take care not to damage the bodywork;
Remove residual sealant with the (Excalibur

pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519 short blade)
(A).
Clean the rear screen mating surface on the
Tonneau Cover with heptane, removing all
residue of adhesive or dust.
The rear screen is supplied as a spare part

with primer already applied. The screen
must be used within 3 months of the date
application of the primer. The primer must
be reactivated if more than 3 months
have elapsed since application.
The primer application date is printed on the

rear screen.
The adhesive must be applied to the rear
screen within 15 minutes of reactivating
the primer.
The image aside shows the rear screen with the

zone (2) printed with the application date of
the primer and the bead of adhesive (3) with
overlapped joint in the position indicated.
Remove the cap from the adhesive cartridge (5)
LJF TATOLSEAL 5033 HV and heat the
polyurethane adhesive in the specific device
for at least 30 minutes.
Refit the Rear Roof shell seal ( E6.10).

Refit the seal to ensure that the rear screen is located correctly.
REACTIVATING THE PRIMER
The rear screen is supplied as a spare part with primer already applied. The screen must be used
within 3 months of the date application of the primer. The primer must be reactivated if more than 3
months have elapsed since application.
Spray DOW BETACLEAN 3300 P/N 81636500 onto the rear screen surface onto which the primer is
applied.
Wipe with clean, dry tissue or cloth containing no binding agents.
Leave the product to act for no more than 15 minutes.
Ensure that both mating surfaces are clean and

free of foreign contaminants.
Use an extrusion gun to apply a continuous bead
(4) of polyurethane adhesive LJF
TATOLSEAL 5033 HV, 8 and 10 mm thick,
along the adhesive application line on the
rear screen surface.
Remove the first 100 mm of adhesive to reduce
setting times.
Any gaps in the bead of adhesive must be filled

in with additional adhesive, overlapping
each side of the gap by 20 mm.
Fit the rear screen (E) in place, pressing evenly
over its entire surface.
This operation must be carried out with the
assistance of another operator.
Remove any excess adhesive with heptane and

adjust the position of the rear screen relative
to the adjacent components as follows.
Check that the step between the rear screen and

the rear edge of the Tonneau Cover
measures between 6.4 and 9.7 mm.
Check that the gap between the rear screen and

the Tonneau Cover is 5.0 ± 2 mm.
Check that the step between the Tonneau Cover
and the rear screen, in the relative area,
measures (X), with a tolerance of ± 1.5 mm.
Check that the gap between the Tonneau Cover

and the rear screen is 4.0 ± 0.75 mm.
Check that the gap between the Front Roof shell

and the rear screen is 6.0 + 2.0/-1.0 mm.
and the rear screen is -1.0 ± 1.5 mm.
Fix the rear screen in the correct position with

adhesive tape SYROM 90 until the adhesive
has polymerised completely.
With ambient temperatures below 10°C, warm
with heated air (25°C) for 15 minutes.

E6.08 Tonneau Cover kinematics
Removing the Tonneau Cover kinematics
Located at the sides of the luggage compartment, under the trim panels.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
The procedure for removing the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics is essentially the same, with a few
variations.

Remove the Tonneau Cover ( E6.06).
Remove the rear trim panel.
Remove the RHT hydraulic system pump ( E6.12).

For removing the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics only.

Remove it.

Detach the spring (4) for the right hand flap
control cable (B) from the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Detach the clip (5) fastening the right hand flap
control cable (B) from the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Undo the front fastener screw (2) for Tonneau

Cover kinematics (A).
Undo the two rear screws (3) fastening the
Tonneau Cover kinematics (A).
CAUTION
Take particular care not to damage the locator pins for the Tonneau Cover kinematics.
Remove the Tonneau Cover kinematics, lifting out.
Refitting the Tonneau Cover kinematics

Located at the sides of the luggage compartment, under the trim panels.
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.
The procedure for refitting the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics is essentially the same, with a few
variations.
CAUTION
Take particular care not to damage the locator pins for the Tonneau Cover kinematics.
Fit the Tonneau Cover kinematics, lowering delicately onto the respective locator pins.
Tighten the two rear screws (3) fastening the
Tonneau Cover kinematics (A).

M8x50 screw 20 Nm A
Tighten the front fastener screw (2) for the right


Attach the clip (5) fastening the right hand flap

control cable (B) to the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Attach the spring (4) for the right hand flap
control cable (B) to the right hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.

Refit.
Refit the RHT hydraulic system pump ( E6.12).

Only after refitting the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics.

Refit the Tonneau Cover ( E6.06).
E6.09 Rear Roof shell kinematics
Replacing the Front Roof shell kinematics latching systems

Fastening the front roof shell kinematics latching Screw 4 Nm B
system
Fastening deflectors Screw 5 Nm B
CAUTION

completely opened.
CAUTION

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).

Protect the surface of the front roof shell as

Remove the four buttons indicated from the front
part of the trim.

deflectors.

deflectors.
Detach the front mounts of the headliner trim.
Detach the rear mounts of the headliner trim.
Undo the headliner fastener screw.

Detach the headliner trim from the panel.
The latching system fastener screws are now

accessible, as shown in the photo aside.
Mark the position of the kinematics with a marker

pen.
Undo the indicated fasteners.
Retrieve the indicated shims.
Release the clip (1).

Remove the indicated clip.

Remove the latching system (A) and replace.
Measure the length (L) on the old latching

system (A) and set the same length on the
new latching system (A).
Fit the new latching system (A) in the correct

position as marked during removal.
During the installation procedure described
above, take particular care not to damage the
hydraulic cylinder lines indicated.
Fit the latching system in the correct position,

using the markings made during removal as
reference, then fit and hand-tighten the
indicated screws.

Screw 4 Nm B

Screw 4 Nm B
Refit the indicated clip.
Attach the clip (1).

Fit the indicated shims in the original positions
and quantities.
Tighten the indicated fasteners.

M8x20 screw 24 Nm B
Fit the headliner in its seat.

headliner.

M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
Fit and fasten the deflectors, tightening the

indicated screws.

Screw 5 Nm B
Fasten the rear part of the headliner trim to the

panel.
Ensure that the seal overlaps the headliner trim.
Fit the four buttons indicated at the front of the
headliner trim.
CAUTION

completely opened.
With the engine running, manoeuvre the RHT roof by pressing the relative button and check that the RHT
roof opens and closes correctly.
E6.10 Panel seals
RHT seals
A - RHT Front Roof shell seal

B - RHT Rear Roof shell seal
C - Tonneau Cover seal
Replacing the Front Roof shell seal
After any work on the RHT seals, the water tightness test must be carried out.
The seals are partially fastened by clips which may be broken during removal. New clips are included
with the new spare part.
Some of the images in the following procedure have been taken with the Front Roof shell removed from the
vehicle to illustrate the operation more clearly.
CAUTION

completely opened.
CAUTION


Pull the Front Roof shell seal (A) off the relative
seam by hand, starting from the right-hand
side.
Pull the Front Roof shell seal (A) off the relative
seam by hand on the left-hand side.
CAUTION

completely opened.
two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION


Detach the rear section of the Front Roof shell
seal (A) by hand.
Remove the seal from the RHT and replace.
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION


The new seal must be moistened with liquid detergent before installing to facilitate installation and
adjustment.
Start installing the new seal (A) from one side. In

this photo, the procedure has been started
from the right-hand side.
Apply liquid detergent to the seal contact area
(A) with the Front Roof shell.
Fit the groove at the front end of the seal (A)
onto the relative seam on the Front Roof shell.
Fit the groove at the rear end of the seal (A) onto
the relative seam on the Front Roof shell.
Use a plastic tool to press the entire length of the

right-hand side of the seal onto the relative
seat on the Front Roof shell.
When fitting the seal, press only in the direction
indicated in the images aside.
Repeat the previous procedures to fit the left-hand side of the seal on the Front Roof shell.
CAUTION

completely opened.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION

Now fit the rear section of the seal (A).
Take particular care to ensure that the seal

follows the shape of the Front Roof shell
correctly in the position indicated on both
sides.
Check that the seal is fitted correctly and is flush with the Front Roof shell.
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
With the engine running, perform a number of opening and closing cycles to allow the new seal to settle
correctly.
With the RHT in the Coupé position, check that the Front Roof shell seal fits flush with the adjacent
components.
After replacing the seal, the water tightness test must be carried out.
Removing the Rear Roof shell seal
CAUTION

completely opened.
two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION


Pull the Rear Roof shell seal (A) off the relative
seam by hand, starting from the front end on
the right-hand side.
Pull the Rear Roof shell seal (A) off the relative
seam by hand, starting from the front end on
the left-hand side.
Detach the rear section of the Rear Roof shell

seal (A) by hand.
Remove the Rear Roof shell seal from the RHT.
Refitting the Rear Roof shell seal
The seal must be moistened with liquid detergent before installing to facilitate installation and adjustment.
Start installing the new seal (A) from one side. In

this photo, the procedure has been started
from the right-hand side.
Fit the front face (2) of the Rear Roof shell seal
(A) against the relative seam (area indicated
in the figure).
Repeat the procedure on the other side of the Rear Roof shell.
Fit the Rear Roof shell seal (A) on the relative

seat on the shell.
Fit the Rear Roof shell seal (A) on the relative

seat on the shell.
Fit the rear section of the Rear Roof shell seal
(A) onto the relative seam.
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
With the engine running, perform a number of opening and closing cycles to allow the new seal to settle
correctly.
With the RHT in the Coupé position, check that the Front Roof shell seal fits flush with the adjacent
components.
After replacing or removing and refitting the seal, the water tightness test must be carried out.
Replacing the Tonneau Cover seal

Undo the two indicated screws fastening the seal
to the Tonneau Cover and remove the
relative section of Tonneau Cover seal (A)
from its seat.
Undo the two indicated screws fastening the seal

to the Tonneau Cover and remove the
relative section of Tonneau Cover seal (A)
from its seat.
Completely remove the Tonneau Cover seal (A)

from its seat and replace.
The new seal must be moistened with liquid detergent before installing to facilitate installation and
adjustment.
Identify the pins at the ends of the Tonneau
Cover seal (A).
Starting from one side (the left-hand side in the

photo), fit the pin (black arrow) on the new
seal (A) into the respective square hole (red
arrow) in the side of the Tonneau Cover.
Then press the end of the Tonneau Cover seal
into its respective seat.
Repeat the same procedure for the right-hand side of the seal.
Press the full length of the Tonneau Cover seal

(A) correctly into its seat.
On the left-hand side, tighten the two indicated
screws fastening the Tonneau Cover seal (A)
to the Tonneau Cover.
On the right-hand side, tighten the two indicated

screws fastening the Tonneau Cover seal (A)
to the Tonneau Cover.

Check that the Tonneau Cover seal sits flush with the adjacent components.
After replacing the seal, the water tightness test must be carried out.
Replacing the lip seal on the Tonneau Cover
CAUTION

completely opened.
Detach the seal (A), removing any adhesive
residue, and replace.
Clean and degrease the area where the new
seal will be fitted.
Fit and glue the new seal (A) into place, ensuring
that it is correctly aligned with the Tonneau
Cover.
E6.11 Striker plates and receivers
Replacing the Rear Roof shell striker plates on the Tonneau Cover
CAUTION
The Rear Roof shell striker plates are located at the front of the Tonneau Cover.
The following procedure is for replacing the left hand striker plate.
Except where indicated otherwise, the procedure for replacing the right hand striker plate is identical.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, ensure

that the Rear Roof shell fastener hooks
are completely and correctly opened
before operating the RHT roof electrically.
Operate the RHT roof electrically to open the

Tonneau Cover completely.
Right hand striker plate
Undo the screw fastening the sensor (A) to the

striker plate.
Remove the sensor (A) from the relevant seat on
the striker plate.
striker plate (B) to the Tonneau Cover.
Remove the striker plate (B) from the relevant
seat on the Tonneau Cover, recovering the
relevant shims, and replace.
Fit the new striker plate (B) in the relevant seat
on the Tonneau Cover, installing the relevant
shims.
Loosely tighten the two screws indicated
fastening the striker plate (B) to the Tonneau
Cover.
Right hand striker plate
Fit the sensor (A) in the relevant seat on the

striker plate.
Tighten the screw fastening the sensor (A) to the
striker plate.
Replacing Tonneau Cover receivers


washers.
Remove the receiver (A) and replace.
Fit the new receiver (A).
Tighten the indicated screws, repositioning the
washers.
Check the correct alignment between the pin of the Rear Roof shell striker plate and the Tonneau
Cover receiver.

Adjusting the Rear Roof shell striker plates on the Tonneau Cover

Rear Roof shell striker plates - Tonneau Cover M6x25 Screw 8 Nm B
Tonneau Cover receivers - mounting bracket M6x16 Screw 9 Nm A
CAUTION
The Rear Roof shell striker plates are located at the front of the Tonneau Cover.
The following procedure is for adjusting the right hand striker plate.
The procedure for adjusting the left hand striker plate is identical.

Remove the upper lateral trim panel, leaving the seat belts attached.
Connect a stabilised battery charger to the vehicle.

aside.
completely opened.
Remove the rubber pad (1) from the respective

seat on the striker plate (A).
Carry out the operation on both striker plates.
Manually check that the roller (2) turns freely.
CAUTION
Move the Rear Roof shell manually, holding it

above the Front Roof shell.
Remove the rubber pad (3) from the respective
seat on the Rear Roof shell kinematics.
Carry out the operation on both Rear Roof shell
kinematics assemblies.
Manually move the Rear Roof shell to bring it
over the Front Roof shell.
Manually check that the roller (2) DOES NOT

turn.
If the pawl can still turn, the striker plate must
be adjusted as the vertical position of the
striker plate (along the "Z" axis) is incorrect.
Fit the checking template (AV 8182), placing the

fixed part against the hook (B) and bringing
the mobile part against the Rear Roof shell
striker plate (A).
Using the checking template (AV 8182), check
that the longitudinal distance (along the "X"
axis) between the Rear Roof shell striker
plate (A) and hook (B) is 17 ± 2 mm.
If this is not the case, the striker plate must be
adjusted as the longitudinal position of the
striker plate (along the "X" axis) is incorrect.
With cylindrical roller only
Insert the feeler gauge (AV 8181) between the

right-hand side of the hook (B) and the striker
plate (A).
If the feeler gauge does not fit, the striker plate
must be adjusted as the lateral position of
the striker plate (along the "Y" axis) is
incorrect.
Insert the feeler gauge (AV 8181) between the

left-hand side of the hook (B) and the striker
plate (A).
must be adjusted as the lateral position of
the striker plate (along the "Y" axis) is
incorrect.
For "hourglass" roller (NEW SOLUTION)
Visually centre the lateral position (along the "Y"

axis) of the striker plate, so that the vertical
centreline of the roller (2) is perfectly aligned
with vertical centreline of the hook (B).

completely opened.

striker plate (A) to the Tonneau Cover.
If necessary, add or remove a number of the

special shims (4) between the striker plate (A)
and the Tonneau Cover, to the total thickness
necessary to obtain the nominal longitudinal
distance (along the "X" axis).
Loosely tighten the two screws indicated
fastening the striker plate (A) to the Tonneau
Cover.
Lower the quarterlights with the power window controls.
Tonneau Cover receiver (C).

Fit the locator template (AV 8180) between the

Rear Roof shell striker plate (A) and hook (B)
to ensure that the lateral position (along
the "Y" axis) of the striker plate (A) is correct.
Fit the separator tool (AV 8179) between the top
of the striker plate (A) and the Tonneau
Cover.
Engage the separator tool (AV 8179) using the
relative lever (5) or manual screw
mechanism, to ensure that the vertical
position (along the "Z" axis) of the striker
plate is correct.


M6x25 Screw 8 Nm B
Release the separator tool (AV 8179) using the

relative lever or manual screw mechanism,
and remove.
Remove the locator template from between the
striker plate (A) and the hook (B) of the Rear
Roof shell (AV 8180).
Check again that the roller (2) DOES NOT turn.
If the pawl can still turn, the striker plate must
be adjusted again as the vertical position of
the striker plate (along the "Z" axis) is
incorrect.
Fit the checking template (AV 8182) again,

placing the fixed part against the hook (B)
and bringing the mobile part against the Rear
Roof shell striker plate (A).
Using the checking template (AV 8182), check
again that the longitudinal distance (along
the "X" axis) between the Rear Roof shell
striker plate (A) and hook (B) is 17 ± 2 mm.
If this is not the case, the striker plate must be
adjusted again as the longitudinal position of
the striker plate (along the "X" axis) is
incorrect.
Insert the feeler gauge (AV 8181) again between

the right-hand side of the hook (B) and the
striker plate (A).
must be adjusted again as the lateral
position of the striker plate (along the "Y"
axis) is incorrect.
Insert the feeler gauge (AV 8181) again between

the left-hand side of the hook (B) and the
striker plate (A).
must be adjusted again as the lateral
position of the striker plate (along the "Y"
axis) is incorrect.
For "hourglass" roller (NEW SOLUTION)
Visually centre the lateral position (along the "Y"

axis) of the striker plate, so that the vertical
centreline of the roller (2) is perfectly aligned
with vertical centreline of the hook (B).
Pressing upwards by hand, fit the Tonneau

Cover receiver (C) against the striker plate.

M6x16 Screw 9 Nm A
Operate the Tonneau Cover to open slightly and

check that the Rear Roof shell striker plate
pin (A) and the Tonneau Cover receiver (C)
are correctly aligned.
While the Tonneau Cover is moving, there must
be no interference between the Rear Roof
shell striker plate pin (A) and the Tonneau
Cover receiver (C).
In the event of misalignment, adjust the lateral

position (along the "Y" axis) of the Tonneau
Cover receiver (C) as follows.

completely opened.
Using a delible marker, draw a reference line on

the receiver rear side (C) of the Tonneau
Cover, along the upper edge in contact with
Taking care not to alter the vertical position
(along the "Z" axis) using the line marked
previously as reference, correct the lateral
position (along the "Y" axis) of the Tonneau
Cover receiver (C), so that it is correctly
centred with the Rear Roof shell striker plate
pin.

M6x16 Screw 9 Nm A
Operate the Tonneau Cover to bring it close to

the relative receivers (C) and check again
that the Rear Roof shell striker plate pin (A)
and the Tonneau Cover receiver (C) are
correctly aligned.
While the Tonneau Cover is moving, there must
be no interference between the Rear Roof
shell striker plate pin (A) and the Tonneau
Cover receiver (C).
In the event of misalignment, repeat the

procedure to adjust the position of the
Tonneau Cover receiver (C) described
previously.

completely opened.
CAUTION
Hold the Rear Roof shell up manually.

Refit the rubber pad (3) in the respective seat on
the Rear Roof shell kinematics.
Carry out the operation on both Rear Roof shell
kinematics assemblies.
Manually move the Rear Roof shell to bring it

over the Front Roof shell.
Refit the rubber pad (1) in the respective seat on

the striker plate (A).
Carry out the operation on both striker plates.
Test the function of the RHT roof, performing three open/close cycles.
Replacing striker plates on luggage compartment lid

Fastening striker plates on luggage compartment M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
lid
respective washers.
FROM Assembly No. 94430, remove and
retrieve the bushes.
Remove and retrieve the shim (A).
If necessary, replace the shim (A).
Remove the striker plate (B) and replace.

Fit the new striker plate (B).
Fit the shim (A).
FROM Assembly No. 94430, fit the bushes.
Tighten the indicated screws, repositioning the
washers.
Colour the ends of the striker plate (B).
Apply a piece of rubber-coated paper on the

striker plate seat on the Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
Lower slowly the luggage compartment lid,
without closing it, so as to mark the position
of the striker plate on the piece of rubber-
coated paper.
Lift the luggage compartment lid.
Check that the hook centreline of the Tonneau
Cover kinematics is equidistant from the
indicated marks.
Otherwise, adjust the lateral position of the
striker plate.

M6x18 screw 9 Nm B
Replacing rear storage lock receivers

Remove the rear trim panel only.
Undo the two screws (1).
Remove the rear storage lock receiver (A) and
replace it.
Fit the new rear storage lock receiver (A) on the
Adjust the RHT ( E6.02).

Adjust the lateral position of the rear storage lock receiver so that the kinematics is perfectly centred
with the respective receiver.
Replacing caps on rear storage lock receivers
Operate the RHT roof electrically to open the Tonneau Cover completely.
Press on the indicated points and remove the

cap (A).
Replace the cap (A).
Position the cap (A) until it clicks audibly into
place.
Replacing pads of the Rear Roof shell kinematics

CAUTION
Move the RHT roof electrically to the

intermediate position, that is until the Rear
Roof shell is over the Front Roof shell.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).

Remove the pad (A) and replace it.
Fit and fasten the new pad (A) pressing it by
hand.
CAUTION
Hold the Rear Roof shell and remove the rod

(AV 8178) previously positioned.
Replacing Tonneau Cover kinematics pads
CAUTION

completely opened.
Front pads
hand.
Rear pads

hand.
Replacing pads of the Rear Roof shell hooks
Push the trim (A) very gently downwards.

Remove the pad (B) and replace.
Fit and fasten the new pad (B) pressing it by
hand.
Fit the trim (A) correctly.

E6.12 Hydraulic system
RHT hydraulic system layout
A - Hydraulic pump
B - Tonneau Cover hydraulic cylinders
C - Main hydraulic cylinders
D - Rear Roof shell hydraulic cylinders
The locations of the delivery pipes for the hydraulic cylinders on the lower part of the pump actuating the RHT
are given as follows.
Near the union on both the pump and the respective cylinder, each pipe is embossed with a number that
matches with the number embossed above each union housing on the pump.
Removing the RHT hydraulic system pump
reassembly.

Remove the rear left hand trim panel only.
Disconnect the connectors (1) of the hydraulic

pump (A).
Undo the three indicated screws fastening the
hydraulic pump (A) to the left hand Tonneau
Cover kinematics.
Remove the hydraulic pump (A), leaving it
connected to the hydraulic system, from the
relevant seat on the left hand Tonneau Cover
kinematics.
If the hydraulic pump (A) must be replaced,
proceed as follows.
Turn the hydraulic pump (A) upside down and
note the exact position of the hydraulic pipes.
Each pipe is marked with a number indicated
also on the hydraulic pump (A) in the
relevant seat on the pump to avoid incorrect
pipe refitting.
Undo the six indicated screws fastening the

retainer forks (2) of the hydraulic pipes.
Detach the retainer forks (2) of the hydraulic
pipes from the hydraulic pump (A).
Plug immediately the oil outlet orifices on the
hydraulic pump (A).
Remove the hydraulic pipe unions (3) from the

relevant retainer forks (2).
Retrieve the retainer forks (2) of the hydraulic
pipe unions (3).
Pour the fluid drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT DISPOSE OF USED
FLUID IN THE ENVIRONMENT.
Open the hydraulic pump tank filler plug and collect the oil by pouring it into a newly opened and clean
container.
Refitting the RHT hydraulic system pump

Hydraulic pipe clamp forks - pump Screw 7 Nm A
Hydraulic pump - left hand Tonneau Cover M6x22 screws 9 Nm B
kinematics
reassembly.
If the hydraulic pump (A) has been replaced, fit
new seals (4), after lubricating them properly,
in the relevant seats on the hydraulic pump
(A).
Using a suitable tool and proceeding with

caution, press the new seals (4) fully in the
relevant seats on the hydraulic pump (A).
Match the numbers on the hydraulic pipes and fit

the hydraulic pipe unions (3) on the relevant
retainer forks (2).
also on the hydraulic pump in the relevant
seat on the pump to avoid incorrect pipe
refitting.
Match the numbers on the hydraulic pipes and
put the forks (2) in the relevant positions on
the hydraulic pump (A), fitting gently the
hydraulic pipe unions in the relevant holes.
also on the hydraulic pump (A) in the
relevant seat on the pump to avoid incorrect
pipe refitting.
Check that the hydraulic pipe unions are

securely fastened to the hydraulic pump.
Tighten the retainer fork screws (2) to the

hydraulic pump (A).

Screw 7 Nm A
Position the pipes as originally fitted.
Fit the hydraulic pump (A) in its seat and fasten

to the left hand Tonneau Cover kinematics by

M6x22 screws 9 Nm B
Connect the connectors (1) of the hydraulic

pump (A).
Use only the prescribed fluid - Pentosin CHF

11S.
After replacing the pump, undo the filler plug (5)

and using a suitable funnel, fill the tank with
the specified fluid up to the MAX level.
Bleed the RHT hydraulic system fluid ( E6.12).
Check the unions on the hydraulic pump for oil leaks.

Refit the rear left hand trim panel.
Replacing the Tonneau Cover hydraulic cylinders
reassembly.

Remove the rear trim panel only.
Only for the left cylinder. Remove the RHT hydraulic system pump ( E6.12).
Remove the pump without disconnecting it from the system.
Release the clips (1).

Remove the cylinder (A).
Before disconnecting the pipes, check that
the hydraulic system is not pressurised.
After the RHT roof open/close button is
released, the hydraulic system remains
pressurised for up to 5 minutes.
Disconnect the pipes (2) releasing the relevant

clips.
Replace the cylinder (A).
Every time the hydraulic cylinder pipes are
detached and refitted the relevant seals
and clip must be replaced.
Take particular care not to damage the pipe
seals and clips, since this could cause oil
leaks.
Connect the pipes (2) fitting the relevant clips.

Fit the gasket correctly on the cylinder then
push the pipe union gently into its relative
seat until it snaps audibly into place.
Position the new cylinder (A).

The incorrect positioning of the cylinder
fastener clips could cause the
detachment and consequent damaging of
the cylinder.
Check always the correct positioning of the
cylinder fastener clips.
Attach the clips (1).
Only for the left cylinder. Refit the RHT hydraulic system pump ( E6.12).
Replacing the RHT roof main hydraulic cylinders
reassembly.

Removing the trim of the roof main cylinder.
CAUTION

completely opened.
Remove the pin (2).
Remove the clamp indicated.

clips.
leaks.


Tighten the new clamp in the indicated position.
Place the pipes in the correct position.

the cylinder.
Attach the clip (3).

Fasten the clip (1).

Refit the trim of the roof main cylinder.
Replacing the RHT Rear Roof shell hydraulic cylinders
reassembly.
Remove the Front Roof shell ( E6.04).

CAUTION

completely opened.

two bumpers (M).
two bumpers (M).
the rod (AV 8178).
two bumpers (M).
CAUTION
Move the Rear Roof shell by hand toward the

rear of the vehicle.
Remove the pin (2).
Detach and remove the clip (3).

clips.
leaks.


the cylinder.
Fit and attach the clip (3).

Fasten the clip (1).
CAUTION
Hold the Rear Roof shell and remove the rod

(AV 8178) previously positioned.
Move the Rear Roof shell by hand toward the
front of the vehicle until it is positioned over

Refit the Front Roof shell ( E6.04).
Checking the RHT hydraulic system fluid level

reassembly.

Check the fluid level in the tank with the RHT

The fluid level in the tank (1) must be between

MAX and MIN.
11S.
If the fluid level is too low, remove the plug (2)

and top up with the specified fluid, using a
funnel, to the MAX level.
Bleed the RHT hydraulic system
fluid ( E6.12).
This operation is necessary in the event of an
excessively low fluid level.
After topping up, tighten the filler cap (2).

Plug 2 Nm B

Bleeding the RHT hydraulic system fluid

reassembly.
Air may be trapped in the system, especially when operating the roof manually, after replacing one or more
components of the hydraulic system or if the low fluid level is too low. The system is a closed circuit which
is self-bleeding in normal operating conditions. Sometimes, however, manual bleeding may be necessary,
especially after work carried out on the hydraulic system. ALWAYS check for leaks or damage to the
components before working on a system that requires bleeding. If air is found in the system but there are
no other problems, it is NOT necessary to replace any components.

Loosen or hand tighten the filler plug (1) so that

is it fastened to the tank by only two turns of
the relative thread. This allows trapped air to
escape more easily from the tank. Pressure
surges and escaping air can therefore be
released into the atmosphere, preventing
damage to the tank.
Open and close the roof three times and check
that it functions correctly.
11S.
Monitor the fluid level throughout the entire roof

opening and closing cycle: if necessary, top
up the tank to the MAX level with the
specified fluid.
Tighten the filler plug (1).

Plug 2 Nm B

E6.13 Sensors
Replacing sensors HS10-HS11
reassembly.
The HS10 sensor is located on the left hand striker plate of the Front Roof Shell.
The HS11 sensor is located on the right hand striker plate of the Front Roof Shell.

Remove the windscreen cross member trim.

Remove the sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new sensor (A).

Refit the windscreen cross member trim panel.
Replacing sensor PE50
reassembly.
The PE50 sensor is located on the left hand kinematics of the Tonneau Cover.
CAUTION

completely opened.

Release clamps (1).

Ease out and remove safety catch (4).
NEVER touch the pins with your bare hands,
as this may damage the pins themselves.
Wear appropriate gloves.
Using a suitable extractor, disconnect pins (5)

from connector (3).
Note the colour and locations of the pins (5) to
ensure that they are connected correctly
during reassembly.
CAUTION
Two operators are needed to carry out this
operation.
Raise the left side of the Tonneau Cover so as to

gain access to sensor (A).
Remove the sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new sensor (A).
Check that the magneto is clean and free of
metal dust.
CAUTION
Two operators are needed to carry out this
operation.
Lower the left hand side of the Tonneau Cover.
NEVER touch the pins with your bare hands,

as this may damage the pins themselves.
Wear appropriate gloves.
Connect pins (5) to connector (3).

Referring to the pin colours and locations noted
previously, connect the pins (5) correctly.
Position and insert safety catch (4).


Connect cable ties (1).

E7.01 Sanding and cleaning
Pre-Cleaning
Steel. Remove rust by sandblasting, wire brush or coarse sanding paper (P16 to P80) to
achieve a bare substrate. For rust through areas tinning is recommended. In case of larger
damaged areas it might be necessary to weld in a new sheet or to replace the whole part.
Remove any remains like scale from welding, tinning or any parting compounds and fluxing
agents thoroughly.
Cleaning
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D842 DX380 low VOC
Cleaner or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. If using D842, rinse the surface with T494
Envirobase thinner immediately after degreasing, then dry the panel surface.
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and
carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges
and borders. Use a guide coat for best results:
TM ™ red pad, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
TM ™ grey pad, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Tinned Steel P80-P220
TM ™ red pad, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
E-Coat (spare P280 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ grey pad, 3
parts) M Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires
only cleaning)
OE Finish / Repair P240 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Coatings Soft Pad superfine
Putty / Filler Coarse sanding: P80 - P150, fine sanding:
P240 - P320
Spray Polyester Coarse sanding: P150, fine sanding: P240 -
P320
Primer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Surfacer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Topcoat (blending P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M
areas) Scotch-Brite ™ pad superfine
Clearcoat (blending P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M
areas) Scotch-Brite ™ pad superfine
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and
carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges
and borders:
E-Coat (spare parts) P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
(faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning)
OE Finish / Repair
P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Coatings
Putty / Filler NEVER USE wet sanding for putties!
Spray Polyester NEVER USE wet sanding for putties!
Primer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Surfacer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Topcoat (blending P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
areas)
Clearcoat (blending
areas)
Cleaning
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D842 DX380 low VOC
Cleaner or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. If using D842, rinse the surface with T494
Envirobase thinner immediately after degreasing, then dry the panel surface.
E7.02 Use of hardeners and diluents
The following tables show which hardeners and thinners have to be used together with the corresponding
PPG products depending on the ambient temperature.
Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer

HS Hardeners MS Hardeners
Temperature
HS-Hardener Thinner MS-Hardener Thinner
Up to 18°C D884 / D897 D808 D841 D808
18 – 25°C D884 / D897 D866 / D807 D841 D866 / D807
25 – 35°C D884 / D897 D812 D861 D812
Above 35°C D884 / D897 D869 D861 D869
N.B.: When using Deltron D821 primer as non-sand surfacers, it is recommended that the same
hardener is used in subsequently applied direct gloss colour or clearcoat. Consult the
appropriate technical datasheet(s) to identify a suitable common hardener.
Deltron BC – Solventborne Basecoat

Temperature Thinner
Up to 18°C D808
18 – 25°C D807
25 – 35°C D812
Above 35°C D869
Spot Repair D851 / for detailed information see technical datasheet "02 – Deltron BC"
For optimum durability and adhesion it is recommended to mix Deltron BC 10 : 1
with D841 MS Hardener, and then thin 1 : 1 with GRS Thinner prior to
application. Potlife of the activated basecoat is in excess of 48 hours. Application
and drying properties are unchanged.
Deltron D8109 – UHS low VOC Clearcoat

HS Hardeners
Temperature
HS-Hardener Thinner
Up to 18°C D897 D808
18 – 25°C D897 D807
25 – 35°C D897 D812
Above 35°C D897 D869
D8208 D808
Spot Repair D868 / for detailed information see technical datasheet "171 –
Deltron D8109"
D865 / for detailed information see technical datasheet "171 –
Enhanced
Deltron D8109"
Extended
Deltron D8109"
Deltron D8105 – CeramiClearTM

HS Hardeners
Temperature
HS-Hardener Thinner
Up to 18°C D8215 -
18 – 25°C D8215 -
25 – 35°C D8215 -
Above 35°C D8215 -
Spot Repair D8215 -
Extended
Deltron D8105"
E7.03 Preparing and painting the aluminium sheets
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Aluminium substrates, total or partly
respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
Aluminium / Magnesium
Cleaning / Sanding see below
Primer Universal D831
Surfacer (if polyester filler is
Deltron D821
necessary)
Putty / Filler (If necessary) Galvaplast 77
Surfacer Deltron D821
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC
Clearcoat(s) Deltron D8105, Deltron D8109
Substrate Preparation and Cleaning

for detailed information see chapter / section “Sanding and Cleaning”.
Cleaning
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe o D845 (DX310) High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC
Cleaner.
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Use a guide coat for best results:
Aluminium / P150 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad,

Magnesium 3M Soft Pad superfine
OE Finish / Repair P240 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad,
Coatings 3M Soft Pad superfine
Wet Sanding (manual)
Do not wet sand

Cleaning
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength
Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.
Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4 hours.
Deltron D831 – Universel
For detailed information see technical datasheet "10 – Universel D831"
For detailed information see chapter / section “Sanding and Cleaning”

Mixing Ratio D831 1 vol
D832 / D833 * 1 vol
* For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35°C / > 70%) and for
large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833
Number of coats: 2-3
Flash-off between coats at 20°C: 5 minutes
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes
Dry to sand at 20°C 30 - 45 minutes (D832)
Total dry film build: 15 - 20 µm

Repair / Recoating: with P400 (dry), if necessary
Overcoat / Re-coat time at
at 20°C (airdrying): 30 – 40 minutes
Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer [Primer Surfacer]

For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Flash-off between coats at 20°C: 10 – 15 minutes

Flash-off before stoving at 20°C: 10 – 15 minutes
Drying times:
Dustfree at 20°C 35 minutes

Touch dry at 20°C 1,5 - 2 hours (tinted: 2 – 2.5 hours)
Through dry at 20°C Overnight
Through dry at 60°C
20 – 25 minutes tinted: 30
minutes (metal temperature)
Through dry (IR) 10 - 15 min
Total dry film build: 70 – 110 µm (tinted: 60 – 90 µm)
Sand with P400 (dry) or P800 (wet)
Galvaplast 77
For detailed information see technical datasheet "76 - Fillers"
Addition of hardeners from °C to 10°C 2,5 % - 3,0 %

(A665, A666, A667) from 10 °C to 20 °C from ,0°C to 2,5°C
from °C to 30°C from ,5°C to 2,0°C
(by weight)
Application: use a suitable knife or spreader. Apply one or more coats as necessary, allowing 5 –
10 minutes at 20°C between coats. Galvaplast 77 can be used directly on the bare metal.
Dry to sand:
from °C to 10°C 25 – 35 minutes

from 10 °C to 20 °C 20 – 30 minutes
IR medium 5 – 6 minutes
IR short 4 – 5 minutes
Dry sanding paper grades: P80 - P120 - P240

Overcoating at 20° C: 30 minutes
Primer Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant [low VOC Primer Surfacer]

D104 /For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:

20 – 25 minutes; tinted: 30
Approved Topcoats to be used with this Repair System

Deltron BC see technical datasheet "02 – Deltron BC"
Deltron D8105 see technical datasheet "170 – Deltron D8105"
Notes:
- D8105 can be replaced by D8109 if the Fade-out technique is required .
- The following system is required if on the car the Colour Code label indicates “WATERBORNE
TECHNOLOGY”.
- If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE
Clear thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.
- Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Aluminium substrates, total or partly
respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
Aluminium / Magnesium
Cleaning / Sanding see below
Primer Universal D831
Surfacer (if polyester filler is
Deltron D821 HS
necessary)
Putty / Filler (If necessary) Galvaplast 77
Surfacer Deltron D821 HS
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC
Clearcoat(s) Deltron D8105, Deltron D8109

Cleaning
Cleaner.

Do not wet sand

Cleaning


D832 / D833 * 1 vol
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes


Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:

Galvaplast 77

(by weight)
Dry to sand:

IR short 4 minutes


Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:



Envirobase see technical datasheet "125 – Envirobase"

Notes:
TECHNOLOGY”.
E7.04 Preparing and painting the steel sheets
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Steel substrates, total or partly respray,
for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
E-Coat (spare
Bare Steel Galvanized Steel OE Finish
parts)
Cleaning / Sanding see below see below see below see below
Putty / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77
Primer Universal 831 Universal 831
Deltron D821 MS / Deltron D821 MS / Deltron D821 MS /
Surfacer
HS HS HS
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC Deltron BC Deltron BC Deltron BC
Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105
Clearcoat(s)

Cleaning
Cleaner.
Steel P80 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad,

3M Soft Pad superfine
Galvanized Steel P320 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Soft Pad superfine
Tinned Steel P80-P220
Aluminium / P150 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Magnesium Soft Pad superfine
E-Coat (spare P280 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ grey pad, 3M
parts) Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires
only cleaning)
OE Finish / P240 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Repair Coatings Soft Pad superfine
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate

E-Coat (spare parts) P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
(faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning)
OE Finish / Repair
Coatings
Cleaning
After wet sanding rinse thoroughly with clear water. Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837
DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in
force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4
hours.
Galvaplast 77

(by weight)
Dry to sand:



D832 / D833 * 1 vol
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes

Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer [Primer Surfacer]

D104 / For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:


Notes:
TECHNOLOGY”.
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, compliant (low VOC, european legislation) with sanding, for Steel
substrates, total or partly respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
E-Coat (spare
Bare Steel Galvanized Steel OE Finish
parts)
Cleaning / Sanding see below see below see below see below
Putty / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77
Primer Universal 831 Universal 831
Surfacer Deltron D821 HS Deltron D821 HS Deltron D821 HS
Basecoat(s) Envirobase Envirobase Envirobase Envirobase
Clearcoat(s)

Cleaning
Cleaner.

Do not wet sand

Cleaning
Galvaplast 77

(by weight)
Dry to sand:




D832 / D833 * 1 vol
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes

Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:



Notes:
TECHNOLOGY”.
E7.05 Restoring the cataphoresis coating
Restoring the cataphoresis coating
Use the following procedure in the event of damage to the cataphoresis layer, due, for example, to:
repairs to bodywork, replacement of suspension inserts, holes drilled into metal, fitment of
additional rivnuts after cataphoresis treatment and replacement of ground plates.
Whenever the cataphoresis coating layer is damaged, it is imperative that protective treatment is be applied
correctly to the damaged area as described in the following procedure.
Only mix the amount necessary to restore the coating, as once mixed, the product must be used within
1 hour.
Prepare the product by mixing the two components in equal volumes - specifically, 50% epoxy primer PPG
Universel D831 and 50% catalyst PPG Universel D832.
Clean the application area thoroughly with a clean cloth moistened with R107/S.
The repair treatment may be applied with a spray gun or with a normal paint brush:
Application with spray gun
Protect the surrounding areas and nearby components against heat.
Apply 2 or 3 coats of the treatment product, waiting 5 minutes between coats.

The total dry film thickness at the end of the application cycle must be between 15 μ and 20 μ.
Allow to dry until dust free for 5 minutes, or dry with a bodywork hot air gun, set to full power and held at a
distance of 20 cm from the surface, for 10 minutes.
Application with paint brush
Protect the surrounding areas and nearby components against heat.
Apply a thin coat of product over all exposed metalwork surfaces.

Allow to dry until dust free for 5 minutes, or dry with a bodywork hot air gun, set to full power and held at a
distance of 20 cm from the surface, for 10 minutes.
Applying filler base coat
Due to the characteristics of epoxy resin based products, a surfacer primer must also be applied over the
epoxy primer PPG Universel D831, which also offers scratch protection.
Apply PPG UHS Greymatic D8018 (White), PPG UHS Greymatic D8019 (Black), or PPG UHS
Greymatic D8024 (Grey) base coat.
The three surfacer primers differ in colour only and offer the same performance. The different colours are
for use under different coloured top coats.
For instructions regarding preparation, application and drying, see the PPG technical product sheets.
Specific case where press-fit rivets have not been fitted yet
Apply a layer of the product over the entire rivet before fitting, and on the hole made in the bodywork to
accept the rivet.
Apply additional product to the bodywork to after assembly to cover completely if any metal is exposed by
subsequent procedures (repairs, etc.).
Use the same procedure for application and curing described in the chapters "Application with spray
gun" and "Application with brush".
F1.01 Tightening torques

Fastening battery - tie-rods Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening battery - bracket Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening cable - starter motor Nut 15 Nm A
Nut 6.5 Nm A
Fastening heat shield - starter motor Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening starter motor mounting bracket - engine Screw 10 Nm B
Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening starter motor mounting bracket Nut 10 Nm A
Nut 10 Nm A
Fastening alternator - engine Screw 49 Nm B
Fastening ground cables from dashboard wiring - Ground lug terminal 15 Nm B
centre console chassis.
Fastening retainer bracket - Motronic ECU Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening horn - chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening windscreen wiper arms Nut 35 Nm B
Fastening windscreen wiper linkage Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening headlight - chassis Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening rear light - luggage compartment lid Nut 4 Nm C
Fastening third stop light Nut 4 Nm C
Fastening front bushing - left hand cylinder head Bushing 5 Nm B
Fastening front bracket - alternator Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening rear bushing - right hand cylinder head Bushing 5 Nm B
Fastening rear bushing - left hand cylinder head Bushing 5 Nm B
Bushing 35 Nm B
Fastening rear light cluster - bumper Nut 8 Nm B
Fastening DCT gearbox ECU Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening ADR anti-theft system ECU Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening airbag ECU Nut 8 Nm B
Fastening ground stud - front chassis Pawl 16 Nm B
Fastening cable - alternator Nut 14 Nm B
Fastening battery ground cable - front subchassis Screw 18 Nm B
Fastening engine services cable terminal on Nut 11 Nm C
battery
Fastening battery sensor Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening fuse ECU to battery Screw 2 Nm B
Fastening battery positive terminal clamp Nut 4.5 Nm B
Fastening the parking camera ECU Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening coolant temperature sensor - radiator Sensor 16 Nm A
Fastening coolant temperature sensor - front Temperature sensor 20 Nm B
cover
Fastening resistor - cowl Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening minimum level engine oil sensor Screw 8 Nm A
Fastening pneumatic actuator system solenoid Screw 6 Nm B
valve
Fastening vacuum accumulator tank Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening timing sensor Screw 8 Nm A
Fastening RPM sensor Sensor 10 Nm A
Fastening engine oil temperature sensor - heat Sensor 20 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening engine oil pressure sensor Thermistor 26 Nm A
Fastening variable timing adjuster solenoid valve Screw 6 Nm B
Fastening high pressure fuel pump Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw
Screw 10 Nm B
High pressure pipe - rail Nut +1 0
23-1 Nm
High pressure pipe - pump Nut +1 0
30-1 Nm
Complete rail pipe - cylinder head Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
Screw/stud bolt 10 Nm B
Soundproofing cover - complete fuel rail Screw +0 0
6-2 Nm
Low pressure pipe - high pressure pump Nut +2 0
20-0 Nm
Soundproofing cover - high pressure pump Screw 10 Nm B
Rear expansion tank heat shield Nut 8 Nm B
Rear pneumatic actuator system solenoid valve Screw 6 Nm B
Complete fuel rail mounting Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening knock sensor Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening accelerator pedal - centre console Nut 9 Nm B
casting
Fastening driver side airbag module Torx screw 9.5 Nm A
Fastening crash plate - flange Torx screw 4 Nm B
Fastening switch - bracket Screw 2.5 Nm C
Fastening inertia switch Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening F1 shift paddles Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening NIT BOSE Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening anti-theft siren Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening belt retractor bracket - rollbar Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening RHT assembly bracket - rollbar Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening bracket - RHT assembly Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening seat belt ring - bodyshell Screw 40 Nm A
Fastening rear seat belt retractor Screw 40 Nm A
Fastening parking sensor buzzer Screw 1.5 Nm B
Fastening front seat belt guide ring - relative Screw 40 Nm A
mounting bracket
Fastening passenger side airbag - upper Nut 7.5 Nm B
dashboard trim panel
Fastening passenger side airbag mounting Screw 5 Nm B
bracket
Fastening side airbag - mounting bracket Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening side airbag mounting bracket - door Screw 8.5 Nm B
panel
Fastening crash sensor - chassis Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening rear hyper-frequency volumetric sensor Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening seat belt branch Nut 40 Nm A
Brackets - A.C. condenser Screw 5 Nm B
Brackets - A.C. condenser Nut 24 Nm B
shell
Water recirculation pump - TGK valve bracket Screw 9 Nm B
Water recirculation pump - TGK valve bracket Nut 9 Nm B
A.C. pipes - condenser Screw 9 Nm B
A.C. system delivery and return pipes Screw / Nut 6 Nm B
A.C. system delivery and return pipes - Nut 16 Nm A
expansion valve
Brackets - A.C. condenser Screw 3.2 Nm B
Fastening Magneride ECU Nut 4 Nm C
Contoured cable guide U-bolt Nut 9 Nm B
EPB Bowden cable - heat shield on gearbox Screw 6 Nm B
Heat shield - EPB Bowden cable Screw 6 Nm B
EPB Bowden cable - bodyshell Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening yaw sensor - chassis Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening body computer node - chassis Screw 8 Nm C
Filter mounting bracket for OBD diagnostic pump - Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening for passenger side footrest mat Screw 10 Nm B
mounting bracket
F1.02 List of light bulbs
Bulb application Type Power (12V)

High / Low beams Gas discharge Das
(Xenon) lamp
Front running lights LED
Front turn indicators LED
Side turn indicators Incandescent T4W
Running lights on mobile part of LED
taillight
Rear fog lights on mobile part Incandescent H16W
Reverse lights on fixed part Incandescent 16W
Stop lights on fixed part Incandescent 5W
Rear turn indicators on fixed part Incandescent 21W
Number plate lights Incandescent R5W
Third stop light LED
Passenger compartment dome light Incandescent 8W
Spot light Incandescent 5W
Document compartment light Incandescent W5W
Underdoor courtesy light Incandescent W5W
Luggage compartment light Incandescent 10W
F2.01 Battery, disconnecting / reconnecting
Technical characteristics of battery
Brand: FIAMM
Type: 12V - 100 A/h - 850 A
Brand: FIAMM
Type: 12V - 95 A/h L5 VRLA 850A EN
Removing the battery
Each time the battery is disconnected from the electrical system of the vehicle, all the self-acquisition
parameters are cancelled from the injection ECU.
These parameters must be reacquired before reusing the vehicle.
The battery is located in the engine compartment, under the air flow meters.

Remove the indicated metal clamps.

Remove the air flow meters (A) complete with
relative bellows, disconnecting the relative
connectors.
Release the indicated clips, then open and
remove the cover (B)
Detach the fuse (2) and move out of the way.

screws.
Loosen and disconnect the positive terminal
clamp, undoing the indicated nut.

Move the bracket (C), complete with false
negative pole, out of the way.


Remove the battery from its mounting.
If necessary, remove the protective cover (F),

releasing the indicated clips.
Refitting the battery

Fastening battery - tie-rods Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening battery - bracket Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening battery positive terminal clamp Nut 4.5 Nm B
Fastening fuse ECU to battery Screw 2 Nm B
If necessary, fit and fasten the protective cover

(F), fastening the indicated clips.


Nut 6 Nm B

Nut 6 Nm B


Screw 20 Nm B
Connect and fasten the positive terminal clamp,

tightening the indicated nut.

Nut 4.5 Nm B
Fit the bracket (1), tightening the indicated

screws.

Screw 2 Nm B
Fit and connect the fuse (2).
Fit and fasten the cover (B), pressing on the

indicated clips.
Fit the air flow meters (A) complete with relative

bellows, connecting the relative connectors.
Fit and fasten the indicated metal clamps.

For vehicles with Stop&Start system. Perform battery sensor calibration ( F2.15).
Disconnecting the battery

Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system while the engine is running.
When performing any work on current consumers, always disconnect the quick release clamp from the
negative battery pole to disconnect the battery from the electrical system.
Open the engine compartment lid ( E5.14).

Use the power window controls to lower the door windows by 2-3 centimetres.
Turn the ignition switch to Key-OFF and remove the key.
Close both doors.
Wait for the backlighting of the volume knob on the NIT to switch off. This should take approximately 5 to
15 minutes.
During this period, do not open the doors or activate any vehicle device or system.
For vehicles without Stop&Start system. Remove the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Release the quick release clamp on the negative

pole of the battery using the lever (A).
Disconnect the quick release clamp from the
negative battery pole.
Release the quick release clamp on the false

negative pole of the battery using the lever
(A).
Disconnect the quick release clamp from the
false negative battery pole.
Connecting the battery

Each time the battery is connected to the electrical system of the vehicle, WAIT 1 MINUTE before
inserting the key in the ignition switch and do not switch on any current consumers during this
period.
After inserting the ignition key, turn to "II" and WAIT AT LEAST 1 MINUTE before starting the engine.
This procedure ensures that the ECUs in the vehicle are powered up and synchronised correctly, that
all motorised valve aperture and closure travel parameters are self-acquired correctly and that AC
ECU self-acquisition is performed correctly.
These self-acquisition procedures are initiated each time the battery is connected to the vehicle.
Connect the quick release clamp to the negative

battery pole.
Fasten the quick release clamp on the negative
pole of the battery using the lever (A).
Connect the quick release clamp to the false

Fasten the quick release clamp on the false
negative pole of the battery using the lever
(A).

Refit the right hand lateral cosmetic shield.
Before starting the engine again, perform the following operations: close the doors, the engine
compartment lid and the luggage compartment lid, unlock and lock the doors with the remote control,
open the luggage compartment lid with the remote control, set the date and time on the instrument
panel, close the doors, raise the door windows and rear quarterlights to the upper limit and check that
the windows drop to the target position when the doors are opened.
If this procedure is not followed correctly, the buttons in the passenger compartment for opening the
luggage compartment lid, locking/unlocking the doors and releasing the fuel filler flap will be
disabled.
Restore the self-adaptive parameters ( F2.01).
Restoring the self-adaptive parameters

parameters are cancelled from the ignition/injection ECU.
These parameters must be restored before the vehicle is used again, proceeding as follows.
The self-acquisition function of the Motronic ECUs will only be performed correctly at intake air temperatures
above 5 °C. Ensure that the ambient air temperature is not below this value.
Leave the engine stationary for approximately 10 minutes in the following conditions:
engine at idle speed;
water temperature stabilised;
current consumers switched off (lights, windscreen wipers etc.);
air conditioner off.
These preparations allow the ECU to optimise the self-adaptive parameters quickly by preventing irregular
engine operation.
F2.02 Key-operated circuits
Key-operated circuits
Start-up
Windscreen wiper and washer
Stop lights
Turn indicators
Hazard lights
Rear fog lights
Reverse lights
Document compartment light
Driver seat adjustment and memorisation
Power windows
Steering wheel adjustment
Ignition
Injection
Electric fuel pump
Air conditioning and heating system
Instruments
Water radiator cooling fan motors
Demist windscreen, rear screen and rear view mirrors
External rear view mirror adjustment
Shock absorber set-up control system (optional)
ABS - CST system
Exhaust temperature monitoring circuit
Tyre pressure monitoring system
RHT retractable hard top mechanism
EPB electric parking brake system
F2.03 Logistic Mode
This is a mode in which a number of vehicle functions are inhibited to prevent improper use of the vehicle
during transport.
Logistic Mode ON: upon receiving the activation signal, the specific message is shown in area D of the TFT
display.
"Logistic Mode" may be deactivated with the DEIS tester,
With Logistic Mode ON, the performance of all Electronic Control Units (ECU) in the vehicle is degraded:
F2.04 Alternator
Removing the alternator
The alternator is located under the intake manifold.

Detach the cables (1) from the support bracket

(2).
Detach the secondary air pipe (3) from the
support bracket (2).
Detach the cable (4) from the support bracket (2).

Remove the support bracket (2), undoing the
indicated screw.
Undo the screws (13) fastening the bracket (12)
to the alternator.
Undo the nut (6) and disconnect the engine
services cable (7).
Undo the screws (9) and (10), retrieving the

washers (B).
Remove the alternator (A).
Refitting the alternator

Fastening front bushing - left hand cylinder head Bushing 5 Nm B
Fastening alternator - engine Screw 49 Nm B
Fastening front bracket - alternator Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening rear bushing - right hand cylinder head Bushing 5 Nm B
Fastening rear bushing - left hand cylinder head Bushing 5 Nm B
Bushing 35 Nm B
IMPORTANT follow the sequence given for fitting and tightening the fasteners fastening the alternator
precisely.
Check that the front bushing (14) is correctly
installed on the right hand cylinder head.
Loosen bushings (15), (16) and (17).
Loosely fit the bushing (15) against the inner
surface of the relative seat in the left hand
head.

Bushing 5 Nm B
Fit the alternator (A).

Fit the screws (9) (long) and (10) (short), with the
relative washers (B), and hand tighten,
bringing the heads into contact with surface
but without crushing the washers.

Screw 49 Nm B
Fasten the bracket (12) to the alternator, by

photo was taken with the engine removed
from the vehicle.

Screw 10 Nm B
Loosely fit the rear bushing against the right
hand cylinder head (16).

Bushing 5 Nm B
Loosely fit the rear bushing against the left hand

cylinder head (17).

Bushing 5 Nm B
Tighten the screw (14), holding the rear bushing

immobilised against the right hand cylinder
head.

Screw 49 Nm B
Tighten the rear bushing onto the left hand
cylinder head (17).
Tightening torque necessary to restore
alignment.

Bushing 35 Nm B

Screw 49 Nm B

Apply Protective grease for electrical contacts
to the cable lug terminal (7) and the relative
fastener pin.
Connect the engine services cable (7), tightening
the nut (6).

Nut 14 Nm B
Fit the support bracket (2) in the relative seat on
the engine and tighten the indicated screw.
The top of the mounting bracket (2) locates
onto one of the front engine cover fastener
screws.
Attach the cable (4) to the support bracket (2).
Attach the secondary air pipe (3) to the support

bracket (2).
Attach the cables (1) to the support bracket (2).

F2.05 Starter motor
Removing the starter motor
The starter motor is located on the left-hand side of the engine.

Remove the left hand catalytic converter.
Remove the heat shield (1), by undoing the

screws indicated.
Lift the rubber cap (2).

Undo the nut (3) fastening the engine services
cable (4) and detach the connector (5).

(A) to the transmission housing.
Undo the screw (7) and separate the two clamps.

mounting bracket (9) to the engine.
Undo the nuts (10) fastening the starter motor

(A) to the relative mounting bracket (9).
Remove the two components from under the
vehicle.
Refitting the starter motor

Fastening starter motor mounting bracket - engine Screw 10 Nm B
Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening starter motor mounting bracket Nut 10 Nm A
Nut 10 Nm A
Nut 6.5 Nm A
Make sure the components are clean before fitting.

Fit the starter motor (A) together with its
mounting bracket (9) in the relative seat on
the engine.
Hand tighten the nuts (10) fastening the two
components.
Fasten the starter motor (A) to the transmission

housing, by tightening the screws (6).

Screw 25 Nm A
Fasten the starter motor mounting bracket (9 A)

to the engine, by tightening the screws (8).

Screw 10 Nm B
Definitively tighten the nuts (10) fastening the
mounting bracket (9) to the starter motor (A).

Nut 10 Nm A
Fit the two clamps as originally installed and

fasten by hand tightening the screw (7).
Connect the connector (5), fit the engine services

cable (4) on the starter motor and tighten the
fastener nut (3).

Nut 15 Nm A
Refit the rubber cap (2) covering the ground
connection.
Fit the heat shield (1) and fasten by tightening


Screw 10 Nm B

F2.06 Lamps
Replacing the Xenon low/high beam light

Remove the headlight ( F2.07).
Detach the clips (2) fastening the light bulb.

Remove the light bulb (A) from the headlight.
Replace the light bulb.
Fit the light bulb (A) in the headlight.
Attach the clips (2) fastening the light bulb.
Fit the cover (1).
Refit the headlight ( F2.07).

Replacing the light bulb of the rear light cluster on the luggage compartment lid

Partially detach the luggage compartment lid trim.
Ease the bulb holder (1) out of the light cluster.
Remove the bulb (A) from the bulb holder (1).

Replace the light bulb.
Insert the new bulb (A) into the bulb holder (1).
Ensure that the bulb is correctly fastened in the
bulb holder (1).
Insert the bulb holder (1) into the light cluster.

Replacing the stop bulb on the rear light cluster on the bumper

Rotate the bulb holder (1) counterclockwise and

remove it from its seat.
Replace the light bulb (2) and fit the new one into
the bulb holder (1).
Refit the bulb holder (1), inserting it into its seat
and rotating it in a clockwise direction.

Replacing the turn indicator bulb on the rear light cluster on the bumper.

Rotate the bulb holder (1) counterclockwise and
remove it from its seat.
Replace the light bulb (2) and fit the new one into
the bulb holder (1).
Refit the bulb holder (1), inserting it into its seat
and rotating it in a clockwise direction.

Replacing the reverse bulb on the rear light cluster on the bumper
Remove the rear light cluster from the bumper ( F2.07).
Remove the bulb holder (1) from the rear light

cluster on the bumper.
Replace the bulb and fit the new one into the
bulb holder (1).
Refit the bulb holder (1) by inserting it into its
seat.
Refit the rear light cluster onto the bumper ( F2.07).

Removing the number plate lights
The lights are located on the luggage compartment lid, above the number plate.
Undo the fastener screws.

Ease the light assembly (A) out of the luggage
compartment lid.
Disconnect the two connectors and remove the
light assembly (A).
To replace the bulb (3), if necessary, remove

from the tabs, taking care not to bend them.
Refitting the number plate lights
Connect the two connectors and fit the light

assembly (A) on the luggage compartment lid.
Hand tighten the fastener screws indicated.
Replacing the side repeater turn indicator lamp
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand side repeater turn indicator lamp.
The procedure for replacing the left hand side repeater turn indicator lamp is identical.
Using a suitable tool and taking care not to

damage the bodywork, prise out the side
repeater turn indicator (A) from the front
fender.
Remove the outer lens (B) from the side repeater

turn indicator (A).
Remove the lamp (C) from the side repeater turn
indicator (A) and replace, ensuring that the
new lamp is installed and connected correctly.
Refit the outer lens (B) onto the side repeater

turn indicator (A).
Refit the complete side repeater turn indicator

(A) onto the vehicle, press fitting by hand into
the relative hole in the front fender until flush.
Replacing the side marker bulbs
The following procedure is for replacing the front side marker bulbs.
Except where specified otherwise, the procedure for replacing the rear side marker bulbs is the same.
For replacing the front side marker bulbs only. Remove the front wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Remove the front element of the front wheelhouse only.
For replacing the rear side marker bulbs only. Remove the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Remove the rear element of the rear wheelhouse only.
Turn the bulb holder (1) counterclockwise by 90°.

Remove the bulb holder (1) from its seat.
Remove the bulb (A) from the bulb holder (1)

and replace.
Insert the new bulb (A) into the bulb holder (1).
Fit the bulb holder (1) in its respective seat.

Turn the bulb holder (1) clockwise by 90°.

F2.07 Lights
Diagnosing condensation in headlamps

Whenever condensation is found in a headlamp, please perform the checks and tests indicated above before
starting any work.
Removing the headlight
The following procedure is for removing the left hand headlight.
The procedure for removing the right hand headlight is identical.

Undo the upper fastener screw (1).
Undo the front fastener screws (2).

To illustrate the procedure more clearly, the
photo was taken with the front bumper
removed.
Undo the front fastener screw (2).
Undo the front fastener screw (2).
Protect all the paintwork on the bumper and bodyshell to prevent scratching during the removal of the light.

Remove the headlight (A) easing out toward the
front of the vehicle.
Disconnect the connector (4) and remove the
headlight.
Refitting the headlight

Fastening headlight - chassis Screw 7.5 Nm B
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand headlight.
The procedure for refitting the right hand headlight is identical.

Fit the headlight (A).
Refit the clamp (3).
Tighten the front fastener screws (2).

To illustrate the procedure more clearly, the
photo was taken with the front bumper
removed.

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the front fastener screw (2).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the front fastener screw (2).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the upper fastener screw (1).

Screw 7.5 Nm B

Adjusting headlight alignment
Check the headlight alignment as follows:

Park the vehicle, unloaded and with the tyres inflated at prescribed pressure, on a flat surface in front of a
shaded white screen.
Draw 2 crosses on the screen corresponding to
the centres of the low beam headlights.
Move the vehicle 10 metres backwards and
switch on the low beam headlights. The
reference points P1 of the light beam must be
below the crosses at 1/10 of the distance
between the ground and the crosses
themselves.
The values given here are with reference to
applicable legislation in Italy. For other
countries, comply with the local legislation.
Adjust the light beam of the front headlights with

the relative adjustment screws in the upper
inner part of the headlight:
A - Vertical headlight beam adjustment screw.
B - Horizontal headlight beam adjustment screw.
Removing the rear light cluster from the luggage compartment lid
The following procedure is for removing the left hand rear light cluster.
The procedure for removing the rear right hand light cluster is identical.

Partially remove the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid.
Undo the three fastener nuts and remove the
rear light cluster from the outside of the
Refitting the rear light cluster onto the luggage compartment lid

Fastening rear light - luggage compartment lid Nut 4 Nm C
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand rear light cluster.
The procedure for refitting the rear right hand light cluster is identical.
From the outside, fit the rear light cluster onto the
luggage compartment lid and tighten the
three fastener nuts.

Nut 4 Nm C

Refit the luggage compartment lid trim.
Removing the rear light cluster from the bumper
The following procedure is for removing the rear right hand light cluster from the bumper.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear light cluster from the bumper is identical.
Detach the connector (2) and undo the three

screws indicated.
Ease the rear light cluster away from the bumper
(3) towards the rear of the vehicle.
Refitting the rear light cluster onto the bumper

Fastening rear light cluster - bumper Nut 8 Nm B
Check the state of the seal (4); replace with a

new one if necessary.
Fit the rear light cluster onto the bumper (3) and
fasten by tightening the three screws
indicated.

Nut 8 Nm B

Replacing the third stop light

Fastening third stop light Nut 4 Nm C

Remove the luggage compartment trim panel.
Undo the four fastener nuts indicated and

remove the springs indicated.
Detach the fastener clips (2).
Remove the third stop light by pressing on it from
the inside towards the outside of the luggage
compartment lid.
Replace the third stop light.
From the outside, fit the new third stop light (A)
into its seat on the luggage compartment lid.
If necessary, to facilitate fitting, lubricate the
gasket of the new third stop light lightly.
Make sure that the fastener clips (2) are correctly

fastened.
Fit the four springs indicated and tighten the four
fastener nuts indicated.
Carefully tighten the fastener nuts to avoid
damaging the third stop light.

Nut 4 Nm C
From the outside, check that the third stop light

(A) is flush with the luggage compartment lid.
If it is not, adjust using the four fastener nuts until
it is flush with the lid.

Removing the side repeater turn indicator
The following procedure is for removing the right hand side repeater turn indicator.
The procedure for removing the left hand side repeater turn indicator is identical.
Remove the rear element.
Using a suitable tool and taking care not to

damage the bodywork, prise out the side
repeater turn indicator (A) from the front
fender.
Disconnect the connector (B).

Remove the complete side repeater turn
indicator from the vehicle, easing out of the
relative hole in the front fender.
Refitting the side repeater turn indicator
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand side repeater turn indicator.
The procedure for refitting the left hand side repeater turn indicator is identical.
Refit the complete side repeater turn indicator
(A) onto the vehicle, press fitting by hand into
the relative hole in the front fender until flush.
Connect the connector (B).

Replacing the front side markers
Located at the sides of the front bumper.
The following procedure is for replacing the front left hand side marker.
The procedure for replacing the front right hand side marker is the same.
Note that the following images show the operations involved performed on a workbench to illustrate the
procedure more clearly.

Remove the front element of the front wheelhouse only.
Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the front
side marker (A).
Press the front side marker (A) outward from the
bumper to remove from its seat and replace.
Fit the new front side marker (A) in its respective
seat, pushing into the bumper.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the front
side marker (A).

Refit the front element of the front wheelhouse.
Replacing the rear side markers
Located at the sides of the rear bumper.
The following procedure is for replacing the rear right hand side marker.
The procedure for replacing the rear left hand side marker is the same.
Note that the following images show the operations involved performed on a workbench to illustrate the

Remove the rear element of the rear wheelhouse only.

Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the rear
side marker (A).
Press the rear side marker (A) outward from the
bumper to remove from its seat and replace.
Fit the new rear side marker (A) in its respective
seat, pushing into the bumper.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the rear
side marker (A).

Refit the rear element of the rear wheelhouse.

F2.08 Fuses and relays
Fuse box locations
A - Engine compartment fuses

B - Fuses and relays on dashboard (Body computer)
C - Fuses and passenger side passenger compartment relays
D - Fuses and relays on centre console
Replacing fuses in engine compartment


Remove the clamps (1) and remove the left hand
air flow meter (2) complete with bellows, and
move out of the way so that it does not hinder
the following operations.
The air flow meter connector DOES NOT need
to be disconnected from the rest of the
system
Release the two clips indicated and remove the

cover (3).
Replace the fuses - relays using the following

layout as reference.
Engine compartment fuses

Ref Amp. Use Specifications
CAL2 CAL2 Power supply (starter motor and alternator)
CAL5 CAL5 Power supply (starter motor and alternator) FROM Assembly No. 97227
F-70 150 Mega"ANL" Power supply fuse for engine fuse and
relay ECU (SCM)
F-71 40 MEGA Power supply fuse for hard top pump (NCP)
F-72 40 MEGA Power supply fuse for parking brake node
(NPB)
F-73 70 MEGA Power supply fuse for dashboard ECU
(CPL-1)
F-P035 10 Mini-fuse for battery state of charge sensor For vehicles with Stop&Start
system
Replacing passenger side fuses and relays


Passenger side fuses and relays

F-01 60 MAXI +30 fuse for electric engine cooling fan
relay (T16) - first speed
F-02 30 MAXI +30 fuse, ABS (valves)
F-03 30 MAXI +30 fuse, ignition switch
F-04 50 MAXI +30 fuse, ABS (pump)
F-05 40 MAXI +30 fuse, A.C. node (NCL)
F-06 50 MAXI +30 fuse for electric engine cooling fan
relay (T15) - second speed
F-07 20 MAXI +30 fuse, horn relay (T07)
F-08 7.5 Middle A.C. compressor fuse (from T08)
F-09 7.5 Mini +30 fuse, third stop light relay, LH
supplementary rear light relay coil (T37)
F-10 15 Mini +30 fuse, luggage compartment lock
actuator relay (T06)
F-11 25 Mini LH cylinder bank oxygen sensor fuse (from
T09)
F-14 15 Mini +30 fuse, high beam relays
F-15 7.5 Mini +30 fuse, alternator sensing
F-16 25 Mini RH cylinder bank engine control node
(NCM) power supply fuse (from T10)
F-17 25 Mini LH cylinder bank engine control node
(NCM) power supply fuse (from T09)
F-18 10 Mini +30 fuse, LH cylinder bank injection system
power supply, main LH injection relay
coil (T09)
F-19 10 Mini +30 fuse, RH cylinder bank injection system
power supply
F-20 30 Mini +30 fuse, RH cylinder bank injection system
main relay (T10) (main 2)
F-21 15 Mini +30 fuse, fuel pump 2 relay (T05)
F-22 15 Mini LH cylinder bank fuse [ignition coils + other
LH cylinder bank services] (from T09)
F-23 10 Mini +30 fuse, ABS (electronics)
F-24 15 Mini RH cylinder bank fuse [ignition coils + other
RH cylinder bank services + relay coils
T15, T16, T14, T05, T30 and T08 +
secondary air solenoid valve] (from T10)
F-30 30 Mini +30 fuse, starter relay
F-81 40 MAXI +30 fuse, supplementary ECU (CS-SCM)
power supply (F91, F92, F93)
F-82 70 MAXI +30 fuse, dashboard ECU (CPL-2) and
luggage compartment ECU (CVB)
power supply
F-83 50 MAXI +30 fuse, air pump relay
F-84 15 Mini +30 fuse, fuel pump 1 relay (T14)
F-85 25 Middle Headlight washer fuse (from T31)
F-87 25 Middle RH cylinder bank oxygen sensor fuse (from
T10)
F-88 10A Mini +15 fuse for LH cylinder bank injection
system
F-89 10A Mini +15 fuse for RH cylinder bank injection
system
F-90 7.5 Mini (not used)
F-91 7.5 Mini +30 fuse for tyre pressure node (NTP), LH
headlight LED module relay (T38), fuel
filler flap and luggage compartment lid
release button lighting (from F-81)
F-92 10 Mini +30 fuse for stop light control relay (T19),
RH headlight LED module relay (T39)
(from F-81)
F-93 30 Mini +30 fuse for suspension control node
(NCS) - (from F-81)
F-94 15 Mini +30 fuse for radio, CANbox, clock spring, For vehicles with Stop&Start
Japan navigation system, cabin light unit system
F-95 10 Mini +30 fuse for instrument panel node (NQS) For vehicles with Stop&Start
system
F-96 7.5 Mini +30 fuse for button backlights and cabin
light unit
F-97 30 Mini +30 fuse, ABS (valves) For vehicles with Stop&Start
system
F-98 10 Mini +30 fuse, ABS (electronics) For vehicles with Stop&Start
system
F-99 - (not used)
T02 30 Micro High beam relay
T03 30 Micro Fuel pump relay - 1st speed
T05 30 Micro Fuel pump 2 relay
T06 30 Micro Luggage compartment lock actuator relay
T07 50 MAXI Horn relay
T08 30 Micro A.C. compressor relay
T09 30 Micro Main LH cylinder bank injection system
relay (main 1)
T10 30 Micro Main RH cylinder bank injection system
relay (main 2)
T14 30 Micro Fuel pump 1 relay
T15 50 Maxi Engine cooling electric fan relay - second
speed
T16 50 Maxi Engine cooling electric fan relay - first speed
T17 10/20 Micro Dev. INT/A relay (services excluded upon engine
start)
T19 30 Micro Stop light relay
T20 30 Micro Starter relay (consent from electronically
controlled gearbox node)
T26 30 Micro Windscreen wiper relay - 1st speed
T27 30 Micro Windscreen wiper relay - 2nd speed
T28 30 Micro Windscreen washer pump relay
T29 30 Micro Third stop light relay
T30 50 MAXI Air pump relay
T31 30 Micro Headlight washer pump relay
T37 30 Micro Relay for LH supplementary rear lights
T38 30 Micro Power relay for LH headlight LED module
T39 30 Micro Power relay for RH headlight LED module
T40 30 Micro Relay for button backlights and cabin light For vehicles with Stop&Start
unit system
Replacing fuses and relays on dashboard (Body computer)
Undo the two screws indicated and prise off the

dashboard cover panel (Body computer) (A).
Fuses and relays on dashboard (Body computer)
Ref Amp. Use

F-12 15 Mini RH low beam fuse (from T01)
F-13 15 Mini LH low beam fuse (from T01)
F-31 7.5 Mini INT/A fuse, A.C. unit (air conditioning and
heating system), Body computer node
(NBC)
F-32 10 Mini +30 fuse for puddle lights and footwell
lights, luggage compartment light, relay
coil (T21) for side markers, relay coil
(T24) for supplementary RH rear lights
F-33 30 Mini (not used)
Ref Amp. Use
F-35 7.5 Mini +15 fuse, clutch pedal control, relay coils
T02/T31, cruise control, power steering,
headlights
F-36 10 Mini +30 fuse, satellite alarm system node
(ATS), parking sensor node (NSP), relay
coil (T23) for fuel filler flap
F-37 10 Mini +15 fuse, stop lights (Normally Open),
instrument panel node (NQS)
F-38 15 Mini +30 fuse, luggage compartment lock
actuator
F-39 15 Mini +30 fuse, radio, CAN BOX interface, EOBD
diagnostic socket
F-40 30 Mini Heated rear screen fuse (from T11)
F-42 7.5 Mini +15 fuse for alternator
F-43 30 Mini Windscreen washer-wiper relay power
supply fuse (from T12)
F-44 20 Mini Cigarette lighter and passenger seat heater
fuse
F-46 20 Mini +30 fuse, hard top node power supply
(NCP)
F-47 30 Mini +30 fuse, driver side door node power
supply (NPG)
F-48 30 Mini +30 fuse, passenger side door node power
supply (NPP)
F-49 7.5 Mini +15 fuse, switch and control backlighting in
passenger compartment
F-50 7.5 Mini +15 fuse, Airbag node (NAB)
F-51 7.5 Mini +15 fuse, electronically controlled gearbox
node (NCR), start button
F-52 15 Mini Power socket and driver seat heater fuse
F-53 10 Mini +30 fuse for instrument panel node (NQS)
power supply
T01 20 Micro Low beam relay
T11 30 Micro Heated rear screen relay
T12 30 Micro Services 1 relay (dependent on INT/A
ignition switch)
T13 [joint] Bridge [30 - 87] (services 2 power supply)
Replacing fuses and relays on centre console

Prise off the cover panel (A) and lift to allow
access to the fuse and relay panel
underneath.

Fuses and relays on centre console

Ref Amp. Use
F-54 20 Mini +30 fuse, HiFi amplifier
F-55 - Mini (not used)
F-56 30 Mini +30 fuse, driver position set-up node (NAG)
F-57 7.5 Mini Side marker light fuse 1 (front LH - rear RH)
(from T21)
F-59 7.5 Mini Reverse light fuse (from T22)
F-60 30 Mini +30 fuse, passenger position set-up node
(NAP)
F-61 7.5 Mini +30 fuse, driver position set-up node (NAG)
(electronic)
F-62 7.5 Mini +30 fuse, passenger position set-up node
(NAP) (electronic), Japan navigator
F-63 15 Mini +30 fuse, main relay for electronically
controlled gearbox node (T25)
F-64 7.5 Mini Fuse for fuel filler flap actuator
F-65 20 Mini +30 fuse, door lock actuator
F-66 7.5 Mini +30 fuse, electronically controlled gearbox
node (NCR)
F-67 7.5 Mini Side marker light fuse 2 (front RH - rear LH)
(from T21)
F-78 15 Mini +30 fuse, battery charger
F-80 30 Mini +30 fuse, BassBox amplifier (OPT)
T21 50 MAXI Side marker light relay
T22 30 Micro Reverse light relay
Ref Amp. Use
T23 30 Micro Fuel filler flap relay
T24 30 Micro Relay for RH supplementary rear lights
T25 30 Micro Main relay for electronically controlled
gearbox node (NCR)
F2.09 Horn
Replacing the horn

Fastening horn - chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Located behind the front bumper, under the right headlight.


Undo the screw (2) and remove the horn (A).
Fit the new horn (A) in its seat and tighten the
screw (2).

Screw 24 Nm B

F2.10 Diagnostic socket
Connecting the DEIS diagnostic tester
There is a socket (B) underneath the steering

column for connecting the DEIS diagnostic
tester to the vehicle.
There is another socket (A) on the Body

computer, behind the relative trim panel.
Once connected to either of these specific sockets via the connector harness supplied, the DEIS
diagnostic tester can interface with and diagnose all the systems in the vehicle.
Turn the ignition key to II (Key-ON).

F2.11 ECUs
Diagnosing malfunction of ECUs received as spare parts
Should an ECU received as a spare part not function correctly, please note that certain ECUs (NCM, NCR
and NCS) are shipped unprogrammed by the spare parts division. Before considering an ECU to be
defective, please check that the new ECU is programmed with the same software as the replaced ECU,
and perform the necessary programming and configuration procedures if necessary.
Location of ECUs in vehicle
A - Right hand Motronic ECU (behind the front right hand wheelhouse) (NCM)
B - Left hand Motronic ECU (behind the front left hand wheelhouse) (NCM)
C - ABS/ASR ECU (on left-hand side of engine compartment) (NFR)
D - Body computer node (behind removable panel on driver side of dashboard)
E - Airbag ECU (on centre console, under centre of dashboard) (NAB)

F - Power steering ECU (under driver side floor hatch cover) (CSG)
G - TPMS ECU (under driver side floor hatch cover) (Optional) (NTP)
H - MagneRide shock absorber ECU (Optional) (under passenger side floor hatch cover) (NCS)
I - NAVTRAK ECU (under passenger side mat)
L - Yaw node (under centre console trim panel) (NYL)
M - RHT retractable hard top ECU (at front left of luggage compartment, behind the rollbar) (NCP)
N - Parking sensor ECU (on rear right-hand side of luggage compartment) (NSP)
O - DCT gearbox ECU (under toolkit trim panel) (NCR)
P - EPB ECU (Electric Parking Brake) (under toolkit trim panel) (NPB)
modification)
O - DCT gearbox ECU (under toolkit trim panel) (NCR)

P - EPB ECU (Electric Parking Brake) (under toolkit trim panel) (NPB)
Q - Driver side-passenger side door node (behind door panel) (NPG) (NPP)
R - A.C. ECU (integrated in A.C. control panel) (NCL)
S - Driver-passenger seat ECU (under seat) (NAG) (NAP)

T - Parking camera ECU (on left-hand side in luggage compartment, behind rollbar) (optional)
U - Fuel pump control ECU (rear right hand wheel bay) (for vehicles with HELE)
modification)
U - Fuel pump control ECU (rear right hand wheel bay) (for vehicles with HELE)
Replacing the left hand Motronic ECU

Should an ECU received as a spare part not function correctly, please note that certain ECUs (NCM,
NCR and NCS) are shipped unprogrammed by the spare parts division. Before considering an
ECU to be defective, please check that the new ECU is programmed with the same software as the
replaced ECU, and perform the necessary programming and configuration procedures if necessary.
Please note that the NCM diagnostic cycles available on the DEIS tester include a “VARIANT
CODING” cycle for resetting market settings.

Remove the front left hand wheelhouse.

Undo the screw (3).
Remove the retainer bracket (4).
Remove the left hand Motronic ECU (A) from the
respective mounting bracket and replace.
Fit the new left hand Motronic ECU (A) into the
respective mounting bracket.
Fit the retainer bracket (4).

Screw 9 Nm B


Perform the engine ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Replacing the right hand Motronic ECU

Please note that the NCM diagnostic cycles available on the DEIS tester include a “VARIANT
CODING” cycle for resetting market settings.

Remove the front right hand wheelhouse.

Undo the screw (3).
Remove the retainer bracket (4).
Remove the right hand Motronic ECU (A) from
the respective mounting bracket and replace.
Fit the new right hand Motronic ECU (A) into the
Fit the retainer bracket (4).

Screw 9 Nm B


Replacing the tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ECU

Fastening tyre pressure monitoring system Nut 9 Nm B
(TPMS) ECU
Located under the driver side footrest mat.

Remove the driver side floor hatch cover (A),

turning the fasteners indicated, and lift out
using the loop (1).
Detach the connector (2) and undo the two

screws indicated.
Remove the tyre pressure monitoring system
ECU (B) from its seat and replace.
Fit the tyre pressure monitoring system ECU (B)
in its seat and fasten by tightening the two
screws indicated.

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit and fasten the driver side floor hatch cover

(A) turning the fasteners indicated.

Perform the TPMS ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Removing the DCT gearbox ECU
Located in the luggage compartment, under the tool kit.

Remove the tool kit.

Detach and remove the bracket (A).
Remove the DCT gearbox ECU (B).


Remove the bracket (A).
Remove the DCT gearbox ECU (B).
Refitting the DCT gearbox ECU

Fastening DCT gearbox ECU Screw 9 Nm C
Fit the DCT gearbox ECU (B) in the relative seat.
Fit the bracket (A) in its mountings and tighten
the screw (1).

Screw 9 Nm C
Connect the connectors (2) and (3) in their seats

and attach the safety clips indicated.

Refit the toolkit and the removable trim panel.

Perform a self-acquisition cycle
Removing the RHT ECU

Close the RHT in Coupé configuration.
Remove the front left hand trim panel only.
Undo the two screws and remove the ECU (A)

from the relative mounting bracket.
Disconnect the connectors (1) and remove the
ECU (A) from the vehicle.
Refitting the RHT ECU

Roof ECU - mounting bracket M10x20 screws 5 Nm B
Connect the connectors (1) to the ECU (A).

Fit the ECU (A) on the relative mounting bracket
and fasten by tightening the two screws
indicated.

M10x20 screws 5 Nm B

Perform a self-acquisition cycle for the side windows, raising and then lowering the windows completely.
Reboot the vehicle ECUs, closing the doors and lids, then raise all the side windows and lock and unlock
the doors using the relative buttons on the remote control.
Refit the front left hand trim panel.
Replacing the parking sensor ECU

Remove the rear right hand trim panel only.
Disconnect the three connectors (1) from the

ECU.
Undo the two indicated nuts fastening the
parking sensor ECU (A) to the respective
mounting bracket.
Remove the parking sensor ECU (A) from the
respective mounting bracket and replace.
Fit the new parking sensor ECU (A) in the
Tighten the two indicated nuts fastening the
parking sensor ECU (A) to the respective
mounting bracket.
Connect the three connectors (1) to the ECU.

Refit the rear right hand trim panel.
Replacing the Magneride suspension control ECU (optional)

Fastening Magneride ECU Nut 4 Nm C

Remove the passenger side mat only.
Remove the passenger side floor hatch cover

(A), turning the fasteners indicated, and lift
out using the loop (1).
Disconnect the ECU connector (1).

Undo the four nuts indicated and remove the
Magneride ECU (A) from its seat.
After fitting the new ECU in the relative seat,
tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the
Magneride ECU (A).

Nut 4 Nm C
Connect the ECU connector (1).

Fit the passenger side floor hatch cover (A),
using the loop (1) and turning the fasteners
indicated.

Replacing the power steering system ECU

Fastening power steering system ECU - mounting Screw 5 Nm B
bracket
Located under the driver side footrest mat.

Remove the driver side floor hatch cover (A),

turning the fasteners indicated, and lift out
using the loop (1).
screws indicated.
Remove the power steering system ECU (B)
Fit the power steering system ECU (B) in the
relative seat and fasten by tightening the two
screws indicated.

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit and fasten the driver side floor hatch cover

(A) turning the fasteners indicated.

Removing the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit
The unit is located in the engine compartment, to the left of the battery, and consists of a hydraulic
component and an ECU.


Remove the cover (8) from the ABS/ASR
indicated.
Open all the pipe clamps indicated and release

the pipes from the relative clips.
Open the pipe clamp indicated and release the

pipes from the relative clips.
vehicle.
Undo the unions (1) leading from the master

brake cylinder and the calliper delivery unions
(2), and plug immediately to prevent brake
fluid spillage.
Lift the brake fluid pipes as much as possible,
taking care not to bend or twist the pipes.
Clean any spilt fluid immediately.

Disconnect the connector (3), lifting the safety
clip (4).
Undo screw (5), from above, and screws (6),

from below, fastening the electrohydraulic
ABS/ASR unit (A) to the relative mounting
bracket.
photo shown here was taken from the front
left hand wheel bay, with the wheelhouse
cover removed.
Move the electrohydraulic unit laterally towards

the compartment revealed by the removal of
the battery, and remove from the engine
compartment.
Refitting the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit

Check the state of the three mounting bushings
(7) for the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit and
Fit the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit (A) in the

relative seat on the mounting bracket, via the
compartment revealed by the removal of the
battery.
Tighten screws (6) from underneath, and screw
(5) from above.

Screw 18 Nm B
Connect the connector (3) on the ECU, pushing

down the safety clip (4).
vehicle.
Tighten the calliper delivery unions (2) and the

unions (1) leading from the master brake
cylinder.

M10 union 16 Nm B
M12 Union 16 Nm B
originally installed and close the pipe clamp
indicated.

originally installed and close the pipe clamps
indicated.
Fit and fasten the cover (8) on the ABS/ASR

indicated.

Always perform a complete operating cycle after replacing the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit.
Removing the A.C. control panel

The panel is located at the front of the centre console trim.
The NCL ECU for the air conditioning and heating system is integrated in the AC control panel.

leather trim
Prise the AC control panel (A) out of its seat with

a suitable tool.
Disconnect the two connectors (1) from the AC

control panel (A).
Remove the AC control panel (A).
Refitting the A.C. control panel
Connect the two connectors (1) to the A.C.

control panel (A).
leather trim
Arrange the electrical wiring correctly, fit the A.C.

control panel (A) in its seat and press
manually to fix into place.

Perform the NCL Air Conditioning ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Perform when replacing the component.
Replacing the yaw node

Fastening yaw sensor - chassis Screw 9 Nm B
Located under the centre console trim panel.

Undo the two screws indicated fastening the yaw

node (A) to the chassis.
Remove the yaw node (A) from its seat and
replace.
Fit the new yaw node (A) in its seat.
yaw node (A) to the chassis.

Screw 9 Nm B

Removing the Body Computer node

Located on the driver side, behind the lower left hand trim panel of the dashboard.

At the front of the Body Computer node (A),

disconnect the connectors (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
and (6).
Body Computer node (A) to the dashboard
subframe.
Move the Body Computer node to one side and

turn around to access the back.
Disconnect the connectors (7) and (8) and
remove the Body Computer node (A) from its
seat.
Refitting the Body computer node

Fastening body computer node - chassis Screw 8 Nm C
At the back of the Body computer node (A),
connect the connectors (7) and (8).
Fit the Body computer node (A) in the relative

seat and tighten the three screws indicated
fastening the node to the dashboard
subframe.

Screw 8 Nm C
At the front of the Body computer node (A),

connect the connectors (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
and (6).

Perform proxi sync with the DEIS tester.
Replacing the EPB ECU

Fastening EPB ECU Nut 9 Nm B
Ring nut 7 Nm B
Contoured cable guide U-bolt Nut 9 Nm B
EPB Bowden cable - bodyshell Screw 9 Nm B
EPB Bowden cable - heat shield on gearbox Screw 6 Nm B
Heat shield - EPB Bowden cable Screw 6 Nm B
modification)
Remove the DCT gearbox ECU ( F2.11).

DCT gearbox ECU mounting bracket (11).
Remove the DCT gearbox ECU mounting
bracket (11) from the respective seat.
Use a suitable screwdriver to prise the clip (1) off

the EPB linkage bracket (A).
(A).
Move the EPB equaliser (B) to the left and

remove from the relevant mounting bracket
(C).
Detach the end (3) of the left hand EPB Bowden
cable from the EPB equaliser (B).
Note that the equaliser mounting bracket must
NOT be removed from the chassis.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the heat

shield (D) protecting the EPB Bowden cable
(E).
Remove the heat shield (D) protecting the EPB
Bowden cable (E) from its seat.
EPB Bowden cable (E) to the heat shields on
the gearbox.
Remove the EPB Bowden cable (E) from the
heat shields on the gearbox.
Open the clamp with sheath (7) retaining the

EPB Bowden cable (E), undoing the relevant
Prise the rubber sheath (4) out of its seat.
Recover the EPB Bowden cable (E), complete
with EPB equaliser, and place in the luggage
compartment.

guide U-bolt (5) for the EPB Bowden cable
(E).
Remove the guide U-bolt (5) for the EPB
Bowden cable (E).
Move aside the soundproofing covering

surrounding the EPB ECU (F).
Disconnect the connector (6) from the EPB ECU.
Undo the four nuts indicated fastening the EPB
ECU (F) to the bodyshell.
Remove the EPB ECU (F), complete with
Bowden cable and equaliser, and replace.
Check the state of the mounting bushings and
the soundproofing covering; replace if
necessary.
Fit the new EPB ECU (F), complete with Bowden
cable and equaliser, in the respective seat on
the relevant mounting bushings.
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the EPB
ECU (F) to the bodyshell.

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the connector (6) to the EPB ECU.

Refit the soundproofing covering as originally
installed around the EPB ECU (6).
Fit the EPB Bowden cable (E) in the respective

guide U-bolt (5).
Fit the guide U-bolt (5) for the EPB Bowden
cable (E) in the respective seat.
guide U-bolt (5) to the bodyshell.

Nut 9 Nm B
Identify the end of the EPB Bowden cable (E)

and feed through the respective slot inside
the luggage compartment.
Manually press the rubber sheath (4) already on
the EPB Bowden cable (E) into its seat.
Close the clamp with sheath (7) retaining the
EPB Bowden cable (E), tightening the
relevant fastener nut indicated.

Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the EPB Bowden cable (E) on the relevant

heat shield on the gearbox.
EPB Bowden cable (E) to the heat shield on
the gearbox.

Screw 6 Nm B
Fit the heat shield (D) protecting the EPB

Bowden cable (E) in its seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the heat
shield (D) protecting the EPB Bowden cable
(E).

Screw 6 Nm B

cable onto the EPB equaliser (B).
Note that the equaliser mounting bracket must
NOT be removed from the chassis.
Fit the EPB equaliser (B) in the respective seat
inside the relevant mounting bracket (C), in
the position shown in the photo.
Attach the end (2) of the right hand EPB Bowden

cable to the EPB linkage bracket (A).
Refit the clip (1) in the relevant seat on the EPB
linkage bracket (A).
Fit the DCT gearbox ECU mounting bracket (11)

in its seat.
DCT gearbox ECU mounting bracket (11).

Screw 9 Nm B
Refit the DCT gearbox ECU ( F2.11).
modification)
Remove the luggage compartment floor trim.
Move the insulation (1) out of the way.

Lift the ECU (A).
Undo the ring nut (3).
Detach the Bowden cable (4) from the ECU (A).
Remove the ECU (A) and replace.
Attach the Bowden cable (4) to the new ECU (A).
Tighten the ring (3).

Ring nut 7 Nm B
Fit the new ECU (A).


Nut 9 Nm B

Fit the insulation (1) correctly.

Refit the luggage compartment floor trim.

error).
Replacing the ADR anti-theft system ECU
Located under the passenger side mat.

Remove the passenger side mat.
Disconnect the four connectors (1) from the ADR
antitheft system ECU (A).
Remove the two indicated clamps from the ADR
antitheft system ECU (A) mounting bracket
(B).
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the access
cover (3) and open.
Remove the ADR antitheft system ECU (A) from
the respective mounting bracket and replace.
Fit the new ADR antitheft system ECU (A) in the

relative mounting bracket.
Close the access cover (3) and tighten the two
relative fastener screws (2).
Refit the two indicated clamps on the ADR
antitheft system ECU (A) mounting bracket
(B).
Connect the three connectors (1) to the ADR
antitheft system ECU (A).

Replacing the door node (NPG / NPP)
There are two nodes, a driver side node (NPG) and a passenger side node (NPP), fixed to the inner sides of
the respective door panels.
The following procedure is for replacing the driver side door node (NPG).
The procedure for replacing the passenger side door node (NPP) is the same.

Remove the waterproof liner sheet (A).
Undo the five screws (1) fastening the driver side
door node (NPG) (C) mounting bracket (B) to
the door panel.
Remove the driver side door node (NPG) (C)
mounting bracket (B) from the door panel.
Remove the two rivets (2) fastening the driver
side door node (NPG) (C) to the respective
mounting bracket (B).
Remove the driver side door node (NPG) (C)
from the respective mounting bracket (B) and
replace.
Fit the new driver side door node (NPG) (C) on
the respective mounting bracket (B).
Fasten the new driver side door node (NPG) (C)
to the respective mounting bracket (B),
applying two new rivets (2).
Fit the driver side door node (NPG) (C) mounting
bracket (B) in the respective seat on the door
panel.
Tighten the five screws (1) fastening the driver
side door node (NPG) (C) mounting bracket
(B) to the door panel.
Fit the waterproof liner sheet (A) as originally
installed.
Replacing the airbag ECU

Fastening airbag ECU Nut 8 Nm B
Fastening dashboard/centre console connector Screw 8.5 Nm B
bracket
Located at the front of the centre console, behind the console trim panel.

Undo the four screws (1) fastening the bracket
(A).
Remove the bracket (A) from the relative seat.
Undo the three nuts (2) fastening the airbag ECU
(B).
One of the fastener nuts is not visible in this
image.
Remove the airbag ECU (B) from its seat and

disconnect the two connectors (3).
Replace the airbag ECU (B) and connect the two
connectors (3) to the new airbag ECU (B).
Fit the new airbag ECU (B) in the relative seat.
Tighten the three nuts fastening the new airbag
ECU (B).
One of the fastener nuts is not visible in this
image.

Nut 8 Nm B
Fit the bracket (A) in the relative seat.

Tighten the four screws fastening the bracket (A).

Screw 8.5 Nm B

Carry out the system operating procedure with the tester.
Replacing the parking camera ECU (optional)

Fastening the parking camera ECU Nut 5 Nm B
The parking camera ECU is located in the luggage compartment, behind the rollbar.

Remove the front left hand trim panel.
Remove the RHT ECU ( F2.11).

Do not disconnect the ECU from the electrical system.
Cut the indicated cable tie.
Note that the following photo shows the vehicle
with the RHT roof removed, to illustrate the

Remove the retainer cage (3) and the parking
camera ECU (A), then replace the ECU.
Fit the parking camera ECU (A), complete with
retainer cage (3), in the relative seat.

Nut 5 Nm B

Fit a new cable tine in the position indicated.
Note that the following photo shows the vehicle
with the RHT roof removed, to illustrate the
Refit the RHT ECU ( F2.11).

Replacing the fuel pump control ECU (for vehicles with HELE)
Fastening fuel pump control ECU Screw 6 Nm B

Remove the front element of the rear right hand wheelhouse.

Lift out the bracket (A) complete with ECU (B) in
order to disconnect the connectors (2) and (3).
Remove the ECU (B) from the bracket (A),
undoing the respective screws, and replace.
Fit the new ECU (B) on the bracket (A) and
fasten by tightening the respective screws.
Connect the connectors (2) and (3), and fit the
bracket (A) complete with ECU (B).


Remove the ECU (A) and replace.
Fit the new ECU (A).

Screw 6 Nm B

Refit the front element of the rear right hand wheelhouse.

F2.12 Rain/twilight sensor
Rain sensor
The rain sensor (forming a single unit with the twilight sensor) works in the infrared spectrum, with an
operating principle based on the refraction of light. The sensor is used to automatically adjust the
frequency of the windscreen wipers in proportion to the intensity of the rain.
The rain sensor is enabled by setting the windscreen wipers to automatic with the stalk on the steering
column (stalk pushed down to first stop position). In automatic mode, the sensitivity of the rain sensor may
be set to four different levels by turning the wheel at the end of the stalk.
Twilight sensor
The twilight sensor (forming a single unit with the rain sensor) controls automatic activation of the low-beam
headlights and running lights in relation to the sensitivity setting selected by the user (with the light control
set to AUTO). With the light control set to AUTO, the running lights and low beam headlights are switched
off by the twilight sensor as follows:
low beam off: upon reception of the relative command from the twilight sensor;
running lights off: 10 seconds after low beam lights are switched off.
The sensitivity of the sensor is settable from the instrument panel.
Checking rain sensor function
This procedure must be performed on the vehicle with battery installed.
Set the windscreen wiper control stalk to 'automatic' (the sensibility setting wheel may be in any position).
Check that the windscreen wiper function is activated automatically by the rain sensor (with a dry screen,
perform a washer cycle to test wiper function).
Wet the windscreen slightly in the sensor area (with a sprayer bottle or sponge) and check that the wipers
activate when the screen is wet and switch off when the sensor area of the windscreen is dry.
Rain sensor failure is indicated by the relative warning light on the instrument panel.
Checking twilight sensor function
This procedure must be performed on the vehicle with battery installed.
Place the vehicle in a brightly lit area (e.g. with a halogen lamp pointed directly at the windscreen, in the
sensor area).
Set the selector to 'automatic' and check that the lights remain off.
Shade the sensor with a black screen and check that the lights switch on without a noticeable delay.
Remove the black screen from the sensor and check that the lights turn off after a few seconds.
Twilight sensor failure is indicated the relative warning light on the instrument panel.
Removing the rain/twilight sensor
Remove the interior rear view mirror ( E5.11).
Lift the two side tabs (1) at the same time, then
remove the rain sensor (A) from its base (2)
on the windscreen.
Place the sensor (A) into a closed box or use the
special cover for the sensing area included in
the sensor package.
Refitting the rain/twilight sensor
Check that the sensor mating area on the

windscreen is perfectly clean.
Fit the rain/twilight sensor (A) onto the base (2)
and fasten it by attaching the two side tabs
(1) at the same time.
Press onto the sensor with the palm of the hand
to ensure that it adheres fully to the
windscreen.
Refit the interior rear view mirror ( E5.11).

F2.13 Engine services cable
Removing the engine services cable


Remove the heat shield (1).

Remove the heat shield (1).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the bracket

retaining the engine services cable (A).
Prise off the cap (2).

Prise off the cap (2).
Undo the nut (3).

Disconnect the engine services cable (A) from
the starter motor.
Undo the nut (3).

the starter motor.
Open the five indicated clips fastening the engine

services cable (A) to the crankcase.
Undo the nut (4).

the alternator.
Open the indicated clip fastening the engine
services cable (A) to the bracket.

Remove the engine services cable (A) from the
engine compartment cross member.
Release and open the indicated clips.

Release and open the indicated clip.

battery mounting bracket.
Open the indicated clips fastening the engine

services cable (A) to the power steering
system pipe.
Detach and remove the battery connection cover

(5), pressing on the indicated clips.
Undo the nut (6).
Disconnect the engine services cable (A).
Pull out the engine services cable from above the crankcase and remove from the engine compartment.
Refitting the engine services cable

Fastening engine services cable terminal on Nut 11 Nm C
battery
Nut 6.5 Nm A
Place the engine services cable on the crankcase and lay the cable out along its entire cable.
Fasten the engine services cable (A) to the

crankcase by fastening the five clips indicated.
Apply Protective grease for electrical contacts
to the engine services cable lug terminal (A)
and the relative fastener pin.
Connect the engine services cable (A) to the
alternator.

Nut 14 Nm B
Fasten the indicated clip on the engine services

cable (A).
Fit the engine services cable (A) onto the engine

compartment cross member.
Fit the engine services cable (A) underneath the

Fit the engine services cable (A) on the side of

the battery mounting bracket.
Connect the engine services cable (A).


Nut 11 Nm C
Fit and secure the cover (5), pressing on the
indicated clips.

power steering system pipe, fastening the
indicated clip.

crankcase, tighten the indicated screw on the
retainer bracket.
starter motor.

Nut 15 Nm A

starter motor.

Nut 15 Nm A
Fit the cap (2).

Fasten the engine services cable (A) by
tightening the indicated screw on the retainer
bracket.
Fit the cap (2).

Fasten the engine services cable (A) by
tightening the indicated screw on the retainer
bracket.
Fit the heat shield (1).


Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the heat shield (1).


Screw 10 Nm B

F2.14 Electrical system absorption test
Measuring no-load current absorption
The current absorbed by the vehicle system may be measured with a digital multimeter or with an
amperometric clamp meter.
Use only amperometric clamp meters with mA scales.
The unit of measurement used for testing must be Amperes (A).
Ensure that the doors and the luggage compartment lid are correctly closed.

For vehicles WITHOUT Stop&Start system ONLY, remove the right hand lateral cosmetic shield.
PROCEDURE WITH DIGITAL MULTIMETER
If possible, use cables with terminal clamps

for the following procedures.
Connect the wire (A) to the tester socket marked

Ground.
Connect the wire (B) (usually red) to the tester
socket marked with the unit of measurement
A (Amperes).
For vehicles without Stop&Start system
Attach the lead clamp (D) onto the ground stud

on the chassis.
For vehicles without Stop&Start system
Do not start the engine or turn the ignition

key-on, as this may blow the instrument
fuse.
Attach the black lead clamp (C) (common

ground) onto the negative battery pole.
Attach the lead clamp (D) onto the false pole

connected to ground on the chassis.
Do not start the engine or turn the ignition

key-on, as this may blow the instrument
fuse.
Attach the black lead clamp (C) (common

ground) onto the terminal clamp connected to
the negative battery pole.
To prevent the reading from being affected by devices that are still active, wait at least 15 minutes for the
network to enter "Sleep Mode".
Read the absorption values measured.
The values read for zero-load current absorption must be close to 19 - 22 mA and MUST NOT exceed 35
mA.
Remove the clamps.
PROCEDURE WITH AMPEROMETRIC CLAMP METER
Disable the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function ( D3.07).
Close the driver side door ensuring that it closes correctly.
The instrument used must have a current

scale precision in mA.
Place the clamp meter unit around the ground

cable leading from the negative battery pole.
The direction of the current measured is
indicated on the clamp.
As in this case the current originates from the
battery and discharges on the chassis, the
arrow indicates a direction leading away
from the battery toward the grounding point
on the chassis.
To prevent the reading from being affected by

devices that are still active, wait at least 6
minutes for the network to enter "Sleep
Mode".
The values read for zero-load current absorption
must be close to 19 - 22 mA and MUST NOT
exceed 35 mA.
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic
shields ( E3.13).
For vehicles WITHOUT Stop&Start system
ONLY, refit the right hand lateral cosmetic
shield.
Possible causes of excessive absorption
If the value read in the vehicle is higher than in the specifications, the battery will tend to discharge rapidly.
The cause of this is probably one or more devices failing to switch off.
To identify the cause of excessive absorption, disconnect the networked ECUs one by one
while observing the absorption value. This will drop when the active ECU is disconnected.
Another possible cause for excessive current absorption may be a short circuit to ground at some point in
the wiring harness.
F2.15 Stop&Start system (optional)
Stop&Start system function
When enabled, the Stop&Start system automatically stops and restarts the engine in relation to driving
conditions, on board climate comfort and vehicle status.
The logic of the system does not require the driver to make any changes to the way he or she drives the
vehicle.
Each time the ignition switch is turned to II (Key-on), the Stop&Start system will be in the same state it was
when the ignition switch was turned to 0 (Key-off).
Therefore, if the function was active at the last Key-off, it will also be active at the next Key-on.
The driver may activate or deactivate the Stop&Start system at any time by pressing the button (A) on the
roof panel.
If the Stop&Start system is active, the LED on the button (A) is lit; if the system is off, the LED will also be off.
If the system is switched off by pressing the button (A) with ignition on and engine off (or if the engine has
been stopped automatically by the Stop&Start system), the engine will restart automatically.
Pressing the button with the system active will deactivate the system: the message "Stop&Start ON" is
displayed on the TFT display for 5 seconds, together with the specific symbol.
When the system is active, the engine stops automatically if the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal
depressed, and restarts when the brake pedal is released.
The following conditions must be met to enable automatic engine cut-out while the vehicle is running:
Stop&Start system activated from button on roof panel (LED on);
driver seat belt buckled.
The TFT display notifies the driver when the Stop&Start system has stopped the engine by displaying the
message "Stop&Start active", together with the specific symbol.
This message is displayed continuously for as long as the vehicle is in the stop state.
To cancel the message and reduce the symbol to icon form, press the MODE button ("ESCAPE" function).
For reasons of safety, to maintain comfort levels and to ensure that the vehicle and its individual systems
function correctly, automatic engine cut-out is inhibited in the following cases:
accelerator pedal depressed;
when the system recognises a potentially hazardous situation (vehicle on a gradient, vehicle stationary
with wheels steered - e.g. while vehicle is about to turn into a junction or a roundabout);
when the system recognises that the vehicle is in a traffic queue or parking (by monitoring reverse gear
state, time elapsed since last stop and vehicle speed);
with maximum AC system output requested ("low", "max defrost" or "defrost rear screen");
with very low or very high external temperatures;
gearbox in "N";
DCT gearbox Park Lock function released manually;
in the event of a malfunction compromising the functionality of the system itself.
The system also constantly monitors a number of vehicle parameters (battery state of charge, engine coolant
temperature, catalytic converter temperature, clutch oil temperature, brake servo vacuum level, climate
comfort in passenger compartment) and will inhibit automatic engine cut-out if necessary to maintain
safety, vehicle functionality and on-board climate comfort.
With the Stop&Start system active and the vehicle in stop state, performing any of the following actions will
restart the engine:
releasing the brake pedal;
pulling the UP shift paddle;
engaging reverse;
pressing the accelerator pedal.
For reasons of safety, to maintain comfort while the vehicle is stationary and to ensure that the entire vehicle
and its systems function correctly, the Stop&Start will automatically restart the engine in any of the
following cases:
ENGINE START button on steering wheel pressed;
function deactivated by pressing button on roof panel;
driver side seat belt unbuckled;
driver side door opened;
roof opened/closed;
rear screen defrost requested or AC system set to "low" or "max defrost".
The system also constantly monitors a number of vehicle parameters (battery state of charge, engine coolant
temperature, catalytic converter temperature, clutch oil temperature, brake servo vacuum level, climate
comfort in passenger compartment, vehicle speed) and will automatically restart the engine if necessary to
maintain safety, vehicle functionality and on-board climate comfort.
In certain cases, after the Stop&Start system has automatically stopped the engine, the engine may not
restart automatically when requested by the driver: this means that the vehicle systems have permanently
disabled automatic restart.
In this case, the engine must be restarted manually: the condition is indicated by the message "Press
ENGINE START button to restart" on the TFT display, accompanied by an audible signal.
Automatic engine restart is permanently disabled in the following conditions:
engine compartment lid opened;
failed automatic engine restart;
detection of a fault which may compromise the functions of the Stop&Start system.
In the event of a malfunction, the Stop&Start system is disabled.

The driver is warned of the fault by the specific symbol, displayed on the TFT display for 20 seconds,
accompanied by an audible warning signal and one of the following two messages, which correspond to
two different alarm levels:
level 1 alarm: "Stop&Start failure".
The message disappears at the end of the display cycle (20 seconds) or if the MODE button is pressed
(with "ESCAPE" function), while the symbol remains, reduced to icon form.
level 2 alarm: "Stop&Start failure. Go to dealer".

The message disappears at the end of the display cycle (20 seconds) or if the MODE button is pressed
(with "ESCAPE" function), while the symbol remains, reduced to icon form.
In certain cases, depending on the severity of the fault, it may be necessary to press and hold the ENGINE
START button for a few seconds before the engine restarts: the condition is indicated by the
message "Press and hold ENGINE START button to start" on the TFT display, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Once the system is deactivated, pressing the button again reactivates the system: the message "Stop&Start
OFF" is displayed on the TFT display for 5 seconds, together with the specific symbol.
Replacing the battery sensor

Fastening battery sensor Nut 6 Nm B


Loosen the indicated nut.
Remove the sensor (A) from the negative battery
pole.
Note that the quick release terminal, which is
shown connected in the image aside, must
be disconnected.
Disconnect the lug terminal (2) from the negative

terminal.
Replace the battery sensor complete with relative cable.
Clean and degrease the inner surface of the new

battery sensor terminal and the surface of the
Fit the sensor (A) on the negative battery pole.

Nut 6 Nm B
Orienting the cable correctly, connect the lug

terminal (2) to the negative terminal.
Note that the quick release terminal, which is
shown connected in the image aside, must
be disconnected.

Fit the cable protector ring (3) correctly, ensuring
that it prevents the cable from touching the
battery cover.

Refit the right hand lateral cosmetic shield.

Perform battery sensor calibration ( F2.15).
Battery sensor calibration
When the battery sensor is powered for the first time, after battery replacement or after an interruption in the
power supply, it runs a calibration cycle, during which it recognises the type of battery, its characteristics
and its state of charge.
For the Stop&Start system to function correctly, the battery sensor calibration cycle must be completed
correctly.
Start the engine.

Switch off the engine
DO NOT connect the vehicle to the battery conditioner.
DO NOT disconnect the battery.
Leave the vehicle stationary with the engine off for at least 6 hours.
Drive the vehicle for at least 20 minutes.
Replacing Eberspeacher voltage stabiliser

Fastening for passenger side footrest mat Screw 10 Nm B
mounting bracket

Remove the passenger side footrest mat.

Remove the bracket (A).
Remove the voltage stabiliser (B) and replace.
Fit the new voltage stabiliser (B).
Hand tighten the nuts indicated.
Fit the bracket (A).


Screw 10 Nm B

Refit the passenger side footrest mat.

F3.01 Technical specifications
Injection - Ignition
Type BOSCH MED 9.6.1

GDI DIRECT
INJECTION
ECU BOSCH Motronic-
MED 9.6.1
Ignition order 1-8-3-6-4-5-2-7
Fuel supply pressure 5 bar
Single ignition coil ELDOR
Spark plugs NGK
High pressure injector BOSCH HDEV 5.1
High pressure pump BOSCH HDP 5
Rail pressure sensor DS-HD-KV4
Proportional oxygen BOSCH LSU 4.9
sensor
Air flow meter HFM 7 - RP
Knock sensor BOSCH KS4
Timing sensor BOSCH PG 3.8
Direct injection
Overview
Direct injection is a fuel system in which fuel is injected via one or more precisely oriented jets directly into the
combustion chamber. The injectors are located within the combustion chamber of each cylinder, so that
fuel is injected directly into the individual combustion chamber.
In conventional indirect injection systems, fuel is injected into the stream of aspirated air, before it enters the
cylinder. Single point injection systems have a single injector - even for a multi-cylinder engine - located
upstream of the point where the intake ducts branch out towards each cylinder. Multi point or PFI (Port
Fuel Injection) systems, on the other hand, have multiple injectors - one per cylinder - located in the
intake manifold, ahead of the intake valve. As a result, fuel is mixed differently - in PFI systems, mixing
occurs in the intake duct, where part of the fuel evaporates, forming a fine mixture with the air, and part of
the fuel does not evaporate, depositing instead on the inner wall of the duct creating a thin liquid layer (a
phenomenon known as wall wetting), whereas in the case of direct injection, as only air flows through the
ducts, mixing occurs directly within the combustion chamber.
Moreover, direct injection enables a stratified charge, resulting in a nonhomogeneous distribution of the fuel
in the combustion chamber; in particular, this creates a zone with a stoichiometric or slightly rich mixture
zone around the spark plug electrodes. This ensures combustion even with very lean mixtures: the
air/fuel ratios - usually indicated with the symbol α - is in these cases extremely high, around 40:1.
Stratification is controlled by a number of factors enabling the confinement of the stoichiometric zone,
directing the spray and impeding excessive diffusion throughout the chamber:
Combustion chamber geometry
Conformation of the airflow field
Injector geometry
Injection type
Stratification allows control over the engine charge by metering the quantity of fuel injected alone - as occurs
in diesel engines (quantity regulation) - eliminating the throttle valve and, as a consequence, reducing
pumping losses. Furthermore, in low load conditions, the mixture core in which combustion propagates is
surrounded by air alone. This insulates it from the surrounding environment, reducing thermal losses.
The following is a summary of the advantages and disadvantages of direct fuel injection.
- Advantages -
Low fuel consumption and reduced emissions
High compression ratios
Improved engine flexibility and response
High power from smaller displacement engines (if used in conjunction with a turbocharger)
- Disadvantages -
More complex production process
Increased costs
More difficult, more costly repairs
Functional layouts of the Ferrari direct injection system
The engine developed for the Ferrari California unequivocally confirms the validity of direct injection
technology in high performance applications.
The implementation of direct injection has necessitated a number of significant changes to the engine and to
the head in particular, with the adoption of high pressure pump, different injectors and, obviously, changes
to the electronic engine management. The primary components of the direct injection system are shown in
the following diagram.
1 - Air flow meter
2 - Motorised throttle valve
3 - High-pressure pump
4 - Fuel tank
5 - Active carbon filter
6 - Bleed valve
7 - Trivalent catalytic converter
8 - Accelerator pedal
9 - Motronic ECU
10 - Air flow sensor
11 - Intake manifold sensor
12 - RPM sensor
13 - Knock sensor
14 - Temperature sensor
15 - Timing sensor
16 - Proportional oxygen sensor
17 - Exhaust gas temperature sensor
18 - Potentiometric oxygen sensor
The different subsystems forming the system can be seen in this diagram: intake, fuel supply, exhaust and
electrical circuit. On the intake side, once past the air flow meter, the air flows through the throttle valve
(unlike conventional systems, this is no longer wet by fuel). Depending on the instantaneous accelerator
pedal angle and in relation to the engine mapping, the ECU sends the necessary signal to the injector to
deliver the exact amount required. On the exhaust side, note the two oxygen sensors, one ahead of and
one after the catalytic converter. The fuel system includes a high pressure pump separating the circuit into
two parts: a high pressure section and a low pressure section.
The lubrication and cooling circuits are also of fundamental importance for the engine. The oil circuit features
wet sump lubrication, which reduces maintenance costs and times compared with the previous dry sump
configuration, and also reduces noise emissions; the oil pump is chain driven.
High and low pressure circuits
Fuel is injected into the combustion chamber at high pressure of up to 200 Bar. Before it is injected, the fuel
must first pass through two circuits:
a low pressure circuit, from the fuel tank to the high pressure pump (A -> B); fuel enters the pump at a
pressure of 5-6 bar;
a high pressure circuit, from the pump to the injectors (B -> C); pressure varies from 50 to 200 Bar.
F3.02 Timing sensor
Removing the timing sensors
There are four timing sensors in all, with one (internal) intake timing sensor and one (external) exhaust timing
sensor per cylinder bank.
Remove the engine compartment cosmetic

shields ( E3.13).
Remove the right hand cosmetic
underdashboard shield.

Undo the fastener screws (2) and retrieve the
intake (A) and exhaust (B) timing sensors.

shields ( E3.13).
Remove the left hand cosmetic
underwindscreen shield.
Remove the windscreen wiper

linkage ( E3.09).
Undo the fastener screws (4) and retrieve the
intake (C) and exhaust (D) timing sensors.
Refitting the timing sensors

Fastening timing sensor Screw 8 Nm A
Fit the intake (A) and exhaust (B) timing sensors

on the cylinder head covers and fasten by

Screw 8 Nm A

shields ( E3.13).
Refit the right hand cosmetic underdashboard
shield.
Fit the intake (A) and exhaust (D) timing sensors

on the cylinder head covers and fasten by

Screw 8 Nm A

shields ( E3.13).
Refit the left hand cosmetic underwindscreen
shield.

F3.03 RPM sensor
Replacing the RPM sensor

Fastening RPM sensor Sensor 10 Nm A
Located on the rear of the crankcase, near the flywheel.

Disconnect the connector (1), undo the screw (2)

fastening the RPM sensor (A) to the
crankcase and replace.
photo aside was taken with the engine
removed from the vehicle.
Fit the RPM sensor (A) in the relative seat and

fasten by tightening the screw (2).

Sensor 10 Nm A

F3.04 Engine coolant temperature sensor
Replacing the coolant temperature sensor on the radiator

Fastening coolant temperature sensor - radiator Sensor 16 Nm A
Located on the right hand side of the coolant radiator.

Detach the connector (1) from the coolant

temperature sensor (A).
Unscrew the coolant temperature sensor (A) and
remove from the radiator, plugging the orifice
immediately to prevent leakage.
Remove the plug and, after fitting the coolant
temperature sensor (A) in the relative seat
with a new gasket, retighten.

Sensor 16 Nm A

Replacing the coolant temperature sensor on the front cover

Fastening coolant temperature sensor - front Temperature sensor 20 Nm B
cover
Located on the top of the front engine cover.

Working from the battery compartment, detach
the connector (1) from the coolant
temperature sensor (A).
Cover the area surrounding the sensor
adequately with absorbent paper as there
may be some coolant leakage.
Unscrew the coolant temperature sensor (A) and
remove from the front engine cover, plugging
the orifice immediately to prevent leakage.
Remove the plug and, after fitting the coolant
temperature sensor (A) in the relative seat
with a new gasket, retighten.

Temperature sensor 20 Nm B

F3.05 Engine oil temperature sensor
Replacing the engine oil temperature sensor on the water-engine oil heat exchanger

Fastening engine oil temperature sensor - heat Sensor 20 Nm B
exchanger
Located on the rear of the water-engine oil heat exchanger.

Disconnect the connector (1) and unscrew the

engine oil temperature sensor (A) from the
heat exchanger, plugging the orifice
immediately to prevent oil spillage.
Remove the plug then fit and tighten the engine
oil temperature sensor (A) in the relative seat,
installing a new gasket.

Sensor 20 Nm B

Carry out in the event of engine oil spillage.
F3.06 Minimum engine oil level sensor
Replacing the minimum engine oil level sensor

Fastening minimum level engine oil sensor Screw 8 Nm A
The sensor in installed on the sump.

Remove the snap ring (1) retaining the connector

to the sump.
Remove the minimum engine oil level sensor

connector (A) from the sump in the location
indicated.
Undo the screws (2) fastening the minimum
engine oil level sensor (A) to the sump.
Replace the minimum engine oil level sensor,
fitting the new component in the relative seat
after aligning the holes with the shim (3).
Fasten the minimum engine oil level sensor (A)
to the sump, tightening the two screws (2).

Screw 8 Nm A
Fit the sensor wiring harness as originally

installed and fit the relative connector onto
the sump in the position indicated.
Fasten the minimum engine oil level sensor

connector by fitting the retainer snap ring (1).

F3.07 Knock sensor
Removing the knock sensor
There are four knock sensors mounted on the crankcase.
Each sensor is identified by a label applied to the sensor and the connector with a number from 1 to 4
indicating the relative position on the crankcase:
position 1 _ between cylinders 1 and 2 on right hand cylinder bank;
position 2 _ between cylinders 3 and 4 on right hand cylinder bank;
position 3 _ between cylinders 5 and 6 on left hand cylinder bank;
position 4 _ between cylinders 7 and 8 on left hand cylinder bank;

Undo the indicated screw fastening the sensors

(1), (2), (3) and (4), and open the indicated
clamps (red arrows) retaining the relative
cables.
The photo aside shows the sensors with the
relative numbers indicating their positions
on the crankcase.
Disconnect and remove the relative connector

from the cable mounting bracket, and remove
the knock sensor from the crankcase.
The photo aside shows the connectors with the
relative numbers identifying the positions of
the sensors on the crankcase and the
positions of the connectors on the mounting
bracket.
Refitting the knock sensor

Fastening knock sensor Screw 20 Nm B
Each sensor is identified by a label applied to the sensor and the connector with a number from 1 to 4
indicating the relative position on the crankcase.
Fit the sensors (1), (2), (3) and (4) as originally

installed in the relative seats, matching the
numbers correctly, and fasten by tightening
the screw indicated.
The photo aside shows the sensors with the
relative numbers indicating their positions
on the crankcase.

Screw 20 Nm B
Close the clamps indicated (red arrows)

fastening the cable relative to the sensor
installed.
Connect and fit the relative connector on the

cable mounting bracket.
The photo aside shows the connectors with the
relative numbers identifying the positions of
the sensors on the crankcase and the
positions of the connectors on the mounting
bracket.

F3.08 Oxygen sensors
Location of the oxygen sensors
A - Front oxygen sensor on catalytic converter

B - Rear oxygen sensor on catalytic converter
Oxygen sensor (lambda sensor)
The oxygen sensors measure the oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
To replace the sensors, see chapter A3.09.
Front oxygen sensor, BOSCH LSU 4

A - Connector cable
B - Protective outer casing
C - Flat sensor element
D - Ceramic mounting
E - Sensor body
F - Ceramic gasket
G - Protective cap
This linear, broad band sensor generates a current signal that varies in accordance with the concentration of
uncombusted oxygen in the exhaust gases, which is closely correlated to the air/fuel ratio in the intake
manifold or to the excess air factor (λ = lambda) of the fuel/air mixture.
The main characteristic of this sensor is its linearity even with λ values other than 1.
Ss - Sensor signal
λ - Lambda ratio excess
This signal is transmitted to the engine ECU and enables the continuous adjustment of the fuel injection
system, to ensure maximum engine performance and efficiency.
The oxygen sensor is active at all engine speeds.

Lambda metering is disabled (oxygen sensor OFF) for the entire period necessary for the pump and
the secondary air solenoid valve to complete the ON-OFF-ON cycle.
The engine ECU controls the heater that maintains the sensor at an optimum operating temperature of (700
to 800 °C) in all conditions.
Rear oxygen sensor, BOSCH LSF 4

A - Connector cable
B - Protective outer casing
C - Flat sensor element
D - Ceramic mounting
E - Sensor body
F - Ceramic gasket
G - Protective cap
This sensor has a dual role: it detects the deterioration of the catalytic converter, by comparison against the
signal from the front sensor, and it enables the mixture to be corrected accordingly in the event of
deterioration of the front oxygen sensor.
At low temperatures (< 350 °C), the internal resistance of the sensor (> 1 MΩ), impedes the generation of a
usable signal.
For this reason, in order to accelerate the initial warm-up period during cold starts and to maintain maximum
sensor efficiency during prolonged idling, the oxygen sensor is heated internally by a modulated wave
resistance element.
The output signal of the sensor is given by the ratio λ of the air/fuel mixture, and is stepped at the value λ = 1.
The wave amplitude is approximately 400 mV, centred at 450 mV.
Ss - Sensor signal
λ - Lambda ratio excess
g - Rich mixture
M - Lean mixture
F3.09 Air flow meter
Removing the air flow meter
Detach the connector (1) from the air flow meter

(A).
Remove the two clamps (2) fastening the meter
to the bellows and detach the air flow meter
(A).
Refitting the air flow meter
Fit the air flow meter (A) in its seat between the
two bellows, facing in the direction indicated
by the arrow on the flow meter itself.
Tighten the two clamps (2) fastening the air flow
meter to the bellows.
Connect the connector (1) to the air flow meter
(A).

F3.10 Motorised throttle body
Removing the motorised throttle body
Located in the engine compartment, connected to the intake manifold.
Disconnect the quick coupling (1) from the bellow.

Open the two plastic clamps (2) then release the
relative pipe to facilitate access to the
motorised throttle body.
Remove the two clamps (3).
Disconnect the relative connector (4).
Start easing out the motorised throttle body (A)

and detach the electric junction (5) from the
retainer bracket.
Remove the motorised throttle body (A)
completely from the engine compartment.
Refitting the motorised throttle body

Fit the electric junction (5) in the bracket
retaining the motorised throttle body (A).
Fit the motorised throttle body (A) in the relative

seat and fasten by tightening the two clamps
(3).
Connect the relative connector (4).
Connect the quick coupling (1) onto the bellow.
Fit the pipe and close the two plastic clamps (2).

Reset the self-adaptive parameters and perform the engine ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
F3.11 Accelerator control
Removing the accelerator pedal
Positioned in the passenger compartment, in the driver side footwell.
Remove the three indicated plugs.

accelerator pedal (A).
Remove the accelerator pedal (A).
Refitting the accelerator pedal

Fastening accelerator pedal - centre console Nut 9 Nm B
casting
Fit the accelerator pedal (A) in the relative seat.
accelerator pedal (A).

Nut 9 Nm B
Refit the three indicated plugs.

F3.12 Pneumatic actuator system solenoid valves
Pneumatic actuator system layout
A - Front pneumatic actuator system ON/OFF solenoid valve

B - Front vacuum accumulator tank
C - Rear pneumatic actuator system ON/OFF solenoid valve
D - Rear vacuum accumulator tank
E - Exhaust bypass valves
F - Secondary air valves
The solenoid valve (A) controls the aperture of the secondary air valves connected to the cylinder heads.
The solenoid valve (D) controls the aperture of the pneumatic butterfly valves mounted on the exhaust
tailpipes.
The actuators are vacuum-operated and are part of the pneumatic actuating system.
The solenoid valves are switched ON or OFF by the ECU in relation to engine operating conditions. The
diagnostic system can detect short circuits (SC) or open circuits (OC) in the solenoid valves. The solenoid
valves are switched ON or OFF by the ECU in relation to engine operating conditions. The diagnostic
system can detect short circuits (SC) or open circuits (OC) in the solenoid valves.
After replacing the solenoid valves, a self-acquisition cycle must be performed.
Replacing the front pneumatic actuator system solenoid valve

Fastening pneumatic actuator system solenoid Screw 6 Nm B
valve
The front pneumatic actuator system solenoid valve is located on the vacuum accumulator tank, which is
mounted on the front vehicle cross member, behind the engine cooling system fans.


Detach the two pipes (2) from the solenoid valve
(A), after marking their respective positions to
prevent accidentally swapping them during
refitting.
Remove and replace the solenoid valve (A), by
Fit the new solenoid valve (A) and fasten to the
accumulator tank, by tightening the two
screws indicated.

Screw 6 Nm B
Connect the pipes (2) correctly as noted during

removal.

Replacing the rear pneumatic actuator system solenoid valve

Rear pneumatic actuator system solenoid valve Screw 6 Nm B
Rear expansion tank heat shield Nut 8 Nm B
The rear pneumatic actuator system solenoid valve is located on the right-hand side of the rear vehicle
chassis, behind the relative heat shield.

Detach the rear removable subframe complete with gearbox only.
Remove the rear stabiliser bar ( D4.05).

Remove the three clips fastening the heat shield
(A).
Undo the nut (1) fastening the heat shield (A).
Remove the heat shield (A) from the relative seat.

Note the connection positions of the two pipes
(2) to avoid accidentally swapping them
during reassembly.
Disconnect the two pipes (2) from the solenoid
valve (B).
solenoid valve (B).
Remove the solenoid valve (B) from the relative
seat and replace.
Fit the new solenoid valve (B) in the relative seat.
solenoid valve (B).

Screw 6 Nm B
Connect the two pipes (2) to the solenoid valve

(B), in the respective positions noted
previously.
Fit the heat shield (A) in the relative seat.

Tighten the nut (1) fastening the heat shield (A).

Nut 8 Nm B
Refit the three clips indicated fastening the heat

shield (A).
Refit the rear stabiliser bar ( D4.05).

F3.13 Evaporative emissions control system solenoid valve
Replacing the evaporative emissions control system solenoid valve
The solenoid valve is located in the engine compartment, behind the engine coolant tank.

photo was taken without the central right
hand engine compartment cosmetic shield.
Detach the two inlet and outlet pipes (2) from the
evaporative emissions control system
solenoid valve (A).
Remove the evaporative emissions control
system solenoid valve (A) from its mounting
bracket, move the valve towards the exterior
of the vehicle and replace.
Fit the evaporative emissions control system
solenoid valve (A) as originally installed,
checking that the arrow on the valve points in
the correct direction (area with dotted line).
Fit the solenoid valve in the relative retainer
bracket and connect the two inlet and outlet
pipes (2).

F3.14 Diagnostic pump and evaporative emissions control system filter
Removing the diagnostic pump
Located in the right hand rear wheel bay.


Remove the clamp (2) and detach the relative
pipe.
Disconnect the pipe (3) from the diagnostic pump
(A).
Undo the nuts (4) fastening the bracket and
retrieve the diagnostic pump (A) complete
with bracket.
Detach the diagnostic pump (A) from the relative

mounting bracket, by undoing the screws (5).
Refitting the diagnostic pump

Fastening diagnostic pump to relative mounting Screw 2 Nm B
bracket
Diagnostic pump mounting bracket - chassis Nut 9 Nm B
Fasten the diagnostic pump (A) to the relative
mounting bracket, by tightening the screws
(5).

Screw 2 Nm B
Fasten the diagnostic pump (A), complete with

mounting bracket, onto the bodyshell, by
tightening the nuts (4).

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the pipe (3) onto the diagnostic pump

(A), pushing in completely to ensure that it is
securely coupled.
Connect the pipe and fasten the relative clamp
(2).

Replacing the OBD diagnostic pump filter

Fastening the OBD pump filter to the active Screw 2 Nm B
Filter mounting bracket for OBD diagnostic pump - Nut 5 Nm B
Located behind the rear right hand wheel bay.

Loosen the clamp (3) fastening the OBD

diagnostic pump filter (A) to the gaiter.
Loosen the clamp (4) fastening the connector
pipe to the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A).
Undo the nut (5) fastening the mounting bracket
for the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A) to the
active carbon filter mounting bracket.
With the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A) on the

workbench, remove the relative mounting
bracket (7), undoing the screw (6) and prising
the relative hook out of its seat.
Replace the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A),
refitting the hook in its seat and tightening the
screw (6) fastening the filter to the mounting
bracket (7).

Screw 2 Nm B
Fit the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A) correctly
as originally installed and tighten the retainer
clamp (3).
Tighten the clamp (4) fastening the connector
pipe to the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A).
Tighten the nut (5) fastening the mounting
bracket for the OBD diagnostic pump filter (A)
to the active carbon filter mounting bracket.

Nut 5 Nm B
Refit the active carbon filter cover (1), tightening

the screws (2).

Screw 6 Nm B

F3.15 Secondary air system
Secondary air system layout
A - Secondary air pump

B - Secondary air valves
C - Front pneumatic actuator system ON/OFF solenoid valve
D - Front vacuum accumulator tank
E - Rear vacuum accumulator tank
F - Rear pneumatic actuator system ON/OFF solenoid valve
Removing the secondary air pump


Loosen the clamp (1) and detach the pipe (2)
from the secondary air pump.
NEW solution
Press on the pipe release ends (17) then remove

it from the secondary air pump.
Detach the connector (3), undo the screws (4)

fastening the pump to the chassis, and
remove the secondary air pump (A) from the
engine compartment, complete with mounting
bracket.
Refitting the secondary air pump

Secondary air pump - chassis Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the secondary air pump, complete with

bracket, in its seat in the engine compartment.
Tighten the screws (4) fastening the secondary
air pump mounting bracket (A) to the chassis
and connect the connector (3).

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the pipe (2) to the secondary air pump

and tighten the clamp (1).
NEW solution
Connect the pipe (17) to secondary air pump

until it locks with an audible click, then check
that it is fastened correctly.

Replacing the secondary air valve

Secondary air valve - exhaust manifold connector Screw 8 Nm B
pipe
The following procedure is for the replacement of the right hand secondary air valve; the procedure for the
left hand one is identical.
Detach the pipe (1), removing the relative clamp

and the rubber connector pipe (2) leading to
the vacuum accumulator tank, from the
secondary air valve (A).
air valve (A) to the connector pipe leading to
the exhaust manifold and to the relative
mounting bracket.
Remove the secondary air valve (A) retrieving
the two seals (5) and the shim (4).
Fit the secondary air valve (A) in the relative seat

on the pipe leading to the exhaust manifold,
after installing the two new seals (5) and the
shim (4) between the parts.
Tighten the two screws (3) fastening the
secondary air valve (A) to the connector pipe
leading to the exhaust manifold and to the
relative mounting bracket.

Screw 8 Nm B
Connect the pipe (1), fastening with a new

clamp, and the rubber connector pipe (2)
leading to the vacuum accumulator tank, to
the secondary air valve (A).
F3.16 Variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves
Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease to variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve connectors
In the event of a variable timing adjuster actuator solenoid valve malfunction, before replacing the
component, perform the procedure "Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease to variable timing adjuster
actuator solenoid valve connectors" and check if normal function is restored.
If the fault persists, the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve must be replaced.
The following procedure must be performed whenever replacing a variable timing adjuster control solenoid
valve and, therefore, whenever the relative connector is disconnected.
DO not use blunt objects to disconnect the

connectors.
Disconnect the connectors (A) for the variable

timing adjuster control solenoid valves.
Apply grease UNIFLOR 8917 Code 70001410 to

the connectors (wiring harness side) for the
variable timing adjuster control solenoid
valves, as illustrated in the photo aside.
Connect the connectors (A) for the variable
timing adjuster control solenoid valves.
Replacing the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves

Fastening variable timing adjuster solenoid valve Screw 6 Nm B
In the event of a variable timing adjuster actuator solenoid valve malfunction, before replacing the
component, perform the procedure "Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease to variable timing adjuster
actuator solenoid valve connectors" and check if normal function is restored.
If the fault persists, the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve must be replaced.

Remove the cylinder head covers ( B2.03).
Undo the two screws indicated and remove the

variable timing adjuster solenoid valves (A)
from the relative seats.
Lubricate the front cap seats and the variable
timing adjuster solenoid valve seals (1) with
engine oil.
Fit the variable timing adjuster solenoid valves

(A) in the relative seats and fasten by

Screw 6 Nm B
Refit the cylinder head covers ( B2.05).

F3.17 Ignition coils
Removing the ignition coils
There are 8 ignition coils (4 per cylinder bank), fixed to the cylinder head covers.
Coil on cylinder No. 1

Detach the coil (2) and remove from the seat on
the cylinder head cover.


shields ( E3.13).


shields ( E3.13).


shields ( E3.13).

linkage ( E3.09).

shields ( E3.13).

linkage ( E3.09).


Refitting the ignition coils
When refitting the original coils, clean them with compressed air to remove any dirt.
Check that the coil seat on the head is clean.

Fit the coil (11) in the relevant seat on the
cylinder head cover, rotating into the original
position, then push in completely.
Check that the coil is fastened correctly.


shields ( E3.13).
shield.

shields ( E3.13).
shield.

Fit the coil (8) in the relevant seat on the cylinder
head cover, rotating into the original position,
then push in completely.
shields ( E3.13).
shield.

shields ( E3.13).
shield.



F3.18 Engine oil pressure sensor
Replacing the engine oil pressure sensor on the water-engine oil heat exchanger

Fastening engine oil pressure sensor Thermistor 26 Nm A
Located on the rear of the water-engine oil heat exchanger, in front of the temperature sensor.


engine oil pressure sensor (A) from the heat
exchanger, plugging the orifice immediately to
prevent oil spillage.
Remove the plug then fit and tighten the engine
oil pressure sensor (A) in the relative seat,
installing a new gasket.

Thermistor 26 Nm A

Carry out in the event of engine oil spillage.
F3.19 GDI direct injection system
Removing the GDI injection rail pipes
CAUTION
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind that the line may be pressurised. Proceed therefore with
caution and keep away any type of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent residual fuel from leaking.
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the relevant part of the engine with rags so that any leaking fuel
will be absorbed and will not come into contact with the engine or any other unit. In case of contact with
fuel, dry the affected area immediately.
There are two rails, one per cylinder bank, mounted on the cylinder heads.
The electroinjectors are not supplied individually, but with the complete rail.
Perform the pressure release procedure for the high pressure circuit using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
Remove the soundproofing cover (1) on the high

pressure pump, undoing the two screws
indicated.
UP TO Engine No. 153601 and FROM Engine No.
169912
Remove the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail,

Undo the nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7)

and the nut (6) on the rail (8).
Remove the high pressure pipe (9).
Plug the pipe connections on the high pressure
pump and the rail.
Disconnect the connectors (10) on the injectors.

Disconnect the pressure sensor connector (13).
Undo the indicated stud bolts and screws
fastening the complete rail (8) onto the
cylinder head.
FROM Engine No. 153602 only screws are
present (no stud bolts).
Remove the rail complete with injectors (8) from

its seat, in a perfectly perpendicular motion.
DO NOT remove the electroinjectors from
the complete rail for any reason.
Fit the protector caps on the injector tips.

Undo the six fastener screws indicated to
remove the complete rail mounting (11).
If present, retrieve the filler foam (12).
Cover the injector seats on the cylinder head to prevent foreign objects from entering.
Refitting the GDI injection rail pipes

Complete fuel rail mounting Screw 10 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
23-1 Nm
30-1 Nm
6-2 Nm
ENSURE THAT all the components are clean before fitting.
The electroinjectors are not supplied individually, but with the complete rail.
Ensure that the electroinjector seats on the cylinder head are completely clean.
Remove the cover plate from the injector holes
on the cylinder head.
If present, fit the filler foam (12) in the relative
seat.
Fit the complete rail mounting (11) and fasten by
tightening the six screws indicated in the

Screw 10 Nm B
DO NOT remove the electroinjectors from the complete rail for any reason.
Remove the protector caps from the injector tips.
Fig. 2
NEVER lubricate the Teflon grommet on the

injector tip side.
WARNING: The fuel rail complete with

injectors MUST be installed in a
PARALLEL and UNIFORM fashion in the
relative seat on the cylinder head.
Fit the rail complete with injectors (8) in the

relevant seat, keeping the rail parallel with the
seat and installing in a uniform motion.
Manually snug the stud bolts (red arrows) and
screws (black arrows) indicated, then
pretighten and definitively tighten in the
FROM Engine No. 153602 only screws are
present (no stud bolts).

Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
Connect the pressure sensor connector (13).

Connect the connectors (10) on the injectors.
When refitting the same high pressure pipe (9),
lubricate the nuts (5) and (6).
Fit the high pressure pipe (9) onto both pipe
connections and snug the nuts (5) and (6)
manually.
Tighten the nut (6) on the rail (8) first, then the
nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7).

Nut +1 0
23-1 Nm
Nut +1 0
30-1 Nm
Loosen the nut (5) on the high pressure pump by

two thread turns, then tighten again.

Nut +1 0
30-1 Nm

169912
Fit the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail, hand

When refitting the same soundproofing cover
(4), loosen the stud bolts indicated by the
red arrows in Fig. 2, then tighten the stud
bolts following the instructions given
previously. Then repeat the previous and


Screw +0 0
6-2 Nm
Fit the soundproofing cover (1) in the relevant
seat, pretighten and then fully tighten the two
screws indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B

Perform the "High Pressure Circuit Leak Test" cycle.
Removing the GDI injection pumps
CAUTION
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind that the line may be pressurised. Proceed therefore with
caution and keep away any type of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent residual fuel from leaking.
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the relevant part of the engine with rags so that any leaking fuel
will be absorbed and will not come into contact with the engine or any other unit. In case of contact with
fuel, dry the affected area immediately.
Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox. Deactivate the Park Lock system mechanically ( E5.15).
The Park Lock must be released as the procedure for refitting the high pressure pump entails rotating
the crankshaft manually using the torsion damper.
Perform the pressure release procedure for the high pressure circuit using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
Remove the soundproofing cover (1), undoing
the two screws indicated.

nut (3) fastening the low pressure pipe onto
the high pressure pump.
Plug the low pressure pipe and the relevant inlet
on the high pressure pump.

169912
Remove the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail,

Undo the nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7)
and the nut (6) on the rail (8).
Remove the high pressure pipe (9).
Plug the pipe connections on the high pressure
pump and the rail.
Press the high pressure pump (7) and slowly

loosen the two indicated screws fastening the
pump to the relevant mounting on the cylinder
head, as the bi-lobe on the camshaft may be
in a state of thrust against the pump.
Remove the high pressure pump (7).

Recover the cup (10).
Refitting the GDI injection pumps

Fastening high pressure fuel pump Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw
Screw 10 Nm B
23-1 Nm
30-1 Nm
screw/stud bolt
6-2 Nm
Low pressure pipe - high pressure pump Nut +2 0
20-0 Nm
ENSURE THAT all the components are clean before fitting.

Using a ratchet spanner (STAHLWILLE 517) with
the appropriate socket applied to the torsion
damper fastener screw, rotate the crankshaft
to bring the fuel pump bi-lobe (12) on the
intake camshaft into BDC; in this position, the
bi-lobe is not in a state of thrust relevant to
the fuel pump.
Fit the cup (10) in the relevant seat, after

lubricating with engine oil.
Lubricate the O-ring seat on the pump mounting
with engine oil.
Replace the O-ring (11) on the high pressure

pump (7), and fit in the relevant seat.
Fit the high pressure pump (7) in the relevant
seat.
Snug the indicated screws by hand; pretighten
then tighten definitively, following the
sequence indicated in the photo aside.

Pretightening torque for screw 5 Nm B
Screw 10 Nm B
When refitting the same high pressure pipe (9),

lubricate the nuts (5) and (6).
Fit the high pressure pipe (9) onto both pipe
connections and snug the nuts (5) and (6)
manually.
Tighten the nut (6) on the rail (8) first, then the
nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7).

Nut +1 0
23-1 Nm
Nut +1 0
30-1 Nm
Loosen the nut (5) on the high pressure pump by

two thread turns, then tighten again.

Nut +1 0
30-1 Nm
169912
Loosen the two indicated fuel rail fastener stud

bolts, then pretighten and tighten definitively
in the sequence indicated in the photo aside.

Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw/stud bolt

169912
Fit the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail, hand


Screw +0 0
6-2 Nm
Fit the low pressure pipe onto the high pressure

pump and hand-tighten the nut (3).

Nut +2 0
20-0 Nm

Fit the soundproofing cover (1) in the relevant
seat, pretighten and then fully tighten the two
screws indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B

Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox. Deactivate the Park Lock system mechanically ( E5.15).
Reactivate the Park Lock.

Perform the "High Pressure Circuit Leak Test" cycle.
F4.01 Alarm system
Antitheft system layout
A - ADR ECU
B - Rear hyper-frequency motion sensor
C - Anti-lift sensor
D - Lateral hyper-frequency motion sensor
E - Two-colour infoled
F - Siren
G - GPS antenna
H - GSM antenna
If both the ignition keys provided with the vehicle are lost and the antitheft system of the vehicle is
active, the Body Computer Node NBC must also be replaced as well as the key and lock set kit.
Ferrari CODE System
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobiliser system (Ferrari CODE) which is activated
automatically when the ignition key is removed.
The keys contain an electronic device which transmits a coded signal to the Ferrari CODE ECU.
The Ferrari CODE ECU only permits engine start once it has recognised the signal.
Whenever the ignition key is removed from the 0 position, the system activates the engine immobiliser.
On engine start, pressing the ENGINE START button on the steering wheel:
if the code is recognised, the CODE indicator light on the instrument panel goes out after the check cycle,
while the EOBD indicator light extinguishes at the end of the ECU diagnostic cycle, only once the
engine has effectively started: this means that the security system has recognised the key code and
disabled the engine immobiliser;
if the CODE indicator light remains lit, this means that the code has not been recognised: Should this
occur, turn the key back to 0 position and then to II position. If the engine immobiliser is still not
deactivated, try with the other key provided.
With the vehicle running with the ignition key turned to II position:
the CODE indicator light illuminates when the system is running a self diagnosis cycle. The next time the
vehicle is stopped, the system may be tested as follows. Switch off the engine by turning the ignition
key to 0 position, then turn the key back to II position. The CODE indicator light should illuminate and
extinguish again within one second. If the indicator light remains lit, leave the key in the 0 position for
more than 30 seconds and repeat the above procedure;
the CODE indicator light flashes to indicate that the vehicle is not protected by the immobiliser system.
Electronic alarm
The electronic alarm performs the following functions:

manages remote centralised door locking/unlocking;
perimeter surveillance, detecting if any of the doors or lids are opened;
volumetric surveillance, detecting intrusions into the passenger compartment;
vehicle movement surveillance.
Press button (A) on the ignition key to arm the electronic alarm:
the turn indicators flash once;
the system emits an audible signal;
the infoled on the dashboard starts flashing;
the vehicle central locking system is activated, locking the doors.
After approximately 25 seconds, the system is armed.

The luggage compartment lid may be opened while the electronic alarm is armed. In this case, the volumetric
sensors and anti-lift sensors are temporarily deactivated.
The sensors are reactivated when the luggage compartment lid is closed again.
The turn indicators and the infoled on the dashboard will flash nine times when the alarm is armed to indicate
that one of the doors or lids is open or not closed correctly and that, as a result, the vehicle will not be
protected by the perimeter surveillance function.
Should this occur, check all doors and lids and close any doors or lids left open. Disarming the alarm is not
necessary. The turn indicators flash once to indicate that all doors and lids are now correctly closed and
that the vehicle is protected by the perimeter surveillance function.
If the turn indicators and the red led on the dashboard flash nine times when the alarm is armed, but all doors
and lids are correctly closed, this indicates that the self-diagnostic function has detected a system
malfunction.
Press button (B) on the ignition key to disarm the electronic alarm:
the turn indicators flash twice;
the system emits a double audible signal;
the infoled on the dashboard extinguishes;
the cabin lights and puddle lights switch on;
the vehicle central locking system is deactivated, unlocking the doors.
The alarm system is now disarmed and you may now enter the vehicle and start the engine.
To access the vehicle if the remote control key battery is flat, insert the key into either of the two door locks
and turn to unlock the door; the alarm siren will sound.
Start the vehicle normally; the alarm siren deactivates.
Press (C) to disable the anti-lift function of the alarm system.

When the function is disabled, the indicator light on the button flashes for approximately 3 seconds and then
extinguishes.
The CODE indicator light is shown on the display when starting the vehicle to indicate that there has been an
attempted break-in.
In this case, the system indicates the cause for the alarm as follows:
LED switches off 2 times: anti-lift sensor alarm;
LED switches off 3 times: door alarm;
LED switches off 4 times: luggage compartment lid alarm;
LED switches off 5 times: ignition key alarm.
The alarm system memory is cleared when the ignition key is turned.
Replacing the rear hyper-frequency motion sensor

Fastening rear hyper-frequency volumetric sensor Screw 4 Nm B
Located on the central upper rollbar mounting, under the central passenger compartment trim panel.

Remove the central trim panel.
Disconnect the connector (1) from the rear hyper-

frequency motion sensor (A).
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the rear
hyper-frequency motion sensor (A) to the
central upper rollbar mounting.
Remove the rear hyper-frequency motion sensor
(A) from the respective seat on the central
upper rollbar mounting and replace.
Fit the new rear hyper-frequency motion sensor
(A) in the respective seat on the central upper
rollbar mounting.
rear hyper-frequency motion sensor (A) to the
central upper rollbar mounting.

Screw 4 Nm B
Connect the connector (1) to the rear hyper-

frequency motion sensor (A).

Replacing the anti-lift sensor
Located on the central upper rollbar mounting, under the central passenger compartment trim panel.

Remove the central trim panel.
Disconnect the connector (1) from the anti-lift

sensor (A).
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the anti-
lift sensor (A) to the central upper rollbar
mounting.
Remove the anti-lift sensor (A) from the
respective seat on the central upper rollbar
mounting and replace.
Fit the new anti-lift sensor (A) in the respective
seat on the central upper rollbar mounting.
anti-lift sensor (A) to the central upper rollbar
mounting.
Connect the connector (1) to the anti-lift sensor
(A).

Replacing the lateral hyper-frequency motion sensors
Located on the side airbag mounting brackets, behind the door panels.
Replace the side airbag modules ( F4.02).

Remove the mounting bracket only.
Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the lateral

hyper-frequency motion sensor (A) to the
mounting bracket.
Remove the lateral hyper-frequency motion
sensor (A) from the respective seat on the
mounting bracket and replace.
Fit the new lateral hyper-frequency motion
sensor (A) in the respective seat on the
mounting bracket.
lateral hyper-frequency motion sensor (A) to
the mounting bracket.
Replace the side airbag modules ( F4.02).

Refit the mounting bracket.
Replacing the two-colour antitheft system infoled
Located under the cosmetic grille on the dashboard.
Using a suitable tool, prise out the cosmetic grille

(A) from its seat on the dashboard.

Remove the cosmetic grille (A) from the vehicle.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the two-

colour antitheft system infoled (B).
Remove the two-colour antitheft system infoled
(B) from its seat and replace.
Fit the new two-colour antitheft system infoled
(B) in the relative seat.
two-colour antitheft system infoled (B).
Fit the cosmetic grille (A) in the vehicle.
Fit the cosmetic grille (A) in its respective seat on

the dashboard and fasten by pressing
manually until it snaps audibly into place.
Replacing the anti-theft siren

Fastening anti-theft siren Screw 9 Nm B
Located on the left side of the engine compartment, next to the radiator assembly.

Disconnect the connector (1) from the anti-theft
system siren (A).
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the anti-theft
system siren (A) to the vehicle chassis.
Remove the anti-theft system siren (A) from the
Fit the new anti-theft system siren (A) in the
relative seat on the vehicle chassis.
Tighten the two screws (2) fastening the anti-
theft system siren (A) to the vehicle chassis.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the connector (1) to the anti-theft

system siren (A).
Point the cone of the anti-theft system siren
downwards by 30° to allow water drainage.

F4.02 Airbag
Airbag system layout
A - Driver side airbag module

B - ECU
C - Side airbag module
D - Passenger side airbag module
E - Front crash sensor
F - Side crash sensor
Front airbag modules
The front airbags are controlled by an ECU which activates them in the event of a frontal impact (impact
angle between 11 and 1 o'clock) of sufficient severity.
In the event of an impact generating deceleration exceeding the calibrated value of the internal sensor, the
ECU sends a deployment signal to the airbags.
The airbags begin to inflate, breaking the trim panel along a predetermined break line, to then fully inflate with
a few tens of milliseconds, forming a protective cushion between the body of the driver or passenger and
any structures which could inflict injury.
In the event of a frontal impact interrupting the power supply, the active rollbars are also deployed as a
precautional measure.
The airbag deflates immediately afterwards.
With the ignition key inserted and turned to II, even with the engine off, the airbags may deploy even when
the vehicle is stationary, if it is hit by another moving vehicle.
Please note that with the ignition key turned to 0, no safety device (airbags or pretensioners) will be activated
in the event of an impact; as a result, the failure of these devices to deploy in the aforementioned situation
is not indicative of a system malfunction.
The following logic is applied for the deployment of the driver airbag:
in the event of a minor impact, the airbag ECU does not deploy the airbag;
in the event of a more severe impact, the ECU deploys the driver airbag in reduced force mode;
in the event of a very severe impact, the ECU deploys the driver airbag in full force.
The following logic is applied for the deployment of the passenger airbag:
in the event of a minor impact, the airbag ECU does not deploy the airbags;
in the event of a more severe impact, the ECU deploys the passenger airbag in reduced force mode;
in the event of a very severe impact, the ECU deploys the passenger airbag in full force.
Lateral airbag modules
The vehicle is equipped with two lateral airbags, one located inside the driver side door and the other inside
the passenger side door.
The lateral airbags are controlled by an ECU, which deploys them in the event of a lateral impact of sufficient
severity.
The deployment of the lateral airbags is not influenced by the stature or weight of the occupant.
In the event of a lateral impact of a severity exceeding the threshold set in the ECU, the ECU sends a signal
deploying the pretensioner, the lateral airbag on the side of the collision and the active rollbars. The latter
is a precautional measure as deformation to the bodyshell caused by the impact may impede the
subsequent deployment in the event of the vehicle rolling over.
The airbag begins to inflate, breaking the trim panel along a predetermined break line, and inflates fully within
a few hundreds of a second.
Once inflated, the lateral airbag acts as a protective cushion between the head of the driver/passenger and
any structures penetrating the passenger compartment from the exterior, which could cause injury.
The airbag deflates immediately afterwards.
Deactivating the passenger airbag (FROM M.Y. 2010)
The passenger airbag in the vehicle may only be deactivated by using a specific FERRARI child seat.
The specific child restraint systems have been designed to work in conjunction with the BabySmart™
automatic child seat detection system (CPOD) for the front passenger seat of this vehicle.
The full protective function of the restraint system is only ensured if the restraint system itself is
installed and used correctly.
The specific child seats function like other child safety seats, except for the fact that they are designed to
automatically deactivate the passenger airbag in vehicles equipped with the “BabySmart™ system”.
The specific child seats are equipped with two transponders, which are identified and detected by special
transmitters installed in the front passenger seat.
If the specific child restraint system is installed correctly on the front passenger seat, the transponders are
detected by the transmitters and the front passenger airbag is deactivated.
DO NOT place electronic devices (functioning laptop computers, mobile phones, cards with
transponders etc.) on the front passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with the BabySmart™ system,
as signals emitted by electronic devices may interfere with the automatic child seat detection
system sensors, resulting in system malfunctions and causing the front passenger airbag to fail to
be activated and deactivated correctly.
With the ignition key in position II and the BabySmart™ child restraint system installed on the front passenger
seat, the following conditions are possible:
if the warning light (A) is lit, the passenger airbag is deactivated;
if the warning light (A) is not lit, the passenger airbag is activated;
if the warning light (A) flashes at intervals of 6 seconds, the passenger airbag is deactivated, but only one
of the system's two transponders has been detected, meaning that the child seat is damaged or not
installed correctly.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, the specific message is temporarily displayed on the TFT display.
DEIS procedures for airbag system
- Complete cycle -
Test cycle after generic work on a component of the airbag system.
The cycle consists in checking that the proxi configuration of the ECU has been performed correctly (and
performing proxi alignment if necessary), checking that there are no errors and checking indicator function.
- NAB configuration check -

Cycle comparing the configuration in the ECU with the configuration effectively "read" from the vehicle.
Helpful for diagnosing the precise cause of error B104A, "Proxi configuration mismatch".
- NAB harness check -

Cycle for checking that the right and left hand sides of the airbag wiring harness have not been swapped.
Necessary only in the event of wiring harness replacement. This procedure entails removing all the airbags
and the rollbar.
Removing the driver side airbag module

CAUTION
A damaged airbag module may cause severe or fatal injuries if activated.
After an accident causing airbag deployment, all the components of the system must be replaced
(including wiring harnesses and connectors).
After an accident without airbag deployment, the components of the system (including wiring
harnesses and connectors) must be checked and replaced if found to be bent, damaged or faulty.
Individual system components (including wiring harnesses and connectors) found to be damaged or
faulty must be replaced. NEVER attempt to repair a damaged or faulty component.
Airbag modules are subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals
specified in the “Warranty Card”, EVEN if the vehicle has NOT been involved in an accident.
If the vehicle has been stolen or the subject of an attempted theft, the components of the airbag
system must be checked.
Located on the steering wheel.
Remove the two rubber plugs (3).
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the driver side

airbag module to the steering wheel.
Remove the driver side airbag module (A) from
the steering wheel.
NEVER modify any of the individual
components of the system.
NEVER cut or tamper with the connectors
between the wiring harness and the
airbag modules.
Any inappropriate work carried out on the
components of the system may cause
airbag system malfunctions, involuntary
airbag activation or failure to deploy in the
event of an accident, leading to damage
and possibly fatal injury.
Detach the relative two safety clips, disconnect

the two connectors (1) and remove the driver
side airbag module (A).
Refitting the driver side airbag module

Fastening driver side airbag module Torx screw 9.5 Nm A
CAUTION
airbag modules.
Connect the two connectors (1) to the driver side

airbag module, closing the two relative safety
clips.
Fit the driver side airbag module (A) in its seat
on the steering wheel, arranging the electrical
wiring correctly.
Tighten the two screws (2) fastening the driver

side airbag module to the steering wheel.

Torx screw 9.5 Nm A
Fit the two rubber plugs (3) into their respective

seats, pressing fully into place.

Perform the airbag ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Replacing the passenger side airbag module

Fastening passenger side airbag - upper Nut 7.5 Nm B
dashboard trim panel
Fastening passenger side airbag mounting Screw 5 Nm B
bracket
CAUTION
Remove the upper dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

airbag modules.
Undo the four screws (1) fastening the mounting

bracket (A) for the passenger side airbag
module (B).
Undo the four nuts (2) fastening the passenger
side airbag module (B) to the upper
dashboard trim panel.
Remove the passenger side airbag module (B)
from the upper dashboard trim panel and
replace.
Fit the new passenger side airbag module (B)
onto the upper dashboard trim panel.
Tighten the four nuts (2) fastening the passenger
side airbag module (B) to the upper
dashboard trim panel.

Nut 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the four screws (1) fastening the

mounting bracket (A) for the passenger side
airbag module (B).

Screw 5 Nm B
Refit the upper dashboard trim panel ( E4.02).

Replacing the side airbag modules

Fastening side airbag - mounting bracket Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening side airbag mounting bracket - door Screw 8.5 Nm B
panel
CAUTION
The following procedure is for replacing the driver side side airbag module.
The procedure for replacing the passenger side side airbag module is the same.
Remove the protective foam rubber pads (1)

from the side airbag module mounting bracket
(A).
Undo the five screws indicated fastening the side

airbag module mounting bracket (A) to the
door panel.
Remove the side airbag module mounting
bracket (A) from the respective seat on the
door panel.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the side
airbag module to the respective mounting
bracket (A).

airbag modules.
Disconnect the wiring harness (B) from the side

airbag module (C).
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the side
airbag module to the respective mounting
bracket (A).
Remove the side airbag module (C) from the
respective mounting bracket (A) and replace.
Fit the new side airbag module (C) on the
side airbag module to the respective
mounting bracket (A).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Connect the wiring harness (B) to the side airbag

module (C).
side airbag module to the respective
mounting bracket (A).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the side airbag module mounting bracket (A)

in the respective seat on the door panel.
Tighten the five screws indicated fastening the
side airbag module mounting bracket (A) to
the door panel.

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Apply new protective foam rubber pads (1) to the

side airbag module mounting bracket (A).

Replacing the front crash sensors

Right


front crash sensor (A) to the vehicle chassis.
Remove the front crash sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new front crash sensor (A) in the
respective seat on the vehicle chassis.

Screw 8 Nm B
Left

Remove the front crash sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new front crash sensor (A) in the

Screw 8 Nm B

Replacing the lateral crash sensors

Right

Remove the lower right hand lateral trim panel.
lateral crash sensor (A) to the vehicle chassis.
Remove the lateral crash sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new lateral crash sensor (A) in the

Screw 8 Nm B
Left

Remove the lower left hand lateral trim panel.

Remove the lateral crash sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new lateral crash sensor (A) in the

Screw 8 Nm B

F4.03 Seat belts
Seat belts
The seat belts are three-point automatic belts with an inertial locking retractor with pretensioner.
The front seat belts (1) are located beside the seats, while the rear belts (2), present on configuration 2+ only,
are located beside the leather seats.
Seat belt fastening
After adjusting the seat correctly, grip the clip (B), pull the belt slowly and insert the tongue into the buckle
(C). If the belt locks while pulling, let it rewind a little and then pull it again without jerking abruptly.
Ensure that the tongue clicks audibly into the buckle.
Position the seat belt correctly.
If the driver or passenger seat belts are not buckled, the warning lamp D lights when the ignition key is turned
to (II).
Releasing the seat belts
Press the release button (E).

Accompany the buckle (B) back to its rest position.
Pretensioners
This device consists of a retractor with a pyrotechnic pretensioner. The pyrotechnic system is integrated in a
single component with the retractor.
This device maximises the protective action of the seat belt.
The pretensioner is activated by the airbag control ECU in the event of a frontal collision (direction of impact
between 11 a.m. and 1 p.m.) of excessive severity, or in the event of lateral collision of sufficient severity.
The seat belt is rewound by a few centimetres immediately before the restraining action begins, taking up
any slack between the belt and the body of the occupant.
Effective activation of the pretensioner is indicated by the light on the instrument panel and by the tightening
of the belt.
Pretensioner activation releases a small quantity of powder. This powder is harmless and is not an indication
of fire.
Pretensioner activation depends only on the state of the seat belt and is not influenced by the presence of the
occupant.
If the belt is not buckled, the pretensioner is not activated even if the seat is occupied.
The seat belt is equipped with a load limiter to reduce the restraint force exerted by the belt on the body of
the occupant in the event of a collision. This device controls the force with which the seat belt is rewound
during a collision.
Operation
Before activation, the device is in (G) state.

When the ECU detects a collision of a severity above the set threshold, it sends a signal to the pretensioner,
firing the pyrotechnic charge (1) of the gas generator: the combustion of the propellant (2) releases high
pressure gas, exerting an upward force on the rack piston (3).
This motion is transmitted via pinions (4) and (5) to the toothed bushing (6) which rewinds the belt by a few
centimetres (state H).
This takes up any slack between the belt and the body of the occupant immediately before the retention
action begins.
Once activated, a pretensioner is no longer functional, cannot be repaired and must be replaced.
Seat belt and pretensioner care
Replace the seat belt after a severe collision even if it does not appear damaged.
Periodically check that the anchor screws are tightly fastened and that the belt itself is in good condition
and winds and unwinds smoothly.
The belt must be kept clean; dirt may compromise the effectiveness of the retractor.
To clean the belt, hand wash with water and mild soap, rinse and allow to dry. Do not use strong
detergents, bleach or harsh solvents that could weaken the fibres.
Do not wet the retractors: water infiltration may compromise operation.
The pretensioner requires no maintenance or lubrication. If the pretensioner has been immersed in water
or mud, it must be replaced.
The pretensioners must be replaced every 15 years.
Never dismantle or modify the belts, retractors and pretensioners.
Particular repairs and maintenance work causing violent knocks, vibration or heating near the pretensioner
may accidentally trigger the pretensioner; road vibration and shocks will not trigger the pretensioners.
Safety devices
The pretensioners must be protected from exposure to temperatures of over 100 °C for more than 6 hours
and from sparks and naked flames.
The pretensioner may fire spontaneously at temperatures above 150 °C.
Pretensioners that have sustained knocks or falls must not be used and must be returned to the
manufacturer, specifying the reason.
Gas generators must be kept away from acids, water, grease or heavy metals to prevent the formation of
toxic gases or explosive compounds.
Do not store pretensioners together with inflammable and/or combustible materials.
Never dismantle retention system components.
Never carry pretensioners by the belt, as this may cause damage.
Remove the pretensioners before carrying out repair jobs that may involve violent shocks (e.g.
bodywork/chassis repairs) and/or high temperatures (e.g. painting with temperatures above 100 °C).
Fire pretensioners before scrapping.
Avoid skin contact with the propellant or swallowing: wear protective gloves when handling fired
pretensioners. In the event of contact with the propellant, wash with plenty of water and seek medical
assistance.
Replacing the front seat belts

door window
Fastening front seat belt guide ring - relative Screw 40 Nm A
mounting bracket
The following procedure is for replacing the front left hand seat belt. The procedure for the front right hand
seat belt is the same.

Remove the upper and lower lateral trim panel only.
guide ring to the relative mounting bracket

mounting bracket (5), undoing the two screws
indicated, then remove the bracket from the
quarterlight assembly (red arrow).
Remove the protective foam rubber then

disconnect the connector (2).
Undo the screw (3) fastening the pretensioner (4)
to the bodyshell.
Remove the front seat belt from the vehicle and replace.
Fit the new front seat belt in the relative seat on
the bodyshell.
Fasten the pretensioner (4) to the bodyshell,

Screw 40 Nm A
Connect the connector (2) and wind new

protective foam rubber around the connector.
Fit the foam rubber complete with mounting

bracket (5) in the relative seat on the
quarterlight assembly bracket (red arrow) and
Before fastening the mounting bracket, ensure
that the front seat belt has been threaded
through the slot in the bracket itself.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fit and fasten the front seat belt guide ring on the
relative mounting bracket, tightening the
screw (1).

Screw 40 Nm A

Refit the lower and upper lateral trim panels.

Removing the rear seat belts

The rear seat belts are installed in the 2+2 Version only.
The rear seat belts are equipped with a retractor only and are not fitted with a pretensioner.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear seat belt. The procedure for the rear left hand
seat belt is the same.

Remove the upper right hand trim panel, the central trim panel and the upper central rollbar mounting.

Remove the front right hand trim panel.
Move the luggage compartment separator (1)

toward the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Move the RHT manually into the intermediate

Front Roof shell.
Working from the luggage compartment, undo
the screw (2) fastening the right hand
retractor (A) to the mounting bracket.
Remove the seat belt (B) from the guide (3) on

the rollbar.
Remove the rear right hand seat belt (B) from
the vehicle, complete with retractor.
Refitting the rear seat belts

Fastening rear seat belt retractor Screw 40 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear seat belt. The procedure for the rear left hand seat
belt is the same.
Fit the rear right hand seat belt (B), complete
with retractor, in its seat in the vehicle.
Feed the seat belt (B) around the guide (3) as
originally installed.
Fasten the right hand retractor (A) to the

mounting bracket, tightening the screw (2).

Screw 40 Nm A

Refit the front right hand trim panel.

Refit the upper central rollbar mounting, the central trim panel and the upper right hand trim panel.
F4.04 Inertia switch
Inertia switch operation
The inertia switch is located in front of the driver seat, underneath the floor mat cover.
In the event of a violent collision, the inertia switch cuts the power to the fuel pumps thereby preventing
further fuel leakage from the tank.
The switch is triggered by a steel ball which can move in a tapered seat and is held in place by the attraction
of a permanent magnet.
In the event of a violent collision, the inertia of the ball overcomes the attractive force of the magnet, pushing
the ball up and out of the tapered seat, where it strikes a quick-release mechanism normally forming a
closed circuit.
When the ball strikes the mechanism, the latter changes position, opening the circuit and cutting the power to
the pumps.
Once triggered, the switch may be reset by pressing the top button (A).
CAUTION
If fuel is smelt or fuel leaks are noted from the fuel system after a mild collision, the inertia switch must not
be reset in order to prevent the risk of fire and to enable the safe identification of the cause of the
problem.
Replacing the inertia switch

Fastening inertia switch Screw 5 Nm B
Located in front of the driver side seat, under the mat.

Remove the driver side mat.
Undo the two screws fastening the inertia switch
to the chassis.
Remove the inertia switch (A) and replace.
Fit the new inertia switch (A).
Tighten the two screws fastening the inertia
switch (A) to the chassis.

Screw 5 Nm B

Check the connection.
When refitting, after connecting the inertia switch to the system, reconnect the battery and wait at least one
minute before starting the engine.

F4.05 Rollbar
Rollbar
The active (pop-up) rollbar is designed and installed to maintain a safety zone around the occupants in the
event of the vehicle rolling over.
The active rollbar is controlled by an ECU which deploys the rollbar in the event of a roll angle around the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle high enough to pose a risk of the vehicle rolling.
In the event of a roll angle exceeding the calibrated value, the ECU releases the rollbar lock system, and the
rollbar deploys in 190 ms.
Once deployed, the active rollbar contributes, together with the windscreen frame (and the RHT, if raised), to
maintaining a safety zone around the occupants.
As it is impossible to predict the dynamics of the vehicle and how the occupants will move as an accident
progresses, the active rollbar is also deployed in the event of a rear or lateral impact of sufficient severity
as a precautional measure to provide protection should the vehicle subsequently roll.
Removing the rollbar
CAUTION
Pyrotechnically triggered pressurised system. Non-repairable system. Injury hazard in the event of
accidental activation! Before starting any work, ensure that the battery is disconnected! Service able only
by authorised personnel.
CAUTION
Do not lean over or rest your hands or limbs on the rollbar!
Do not place any objects on the rollbar!
The rollbar must always be replaced if it has been deployed.
A damaged or defective rollbar module must be replaced and MUST NOT be repaired.
NEVER modify the rollbar module.
The rollbar module is subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals

Remove the front rollbar trim panel, the rear backrest release covers, the main hydraulic cylinder trim

CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
Disconnect the two connectors (5) on the rollbar.

Remove the wiring harness (1) from the rollbar
structure, prising open the indicated clips.

remove the wiring harness (1) from the
bracket, prising open the indicated clips.
Move the wiring harness out of the way, so
that it does not hinder the following
operations.
Note that the photo aside was taken without the
luggage compartment floor trim panel and
the luggage compartment separator to
illustrate the operation more clearly.
Undo the screws (6) fastening the left hand

backrest lock (7).
NEW SOLUTION - retrieve the washers.
Remove the left hand backrest lock (7) from the

rollbar.
NEW SOLUTION - retrieve the shim
Only in cases where the complete RHT

retractable hard top will subsequently be
removed: cut the three cable ties indicated by
red arrows fastening the left hand backrest
release cable (8) to the RHT wiring harness
and structure. Remove the lock (7), complete
with the relative release cable, from the
luggage compartment.
Undo the screws (9) fastening the right hand
backrest lock (10).
NEW SOLUTION - retrieve the washers.

Remove the right hand backrest lock (10) from

the rollbar.
NEW SOLUTION - retrieve the shim
Only in cases where the complete RHT

retractable hard top will subsequently be
removed: cut the four cable ties indicated by
red arrows fastening the right hand backrest
release cable (11) to the RHT wiring harness
and structure. Remove the lock (10),
complete with the relative release cable, from
the luggage compartment.
Remove the seat belt guide (16) from both sides

of the rollbar by undoing the screw (17).
Remove the rear seat belts ( F4.03).

Perform ONLY for the 2+2 Version.
Remove the right hand retractor mounting

bracket (12), undoing the screws (13).
Remove the left hand retractor mounting bracket
(14), undoing the screws (15).
Working from the luggage compartment, undo

the rear screw (2) fastening the rollbar (A) to
the RHT assembly.
Repeat the procedure on the left-hand side of
the vehicle.
CAUTION
Manually move the RHT to bring the front and Rear Roof shells into the luggage compartment together.

remove the mounting brackets (3), by
undoing the four screws indicated.
Undo the screws (4) fastening the rollbar (A) to
the RHT assembly.
Ease the rollbar out upwards, remove from the vehicle and set down in a safe place.
Refitting the rollbar

Fastening bracket - RHT assembly Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening RHT assembly bracket - rollbar Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening belt retractor bracket - rollbar Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening rear seat belt guide Screw 4 Nm C
Fastening the backrest lock Screw 12 Nm B
CAUTION
Pyrotechnically triggered pressurised system. Non-repairable system. Injury hazard in the event of
accidental activation! Before starting any work, ensure that the battery is disconnected! Service able only
by authorised personnel.
CAUTION
Do not lean over or rest your hands or limbs on the rollbar!
Do not place any objects on the rollbar!
The rollbar must always be replaced if it has been deployed.

A damaged or defective rollbar module must be replaced and MUST NOT be repaired.
NEVER modify the rollbar module.
The rollbar module is subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals
With the Front and Rear Roof shells in the luggage compartment and the Tonneau Cover open, fit the
rollbar in the relative seat on the vehicle.
Fasten the mounting brackets (3) to the RHT

assembly, by hand tightening the four screws
indicated, aligning the fastener hole on the
bracket with the hole on the rollbar.
Apply and hand tighten the screws (4) fastening
the RHT assembly to the rollbar.
Tighten the four screws indicated and the screws
(4).
The rollbar must remain above the bodyshell
with a gap of a few mm in between.

Screw 23 Nm B
Screw 23 Nm B
CAUTION

Front Roof shell.
Working from the luggage compartment, tighten

the rear screw (2) fastening the rollbar (A) to
the RHT assembly.
Repeat the procedure on the left-hand side of
the vehicle.

Screw 23 Nm B
When installing a new rollbar, remove the

mounting cross member, undoing the two
screws indicated.
Fit the left hand retractor mounting bracket (14)

Screw 23 Nm B
Fit the right hand retractor mounting bracket (12)


Screw 23 Nm B
Refit the rear seat belts ( F4.03).

Perform ONLY for the 2+2 Version.
Fit the rear seat belt guide (16) in the relative

seat on both sides of the rollbar and fasten by

Screw 4 Nm C
Fit the right backrest lock (10) in the relative seat.
NEW SOLUTION - fit the shim between the
rollbar and the right hand backrest lock (10).


NEW SOLUTION - fit the washers.

Screw 12 Nm B
Only if the complete RHT retractable hard top

assembly has been removed - fit four new
clamps in the locations indicated (red arrows)
to fasten the right hand backrest release
cable (11) to the RHT structure.
Fit the left hand backrest lock (7) in the relative

seat.
NEW SOLUTION - fit the shim between the
rollbar and the left hand backrest lock (7).


NEW SOLUTION - fit the washers.

Screw 12 Nm B
Only if the complete RHT retractable hard top

assembly has been removed - fit three new
clamps in the locations indicated (red arrows)
to fasten the left hand backrest release cable
(8) to the RHT structure.
fasten the wiring harness (1) to the bracket,
fitting the indicated clips in the relative holes.
Fasten the wiring harness (1) to the rollbar
structure, fitting the indicated clips in the
relative holes.
Connect the two connectors (5) on the rollbar.

Ensure that they are effectively connected.

Refit the front trim panels, the main hydraulic cylinder trim panels, the rear backrest release covers
and the front rollbar trim panel.

F4.06 Park assistance
Parking sensors
There are two different versions of the parking sensor used to visualise parking distances on the TFT display:
4-sensor version: 4 sensors installed in rear bumper only;
8-sensor version: 4 sensors installed in front bumper and 4 sensors installed in rear bumper.
In key-on state, the parking sensors are activated when reverse is engaged.
With the 8-sensor version, the front or rear sensors alone may be selected.
Parking sensor screen on TFT display
The TFT display displays the vehicle icon with symbols representing the measured distance (maximum,
medium, minimum) and position (front/rear, left hand/right hand, centre) of an object relative to the vehicle.
The symbols appear in three different colours representing three different distance ranges:
Obstacle detected at the MAXIMUM DISTANCE in the centre front zone (GREEN).
Obstacle detected at MEDIUM DISTANCE in the centre front zone (YELLOW).

Obstacle detected at MINIMUM DISTANCE in the centre front zone (RED).
If the rear sensors are activated and the front sensors deactivated (8-sensor version) or the front sensors are
not installed (4-sensor version), the display does not display the symbols for the front of the vehicle.
With the 8-sensor version only, if the front sensors are activated and the rear sensors deactivated, the TFT
display only displays the symbols for the front of the vehicle.
Obstacle detected at the maximum distance in the centre front zone and obstacle detected at the minimum
distance in the right hand rear zone.
If the system detects obstacles in multiple zones, the TFT display displays the coloured symbols in the
corresponding zones.
In the event of fault occurring while the parking sensor symbols are displayed, the relative fault message is
shown on the left of the TFT display and the vehicle icon with parking sensor symbols is moved to the
right side of the display.
In the event of a tyre deflated or tyre puncture warning, as this has a higher priority, the TFT display gives
precedence to the fault and no longer displays the parking sensor symbols.
At the end of the display cycle for the fault, the parking sensor symbols will return to the centre of the screen,
but only when the left-hand side of the screen is completely empty.
The parking sensor symbols will be also displayed on the right-hand side of the TFT display when other
systems are concurrently functional (displayed on the left-hand side of the TFT display).
The same strategy is applicable for hard top status display (roof opening, closing or in standby) while the
parking sensor symbols are displayed.
In the event of failure (priority 2) in at least one of the parking sensors, the TFT display displays the specific
symbol and the message "Parking sensor failure, warning! possible obstacles".
This is accompanied by a warning sound.
Replacing the front buzzer

Located under the defroster fixing plate on the upper central section of the dashboard.
Apply leverage in the points indicated in the

photo to lift the defroster fixing plate (1) taking
particular care not to damage the dashboard
trim panel.
Disconnect the connector (2) of the sun radiation

sensor and the connector (3) of the anti-theft
LED.
Remove the defroster fixing plate (1) from the
dashboard.

screws indicated.
Remove the front parking sensor buzzer (A) from
the dashboard.
Fit the new front parking sensor buzzer (A) in its
seat on the dashboard and fasten by

Screw 1.5 Nm B

Remove the defroster fixing plate (1) and
connect the connector (2) to the sun radiation
sensor and the connector (3) to the anti-theft
LED.
Fit the defroster fixing plate (1) into the relative

seat, by first inserting the front fasteners and
then fasten it using manual pressure.
Replacing the rear buzzer

Located over the upper central rollbar mounting.

Remove the centre passenger compartment trim panel.
screws indicated.
Remove the rear parking sensor buzzer (A) from
the upper central rollbar mounting.
Fit the new rear parking sensor buzzer (A) in its
seat on the upper central rollbar mounting
and fasten by tightening the two screws
indicated.

Screw 1.5 Nm B

Refit the centre passenger compartment trim panel.
Replacing the parking sensors
Located on the rear bumper (standard sensors) and on the front bumper (optional sensors).


Raise the tabs (2) and ease out the parking
sensor (A) towards the inner side of the
bumper.
Fit the new parking sensor (A), with the
connector side facing toward the inner side of
the bumper, fastening between the tabs (2).

F5.01 Air conditioning and heating system layout
System overview
The air conditioning and heating system automatically regulates the temperature and humidity in the
passenger compartment. The system can simultaneously and independently regulate air temperature and
distribution for the driver side zone and passenger side zone.
The A.C. system consists of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning unit (HVAC) located under the
dashboard.
The passenger compartment is split longitudinally into two temperature zones:

driver zone;
passenger zone.
The dual zone regulation system regulates the following parameters:

passenger compartment air temperature in driver zone;
air distribution via vents in driver zone;
passenger compartment air temperature in passenger zone;
air distribution via vents in passenger zone;
ventilation with external air or recirculating air in passenger compartment;
fan speed.
Functional requisites
The functions of the HVAC module, located under the dashboard, consist in aspirating air through heat
exchanger either from outside the vehicle or from inside (REC function) and in continuously adjusting the
quantity and temperature of the distributed air.
The air introduced into the vehicle must be filtered to remove particulate and odours in both external air and
REC modes.
The air temperature is regulated by altering the flow of refrigerant through the heater core in two symmetrical
crossed circuits, with one on the left-hand side and one on the right-hand side.
Air conditioning and heating system layout
The air conditioning and heating system consists of a heater/evaporator unit (HVAC) controlled by a
microprocessor ECU (integrated in the A.C. control panel) which, in both automatic and manual mode,
maintains constant temperature within the passenger compartment regardless of external conditions by
regulating the air temperature, distribution and air flow.
The system automatically selects whether to use air from outside the vehicle or air recirculated within the
passenger compartment, independently of ambient conditions.
The R134 A refrigerant is aspirated in gaseous state by the compressor (B), which sends it to the condenser
(C) at a pressure varying in relation to ambient temperature.
When the refrigerant cools inside the condenser, it condenses and becomes a liquid.
The dehydrator filter, which is built into the radiator assembly, removes all traces of humidity due to water
vapour in the system and acts as a tank for the liquid refrigerant.
A pressure switch (L) in this part of the system measures the pressure and disengages the electromagnetic
clutch when the pressure limit is reached.
The refrigerant passes through the expansion valve (M), which regulates flow to the evaporator (G), reducing
the pressure.
Inside the evaporator, refrigerant passes from liquid state to gaseous state at low pressure (1.5 and 2 bar),
and low temperature (-5 and +5° C), absorbing heat from the air passing through the air conditioning unit.
As the refrigerant leaves the evaporator, it is aspirated into the compressor, which pumps it back into the
circuit.
A - System charge/discharge unions

B - Compressor
C - Condenser
D - Dehydrator filter
E - Recirculation pump
F - TGK valves
L - Pressure switch
G - Heater/evaporator
H - Pollen filter
I - Air vents
M - Expansion valve
F5.02 AC system controls
Air conditioning controls
AUTO function
Press the AUTO button (A) to enable automatic AC system control for the driver side.
The AUTO button LED illuminates to indicate that AUTO function is enabled. If the LED is off, AUTO function
is disabled.
The following functions are managed automatically for the driver side:
Driver side air distribution.
Fan speed
Compressor
Air recirculation
Press the AUTO button (B) to enable automatic AC system control for the passenger side.
The AUTO button LED illuminates to indicate that AUTO function is enabled. If the LED is off, AUTO function
is disabled.
The following functions are managed automatically for the passenger side:
Passenger side air distribution.
Fan speed
Compressor
Air recirculation
With AUTO mode enabled (relative LED illuminated), when one or more of the aforementioned functions are
adjusted manually, the AUTO button LED extinguishes but the remaining function or functions continue to be
managed automatically.
Manually adjusting air temperature
Turn the dial (C) counterclockwise towards the blue symbol to reduce the air temperature on the driver side
down to a minimum temperature of 16°C / 62°F.
Turn the dial (C) clockwise towards the red symbol to increase the air temperature on the driver side up to a
maximum temperature of 28°C / 82°F.
Turn the dial (D) counterclockwise towards the blue symbol to reduce the air temperature on the passenger
side down to a minimum temperature of 16°C / 62°F.
Turn the dial (D) clockwise towards the red symbol to increase the air temperature on the passenger side up
to a maximum temperature of 28°C / 82°F.
Manually adjusting air distribution
Turn the dial (E) clockwise or counterclockwise to manually select one of the six driver side air distribution
modes.
When driver side air distribution is selected manually, the relative LED illuminates to indicate the selected
mode. Press the AUTO button (A) or (B) to enable automatic air distribution control.
When automatic driver side air distribution is selected, the air distribution mode indicator LED is off. Turn the
dial (E) to enable manual air distribution selection. The relative LED for the mode selected illuminates.
Turn the dial (F) clockwise or counterclockwise to manually select one of the six passenger side air
distribution modes.
When passenger side air distribution is selected manually, the relative LED illuminates to indicate the
selected mode. Press the AUTO button (A) or (B) to enable automatic air distribution control.
When automatic passenger side air distribution is selected, the air distribution mode indicator LED is off. Turn
the dial (F) to enable manual air distribution selection. The relative LED for the mode selected illuminates.
Manually adjusting fan speed
Turn the dial (G) clockwise or counterclockwise into the off position or one of the four speed settings to switch
off the fan or manually select one of the four fan speed setting.
When fan speed is adjusted manually, the relative LED indicates the speed setting selected. Press the AUTO
button (A) or (B) to enable automatic air distribution control.
When automatic fan speed control is selected, the relative LED is off. Turn the dial (G) to enable manual fan
speed adjustment. The relative LED indicating the selected fan speed setting illuminates.
Compressor
Press button (H) to enable or disable AC compressor function.

The LED for button (H) illuminates only to indicate that compressor function is enabled and is off if
compressor function is disabled. Effective engagement of the compressor clutch is determined by the
engine control node.
MONO mode
Press the MONO button (I) to activate and deactivate mono zone mode.
The LED for button (I) illuminates to indicate that mono zone mode is enabled and is off to indicate that mono
zone mode is deactivated.
Rear screen demist or defrost
Press button (L) to activate or deactivate the rear screen demist/defrost function.
The LED for button (I) illuminates to indicate that the rear screen demist/defrost function is active and is off to
indicate that the rear screen demist/defrost function is deactivated.
Windscreen demist or defrost
Press button (M) to activate or deactivate the windscreen demist/defrost function.

The LED for button (M) illuminates to indicate that the windscreen demist/defrost function is active and is off
to indicate that the windscreen demist/defrost function is deactivated.
Air recirculation
Press button (N) to activate or deactivate the air recirculation function.

The LED for button (M) illuminates to indicate that the recirculation function is activated and is off to indicate
that the recirculation function is deactivated.
Removing the A.C. control panel
The panel is located at the front of the centre console trim.
The NCL ECU for the air conditioning and heating system is integrated in the AC control panel.

leather trim
Prise the AC control panel (A) out of its seat with

a suitable tool.
Disconnect the two connectors (1) from the AC
control panel (A).
Remove the AC control panel (A).
Refitting the A.C. control panel
Connect the two connectors (1) to the A.C.

control panel (A).

leather trim
Arrange the electrical wiring correctly, fit the A.C.

control panel (A) in its seat and press
manually to fix into place.

Perform the NCL Air Conditioning ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
F5.03 AC system compressor
Compressor type: variable displacement

Number of pistons: 7
Displacement: 165 cm³
Control type: internal (pneumatic)
Clutch type: magnetic clutch
Seal system: gaskets
Refrigerant: R134a
Mounting: engine block
Weight (with clutch): ≤ 7Kg
This compressor must meet the following operating requisites:

Min. rpm: 700 rpm
Max. continuous rpm: 8500 rpm
Minimum clutch couple voltage: 7.5 V
Removing the compressor
The compressor is located on the left-hand side of the engine.

Remove the front stabiliser bar ( D4.05).
Remove the rear section of the left hand wheel bay.
For vehicles with Stop & Start and FROM

Assembly No. 97402

Undo the screws (9) and (10) fastening the front
heat shield (B) onto the compressor.
Remove the front heat shield (B).
Undo the screw (1) fastening the delivery and

return unions (2) on the compressor.
Detach the connector (3) and undo the screws

(4) fastening the compressor (A) to the
engine.
Undo the screw (6) fastening the bracket (5) to
the heat shield.
UP TO ENGINE Serial No. 149486
Loosen the screw (7) fastening the heat shield

(8) to the engine, to permit the removal of the
compressor.
Lift and remove the compressor (A) from the

bottom of the vehicle, by retrieving the shims
and relative fastener screws.
If compressor replacement is necessary, drain the oil from the compressor via the relative threaded plug
(on the cylindrical body) and measure the quantity retrieved. The new compressor must be emptied in
the same way (the new compressor is shipped with 200 ml of oil) and filled with same quantity of oil
retrieved from the replaced compressor before installation in the vehicle.
Refitting the compressor

shell
When installing a new compressor, the oil must first be drained from the compressor via the threaded plug
(on the cylindrical body) (the new compressor is shipped with 200 ml of oil) and the new compressor
must be filled with same quantity of oil retrieved from the replaced compressor before installation in the
vehicle.
Fit the compressor in the relative seat, fitting
upper compressor mounting bracket under
the heat shield mounting bracket (8).
Tighten the screw (7) fastening the heat shield to
the engine.

Screw 10 Nm B
Apply the screws (11), (12) and (13), with the

relative brackets, and screw down until flush
but without tightening.
After fitting the shims retrieved during
disassembly, tighten the screws fastening the
compressor (A) to the engine in the following
sequence: (11) - (12) - (13).

Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the upper screw (6) fastening the bracket

(5) to the heat shield.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the delivery and return unions (2) on the

compressor, after replacing the O-rings, and
fasten by tightening the screw (1).

Screw 9 Nm B
Hand tighten the screws (9) and (10) fastening
the front heat shield (B) onto the compressor.
For vehicles with Stop & Start and FROM

Assembly No. 97402
Refit the front stabiliser bar ( D4.05).
Checking compressor oil level and refilling
The oil level may only be determined with the compressor removed from the vehicle, as there is no level
sensor.
The oil level in the compressor does not need to be checked when using tools that recharge the
system with the same amount of oil removed during draining.
The compressor oil level must be checked every time a system leak is noted and before recharging with
refrigerant during scheduled maintenance.

Undo the cap (1) and drain all remaining oil.
Use only the prescribed type of oil. Do not
use products which may damage the
hoses.
Fill with the prescribed quantity of oil via the plug

orifice (1).
Refit the plug (1) with relative gasket and tighten

securely.
Refit the compressor ( F5.03).

F5.04 AC system condenser
Removing the condenser
Fit on the radiator assembly, behind the power steering fluid radiator.

Remove the power steering fluid radiator ( D5.05).
Release the rigid AC pipes (2) from the retainer

clip (1).
Undo the screws (3) and detach the rigid A.C.

pipes (2) from the condenser.
Undo the upper screws (4) and the lower screws
(5), then remove the A.C. condenser (A) from
the radiator assembly.
Refitting the condenser

A.C. pipes - condenser Screw 9 Nm B
Before fitting the A.C. condenser, check the state

of the foam rubber (6); replace if necessary,
refitting as originally installed.
Fit the A.C. condenser (A) on the relevant
mounting points on the radiator assembly.
Tighten the lower screws (5).

Screw 5 Nm B
Tighten the upper screws (4).

Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the rigid AC pipes (2) in the relevant seat on
the condenser, replace the seals and tighten
the screws (3).

Screw 9 Nm B
Fasten the rigid AC pipes (2) onto the retainer

clip (1).
Refit the power steering fluid radiator ( D5.05).

F5.05 AC system pressure switch
The pressure transducer must be applied to the high pressure side of the refrigerant line. It sends an electric
signal corresponding to the peak in pressure on the high pressure side of the refrigerant cycle.
Technical specifications:
Power supply voltage: 5 V ± 10%
Power supply current: 7.0 mA MAX output
Operating temperature: -1 °C ± 120 °C
Impedence: 51 kOhm (± 5%)
Linear signal output from 0 to 32 bar
Replacing the pressure switch
Located in front of the ABS/ASR ECU.


Remove the connector (1) from the pressure

switch (A).
Remove the pressure switch (A) from the
connector block by undoing it.
Refit the pressure switch (A) in its seat in the
connector block and fully tighten.

F5.06 AC system expansion valve
Replacing the expansion valve

A.C. system delivery and return pipes - Nut 16 Nm A
expansion valve
A.C. system delivery and return pipes Screw / Nut 6 Nm B
Located in the engine compartment on the left of the firewall.

Undo the screw (6) fastening the clamp on the

delivery pipe to the compressor.
Undo the nut (4) fastening the clamp on the

delivery pipe (A) to the compressor.
Undo the screw (2) fastening the clamp on the
return pipe (A) from the condenser.
Remove the retainer clamp (5) on the delivery
and return pipes (A).
Undo the nut (1) fastening the delivery and return
pipes (A) onto the expansion valve.
Disconnect and plug the delivery and return
pipes (A).
Fit the delivery and return pipes (A), taking care
not to damage or bend the pipes.
expansion valve (B) onto the
heater/evaporator.
Remove the expansion valve (B) from the engine
compartment and replace.
Replace the two gaskets (3), lubricating with

specific R134A oil for refrigerant systems and
installing in the relative seats on the pipes.
Take the new expansion valve and fit completely

in the relative seat, TAKING CARE not to
crush the gaskets.
the expansion valve (B) onto the
heater/evaporator.
Replace the two gaskets on the delivery and
return pipes, lubricating with specific R134A
oil for refrigerant systems.
Fit the delivery and return pipes (A) correctly on
the expansion valve, taking particular CARE
not to crush the two gaskets.
Tighten the nut (1) fastening the delivery and
return pipes (A) onto the expansion valve.

Nut 16 Nm A
Fit the retainer clamp (5) on the delivery and

return pipes (A).
Tighten the screw (2) fastening the clamp on the
return pipe (A) onto the condenser.

Screw / Nut 6 Nm B
Tighten the nut (4) fastening the clamp on the

delivery pipe (A) to the compressor.

Screw / Nut 6 Nm B
Tighten the screw (6) fastening the clamp on the

delivery pipe to the compressor.

Screw / Nut 6 Nm B

F5.07 Complete AC unit
The A.C. system must be capable of supplying the passenger compartment with air at the desired
temperature via the outlet vents listed below, regardless of any external disruption such as intense
sunlight, vehicle speed or the air distribution mode:
air vents (right, centre right, centre left and left);
footwell air vents (right and left);
defrosting vents (right and left).
The temperature of the air coming out of the vents may be regulated independently and separately on the
right and left sides of the HVAC cluster, and between equivalent vents.
In a single vent, the difference in temperature between the hottest and the coldest points should not exceed 3
°C. This requires a homogenous mixture in each vent.
The maximum disparity between the upper left and upper right vents, for any type of distribution, is 5 °C
under single zone use.
Cooling of the air distributed by the HVAC module and the consequent dehumidification takes place thanks to
aluminium heat exchangers, which make the refrigerant fluid R134a evaporate internally, after having
reduced its pressure using the thermostatic expansion valve.
F5.08 AC system TGK solenoid valves
The water valve is a proportional valve which controls the flow of coolant (a mixture of water and glycol)
which passes over the heated core as well as the temperature of the air leaving the air conditioning
system.
Operating voltage: 12 V ± 30%
Maximum internal leakage: 20ml @ 29kPa (g)
Maximum drop in pression: 2.39 kPa @ 360 l/h
Removing the TGK valves
Located behind the front right wheelhouse, near the gear oil heat exchanger.

Remove the right hand cosmetic underdashboard shield.
Remove the two retainer clips indicated and

move the fuel pipe and the direct pipe to the
evaporative emissions control system
solenoid valve laterally to allow access to the
area beneath.
Detach the connector (1) from the TGK valves.
Remove the collars (2) and disconnect the pipes
from the TGK valves (A).
Note that the photo was taken in the engine
compartment to illustrate the subsequent
operations more clearly.

from the TGK valves (A).
Rotate and remove the fastener clip (4) from the
tie-rod (5).
Slide the tie-rod (5) out of the hole indicated on
the bracket and withdraw it from above
Remove the TGK valves (A) from the relative
mounting bracket, slipping them out of the
wheel bay.
Refitting the TGK valves
Position the TGK valves (A), from the front right

wheel bay, in the relative mounting bracket
and secure them, first by inserting the tie-rod
(5) into the hole indicated on the bracket, then
by exerting pressure to insert clip (4) into the
relative hole.
Rotate the clip (4), stopping it on the tie-rod (5).

Connect the pipes on the TGK valves (A), and
fasten by fitting and tightening new collars (2).
Connect the pipes on the TGK valves (A), and
fasten by fitting and tightening new collars (3).
Link connector (1) to the TGK valves.

Fit the retainer clips indicated and fix the fuel
pipe and the direct pipe to the evaporative
emissions control system solenoid valve as
before.

F5.09 AC system recirculation pump
Removing the recirculation pump
Located behind the front right wheelhouse, near the gear oil heat exchanger.

Operating from the wheel bay, detach the

connector (1) from the recirculation pump (A).

(3).
From above, undo the nut (4) fastening the
retainer clamp (5) to the recirculation pump
(A).
Ease the recirculation pump backwards (A) and
remove it from the wheel bay.
Refitting the recirculation pump

Water recirculation pump - TGK valve bracket Nut 9 Nm B
From the front right wheel bay, fit the
recirculation pump (A), into the relative seat
and fix it with the clamp (5) by tightening the
nut (4).

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the respective water pipes (3) onto the

recirculation pump (A), and fasten by fitting
and tightening new collars (2).

F5.10 AC system sensors
Passenger compartment temperature sensor
A small ventilator ensures that the air in the passenger compartment is constantly circulated over the
sensitive part of the sensor. This ensures that the ECU receives a continually updated signal relative to
the internal cabin temperature.
Type: Brushless
Operating temperature: -30 °C ÷ 85 °C
Test voltage: 13.5 VDC
Operating voltage: 10÷16 VDC
Starting voltage: 4.5 V; 8 VDC
Sensor type: NTC
Resistance: 10 Kohm±5% to 25 °C
Dissipated thermal constant: 4 mW/°C
Replacing the passenger compartment temperature sensor
It is fastened onto the dashboard, to the right of the steering column.

Undo the three retainer clips and remove the

passenger compartment temperature sensor
(A).
Under pressure, insert the passenger
compartment temperature sensor (A) into its
protective cover, making sure that it is fully
fastened.

Sun radiation sensor
Fitted on the top of the dashboard to ensure measurements on both the left and right sides of the passenger
compartment, the sun radiation sensor optimises ventilation and the temperature adjustment within the
passenger compartment in relation to the intensity of the sunlight.
Power supply voltage: 5V

Power supply current: 95μA±15% with output signal at 0° elevation
Replacing the sun radiation sensor
Located on the defroster fixing plate on the upper central section of the dashboard.
Apply leverage in the points indicated in the

photo to lift the defroster fixing plate (1) taking
particular care not to damage the dashboard
trim panel.
Disconnect the connector (2) of the sun radiation

sensor and the connector (3) of the anti-theft
LED.
Remove the defroster fixing plate (1) from the
dashboard.
Press the two clips indicated and ease the sun
radiation sensor (A) out of the upper section
of the defroster fixing plate.
Fit the sun radiation sensor (A) into the relative

seat on the defroster fixing plate and fit it
using manual pressure, making sure that it is
correctly fastened.
Remove the defroster fixing plate (1) and

connect the connector (2) to the sun radiation
sensor and the connector (3) to the anti-theft
LED.
Fit the defroster fixing plate (1) into the relative
seat, by first inserting the front fasteners and
then fasten it using manual pressure.

F5.11 Discharging and charging the AC system
Discharging the air conditioning system
The air conditioning and heating system must be discharged with the special tool for recovering refrigerant
gas.
If the function is available on the tool, measure the quantity of fluid recovered from the system to enable
subsequent refilling with the correct amount.

Remove the caps (1).
CAUTION
Discharging refrigerant gas near open flame is
extremely dangerous and may result in the
emission of toxic gas (phosgene).
Connect the RED union (B) to the high pressure

pipe.
Connect the BLUE union (A) to the low pressure
pipe.
Perform the refrigerant gas recovery cycle.
Perform the system discharge cycle.
To ensure correct system operation, the
specified vacuum values must be attained
during the vacuum cycle.
CAUTION
Do not use open flames to search for refrigerant
leaks, as this may generate toxic gas
(phosgene).
If the vacuum value exceeds 33 mbar (25

mmHg) within 5 minutes, check the system
for leaks.
Disconnect the RED union (B).
Disconnect the BLUE union (A).
Charging the air conditioning system
If some of the compressor oil has remained trapped in the machine after the discharging procedure, top up
the system with the same quantity of the specified oil.
Connect the RED union (B) to the high pressure

pipe.
Connect the BLUE union (A) to the low pressure
pipe.
CAUTION
Do not use open flames to search for refrigerant
leaks, as this may generate toxic gas
(phosgene).
After removing of any system component,

perform the system vacuum cycle and
check for leaks.
Disconnect the RED union (B) from the high
pressure pipe.
Selecting the low pressure circuit only, perform
the system charge cycle and wait for the
cycle to complete.
Start the engine.
Activate the AC system by setting the minimum
temperature and the maximum fan speed.
Increase engine speed to 2000 rpm a few times.
Check that the low pressure circuit manometer
reading stabilises at around 2.5 bar.
Disconnect the BLUE union (A) from the low
pressure pipe.
Refit the caps (1).

Fluids and lubricants table
Parts to be refilled Conformant product Ferrari recommended product Quantity

Engine lub. system Engine oil PENNZOIL Platinum Euro 11.6 qt 6)
SAE 1) 5W-40 SAE 5W-40
API 2) SN/CF 1.6 qt 7)
ACEA 3) A3/B4 1.1 to 2.1
qt /600 mi 8)
Engine cooling sys. 50% solution of PAKELO Coolant G48® Blue Green 19.0 qt
UP TO Ass.ly prediluted
No. 87848 antifreeze/coolant
Engine cooling sys. 50% solution of PAKELO Coolant G30® Red Long 19.0 qt
FROM Ass.ly prediluted Life
Engine cooling sys. 50% solution of PAKELO Coolant G30® Red Long 22.2 qt
FROM Ass.ly prediluted Life
Hydraulic syst. DCT Transmission fluid SAE SHELL Spirax S5 ATE 75W-90 5.2 qt
1)
gearbox gears 75W-90
Hydraulic syst. Transmission fluid SAE SHELL Spirax S5 ATE 75W-90 3.7 qt
1)
DCT gearbox gears 75W-90
FROM Ass.ly
No. 89389
Hydraulic syst. Transmission fluid SAE SHELL Spirax S5 ATE 75W-90 4.9 qt
1)
Mechanical gearbox 75W-90
Hydraulic syst. DCT-F3 or equivalent SHELL DCT-F3 9.7 qt
DCT gearbox clutches
Hydraulic syst. DCT-F3 or equivalent SHELL DCT-F3 8.2 qt
DCT gearbox clutches
FROM Ass.ly
No. 89389
Hydraulic syst. DOT4 4) PETRONAS Tutela Brake Fluid 1.2 qt
Brakes Extreme HT / SHELL Brake and
Clutch DOT4 Ultra
Hydraulic syst. DOT4 4) PETRONAS Tutela Brake Fluid 1.5 qt
Brakes and clutch Extreme HT / SHELL Brake and
Mechanical gearbox Clutch DOT4 Ultra
Hydraulic syst Transmission fluid SHELL Spirax S4 ATF HDX 1.6 qt
Steering
UP TO Ass.ly
No. 98001
Hydraulic syst CHF 11S or equivalent PENTOSIN CHF 11S 1.6 qt
Steering
FROM Ass.ly
No. 98002
Hydraulic syst. CHF 11S or equivalent PENTOSIN CHF 11S 0.4 qt
RHT
0.07 qt 7)
Fuel system Unleaded 20.6 US gal
petrol/gasoline (91-94
A.K.I. 5))
Reserve Unleaded 5.3 US gal
petrol/gasoline (91-94
A.K.I. 5))
A/C system Refrigerant R 134a 1.1 ± 0.1 lb
gas
Compressor RL-897 12.2 cu in
oil
Windscreen/Headlamp Mixture of water and 1.6 US gal
washer sys. glass cleaner

This vehicle is compatible with unleaded petrol/gasoline with an ethanol content of up to 10% (E10).
Using fuels with an ethanol content between 10% to 25% ethanol may cause engine malfunction.
Using fuels with an ethanol content above 25% may cause permanent damage to the components of the engine fuel
system.
1) SAE - Viscosity grade

Example: SAE 5W – 40
5W = indicates the viscosity grade at low temperatures (winter)
40 = indicates the viscosity grade at high temperatures
2) API - American Petroleum Institute

Example: SN/CF
SN = the first letter indicates that an engine oil is suitable for petrol engines, the second letter indicates the oil quality as
defined by API tables.
CF = the first letter indicates that an engine oil is suitable for diesel engines, the second letter indicates the oil quality as
defined by API tables.
3) ACEA - European Automobile Manufacturers Association:

Example: A3/B4
A3 = indicates a high performance engine oil suitable for petrol engines.
B4 = indicates a high performance engine oil suitable for diesel engines.
4) DOT - Brake fluid classification
indicates the chemical/physical characteristics of the brake fluid.
5) A.K.I. - Anti Knock Index

indicates the knock resistance of a fuel.
6) Quantity at empty level.
7) Quantity between MIN and MAX.

8) Consumption.
Chassis number: Dossier creation date:
Job order No.: Mileage in Km/mi:
Notes:
20.000 km (12.500 miles)
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking ModisCS system for any active campaigns  
A Booking in - preparing vehicle
B Indicator light check  

External visual brake inspection (pads and discs);
C  
replace if necessary
D EPB electric parking brake function check  
E Lifting the vehicle
F Visually inspect brakes internally for wear  

G Removing the rear bumper diffuser
H Removing the rear flat undertray section
I Checking the gear oil level  

Checking (DCT gearbox) hydraulic clutch system fluid
L  
level
M Removing the front flat undertray section
Preparations for draining the engine oil
N (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Visual inspection for leaks and checking ancillary
O  
drive belts (perform while draining engine oil)
P Removing the engine oil filter
Check front and rear suspension components

Q  
(perform while engine oil is draining)
Visual inspection of differential-gearbox assembly,
R fasteners and bushings and state of exhaust system  
(perform while draining oil via filter)
Checking tightness of engine and gearbox mounting
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
Description of operation Notes
OK OK
S Fitting a new engine oil filter  

T Setting the vehicle on the ground
T1 Filling with engine oil  

Removing lateral cosmetic shields and underwindscreen shield to allow access
U to the brake, engine coolant and windscreen washer fluid tanks and reservoirs
Visual level inspection and, if necessary, topping up of
power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant and  
V
windscreen-headlight washer fluid
Visually inspect pipes  
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filters
(in the event of use in particularly dusty conditions
V1  
or on roads treated with sand and/or salt, more frequent
replacement is recommended)
Z Replace pollen filter  
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years)  
Z4 Replace seat belts and pretensioners (every 15 years)  
Z5 Replacing Active Rollbar (every 15 years)  
a Start engine and check engine oil level  
a1 Checking tyre pressure  
a2 Check wheel fastener tightness  
a3 Check A/C system  
Visual inspection of oil and fluid tightness and of areas
 
a4 subject to fretting (pipes and hoses)
Refitting shields in engine compartment
Final checks (open/close doors, check fuel filler cap

a5  
and check seat and seat belt functions)
a6 Checking function of headlights and horn  
Checking windscreen wiper, windscreen washer and
a7  
headlight washer system function
Check and lubricate controls and adjuster parts in
a8  
general (including hinges, doors and lid strikers)
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle
Visual inspection of vehicle underbody for oil and fluid

c  
leaks
c1 Check radiators for fouling; clean if necessary  
d Refitting the rear flat undertray section
d1 Refitting the rear bumper diffuser
e Refitting the front flat undertray section
f Setting the vehicle on the ground
Lubricate the upper windscreen seal and the front and

f1 rear RHT roof panel seals with DuPont Lubricants  
g Service counter reset  
g1 DEIS Diagnosis  
h Road test (vehicle test)  
i Car wash and cleaning interiors (optional)  
Procedure carried out by (Dealer):
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
Stamp with company trading name

Full signature
Vehicle delivery date:

Notes:
40.000 km (25.000 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK


V
V1  
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
60.000 km (37.500 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  
Replacing ancillary drive belts (every 37.500 mi/2
O1 years - replace more frequently if vehicle is used in  
severe operating conditions)

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK


V
V1  
Z1 Replacing spark plugs  
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
80.000 km (50.000 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK

Cleaning, repairing or replacing pipes and hoses in
S1  
emissions control system

V
V1  
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing ignition
V2  
cables
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

g2 Adjusting idle speed  
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
100.000 km (62.500 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  

Changing gear oil (change more frequently if vehicle is

I1  
used in severe operating conditions)
L  
level
Changing power steering fluid (change more frequently if

M2  
vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK


V
V1  
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
120.000 km (75.000 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK

S2 Replacing oxygen sensors (perform at 80.000 mi)  

V
V1  
Z1 Replacing spark plugs  
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
140.000 km (87.500 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK

S2 Replacing oxygen sensors (perform at 80.000 mi)  

V
V1  
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
160.000 Km (100.000 miles)
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK

Cleaning, repairing or replacing pipes and hoses in
S1  
emissions control system
S3 Replacing catalytic converters  

V
V1  
V2 Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing ignition cables  
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing air injection
V3  
system components
V4 Replacing fuel injectors  
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing engine control
V5 ECU and relative sensors (excluding oxygen sensors) and  
actuators
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing evaporative
V6  
and fuel filler emissions canister
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

g2 Adjusting idle speed  
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Notes:
Annual maintenance
Performed NOT
OK OK

C  


L  
level
O  

Q  
R1  
strut fasteners
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK


Changing the brake fluid (version with DCT gearbox )

(perform every 2 years - replace more frequently if the  
U1 Replacing the brake-clutch system fluid
(version with mechanical gearbox )
 
(replace every 2 years - replace more frequently if the
V
V1  
 

a5  
a7  
a8  
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
b Lifting vehicle

c  
leaks

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI form Page 01 of 03
Model Updated on
May 2014
Chassis number: Date file opened:

Job order no.:
Notes:
Performed Performed R.O.L. N°

Description of inspection / operation:
OK NOT OK (if NOT OK)
1. - Condition of vehicle paintwork/film on Tonneau Cover. [ ] [ ]
2. - Connect battery and reset vehicle parameters. [ ] [ ]
3. - Check state of Park Lock system. [ ] [ ]
4. - Reset Park Lock system. [ ] [ ]
5. - “Battery Certification” procedure. [ ] [ ]
6. - Disable “Logistic Mode”. [ ] [ ]
7. - Test keys etc. [ ] [ ]
8. - Daytime running lights. [ ] [ ]
9. - Low beams. [ ] [ ]
10. - High beam lights. [ ] [ ]
11. - Stop lights. [ ] [ ]
12. - Turn indicators. [ ] [ ]
13. - Door lights, cabin light and luggage compartment light. [ ] [ ]
14. - Door, dashboard and glove compartment button lights. [ ] [ ]
15. - Horn. [ ] [ ]
16. - Power windows. [ ] [ ]
17. - Windscreen wipers and headlight washers. [ ] [ ]
18. - Steering wheel adjustment. [ ] [ ]
19. - Seats / Electric seats; memory storage function. [ ] [ ]
20. - Electric parking brake (EPB); manual/auto. [ ] [ ]
21. - HI-FI system / Navigation system (see point 37). [ ] [ ]
22. - Coolant level. [ ] [ ]
23- - Power steering fluid level. [ ] [ ]
24. - Brake fluid level. [ ] [ ]
25. - Windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid level. [ ] [ ]
26. - Tyre pressure / TPMS system calibration pressure. [ ] [ ]

Model Updated on
May 2014

27. - Tightness of wheel studs. [ ] [ ]
28. - Tow hook. [ ] [ ]
29. - *Complete cycles of opening/closing
[ ] [ ]
retractable hard top; (2).
30. - **Retractable hard top hydraulic system fluid level. [ ] [ ]
31. - *Perform SCAN IN and SCAN OUT on NCP. [ ] [ ]
32. - *AC system (static test). [ ] [ ]
33. - *Electric rear view mirrors. [ ] [ ]
34. - *RH or LH rear view mirror – with reverse selected. [ ] [ ]
35. - *Parking sensors. [ ] [ ]
36. - Cancel all DTCs from all ECUs. [ ] [ ]
37. - Navigation system: Set route. [ ] [ ]
38. - Test drive (20 min.). [ ] [ ]
39. - Stop&Start (functional test) (if applicable). [ ] [ ]
40. - “Manettino” dial. [ ] [ ]
41. - AC system (dynamic test). [ ] [ ]
42. - FOR USA/CND ONLY _ Perform SDARS channel preview
[ ] [ ]
test.
43. - Engine oil level (engine warm and switched off). [ ] [ ]
44. - Verify VIN from NCM parameters. [ ] [ ]
45. - Delete ECU errors. [ ] [ ]
46. - Enter warranty start date. [ ] [ ]
47. - Disconnect and reconnect the battery. [ ] [ ]
48. - Perform SCAN OUT procedure. [ ] [ ]
49. - Remove complete aerodynamic undertray. [ ] [ ]
50. - Check for water and/or oil leaks in vehicle underbody area. [ ] [ ]
51. - Engine compartment lines. [ ] [ ]
52. - Engine compartment wiring harness. [ ] [ ]
53. - Underbody lines. [ ] [ ]
54. - Exhaust System. [ ] [ ]
55. - Fuel tank. [ ] [ ]
56. - Visual inspection: Suspension components, etc. [ ] [ ]
(*) With engine running (**) Only in event of malfunction – see step 29.
Model Updated on
May 2014

57. - Visual inspection of earth connections:
[ ] [ ]
vehicle/engine and gearbox earth on chassis.
58. - Condition of brake pads and discs
[ ] [ ]
(DO NOT remove wheels).
59. - Condition of tyres and wheels. [ ] [ ]
60. - Refit flat undertray and the cosmetic engine
[ ] [ ]
compartment shields.
61. - Door and lid locks. [ ] [ ]
62. - Fuel filler flap emergency release. [ ] [ ]
63. - Condition of leather upholstery. [ ] [ ]
64. - Clean interior and wash car. [ ] [ ]
65. - Provided with vehicle: Toolkit, etc. [ ] [ ]
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

CCM Disc Wear Form Page 01 of 03
Model Updated
All Models October 2014
Model:
Customer:
Chassis number:
Date:
Km/mi:
Fault:
Whenever it is not possible to determine the real wear percentage value of CCM discs due to a fault or malfunction of
the instrument panel, or in the event of problems attributable to CCM brake discs, please follow the instructions
given herein and compile the form attached on pages 1, 2 and 3 completely.
This form must be attached to any ROL pertaining to the aforementioned problems.
DISC WEAR PERCENTAGE, if available (may be read from instrument panel parameters)
FRONT
WEAR
REAR
WEAR
DISC WEAR PERCENTAGE, where values are not available

(due to instrument panel defects or malfunction):
ENTER THE MOST RECENT KNOWN VALUE.
FRONT
WEAR
REAR
WEAR
VEHICLE USAGE (ask customer)
URBAN ROADS
(%)
MOTORWAY
(%)
SPORTS/
TRACK USE
(%)
NUMBER OF TIMES PADS REPLACED TO DATE
FRONT
REAR
Model Updated
NUMBER OF PREVIOUS DISC REPLACEMENTS with relative reason/s

(wear, failure, accident, damage)
FRONT
REAR
VISUAL STATE OF DISCS (smooth, rough, wrinkled, scored).

Take photos of the braking surfaces of the discs showing as much detail as possible, and also
specifying the position of the disc on the car (RH front, LH rear etc.), and attach them to the
form.
FRONT
REAR
ANY ECU ERRORS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRAKE SWITCH (specify below)
The following image (Fig. 1), with an example of a front CCM disc from the 458 Italia, indicates the locations of
the disc identification information required when compiling the form on page 3.
(A) Ferrari disc part number;

(B) New disc weight and minimum permissible weight;
(C) Brembo serial number.
Model Updated
Compile the following table, taking photos showing each of the following values, and specifying the relative
disc (front RT, rear LH etc.), and attach the photos to this form.
Ferrari disc part Brembo serial Minimum disc Weight after disc
New disc weight
number number weight cleaning *
FRONT
LH
FRONT
RH
REAR
LH
REAR
RH
* Each disc must be cleaned before weighing. See the chapter “Brake discs” in the relative Workshop Manual
for the vehicle concerned for the correct procedure for cleaning discs. Discs must be weighed using a scale
capable providing a reading in single grams.
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
Company stamp
Full signature

Page 01 of 02
Model Updated on
December 2013
Chassis number:
Date:
Km/mi:
Fault:
The fuel tank must be full and all fluids must be filled to the correct levels. There must be no occupants
seated in the vehicle and no luggage in the luggage compartment.
GROUND CLEARANCE OF VEHICLE AT MASTERPOINT

REQUIRED VALUE MEASURED VALUE AFTER PROCEDURE
FRONT 155.9 ± 4.5 mm
REAR 158 ± 4.5 mm
CAMBER
-0.75° ± 0.2°
FRONT
(-0°45' ± 12')
-1.08° ± 0.2°
REAR
(-1°5' ± 12')
CASTER
4.4° ± 0.4°
FRONT
(4°24' ± 24')
2.28° ± 0.4°
REAR
(2°17' ± 24')
Page 02 of 02
Model Updated on
December 2013
TOE-IN
FRONT
-1.06 ± 0.5 mm
TOTAL
FRONT ON
-0.53 ± 0.25 mm
WHEEL
REAR TOTAL 2.56 ± 0.5 mm
REAR ON
1.28 ± 0.25 mm
WHEEL
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare Parts Page 01 of 02
Catalogue to identify vehicles not affected by modification)
Model Updated on
December 2013
Chassis number:
Date:
Km/mi:
Fault:

FRONT 154.7 ± 4.5 mm
REAR 147.1 ± 4.5 mm
CAMBER
-0.78° ± 0.2°
FRONT
(-0°47' ± 12')
-1.2° ± 0.2°
REAR
(-1°12' ± 12')
CASTER
4.4° ± 0.4°
FRONT
(4°24' ± 24')
2.3° ± 0.4°
REAR
(2°18' ± 24')
FROM Assembly No. 103179 (consult the Spare Parts Page 02 of 02
Catalogue to identify vehicles not affected by modification)
Model Updated on
December 2013
TOE-IN
FRONT
-1.06 ± 0.5 mm
TOTAL
FRONT ON
-0.53 ± 0.25 mm
WHEEL
REAR ON
1.28 ± 0.25 mm
WHEEL
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

Page 01 of 02
- Special Handling Pack
Model Updated on
December 2013
Chassis number:
Date:
Km/mi:
Fault:

FRONT 154.7 ± 4.5 mm
REAR 147.1 ± 4.5 mm
CAMBER
-0.78° ± 0.2°
FRONT
(-0°47' ± 12')
-1.2° ± 0.2°
REAR
(-1°12' ± 12')
CASTER
4.4° ± 0.4°
FRONT
(4°24' ± 24')
2.3° ± 0.4°
REAR
(2°18' ± 24')
Page 02 of 02
- Special Handling Pack
Model Updated on
December 2013
TOE-IN
FRONT
-1.44 ± 0.5 mm
TOTAL
FRONT ON
-0.72 ± 0.25 mm
WHEEL
REAR ON
1.28 ± 0.25 mm
WHEEL
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature

California

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

California

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Welcome to The California Workshop Manual at Ferrari

Publication Date: 31/12/2018

Download workshop Manual as PDF

Consulting the manual

Indicates reference value

Right hand and/or left hand

Anti Blockier System

Antriebs Schlupf Regelung

Controller Area Network

Control Stability Traction

Dual Clutch Transmission

Electronic Brake Force Distribution

Electronic Control Unit

Traction control integrated with Hy-Kers system.

Electric Parking Brake

Electronic Stability Control

Ferrari Brake Prefill

High Voltage Battery

Hybrid Power Unit

Power Transfer Unit

Retractable Hard Top

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

Vehicle Dynamic Control

Using tools and original spare parts

Wear safety footwear at all times.

Exhaust system and engine

Electric cooling fans

A - Assembly number label

A - Assembly number label

B - Punched chassis number

Engine type and number

C - Punched engine type and number

Gearbox type and number

E - Gearbox type and number plate

K - VIN label (Vehicle Identification Number)

F - Tyre pressure monitoring system identifier label

Antifreeze and expansion tank opening instructions

M - Emissions control data label

N - 'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' label

O - Airbag maintenance label

P - Airbag warning label

Luggage placement in luggage compartment

R - Label with instructions for placing luggage in luggage compartment

Luggage placement in luggage compartment

S - Labels with instructions for placing luggage in luggage compartment

Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic clutch system fluid

Engine oil level check and radiator with antifreeze

U - Engine oil level check label

Safety standard compliance and mercury warning label

X - Mercury warning label

Stop&Start system warning label (optional)

W - Stop&Start system warning labels (optional)

0 to 62 mph Top speed

Consumption (for vehicles with DCT gearbox)

Urban cycle 13 mpg

Dimensions and weights

Wheelbase 105.12 in.

Cooling circuit (1)

Windscreen washer/headlight washer system

- Fluids and lubricants table [Download]

- Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI [Download]

- Scheduled maintenance plan - Annual [Download]

- Scheduled maintenance plan - 20,000 km (12,500 miles) [Download]

- Scheduled maintenance plan - 40,000 km (25,000 miles) [Download]